w221 2008 s550 S5504matic s600 S63amg S65amg

Sommer\ Corporate\ Media\ AG
Bild in der Größe

215x70 mm einfügen
Operator’s Manual
S-Class
S-Class
2 2 1 5 8 4 2 2 8 2
Order No. 6515 2244 13 Part No. 221 584 22 82 USA Edition A 2008
S 550
S 550 4MATIC
S 600
S 63 AMG
S 65 AMG
Our company and staff congratulate you 앫 Please read this manual carefully, then
on the purchase of your new return it to your vehicle where it will be
Mercedes-Benz. handy for your reference.
Your selection of our product is a demon- 앫 Please follow the recommendations
stration of your trust in our company contained in this manual. They are de-
name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your designed to acquaint you with the opera-
sire to own an automobile that will be as tion of your Mercedes-Benz.
easy as possible to operate and provide
앫 Please pay attention to the warnings
years of service.
and cautions contained in this manual.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the ef- They are designed to help improve the
forts of many skilled engineers and crafts- safety of the vehicle operator and oc-
men. To help assure your driving pleasure, cupants.
and also the safety of you and your passen-
We extend our best wishes for many miles
gers, we ask you to make a small invest-
of safe, pleasurable driving.
ment of time:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A DaimlerChrysler Company
Contents
Override switch for rear passenger

Introduction ....................................... 13 At a glance .......................................... 23 compartment .................................. 63
Product information............................. 13 Exterior view......................................... 24 Panic alarm .......................................... 65
Operator’s Manual ............................... 14 Cockpit................................................. 26 Activating........................................ 65
Service and warranty information .. 14 Instrument cluster ................................ 28 Deactivating.................................... 65
Important notice for California Control systems ................................... 30 Driving safety systems ......................... 66
retail buyers and lessees of Center console ..................................... 32 ABS................................................. 66
Mercedes-Benz automobiles .......... 15 Upper part ...................................... 32 Adaptive Brake ............................... 67
Maintenance .................................. 15 Overhead control panel ........................ 33 Adaptive Brake Lights
Roadside Assistance ...................... 16 Driver’s door control panel ................... 34 (S 600/S 65 AMG and USA only) ... 68
Change of address or ownership.... 16 Rear door control panel........................ 35 BAS................................................. 68
Operating your vehicle outside the Storage compartments......................... 36 BAS Plus* ....................................... 69
USA or Canada............................... 16 Rear passenger compartment .............. 38 EBP ................................................. 71
Where to find it.................................... 17 ESP® ............................................... 71
Symbols............................................... 18 Four wheel electronic traction
Operating safety .................................. 19 Safety and Security............................ 39 system (4MATIC) with the ESP® ..... 75
Proper use of the vehicle ............... 19 Occupant safety ................................... 40 PRE-SAFE® Brake* (vehicles with
Problems with your vehicle.................. 20 Air bags........................................... 42 DISTRONIC Plus* only) ................... 76
Reporting safety defects...................... 21 Occupant Classification System ..... 47 Anti-theft systems ................................ 81
Reporting safety defects ................ 21 Seat belts........................................ 52 Immobilizer ..................................... 81
Vehicle data recording......................... 22 Active head restraints..................... 55 Anti-theft alarm system .................. 81
Information regarding electronic Preventive occupant safety Canceling the alarm........................ 82
recording devices........................... 22 (PRE-SAFE®).................................... 56
Children in the vehicle .................... 57
Contents
Channel update............................ 111 Notes about handling DVDs ......... 125

Control systems ................................ 83 Calling SIRIUS Service Center...... 111 Functional limitations................... 125
COMAND operating safety................... 84 COMAND audio CD/audio DVD/MP3 112 Inserting or ejecting DVDs ........... 125
COMAND introduction ......................... 85 Safety precautions ....................... 112 Submenu overview of
Availability of functions while the Notes about MP3 mode ............... 112 video DVD .................................... 126
vehicle is in motion ........................ 85 Notes about audio DVD operation 114 Switching to video DVD mode...... 126
Switching COMAND on or off ......... 85 Notes about CDs/DVDs............... 114 Hiding/showing the
COMAND components ................... 85 Notes about handling CDs/DVDs 115 DVD control menu ....................... 127
Operating COMAND ....................... 90 Inserting CDs and DVDs............... 115 Hiding/showing the menu system 127
Main menus of COMAND ............... 96 Inserting a PCMCIA card .............. 117 Fast forward/rewind.................... 127
COMAND FM/AM radio..................... 100 Ejecting CDs and DVDs................ 117 Selecting the DVD medium .......... 127
Submenu overview ....................... 100 Ejecting a PCMCIA card ............... 118 Stop playback .............................. 128
Switching to radio mode .............. 101 Submenu overview....................... 119 Pause playback ............................ 128
Switching wavebands................... 101 Switching to audio CD, audio DVD Selecting scene/chapter ............. 128
Selecting stations/channels ........ 101 or MP3 mode ............................... 120 Selecting film/track..................... 128
Saving stations............................. 103 Stop function ............................... 121 Screen settings ............................ 128
Station name display.................... 104 Pause function ............................. 121 DVD menu.................................... 129
COMAND satellite radio* (USA only) . 105 Selecting CD/DVD/MP3 media... 121 Stopping the film or skipping to
Submenu overview ....................... 105 Selecting a track .......................... 122 the beginning/end of a scene...... 130
Introduction to Satellite radio....... 106 Fast forward/rewind .................... 122 Switching to the next highest DVD
Switching to satellite radio........... 106 Selecting a folder ......................... 122 menu level ................................... 130
Main satellite radio menu............. 107 Setting the audio format .............. 123 Back to the film............................ 130
Selecting program category ......... 108 Playback options.......................... 123 Setting the language and
Tuning in channels ....................... 108 COMAND video DVD (USA only) ........ 124 audio format ................................ 131
Saving channels ........................... 110 Automatic picture fade-out .......... 124 Subtitles and camera angles........ 131
Show program info ....................... 111 Notes about video DVD operation 124 Interactive content....................... 131
Contents
COMAND telephone* ........................ 132 COMAND navigation (introduction) .... 159 COMAND navigation system
Safety precautions ....................... 132 Map software................................ 159 (Point of interest entry) ...................... 196
General notes............................... 132 Updating the map software........... 159 Entering a POI in the
Switching telephone on or off ...... 134 Updating process.......................... 159 surrounding area .......................... 196
Activating telephone mode .......... 134 Loading a DVD into the Entering a POI in the surroundings
Telephone keypad ........................ 134 DVD changer................................. 160 of a given town ............................. 196
“911” emergency call................... 135 Updating ....................................... 160 Entering a POI in a
Entering the PIN........................... 136 General notes ............................... 163 different region ............................. 196
Entering the PIN2......................... 137 Input restrictions .......................... 164 Designating a POI category........... 197
Entering the PUK/PUK2............... 137 Navigation system Entering a POI from the map ........ 203
Entering the unlock code ............. 137 menu overview.............................. 165 COMAND navigation system
Telephone submenu overview ...... 138 Calling up the map display and (real-time traffic) (USA only)............... 204
Main telephone menu .................. 139 switching to navigation mode ....... 166 Real-time traffic notifications
Mailbox ........................................ 139 Basic settings ............................... 168 in the map .................................... 204
Call lists ....................................... 140 COMAND navigation system Displaying real-time traffic reports 205
Incoming call................................ 142 (entering a destination) ...................... 172 Example message ......................... 206
Making an outgoing call ............... 143 Entering a destination by the COMAND navigation system
Functions during a single-call address ......................................... 172 (route guidance) ................................. 207
connection ................................... 145 Entering a destination from the Route guidance............................. 207
Transferring a call ........................ 146 destination memory ...................... 191 Examples of displays and
COMAND phone book.................. 147 Entering a destination from the announcements for a
SMS messages list of last destinations.................. 193 driving maneuver .......................... 207
(Short Message Service) .............. 155 Entering a destination Example of a display without
COMAND navigation.......................... 158 from the map ................................ 193 driving maneuvers ........................ 209
Safety precautions ....................... 158 Entering a stopover....................... 194 Destination or destination area
reached ........................................ 209
Contents
Partially digitized areas ................ 210 Deleting one of the Importing data from external
Off-road and off-map .................... 211 last destinations........................... 223 Bluetooth® devices ...................... 234
Navigation announcements.......... 213 COMAND address book..................... 224 COMAND system settings ................. 235
COMAND navigation system General notes............................... 224 System settings menu overview... 235
(during route guidance)...................... 214 Address book menu overview ...... 224 Display settings ........................... 235
Cancel route guidance ................. 214 Calling up the address book......... 224 Time settings ............................... 235
Continuing cancelled Selecting an entry in the main Voice Control* settings................ 237
route guidance ............................. 214 address book display ................... 225 Setting the system language........ 238
Route browser.............................. 214 Creating a new Assigning the favorite button ....... 238
Displaying route information ........ 215 address book entry ...................... 225 Bluetooth® settings...................... 239
Detour function ............................ 216 Deleting an entry.......................... 226 Reset ........................................... 241
COMAND navigation system Searching for an COMAND vehicle menu ..................... 242
(destination memory)......................... 217 address book entry ...................... 226 Setting night security illumination 242
Saving a destination in the Displaying a complete Locator lighting on/off................. 243
destination memory ..................... 217 address book entry ...................... 228 Exterior mirror convenience
Deleting a destination from the Displaying of a complete phone settings ........................................ 244
destination memory ..................... 218 book entry in the mobile phone ... 229 Automatic locking on/off............. 245
Own address ................................ 219 Changing an entry ........................ 229 Activating easy-entry/exit feature 246
COMAND navigation system Calling a number saved in Setting interior ambient lighting .. 247
(last destinations) .............................. 223 an entry........................................ 231 Setting interior lighting delayed
Saving a destination permanently Starting route guidance to switch-off ..................................... 248
in the destination memory ........... 223 an entry........................................ 231 Extending or retracting
Saving the vehicle position in the Voice entries ................................ 232 rear window sunshade ................. 249
list of last destinations ................. 223 Saving a phone book entry from Trunk opening-height restriction*
Saving the crosshair position in mobile phone in the COMAND on/off .......................................... 249
the list of last destinations ........... 223 address book ............................... 233
Contents
COMAND automatic climate control.. 251 Voice Control*.................................... 284 Operation with address book
Setting temperature..................... 252 Operating safety ........................... 284 open (local)................................... 306
Adjusting air distribution.............. 253 Voice Control* introduction ............... 285 Operating and using address book 306
Adjusting air volume .................... 253 Spelling ......................................... 286 Available commands with the
Central climate control menu via Command types............................ 286 address book not open ................. 307
COMAND ..................................... 254 Active System ............................... 286 Available commands with the
Operating rear climate control* Controls ........................................ 287 address book open ....................... 308
from the front............................... 257 Symbols ........................................ 288 Voice Control* radio .......................... 309
COMAND seats.................................. 259 Voice Control* telephone................... 289 Radio operation ............................ 309
Operating seats via COMAND ...... 259 Telephone operation ..................... 289 Radio commands .......................... 309
Lumbar support............................ 260 Telephone commands................... 290 Voice Control* CD/
Multicontour seats*, front............ 260 Voice Control* navigation .................. 296 DVD changer/MP3............................. 313
Drive-dynamic Important notes ............................ 296 Operation...................................... 313
multicontour seats*, front............ 262 Navigation operation..................... 297 Commands ................................... 313
Instrument cluster control system..... 264 Navigation commands .................. 297 Voice Control* command list ............. 315
Multifunction display.................... 264 Dialog for entering a Command list ............................... 315
Multifunction steering wheel........ 265 complete address ......................... 298 Voice Control* troubleshooting.......... 327
Menus .......................................... 266 Commands for entering parts of Help function ................................ 327
Trip menu..................................... 268 an address .................................... 303 Help commands............................ 327
Navi menu.................................... 269 Voice Control* address book ............. 306 Help window ................................. 327
Audio menu.................................. 271 COMAND address book Entering digits and spelling........... 327
AMG menu ................................... 273 overview ....................................... 306 What to do if ... ............................. 328
Telephone* menu......................... 276 Operation with address book not Voice Control* individualization ......... 330
Assistance* menu........................ 279 open (global) ................................. 306
Service menu ............................... 280
Settings menu.............................. 281
Contents
Steering wheel................................... 359 Door entry lamps ......................... 379

Controls in detail ............................. 331 Steering wheel adjustment .......... 359 Courtesy lighting.......................... 380
Locking and unlocking ....................... 332 Heated steering wheel* ............... 360 Trunk lamp................................... 380
SmartKey ..................................... 332 Mirrors............................................... 361 Windshield wipers ............................. 381
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*....... 335 Interior rear view mirror ............... 361 Switching on/off
Checking batteries in the Exterior rear view mirrors............. 361 windshield wipers ........................ 381
SmartKey or SmartKey with Power folding exterior Intermittent wiping ...................... 382
KEYLESS-GO*............................... 340 rear view mirrors.......................... 362 Single wipe .................................. 382
Loss of the SmartKey or Auto-dimming rear view mirrors... 363 Wiping with windshield washer
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*....... 340 Activating exterior rear view fluid.............................................. 382
Opening doors from the inside ..... 341 mirror parking position................. 364 Power windows ................................. 383
Power closing assist for doors Memory function ............................... 365 Opening and closing
and trunk lid ................................. 342 Storing positions into memory ..... 366 power windows ............................ 383
Automatic central locking ............ 342 Recalling positions from memory. 366 Rear side window sunshades* ..... 385
Locking and unlocking from Storing exterior rear view mirror Summer opening feature ............. 385
the inside ..................................... 343 parking position ........................... 367 Convenience closing feature........ 386
Starter switch positions ..................... 344 Fastening the seat belts .................... 368 Driving and parking ........................... 389
SmartKey ..................................... 344 Proper use of seat belts ............... 370 Starting the engine ...................... 389
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*....... 345 Seat belt height adjustment......... 370 Driving off .................................... 392
Seats.................................................. 347 Lighting.............................................. 371 Turn signals.................................. 393
Seat adjustment........................... 347 Exterior lamp switch..................... 371 Problems while driving ................. 393
Seat heating* ............................... 351 Switching on high beams ............. 375 Parking......................................... 394
Seat ventilation* .......................... 352 Headlamp cleaning system .......... 375 Turning off the engine .................. 397
Head restraints............................. 353 Corner-illuminating lamps ............ 376 Releasing seat belts..................... 398
Multicontour seats*, rear ............. 356 Hazard warning flasher ................ 377 Automatic transmission..................... 399
Easy-entry/exit feature ................ 357 Interior lighting............................. 378 Gear selector lever....................... 399
Contents
Shifting procedure ....................... 402 Air vents ............................................. 466 Opening and closing
Transmission positions................. 403 Opening and closing air vents....... 468 power tilt/sliding sunroof ............. 486
Driving tips................................... 406 Ventilated storage compartment .. 468 Synchronizing ............................... 488
Gear ranges ................................. 408 Automatic climate control .................. 469 Panorama roof with power
Automatic shift program .............. 409 Deactivating climate control tilt/sliding panel*............................... 489
Steering wheel gearshift control .. 411 system .......................................... 471 Roller sunblinds ............................ 489
Manual shift program Operating climate control system Opening and closing panorama
(S 63 AMG and S 65 AMG only) ... 413 in automatic mode ........................ 471 roof with power tilt/sliding panel . 490
Emergency operation Setting temperature...................... 472 Synchronizing ............................... 492
(Limp-Home Mode) ...................... 416 Adjusting air volume ..................... 472 Loading and storing............................ 493
Instrument cluster ............................. 417 Front defroster.............................. 472 Roof rack* .................................... 493
Adjusting instrument cluster Rear window defroster.................. 473 Loading instructions ..................... 493
display illumination ...................... 417 Maximum cooling MAXCOOL Storage compartments ................. 494
Coolant temperature gauge ......... 417 (USA only)..................................... 474 Cup holders .................................. 498
Tachometer.................................. 418 Air recirculation mode .................. 474 Trunk ............................................ 500
Outside temperature indicator ..... 418 Residual engine heat and Useful features................................... 502
Fuel gauge ................................... 418 ventilation ..................................... 476 Sun visors ..................................... 502
Driving systems ................................. 419 Rear passenger compartment Vanity mirror in rear...................... 502
Cruise control .............................. 419 climate control*............................ 477 Rear window sunshade ................. 503
DISTRONIC Plus* ......................... 424 Trunk .................................................. 479 Ashtrays........................................ 503
Airmatic (S 550 only) ................... 440 Opening trunk ............................... 479 Cigarette lighters .......................... 504
Active Body Control (ABC)*.......... 442 Closing trunk ................................ 480 Power outlet ................................. 506
Parktronic system* ...................... 444 Trunk emergency release.............. 484 Floormats* ................................... 506
Park Assist* ................................. 448 Valet locking ................................. 484 Telephone* ................................... 507
Dynamic Rear View Monitor*....... 453 Power tilt/sliding sunroof................... 486 Tele Aid......................................... 510
Night View Assist* ....................... 461 Garage door opener...................... 518
Contents
Infrared reflecting windshield....... 524 At the gas station .............................. 538 Maximum tire inflation pressure .. 573
Refueling ...................................... 538 Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Check regularly and before Standards (U.S. vehicles)............. 574
Operation ......................................... 525 a long trip..................................... 540 Tire ply material ........................... 575
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ......... 526 Engine compartment ......................... 541 Tire and loading terminology........ 576
Driving instructions............................ 527 Hood ............................................ 541 Rotating tires ............................... 578
Drive sensibly – save fuel ............. 527 Engine oil ..................................... 543 Winter driving .................................... 580
Drinking and driving ..................... 527 Transmission fluid level................ 546 Winter tires .................................. 580
Pedals .......................................... 527 Active Body Control* (ABC*) Snow chains................................. 581
Power assistance ......................... 527 fluid level...................................... 547 Maintenance...................................... 582
Brakes .......................................... 528 Coolant level ................................ 547 Maintenance service indicator
Driving off..................................... 530 Windshield washer system and message ...................................... 582
Parking ......................................... 530 headlamp cleaning system........... 548 Calling up the maintenance
Tires ............................................. 531 Tires and wheels................................ 550 service indicator display .............. 583
Hydroplaning ................................ 531 Important guidelines .................... 550 Resetting the maintenance
Tire traction.................................. 532 Tire care and maintenance........... 551 service indicator .......................... 584
Tire speed rating .......................... 532 Direction of rotation..................... 553 Vehicle care....................................... 585
Winter driving instructions ........... 533 Loading the vehicle ...................... 553 Cleaning and care of vehicle ........ 585
Standing water ............................. 534 Recommended tire
Passenger compartment .............. 535 inflation pressure ......................... 558
Driving abroad.............................. 535 Checking tire inflation pressure ... 560 Practical hints ................................. 597
Control and operation of radio Tire labeling.................................. 567 What to do if …? ................................ 598
transmitters.................................. 535 Load identification ....................... 571 Lamps in instrument cluster ........ 598
Catalytic converter ....................... 536 DOT, Tire Identification Number Air bag off indicator lamp............. 610
Emission control........................... 536 (TIN) ............................................. 572 Vehicle status messages in the
Coolant temperature .................... 537 Maximum tire load ....................... 573 multifunction display.................... 612
Contents
Where will I find ...? ........................... 668 Batteries............................................. 692 S 600 and S 65 AMG .................... 714
First aid kit ................................... 668 Disconnecting starter battery ....... 694 Engine ................................................ 715
Vehicle jack, vehicle tool kit, Removing starter battery .............. 695 Rims and tires .................................... 718
luggage bowl, Minispare wheel .... 668 Charging battery ........................... 695 Same size tires ............................. 719
Unlocking/locking in an emergency.. 671 Reinstalling starter battery ........... 696 Mixed size tires............................. 720
Unlocking the vehicle................... 671 Reconnecting starter battery ........ 696 Spare wheel.................................. 721
Locking the vehicle ...................... 672 Jump starting...................................... 697 Electrical system ................................ 722
Mechanically releasing the Towing the vehicle.............................. 700 Main dimensions and weights ............ 723
electronic parking brake .............. 673 Installing towing eye bolt .............. 703 Main dimensions........................... 723
Opening/closing in an emergency..... 674 Fuses.................................................. 704 Weights......................................... 723
Power tilt/sliding sunroof or Fuse boxes in engine Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc........... 724
panorama roof with compartment ................................ 705 Capacities..................................... 724
power tilt/sliding panel*.............. 674 Fuse boxes in passenger Engine oils .................................... 728
Resetting activated head restraints ... 675 compartment ................................ 706 Engine oil additives....................... 728
Replacing SmartKey batteries ........... 676 Emergency engine shut-down ....... 707 Air conditioning refrigerant........... 728
Replacing bulbs ................................. 678 Brake fluid .................................... 728
Bulbs ............................................ 679 Premium unleaded gasoline.......... 729
Replacing bulbs for front lamps ... 680 Technical data .................................. 709 Fuel requirements......................... 729
Replacing wiper blades...................... 684 Parts service....................................... 710 Gasoline additives......................... 730
Placing wiper arms in vertical Warranty coverage ............................. 711 Coolants ....................................... 730
position ........................................ 684 Loss of Service and Warranty Windshield washer system and
Removing wiper blades ................ 685 Information Booklet ...................... 711 headlamp cleaning system ........... 733
Installing wiper blades ................. 685 Identification labels ............................ 712
Flat tire .............................................. 686 Layout of poly-V-belt drive.................. 714
Preparing the vehicle ................... 686 S 550 ............................................ 714 Index ................................................. 735
Mounting the spare wheel............ 686 S 63 AMG ..................................... 714
Introduction
Product information
왔 Product information
Please observe the following in your own We are unable to make an assessment for Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts as well as
best interest: other products and therefore cannot be conversion parts and accessories ap-
held responsible for them, even if in indi- proved by us are available at any autho-
We recommend using Genuine
vidual cases an official approval or authori- rized Mercedes-Benz Center where you will
Mercedes-Benz Parts as well as conversion
zation by governmental or other agencies receive comprehensive information, also
parts and accessories explicitly approved
should exist. Use of such parts and acces- on permissible technical modifications,
by us for your vehicle model.
sories could adversely affect the safety, and where proper installation will be per-
We have tested these parts to determine performance or reliability of your vehicle. formed.
their reliability, safety and special suitabili- Please do not use them.
ty for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
13
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
This Operator’s Manual contains a great We continuously strive to improve our Service and warranty information
deal of useful information. We urge you to product, and ask for your understanding
read it carefully and familiarize yourself that we reserve the right to make changes The Service and Warranty Information
with the vehicle before driving. in design and equipment. Therefore, infor- Booklet contains detailed information
mation, illustrations and descriptions in about the warranties covering your
For your own safety and longer service life
this Operator’s Manual might differ from Mercedes-Benz, including:
of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the in-
your vehicle. 앫 New Vehicle Limited Warranty
structions and warnings contained in this
manual. Ignoring them could result in dam- Optional equipment is also described in 앫 Emission System Warranty
age to the vehicle or personal injury to you this manual, including operating instruc-
or others. Vehicle damage caused by fail- tions wherever necessary. Since they are 앫 Emission Performance Warranty
ure to follow instructions is not covered by special-order items, the descriptions and 앫 California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. illustrations herein may vary slightly from Vermont Emission Control System
the actual equipment of your vehicle. Warranty
Your vehicle may have some or all of the
equipment described in this manual. If there are any equipment details that are (California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Therefore, you may find explanations for not shown or described in this Operator’s Vermont only)
optional equipment not installed in your Manual, any authorized Mercedes-Benz 앫 State Warranty Enforcement Laws
vehicle. If you have any questions about Center will be glad to inform you of correct (Lemon Laws)
the operation of any equipment, any autho- care and operating procedures. The Oper-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad to ator’s Manual and Maintenance Booklet
demonstrate the proper procedures. are important documents and should be
kept with the vehicle.
14
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Important notice for California retail (1) the same substantial defect or mal- Maintenance
buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz function results in a condition that is
automobiles likely to cause death or serious bodily The Maintenance Booklet describes all the
injury if the vehicle is driven, that de- necessary maintenance work which should
Under California law you may be entitled to fect or malfunction has been subject to be performed at regular intervals.
a replacement of your vehicle or a refund repair two or more times, and you have Always have the Maintenance Booklet with
of the purchase price or lease price, if directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA, you when you take the vehicle to an autho-
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its au- LLC in writing of the need for its repair, rized Mercedes-Benz Center for service.
thorized repair or service facilities fail to fix The service advisor will record each ser-
(2) the same substantial defect or mal-
one or more substantial defects or mal- vice in the booklet for you.
function of a less serious nature than
functions in the vehicle that are covered by
category (1) has been subject to repair
its express warranty after a reasonable
four or more times and you have direct-
number of repair attempts. During the pe-
ly notified us in writing of the need for
riod of 18 months from original delivery of
its repair, or
the vehicle or the accumulation of
18000 miles (approximately 29000 km) (3) the vehicle is out of service by reason
on the odometer of the vehicle, whichever of repair of the same or different sub-
occurs first, a reasonable number of repair stantial defects or malfunctions for a
attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or cumulative total of more than
lessee if one or more of the following oc- 30 calendar days.
curs: Written notification should not be sent to a
dealer, it should be addressed to:
Customer Assistance Center
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
15
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Roadside Assistance Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It 앫 unleaded gasoline for vehicles with cat-
is in your own interest that we can contact alytic converters may not be available;
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance you should the need arise. the use of leaded fuels will damage the
Program provides factory trained technical catalysts,
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all
help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to
literature with the vehicle to make it avail- 앫 gasoline may have a considerably low-
the toll-free Roadside Assistance number
able to the next operator. er octane rating, and improper fuel can
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) cause engine damage.
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used Certain Mercedes-Benz models are avail-
will be answered by Mercedes-Benz Car” found in the Service and Warranty In- able for delivery in Europe under our Euro-
Customer Assistance Representatives formation Booklet, or call the pean Delivery Program. For details, consult
24 hours a day, 365 days a year. Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen- an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
For additional information refer to the ter (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, write to:
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro- or Customer Service (in Canada) at In the USA:
gram brochure in your vehicle literature 1-800-387-0100.
portfolio.
Operating your vehicle outside the USA European Delivery Department
or Canada One Mercedes Drive
Change of address or ownership
If you change your address, be sure to If you plan to operate your vehicle in for- In Canada:
send in the “Change of Address Notice” eign countries, please be aware that:
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
found in the Service and Warranty Informa- 앫 service facilities or replacement parts European Delivery Department
tion Booklet, or simply call the may not be readily available, 98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Center (in the USA) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer
16
Introduction
Where to find it
왔 Where to find it
This Operator’s Manual is designed to pro-
vide comprehensive support information Controls in detail Technical data
for you, the vehicle operator. Each section Here you will find detailed information All important technical data for your vehi-
has its own reference color. about the equipment installed in your vehicle can be found in this section.
cle. This section also describes technical
innovations.
At a glance Indexes
Here you will find an overview of all the The table of contents and the index are de-
controls that can be operated in the vehi- Operation
signed to help you find information quickly
cle’s interior. Here you will find all the information you and easily.
need for the proper operation of your vehi-
The following publications are part of your
cle.
Safety and Security vehicle documentation:
Here you will find descriptions of the safety 앫 this Operator’s Manual
and security features of your vehicle. Practical hints 앫 the Maintenance Booklet
This section provides fast assistance for Separate operating instructions will be
dealing with problems you may encounter. provided as required depending on the
Control systems
equipment options installed in your vehi-
Here you will find detailed information cle.
about the operation of the COMAND sys-
tem, instrument cluster control system
and Voice Control*.
17
Introduction
Symbols
Trademarks: The following symbols are found in this 왘 This symbol points to instructions for
앫 Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Operator’s Manual: you to follow.
of Bluetooth SIG Inc. * Optional equipment is identified 왘 A number of these symbols appearing
® ® with an asterisk. Since standard in succession indicates a multiple-step
앫 ESP and PRE-SAFE are registered
equipment varies between models, procedure.
trademark of DaimlerChrysler.
the descriptions and illustrations in
앫 HomeLink® is a registered trademark 컄 page This symbol tells you where to
this manual may differ slightly from
of Prince, a Johnson Controls look for further information on a
the actual equipment of your vehi-
Company. topic.
cle.
컄컄 This continuation symbol marks
앫 LOGIC7® is a registered trademark of
a warning which is continued on
Harman International Industries, Incor- Warning! G the next page.
porated.
Warning notices draw your attention to haz- 컄컄 This continuation symbol marks
앫 SIRIUS and related marks are trade-
ards that may endanger your health or life, a procedure which is continued
marks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.
or the health or life of others. on the next page.
-> This symbol is used to indicate
! Highlights hazards that may result in dam- cross-references to term defini-
age to your vehicle. tions.
i Helpful hints or further information you may Display Words appearing in the multi-
find useful. function display and COMAND
display are printed in the type
shown here.
18
Introduction
Operating safety
왔 Operating safety
Proper use of the vehicle
Warning! G Warning! G
Proper use of the vehicle requires that you
Work improperly carried out on electronic Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody are familiar with the following information
components and associated software could or tires/wheels, for example when running and rules:
cause them to cease functioning. Because over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole,
앫 the safety precautions in this manual
the vehicle’s electronic components are in- may cause serious damage and impair the
terconnected, any modifications made may operating safety of your vehicle. If you feel a 앫 the “Technical data” section in this
produce an undesired effect on other sys- sudden significant vibration or ride distur- manual
tems. Electronic malfunctions could seri- bance, or you suspect that damage to your 앫 traffic rules and regulations
ously impair the operating safety of your vehicle has occurred, you should turn on
vehicle. your hazard warning flashers, carefully slow 앫 motor vehicle laws and safety stan-
down, and drive with caution to an area dards
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ter for repairs or modifications to electronic which is a safe distance from the road.
components. Inspect the vehicle underbody and Warning! G
Other improper work or modifications on the tires/wheels for possible damage. If the ve-
hicle appears unsafe, have it towed to the Various warning labels are attached to your
vehicle could also have a negative impact on
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center vehicle. These warning labels are intended
the operating safety of the vehicle.
or other qualified maintenance or repair fa- to make you and others aware of various
Some safety systems only function while the cility for further inspection or repairs. risks. You should not remove any of these
engine is running. You should therefore nev- warning labels unless explicitly instructed to
er turn off the engine while driving. do so by information on the label itself. Re-
moval of any of these labels may cause you
and others to be unaware of certain risks
which may result in an accident and/or per-
sonal injury.
19
Introduction
Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to
immediately contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is
not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center management, or if necessary contact us
at one of the following addresses:
In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
One Mercedes Drive
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario, M4G 4C9
20
Introduction
Reporting safety defects
왔 Reporting safety defects
For the USA only:
The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
“National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966.”
Reporting safety defects
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer,
or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
21
Introduction
Vehicle data recording
Information regarding electronic

recording devices
(Including notice pursuant to California Code § 9951)

Please note that your vehicle is equipped with devices that can record vehicle systems data and, if equipped with the Tele Aid system,
may transmit some data in certain accidents.
This information helps, for example, to diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and to continuously improve vehicle safety.
DaimlerChrysler may access the information and share it with others
앫 for safety research or vehicle diagnosis purposes
앫 with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee
앫 in response to an official request by law enforcement or other government agency
앫 for use in dispute resolution involving DaimlerChrysler, its affiliates or sales/service organization and/or
앫 as otherwise required or permitted by law.
Please check the Tele Aid subscription service agreement for details regarding the information that may be recorded or transmitted
via that system.
22
At a glance
Exterior view
Cockpit
Instrument cluster
Control systems
Center console
Overhead control panel
Driver’s door control panel
Rear door control panel
Storage compartments
Rear passenger compartment
23
At a glance
Exterior view
24
At a glance
Exterior view
Item Page Item Page Item Page

1 Trunk 6 Exterior rear view mirror 361 a Headlamp cleaning system 375
앫 Unlocking 479 Parking position 364 b Front lamps 679
앫 Opening and closing 479 7 Towing the vehicle 700 c Windshield wipers 381
앫 Minispare wheel 686 8 Rims and tires 718 Wiper blades, replacing 684
앫 Vehicle tool kit 668 앫 Checking tire inflation 560 Wiper blades, cleaning 592
pressure d Window, cleaning 592
2 Rear lamps 679
앫 Minispare wheel 670 e Roofs
3 Rear window, defrosting 473
4 Fuel filler flap 538 앫 Flat tire 686 앫 Power tilt/sliding sunroof 486
Gasoline 729 9 Hood, opening 541 앫 Panorama roof with power 489
Engine oil 543 tilt/sliding panel*
5 Doors
앫 Locking and unlocking 332 Coolant 547
앫 Opening and closing 332
25
At a glance
Cockpit
26
At a glance
Cockpit

1 Combination switch 8 Control panel with c Glove box lock 494
앫 High beam 375 앫 Front passenger front 50 d Cover of compartment with
air bag indicator lamp 앫 CD/DVD changer 115
앫 Corner-illuminating lamps 376
앫 Windshield wipers 381 앫 Vehicle level control 441, 앫 PCMCIA card slot 117
switch 443
앫 Turn signals 393 e Center console, lower part 30
앫 Electronic Stability Pro- 73
2 Lever for f Starter switch 344
gram (ESP®) switch
앫 Cruise control 420 KEYLESS-GO* start/stop 345
앫 Parktronic*/Park Assist* 447,
button
앫 DISTRONIC Plus* 424 deactivation switch 452
g Steering wheel adjustment 359
3 Horn 앫 Swivel COMAND display 87
Heated steering wheel* 360
4 Multifunction steering wheel 265 앫 COMAND/instrument 417
cluster display h Headlamp cleaning button 375
5 Instrument cluster 28
illumination j Electronic parking brake 395
6 Steering wheel gearshift con- 411
trol 9 COMAND display 85 k Hood lock release 541
7 Gear selector lever for 389 a Overhead control panel 33 l Door control panel 34
automatic transmission b Automatic climate control 469 m Night View Assist* 461
Center console, upper part 32 n Exterior lamp switch 371
27
At a glance
Instrument cluster
28
At a glance
Instrument cluster

1 Coolant temperature gauge 417 ; Brake warning 599 5 Parktronic*/Park Assist* 446,
2 Fuel gauge with: USA only lamp warning indicator for right 451
3 front area
Fuel tank reserve warning 605 Canada only
lamp 6 Gear position/range 408
< Seat belt telltale 605 indicator
A High beam headlamp 375
H Combination low tire 608 7 Tachometer with:
indicator lamp
pressure/TPMS mal- ± Engine malfunction 602
- ABS indicator lamp 598 function telltale, USA indicator lamp
= SRS indicator lamp 607 only
8 Selected program mode indi- 410
3 Parktronic*/Park Assist* 446, Low tire pressure* cator
warning indicator for left 451 telltale, Canada only
9 Main menu for control sys- 264
front area L Left turn signal 393 tem, multifunction display
4 Multifunction display with: indicator lamp
a Outside temperature 418
Speedometer K Right turn signal 393
indicator lamp b Display with:
0 Electronic 600 Additional speedometer 282
USA only parking brake v ESP® warning lamp 604
! warning or indi- : PRE-SAFE® Brake* 279
l Distance warning 78,
indicator
Canada only cator lamps lamp*1 427,
604
1
Vehicles without DISTRONIC Plus*: Warning lamp
without function. It illuminates when the ignition is
on. It should go out when the engine is running.
29
At a glance
Control systems
30
At a glance
Control systems

1 L to cancel Voice 287 5 ! to activate Voice 287 f Shortcut button for:
Control* Control*
앫 CD/DVD 120
back 265 to accept a call 142
앫 radio 101
2 $ to scroll up 6 Instrument cluster illumina- 417
tion g Back button 94
% to scroll down
7 Swivel COMAND display 87 h Hazard warning flasher 377
& to scroll to the right
8 COMAND display illumination 87 j Seat menu 259
( to scroll to the left
9 COMAND display 86 k Shortcut button for:
# to confirm selection
a CD/DVD changer 115 앫 telephone* 132
3 Multifunction display 264
b PCMCIA card slot 117 앫 navigation 166
4 s to take a call 276
to dial c Favorite button 238 l COMAND on/off button 86
to redial d Rear head restraints retract 354 m Volume control 96
t to end a call button n Mute button 96
276
to reject an incoming e Program mode selector o Telephone keypad 134
call switch for:
p COMAND controller 88
æ to increase volume 앫 automatic transmission 409
shift program
ç to decrease volume
앫 suspension tuning of 440
F to mute
Airmatic (only S 550) or 442
ABC*
31
At a glance
Center console
Upper part Item Page Item Page

1 Thumbwheel for air volume 468 b Manual fan speed adjust- 472
control for left center air vent ment, right
2 Thumbwheel for air volume 468 c Temperature control, right 472
control for right center air d AUTO mode for air distribu- 471
vent tion and volume, right
3 AUTO mode for air distribu- 471 e Alarm system indicator lamp 81
tion and volume, left
f Cup holder 498
4 Temperature control, left 472
g Cover of compartment with:
5 Manual fan speed adjust- 472
ment, left 앫 Ashtray 503
6 Front defroster 472 앫 Lighter 504

7 Air recirculation 474 h Cover of compartment with
8 Climate control on/off 471 앫 CD/DVD changer 115
9 Residual engine heat and 476 앫 PCMCIA card slot 117
ventilation (REST)
a Rear window defroster 473
32
At a glance
Overhead control panel
왔 Overhead control panel
Item Page Item Page
1 Eyeglasses compartment 495 8 Opening/closing rear roller 489
2 Left reading lamp on/off 378 sunblinds
3 Rear interior lighting on/off 378 9 Right reading lamp on/off 378
4 Front interior lighting on/off 378 a Rear view mirror 361
5 Power tilt/sliding sunroof 486 b Garage door opener 518

switch or panorama roof with 489 c Hands-free microphone for
power tilt/sliding panel* Tele Aid (emergency call
앫 510
switch system)
6 Tele Aid (emergency call sys- 510
앫 Telephone* 507
tem) button
7 Interior lighting control 378 앫 Voice Control* 284
33
At a glance
Driver’s door control panel
Item Page Item Page

1 Inside door handle 341 8 Exterior rear view mirror 361
2 Central unlocking switch 341 adjustment
3 Central locking switch 341 Mirror folding function 362

4 Memory function (for storing 365 9 Switches for opening/ closing 383
seat, exterior mirror, and door windows
steering wheel settings) Switches for opening/ closing 385
5 Selector button for front 350 rear door window sunshades*
passenger seat a Remote trunk opening/clos- 479
6 Seat heating 351 ing* switch
Seat ventilation* 352 b Override switch for rear pas- 63
senger compartment
7 Seat adjustment 347
34
At a glance
Rear door control panel
왔 Rear door control panel
Item Page
1 Selection switch for right 349
front passenger seat adjust-
ment*1
2 Memory function* (for storing 365
seat settings) (Canada only)
3 Inside door handle 341
4 Seat adjustment 347
5 Seat heating* 351
Seat ventilation* 352
6 Button for extending/retract- 489
ing panorama roof sunblind*
7 Switch for extending/retract- 503
ing rear window sunshade*
8 Switches for opening/closing 383
door windows
Switches for opening/closing 385
rear side window sunshades*
1
This switch is located on the right rear passenger
side only.
35
At a glance
36
At a glance

1 Glove box 494 a Ruffled storage pocket 498 j Cup holder in the rear center 498
2 Document holder in sun visor 502 b Door pocket armrest
3 Door pocket c Document holder in sun visor 502 Cup holder under the rear 498
center storage compartment*
4 Ruffled storage pocket 498 d Ashtray 503
k Rear center armrest with stor- 496
5 Door pocket Cigarette lighter 504 age compartment
Ashtray 503 e Eyeglasses compartment in 495
Storage compartment be- 497
6 Side storage pocket in trunk overhead control panel
tween rear seats
f Parcel net in front passenger 496
Retainer for Operator’s Manu- 501 l Rear storage box 497
al pouch footwell
m Cup holder in the front center 498
g Front passenger seat storage 668
7 Storage spaces under trunk 500 console
compartment with first aid kit
floor n Driver’s seat storage com- 495
h Front center armrest with 495
8 Side storage pocket in trunk partment
9 Door pocket 앫 Storage tray/telephone*
compartment
Ashtray 503
앫 Storage compartment
37
At a glance
Rear passenger compartment
Item Page
1 Cup holder under the rear 498
center storage compartment*
2 Cup holder in the rear center 498
armrest
3 Control panel for rear multic- 356
ontour seats*
4 Rear center armrest with stor- 496
age compartment
5 Rear storage box 497
38
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Panic alarm
Driving safety systems
Anti-theft systems
39
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
In this section you will learn the most im- Air bag system components with The SRS system conducts a self-test when
portant facts about the restraint systems the ignition is switched on and in regular
앫 The front passenger front air bag off in-
of the vehicle. intervals while the engine is running. This
dicator lamp (컄 page 50)
The restraint systems are facilitates early detection of malfunctions.
앫 Front passenger seat with Occupant The = indicator lamp in the instrument
앫 Seat belts (컄 page 52) Classification System (OCS) cluster (컄 page 28) comes on when the
앫 Child restraints (컄 page 57) (컄 page 47) ignition is switched on and goes out no lat-
Although independent systems, their pro- er than a few seconds after the engine has
앫 Lower Anchors and Tethers for been started.
CHildren (LATCH) (컄 page 62) tective functions work in conjunction with
each other. The SRS components are in operational
Additional protection potential provide readiness when the = indicator lamp is
i For information on infants and children trav-
앫 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) eling with you in the vehicle and restraint sys- not lit when the engine is running.
with tems for infants and children, see “Children in A malfunction in the system has been
the vehicle” (컄 page 57).
앫 Air bags (컄 page 42) detected if the = indicator lamp:
앫 Air bag control unit (with crash 앫 fails to go out after approximately
sensors) 4 seconds after the engine was started
앫 Emergency Tensioning Device 앫 does not come on at all
(ETD) for seat belts (컄 page 55) 앫 comes on after the engine was started
앫 Seat belt force limiter (컄 page 55) or while driving
앫 Preventive occupant safety
(PRE-SAFE®) (컄 page 56)
앫 Active head restraints (컄 page 55)
40
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
If it is necessary to modify an air bag system

Warning! G Warning! G to accommodate a person with disabilities,
Modifications to or work improperly con- In the event that the = indicator lamp contact your local authorized
ducted on restraint systems (such as seat comes on during driving or does not come Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer
belts and anchors, emergency tensioning on at all, the SRS self-check has detected a Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
devices, seat belt force limiters or air bags) malfunction. For your safety, we strongly (1-800-367-6372) for details.
or their wiring, as well as tampering with in- recommend that you contact an authorized
terconnected electronic systems, can lead Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have
to the restraint systems no longer function- the system checked; otherwise the SRS may
ing as intended. not deploy when needed in an accident,
Air bags or emergency tensioning devices, which could result in serious or fatal injury,
for example, could deploy inadvertently or or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnec-
fail to deploy in accidents although the de- essarily which could also result in injury.
celeration threshold for air bag deployment In addition, improper work on the SRS cre-
is exceeded. Therefore, never modify the re- ates a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative
straint systems. Do not tamper with elec- or causing unintended air bag deployment.
tronic components or their software. Work on the SRS must therefore only be per-
formed by qualified technicians. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
41
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Air bags
앫 Adjust the driver’s seat as far as possi-
Warning! G ble rearward, still permitting proper op-
eration of vehicle controls. The distance
Warning! G To reduce the risk of injury when the front
from the center of the driver’s breast-
air bags inflate, it is very important for the bone to the center of the air bag cover
Air bags are designed to reduce the poten- driver and front passenger to always be in a on the steering wheel must be at least
tial of injury and fatality in certain frontal improperly seated position and to wear their 10 inches (25 cm) or more. You should
pacts (front air bags), side impacts (side respective seat belt. be able to accomplish this by a combina-
impact air bags and window curtain air bags) For maximum protection in the event of a tion of adjustments to the seat and
or rollovers (window curtain air bags). How- steering wheel. If you have any prob-
collision always be in normal seated position
ever, no system available today can com- lems, please contact an authorized
with your back against the backrest. Fasten
pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities. Mercedes-Benz Center.
your seat belt and make sure that it is prop-
erly positioned on your body (컄 page 368). 앫 Do not lean your head or chest close to
The deployment of the air bags temporarily
the steering wheel or dashboard.
releases a small amount of dust from the air Since the air bag inflates with considerable
bags. This dust, however, is neither injurious 앫 Keep hands on the outside of steering
speed and force, a proper seating and hands
to your health, nor does it indicate a fire in wheel rim. Placing hands and arms in-
on steering wheel position will help to keep side the rim can increase the risk and
the vehicle. The dust might cause some tem- you at a safe distance from the air bag. potential severity of hand/arm injury
porary breathing difficulty for people with Occupants who are unbelted, out of position when driver’s front air bag inflates.
asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid or too close to the air bag can be seriously
this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle 앫 Adjust the front passenger seat as far as
injured or killed by an air bag as it inflates possible rearward from the dashboard
as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any with great force in the blink of an eye: when the seat is occupied.
breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the
앫 Sit properly belted in a position that is
vehicle after the air bag inflates, then get
as upright as possible with your back
fresh air by opening a window or door.
against the seat backrest.
42
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
앫 Occupants, especially children, should i Air bags are designed to deploy only in cer-
always sit as upright as possible, proper-
Warning! G tain frontal impacts (front air bags), and in side
ly use the seat belts and use an appro- impacts (side impact and window curtain air
Accident research shows that the safest bags) which exceed preset thresholds, and in
priately sized infant restraint, toddler
place for children in an automobile is in the certain rollovers (window curtain air bags). Only
restraint, or booster seat recommended
rear seat. during these events will they provide their sup-
for the size and weight of the child. plemental protection.
Failure to follow these instructions can There is a possibility for a side impact air
The driver and passengers should always wear
result in severe injuries to you or other bag related injury if occupants, especially their seat belts. Otherwise it is not possible for
occupants. children, are not properly seated or re- air bags to provide their supplemental protec-
strained when next to a side impact air bag tion.
If you sell your vehicle, it is important that
which needs to deploy rapidly in a side im- In case of other types of impacts and impacts be-
you make the buyer aware of this safety
pact in order to do its job. low air bag deployment thresholds, air bags will
information. Be sure to give the buyer this
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please not deploy. The driver and passenger will then be
Operator’s Manual.
protected to the extent possible by a properly
follow these guidelines:
fastened seat belt. A properly fastened seat belt
(1) Always sit as upright as possible, prop- is also needed to provide the best possible pro-
erly use the seat belts, and for all chil- tection in a rollover.
dren 12 years old and under, use an We caution you not to rely on the presence of the
appropriately sized infant restraint, tod- air bags in order to avoid wearing your seat belt.
dler restraint, or booster seat recom- It is important to your safety and that of your pas-
mended for the size and weight of the sengers that you replace deployed air bags and
child. repair any malfunctioning air bags to make sure
the vehicle will continue to provide supplemental
(2) Always wear seat belts properly. crash protection for occupants.
43
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Safety guidelines for the seat belt,

앫 Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this 앫 Air bag system components will be hot
emergency tensioning device and may severely weaken them. In a crash after an air bag has inflated. Do not
air bag they may not be able to provide ade- touch.
quate protection. 앫 Never place your feet on the instrument
Warning! G 앫 No modifications of any kind may be panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
made to any components or wiring of keep both feet on the floor in front of the
앫 Damaged seat belts or seat belt that the SRS. This includes changing or re- seat.
were highly stressed in an accident moving any component or part of the 앫 In addition, improper repair work on the
must be replaced and their anchoring SRS, the installation of additional trim SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS
points must also be checked. Only use material, badges, etc. over the steering inoperative or causing unintended air
seat belts installed or supplied by an au- wheel hub, front passenger front air bag bag deployment. Work on the SRS must
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center. cover, outboard sides of the seat back- therefore only be performed by qualified
rests, door trim panels, or door frame technicians. Contact an authorized
앫 Air bags and pyrotechnic emergency
trims, and installation of additional Mercedes-Benz Center.
tensioning devices (ETDs) are designed
electrical/electronic equipment on or
to function on a one-time-only basis. An 앫 For your protection and the protection
near SRS components and wiring. Keep
air bag or ETD that is deployed must be of others, when scrapping the air bag
area between air bags and occupants
replaced. PRE-SAFE® has electrically unit or emergency tensioning device,
free from objects (e.g. packages, purs-
operated reversible pre-tensioners in our safety instructions must be fol-
es, umbrellas, etc.).
addition to the pyrotechnic ETDs. lowed. These instructions are available
앫 Do not hang items such as coat hangers from any authorized Mercedes-Benz
앫 Do not pass seat belt over sharp edges.
from the coat hooks or handles over the Center.
They could tear.
door. These items may turn into projec-
앫 Do not make any modification that could tiles and cause head and other injuries
change the effectiveness of the seat when the window curtain air bag is
belts. deployed.
44
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Front air bags i The front air bags in this vehicle have been
앫 Given the considerable deployment
speed, required inflation volume, and designed to inflate in two stages. This allows the
the textile structure of the air bags, air bag to have different rates of inflation that are
based on the rate of relevant vehicle decelera-
there is the possibility of abrasions or
tion as assessed by the air bag control unit.
other, potentially more serious injuries
resulting from air bag deployment. On the front passenger-side, the front air bag de-
ployment is additionally influenced by the pas-
senger’s weight category as identified by the
Occupant Classification System (OCS)
Warning! G (컄 page 47).
The lighter the front passenger-side occupant,
Only use seat covers which have been
the higher the vehicle deceleration rate required
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz for 1 Driver air bag for the second stage inflation of the air bag.
your vehicle model. Using other seat covers 2 Front passenger front air bag
may interfere with or prevent the The air bags will not deploy in impacts
Driver and front passenger front air bags which do not exceed the system’s deploy-
deployment of the front side impact air bags
are deployed: ment thresholds. You will then be protec-
or the rear side impact air bags. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for avail- 앫 in the event of certain frontal impacts ted by the fastened seat belts.
ability.
앫 if impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold
When you sell your vehicle we strongly
앫 independently of the side impact air
urge you to give notice to the subsequent
bags
owner that it is equipped with an SRS by
alerting them to the applicable section in
the Operator’s Manual.
45
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
The passenger front air bag will only be The side impact air bags are deployed: Window curtain air bags
deployed if:
앫 in impacts exceeding a preset deploy-
앫 the system, based on OCS weight sen- ment threshold
sor readings, senses that the front
앫 on the impacted side of the vehicle
passenger seat is occupied
앫 independently of the front air bags
앫 the 59 indicator lamp in
the center console is not lit The front passenger side impact air bag 1
(컄 page 50) will not deploy if the OCS senses that the
front passenger seat is empty and the front
앫 the impact exceeds a preset deploy-
passenger seat belt is not fastened (latch
ment threshold
plate is not inserted into the buckle). With
1 Window curtain air bag
an empty front passenger seat and the
Side impact air bags The side window curtain air bags are de-
seat belt fastened (latch plate properly in-
serted into buckle) the front passenger ployed:
side impact air bag will deploy regardless 앫 in impacts exceeding a preset deploy-
of the empty seat. ment threshold
The side impact air bags are not deployed 앫 on the impacted side of the vehicle
in impacts which do not exceed the sys-
tem’s deployment threshold. 앫 independently of the front air bags
앫 in certain vehicle rollovers
The side window curtain air bags are not
deployed in impacts which do not exceed
1 Front side impact air bag the system’s deployment threshold.
2 Rear side impact air bag
46
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
The window curtain air bags fill up the area Furthermore, the occupant weight may ap-
indicated by the arrows. pear to increase or decrease due to Warning! G
objects hanging on the seat, other passen-
Occupant Classification System gers pushing on the seat, objects lodged If the 59 indicator lamp illumi-
underneath the seat or stuffed between nates when an adult or someone larger than
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) seat and middle console or between seat a small individual is in the front passenger
automatically turns the front passenger and door or due to objects applying pres- seat, have the front passenger re-position
front air bag on or off based on the classi- sure on the back of the seat. Always make himself or herself in the seat until the
fied occupant weight category determined sure that the seat has clearance in all 59 indicator lamp goes out, or
by weight sensor readings from the front directions at all times. check whether objects are caught under or
passenger seat. around the seat.
i If your seat, including your trim cover and More information about air bag display mes-
i The system does not deactivate the front cushion needs to be serviced in any way, take
passenger side impact air bag, the window cur- the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz sages (컄 page 618).
tain air bag and the emergency tensioning de- Center. In the event of a collision, the air bag control
vice. Only seat accessories approved by unit will not allow front passenger front air
Occupants must sit properly belted in a po- Mercedes-Benz may be used. bag deployment when the OCS classified
sition that is as upright as possible with Both driver and the front passenger should the front passenger seat occupant as being
their back against the seat backrest and always use the 59 indicator up to or less than the weight of a typical
feet on the floor to be correctly classified. lamp as an indication of whether or not the 12-month-old child in a standard child re-
If the occupant’s weight is transferred to front passenger is properly positioned. straint or if the front passenger seat is
another object in the vehicle (e.g. by lean- sensed as being empty. 컄컄
ing on armrests), the OCS may not be able
to properly approximate the occupant’s
weight category.
47
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
컄컄
When the OCS senses that the front passen- the seat, remain illuminated or go out. With 앫 independently of the side impact air
ger seat occupant is classified as being up the 59 indicator lamp illumi- bags
to or less than the weight of a typical nated, the front passenger front air bag is If the front passenger air bag is deployed,
12-month-old child in a standard child deactivated. With the 59 indi- the rate of inflation will be influenced by:
restraint, the 59 indicator cator lamp out, the front passenger front air
앫 the rate of relevant vehicle deceleration
lamp will illuminate when the engine is start- bag is activated.
as assessed by the air bag control unit
ed and remain illuminated, indicating that When the OCS senses that the front passen-
the front passenger front air bag is deacti- 앫 front passenger’s weight category as
ger seat occupant is classified as an adult or identified by the Occupant Classification
vated. someone larger than a small individual, the System (OCS).
When the OCS senses that the front passen- 59 indicator lamp will illumi-
ger seat is classified as being empty, the nate for approximately 6 seconds when the
59 indicator lamp will illumi- engine is started and then go out, indicating Warning! G
nate when the engine is started and remain that the front passenger front air bag is
illuminated, indicating that the front activated. According to accident statistics, children
passenger front air bag is deactivated. If the 59 indicator lamp is illu- are safer when properly restrained in the
When the OCS senses that the front passen- minated, the front passenger front air bag is rear seating positions than in the front seat-
ger seat occupant is classified as being deactivated and will not be deployed. ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend
heavier than the weight of a typical that children be placed in the rear seats
If the 59 indicator lamp is not
12-month-old child seated in a standard whenever possible. Regardless of seating
illuminated, the front passenger front air
child restraint or as being a small individual position, children 12 years old and under
bag is activated and will be deployed:
(such as a young teenager or a small adult), must be seated and properly secured in an
the 59 indicator lamp will illu- 앫 in the event of certain frontal impacts appropriate infant or child restraint
minate for approximately 6 seconds when 앫 if impact exceeds a preset deployment recommended for the size and weight of the
the engine is started and then, depending on threshold child.
occupant weight sensor readings from
48
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
The infant or child restraint must be properly 앫 A child in a rear-facing child restraint on If the 59 indicator lamp
secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat the front passenger seat will be serious- goes out or remains out, do not trans-
belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors ly injured or even killed if the front port a child on the front passenger seat
and top tether strap, fully in accordance passenger front air bag inflates in a until the system has been repaired. A
with the child seat manufacturer’s collision which could occur under some child in a rear-facing child restraint on
circumstances, even with the air bag
instructions. the front passenger seat will be serious-
technology installed in your vehicle.
Children can be killed or seriously injured by ly injured or even killed if the front pas-
The only means to completely eliminate
an inflating air bag. Note the following im- this risk is to never place a child in a senger front air bag inflates.
portant information when circumstances re- rear-facing child restraint in the front 앫 If you have to place a child in a
quire you to place a child in the front seat. We therefore strongly recommend forward-facing child restraint on the
passenger seat: that you always place a child in a rear- front passenger seat, move the seat as
facing child restraint in the back seat. far back as possible, use the proper
앫 Your vehicle is equipped with air bag child restraint recommended for the
technology designed to turn off the front 앫 If you must install a rear-facing child
restraint on the front passenger seat age, size and weight of the child, and se-
passenger front air bag in your vehicle cure child restraint with the vehicle’s
when the system senses the weight of a because circumstances require you to
do so, make sure that the seat belt according to the child seat
typical 12-month-old child or less along manufacturer’s instructions. For
with the weight of a standard appropri- 59 indicator lamp is illumi-
nated, indicating that the front passen- children larger than the typical
ate child restraint on the front passen- 12-month-old child, the front passenger
ger seat. ger front air bag is deactivated. Should
the 59 indicator lamp not front air bag may or may not be
illuminate or go out while the restraint is activated (컄 page 48).
installed, please check installation. Peri-
odically check the 59 indi-
cator lamp while driving to make sure
the 59 indicator lamp is il-
luminated.
49
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
i Deployment of the driver front air bag does The 59 indicator lamp is lo-
not mean that the front passenger front air bag cated on the dashboard to the right of the Warning! G
also should have deployed. instrument cluster.
The Occupant Classification System (컄 page 47) If the = indicator lamp and the
may have determined: 59 indicator lamp are lit at the
same time, there is a malfunction in the
앫 that the seat was empty or occupied by the
weight up to or less than that of a typical Occupant Classification System. The front
12-month-old child seated in a standard passenger front air bag will be deactivated
child restraint – both instances where the in this case.
system suppresses deployment of the front
In order to ensure proper operation of the
passenger front air bag even though the im-
pact met the criteria and was of sufficient air bag system and OCS:
severity to deploy the driver front air bag. 앫 Have the system checked as soon as
앫 that the seat was occupied by a small individ- possible by qualified technicians.
ual (such as a young teenager or a small 1 Front passenger front air bag indicator Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
adult) or a child weighing more than the lamp Center.
weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a
The 59 indicator lamp 1 will 앫 Do not place more than 4.4 lbs (2 kg)
standard child restraint – instances where into the ruffled storage bag on the back
the system may suppress deployment of the be illuminated, except with the SmartKey
removed from the starter switch or with of the front passenger seat. Otherwise,
front passenger front air bag even though
the starter switch in position 0 the OCS may not be able to properly
the impact met the criteria and was of suffi-
approximate the occupant weight
cient severity to deploy the driver front air (컄 page 346).
bag. category.
앫 Do not place objects under and/or
around the front passenger seat.
앫 Do not hang anything from or attach any
items to the seats.
50
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Self-test Occupant Classification For more information, see the “Practical

앫 Do not stuff objects such as books be-
tween the middle console and the front System hints” section (컄 page 610).
passenger seat. After turning the SmartKey in the starter
앫 Do not move the front passenger seat switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the Warning! G
backwards against stiff objects. KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once or
앫 Sit properly belted in a position that is twice (컄 page 346), the 59 Never place anything between seat cushion
as upright as possible with your back indicator lamp 1 located in the center (e.g. pillow), since it reduces the effective-
against the seat backrest. console illuminates. If an adult occupant is ness of the Occupant Classification System.
앫 Do not lean on the armrests or lift your- properly sitting on the front passenger The bottom of the child seat must make full
self from the seat by using the handle seat and the system senses the occupant contact with the passenger seat cushion. An
over the door as this may cause the OCS as being an adult, the 59 indi- incorrectly mounted child seat could cause
to be unable to correctly approximate cator lamp will illuminate and go out after injuries to the child in case of an accident,
the occupant weight category. approximately 6 seconds. instead of increasing protection for the
앫 Only have the seat repaired or replaced child.
If the seat is not occupied and the system
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- senses the front passenger seat as being Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
ter. empty, the 59 indicator lamp installation of child seats.
앫 Read and observe all warnings in this will illuminate and not go out.
chapter.
Warning! G
If the 59 indicator lamp should
not illuminate, the system is not functioning.
You must contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center before seating any
child on the front passenger seat.
51
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Seat belts For more information, see “Fastening the

Without your seat belt buckled, you are
seat belts” (컄 page 368).
much more likely to hit the interior of the ve-
The use of seat belts and infant and child
restraint systems is required by law in all i For information on infants and children trav- hicle or be ejected from it. You can be seri-
eling with you in the vehicle and restraint sys- ously injured or killed.
50 states, the District of Columbia, the
tems for infants and children, see “Children in
U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces. In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
the vehicle” (컄 page 57).
death is lessened if you are properly wearing
Even where this is not the case, all vehicle
your seat belt. Air bags can only protect as
occupants should have their seat belts fas- Warning! G they are designed if the occupants are prop-
tened whenever the vehicle is in motion.
erly wearing their seat belts.
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure all of your passengers
are properly restrained. Warning! G
Failure to wear and properly fasten and po-
sition your seat belt greatly increases your Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an backrest in an excessively reclined position
accident. You and your passengers should as this can be dangerous. You could slide
always wear seat belts. under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the seat belt would apply force at
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
the abdomen or neck. That could cause se-
can be considerably more severe without
rious or even fatal injuries. The seat back-
your seat belt properly buckled.
rest and seat belt provide the best restraint
when the wearer is in a nearly upright posi-
tion and the seat belt is properly positioned
on the body.
52
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may limiters), and front seat knee bolsters.
Warning! G severely weaken them. In a crash they may The system is designed to enhance the
Never let more people ride in the vehicle not be able to provide adequate protection. protection offered to properly belted oc-
than there are seat belts available. Make Have all work carried out only by qualified cupants in certain frontal (front air bags
sure everyone riding in the vehicle is cor- technicians. Contact an authorized and ETD with seat belt force limiters)
rectly restrained with a separate seat belt. Mercedes-Benz Center. and side (side impact and window cur-
Never use a seat belt for more than one per- tain air bags) impacts which exceed pre-
son at a time. set deployment thresholds and in
Warning! G certain rollovers (window curtain air
bags and ETD).
Warning! G USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY 앫 Never wear the shoulder belt under your
앫 Seat belts can only work when used arm, against your neck or off your shoul-
Damaged seat belts or seat belts that were properly. Never wear seat belts in any der. In a frontal crash, your body would
highly stressed in an accident must be re- other way than as described in this sec- move too far forward. That would in-
tion, as that could result in serious inju- crease the chance of head and neck in-
placed and their anchoring points must also
ries in case of an accident. juries. The seat belt would also apply too
be checked.
much force to the ribs or abdomen,
Only use seat belts which have been 앫 Each occupant should wear their seat which could severely injure internal or-
approved by Mercedes-Benz. belt at all times, because seat belts help gans such as your liver or spleen.
reduce the likelihood of and potential
Do not make any modifications to the seat severity of injuries in accidents, includ- 앫 Never wear seat belts over rigid or
belts. This can lead to unintended activation ing rollovers. The integrated restraint breakable objects in or on your clothing,
of the ETDs or to failure. system includes SRS (driver air bag, pas- such as eyeglasses, pens, SmartKeys,
senger front air bag, side impact air etc., as these might cause injuries. 컄컄
bags, window curtain air bags for door
windows), ETD (seat belt emergency
tensioning device with seat belt force
53
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
컄컄 앫 and if the vehicle speed once exceeds

앫 Position the lap belt as low as possible 앫 When using a seat belt to secure infant
on your hips and not across the abdo- restraint, toddler restraint, or booster 15 mph (25 km/h), the seat belt
men. If the seat belt is positioned across seat, always follow the child seat manu- telltale < starts flashing and a
your abdomen, it could cause serious in- facturer’s instructions. warning chime sounds with increasing
juries in a crash. intensity for a maximum of 60 seconds
앫 Never use a seat belt for more than one Enhanced seat belt reminder system or until the driver’s and the front pas-
person at time. Do not fasten a seat belt senger’s seat belt are fastened.
When the engine is started, the seat belt
around a person and another person or If the driver’s or the front passenger’s
other objects. telltale < will always illuminate for
6 seconds to remind you and your passen- seat belt remains unfastened after
앫 Seat belts should not be worn twisted. 60 seconds, the warning chime stops
gers to fasten your seat belts.
In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full sounding, the seat belt telltale <
width of the seat belt to distribute im- If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened stops flashing but continues to be illu-
pact forces. The twisted seat belt when the engine is started, an additional minated.
against your body could cause injuries. warning chime will also sound for a maxi-
mum of 6 seconds or until the driver’ s The seat belt telltale < will only go out
앫 Pregnant women should also always use
a lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion seat belt is fastened. if both the driver’s and the front passen-
should be positioned as low as possible ger’s seat belt (with the front passenger
If after these 6 seconds the driver’s or the seat occupied) are fastened, or the vehicle
on the hips to avoid any possible pres-
sure on the abdomen. front passenger’s seat belt (with the front is standing still and a front door is opened.
passenger seat occupied) is not fastened
앫 Never place your feet on the instrument For more information, see “Practical hints”
with front doors closed,
panel, dashboard or on the seat. Always (컄 page 605).
keep both feet on the floor in front of the 앫 the seat belt telltale < remains illu-
seat. minated for as long as either the driv-
er’s or front passenger’s seat belt is not
fastened.
54
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Emergency tensioning device (ETD), limiters, when activated, are employed to Active head restraints
seat belt force limiter help reduce the peak force exerted by the
seat belts on occupants during a crash. The active head restraints are intended to
The seat belts for the front and rear outer
offer the driver and front passenger in-
seats are equipped with emergency ten-
creased protection from whiplash type in-
sioning devices and seat belt force limit- Warning! G juries. In the event of a rear-end collision,
ers.
the active head restraints on the driver’s
A pyrotechnic emergency tensioning device
The ETD is designed to activate in the and front passenger’s seats are designed
(ETD) that was activated must be replaced.
following cases: to move forward in the direction of travel,
When disposing of the pyrotechnic emer- providing the head with increased support
앫 in frontal or rear-end impacts exceed-
gency tensioning device, our safety instruc- earlier on in the collision sequence. The ac-
ing the system deployment threshold
tions must be followed. These are available tive head restraints move forward whether
앫 in certain vehicle rollovers at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. the seat is occupied or not.
앫 if the restraint systems are operational PRE-SAFE® has electrically operated
and functioning correctly, reversible pre-tensioners that do not require Warning! G
see = indicator lamp (컄 page 607) replacement after activation.
Do not attach any objects (e.g. hangers) to
i The ETDs for the front seats will only acti-
vate if the front seat belt is fastened (latch plate Automatic comfort-fit feature seat belt the head restraint posts. Otherwise, the ac-
properly inserted into buckle). tive head restraints may not function prop-
An automatic comfort-fit feature for the
The ETDs for the rear outer seats will activate erly or offer the degree of protection they
front seats and for the rear outer seats*
with or without the respective seat belt fastened. were designed for in the event of an acci-
(only for vehicles with rear power seat*)
dent.
In an impact, emergency tensioning reduces the retracting force of the seat
devices remove slack from the seat belts in belts when they are in normal use.
such a way that the seat belts fit more
snugly against the body. Seat belt force
55
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
If the active head restraints have been trig- Preventive occupant safety
gered in an accident, the active head re- Warning! G (PRE-SAFE®)
straints must be reset. Otherwise, the
active head restraints cannot offer any ad- For your protection, drive only with properly
ditional protection in the event of another positioned head restraints. Warning! G
rear-end collision. Adjust head restraint so that it is as close to
the head as possible and the center of the The PRE-SAFE® system is intended to re-
For information on resetting the activated
head restraint supports the back of the head duce the effects of an accident on properly
active head restraints, see “Resetting acti-
at eye level. This will reduce the potential for seat-belted vehicle occupants. Despite
vated head restraints” (컄 page 675).
injury to the head and neck in the event of having the PRE-SAFE® system in your vehi-
You cannot remove the active head re- an accident or similar situation. cle, the possibility of injuries occurring as a
straint on the driver’s and front passen- result of an accident cannot be eliminated.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
ger’s seats. Therefore, you should always drive carefully
head restraints. Head restraints are intend-
For removal contact an authorized and adjust your driving to the prevailing
ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-
Mercedes-Benz Center. road, weather, and traffic conditions.
dent.
Warning! G For information on head restraint adjust-

Your vehicle automatically takes preven-
tive measures to better protect the occu-
ment, see “Head restraints” (컄 page 353). pants in the following hazardous
Only use seat or head restraint covers which
have been tested and approved by situations.
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model.
Using other seat or head restraint covers
may interfere with or prevent the activation
of the active head restraints.
ter for availability.
56
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
PRE-SAFE® takes action in the following in- 앫 If the vehicle is equipped with power If the seat belts do not release:
stances: adjustable rear seats* and the passen-
왘 Adjust the backrest or seat slightly to
Emergency braking situations, e.g. ger outer seats are in an unfavorable
앫 the rear until the seat belt tension is di-
when BAS (컄 page 68) is activated or position, they will be adjusted to a bet-
minished.
when ter position.
The locking mechanism releases.
앫 The system increases the air pressure
BAS Plus* (컄 page 69) is strongly inter-
vening.
in the air pockets (on the sides of the ! When moving the seat, make sure there are
seat cushion and backrest) of the mul- no items in the footwell or behind the seats. Oth-
앫 Critical dynamic driving situations, e.g. ticontour* and/or drive-dynamic front erwise you could damage the seats.
when the vehicle is understeering or seats*.
oversteering because it has exceeded Children in the vehicle
its physical limitations. 앫 If the vehicle is understeering or over-
steering, the tilt/sliding sunroof and If an infant or child is traveling with you in
앫 Evasive steering maneuvers at speeds the door windows also close until only the vehicle:
above 20 mph (30 km/h). a small gap remains.
왘 Secure the child using an infant or child
When you are driving faster than 20 mph Once the hazardous situation is over with- restraint appropriate to the age and
(30 km/h), PRE-SAFE® takes the following out an accident occurring, PRE-SAFE® size of the child.
measures in such situations: loosens the seat belt pre-tension and de-
creases the air pressure in the air pockets 왘 Make sure the infant or child is
앫 The front seat belts are pre-tensioned properly secured at all times while the
electrically. of the multicontour and drive-dynamic
seats*. You can readjust all of the settings vehicle is in motion.
앫 If the OCS senses that the front pas- made by PRE-SAFE®.
senger seat is occupied and the seat is
in an unfavorable position, it will be i If the closing procedure of the tilt/sliding
adjusted to a better position. sunroof or power windows is blocked, the
tilt/sliding sunroof or power windows will stop
and open slightly.
57
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Infant and child restraint systems

Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo
Warning! G increases a child’s risk of injury in the event We recommend all infants and children be
Do not leave children unattended in the ve- of properly restrained at all times while the
hicle, even if they are secured in a child re- 앫 strong braking maneuvers vehicle is in motion.
straint system. The children could 앫 sudden changes of direction All lap-shoulder belts except the driver’s
앫 injure themselves on parts of the vehicle seat belt have special seat belt retractors
앫 an accident
for secure fastening of child restraints.
앫 be seriously or fatally injured through
excessive exposure to extreme heat or To fasten a child restraint, follow child
cold restraint instructions for mounting. Then
Do not expose the child restraint system to pull the shoulder belt out completely and
direct sunlight. The child restraint system’s let it retract. During seat belt retraction, a
metal parts, for example, could become very ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate
hot, and the child could be burned on these that the special seat belt retractor is acti-
parts. vated. The seat belt is now locked. Push
down on child restraint to take up any
If children open a door, they could
slack.
앫 injure other persons
앫 get out of the car and injure themselves
or be injured by following traffic
58
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and Infants and small children should be seat-
let seat belt retract completely. To deacti- ed in an appropriate infant or child re- Warning! G
vate the special seat belt retractor for the straint system properly secured in
front passenger seat, the front passenger accordance with the manufacturer’s in- According to accident statistics, children
seat must be in the most backward posi- structions for the child restraint, that com- are safer when properly restrained in the
tion. The seat belt can again be used in the plies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle rear seating positions than in the front seat-
usual manner. Safety Standards 213 and 225 and Canadi- ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend
an Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 that children be placed in the rear seats
and 210.2. whenever possible. Regardless of seating
Warning! G position, children 12 years old and under
A statement by the child restraint manu- must be seated and properly secured in an
Never release the seat belt buckle while the facturer of compliance with these stan- appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler
vehicle is in motion, since the special seat dards can be found on the instruction label restraint, or booster seat recommended for
belt retractor will be deactivated. on the restraint and in the instruction man- the size and weight of the child. 컄컄
ual provided with the restraint.
i Information on child seats with mounting fit- When using any infant or child restraint
tings for tether anchorages (컄 page 61). system, make sure to carefully read and
For information on LATCH-type child seat follow all manufacturer’s instructions for
mounts (컄 page 62). installation and use.
The use of infant or child restraints is re- Please read and observe warning labels af-
quired by law in all 50 states, the District fixed to the inside of the vehicle and to
of Columbia, the U.S. territories and all Ca- infant or child restraints.
nadian provinces.
59
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
컄컄
The infant or child restraint must be properly 앫 A child in a rear-facing child restraint on Periodically check the 59
secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat the front passenger seat will be serious- indicator lamp while driving to make
belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors ly injured or even killed if the front sure the lamp is illuminated. If the
and top tether strap, fully in accordance passenger front air bag inflates in a 59 indicator lamp goes out
with the child seat manufacturer’s collision which could occur under some or remains out, do not transport a child
circumstances, even with the air bag
instructions. on the front passenger seat until the
technology installed in your vehicle. The
Occupants, especially children, should al- system has been repaired.
only means to completely eliminate this
ways sit as upright as possible, properly use risk is to never place a child in a rear-fac- A child in a rear-facing child restraint on
the seat belts and use an appropriately sized ing child restraint in the front seat. We the front passenger seat will be serious-
infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster therefore strongly recommend that you ly injured or even killed if the front pas-
seat recommended for the always place a child in a rear-facing senger front air bag inflates.
child restraint in the back seat.
Children can be killed or seriously injured by 앫 If you have to place a child in a for-
앫 If you must install a rear-facing child ward-facing child restraint on the front
an inflating air bag. Note the following im-
restraint on the front passenger seat be- passenger seat, move the seat as far
portant information when circumstances
cause circumstances require you to do back as possible, use the proper child
require you to place a child in the front so, make sure that the 59
passenger seat: restraint recommended for the age, size
indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating and weight of the child, and secure child
앫 Your vehicle is equipped with air bag that the front passenger front air bag is restraint with the vehicle’s seat belt ac-
technology designed to turn off the front deactivated. Should the cording to the child seat manufacturer’s
passenger front air bag in your vehicle 59 indicator lamp not illu- instructions. For children larger than the
when the OCS senses the weight of a minate or go out while the restraint is in- typical 12-month-old child, the front
typical 12-month-old child or less along stalled, please check installation. passenger front air bag may or may not
with the weight of a standard be activated (컄 page 48).
appropriate child restraint on the front
passenger seat.
60
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Installation of infant and child restraint

When the child restraint is not in use,
Warning! G remove it from the vehicle or secure it with
systems
Infants and small children should never the seat belt to prevent the child restraint This vehicle is equipped with tether an-
share a seat belt with another occupant. from becoming a projectile in the event of chorages for a top tether strap at each of
During an accident, they could be crushed an accident. the rear seating positions.
between the occupant and seat belt. Do not leave children unattended in the
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is vehicle, even if the children are secured in a
significantly increased if the child restraints child restraint system. Unsupervised chil-
are not properly secured in the vehicle dren in a child restraint system may use
and/or the child is not properly secured in vehicle equipment and may cause an acci-
the child restraint. dent and/or serious personal injury.
Children too big for a toddler restraint must

ride in seats using regular seat belts. Posi-
tion shoulder belt across chest and shoul-
der, not face or neck. A booster seat may be 1 Cover of top anchorage ring
necessary to achieve proper seat belt posi-
왘 Bring the rear power seat backrest* to
tioning for children over 41 lbs until they
a fully upright position (컄 page 349).
reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt fits
properly without a booster. 왘 Remove cover 1 from anchorage ring.
왘 Store cover 1 in a convenient place
(e.g. glove box).
왘 Guide tether strap between head re-
straint and top of seat back. 컄컄
61
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
컄컄 Head restraints must be positioned such Once the top tether anchorage hook is at- Child seat anchors – LATCH type
that the top tether strap can pass freely tached, the child restraint itself can be se-
This vehicle is equipped with two LATCH
between the head restraint and top of seat cured. Tighten the top tether strap
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)
back. according to the child restraint manufac- type anchors (at each of the rear seats) for
왘 Make sure the tether strap is not turer’s instructions. the installation of a LATCH child seat with
twisted. 왘 Reinstall cover after removing the the matching anchor fittings.
tether strap.
Warning! G
Warning! G
Children too big for a toddler restraint must
Vehicles with rear power seats*: Never ad- ride in seats using regular seat belts. Posi-
just the rear seat position after installing the tion shoulder belt across chest and shoul-
child restraint. Adjusting the rear seat posi- der, not face or neck. A booster seat may be
tion after installing the child restraint could necessary to achieve proper seat belt posi-
damage the child restraint and/or introduce tioning for children over 41 lbs until they
undesirable slack or tension into the seat reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt fits
2 Hook belt and loosen or misposition the child re- properly without a booster.
3 Anchorage ring straint, lessening the effectiveness of the Install child seat according to manufactur-
왘 Securely fasten hook 2, which is part child restraint and thus increasing the er’s instructions.
of the tether strap, to anchorage chance or severity of injury in an accident.
The child seat must be firmly attached to the
ring 3.
right and left side anchors.
i For safety reasons, make sure hook 2 has An incorrectly mounted child seat may come
attached to ring 3 beyond the safety catch, as
loose during an accident which could result
illustrated.
in serious injury or death to the child.
62
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
왘 Bring the rear power seat backrest* to i The child seat must be firmly attached to the
Damaged or impact damaged child seats or
its fully upright position (컄 page 349). right and left side anchor fittings.
child seat mounting fittings must be re-
placed. 왘 Fold upholstery cover 3 upward. Make sure the seat belt for the center seat can
operate freely with a child seat installed.
Do not leave children unattended in the ve- 왘 Turn installation device 4 to a vertical
Non-LATCH type child seats may also be used
hicle, even if the children are secured in a position so that upholstery cover 3 and can be installed using the vehicle’s seat belt
child restraint system. does not fold down. system. Install child seat according to the manu-
왘 Install child seat according to the man- facturer’s instructions.
If you have not installed a child seat, the ufacturer’s instructions.
LATCH anchors are hidden by an uphol- Override switch for rear passenger
stery cover. A rigid connection is established be- compartment
tween the child seat and the body of
the vehicle. You can disable select functions in the rear
passenger compartment for added safety
Warning! G (for instance when you have children riding
in the rear passenger compartment).
Vehicles with rear power seats*: Never ad- You can disable the following functions in
just the rear seat position after installing the the rear passenger compartment:
child restraint. Adjusting the rear seat posi-
tion after installing the child restraint could 앫 rear door window operation
damage the child restraint and/or introduce (컄 page 383)
1 Indicates the position of the anchors undesirable slack or tension into the seat 앫 adjustment of front passenger seat
2 Anchors belt and loosen or misposition the child re- from the rear* (컄 page 349)
3 Upholstery cover straint, lessening the effectiveness of the
앫 rear center console lighter
4 Installation device child restraint and thus increasing the
(컄 page 505)
chance or severity of injury in an accident.
63
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
앫 sunblinds for panorama roof* i Operation of the rear door windows with the
(컄 page 489) Warning! G switches located in the driver’s door is still pos-
sible.
앫 rear window sunshade (컄 page 503) Activate the override switch when children
and rear side window sunshades 왘 Deactivating: Press switch 1 again.
are riding in the back seats of the vehicle.
(컄 page 385) Indicator lamp 2 goes out. The func-
The children may otherwise injure them-
The override switch is located on the driv- selves, e.g. by becoming trapped in the win- tions in the rear are enabled again.
er’s door. dow opening.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un-
attended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised ac-
cess to a vehicle could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
1 Override switch
2 Indicator lamp
왘 Activating: Press switch 1.
Indicator lamp 2 comes on. The func-
tions in the rear are disabled.
64
Safety and Security
Panic alarm
왔 Panic alarm
i USA only: Activating
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two 왘 Press and hold Â button for at least
conditions: 1 second.
(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer- An audible alarm and flashing exterior
ence, and
lamps will operate briefly.
(2) this device must accept any interference re-
ceived, including interference that may Deactivating
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this device 왘 Press Â button again.
1 Â button could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment. or
i Canada only: 왘 Insert the SmartKey or the SmartKey

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry with KEYLESS-GO* in starter switch.
Canada. Operation is subject to the following or
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and 왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button (컄 page 346).
ceived, including interference that may The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must
cause undesired operation of the device. be inside the vehicle.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
65
Safety and Security
This section contains information about ABS

Adaptive Brake Lights as well as the follow- Warning! G
ing driving safety systems:
앫 ABS (Antilock Brake System)
The following factors increase the risk of ac- Warning! G
cidents:
앫 Adaptive Brake 앫 Excessive speed, especially in turns Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm,
steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pump-
앫 BAS (Brake Assist System) 앫 Wet and slippery road surfaces
ing the brake pedal defeats the purpose of
앫 BAS Plus* (Brake Assist System Plus) 앫 Following another vehicle too closely the ABS and significantly reduces braking
앫 EBP (Electronic Brake Proportioning) The driving safety systems described in this effectiveness.
section cannot reduce these risks or pre-
앫 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) vent the natural laws of physics from acting The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates
앫 4MATIC (Four Wheel Electronic on the vehicle. the brake pressure so that the wheels do
Traction System) Always adapt your driving style to the pre- not lock during braking. This allows you to
앫 PRE-SAFE® Brake* (Preventive Occu- vailing road and weather conditions and maintain the ability to steer your vehicle.
pant Safety Brake) keep a safe distance to other road users and The ABS is functional above a speed of ap-
objects on the street. proximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent
of road surface conditions.
i In winter operation, the maximum effective- On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will re-
ness of the ABS, Adaptive Brake, BAS,
spond even to light brake pressure.
BAS Plus*, EBP, ESP® and 4MATIC is only
achieved with winter tires (컄 page 580), or snow The - indicator lamp in the instrument
chains as required. cluster (컄 page 28) comes on when you
switch on the ignition (컄 page 344). It goes
out when the engine is running.
66
Safety and Security
Braking
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
At the instant one of the wheels is about to
Warning! G prevent accidents.
lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the When the ABS is malfunctioning, the BAS, The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
brake pedal, indicating that the ABS is in BAS Plus* and ESP® are also switched off. must never be exploited in a reckless or dan-
the regulating mode. gerous manner which could jeopardize the
When the ABS is malfunctioning, the wheels
왘 Keep firm and steady pressure on the may lock during hard braking, reducing user’s safety or the safety of others.
brake pedal while experiencing the pul- steering capability and extending the brak-
sation. ing distance. For more information, see “Practical hints”
Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure (컄 page 598).
yields the advantages provided by the ABS,
namely braking power and the ability to Warning! G Adaptive Brake
steer the vehicle.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
Adaptive Brake provides a high level of
The pulsating brake pedal can be an indica- braking safety as well as increased braking
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
tion of hazardous road conditions and comfort. It is coupled with ABS, ESP® and
it increase braking or steering efficiency
functions as a reminder to take extra care BAS. Adaptive Brake takes driver and vehi-
beyond that afforded by the condition of the
while driving. cle characteristics into consideration, thus
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded. The ABS cannot prevent acci-
achieving an optimal braking effect.
Emergency brake maneuver
dents, including those resulting from exces-
왘 Keep continuous full pressure on the sive speed in turns, following another
brake pedal. vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
67
Safety and Security
Adaptive Brake Lights BAS

(S 600/S 65 AMG and USA only) Warning! G
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in
The brake lamps flash in quick intervals emergency situations. If you apply the The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of
while you are braking in order to signal to brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
cars behind you that provides full brake boost, thereby poten- it increase braking efficiency beyond that af-
tially reducing the braking distance. forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes
앫 you are braking strongly at a speed of
and tires or the traction afforded. The BAS
more than 30 mph (50 km/h) 왘 Apply continuous full braking pressure
cannot prevent accidents, including those
until the emergency braking situation is
앫 you are braking with the aid of BAS or resulting from excessive speed in turns, fol-
over.
BAS Plus* lowing another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
The ABS will prevent the wheels from planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
If you bring the car to a complete stop by
locking. driver can prevent accidents.
hard braking at a speed of more than
40 mph (70 km/h), the hazard warning When you release the brake pedal, the The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle
flasher automatically comes on as soon as brakes function again as normal. The BAS must never be exploited in a reckless or dan-
the vehicle is at a standstill. While the vehi- is then deactivated. gerous manner which could jeopardize the
cle is stationary, the brake lamps are con- user’s safety or the safety of others.
tinuously lit up.
Warning! G
Once you drive faster than 6 mph For more information, see “Practical hints”
(10 km/h) afterward, the hazard warning When the BAS is malfunctioning, the brake section (컄 page 598).
flasher goes out. system is still functioning normally, but with-
out the additional brake boost available that
BAS would normally provide in an emergen-
cy braking maneuver. Therefore, the braking
distance may increase.
68
Safety and Security
BAS Plus* i USA only:

This device has been approved by the FCC as a Warning! G
The Brake Assist System Plus (BAS Plus) “Vehicular Radar System”. The radar sensor is
operates in emergency braking situations intended for use in an automotive radar system BAS Plus is a convenience system designed
and uses radar sensors* to assess the traf- only. Removal, tampering, or altering of the de- to assist the driver during vehicle operation.
fic situation. BAS Plus assists you in brak- vice will void any warranties, and is not permitted The responsibility for the vehicle speed and
by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in the distance to the vehicle ahead, including
ing at speeds above approximately 20 mph any non-approved way.
(30 km/h). most importantly brake operation to assure
Any unauthorized modification to this device safe stopping distance, always remains with
When travelling in Canada in a vehicle not could void the user’s authority to operate the
the driver.
registered in Canada, you must switch off equipment.
the radar sensor system* (컄 page 282). Always pay attention to traffic conditions
Canadian law does not permit the use of
i Canada only: even while BAS Plus is switched on. Other-
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
the radar sensor system* (컄 page 282) for wise, you may not be able to recognize
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
vehicles from outside of Canada. When you two conditions: dangerous situations until it is too late and
switch off the radar sensor system*, the could cause an accident resulting in person-
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
following functions are deactivated: al or fatal injury to you or others.
앫 BAS Plus ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device. BAS Plus detects obstacles that are in your
앫 DISTRONIC Plus* (컄 page 424) driving path for a sufficient period of time
Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will
앫 Park Assist* (컄 page 448) void any warranties, and is not permitted. Do not to permit the system to recognize these
tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved obstacles. If you approach the detected
앫 PRE-SAFE® Brake* (컄 page 76)
way. obstacle quickly, BAS Plus calculates the
Any unauthorized modification to this device level of brake power boost appropriate for
could void the user’s authority to operate the the circumstance to supply when the driv-
equipment. er applies the brakes.
69
Safety and Security
When you step quickly on the brake pedal BAS Plus can react to stationary obstacles
BAS Plus uses radar signals that are not re-
in an emergency braking situation, such as standing or parked vehicles at
flected well by narrow objects and absorp-
BAS Plus automatically regulates the road speeds of up to approximately
tive materials. For this reason BAS Plus will
brake power boost to a level that is suit- 40 mph (70 km/h).
not react to
able for the traffic situation.
BAS Plus can only assist you when the 앫 persons and animals
If BAS Plus requires a particularly high radar sensors are switched on and func-
앫 approaching traffic or cross-traffic
brake power boost, PRE-SAFE® is activat- tional. You can check whether the sensors
ed at the same time. are active by switching on DISTRONIC BAS Plus may not detect narrow vehicles
Plus* (컄 page 424) or using the “Radar driving in front of you, such as motorcycles
왘 Keep constant pressure on the brake
sensor” menu (컄 page 282) in the instru- and vehicles driving offset from your vehicle
pedal until the emergency braking situ-
ment cluster control system. center.
ation is over.
During this process, ABS prevents the After a hard collision or damage to the
wheels from locking up. Warning! G front of the vehicle from an accident, have
The brakes will resume normal operation BAS Plus will only respond with brake assis- the adjustment and operation of the radar
after tance if it has clearly detected an object. De- sensors checked by an authorized
tection can be impeded by Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫 the brake pedal is released
앫 dirty or covered sensors If BAS Plus is not available due to a radar
앫 no obstacles are detected in your path sensor malfunction, the braking system
앫 snowfall or heavy rain
앫 the system no longer senses a risk of a will continue to function normally with full
collision 앫 disturbance from other radar sources brake boost and full standard BAS
앫 strong radar reflection such as in park- function.
BAS Plus is deactivated.
ing garages
70
Safety and Security
EBP ESP®
Warning! G
The Electronic Brake Proportioning (EBP) The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) is
enhances braking effectiveness by allow- operational as soon as the engine is run- Never switch off the ESP® when you see the
ing the rear brakes to supply a greater pro- ning and monitors the vehicle’s traction ESP® warning lamp v flashing in the in-
portion of the braking effort in straight line (force of adhesive friction between the strument cluster. In this case proceed as fol-
braking without a loss of vehicle stability. tires and the road surface) and handling. lows:
The ESP® recognizes when a wheel is spin- 앫 While driving off, apply as little throttle
Warning! G ning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By ap- as possible.
plying brakes to the appropriate wheel and 앫 While driving, ease up on the accelera-
When the EBP is malfunctioning, the ABS, by limiting the engine output, the ESP® tor.
BAS, BAS Plus* and ESP® are also switched works to stabilize the vehicle. The ESP® is 앫 Adapt your speed and driving style to
off. especially useful while driving off and on the prevailing road conditions.
If the EBP is malfunctioning, the brake sys- wet or slippery road surfaces. The ESP® Failure to observe these guidelines could
tem will still function with full brake boost. also stabilizes the vehicle during braking cause the vehicle to skid.
However, the rear wheels could lock up dur- and steering maneuvers.
The ESP® cannot prevent accidents result-
ing emergency braking situations, for exam- The ESP® warning lamp v in the instru- ing from excessive speed.
ple. You could lose control of the vehicle and ment cluster flashes when the ESP® is en-
cause an accident. Adapt your driving style gaged.
to the changed driving characteristics.
The ESP® warning lamp v in the instru-
ment cluster comes on when you switch on
the ignition (컄 page 344). It goes out when
the engine is running.
71
Safety and Security
i DISTRONIC Plus* and cruise control are Electronic traction system

Warning! G ®
switched off when the ESP engages.
The electronic traction system is a compo-
®
The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of i The ESP® will only function properly if you nent of ESP®.
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can use wheels of the recommended tire size The electronic traction system improves
(컄 page 718).
it increase the traction afforded. The ESP® the vehicle’s ability to utilize available trac-
cannot prevent accidents, including those ! Vehicles without 4MATIC: tion, especially under slippery road condi-
resulting from excessive speed in turns, or Because the ESP® operates automatically, the tions by applying the brakes to a spinning
hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and engine and ignition must be shut off (SmartKey wheel.
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The ca- in starter switch position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button* in position 0 or 1) when When you switch off the ESP®, the elec-
pabilities of an ESP® equipped vehicle must
앫 the electronic parking brake is being tested
tronic traction system is still enabled.
never be exploited in a reckless or danger-
ous manner which could jeopardize the us- on a brake test dynamometer
er’s safety or the safety of others. 앫 the vehicle is being towed with the Warning! G
front/rear axle raised
Active braking action through the ESP® may oth- If you are driving too fast, the electronic
erwise seriously damage the brake system. traction system cannot reduce the risk of an
For information on vehicles with 4MATIC, see accident.
“Four wheel electronic traction system (4MATIC) The electronic traction system cannot pre-
with the ESP®” (컄 page 75). vent the natural laws of physics from acting
For more information, see “Practical hints” on the vehicle.
section (컄 page 604) and (컄 page 612).
72
Safety and Security
Switching off the ESP® i When the ESP® is switched off and one or
(except S 63 AMG) Warning! G more drive wheels are spinning, the ESP® warn-
ing lamp v in the instrument cluster flashes.
Switch on the ESP® immediately if the afore- However, the ESP® will then not stabilize the
Warning! G mentioned circumstances do not apply any- vehicle.
more. Otherwise the ESP® will not stabilize
The ESP® should not be switched off during
the vehicle when it is starting to skid or a
normal driving other than in the circum-
wheel is spinning.
stances described below. Disabling of the
system will reduce vehicle stability in stan-
dard driving maneuvers. When you switch off the ESP®
앫 the ESP® does not stabilize the vehicle
To improve the vehicle’s traction, turn off 앫 the engine output is not limited, which
the ESP® in driving situations where it allows the drive wheels to spin and
would be advantageous to have the drive thus cut into surfaces for better grip
wheels spin and thus cut into surfaces for
앫 the electronic traction system will still 1 ESP® off/on
better grip such as:
apply the brakes to a spinning wheel 왘 Press ESP® switch 1 until the ESP®
앫 when driving with snow chains
앫 the ESP® continues to operate when warning lamp v in the instrument
앫 in deep snow you are braking cluster comes on.
앫 in sand or gravel 앫 you cannot activate the cruise control The ESP® is switched off.
or the DISTRONIC Plus*
73
Safety and Security
Switching off the ESP® (S 63 AMG only) When you switch off the ESP®
Warning! G 앫 the ESP® does not stabilize the vehicle
When the ESP® warning lamp v is illumi- Warning! G 앫 the engine output is not limited, which
nated continuously, the ESP® is switched allows the drive wheels to spin and
The ESP® should not be switched off during
off. thus cut into surfaces for better grip
normal driving. Disabling of the system will
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail- result in the following: 앫 the traction control will still apply the
ing road conditions and to the non-operating brakes to a spinning wheel
앫 no restriction to engine torque
status of the ESP®.
앫 loss of system supported traction 앫 the ESP® operates while you are
control braking
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an ex-
tended period with the ESP® switched off. This “ESP® OFF” is designed for driving on closed 앫 you cannot activate the cruise control
may cause serious damage to the drivetrain tracks when the natural oversteer and un- or the Distronic*
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lim- dersteer characteristics are desired and re-
앫 the cruise control or Distronic* switch
ited Warranty. quires a highly skilled and experienced
off if currently activated
driver able to handle these critical driving
situations.
You could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident.
Please be aware of these limits when you
switch off the ESP®.
Do not switch off the ESP® when a spare
wheel is mounted.
74
Safety and Security
i When the ESP® is switched off and one or Four wheel electronic traction system
®
more drive wheels are spinning, the ESP warn- Warning! G (4MATIC) with the ESP®
ing lamp v in the instrument cluster flashes.
However, the ESP® will then not stabilize the When the ESP® warning lamp v is Models with all-wheel-drive only.
vehicle. illuminated continuously, the ESP® is
The 4MATIC improves the vehicle’s ability
switched off or is not operational due to a
to use available traction, e.g. during winter
malfunction. Vehicle stability in standard
operation in mountains under snowy
driving maneuvers reduces.
conditions, by applying power to all four
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail- wheels.
ing road conditions and to the non-operating
status of the ESP®.
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an ex-

tended period with the ESP® switched off. This
may cause serious damage to the drivetrain
1 ESP® off/on which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
왘 With the engine running, press ESP®
switch 1 until the ESP® warning
Switching on the ESP®
lamp v in the instrument cluster
comes on. 왘 Press ESP® switch 1.
The ESP® is switched off. The ESP® warning lamp v in the in-
strument cluster goes out.
You are now again in normal driving
mode with the ESP® switched on.
75
Safety and Security
! Do not tow with one axle raised. PRE-SAFE® Brake* (vehicles with
Warning! G Otherwise the transfer case can be damaged, DISTRONIC Plus* only)
®
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lim-
If you see the ESP warning lamp v ited Warranty. PRE-SAFE® Brake* can assist you in mini-
flashing in the speedometer, proceed as fol- mizing the risk of a rear-end collision with
lows: ! Performance testing must only be conduct- a vehicle in front of you and in reducing the
ed on a two-axle dynamometer. severity of an accident. At speeds over ap-
앫 While driving off, apply as little throttle
as possible Otherwise the transfer case can be damaged, prox 20 mph (30 km/h), it will
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lim-
앫 While driving, ease up on the accelera- ited Warranty. 앫 warn you of a possible collision
tor
! Because the ESP® operates automatically, 앫 automatically begin to brake the vehi-
앫 Adapt your speed and driving style to cle lightly in a speed range of up to
the engine and the ignition must be shut off
the prevailing road conditions 112 mph (180 km/h)
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 or
Failure to observe these guidelines could KEYLESS-GO start/stop button* in position 0
앫 activate preventative occupant safety
cause the vehicle to skid. or 1) when the parking brake is being tested on a
brake test dynamometer. measures (PRE-SAFE®) (컄 page 56)
The ESP® cannot prevent accidents result-
ing from excessive speed. Active braking action through ESP® may other-
wise seriously damage the front or rear axle Warning! G
brake system.
Operational tests with the engine running can PRE-SAFE® Brake is a convenience system
only be conducted on a two-axle dynamometer. designed to assist the driver during vehicle
operation. The responsibility for the vehicle
speed and the distance to the vehicle ahead,
including most importantly brake operation
to assure safe stopping distance, always re-
mains with the driver.
76
Safety and Security
i USA only: When travelling in Canada in a vehicle not

Always pay attention to traffic conditions
This device has been approved by the FCC as a registered in Canada, you must switch off
even while PRE-SAFE® Brake is switched on.
“Vehicular Radar System”. The radar sensor is the radar sensor system* (컄 page 282).
Otherwise, you may not be able to recognize intended for use in an automotive radar system Canadian law does not permit the use of
dangerous situations until it is too late and only. Removal, tampering, or altering of the de- the radar sensor system* (컄 page 282) for
could cause an accident resulting in person- vice will void any warranties, and is not permitted
by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in
vehicles from outside of Canada. When you
al or fatal injury to you or others.
any non-approved way. switch off the radar sensor system*, the
following functions are deactivated:
PRE-SAFE® Brake will only assist you by Any unauthorized modification to this device
automatically initiating braking if the driver could void the user’s authority to operate the 앫 BAS Plus* (컄 page 69)
and front passenger have their seat belts equipment.
앫 DISTRONIC Plus* (컄 page 424)
fastened. i Canada only: 앫 Park Assist* (컄 page 448)
Using the radar sensors, PRE-SAFE® Brake This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
detects obstacles that are in your driving
Canada. Operation is subject to the following 앫 PRE-SAFE® Brake
two conditions:
path for a sufficient period of time for the
system to recognize it. If you approach a (1) This device may not cause interference, and
vehicle and PRE-SAFE® Brake has estab- (2) this device must accept any interference re-
lished that the distance to the vehicle ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
ahead at your current speed is so close
that PRE-SAFE® Brake will not be capable Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will
of slowing the vehicle sufficiently, the sys- void any warranties, and is not permitted. Do not
tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved
tem will initially warn you visually and
way.
acoustically.
equipment.
77
Safety and Security
When the distance to the forward vehicle is

Warning! G too small, the distance warning lamp l Warning! G
lights up in the instrument cluster. If you
PRE-SAFE® Brake will only respond with approach the forward vehicle very quickly, PRE-SAFE® Brake brakes your vehicle with a
brake assistance if it has clearly detected an you will hear a warning tone. maximum of 13 ft/s2 (4 m/s2). This corre-
object. Detection can be impeded by sponds to about 40% of the maximum decel-
If you do not apply the brakes yourself or eration ability of your vehicle. This
앫 dirty or covered sensors maneuver around a sensed obstacle, the automatic braking is intended only to ini-
앫 snowfall or heavy rain vehicle will automatically initiate light tiate the braking if the driver has not already
앫 disturbance from other radar sources braking. PRE-SAFE® (컄 page 56) is activat- done so. The driver must apply the brakes in
ed when the distance to the vehicle ahead order to prevent a collision.
앫 strong radar reflection such as in park-
ing garages at your current speed is so close that
PRE-SAFE® Brake will not be capable of PRE-SAFE® Brake applies the brake pedal
®
PRE-SAFE Brake uses radar signals that automatically which results in the brake
slowing the vehicle sufficiently.
are not reflected well by narrow objects and pedal moving. Therefore keep driver’s foot
absorptive materials. For this reason BAS area clear at all times, including the area un-
Plus will not react to der the brake pedal. Objects stored in this
앫 persons and animals area may impair pedal movement which
could interfere with the braking ability of the
앫 approaching traffic or cross-traffic
PRE-SAFE® Brake.
PRE-SAFE® Brake may not detect narrow ve-
Do not place your foot under the brake pedal
hicles driving in front of you, such as motor-
– your foot could become caught.
cycles and vehicles driving offset from your
vehicle center.
78
Safety and Security
To maintain the proper distance to the ve- PRE-SAFE® Brake can react to stationary
hicle in front of you and thus prevent a Warning! G obstacles such as standing or parked vehi-
rear-end collision, you must apply the cles at road speeds of up to approximately
brakes yourself. An intermittent warning sounds and the dis- 40 mph (70 km/h).
tance warning lamp l in the instrument
왘 Immediately brake the vehicle to avoid cluster is illuminated if PRE-SAFE® Brake
a collision. calculates that the distance to the vehicle Warning! G
Under no circumstances should the ahead and your vehicle’s current speed indi-
If you do not receive visual or acoustic warn-
driver await the intermittent warning cate that PRE-SAFE® Brake will not be capa-
ing signals, PRE-SAFE® Brake has either not
sound before braking. See the follow- ble of slowing the vehicle sufficiently to
recognized the collision risk, has been deac-
ing warning note. maintain the preset following distance,
tivated or is malfunctioning. Apply the
which creates a danger of a collision.
The intermittent warning sound ceases brakes yourself to avoid a collision.
and the distance warning lamp l Immediately brake your vehicle to increase
goes out when the necessary distance the distance between your vehicle and the
왘 Activating and deactivating: Activate
to the vehicle ahead is again vehicle driving in front of you. The warning
or deactivate PRE-SAFE® Brake using
established. sound is intended as a final caution that you
the instrument cluster control system
have not interceded with your own braking
(컄 page 279).
inputs to avoid a potentially dangerous situ-
ation. Do not wait for the operation of the After the function has been activated,
warning signal to intercede with your own indicator : appears on the
braking, as that will result in potentially dan- left-hand side of the multifunction dis-
gerous emergency braking which will not al- play.
ways result in an impact being avoided.
Tailgating increases the risk of an accident.
79
Safety and Security
PRE-SAFE® Brake does not always clearly The PRE-SAFE® Brake maneuver is termi- After a hard collision or damage to the
interpret complex traffic situations. If a vi- nated immediately when front of the vehicle from an accident, have
sual and/or acoustic warning is issued in the settings and operation of the radar
앫 you avoid the obstacle by evasive
an uncritical driving situation, or if the ve- sensors checked by an authorized
steering
hicle brakes lightly, you can interrupt the Mercedes-Benz Center.
PRE-SAFE® Brake maneuver by 앫 you drive less than 9 mph (15 km/h)
앫 pressing down all the way on the accel- 앫 an obstacle can no longer be identified
erator or using kickdown ahead of you
앫 releasing the brake pedal 앫 the system no longer senses the risk of
a collision
i PRE-SAFE® Brake will remain passive while
DISTRONIC Plus* is switched on (컄 page 424).
80
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
왔 Anti-theft systems
Immobilizer Anti-theft alarm system i If the alarm stays on for more than
30 seconds, a call to the Response Center is ini-
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized Once the alarm system has been armed, a tiated automatically by the Tele Aid system
persons from starting your vehicle. visual and audible alarm is triggered when (컄 page 510) provided Tele Aid service was sub-
someone opens: scribed to and properly activated, and that nec-
Activating essary mobile phone, power supply and GPS
앫 a door coverage are available.
왘 With the SmartKey: Remove the 앫 the trunk
SmartKey from the starter switch.
앫 the hood
왘 With the KEYLESS-GO*: Turn off the
engine (컄 page 346) and open the driv- The alarm will stay on even if the activating
er’s door. element (a door, for example) is immedi-
ately closed.
Deactivating The alarm system will also be triggered
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 344). when
i Starting the engine will also deactivate the 앫 the vehicle is opened with the
immobilizer. mechanical key
1 Indicator lamp
In case the engine cannot be started (yet the ve- 앫 a door is opened from the inside
hicle’s battery is charged), the system is not op- 왘 Arming: Lock your vehicle with the
erational. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz To cancel the alarm after it has been trig- SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*.
Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the gered, see “Canceling the alarm”
The turn signal lamps flash three times
USA), or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). (컄 page 82).
to indicate that the vehicle is locked.
The indicator lamp 1 flashes to indi-
cate that the alarm system is armed. 컄컄
81
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
컄컄 i If the turn signal lamps does not flash three Canceling the alarm
times one of the following elements may not be
properly closed: To cancel the alarm, do one of the follow-
앫 a door ing:
앫 the trunk 왘 Insert the SmartKey or SmartKey with
Close the respective element and lock the vehi- KEYLESS-GO* in the starter switch.
cle again. 왘 Press the Œ or ‹ button on the
왘 Disarming: Unlock your vehicle with SmartKey or SmartKey with
the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*. KEYLESS-GO*.
The turn signal lamps flash once to in- In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
dicate that the alarm system is dis- 왘 Grasp an outside door handle.
armed.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must
i The alarm system will rearm automatically be within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle.
again after approximately 40 seconds if no door
was opened. 왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop but-
ton (컄 page 346).
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must
be inside the vehicle.
82
Control systems
COMAND operating safety
COMAND introduction
COMAND FM/AM radio
COMAND satellite radio* (USA only)
COMAND
audio CD/audio DVD/MP3
COMAND video DVD (USA only)
COMAND telephone*
COMAND navigation
COMAND address book
COMAND system settings
COMAND vehicle menu
COMAND automatic climate control
COMAND seats
Instrument cluster control system
Voice Control*
83
Control systems
COMAND operating safety
Warning! G Warning! G Warning! G

Any alteration of electronic components or In order to avoid distraction which could While the navigation system provides direc-
software can cause malfunctions. lead to an accident, the driver should enter tional assistance, the driver must remain fo-
Radio, satellite radio* (USA only), amplifier, system settings while the vehicle is at a cused on safe driving behavior, especially
CD/DVD changer, navigation module, tele- standstill, and operate the system only attention to traffic and street signs, and
phone and Voice Control Systems* are in- when permitted by road, weather and traffic should utilize the system’s audio cues while
terconnected. Therefore, if one of the conditions. driving.
components is not operational, or has not Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph The navigation system does not supply any
been removed/ replaced properly, the func- (approximately 50 km/ h), your car covers a information on stop signs, yield signs, traffic
tion of other components could be impaired. distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) ev- regulations or traffic safety rules. Their ob-
Such conditions might seriously impair the ery second. servance always remains in the driver’s per-
operating safety of your vehicle. COMAND supplies you with information to sonal responsibility. DVD maps do not cover
help you select your route more easily and all areas nor all routes within an area.
We recommend to have any service work on
electronic components carried out by an au- guide you conveniently and safely to your
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center. destination. For safety reasons, we encour-
age the driver to stop the vehicle in a safe
place before answering or placing a call, or
consulting the COMAND screen to read nav-
igational maps, instructions, or downloaded
information.
84
Control systems
COMAND introduction
왔 COMAND introduction
COMAND (Cockpit Management and Data Switching COMAND on or off COMAND components
System) is an information and operating
center for vehicle sound and communica- 왘 Press the o shortcut button in the In your vehicle, COMAND can be used to
tions systems, including the radio and nav- center console (컄 page 86). operate:
igation system, as well as other optional COMAND calls up the menu last select- 앫 audio functions
equipment (satellite radio*, telephone*, ed.
etc.). 앫 the navigation system
i When you switch off COMAND, you also 앫 the telephone* and communication
Availability of functions while the vehi- switch off the currently playing audio source.
functions (SMS*)
During a telephone call, you cannot switch off
cle is in motion
COMAND. 앫 Video DVD (USA only)
For safety reasons, certain COMAND func- 앫 various vehicle settings
tions are not available while the vehicle is
COMAND consists of the following:
in motion or they are only available to a
limited extent. You will notice this, for ex- 앫 COMAND shortcut buttons
ample, by the fact that certain menu items 앫 COMAND display
cannot be selected or that the COMAND
display shows a corresponding message. 앫 telephone* keypad
앫 COMAND controller
85
Control systems
COMAND introduction
COMAND shortcut buttons Function Page COMAND display

i During Dynamic Rear View Monitor* opera- 1 P Favorite button 238 In the COMAND display, you will find the
tion (컄 page 453) it is not possible to operate function currently selected and the corre-
the COMAND shortcut buttons. 2 M Shortcut button for:
sponding menus. The COMAND display is
Use the COMAND shortcut buttons to se- 앫 CD/DVD 120 divided into several areas.
lect main functions directly. 앫 radio 101
3 L Back button 94
4 O Seat menu 259
5 N Shortcut button for:
앫 telephone* 132
앫 navigation 166
6 o COMAND on/off 85
button
1 Status line
7 , Volume control 96 2 Main functions
8 F Mute button 96 3 Main area
4 Submenus
Example: 5 Climate control settings
왘 Switching directly to Radio or CD A white bar under the main functions 2 in-
menu: Press M once or twice. dicates the active area.
Once you have selected a main
function 2, the main area 3 is active.
86
Control systems
COMAND introduction
i The layout of the menus may vary depending Adjusting COMAND display Swiveling COMAND display
on your vehicle’s equipment. This manual shows illumination
the menus for a fully equipped vehicle.
Instrument cluster multifunction

display
This section describes features and con-
trols via the COMAND controller, display
and shortcut buttons only.
Please refer to the “Instrument cluster
control system” section of this manual 1 Button for swiveling display to the left
(컄 page 264) for function descriptions and 1 Knob 2 Button for swiveling display to the right
operation of the instrument cluster multi-
function display and multifunction steering 왘 Brightening illumination: Turn You can swivel the COMAND display to the
wheel buttons as they relate to COMAND knob 1 clockwise. left or right. The buttons are on the
features described in this section. right-hand side of the instrument cluster.
왘 Dimming illumination: Turn knob 1
counterclockwise.
87
Control systems
COMAND introduction
Telephone keypad* COMAND controller You can operate the COMAND controller
With the help of the telephone keypad, you Use the COMAND controller to select as follows:
can use your mobile phone if it is inserted menu functions shown on the COMAND 앫 press briefly or press and hold
in the cradle. display.
앫 rotate to the left or right
앫 slide to the left, right, up, down or
diagonally
In this way, you can move through the
menus, select menu items or exit menus.
You can move through the menus either by
rotating or sliding the controller.
1 Telephone keypad 1 COMAND controller

2 Folding cover
Operating COMAND controller
88
Control systems
COMAND introduction
Symbol How to use the COMAND controller Function

왘 Press briefly. 앫 Select menu item.
n 앫 Exit full-screen image with Navi.
왘 Press and hold until the selected ac- 앫 Save a station.
tion has been carried out.
앫 Accept a destination for navigation.
왘 Rotate. 앫 Move through vertical or horizontal menus.
ymz 앫 Move through text.
앫 Program settings.
왘 Slide. 앫 Move through vertical menus.
qmr 앫 Exit horizontal menus.
왘 Slide and hold. 앫 Move through a navigation map.
왘 Slide. 앫 Move through horizontal menus.
omp 앫 Exit vertical menus.
왘 Slide and hold. 앫 Fast forward or reverse for audio CD or audio DVD playback.
앫 Move through a navigation map.
왘 Slide and hold. 앫 Move through a navigation map.
wmx
89
Control systems
COMAND introduction
Operating COMAND
Menu overview Each main function has a main menu. Each

menu item in the main menu in turn has
The illustration below shows the structure
several submenu items.
of the main functions and their main
menus.
Navi Page Audio Page Telephone* Page

Map Display 168 FM/AM Radio 100 Telephone* 132
Mode 171 Sat Radio* (USA only) 105 Address Book* 224
Commands/menus
CD 112 Telephone OFF* 134

DVD-Audio 112
MP3 112
Audio OFF 99
90
Control systems
COMAND introduction
Video DVD (USA only)1 Page Vehicle Page

Video DVD 124 Exterior Lighting Delayed Switch-off 242
Submenu overview 126 Locator Lighting 243
Commands/menus
Switching to video DVD mode 126 Exterior Mirror Convenience Settings 244
Pause playback 128 Automatic Locking 245
DVD menu 129 Easy Entry/Exit Feature 246
Interior Lighting Delayed Switch-off 248
Interior Ambient Light 247
Rear Window Sunshade* 249
Trunk Opening-height Restriction* 249
1
Depending on your vehicle’s production date the video DVD function may be not available.
91
Control systems
COMAND introduction
Calling up the main menu Vertical menus Horizontal menus
Illustration: audio main menu 왘 Moving through the menu: 왘 Moving through the menu:
You can call up the main menu of a main Slide rmq or rotate ymz. Slide omp or rotate ymz.
function in the following manner: 왘 Selecting a menu item: Press n. 왘 Selecting a menu item: Press n.
왘 Moving to the main function line: 왘 Exiting a menu without making a se- 왘 Exiting a menu without making a se-
Slide qm. lection: Slide omp in the opposite di- lection: Slide rmq in the opposite di-
왘 Selecting a main function: Slide omp rection of the list orientation or press rection of the list orientation or press
or rotate ymz. back button L. back button L.
왘 Confirming selection: Press n.
92
Control systems
COMAND introduction
Entering characters Deleting individual characters Accepting first entry

왘 Select and press ) repeatedly in the 왘 Press n until you exit the character
bottom line. entry window.
Deleting entire words or numbers Selecting list item

왘 Press and hold ) in the bottom line
until the word or number is deleted.
Exiting character entry

왘 Select and press “Back” in the bottom
Illustration: entering a navigation destina-
tion line.
or
Selecting characters
왘 Press back button L in the center
왘 Slide omp or rotate ymz. console (컄 page 86). Illustration: list of towns and cities for navi-
왘 Confirming selection: Press n. gation
Switching to the list 1 Symbol for other selection options
COMAND completes your entry as
soon as it can be clearly identified. In 왘 Slide qm. (e.g. county)
this case, you do not need to switch to or 왘 Selecting a line: Slide rmq or
the list. rotate ymz. 컄컄
왘 Select and press ? in the second line
from the bottom.
왘 Exiting list: Slide om to select “Back”.
93
Control systems
COMAND introduction
컄컄 왘 Confirming selection: Press n. 왘 Switching to the next highest menu: If you already see one of the submenus on
Additional selection options are avail- Press L briefly. the screen (e.g. the “Audio” 씮 “Audio” 씮
able for list entries featuring COMAND switches to the next highest “Radio” submenu), it is not necessary to
symbol 1. For example, cities marked menu level within the currently active perform the first steps.
with symbol 1 indicate that the select- operating mode. The individual steps for the above-men-
ed country has more than one city fea- tioned example are described below.
왘 Switching to the main menu: Press
turing that name. Confirming such a list
and hold L. 왘 Switching to the main function line:
entry opens up another submenu.
You will hear a signal, and COMAND Slide qm.
Back button switches to the main menu of the cur- 왘 Selecting “Audio” main function:
rently active operating mode. Slide omp or rotate ymz.
Example of how to use COMAND
The audio operating mode last selected
In the descriptions below, the main func-
appears.
tions always serve as the starting point for
locating the individual menu items.
Example:
“Audio” 씮 “Audio” 씮 “FM/AM Radio” 씮
“Radio” 씮 “Save Station”
1 Back button
i In the COMAND display, you will see the
submenu previously called up for each main
menu.
94
Control systems
COMAND introduction
왘 Selecting “Audio” in the main menu: 왘 Select “Save Station” from selection
Slide qm. list by rotating ymz or sliding rmq.
왘 Confirming selection: Press n. 왘 Select desired position.
A selection list with the functions of the
“Audio” main menu appears.
왘 Selecting “Radio”: Slide mr or

rotate ymz.
The Radio submenu appears.
The selected station is saved at the
왘 Selecting “FM/AM Radio”: designated position. The display
Slide qm or rotate ymz. switches back to the Radio display.
The FM/AM Radio menu appears.
95
Control systems
COMAND introduction
Main menus of COMAND Switching off navigation announce- Adjusting volume

ments entirely
i The components and operating principles of 왘 Canceling navigation message:
COMAND can be found on (컄 page 85).
Briefly press F shortcut button dur-
ing an announcement.
Sound
왘 Switching off navigation messages:
왘 Muting: Press the F shortcut but-
Press and hold F during an an-
ton in the center console (컄 page 86).
nouncement until the announcement is
The sound of the current audio source switched off.
is switched on or is muted.
You will see the message “The driving
i When the sound is muted, you will see the instructions have been muted.” for a 1 Thumbwheel
symbol F in the status line. When you short while. 왘 Adjusting: Turn , thumbwheel.
change the audio source, the sound is automati-
cally switched on. You will be able to hear an- i The announcements remain switched off The volume of the currently selected
nouncements from the navigation system even even if you start a new route guidance or if audio source changes.
when the sound is muted. COMAND is switched off/on with the o but-
ton.
If you switch COMAND off by removing the
SmartKey from the starter switch and then
switch the ignition back on after more than
3 minutes, the announcements are automatical-
ly switched back on.
96
Control systems
COMAND introduction
Volume of navigation announcements Selecting sound settings Adjusting treble or bass

You can adjust the volume of the naviga- You can select different sound settings for 왘 Select “Sound” 씮 “Treble” or “Bass”.
tion announcements independently from each individual audio source. The respec-
The setting last selected is indicated by
the volume of the respective audio source. tive sound menu can be found via the sub-
an outlined bar.
menu for which you wish to make settings.
During a navigation announcement:
Example:
왘 turn thumbwheel ,
“Audio” 씮 “Audio” 씮 “FM/AM Radio” 씮
or
“Sound”
왘 press æ or ç on the multifunc-
tion steering wheel.
Adjusting volume for telephone calls

In hands-free mode, you can adjust the vol-
ume of a telephone call while the call is Adjusting treble and bass
currently active.
1 Setting last selected
During a telephone call: 2 Current setting
왘 turn thumbwheel , 왘 Changing setting: Slide rmq or
or rotate ymz until desired treble or bass
setting is reached.
왘 press æ or ç on the multifunc-
tion steering wheel. 왘 Exiting menu: Press n, L or
slide omp.
The setting is saved.
97
Control systems
COMAND introduction
Adjusting balance or fader 왘 Changing setting: Slide rmq or omp i Since some DVDs contain both stereo as
Balance is used to determine whether the until desired balance/fader setting is well as multi-channel audio formats, it may be
reached. necessary to adapt the audio format
sound focus should be shifted toward the (컄 page 123).
driver’s side or the passenger’s side. 왘 Exiting menu: Press n or L.
Fader is used to determine whether the The setting is saved.
i The “LOGIC7® ON” function of the har-
man/kardon LOGIC7® surround sound system
sound focus should be shifted toward the makes it possible to play discrete 5.1 and stereo
front or rear of the vehicle Surround sound recordings with optimal surround sound for ev-
ery passenger. Music on CDs or audio DVDs with
왘 Select “Sound” 씮 “Balance/Fader”. With surround sound, you can choose be-
high-resolution surround formats such as MLP,
tween “LOGIC7® ON” and “LOGIC7® OFF”. DTS or Dolby Digital is played back optimally.
The setting last selected is indicated by
an outlined bar. Harman/kardon LOGIC7® surround sound For an ideal sound experience on all seats,
is available for the following operating LOGIC7® distributes 5.1 surround information
modes: via the 13-channel system architecture. The re-
sult is a sound as intended by the sound engi-
앫 Audio DVD (MLP, DTS, PCM, and Dolby neers during the original recording.
Digital audio formats)
harman/kardon LOGIC7® converts all two-chan-
앫 Video DVD (DTS, PCM, and Dolby Digi- nel stereo sound material into multi-channel sur-
tal audio formats) (USA only) round sound. With the help of LOGIC7®,
surround information stored during the original
앫 Audio CD recording are read out and distributed through
the 13 channels. No effects are created during
앫 MP3
this process; only that which was already there
Adjusting balance and fader 앫 Radio (FM, AM, WB, becomes audible.
1 Current setting indicated by orange Satellite* (USA only)) In addition, harman/kardon LOGIC7® moves the
cross-hair symbol perceived sound source away from the individual
앫 PCMCIA
loudspeakers, thus generating a natural 360°
sound experience for every passenger.
98
Control systems
COMAND introduction
i By selecting “LOGIC7® OFF”, all compatible 왘 Selecting a setting: Slide rmq or 앫 With some stereo recordings, the resulting
formats as they are present on the medium are rotate ymz. sound may deviate from conventional stereo
played back. Due to the vehicle’s spatial charac- playback.
teristics, an optimal sound experience is not en- 왘 Saving setting: Press n.
sured on all seats. The setting is saved and the menu is Switching off/on the audio source
closed. i When you insert an audio CD or audio DVD,
Adjusting surround sound it automatically becomes the active audio
왘 Exiting menu without saving
With surround sound, you can choose be- source.
changes: Press L or slide omp.
tween “LOGIC7® ON” and “LOGIC7® OFF”. 왘 Switching off: Select “Audio” 씮 “Au-
i Please note the following: dio” 씮 “Audio OFF”.
왘 Select “Sound” 씮 “3D Sound”.
앫 For an ideal sound experience at all seats,
the balance and fader should be adjusted to The audio source is switched off; “Au-
the center of the passenger compartment dio OFF” appears in the display.
with LOGIC7® switched on.
왘 Switching on: Select “Audio”, then the
앫 The best sound results are achieved by play- desired audio source.
ing high-quality audio CDs and audio DVDs.
앫 For MP3 tracks, the bit rate should be at
or
least 128 kbit/s. 왘 Load CD/DVD (컄 page 115) or a
앫 Surround sound does not function for PCMCIA card (컄 page 117).
mono-signal sources.
앫 In the event of poor radio reception quality,
Adjusting surround sound
e.g. inside a tunnel, you should switch off
1 Current setting LOGIC7®, as a dynamic switch from Stereo
to Mono could occur, resulting in temporary
sound distortion.
99
Control systems
COMAND FM/AM radio
Only use the COMAND when road and traffic

Warning! G conditions permit you to do so. Otherwise
Please devote your attention first and fore- you could be involved in an accident in
most to the traffic situation you are in. which you or others could be injured.
Before your journey, please familiarize your-

self with the radio functions.
Submenu overview
i The components and operating principles of

Radio Presets Channel FM or AM or WB Sound

(except Weather Band) (except Weather Band) (only Weather Band)
Station List Autostore Channel list Switch to FM waveband Treble
(in FM waveband only)
Save Station Preset station list Switch to AM waveband Bass
Frequency Entry Switch to Weather Band Balance/Fader
Show Station Info 3D Sound
(in FM waveband only)
100
Control systems
COMAND FM/AM radio
Switching to radio mode Switching wavebands
왘 Select “Audio”씮 “Audio”씮 “FM/AM You can switch between the FM, AM and
Radio”. WB (Weather Band) wavebands.
or 왘 Select “Audio”씮 “Audio”씮 “FM/AM
Radio”씮 “FM” or “AM” or “WB”.
왘 Press the M shortcut button once or
twice. You will hear the station last tuned in
on the selected waveband.
The radio display appears once you
have switched to radio mode. You will
Illustration: radio mode in FM waveband Selecting stations/channels
hear the station/channel last tuned in
in the previously selected waveband, 1 Main area with frequency display You have the following selection options:
provided that the station/channel can 2 Preset position of selected station
be received. 3 Frequency of selected station 앫 The station list
i The number of times you have to press the 4 Name of selected station 앫 The search function
M shortcut button depends on the operating 5 Sound settings
앫 The station presets
mode currently selected. 6 To switch to Weather Band
7 To switch to AM waveband 앫 The manual frequency entry
8 Selected waveband 앫 The channel list
9 Preset options
a Radio options
i Station name display 4 is available for the
FM waveband and can only be seen when it is
switched on (컄 page 104) and if the station
transmits a name.
101
Control systems
COMAND FM/AM radio
Selecting stations using the station list Depending on the direction in which Selecting stations by entering the fre-
the controller is being slid or rotated, quency manually
i The station list is only available for the FM the system searches upward or down-
waveband. It contains all the stations that can be
ward and stops at the next receivable i This function is not available for Weather
currently received and is sorted by station fre- Band.
quencies. station/channel.
왘 Select “Audio”씮“Audio”씮“FM/AM
왘 Select “Audio”씮 “Audio”씮 “FM/AM Selecting stations using station Radio”씮“FM” or “AM”.
Radio”씮 “FM”. presets 왘 Select “Radio”씮“Frequency Entry”.
왘 Select “Radio”씮 “Station List”.
i This function is not available for Weather The menu for manual frequency entry
The station list appears. The dot R in Band. appears.
front of a list entry indicates the cur-
왘 Select “Audio” 씮 “Audio” 씮 “FM/AM 왘 Exiting menu without making an
rently selected station. A number in
Radio” 씮 “FM” or “AM”. entry: Press L back button in the
front of the list entry indicates the pre-
set position in the station preset mem- 왘 Select “Presets”. center console (컄 page 86).
ory. or 왘 Increasing or decreasing number:
왘 Select a station by rotating ymz or Slide qmr or rotate ymz.
왘 Press n when the main area is select-
sliding qmr and press n. ed. i You can only select currently permitted
numbers.
Selecting stations/channels using the The preset menu appears. The dot R
in front of a preset position indicates 왘 Selecting the next number:
search function
that the currently selected station is Slide mp.
왘 Slide omp or rotate ymz when the saved there. 왘 Confirming frequency entry:
main area is selected.
왘 Select station preset by rotating ymz Press n.
or sliding qmr and press n. COMAND tunes in to the frequency
entered.
102
Control systems
COMAND FM/AM radio
i If you enter a frequency in the AM waveband Saving stations All three of these will call up a station pre-
which is outside the frequency range, COMAND set screen. The dot R in front of a preset
tunes in to the next lowest frequency. i Twenty stations can be saved in each wave- position indicates that the currently select-
band except for Weather Band. ed station is saved there.
Selecting channels using the channel
You have the following options:
list
앫 Saving stations manually
i This function is only available for Weather
Band. 앫 Saving stations using Autostore
왘 Select “Audio” 씮 “Audio” 씮 “FM/AM Saving stations manually
Radio” 씮 “WB” 씮 “Channel”.
or Option 1
왘 Press n when the main area is select- 왘 Select “Audio” 씮 “Audio” 씮 “FM/AM
ed. Radio” 씮 “FM” or “AM”.
왘 Selecting a preset position:
The channel list appears. The dot R in 왘 Select “Radio ”씮 “Save Station”. Slide qmr or rotate ymz.
front of a list entry indicates the cur-
rently selected channel. Option 2 Saving a station to a selected preset po-
Press n when the main area is select- sition
왘 Select channel by rotating ymz or 왘
sliding qmr and press n. ed. If you have called up the station preset
screen using option 1:
Option 3
왘 Press n briefly.
왘 Select “Audio” 씮 “Audio” 씮 “FM/AM
In options 2 and 3:
Radio” 씮 “FM” or “AM”.
왘 Select “Presets”.
103
Control systems
COMAND FM/AM radio
왘 Press and hold n until you hear a sig- Option 3 왘 Switching the station name display
nal. on/off: Select “Audio” 씮 “Audio” 씮
왘 Select “Audio” 씮 “Audio” 씮 “FM/AM
“FM/AM Radio” 씮 “FM” 씮 “Radio” 씮
The station is saved. Radio” 씮 “Radio” 씮 “Save Station” 씮
“Show Station Info”.
“Autostore”.
Saving using autostore The display is switched on or off, de-
Station name display pending on the previous setting. When
i This function is not available for Weather the display is switched on, a check-
Band. The Autostore function saves receivable
stations as presets in order of their reception i In the FM waveband, COMAND can show mark appears in front of the
quality. All stations saved manually in the preset the name of the station currently tuned in. Sta- “Show Station Info” menu item.
memory will be lost if COMAND finds 20 station name display 1 can only be seen when it is
tions. If COMAND finds less than 20 stations, for switched on and if the station transmits a name.
example 9, then the stations saved in preset po-
sitions 1 – 9 will be over written.
Option 1
ed.
왘 Select “Autostore”.
Option 2
왘 Select “Audio” 씮 “Audio” 씮 “FM/AM 1 Station name display
Radio” 씮 “FM” or “AM”.
왘 Select “Presets” 씮 “Autostore”.
104
Control systems
왔 COMAND satellite radio* (USA only)
Warning! G conditions permit you to do so. Otherwise
Please devote your attention first and fore- you could be involved in an accident in
most to the traffic situation you are in. which you or others could be injured.

Submenu overview

Sat Radio Presets Info Category Sound

Channel List Station presets Show program info Select category Treble
Save Channel Bass
Channel Entry Balance/Fader
Service 3D Sound
105
Control systems
Introduction to Satellite radio i Satellite radio service may be unavailable or Switching to satellite radio
interrupted from time to time for a variety of rea-
i A subscription to SIRIUS satellite radio ser- sons, such as environmental or topographic con- 왘 Select “Audio” 씮 “Audio” 씮 “Sat Ra-
vice provider is required for the satellite radio op- ditions and other things we can’t control. Service dio”.
eration described in this chapter. Contact an might also not be available in certain places
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details (e.g., in tunnels, parking garages, or within or or
and availability for your vehicle. next to buildings) or near other technologies. In 왘 Press the M shortcut button once or
such situations, the satellite radio’s main menu
SIRIUS Satellite Radio provides 100 chan- twice. The Satellite radio menu appears
shows the “Acquiring signal...” screen. At this
nels, so called streams, of digital-quality point, the radio’s functions are restricted to if it was the last active radio mode.
radio, among others music, sports, news, manual channel number entry (컄 page 109) and The screen which then appears de-
and entertainment free of commercials. service info display (컄 page 111). pends on the activation status of the
SIRIUS Satellite Radio uses a fleet of satellite radio service.
high-power satellites to broadcast
The following options are possible:
24 hours per day, coast-to-coast, in the
contiguous US. 앫 Satellite radio service is not activat-
This diverse, satellite-delivered program- ed
ming is available for a monthly subscrip- 앫 Only the preview channel is activat-
tion fee. ed
For more information and service availabil-
앫 Satellite radio service is fully acti-
ity call the SIRIUS Service Center
vated
(컄 page 111), or go to
www.siriusradio.com.
106
Control systems
Satellite radio service is not activated Only the preview channel is activated Main satellite radio menu
The telephone number of the SIRIUS Ser- The satellite radio preview channel ap-
vice Center and the twelve-digit electronic pears.
serial number (SIRIUS-ID) of the particular
receiver are displayed.
1 Main area with channel display

2 Preset position of selected channel
i If only the preview channel is activated, you 3 Selected channel
cannot tune in another channel. If you try to do 4 Selected program category
This information is required when calling this, you will see the screen described in the sec- 5 Sound settings
the SIRIUS Service Center for an activation tion “Satellite radio service is not activated” 6 To select program category
request. (컄 page 107).
7 Channel number of selected channel
8 Other channel information
i Credit card information is also required for Satellite radio service is fully activated
your application. The activation process takes 9 Preset options
approximately 5 to 10 minutes after calling the The main satellite radio menu appears. You a Satellite radio options
SIRIUS Service Center. will hear the channel last tuned in, provid-
ed that it can be received.
왘 Closing screen: Press n.
107
Control systems
i Main area 1 can show all channels includ- 왘 Select category by rotating ymz or Tuning in channels using channel
ed in your subscription. Which channels are sliding qmr and press n. search function
shown depends on the selected program catego-
ry 4. When selecting a channel using the i This function is not possible when only the
Note that categories and channels shown in illus- channel search function or the channel preview channel is activated. If you try to tune in
trations are dependent on programming content list, you have access to the channels a channel in this instance, you will see the
delivered by the service provider. Programming you subscribe to and which are includ- screen described in the section “Satellite radio
content is subject to change. ed in the selected category. service is not activated” (컄 page 107).
Therefore, channel and categories shown in illus- 왘 Slide omp or rotate ymz when the
trations and descriptions contained in this man- i When you select the category “All Chan- main area is selected.
ual may differ from the channels and categories nels”, you have access to all the channels you
delivered by the service provider. subscribe to, regardless of category, when you Depending on the direction in which
are tuning in a channel using the channel search the controller is being pressed or rotat-
Selecting program category function or the channel list.
ed, the system searches upward or
downward and stops at the next receiv-
i The channels are categorized. Categories al- Tuning in channels able channel.
low you to tune to stations broadcasting a cer-
tain type of program. You have the following selection options: i Which channels are found by the channel
search function depends on which channels you
왘 Select “Audio” 씮 “Audio” 씮 “Sat Ra- 앫 The channel search function
have subscribed to and the program category
dio” 씮 “Category”. 앫 The channel presets you have selected (컄 page 108).
The category list appears. 앫 The manual channel number entry
Tuning in channels using channel
i If only the preview channel is activated, only 앫 The channel list presets
certain categories are available on the list. Which
categories these are depend on the service pro- 왘 Select “Audio” 씮 “Audio” 씮 “Sat Ra-
vider. dio” 씮 “Presets”.
or
108
Control systems
왘 Press n when the main area is select- If the channel is no longer available or 왘 Confirming channel entry: Press n.
ed. only the preview channel is activated, Further operation depends on whether
The preset menu appears. The dot R you will see the message “Invalid Chan- the selected channel number is valid or
in front of a preset position indicates nel”. if the channel is included in your sub-
that this is the channel currently select- 왘 Closing message: Press n. scription.
ed and being listened to.
Tuning in channels using manual chan- Channel number is valid and channel is
nel number entry included in subscription
i This function is not possible when only the COMAND tunes in the channel entered.
preview channel is activated. If you try to tune in
a channel in this instance, you will see the Channel number is invalid
screen described in the section “Satellite radio
service is not activated” (컄 page 107). You will see the message “Invalid Chan-
nel”.
왘 Select “Audio” 씮 “Audio” 씮 “Sat Ra-
dio” 씮 “Sat Radio” 씮 “Channel Entry”. 왘 Closing message: Press n.
왘 Select station preset and briefly The menu for manual channel number Channel number is valid but channel is
press n. entry appears. not included in subscription
COMAND tunes in the corresponding 왘 Exiting menu without making an You will see the screen described in the
channel as long as it is included in your entry: Press L back button in the section “Satellite radio service is not acti-
subscription and is still available. center console (컄 page 86). vated” (컄 page 107).
If the channel is not included in your 왘 Increase or decreasing number: 왘 Closing display: Press n.
subscription, you will see the message Slide qmr or rotate ymz.
described in the section “Satellite radio 왘 Selecting next number: Slide omp.
service is not activated” (컄 page 107).
109
Control systems
Tuning in channels using the channel Saving channels

list
왘 Select “Audio” 씮 “Audio” 씮 “Sat Ra- i There are twenty preset positions available.
dio” 씮 “Sat Radio” 씮 “Channel List”. Option 1
The channel list appears. The dot R in 왘 Select “Audio” 씮 “Audio” 씮 “Sat Ra-
front of a list entry indicates the cur- dio” 씮 “Sat Radio” 씮 “Save Channel”.
rently selected channel.
Option 2
왘 Select channel by rotating ymz or
sliding qmr and press n.
ed. 왘 Selecting a preset position:
i The contents of the channel list depends on Option 3 Slide qmr or rotate ymz.
which channels are included in your subscription
and which program category you have selected 왘 Select “Audio” 씮 “Audio” 씮 “Sat Ra-
(컄 page 108). If only the preview channel is acti-
Saving a channel to a selected preset
dio” 씮 “Presets”.
vated, the channel list contains only the preview position
channel. All three of these will call up a preset
If you have called up the channel preset
menu. The dot R in front of a preset posi-
screen using option 1:
tion indicates that this is the channel cur-
rently selected and being listened to. 왘 Press n briefly.
In options 2 and 3:
왘 Press and hold n until you hear a sig-
nal.
The channel is saved.
110
Control systems
Show program info Channel update Calling SIRIUS Service Center
왘 Select “Audio” 씮 “Audio” 씮 “Sat Ra- The service provider may conduct a chan- i It may be necessary to call the SIRIUS Ser-
dio” 씮 “Info”. nel update. vice Center if, for example:
During the update, the message “Updating 앫 You want to cancel the subscription or
i If the program provider does not offer any in- channels...” will appear on the display. re-subscribe at a later date.
formation, the “Info” menu item cannot be se-
lected. No functions can be operated in satellite 앫 You forget to pay the bill.
radio mode during the update.
You will see a screen that may contain the 앫 You sell the car to another person.
following information: 왘 Select “Audio” 씮 “Audio” 씮 “Sat Ra-
앫 Selected program category dio” 씮 “Sat Radio” 씮 “Service”.
앫 Selected channel The telephone number of the SIRIUS
Service Center and the twelve-digit
앫 Artist of the track currently being electronic serial number (SIRIUS-ID) of
played the particular receiver are displayed.
앫 Name of current track 왘 Closing screen: Slide omp or
i The program provider determines what in- press n.
formation is displayed on the screen. COMAND
shows no more than two lines per item of infor-
mation. If an item of information is too long,
COMAND shortens it.
왘 Closing screen: Slide omp or
press n.
111
Control systems
COMAND audio CD/audio DVD/MP3
Safety precautions Permissible file systems

Warning! G 앫 ISO9660/Joliet for CDs
Warning! G Only carry out the following when the vehi- 앫 UDF for DVDs
cle is stationary:
앫 FAT16 or FAT32 for PCMCIA cards with
COMAND is classified as a Class 1 laser 앫 Inserting a disc storage medium
product. You must not open the casing.
앫 Ejecting a disc
There is a risk of exposure to invisible laser
There is a risk of accident by being distract- Multisession CDs
radiation if you open the casing, or if the
casing is faulty or damaged. ed from road and traffic conditions if you For multisession CDs, the first session
COMAND does not contain any parts that load a CD/DVD while the vehicle is in mo- type of the CD determines how COMAND
you are able to maintain yourself. For safety tion. will process the CD.
reasons, all maintenance work must be car- For example, if the first session type is ac-
ried out by qualified technicians. Notes about MP3 mode cording to the audio CD standard and the
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph second session type is according to the
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is Permissible media for MP3 files data CD standard containing MP3 tracks,
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate- COMAND will treat the CD as a conven-
ly 14 m) every second. 앫 CD-R and CD-RW tional audio CD. This means that it is only
앫 DVD-R and DVD-RW possible to access the audio CD tracks.
Access to the MP3 tracks is not possible.
앫 PCMCIA card (컄 page 117)
Similarly, if the first session type is accord-
ing to the data CD standard containing
MP3 tracks and the second session type is
according to the audio CD standard,
COMAND will treat the CD as a data CD.
112
Control systems
This means that it is only possible to ac- If MP3 files are saved in the root directory Permissible MP3 formats
cess the MP3 tracks. Access to the audio itself (uppermost directory on storage me-
COMAND supports the MPEG1 Audio Lay-
CD tracks is not possible. dium), the root directory will also be treat-
er 3 format.
ed as a folder. COMAND will then show the
File structure on a disc name of the root directory as the folder i This format is generally known as “MP3”.
name.
When you create an MP3 disc, the MP3
Permissible bit and sampling rates
tracks can be organized in folders. A folder You must observe the following when as-
can also contain other folders. A disc can signing track names: 앫 Fixed and variable bit rates up to
contain a maximum of 255 folders. Each 320 kbit/s
앫 Track names must have at least one
folder can contain a maximum of
character. 앫 Sampling rates of 24 kHz – 48 kHz
255 tracks and 255 folders. A disc can
contain a maximum of 4000 tracks. Usual- 앫 Track names must have the extension i Only use MP3 tracks with a bit rate of at
ly this number will not be reached because “mp3”. least 128 kbit/s and a sampling rate of at least
each minute of an MP3 track requires ap- 44.1 kHz. Smaller rates can cause a noticeable
앫 There must be a period between the deterioration in sound quality. This is especially
proximately 1 MB of storage space. track name and the extension. the case if you have activated a surround sound
Example of a correct track name: function.
Track and folder names
Track1.mp3
When you create an MP3 disc, you can as- Notes on copyright
sign names to the MP3 tracks and folders. COMAND is unable to recognize an MP3
track if: The music tracks that you create for MP3
COMAND uses these names for the corre- mode and can play back in MP3 mode are
sponding display in MP3 mode. Empty fold- 앫 there is no period between the track ti- generally subject to copyright protection in
ers or folders which contain data other tle and the extension accordance with the applicable interna-
than MP3 tracks are not displayed by 앫 there is no extension tional and national regulations.
COMAND.
i COMAND does not support ID3 tags.
113
Control systems
In many countries, reproductions are not i Audio DVDs differ from recordable DVD-R Notes about CDs/DVDs
permitted without the prior consent of the and DVD-RW discs.
copyright holder, not even for private use.
Data on audio DVDs are stored either in i Audio CDs with copy protection are not
compatible with the CD audio standard and
Make sure that you know the applicable uncompressed format or in lossless com- therefore may not be able to be played by
copyright regulations and that you comply pressed format. The sound quality on au- COMAND.
with these. dio DVDs is therefore better than on There may be playback problems when playing
If you own these rights yourself, e.g. for recordable DVDs that contain MP3 data copied discs.
because the MP3 format uses a lossy type There is a large variety of discs, disc-writing soft-
your own compositions and recordings, or ware and writers available. This variety means
the copyright holder has granted you per- of compression.
that there is no guarantee that the system will be
mission, these restrictions do not apply. You cannot delete data from or record able to play discs that you have written/copied
additional data to commercially available, yourself.
Notes about audio DVD operation prerecorded audio DVDs. There may be playback problems if you use CD-R
or CD-RW type discs you have copied yourself
Please note the following information with a storage capacity of more than 700 MB.
COMAND can playback commercially
about CDs/DVDs and pay special atten- These CDs are not compatible with currently ap-
available, prerecorded audio DVDs that
tion to the notes on copied and/or plicable standards.
bear the following label. You will usually
self-written CDs/DVDs.
find the label on the DVD booklet, the inlay,
or the DVD itself.
114
Control systems
! Do not affix stickers or labels to the discs. Notes about handling CDs/DVDs Inserting CDs and DVDs
These could peel away and damage COMAND.
COMAND is designed to hold discs which com- 앫 Only hold discs by the edge.
ply with the IEC 60908 standard. You can there-
앫 Handle discs carefully to prevent play- Warning! G
fore only use discs with a maximum thickness of
1.3 mm. back problems.
Only insert a CD or DVD when the vehicle is
If you insert thicker discs, e.g. those that contain 앫 Avoid getting scratches, fingerprints stationary. There is a risk of accident by be-
data on both sides (DVD on one side and audio
and dust on discs. ing distracted from road and traffic condi-
data on the other), they cannot be ejected and
can damage COMAND. 앫 Clean discs from time to time with a tions if you load a CD/DVD while the vehicle
commercially-available cleaning cloth. is in motion.
Do not use discs with an 8-cm diameter, even if
they have an adapter. Do not wipe them with a circular mo- Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
Only use round discs with a 12-cm diameter. tion, but only in straight lines from the (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
center outwards. covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate-
ly 14 m) every second.
앫 Only use a pen designed for such a pur-
pose to label discs.
앫 Place discs back in their boxes after i If the CD/DVD has a printed side, this must
face upwards when the CD/DVD is inserted. If
use. neither side is printed, the side to be played
앫 Protect discs from heat and direct sun- should face downwards.
light.
115
Control systems
Loading the CD/DVD changer Loading an individual magazine tray Loading all six magazine trays
The CD/DVD changer can hold up to a to- 왘 Press desired magazine tray button 3. 왘 Press load button 2.
tal of 6 audio CDs or DVDs.
If a disc is loaded, it will be ejected. The DVD changer checks the load sta-
tus of all magazine trays and switches
왘 Take disc out of slot 1.
to the first empty tray.
왘 Wait until LED for magazine tray
button 3 which you pressed flashes 왘 Wait until LED for corresponding maga-
quickly. zine tray button 3 flashes quickly.
왘 Insert disc into slot 1.
왘 Insert disc into slot 1.
The DVD changer draws the disc in and The DVD changer switches to the next
begins playback if: empty magazine tray.
앫 it has been loaded correctly i If a disc is not inserted within approximately

1 Disc slot 15 seconds COMAND resumes playback of the
2 Load button (all magazine trays) 앫 it is a permissible type of disc last disc.
3 Magazine tray buttons 1 – 6 왘 Repeat last two steps until all trays are
i Each magazine tray button 3 indicates the loaded.
status of the corresponding magazine tray by The DVD changer will play the last disc
means of an LED.
you loaded if:
앫 LED off = magazine tray is empty
앫 it has been loaded correctly
앫 LED constantly lit = magazine tray is loaded
앫 LED flashes = CD/DVD changer requesting
앫 it is a permissible type of disc
disc to be loaded
116
Control systems
Inserting a PCMCIA card If the PCMCIA card contains a storage Ejecting from the DVD changer
medium with MP3 tracks, COMAND
i COMAND supports commercially available switches to MP3 mode.
PCMCIA cards or PCMCIA card adapters with
storage media that may not be designed for the Ejecting CDs and DVDs
temperatures which occur in the vehicle. You
should therefore remove the PCMCIA card from
the vehicle when not in use since extreme tem-
peratures could damage these devices. Warning! G
Only eject a disc when the vehicle is station-
ary. You may otherwise be distracted from
the traffic conditions and could cause an ac- 1 Disc slot
cident. 2 Magazine tray buttons 1 – 6
3 Eject button (all discs)
i If you eject one disc while playing another
disc, the DVD changer interrupts playback. Play-
back continues once the disc has been ejected.
왘 Ejecting one disc: Press desired mag-
1 Slot for PCMCIA card azine tray button 2.
왘 Insert PCMCIA card into slot 1. 왘 Take disc out of slot 1.
The side with the contact must point If you do not take the disc out of
towards the slot. slot 1, the DVD changer will draw it
back automatically in approximately
15 seconds. 컄컄
117
Control systems
컄컄 왘 Ejecting all discs: Press eject Ejecting a PCMCIA card

button 3.
The DVD changer switches to the first
loaded tray and ejects the disc.
The DVD changer switches to the next
loaded magazine tray and ejects the
disc.
왘 Repeat last step until magazine is
empty.
1 Eject button
2 Slot for PCMCIA card
왘 Press eject button 1 twice.
The PCMCIA card is ejected.
왘 Take PCMCIA card out of slot 2.
118
Control systems
Submenu overview

CD or DVD-A or MP3 Pause/Stop/Play Tracks/Track Folders Changer Sound

(audio DVD mode only) List/Tracks A-Z (MP3 mode only)
Normal Track Sequence Pause playback Show track list Select folder Select medium Treble
(audio CD mode and
audio DVD mode)
Random Tracks Stop playback Display alphabetical Bass
track listing
(MP3 mode only)
Random folder Restart playback Balance/Fader
(MP3 mode only)
Repeat folder 3D Sound
(MP3 mode only)
Group
(DVD-Audio mode only)
119
Control systems
Switching to audio CD, audio DVD or Example display in audio CD mode Example display in audio DVD mode
MP3 mode
왘 Load CD/DVD (컄 page 115) or

PCMCIA card (컄 page 117).
or
왘 Select “Audio” 씮 “Audio”, then “CD”,
“DVD-Audio” or “MP3”.
or
1 Current playback option 1 Current playback option
twice.
2 Track number 2 Track number
i The M shortcut button takes you directly 3 Disc number 3 Disc number
to the previously set disc mode (audio CD, 4 Disc name (only if saved on the disc) 4 Disc name (only if saved on the disc)
audio DVD or MP3-CD/DVD). The number of 5 Track name (only if saved on the disc) 5 Track name (only if saved on the disc)
times you have to press the shortcut button de- 6 Track time 6 Track time
pends on the previously set mode.
7 Graphic time and track display 7 Graphic time and track display
8 Sound settings 8 Sound settings
9 Medium selection 9 Medium selection
a To call up track listing a To call up track listing
b Disc type b Stop function
c Playback options c Pause (“Play” appears if paused)
d Disc type
e Playback options
120
Control systems
Example display in MP3 mode Stop function The “Pause” screen changes to “Play”.
왘 Continuing playback: Select “Audio”
i This function is only available in audio DVD 씮 “Audio” 씮 “DVD-Audio” 씮 “Play”.
mode.
The “Play” screen changes to “Pause”.
왘 Stopping playback: Select “Audio” 씮
“Audio” 씮 “DVD-Audio” 씮 “Stop”.
Selecting CD/DVD/MP3 media
왘 Restarting playback: Select “Audio”
씮 “Audio” 씮 “DVD-Audio” 씮 “Play”. 왘 Select “Audio” 씮 “Audio”.
Playback starts at the beginning of the 왘 Select “CD”, “DVD-Audio” or “MP3”.
DVD. COMAND begins playback.
1 Current playback option
2 Medium type Pause function 왘 In audio CD, audio DVD and MP3
3 Disc number (not on PCMCIA card) mode: Select “Changer”.
4 Track name or
In audio CD, audio DVD and MP3 mode
5 Current folder path
6 Current folder 왘 Pausing playback: 왘 In audio CD and audio DVD mode
7 Track time Press F briefly. only: Press n when the main area is
8 Graphic time and track display selected.
왘 Continuing playback: Press F
9 Sound settings again briefly. The media list appears. The dot R in-
a Medium selection dicates the current medium.
b Folder listing Only in audio DVD mode 왘 Select a medium or folder.
c Track listing
d Playback options 왘 Pausing playback: COMAND changes the medium.
Select “Audio” 씮 “Audio” 씮 “DVD-Au-
dio” 씮 “Pause”.
121
Control systems
Selecting a track 왘 Only in MP3 mode: Press n when the 왘 Press n when main area is selected.
The track list of the current folder ap-
Selecting by skipping to tracks The track list of the current folder appears.
pears. The dotR indicates the current
왘 Skipping forwards or backwards to This is what the illustration in the right
track.
a track (in CD or DVD mode only): column is showing as well.
Rotate ymz. 왘 Select a track by rotating ymz or slid-
ing qmr.
i Skipping forwards through the tracks skips
to the next track. Skipping backwards through i In MP3 mode, the list shows all the tracks in
the tracks skips to the beginning of the current alphabetical order.
track if the track has been playing for more than
8 seconds. If the track has been playing for less Fast forward/rewind
than 8 seconds, it skips to the start of the previ-
ous track.
If you have switched on the “Random Tracks”
왘 Select main area.
playback option, the order of the tracks is ran- 왘 Slide and hold omp until desired place
dom. is reached. 1 Back folder symbol
Selecting from the track list 2 Current track symbol
Selecting a folder 3 Track symbol
왘 Select “Audio” 씮 “Audio”.
i This function is only available in audio MP3 왘 Selecting one folder higher: Select
왘 Select “CD”, “DVD-Audio” or “MP3”. mode. the Q symbol.
왘 Select “Tracks”, “Tracks A-Z” or “Track 왘 Select “Audio” 씮 “Audio” 씮 “MP3” 씮 The display changes to the next folder
list”. “Folder”. up in the folder structure on the disc.
or or
122
Control systems
i The tracks on an audio DVD can be stored in 앫 “Random Folder” (in MP3 mode only)
various audio formats. The number of audio for- Tracks in the active folder and any sub-
mats depends on the audio DVD. folders playback in random order.
왘 Select “Audio” 씮 “Audio” 씮 “DVD-Au- 앫 “Repeat Folder” (in MP3 mode only)
dio” 씮 “Group”. Tracks in the active folder will be re-
peated until you switch the function
i The “Group” menu item cannot be selected off.
if only one audio format is saved on the DVD.
The list of available audio formats appears. 왘 Selecting an option: Select “Audio”
A dot R indicates the format currently se- 씮 “Audio”.
1 Back folder symbol lected. 왘 Select “CD”, “DVD-Audio” or “MP3”.
2 Current folder symbol
3 Folder symbol containing tracks 왘 Changing setting: Slide qmr or The option list appears. A dot R indi-
rotate ymz. cates which option is switched on.
왘 Selecting a folder: Select desired fold-
er. 왘 Exiting menu: Slide omp. 왘 Select an option and press n.
You will see the tracks in the folder. The option is switched on. For all op-
Playback options
tions except “Normal Track Sequence”,
왘 Select a track. you will see a corresponding indicator
The following options are available:
The track is played and the correspond- in the main area.
ing folder is now the active folder. 앫 “Normal Track Sequence”
Tracks playback in the order on the i The “Normal Track Sequence” option is au-
tomatically activated when you select a different
Setting the audio format disc (e.g. track 1, 2, 3, etc.).
medium. If an option is activated, it remains acti-
앫 “Random Tracks” vated after COMAND is switched on/off.
This function lets you choose the audio for- Tracks playback in a random order
mat that you would like COMAND to play (e.g. track 3, 8, 5, etc.).
and is only available in DVD-Audio mode.
123
Control systems
Depending on your vehicle’s production Automatic picture fade-out i There may be playback problems when play-
date the COMAND video DVD function may ing copied DVDs.
not be available. If a video DVD is playing when the vehicle There is a large variety of discs, disc-writing soft-
is shifted from P into N, D or R the picture ware and writers available. This variety means
is faded out automatically and the follow- that there is no guarantee that the system will be
Warning! G ing message appears in the display: “In or- able to play discs that you have written/copied
yourself.
der not to distract driver, picture is faded
COMAND is classified as a Class 1 laser
out while the vehicle is in motion”. Some DVDs may not comply with the
product. You must not open the casing.
NTSC or PAL TV playback standards.
There is a risk of exposure to invisible laser When the vehicle is shifted back into P, the
Sound, picture and other playback prob-
radiation if you open the casing, or if the picture comes on again.
lems may occur when you play such DVDs.
casing is faulty or damaged.
COMAND does not contain any parts that Notes about video DVD operation COMAND can playback video DVDs meet-
you are able to maintain yourself. For safety ing the following requirements:
reasons, all maintenance work must be car- COMAND can playback commercially
앫 Correct regional code
ried out by qualified technicians. available, prerecorded video DVDs that
bear the following label. You will usually 앫 NTSC or PAL TV standard
find the label on the DVD booklet, the inlay, The appropriate information is usually giv-
or the DVD itself. en either on the DVD or the DVD box. The
factory setting of COMAND is regional
code 1. The setting can be changed at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. This
i Video DVDs differ from recordable DVD-R will allow you to playback video DVDs with
and DVD-RW discs. other regional codes, as long as they com-
ply with the NTSC or PAL TV standard.
124
Control systems
Notes about handling DVDs 앫 Only use a pen designed for such a pur- Inserting or ejecting DVDs
pose to label discs.
! Do not affix stickers or labels to the discs. 앫 Place discs back in their boxes after
These could peel away and damage COMAND.
use.
Warning! G
COMAND is designed to hold discs which com-
ply with the IEC 60908 standard. You can there- 앫 Protect discs from heat and direct sun- Only insert or eject a DVD when the vehicle
fore only use discs with a maximum thickness of light. is stationary. There is a risk of accident by
1.3 mm.
being distracted from road and traffic condi-
If you insert thicker discs, e.g. those that contain
data on both sides (DVD on one side and audio Functional limitations tions if you load a DVD while the vehicle is in
data on the other), they cannot be ejected and motion.
can damage COMAND. Depending on the DVD, it is possible that
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
Do not use discs with an 8 cm diameter, even if
certain functions or actions may be tempo-
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
they have an adapter. rarily or permanently unavailable. If you try
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate-
Only use round discs with a 12 cm diameter. to utilize such functions or carry out such
actions, you will see the 7 symbol in the
앫 Only hold discs by the edge.
display.
앫 Handle discs carefully to prevent play- 왘 Inserting a DVD (컄 page 115).
back problems. or
앫 Avoid getting scratches, fingerprints 왘 Ejecting a DVD (컄 page 117).
and dust on discs.
앫 Clean discs from time to time with a
commercially-available cleaning cloth.
Do not wipe them with a circular mo-
tion, but only in straight lines from the
center outwards.
125
Control systems
Submenu overview of video DVD
DVD-V Pause/Play Stop Changer Sound

DVD Functions Pause playback Pause Playback Select medium Treble
Brightness Continue playback Stop playback Bass
Contrast Restart playback Balance/Fader
Color 3D Sound
16:9 Optimized
4:3
Widescreen
Switching to video DVD mode i The M shortcut button takes you directly
to the previously set disc mode (audio CD/DVD,
왘 Insert a DVD (컄 page 115). MP3-CD/DVD or video DVD). The number of
times you have to press the shortcut button de-
or pends on the previously set mode.
왘 Select “Video” 씮 “Video” 씮 “Video
DVD”.
or
twice.
126
Control systems
Hiding/showing the DVD control menu Hiding/showing the menu system Fast forward/rewind
왘 Hiding the menu: Slide qmr. 왘 Showing the menu: Press n. 왘 Slide omp and hold until you get to the
왘 Showing the menu: Slide qmr. 왘 Hiding the menu: Press n when the desired scene.
main menu area is selected.
or Selecting the DVD medium
왘 Wait for approximately 8 seconds.
DVD”.
왘 Show the menu system, if necessary
(컄 page 127).
왘 Select “Changer”.
The media list appears. The dotR indi-
cates the current medium.
Menu system 왘 Select a medium.
1 Video DVD options COMAND changes the medium.
Control menu
2 Pause
1 Disc type 3 Stop
2 Current track 4 Medium selection
3 Current scene 5 Sound settings
4 Elapsed track time
5 Show the menu system
127
Control systems
Stop playback Pause playback Selecting film/track
왘 Select “Video” 씮 “Video” 씮 “Video 왘 Select “Video” 씮 “Video” 씮 “Video i This function is only available if the DVD is
DVD”. DVD”. comprised of several film/tracks.
왘 Show the menu system, if necessary 왘 Show the menu system, if necessary 왘 Select “Video” 씮 “Video” 씮 “Video
(컄 page 127). (컄 page 127). DVD”.
왘 Stop play: Select “Stop”. 왘 Pause playback: Select “Pause”. 왘 Show the menu system, if necessary
In the display, “Pause” changes to In the display, “Pause” changes to (컄 page 127).
“Play”. “Play”. 왘 Select “DVD-V” 씮 “DVD Functions” 씮
왘 Continue playback: Select “Play”. 왘 Continue playback: Select “Play”. “Title selection”.
Play is continued from the point at Play is continued from the point at A selection list appears.
which it was stopped. which it was stopped. 왘 Select a film/track.
왘 Stop playback: Select “Stop” again
Selecting scene/chapter Screen settings
while playback is stopped.
or 왘 Make sure that the control menu is
shown (컄 page 127). Setting brightness, contrast and color
왘 Select “Stop” twice in quick succession
during playback. 왘 Skipping forwards or back: Slide 왘 Select “Video” 씮 “Video” 씮 “Video
omp or turn ymz. DVD”.
왘 Resume playback: Select “Play”.
왘 Show the menu system, if necessary
Playbacks starts again from the begin- (컄 page 127).
ning.
왘 Select “DVD-V” 씮 “Brightness” 씮
“Contrast”or “Color”.
128
Control systems
왘 Changing settings: Slide qmr or turn DVD menu

ymz until you reach the desired set-
ting. The DVD menu is the menu stored on the
DVD itself. It is structured in various ways
왘 Saving settings: Press n.
according to the individual DVD and per-
mits certain actions and settings.
Changing the picture format
왘 Select “Video” 씮 “Video” 씮 “Video Calling up the DVD menu
DVD”.
왘 Show the menu system, if necessary DVD”.
(컄 page 127). 왘 Reconfirming the selection: Select
왘 Show the menu system, if necessary “Select”.
왘 Select “DVD-V”. (컄 page 127).
COMAND carries out the action de-
The DVD-V menu appears. The dotRin 왘 Select “DVD-V”씮 “DVD Func- fined by the selected DVD menu item.
front of a menu item - tions”씮“Menu”.
“16:9 Optimized”, “4:3” or “Wide-
The DVD menu appears.
i Depending on the DVD, it is possible the
screen” indicates the current format. menu item “Play” either has no function or has
no function in certain parts of the DVD menu.
왘 Changing the format: Slide qmr or Selecting menu items in the DVD menu
turn ymz, until you reach the desired
왘 Slide qmr or omp.
setting.
왘 Confirming the selection: Press n.
왘 Saving the format: Press n.
The selection menu appears.
129
Control systems
Stopping the film or skipping to the i Depending on the DVD, it is possible the Back to the film
beginning/end of a scene menu items H and G either have no func-
tion or have no function in certain parts of the 왘 Press the L back button until you
왘 Select a menu item of your choice from DVD menu. can see the film.
the DVD menu.
or
Switching to the next highest DVD
The selection menu appears.
menu level 왘 Select the corresponding menu item in
the DVD menu.
왘 Press the L back button in the cen-
or
ter console.
왘 Select a menu item of your choice from
or
the DVD menu.
왘 Select the corresponding menu item in
왘 Select the menu item “Back (to the
the DVD menu.
film)” in the selection menu.
or
왘 Select a menu item of your choice from menu item “Back (to the film)” either has no
1 Stop film the DVD menu. function or has no function in certain parts of the
2 Skip to the end of a scene DVD menu.
왘 Select the menu item “Go up” in the se-
3 Skip to the beginning of a scene lection menu.
왘 Stopping the film: Select “Stop”.
왘 Skipping to the end of a scene: menu item “Go up” either has no function or has
Select H. no function in certain parts of the DVD menu.
왘 Skipping to the beginning of a

scene: Select G.
130
Control systems
Setting the language and audio format 왘 Exiting the menu: Slide omp. 왘 Saving a setting: Press n.
왘 Exiting the menu: Slide omp.
i This function is not available for all DVDs. If Subtitles and camera angles
it is available, you can set the language for the
DVD menu and the audio language and/or the Interactive content
i This function is not available for all DVDs.
audio format. The number of settings you can The number of settings you can make is deter-
make is determined by the content of the DVD. It mined by the content of the DVD. It may also be i DVDs may include interactive content (e.g. a
may also be possible to make the settings in the possible to make the settings in the DVD menu video game). In a video game you can control the
DVD menu (컄 page 129). (컄 page 129). play by selecting and initiating actions. The type
and number of actions depends on the DVD.
왘 Select “Video” 씮 “Video” 씮 “Video 왘 Select “Video” 씮 “Video” 씮 “Video
DVD”. 왘 Selecting an action: Slide qmr or
DVD”.
omp, or turn ymz, until you reach the
왘 Show the menu system, if necessary 왘 Show the menu system, if necessary desired setting.
(컄 page 127). (컄 page 127).
왘 Initiating an action: Press n.
왘 Select “DVD-V” 씮 “DVD Functions”. 왘 Select “DVD-V” 씮 “DVD Functions”.
A menu appears, the first entry “Se-
왘 Select “Menu Language” or “Audio Lan- 왘 Select “Subtitles” or “Camera angle”. lect” is highlighted.
guage”.
In both cases a selection list will ap- 왘 Press n.
In both cases a selection list will appear. The dotRin front of an entry
pear. The dotRin front of an entry indicates the current language.
indicates the current language.
왘 Changing the setting: Slide qmr or
왘 Changing the setting: Slide qmr or turn ymz, until you reach the desired
turn ymz, until you reach the desired setting.
setting.
왘 Saving a setting: Press n.
131
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
Safety precautions Operating options

Warning! G
COMAND can be found on (컄 page 85) and
Warning! G Never operate radio transmitters equipped
(컄 page 94).
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from out being connected to an external antenna) i Various mobile phone cradles can be in-
using a cellular telephone while driving. from inside the vehicle while the engine is stalled in the front center armrest, see separate
Whether or not prohibited by law, for safety running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc- installation instructions for the mobile phone
reasons, the driver should not use the cellu- tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos- cradle. These mobile phone cradles can be ob-
tained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
lar telephone while the vehicle is in motion. sibly resulting in an accident and/or
ter. For more information about telephone
Stop the vehicle in a safe location before personal injury. (컄 page 507).
placing or answering a call.
When the mobile phone is inserted in the
If you nonetheless choose to use the mobile General notes
cradle, you can operate the telephone us-
phone1 while driving, please use the hands-
ing the following devices:
free feature and be sure to pay attention to
Calls disconnected while the vehicle is
the traffic situation at all times. Use the mo- 앫 mobile phone keypad
in motion
bile phone only when road, weather and traf- 앫 COMAND telephone keypad
fic conditions permit. Otherwise, you may A call may be disconnected if:
not be able to observe traffic conditions and 앫 buttons s and t on the multi-
앫 there is insufficient network coverage
could endanger yourself and others. function steering wheel (컄 page 265)
앫 you move from one transmitter/receiv-
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph 앫 Voice Control* (컄 page 289)
er area (cell) into another and no chan-
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is nels are free or the cell is full 앫 Bluetooth® headset (컄 page 146)
covering a distance of 44 feet (approxima-
tely 14 m) every second.
1
Observe all legal requirements.
132
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
Please note that these functions are only Operation using the mobile phone and Functional restrictions
available with Mercedes-Benz approved Bluetooth® headset is described in the re-
You will not be able to use the telephone,
mobile phones. Please contact an autho- spective separate Operating Instructions. or you may have to wait a while, in the fol-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center for informa-
lowing situations:
tion on features available for your mobile Caller ID
phone of choice. 앫 If the telephone has not yet logged into
COMAND can display the telephone num-
the network.
You can control other functions of the mo- ber and the name of the caller, e.g. for an
bile phone via the COMAND, instrument incoming call and also in other menus or The telephone automatically tries to
cluster control system (컄 page 276) or displays. log into a network. If no network is
Voice Control*. For the telephone number to be displayed, available, you will also not be able to
the caller must transmit their telephone make a “911” emergency call.
i In order for the functions described in this number. If you attempt to make an outgoing call,
section to work correctly, the Bluetooth® head-
This is also the case for name displays. For the “No Service” message will appear
set must be linked to COMAND (컄 page 239).
Please make sure any Bluetooth® headset linked this, the telephone number and the name for a short while.
with the mobile phone is switched off or that the of the caller must also be saved in the mo- 앫 If the mobile phone is not inserted in
headset is linked with COMAND before you in- bile phone book. the cradle.
sert the mobile phone in the cradle (컄 page 507)
and use the telephone functions with COMAND. 앫 SIM card is not inserted in GSM type
phone.
The descriptions in this section assume
that the mobile phone is inserted in the i The roof cargo container* may impair mo-
cradle. Exceptions to this are clearly stat- bile phone reception. In an emergency, remove
ed. the mobile phone from the mobile phone cradle
(컄 page 507) to make a call.
Unless otherwise indicated, the descrip-
tions and illustrations in this section refer
to COMAND and the telephone keypad.
133
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
Notes about COMAND telephone fea- contact the Mercedes-Benz Customer As- Activating telephone mode
tures using a Bluetooth® connection sistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
or your nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz 왘 Select “Telephone” 씮 “Telephone” 씮
Many of the Mercedes-Benz approved mo-
Center. “Telephone”.
bile phones, cradles and adaptors avail-
able for use in your vehicle utilize or
Switching telephone on or off
Bluetooth® technology to communicate 왘 Press s on telephone keypad.
with each other and the vehicle. Depend-
왘 Switching on: Insert mobile phone
ing on your phone brand and model, the Telephone keypad
into cradle when COMAND is switched
number of in-vehicle or on-display
on.
COMAND telephone features supported
via Bluetooth® communication, and thus or
available for your use, may vary. 왘 Switch on the mobile phone
The descriptions and illustrations in this (see mobile phone operating instruc-
section are based on the use of fully com- tions).
patible Mercedes-Benz approved mobile 왘 Switching off: Select “Telephone” 씮
phones and cradles that do not utilize Blue- “Telephone” 씮 “Telephone OFF”.
tooth® technology to communicate with
each other. If your vehicle is equipped with or
integrated Bluetooth® functionality than a 왘 Switch off mobile phone (see mobile 1 Telephone keypad
Bluetooth® capable mobile phone, head- phone operating instructions). 2 Folding cover
set, Laptop, PDA, etc. is required to utilize
those features.
For additional information about
Mercedes-Benz approved Bluetooth® mo-
bile phones and related accessories please
134
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
With the telephone keypad you can: “911” emergency call i The roof cargo container* may impair mo-
bile phone reception. In an emergency, remove
앫 Enter and clear numbers and special
characters i The “911” emergency call system is a public the mobile phone from the mobile phone cradle
service. Using it without due cause is a criminal (컄 page 507) to make a call.
앫 Reject, accept, connect and end calls offense.
Placing a “911” emergency call before
왘 Entering characters: Select “Tele- i This function places a call to the local 911 entering PIN/PIN2, PUK/PUK2 or un-
phone” 씮 “Telephone” 씮 “Telephone”. provider. It does not initiate a Tele Aid call.
lock code
왘 Fold up cover 2. The following conditions must be fulfilled
in order to make a “911” emergency call: Entering the number using the COMAND
왘 Enter characters using A - #.
앫 The phone is switched on. controller
i You can enter the * character by
pressing > once. Pressing this button again 앫 A mobile network is available. 왘 Select “Telephone” 씮 “Telephone” 씮
within 1.5 seconds enters the + character. “Telephone” 씮 “Dial 911”.
앫 There is a valid SIM card in the phone
왘 Deleting individual characters: (not necessary in all mobile networks). Entering the number using the tele-
Press *. phone keypad
i If no SIM card is inserted in the mobile
왘 Deleting an entire word or number: phone, you can only initiate a “911” emergency 왘 Enter digits 9-1-1 (컄 page 134).
Press and hold * until the word or call by using COMAND and the mobile phone.
number is deleted. 왘 Press s.
If you cannot make an emergency call, you
must initiate rescue measures yourself.
The “911” emergency call is a public ser-
vice. Any misuse is punishable by law.
135
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
Placing a “911” emergency call after Confirming the emergency call Entering the PIN
entering PIN/PIN2, PUK/PUK2 or un-
After the digits have been entered, you will
lock code
see the question “Do you want to dial the i Your PIN code (Personal Identification Num-
ber code) prevents unauthorized persons from
911 emergency number?”. using your GSM mobile phone. The PIN code is a
Entering the number using the COMAND
controller 왘 Use COMAND controller to select number string, which you have to enter when
“Yes”. switching on the telephone.
왘 Select “Telephone” 씮 “Telephone” 씮 The PIN entry applies only to GSM mobile
“Telephone”. The telephone makes the connection. phones.
왘 Select all the digits in sequence. 왘 Wait until the emergency call center
answers and describe the emergency Entering using the COMAND controller
왘 Select “S”.
situation. 왘 Select “Telephone” 씮 “Telephone” 씮
Entering the number using the tele- “Telephone”.
phone keypad 왘 Entering: Select all the digits in se-
왘 Enter digits 9-1-1 (컄 page 134). quence.
왘 Press s. 왘 Deleting a digit: Select ) and briefly
press n.
왘 Deleting an entire number: Select )
and press and hold n until the number
is deleted.
왘 Confirming an entry: Press n.
136
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
Entering using the telephone keypad Entering the PUK/PUK2 Entering the unlock code
왘 Entering: Enter digits (컄 page 134).
i The PUK/PUK2 entry (Personal Unblocking Many mobile phones can be protected
왘 Confirming an entry: Press n or Key) applies only to GSM mobile phones. from unauthorized use with an unlock code
press s. (see mobile phone operating instructions).
If you enter the PIN or PIN2 incorrectly
If you wish to use the phone functions
three times, the SIM card will be locked.
Entering the PIN2 when the unlock code is active, a screen
A corresponding message appears in the
appears requesting that you enter the un-
display. It is necessary to enter the
i The PIN2 entry applies only to GSM mobile PUK/PUK2 to unlock it. The PUK and/or
lock code. You cannot use the phone func-
phones. tions (except “911” emergency call) until
PUK2 are provided by your telephone ser-
The phone may request the PIN2 in order you have entered the unlock code.
vice provider.
to use certain functions. A corresponding 왘 Proceed in the same way as entering
message appears in the display. 왘 Enter PUK/PUK2 digits into mobile
the PIN (컄 page 136).
phone.
왘 Enter PIN2 digits into mobile phone.
137
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
Telephone submenu overview

Name Call lists DTMF Mic OFF/ON Text message

(only when the mobile (not during a call) (only during a call) (only during a call) (not during a call)
phone is inserted in the
cradle)
Display COMAND phone Display call list selection: Send numerical se- Switch hands-free mi- Call up SMS inbox
book quence crophone on/off
앫 Calls received
앫 Calls dialed
138
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
Main telephone menu 1 Numbers/characters to enter tele- Mailbox

phone number
왘 Calling up main menu: Select “Tele- The symbol in the example illustration
phone” 씮 “Telephone” 씮 “Telephone”. 2 Symbol for new voice message in above indicates that your mailbox contains
mailbox new voice messages. You will have to call
or
3 Symbol for unread SMS messag- the mailbox in order to retrieve the mes-
왘 Press s on the telephone keypad es in SMS inbox (컄 page 155) sages.
(컄 page 134).
4 Signal strength and network status You can call your mailbox by:
i If you press s when the main telephone display 앫 Speed dialing (컄 page 144)
menu has already been called up, the “Calls Di-
aled” list will appear (컄 page 140). 앫 Network status “READY” = mobile 앫 Entering a telephone number using the
phone is logged in with its own telephone keypad (컄 page 143)
provider’s network
앫 Entering the telephone number using
앫 Network status “READY ROAM” = the COMAND controller (컄 page 143)
mobile phone is logged in with an-
other provider’s network i Once connection with your mailbox has
been established, the mailbox system will guide
앫 Network status “No Service” = No you through the next steps.
network available
5 To show COMAND phone book
(“Name”) (컄 page 147)
6 To call up text message (SMS)
(컄 page 155)
7 To display call list selection
(컄 page 140)
139
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
Call lists You will see the telephone number of caller 6 if

앫 the caller transmitted the telephone number
COMAND can display the following calls in
앫 no caller data is saved in either the COMAND
separate lists: address book or the phone book on the mo-
앫 Calls received bile phone
An unknown caller 5 has not transmitted his or
앫 Calls dialed
her telephone number.
i The list of incoming calls contains received i In the list of dialed calls, you will see the
calls as well as missed calls. name of the person called if you have saved his
or her telephone number and name in the
Calling up a list Illustration: list of incoming calls COMAND address book or in the phone book on
1 To close list the mobile phone. If no data has been saved, you
왘 Select “Call List” from main telephone will see the telephone number.
menu. 2 To switch list display (“123” or “ABC”)
3 To call up options 왘 Switching to list display: Select
왘 Select “Calls Received” or “Calls Di- 4 Name or telephone number of a caller “123” or “ABC”.
aled”. 5 Unknown caller
The display changes to telephone num-
The corresponding list appears. 6 Telephone number of a caller
ber or name display.
i The “Calls Received” and “Calls Dialed” i In the list of calls received, you will see the 왘 Closing list: Slide omp and
menu items do not function if the respective list name of caller 4 if
select “Back”.
has no entries. 앫 the caller transmitted the telephone number
The “Call List” menu item does not function if 왘 Selecting a list entry: Slide qmr or
neither list has any entries. 앫 the name and telephone number are saved
rotate ymz and select entry.
in the COMAND address book or in the
phone book on the mobile phone
앫 the telephone number is saved in the same
way in which the caller transmits it
140
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
Displaying details of a list entry Saving as a new entry in the COMAND

address book
COMAND can also show a shortened list
entry in its entirety. 왘 Slide omp or rotate ymz and select
list entry (컄 page 140).
왘 Select list entry (컄 page 140).
왘 Select “Options” 씮 “Save” 씮 “New En-
왘 Slide omp and select “Options” 씮
“Details”. try”.
The detailed view appears. i “Save” does not function if the selected list
entry is already saved in the COMAND address
왘 Closing detailed view: Slide qmr or book.
omp or press n. 1 Data field
왘 Select a number category, e.g. “Home”.
2 Input mark (cursor)
Saving a list entry in the address book 왘 Select a telephone category, e.g. “Land 3 Input characters
Line”.
i List entries that show a telephone number 왘 If you want to change the available
are neither saved in the COMAND address book, 왘 Select “Save”. characters: Proceed as described in
nor in the phone book on the mobile phone. You the “Changing data field” paragraph in
The input menu appears with the data
can save such entries in the COMAND address the “Assigning a New Entry in the Ad-
book. You can also save list entries in the fields. The data field for the telephone
number is filled in automatically. The dress Book” section (컄 page 151).
COMAND address book which have already been
saved in the phone book on the mobile phone. data field for the last name is also filled
in automatically if the entry to be saved Adding to an existing entry in the
contains a name. COMAND address book
왘 If you would like to save the entry 왘 Slide omp or rotate ymz and select
now: Select ?. list entry (컄 page 140).
왘 Select “Options” 씮 “Save” 씮 “Add”. 컄컄
141
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
컄컄 i “Save” does not function if the selected list If four numbers are saved for the entry 왘 Accepting: Select “Accept”.
entry is already saved in the COMAND address you are searching for, a prompt will ap- or
book. pear asking whether you want to over-
write one of the existing numbers. 왘 Press s on the telephone keypad or
왘 Select a number category to add,
on the multifunction steering wheel.
e.g. “Home”. 왘 Select “Yes” or “No”.
or
왘 Select a telephone category to add, If you select “Yes”, a selection list will
e.g. “Land Line”. appear containing the four existing 왘 Press 0 on the multifunction steer-
numbers. ing wheel.
왘 Select “Save”.
왘 Select the number to be overwritten. 왘 Use the mobile phone (see mobile
The search menu for COMAND address
phone operating instructions).
book entries appears. COMAND overwrites the selected num-
ber with the new data. or
왘 Search for desired entry.
왘 Use the Bluetooth® headset
i There is a detailed description of searching Incoming call (see headset operating instructions).
for an COMAND address book entry in the
“Searching for an address book entry” section i The use of a Bluetooth® headset requires
(컄 page 226). Rejecting or accepting the call Bluetooth® to be activated and the Bluetooth®
Rejecting: Select “Reject”. headset to be authorized (컄 page 239).
왘 Press n when you have finished 왘
searching. or If you have accepted the call using
COMAND saves the data if there are COMAND, the telephone keypad, the mul-
왘 Press t on the telephone keypad or tifunction steering wheel or the mobile
fewer than four numbers assigned to on the multifunction steering wheel.
the entry you are searching for in the phone, the call will be conducted via the
selected number category. i If you have a CDMA/TDMA mobile phone hands-free system. The volume of the call
and reject a call, only the ring tone will stop. The can be adjusted (컄 page 96).
call itself can only be ended by the caller.
142
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
If you have accepted the call using the Entering the telephone number using i A detailed description of how to enter digits
Bluetooth® headset, the call will be con- the COMAND controller using the telephone keypad can be found on
ducted via the headset. (컄 page 88).
왘 Switching screen to telephone
Further operating functions can be found mode: Call up main telephone menu 왘 Connecting a call: Press s.
in the “Functions during a single-call con- (컄 page 139).
nection” section (컄 page 145). Redial
왘 Entering digits: Select desired digits
You can also accept a call if the Switching screen to telephone
by rotating ymz or sliding omp and 왘
COMAND display is showing a screen oth- mode: Call up main telephone menu
press n.
er than the telephone mode screen. After (컄 page 139).
accepting the call, you will see the caller’s 왘 Deleting individual digits: Select )
data in a window. and briefly press n. 왘 Use COMAND controller to select
“S”.
왘 Closing window: Slide qmr or omp 왘 Deleting an entire telephone num-
or press n. ber: Select ) and press and hold n or
until the telephone number is deleted. 왘 Press s on the telephone keypad
Making an outgoing call 왘 Connecting a call: Select “S”. (컄 page 88).
The list of dialed numbers appears. The
i If you place an outgoing call and receive a Entering a telephone number using the most recently dialed number is at the
busy signal, the telephone automatically starts telephone keypad
to redial as long as the provider and the mobile top.
phone support this function (see mobile phone 왘 Switching screen to telephone 왘 Select desired entry.
operating instructions). mode: Call up main telephone menu
While the call is connecting, you can also send (컄 page 139). 왘 Connecting a call: Press n.
character strings (컄 page 145).
왘 Use telephone keypad to enter digits. i If the list of dialed calls contains no entries,
the “S” menu item cannot be selected and the
s button on the telephone keypad does not
function.
143
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
Placing a call to a call list entry or Calling up speed-dial presets using the 왘 Deleting message: Press n.
COMAND phone book entry COMAND controller
왘 Call up a call list and select an entry 왘 Switching screen to telephone Calling up speed-dial numbers using the
(컄 page 140). mode: Call up main telephone menu telephone keypad
(컄 page 139). 왘 Switching screen to telephone
or
mode: Call up main telephone menu
왘 Call up COMAND phone book and se- 왘 Entering number of a speed-dial pre-
(컄 page 139).
lect an entry (컄 page 147). set: Select all the digits in sequence.
왘 Deleting individual digits: 왘 Single-digit numbers: Press and hold
왘 Connecting a call: Press n. A - 9 buttons.
Select ) and briefly press n.
Speed dialing 왘 Deleting entire number: or
Select ) and press n until the 왘 Single- and two-digit numbers: Enter
You can save telephone numbers in the
number is deleted. number using the A - 9 buttons.
speed-dial preset locations on the mobile
phone and call up the speed-dial presets 왘 Connecting a call (speed-dial pre- 왘 Press s.
(see mobile phone operating instructions). sets 1 -99): Select “S”.
or
i By default, the mailbox number is preset in or
왘 Three-digit numbers: Enter number
the speed dial memory unless you have modified
왘 Connecting a call (speed-dial pre- using the A - 9 buttons.
it. For more information on the mailbox
sets 100 - 999): Select “#” after the
(컄 page 139). 왘 Press #, and then s.
digits 씮 “S”.
You can also call up speed-dial numbers In all three cases, COMAND connects
using COMAND. In both cases, the telephone connects
the call to the saved telephone num-
the call to the saved telephone num-
ber. If the speed-dial memory contains
i Operation during call connection depends ber. If the speed-dial memory contains
no telephone numbers, you will see a
on the speed-dial preset position called up. no telephone numbers, you will see a
corresponding message.
corresponding message.
144
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
왘 Deleting message: Press n. i The name of the person you are speaking 왘 Press F shortcut button.
with can only be seen in display 7 if his or her
The > symbol disappears.
Functions during a single-call telephone number and name have been saved in
connection the COMAND address book or phone book on
the mobile phone. The telephone number must Sending a character string via DTMF
also be saved in the same way in which the per-
son you are talking to transmits it. i This function is not possible with every mo-
bile phone. If the mobile phone supports the
function, you can use it during the call connec-
Switching the hands-free microphone tion and also during a call.
on or off
Answering machines or other devices can
왘 Switching screen to telephone be controlled by character strings (e.g. for
mode: Call up main telephone menu remote query functions).
(컄 page 139).
왘 Switching off microphone: Sending character strings via the DTMF
Select “Mic OFF” and press n. menu
Illustration: telephone mode during a call
1 Symbol for active telephone con- or 왘 During a call, select “DTMF”.
nection (also visible in other operating 왘 Press F shortcut button. The DTMF dialing display appears. 컄컄
modes)
2 Signal strength display If the microphone is switched off,
3 To switch hands-free microphone on or the > symbol appears in the main ar-
off ea.
4 Length of call display 왘 Switching on microphone:
5 To send character strings Select “Mic ON”.
6 To end a call
or
7 Person you are calling
145
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
컄컄 i Telephone numbers containing the + char- Transferring a call

acter may impair the function.
왘 Switching back to the call display: From the hands-free system to the
Select “Y”. Bluetooth® headset
Sending character strings via the tele- i The use of a Bluetooth® headset requires
Bluetooth® to be activated and the Bluetooth®
phone keypad headset to be authorized (컄 page 239).
왘 Press corresponding button on tele- The call transfer is controlled by pressing
phone keypad. the PTT button on the Bluetooth® headset
1 Back to the call display Each character you select is immedi- (see headset operating instructions). Nor-
2 Character entry ately sent. mally, it is sufficient to press the PTT but-
3 To call up the phone book ton once, but under certain circumstances
i The + character may impair the function. you may have to press it a second time.
왘 Sending individual characters:
Rotate ymz or slide omp and select Ending an active call Once the call has been transferred to the
desired character. Bluetooth® headset, all the functions will
왘 Ending a call: Select “4 END” in the be available to you which are described in
Each character you select can be seen call display.
in the main area and is sent immediate- the “Functions during a single-call connec-
ly. or tion” section (컄 page 145).
왘 Sending a phone book entry as a 왘 Press t on the telephone keypad or Exception: “Switching the hands-free mi-
character string: Select “Name”. on the multifunction steering wheel. crophone on or off” function (컄 page 145).
왘 Select desired phone book entry. The COMAND display will change to
the previously selected display, if appli-
The entry is immediately sent as a char- cable.
acter string.
146
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
From the Bluetooth® headset to the From the mobile phone to the If any of the telephone numbers of a phone
hands-free system hands-free system book entry in the mobile phone are the
same as an address book entry, COMAND
On most Bluetooth® headsets, you press 왘 Insert mobile phone into cradle.
will only display the address book entry.
the PTT button on the headset twice quick-
Once the call has been transferred to
ly to transfer the call (see headset operat- If the entries are not the same, the CO-
the hands-free feature, all the functions
ing instructions). MAND phone book will show the phone
will be available to you which are de-
book entry in the mobile phone.
scribed in the “Functions during a sin-
From the hands-free system to the mo-
gle-call connection” section
bile phone Calling up the COMAND phone book
(컄 page 145).
왘 If the mobile phone has a folding up- 왘 Select “Telephone” 씮 “Telephone” 씮
per section: Flip upper section open. COMAND phone book “Telephone” 씮 “Name”.
왘 Take mobile phone out of cradle. The COMAND phone book appears. 컄컄
The COMAND phone book contains both
The “No telephone inserted” message the COMAND address book entries and
appears on the COMAND display. Sub- mobile phone entries that have at least
sequent operation is only possible us- one telephone number.
ing the mobile phone.
The COMAND address book entries are
permanently available even when a mobile
phone is not inserted in the cradle.
When the mobile phone is inserted in the
cradle, COMAND will read the phone book
entries in the mobile phone and compares
them with the COMAND address book en-
tries.
147
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
컄컄 Entries with category symbol 1 come Switching between the smart speller
from the mobile phone. The following cate- and the list
gory symbols are possible:
왘 Switching from the smart speller to
앫 = symbol for “Mobile” category the list: Slide mq repeatedly or press
n until the smart speller is hidden.
앫 = symbol for “Home” category
or
앫 = symbol for “Work” category
왘 Rotate ymz or slide omp and
앫 = symbol for “Fax” category
select ?.
앫 = symbol for “Pager” category
Illustration: a phone book with name dis- The smart speller is hidden.
play and smart speller activated 앫 = symbol for “Main” category or for
unknown category or for phone entries
1 Category symbol
that are saved on the SIM card of a
2 Upper entry from address book (with-
GSM mobile phone
out category symbol)
3 Symbol + for several telephone num- Entries without a category symbol or with
bers (subentries) under the main entry the symbol come from the COMAND
4 Symbol for summarized entries address book.
from the mobile phone with the same Entries with the symbol contain a voice
name but different telephone numbers entry. Voice entries can be added to the
5 Smart speller address book (컄 page 232). This function
6 Voice entry symbol is available in vehicles with Voice Control*.
7 To close the phone book
148
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
i The following options are available under Closing the COMAND phone book
“Options” menu item 4:
왘 In the smart speller, select “Back”.
앫 Displaying details about an entry
(컄 page 150) or
앫 Creating a new entry in the address book 왘 Press back button L in the center
(컄 page 151) console (컄 page 86).
앫 Deleting an entry (컄 page 152)
앫 Saving a phone book entry from mobile Selecting an entry in the COMAND
phone in the address book (컄 page 152) phone book
Illustration: list of phone book entries with 앫 Adding a telephone number to an address
name display and hidden smart speller book entry (컄 page 154) Selecting entries using the smart speller
1 Back to smart speller 왘 Switching from the list to the smart 왘 Switch from the list to the smart speller
2 To switch phone book display (“123” or speller: Select “Back” from the list. if necessary.
“ABC”) 왘 Changing smart speller language:
or
3 Symbol + for several telephone num- Select !.
bers (subentries) under the main entry, 왘 Press back button L in the center
console (컄 page 86). 왘 Select desired language. 컄컄
subentry list is closed
4 To call up options 왘 Changing phone book display in the
5 Symbol / for open subentry list list: Select “123” or “ABC”.
6 List of phone book entries
7 Subentry list with category symbols The screen changes to telephone num-
and telephone numbers ber or name display.
149
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
컄컄 왘 Changing smart speller character Selecting using the list 왘 Closing detailed view: Slide qmr or
set: Select #. omp or press n or back button L
왘 If necessary, switch from the smart
in the center console (컄 page 86).
Depending on the previous setting, you speller to the list.
will change to letters with special char-
왘 Rotate ymz or slide qmr until the de- Starting to dial the number of an entry
acters or to numbers with special char-
sired entry is highlighted.
acters. 왘 Select entry (컄 page 149).
왘 Entering characters: Select the char- Selecting subentries 왘 Press n.
acters of the entry you are searching 왘 Select an entry with the + symbol and or
for one by one. press n. 왘 Press s on the telephone keypad.
왘 Deleting individual characters: Se- The + symbol changes to / and the
lect ) and briefly press n. A list appears if the entry contains sub-
subentries are displayed.
entries.
Each time you enter or delete a charac-
왘 Rotate ymz or slide qmr until the de- 왘 Select desired subentry.
ter, the closest match will be displayed
sired subentry is highlighted.
at the top of the list. 왘 Press n again.
왘 Deleting an entire entry: Select ) Displaying details of an entry or
and press and hold n until the entry is COMAND can also show a shortened entry
deleted. 왘 Press s on the telephone key-
in its entirety. For entries featuring suben- pad.
왘 Canceling search: Switch from the tries, the detailed view is only available for
smart speller to the list. the subentries and not for the main entry.
The entry at the top of the list is auto- 왘 Select entry (컄 page 149).
matically highlighted.
왘 Select “Options” 씮 “Details”.
The detailed view appears.
150
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
Assigning a New Entry in the Address 왘 Toggling upper and lower case for
Book the input characters: Select & or
(.
i This function is used to create a new entry in
the address book and to enter the data (first 왘 Changing language for the input
name, last name and telephone number) manu- characters: Select !.
ally.
왘 Select desired language.
왘 Select “Options” 씮 “New Entry” in the
COMAND phone book list. 왘 Changing character set for the input
characters: Select #.
왘 Selecting a number category:
Select a category, e.g. “Home”. Depending on the previous setting, you
1 Data field
will change to letters with special char-
왘 Selecting a telephone category: 2 Input mark (cursor)
acters or to numbers with special char-
Select a category, e.g. “Land Line”. 3 Input characters
acters.
왘 Confirming selection: Select “Save”. 왘 Changing data field: Slide qmr re-
왘 Displaying special characters as in-
peatedly until desired data field is high-
The input menu appears with the data put characters: Select ! 씮 “Sym-
lighted.
fields. bols”.
or
왘 Returning input characters to nor-
왘 Select [ or ] repeatedly until de- mal characters: Select ! 씮 the
sired data field is highlighted. desired language.
왘 Entering data into a field: Select all 왘 Moving cursor in the data field:
characters one by one from the input Select Y or Z. 컄컄
characters line 3.
151
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
컄컄 왘 Deleting individual characters: The deletion rules may vary, depending on Saving a phone book entry from the
Select ) and briefly press n. the entry selected: mobile phone in the address book
The character to the left of the cursor is 앫 Upper entry selected from the address i This function is used to save an existing
deleted. book: phone book entry from the mobile phone in the
the entry is deleted from the COMAND address book. The following options are avail-
왘 Deleting an entire entry: Select ) able:
phone book and also from the address
and press and hold n until the entry is
book, if the address book entry only 앫 Saving as a new address book entry
deleted.
contains telephone numbers. 앫 Adding a telephone number to an existing
왘 Saving an entry: Select ?. address book entry
앫 Subentry of an address book entry se-
왘 Canceling an entry: Select “Back”. lected:
the subentry is deleted from the Saving as a new address book entry
If one of the data fields contains data, a
prompt will appear asking whether you COMAND phone book and from the ad- 왘 Select phone book entry from mobile
want to save the entry. dress book. phone (컄 page 149).
왘 Select “Yes” or “No”. 왘 Deleting: Select entry (컄 page 149). i All entries with the following category sym-
왘 Select “Options” 씮 “Delete”. bols are phone book entries in the mobile phone.
The entry will either be saved or
not, depending on your selection. 앫 = symbol for “Mobile” category
A prompt appears asking whether the
entry should be deleted. 앫 = symbol for “Home” category
Deleting an entry 앫 = symbol for “Work” category
왘 Select “Yes” or “No”.
i It is not possible to delete a phone book en- 앫 = symbol for “Fax” category
Once “Yes” has been selected, the en-
try from the mobile phone using the COMAND 앫 = symbol for “Pager” category
phone book. try will be deleted according to the
rules mentioned above. 앫 = symbol for “Main” category
try”.
152
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
왘 Selecting a number category: 왘 Proceed as described in the “Changing 왘 Confirming selection: Select “Save”.
Select a category, e.g. “Home”. data field” paragraph in the “Assigning
The search menu for address book en-
Selecting a telephone category: a New Entry in the Address Book” sec-
왘 tries appears.
Select a category, e.g. “Land Line”. tion (컄 page 151).
왘 Search for desired entry using smart
왘 Confirming selection: Select “Save”. Adding a telephone number to an exist- speller function.
The input menu appears with the data ing address book entry
i There is a detailed description of how to
fields. The data field for the telephone 왘 Select phone book entry from mobile search for an address book entry in the “Search-
number is filled in automatically. The phone (컄 page 149). ing for an address book entry” section
data field for the last name is also filled (컄 page 226).
when the entry to be saved contains a i All entries with the following category sym- 왘 After selecting an entry, press n.
bols are phone book entries in the mobile phone.
name.
앫 = symbol for “Mobile” category If there are fewer than four numbers
앫 = symbol for “Home” category
assigned to the selected entry in the
selected number category, COMAND
앫 = symbol for “Work” category
will save the data.
앫 = symbol for “Fax” category
If four numbers are saved for the se-
앫 = symbol for “Pager” category
lected entry, a prompt will appear ask-
앫 = symbol for “Main” category ing whether you want to overwrite one
왘 Select “Options” 씮 “Save” 씮 “Add”. of the existing numbers.
왘 Selecting a number category: 왘 Select “Yes” or “No”.

1 Data field Select a category, e.g. “Home”. If you select “Yes”, a selection list will
2 Input mark (cursor) 왘 Selecting a telephone category: appear containing the four existing
3 Input characters Select a category, e.g. “Land Line”. numbers. 컄컄
153
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
컄컄 왘 Select number to be overwritten. 왘 Selecting a number category: 왘 Entering digits: Select all digits one
COMAND overwrites the selected num- Select a category, e.g. “Home”. by one from the input characters.
ber with the new data. 왘 Selecting a telephone category: 왘 Moving cursor in the data field:
Select a category, e.g. “Land Line”. Select Y or Z.
Adding a telephone number to an ad-
왘 Confirming selection: Select “Save”. 왘 Deleting individual digits: Select )
dress book entry
If four numbers are saved for the entry and briefly press n.
i This function is used to add a telephone in the selected number category, a The digit to the left of the cursor is de-
number to an existing address book entry. The
prompt will appear asking whether one leted.
telephone number can be entered manually.
of the existing numbers should be over-
왘 Deleting an entire number:
왘 Select address book entry written.
Select ) and press and hold n until
(컄 page 149).
왘 Select “Yes” or “No”. the number is deleted.
i All entries with the symbol or without a If you select “Yes”, a selection list 왘 Saving entry: Select ?.
symbol are address book entries.
will appear containing the four ex-
왘 Canceling an entry: Select “Back”.
왘 Select “Options” 씮 “Add Number”. isting numbers.
If you have already entered data, a
i “Add Number” does not function if you have 왘 Select number to be overwritten.
prompt will appear asking whether the
selected the main entry for an address book en-
The input menu appears with the entry should be saved.
try with subentries.
data field for entering the new tele-
phone number.
not, depending on your selection.
154
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
SMS messages (Short Message Inbox i “Text Message” does not function if the
Service) SMS inbox contains no SMS messages. The SMS
Calling up the SMS inbox inbox only shows the messages which are re-
ceived while the mobile phone is inserted in the
SMS functions 왘 Select “Telephone” 씮 “Telephone”. cradle.
The following functions are available: The main telephone menu appears.
앫 Receive
앫 Read
The following conditions must be fulfilled
in order to use the functions:
앫 The mobile phone is inserted in the cra-
dle and switched on.
앫 The PIN has been entered (only GSM
mobile phones). 1 Date and time the highlighted SMS
1 Symbol for unread messages in the message was received
앫 The mobile phone is logged into a mo-
SMS inbox 2 To call up options
bile network.
i The symbol only appears for those mes- 3 Highlighted SMS message
앫 Mobile phone book must be download- 4 Symbol for unread SMS message
sages which are received while the mobile phone
ed and available in COMAND. 5 Back to main telephone menu
is inserted in the cradle.
왘 Select “Text Message”.
The SMS inbox appears.
155
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
i The SMS messages are sorted by the date Calling an SMS sender
and time they were received. The most recent
왘 Select SMS message 씮 “Options” 씮
message is at the top of the list.
If the name and telephone number of the sender “Call”.
is saved in the address book or phone book of The telephone connects the call.
the mobile phone, you will see the name of the
sender in the SMS inbox. Otherwise, you will see
Saving SMS sender as new COMAND
the telephone number of the sender.
address book entry
Selecting an SMS message 왘 Selecting an SMS message: In the
SMS inbox, select a message 씮 “Op-
왘 Rotate ymz or slide qmr and then 1 Data field
tions” 씮 “Save Number” 씮 “New En-
press n. 2 Input mark (cursor)
try”.
3 Input characters
Showing abbreviated sender display in 왘 Selecting a number category:
full Select a category, e.g. “Home”. 왘 Proceed as described in the “Changing
data field” paragraph in the “Assigning
왘 Select SMS message 씮 “Options” 씮 왘 Selecting a telephone category: a New Entry in the Address Book” sec-
“Details”. Select a category, e.g. “Land Line”. tion (컄 page 151).
The detailed view appears. 왘 Saving: Select “Save”.
Adding an SMS sender’s telephone num-
왘 Closing detailed view: Slide qmr or The input menu appears with the data
ber to an existing address book entry
press n. fields. The data field for the telephone
number is filled in automatically. 왘 Selecting an SMS message: In the
SMS inbox, select a message 씮 “Op-
tions” 씮 “Save Number” 씮 “Add”.
156
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
왘 Proceed as described in the “Selecting Using data in a text message Saving SMS sender as new address book
a number category” paragraph in the entry
“Adding a telephone number to an ex- i If the SMS message contains telephone
isting address book entry” section
numbers or navigable address data, you can se- i This function is not possible with all SMS
lect this data and place a telephone call or trans- senders.
(컄 page 153). fer the address data to the navigation system.
왘 Press n 씮 “Save Number” 씮 “New
Exiting the SMS inbox 왘 Selecting data from the text: Entry”.
Rotate ymz or slide qmr.
왘 Select “Back”. 왘 Proceed as described in the “Selecting
왘 Using data: Press n 씮 “Use”. a number category” paragraph in the
The main telephone menu appears.
If you have selected a telephone num- “Saving SMS sender as new address
ber, the telephone connects the call. book entry” section (컄 page 156).
Reading an SMS message
If you have selected a navigable ad-
왘 In the SMS inbox, select an SMS mes- dress, it is transferred to the navigation Adding an SMS sender’s telephone num-
sage and press n. system. ber to an existing address book entry
The SMS message appears. 왘 Press n 씮 “Save Number” 씮 “Add”.
Calling an SMS sender
왘 Proceed as described in the “Selecting
왘 Press n 씮 “Call”. a number category” paragraph in the
The telephone connects the call. “Adding a telephone number to an ex-
isting address book entry” section
i This function is not possible with all SMS (컄 page 153).
senders.
Closing an SMS message and returning
to SMS inbox
왘 Press n 씮 “Back”.
157
Control systems
COMAND navigation
Safety precautions
COMAND may give incorrect navigation
commands if the data in the digital map
Warning! G
does not correspond with the actual
Warning! G road/traffic situation. DVD maps do not
Navigation announcements are intended to
direct you while driving without diverting
cover all areas nor all routes within an area. your attention from the road and driving.
For safety reasons, only enter a destination
For example, if the traffic routing has been
when the vehicle is stationary. When the ve- Please always use this feature instead of
changed or the direction of a one-way road
hicle is in motion, a passenger should enter consulting the map display for directions.
has been reversed.
the destination. Study manual and select Consulting the symbols or map display for
route before driving. For this reason, you must always observe directions may cause you to divert your at-
applicable road and traffic rules and regula- tention from driving and increase your risk
tions during your journey. Road and traffic of an accident.
rules and regulations always have priority
over the navigation commands generated by
the system.
COMAND calculates the route to the desti-
nation without taking account of the follow-
ing, for example:
앫 Traffic lights
앫 Stop and right-of-way signs
앫 Parking or stopping prohibited areas
앫 Lane merging
앫 Other road and traffic rules and regula-
tions
앫 Narrow bridges
158
Control systems
COMAND navigation (introduction)
왔 COMAND navigation (introduction)
Map software 앫 Use a commercially-available cleaning i The updating process can take between
cloth to clean discs. Do not wipe them 10 and 60 minutes, depending on the size of the
The digital maps generated by the map with a circular motion, but only in map software. If the radio was switched on be-
software become outdated in the same straight lines from the center out- fore you started the updating process, you can
way as conventional road maps. Optimum wards. still adjust the volume. You can also use
route guidance can only be provided by the COMAND to operate the automatic air condition-
앫 Place discs back in their boxes after ing and to cancel the process. Other functions
navigation system in conjunction with the are not operational.
use.
most up-to-date map software. If possible, carry out the update when the vehicle
Information about new map software ver- 앫 Protect discs from heat and direct sun- is stationary.
sions can be obtained from an authorized light.
Mercedes-Benz Center. i If you carry out the update with the engine
Updating process switched off and the vehicle battery has insuffi-
cient power, COMAND may automatically switch
Updating the map software off during the process in order to protect the bat-
The updating process has the following tery. If this occurs, restart the update with the
You can update the map software yourself phases: engine running period. Similarly, if the SmartKey
using a DVD. 앫 Loading a DVD into the DVD changer position is unintentionally switched to 0, restart
the update.
(컄 page 160)
Notes about handling DVDs
앫 Updating process (컄 page 160)
앫 Only hold discs by the edge. Warning! G
앫 Handle discs carefully to prevent read
Never leave the engine running in an en-
problems.
closed space. The exhaust gases contain
앫 Avoid getting scratches, fingerprints carbon monoxide. Inhaling exhaust gases
and dust on discs. constitutes a health hazard and could lead
to loss of consciousness or even death.
159
Control systems
Loading a DVD into the DVD changer 왘 Press one of the magazine tray Map software is compatible with the
buttons 2. navigation system and the current sys-
If a disc is loaded, it will be ejected. tem software
COMAND now checks whether the map
data on the DVD is already installed.
왘 Wait until LED for magazine button 2
which you pressed flashes quickly. Map data is not yet installed
왘 Slide DVD into slot 1 with printed side You will see a comparison of the version
facing upwards. statuses in the display and a prompt will
COMAND loads the DVD. appear asking whether you want to contin-
ue with the update.
1 Disc slot
Updating 왘 Select “Yes” or “No”.
2 Magazine tray buttons 1 – 6
After you have loaded the DVD, you will If you select “No”, COMAND automati-
i Each magazine tray button 2 indicates the cally ejects the DVD and the map data
status of the corresponding magazine tray by see a message to the effect that the disc
means of an LED. does not contain a recognizable audio for- is not updated.
앫 LED off = magazine tray is empty mat. 왘 Take DVD out of the slot.
앫 LED constantly lit = magazine tray is loaded 왘 Confirming message: Press n. If you select “Yes”, the map data is up-
앫 LED flashes = CD/DVD changer requesting COMAND checks whether the map dated.
disc to be loaded
software on the DVD is compatible with
왘 Switch on COMAND (컄 page 85). the vehicle’s navigation system and
whether it is compatible with the cur-
rent system software.
160
Control systems
Map data is already installed 왘 To allow the update to run to the

You will see a message that the map data end without canceling: Take no fur-
is already installed and a prompt will ap- ther action.
pear asking you whether you want to con- If the update is successfully complet-
tinue with the update. ed, you will see a message to this ef-
fect.
If you select “No”, COMAND automati- 왘 Confirming message: Press n.
cally ejects the DVD and the map data COMAND ejects the DVD.
is not updated.
왘 Take DVD out of slot.
1 Progress bar
왘 Take DVD out of slot.
The update is complete.
You can either cancel the update or allow
If you select “Yes”, the existing map
it to run to the end without canceling. If the update is not successfully complet-
data is saved again.
ed, you will see a message that the map
왘 Canceling an update on the DVD
update is not possible.
Updating the map data changer: Press corresponding maga-
zine tray button 2 (컄 page 160). 왘 Confirming message: Press n.
While the update is running, you will see a
message to this effect and a progress bar. The DVD will be ejected in both cases. COMAND ejects the DVD.
The progress bars fills up from left to right 왘 Take DVD out of slot. 왘 Take DVD out of slot.
during the update.
i If the update is canceled, the navigation sys- i The navigation system remains fully opera-
tem remains fully operational with the previous tional with the previous map data.
map data. You can restart the update at a later
date. It will then continue from the point where it The update may not be successfully com-
was canceled. pleted for the following reasons:
앫 DVD dirty or scratched
161
Control systems
왘 Clean DVD. Map software is not compatible with Map software is not compatible with
See the “Notes about handling the navigation system the current system software
DVDs” section (컄 page 159). You will see a message that the update is You will see a message that the system
not possible. software and the map software are not
왘 Restart update.
compatible.
앫 Overheating due to excessive tempera- 왘 Confirming message: Press n.
tures in the vehicle interior COMAND ejects the DVD. 왘 Confirming message: Press n.
왘 Wait until vehicle interior has 왘 Take DVD out of slot. COMAND ejects the DVD.
cooled down. 왘 Take DVD out of slot.
왘 Load a DVD which is compatible with
왘 Restart update. the vehicle’s navigation system. 왘 Have the system software updated at
앫 The storage medium (hard disk) inte- an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
grated in COMAND is defective. i The map software cannot be updated until
the system software has been updated.
왘 Consult an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
162
Control systems
General notes i Please note that the update must be allowed The roof cargo container* may also impair
to run to the end in this case. If you interrupt it, mobile phone reception and GPS cover-
the navigation system will continue to be non-op- age.
Operational readiness of the navigation erational.
system following a system software
Route guidance after vehicle transpor-
update by an authorized Initial use or use following a system tation
Mercedes-Benz Center software update
COMAND has to redetermine the position
After a system software update by an au- In both these cases, the navigation system of the vehicle if the vehicle has been trans-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center, the in- must determine the position of the vehicle. ported (e.g. by ferry, by train or after tow-
stalled map software may no longer be You may have to drive for a while before ing).
compatible. If this is the case, the naviga- precise route guidance is possible.
tion system will not be operational. Positioning takes place automatically even
GPS reception when COMAND is switched off. The dura-
You will know if this is the case, when the
tion varies from one case to another.
following message will appear when you Correct functioning of the navigation sys-
switch to navigation mode: “The system tem depends on GPS reception, among Route guidance may be restricted as fol-
software has been updated. The map soft- other things. In certain situations, GPS re- lows during vehicle positioning:
ware must be updated now. Please insert ception may be impaired, there may be in- 앫 Navigation announcements, route
the DVD with the map software.” terference or there may be no reception at guidance displays and displayed street
왘 Updating map software: Proceed as all, e.g. in tunnels, in multistory parking ga- names are not consistent with the ac-
described in the “Updating the map rage or due to snow on the GPS antenna. If tual location of the vehicle.
software” section (컄 page 159). Use there is snow on the GPS antenna, you
앫 COMAND does not generate navigation
map software which is compatible with should remove it. The GPS antenna is at
announcements.
the system software. the back of the vehicle roof.
163
Control systems
앫 Instead of the route guidance displays, i The journey is interrupted if you park the ve- Units of measurement
you see the “Off Road” display and a di- hicle and switch off COMAND.
The units of measurement in navigation
rection arrow. The direction arrow The journey is continued when you switch
COMAND back on and start driving on. mode are identical to those set in the in-
shows the compass heading to the des-
strument cluster.
tination.
Hard disk errors
When positioning is complete, route guid- Input restrictions
ance is once again possible using naviga- COMAND has an integrated hard disk on
tion announcements and route guidance which the map software is saved. The input restrictions are imposed starting
displays. If an area of the hard disk has an error, at a particular vehicle speed. The restric-
COMAND can no longer access the map tions are canceled as soon as the speed
Interrupting the journey during route data in this area, for example, when calcu- drops below a certain value.
guidance lating a route. When the restriction is active, certain oper-
The following applies if you interrupt the The message “Navigation Unavailable. ations or entries are not possible.
journey during route guidance and contin- Please refer to the operating instructions.” You will notice this by the fact that some
ue the journey later: appears. menu items cannot be selected or certain
앫 COMAND resumes route guidance au- 왘 Deleting message: Switch COMAND operations will not be possible.
tomatically if you continue the journey off and back on.
within 2 hours.
i If you switch the navigation system off/on,
앫 Route guidance is canceled if you con- it will be operational again until it has to access
tinue the journey after more than the faulty area of the hard disk again. The mes-
2 hours. It will be necessary to resume sage will then appear again. Consult an autho-
the canceled route guidance manually rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
(컄 page 214).
164
Control systems
Navigation system menu overview

Guide Route Position 6 Destination Traffic (USA only)1

(only with route (only with route
guidance active) guidance active)
Select a special des- 앫 Call up route info 앫 Call up the save Repeat the current Select: Call up real-time traf-
tination from the cur- position memory navigation an- fic messages
앫 Call up route 앫 a destination
rent map view function nouncement
browser
앫 stopover
앫 Center the map
앫 Call up the de-
on the vehicle’s 앫 save destination
tour function
position 앫 cancel route
앫 Center the map guidance
on the destina-
tion position
1
Depending on your vehicle’s production date the traffic menu may not be available.
165
Control systems
Calling up the map display and switch-

ing to navigation mode
왘 Press the N shortcut button once or

twice.
i The number of times you have to press the
N shortcut button depends on the operating
mode currently selected.
or
왘 In the main function line, select “Navi”. Illustration: map with route guidance inac- Illustration: map with route guidance inac-
tive and with the menu system shown tive and with the menu system hidden
Both of these will call up the map display. (full screen mode)
1 Current vehicle position
You will see the map with the menu system 1 Current vehicle position
either shown or hidden. 2 Set map orientation (컄 page 169)
3 Map scale selected (컄 page 167)
Hiding or showing the menu system

왘 Hiding: Slide qm.
The “Full Screen” menu item appears in
the main area of the display; it is auto-
matically selected.
왘 Press n.
The menu system is hidden. The map
can be seen in the full screen.
166
Control systems
왘 Showing: Press n in the full-screen Saving current vehicle position as des-

map display. tination in last destinations list
왘 Showing menu system, if neces-
Adjusting the map scale sary: Press n.
i It is only possible to adjust the map scale 왘 Saving: Select “Position” 씮 “Save Po-
with the menu system hidden (full-screen map
sition”.
display).
COMAND saves the current vehicle po-
왘 Rotate ymz until the desired map
sition as a destination in the last desti-
scale is set.
nations (컄 page 223).
1 Crosshair
Moving the map 2 Details of the crosshair position
3 Map scale
i It is only possible to move the map with the
menu system hidden. i Display 2 may be the name of a road, for
example, provided the digital map contains the
왘 Slide qmr, omp or wmx. necessary data.
1 Currently set map scale as number A crosshair appears on the map. If no data is available, display 2 shows:
2 Scale
앫 the coordinates of the crosshair if the
3 Currently set map scale as a needle on geo-coordinate display is switched on
the scale (컄 page 170) and the GPS signal is strong
4 Previously set value before calling up enough
the scale 앫 no display if the geo-coordinate display is
As soon as you rotate ymz, scale 2 switched off (컄 page 170)
appears. Rotating clockwise zooms in,
rotating counterclockwise zooms out.
167
Control systems
Adjusting the map scale 왘 Set the map to the vehicle or destina- Basic settings
왘 Rotate ymz. tion position, see the explanation be-
low. i You can make the following settings regard-
Rotating clockwise zooms in, rotating less of whether route guidance is active or inac-
counterclockwise zooms out. Centering the map on the vehicle or tive.
destination position
Saving crosshair position as destination Map perspective (USA only)
in last destinations list i If you have moved the map, you can use this
function to rapidly return the map to the position Depending on your vehicle’s production
왘 Showing menu system, if neces- of the vehicle or destination. It is only possible to date the map perspective function may not
sary: Press n. center the map on the destination position when be available.
route guidance is active.
왘 Saving: Select “Position” 씮 “Save Po- COMAND can display the map from a
sition”. 왘 Centering on the vehicle’s position: bird's eye view or in the normal map view.
Select “Navi” 씮 “Position” 씮 “Vehicle
COMAND saves the crosshair position 왘 Select map perspective:
Position Map”.
as a destination in the last destinations Select “Navi” 씮 “Navi” 씮 “Map Dis-
list (컄 page 223). or play”.
왘 Press back button L when the The map display list appears. A dot R
Hiding the crosshair crosshair is displayed. indicates the current setting.
왘 Press back button L in the center 왘 Centering on the destination: 왘 Select “Bird’s-eye view”.
console (컄 page 86). Select “Navi” 씮 “Position” 씮 “Destina-
The bird's eye view is switched on or
The crosshair disappears and the map tion Position Map”.
off, depending on the previous status.
is centered on the vehicle position.
or i If you scroll the map in the bird's eye view,
COMAND switches back to the normal map view.
168
Control systems
Map orientation 왘 Setting map orientation: 앫 “Personal symbols” (you can determine
Select “Navi” 씮 “Navi” 씮 “Map Dis- the symbols yourself)
play”.
앫 “No symbols”
The map display list appears. A dot R
왘 Adjusting: Select “Navi” 씮 “Navi” 씮
indicates the current setting.
“Map Display”.
왘 Select “North Up” or “Heading Up”.
The map display list appears. A dot R
1 Current map orientation 왘 Exiting menu: Slide omp. indicates the current setting.
The following may be displayed: The map orientation changes accord- 왘 Select “Standard symbols”, “Personal
ingly. symbols” or “No symbols”.
앫 8 = “Heading Up” (the map is dis-
played so that the direction of travel is If you select “Personal symbols”, the
Setting POI symbols
always up; the orange point of the icon list of POIs appears.
points north) You can set which points of interest (POIs)
왘 Switching POI symbol display on
should be displayed as symbols in the
앫 9 = “North Up” (the map view is dis- or off: Select the desired POI.
map. POIs are garages, hotels, movie the-
played so that north is always up) aters or restaurants, for example. The corresponding symbol displays
are switched on or off, depending
i Depending on the map scale on the map, on the previous status. A check-
POI symbols may not be visible on the map al-
mark indicates which status is ac-
though their display is activated. In addition, POI
symbols may be covered by the map’s labels. tive. You can switch on the symbol
displays for more than one POI.
The following settings are possible:
앫 “Standard symbols” (symbol deter-
mined by the factory settings)
169
Control systems
i The list shows all symbols that are contained i There must be sufficient GPS reception for Switching the geo-coordinate display on
in the digital map across all states (USA) and/or displays 1, 2 and 3 to be shown. Height dis- or off
provinces (CDN). Not all POIs in all states (USA) play 1 is an approximation because the naviga-
or in all provinces (CDN) are available, however. tion system uses the GPS signals for the 왘 Select “Navi” 씮 “Navi” 씮 “Map Dis-
Certain POI symbols may not be displayed on the calculation. play”.
map, even if the symbol display is switched on. The map display list appears.
왘 Exiting menu: Slide omp or press Display options with geo-coordinate dis-
play switched on 왘 Select “Coordinates”.
back button L in the center console
(컄 page 86). If the crosshair is displayed on the map The geo-coordinate display is switched
view (map was moved manually), only dis- on or off, depending on the previous
Geo-coordinate display play 3 is visible. status. A checkmark indicates which
It shows either the coordinates of the status is active.
crosshair or other data on the crosshair 왘 Exiting menu: Slide omp or press
position, e.g. a street name. The digital back button L in the center console
map must contain relevant data in order (컄 page 86).
for this other data to be displayed.
Setting route type (USA only)
i If there is no crosshair on the map view, dis-
Illustration: map with geo-coordinate displays 1, 2 and 3 are visible. Display 3 Depending on your vehicle’s production
play switched on shows the coordinates of the current vehicle po- date the route type function may not be
1 Current height above sea level sition. available.
2 Number of GPS satellites from which You can set the following route types:
signals for positioning can be received
3 Coordinate display 앫 “Fast Route”: COMAND calculates a
route with the shortest possible (mini-
mized) driving time.
170
Control systems
앫 “Short Route”: COMAND calculates a Setting route mode 왘 Exiting menu: Slide omp or press
route with the shortest possible (mini- back button L in the center console
mized) distance taking distance and i This function allows you to set the following (컄 page 86).
options for route guidance:
driving time into account. COMAND will verify whether it can in-
앫 “Minimize Highways”
왘 Select “Navi” 씮 “Navi” 씮 “Mode”. corporate the modes if you select them
앫 “Minimize Toll Roads”
with route guidance active.
The mode list appears. A square 쐍 indi- 앫 “Minimize Tunnels”
cates the current setting. If it can, COMAND calculates a new
앫 “Minimize Ferries/Motorail”
route while incorporating the modes
왘 Select route type: “Fast Route” or
왘 Select “Navi” 씮 “Navi” 씮 “Mode”. selected.
“Short Route”.
The mode list appears. If it cannot, you will see and hear a cor-
왘 Exit menu: Slide omp or press back
Switching mode on or off: responding message.
button L in the center console 왘
(컄 page 86). Select desired modes. 왘 Select “OK”.
i If you change the route type setting during Depending on the previous status, the COMAND calculates a new route.
active route guidance, COMAND calculates a mode is switched on or off. A check- Only those modes which can be in-
new route. If you change the setting when route mark indicates that the mode is corporated are used.
guidance is inactive, COMAND uses the new set- switched on. It is possible to switch on
ting for the next route guidance. more than one mode.
171
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)
Entering a destination by the address i As additional information to the street entry,

Warning! G you can enter either a house number or an inter-
i It is not possible to enter an address when section.
For safety reasons, only enter a new desti- the vehicle has exceeded a certain speed. As A zip code entry replaces the town/city entry.
nation when the vehicle is stationary. soon as the vehicle speed drops below a certain
value, the function is available again. Calling up the address input menu
i It is possible to enter a destination regard- i If Russian or Chinese is set as the system 왘 Select “Navi” 씮 “Destination” 씮 “Ad-
less of whether route guidance is active or inac- language, the address must be entered using dress Entry”.
tive. Latin letters. Setting the system language
(컄 page 238). The address input menu appears. It
The following destination entry options are shows a state (USA) or a province
available: To enter an address you may proceed as (CDN). Which state or province is
follows: shown depends on the vehicle’s loca-
앫 Entering a destination by address
앫 Enter state (USA) or province (CDN), tion.
앫 Entering a destination from the desti-
street and town/city
nation memory
앫 Enter state (USA) or province (CDN),
앫 Entering a destination from the list of
town/city and street
last destinations
앫 Entering a destination from the map
town/city and center
앫 Entering a stopover
앫 Entering a POI zip code and center
zip code and street 1 State (USA) or province (CDN)
172
Control systems
Menu items in the address input menu List of states with input characters i In the list of input characters 7, you can
only select currently selectable characters.
Some menu items will not or not yet be
Which characters are included depends on the
available, depending on the sequence in sequence in which you have entered your desti-
which you enter the address and the data nation and the data version of the digital map.
version.
Example: If you have not made any entries, While the numbers are being selected as
menu items “House No.”, “Center”, “Inter- described below, the top list entry 1 al-
section”, “POI”, “Start” and “Save” will not ways shows the state which best corre-
yet be available. And the “Zip Code” menu sponds to the input data as it has been
item will not be available if the digital map entered up to that point.
does not contain any zip codes. At the same time, COMAND automatically
1 Top list entry based on the input data supplements characters 2 entered by the
Entering a state (USA) up to that point user with other likely input characters 3.
2 Characters entered by the user 왘 Selecting characters: Slide omp or
i You can only enter those states which are 3 Characters automatically added by the rotate ymz.
saved on the digital map. system
왘 In the address input menu, select 4 Clear last character entry 왘 Confirming character selection:
“State/Prov” 씮 “States (U.S.)”. 5 Currently selectable characters Press n.
6 Currently non-selectable characters 왘 Deleting individual characters:
A list of states appears with input char- 7 Input characters
acters; the input characters are auto- Select ) in the bottom line and
8 List of states press n.
matically activated. 9 Currently selected characters
왘 Deleting an entire entry: Select ) in
the bottom line and press n until the
entire entry is deleted. 컄컄
173
Control systems
컄컄 왘 Canceling an entry: Select “Back” in List of states without input characters The following menu items are now avail-
the bottom line and press n. able:
or 앫 “Map”: Entering a destination from the
map (컄 page 193)
console (컄 page 86). 앫 “State/Prov”: Re-enter state (USA) or
province (CDN)
As soon as COMAND can clearly attribute
the characters entered to a state, the input 앫 “Town”: Entering a town or city
characters 7 disappear automatically. (컄 page 178)
You see the list of states without the input 앫 “Street”: Entering a street
characters. Here you can confirm the cur- (컄 page 180)
rent entry or make another selection. 왘 Selecting a state: Slide qmr or
rotate ymz. 앫 “Zip Code”: Entering the zip code
During character entry, you can also man-
왘 Canceling selection: Select “Back” by (컄 page 176)
ually switch to the list of states without in-
put characters at any time. sliding om and press n. i It is not possible to enter zip codes if the dig-
or ital map does not contain any zip codes for the
왘 Switching manually to list of states selected state.
without input characters: Slide qm. 왘 Press back button L in the center
왘 Continuing destination entry:
or console (컄 page 86).
Select one of the menu items men-
왘 Select ? in the second line from the 왘 Confirming selection: Press n. tioned above.
bottom and press n. The address input menu appears again.
It shows the abbreviation for the se-
lected state.
174
Control systems
Entering a province (Canada) i It is not possible to enter a zip code if the The following menu items are now avail-
왘 In the address input menu, select digital map does not contain any zip codes for able:
the selected province (CDN).
“State/Prov” 씮 “Provinces (Canada)”. 앫 “Map”: Entering a destination from the
왘 Continuing destination entry: map (컄 page 193)
A list of provinces appears.
Select one of the menu items men-
왘 Select desired province. 앫 “State/Prov”: Re-enter state (USA) or
tioned above.
province (CDN)
The address input menu appears again.
It shows the abbreviation for the se- Quick access to most recently entered 앫 “Town”: Entering a town or city
lected province. states (USA) or provinces (CDN) (컄 page 178)
왘 In the address input menu, select 앫 “Street”: Entering a street
The following menu items are now avail-
“State/Prov” 씮 “Last States/Provinc- (컄 page 180)
able:
es”. 앫 “Zip Code”: Entering the zip code
앫 “Map”: Entering a destination from the
map (컄 page 193) The list of most recently entered states (컄 page 176)
(USA) or provinces (CDN) appears. The
앫 “State/Prov”: Re-enter state (USA) or last entry is at the top of the list.
i It is not possible to enter a zip code if the
digital map does not contain any zip codes for
province (CDN)
왘 Select desired state (USA) or desired the selected state (USA) or province (CDN).
앫 “Town”: Entering a town or city province (CDN). 왘 Continuing destination entry:
(컄 page 178)
The address input menu appears again. Select one of the menu items men-
앫 “Street”: Entering a street It shows the abbreviation for the se- tioned above.
(컄 page 180) lected state (USA) or province (CDN).
앫 “Zip Code”: Entering the zip code
(컄 page 176)
175
Control systems
Entering the zip code List of zip codes with input characters i In the list of input characters 4, you can
only select numbers which can be currently en-
i It is not possible to enter a zip code if you tered. Which characters are included depends
have already entered other address data aside on the sequence in which you have entered your
from the state (USA) or province (CDN). destination and the data version of the digital
You can only enter those zip codes which are map.
saved on the digital map.
The available zip codes depend on the state While the numbers are being selected as
(USA) or province (CDN) most recently entered. described below, the top list entry 1 al-
왘 In the address input menu, select “Zip ways shows the zip code which best corre-
Code”. A list of zip codes appears with sponds to the input data as it has been
input characters; the input entered up to that point.
characters 4 are automatically acti- 1 Top list entry based on the input data At the same time, COMAND automatically
vated. up to that point supplements numbers 2 entered by the
2 Numbers entered by the user user with other likely numbers 3.
3 Numbers automatically added by the 왘 Selecting numbers: Slide omp or
system rotate ymz.
4 Input characters
5 Currently selectable numbers 왘 Confirming number selection:
6 Currently selected numbers Press n.
7 Currently non-selectable numbers 왘 Deleting individual numbers:
8 List of zip codes Select ) in the bottom line and
press n.
왘 Deleting an entire entry: Select ) in
the bottom line and press n until the
entire entry is deleted.
176
Control systems
왘 Canceling an entry: Select “Back” in List of zip codes without input It shows one of the following items of infor-
the bottom line and press n. characters mation:
or 앫 Street and if necessary, house number,
town/city, state (USA) or province
(CDN)
console (컄 page 86).
As soon as COMAND can clearly attribute 앫 Town/city, state (USA) or province
the numbers entered to a zip code, input (CDN) and zip code
characters 4 disappear. You see the list 앫 State (USA) or province (CDN) and zip
of zip codes without the input characters. code
Here you can confirm the current entry or
make another selection. i The street and, if necessary, the house num-
왘 Selecting a zip code: Slide qmr or ro- ber, will then appear as soon as COMAND can at-
During character entry, you can also man- tribute the zip code to an appropriate address.
tate ymz.
ually switch to the list of zip codes without Which of the following menu items are now
input characters at any time. 왘 Canceling selection: Select “Back”
available depends on the situation, or may
and press n.
왘 Switching manually to list of zip depend on the data version of the digital
codes without input characters: or map. The menu items which are not avail-
Slide qm. 왘 Press back button L in the center able cannot be selected.
or console (컄 page 86). 앫 “Map”: Using the map to enter a desti-
왘 Confirming selection: Press n. nation (컄 page 193)
왘 Select ? in the second line from the
bottom and press n. You will see the address input menu i In this case, using the map for destination
again. entry is based on the town or city seen in the ad-
dress input menu.
177
Control systems
앫 “Street”: entering a street Entering a town or city List of towns or cities with input
(컄 page 180) characters
i You can only enter those towns or cities
앫 “Center”: entering a center which are saved on the digital map. When this list appears, the input charac-
(컄 page 183) It is not possible to enter a town or city when you ters 4 are automatically activated.
have already entered a street which COMAND
앫 “POI”: entering a point of interest can clearly attribute to a town or city.
(컄 page 196) If COMAND cannot clearly attribute a previously
entered street to a town/city, only those towns
i In this case, entering a POI is based on the or cities are available which have a street of that
town or city seen in the address input menu. name.
앫 “Save”: saving a destination in the des- If you have not yet entered a street before enter-
ing the town or city, towns or cities within the
tination memory (컄 page 217)
state (USA) or province (CDN) previously en-
앫 “Start”: starting the route calculation tered are available.
(컄 page 190) 왘 In the address input menu, select
왘 Continuing or completing destina- “Town”. 1 Top list entry based on the input data
tion entry: Select one of the menu The list of towns/cities appears either up to that point
items mentioned above. with or without the input characters 2 Characters entered by the user
(컄 page 179). 3 Characters automatically added by the
Whether or not the input characters ap- system
pear depends on how many towns or 4 Input characters
cities are available for the desired state 5 Currently non-selectable characters
(USA) or province (CDN). 6 Currently selectable character
7 List of towns/cities
8 Currently selected character
178
Control systems
i In the list of input characters 4, you can 왘 Selecting characters: Slide omp or During character entry, you can also man-
only select currently selectable characters. rotate ymz. ually switch to the list of towns/cities with-
Which characters are included depends on the out input characters at any time.
sequence in which you have entered your desti- 왘 Confirming character selection:
nation and the data version of the digital map. Press n. 왘 Switching manually to the list of
towns/cities without input charac-
The top list entry 1 at first shows either 왘 Deleting individual characters:
ters: Slide qm.
the town or city in which the vehicle is cur- Select ) in the bottom line and
rently located or the town or city which press n. or
best corresponds to the input data as it 왘 Deleting an entire entry: Select ) in 왘 Select ? in the second line from the
has been entered up to that point. the bottom line and press n until the bottom and press n.
entire entry is deleted.
i The current town or city is shown if:
왘 Canceling an entry: Select “Back” in List of towns/cities without input
앫 you have accepted the current state (USA) or
the bottom line and press n. characters
province (CDN) when entering the state
(USA) or province (CDN)
or
앫 and if you select town/city entry immediate-
ly afterward 왘 Press back button L in the center
As soon as you enter a character from in-
put characters 4, the top list entry 1 As soon as COMAND can clearly attribute
shows the town or city that best corre- the characters entered to a town or city,
sponds to the input data as it has been en- the input characters 4 disappear auto-
tered up to that point. matically. You see the list of towns or cities
At the same time, COMAND automatically without the input characters. Here you can
supplements characters 2 entered by the confirm the current entry or make another
1 Symbol for more selection options
user with appropriate characters 3. selection.
179
Control systems
왘 Selecting a town or city: Slide qmr i The street is visible if you have entered it be- i In this case, entering a POI is based on the
or rotate ymz. fore entering the town or city. town or city seen in the address input menu.
왘 Canceling selection: Select “Back” Which of the following menu items are now 앫 “Save”: saving a destination in the des-
and press n. available depends on the situation, or may tination memory (컄 page 217)
or depend on the data version of the digital
앫 “Start”: starting the route calculation
map. The menu items which are not avail-
왘 Press back button L in the center (컄 page 190)
able cannot be selected.
console (컄 page 86). 왘 Continuing or completing destina-
앫 “Map”: using the map to enter a desti- tion entry: Select one of the menu
왘 Confirming selection: Press n. nation (컄 page 193) items mentioned above.
Towns/cities with symbol 1 mean i In this case, using the map for destination
that there is more than one in the se- entry is based on the town or city seen in the ad- Entering a street
lected state (USA) or province (CDN). dress input menu.
Confirming one of these towns/cities i It is not possible to enter a street if:
앫 “Street”: entering the street
will take you to a further sub-selection. 앫 you have already entered a center
(컄 page 180)
If there are no other selection options, 앫 you have already entered a zip code that
앫 “House No.”: entering the house num- COMAND can clearly attribute to a street
the address input menu appears again.
ber (컄 page 185)
It shows one of the following items of infor-
앫 “Center”: entering the center
mation:
(컄 page 183)
앫 Town/city and state (USA) or province
앫 “Intersection”: entering the intersec-
(CDN)
tion (컄 page 188)
앫 Street, town/city and state (USA) or
앫 “POI”: entering a point of interest
province (CDN)
(컄 page 196)
180
Control systems
i You can only enter those streets which are Street list with input characters i In the list of input characters 6, you can
saved on the digital map. only select currently selectable characters.
When this list appears, the input charac-
If you have not entered a town or city before en- Which characters are included depends on the
tering the street, only those streets within the ters 6 are automatically activated. sequence in which you have entered your desti-
state (USA) or province (CDN) previously en- nation and the data version of the digital map.
tered are available. If you have already entered a
town or city, streets within that town or city are The top list entry 1 first shows the street
available. first alphabetically and best corresponds
If you have entered a zip code before entering to the input data as it has been entered up
the street, only those streets within the zip code to that point.
area are available.
As soon as you enter a character from in-
왘 In the address input menu, select put characters 6, the top list entry 1
“Street”. shows the street which best corresponds
The list of streets appears either with to the input data as it has been entered up
or without the input characters 1 Top list entry based on the input data to that point.
(컄 page 182). Whether or not the input up to that point At the same time, COMAND automatically
characters appear depends on how 2 Characters entered by the user supplements characters 2 entered by the
many streets are available for the se- 3 Characters automatically added by the user with appropriate characters 3.
lected town or city. system 왘 Selecting characters: Slide omp or
4 Currently non-selectable characters rotate ymz.
5 Currently selectable character
6 Input characters 왘 Confirming character selection:
7 Street list Press n.
8 Currently selected character 왘 Deleting individual characters:
Select ) in the bottom line and
press n. 컄컄
181
Control systems
컄컄 왘 Deleting an entire entry: Select ) in Street list without input characters If there are no other selection options,
the bottom line and press n until the the address input menu appears again
entire entry is deleted. after the confirmation.
왘 Canceling an entry: Select “Back” in It shows one of the following items of infor-
the bottom line and press n. mation:
or 앫 Street and state (USA) or province
왘 Press back button L in the center (CDN)
console (컄 page 86). 앫 Street, town/city and state (USA) or
As soon as COMAND can clearly attribute province (CDN)
the characters entered to a street, the in- i The town or city is visible if you have entered
1 Symbol for more selection options
put characters 6 disappear. You see the it before entering the street, or if COMAND can
street list without the input characters. 왘 Selecting a street: Slide qmr or clearly attribute the street entered to a town or
Here you can confirm the current entry or rotate ymz. city.
make another selection. 왘 Canceling selection: Select “Back” Which of the following menu items are now
During character entry, you can also man- and press n. available depends on the situation, or may
ually switch to the street list without input depend on the data version of the digital
or
characters at any time. map. The menu items which are not avail-
왘 Press back button L in the center able cannot be selected.
왘 Switching manually to the street list console (컄 page 86).
without input characters: Slide qm. 앫 “Map”: using the map to enter a desti-
왘 Confirming selection: Press n. nation (컄 page 193)
or
Streets with symbol 1 run through i In this case, using the map for destination
왘 Select ? in the second line from the several suburbs. Confirming one of entry is based on the town or city seen in the ad-
bottom and press n. these streets takes you to a further dress input menu.
sub-selection.
182
Control systems
앫 “House No.”: entering the house num- Entering a center List of centers with input characters
ber (컄 page 185) When this list appears, the input charac-
i It is not possible to enter a center if:
앫 “Intersection”: entering the intersec- 앫 you have not yet entered a town or city ters 7 are automatically activated.
tion (컄 page 188)
앫 you have already entered a street
i Entering an intersection is restricted to 앫 you have already entered a zip code that
streets within the vicinity of the street entered. COMAND can clearly attribute to an address
앫 “POI”: entering a point of interest You can only enter those centers which are
(컄 page 196) saved on the digital map.
Depending on the previous entry, centers are
i In this case, entering a POI is based on the available either for the town/city entered or the
town or city seen in the address input menu. zip code area entered.
앫 “Save”: saving a destination in the des- 왘 In the address input menu, select “Cen-
tination memory (컄 page 217) ter”. 1 Top list entry based on the input data
앫 “Start”: starting the route calculation The list of centers appears either with up to that point
(컄 page 190) or without the input characters 2 Characters entered by the user
(컄 page 184). Whether or not the input 3 Characters automatically added by the
왘 Continuing or completing destina-
characters appear depends on how system
tion entry: Select one of the menu
many centers are available in the se- 4 Currently non-selectable characters
items mentioned above.
lected town or city. 5 Currently selectable character
7 Input characters
8 List of centers
183
Control systems
i In the list of input characters 7, you can 왘 Canceling an entry: Select “Back” in List of centers without input characters
only select currently selectable characters. the bottom line and press n.
sequence in which you have entered your desti- or
nation and the data version of the digital map. 왘 Press back button L in the center
While the characters are being selected as console (컄 page 86).
described below, the top list entry 1 al- As soon as COMAND can clearly attribute
ways shows the center which best corre- the characters entered to a center, the in-
sponds to the input data as it has been put characters 7 disappear. You see the
entered up to that point. list of centers without the input characters.
At the same time, COMAND automatically Here you can confirm the current entry or
supplements characters 2 entered by the make another selection. 왘 Selecting a center: Slide qmr or
user with appropriate characters 3. rotate ymz.
During character entry, you can also man-
왘 Selecting characters: Slide omp or ually switch to the list of centers without 왘 Canceling selection: Select “Back”
rotate ymz. input characters at any time. and press n.
왘 Confirming character selection: 왘 Switching manually to the list of or
Press n. centers without input characters: 왘 Press back button L in the center
왘 Deleting individual characters: Slide qm. console (컄 page 86).
Select ) in the bottom line and or 왘 Confirming selection: Press n.
press n.
왘 Select ? in the second line from the After the confirmation, the address in-
왘 Deleting an entire entry: Select ) in bottom and press n. put menu appears again. It shows the
the bottom line and press n until the center, town/city and state (USA) or
entire entry is deleted. province (CDN).
184
Control systems
Which of the following menu items are now Entering a house number
available may depend on the data version
of the digital map. The menu items which i The house number can only be entered after
the street has been entered.
are not available cannot be selected. You can only enter those house numbers which
앫 “Map”: using the map to enter a desti- are saved on the digital map. The digital map
nation (컄 page 193) does not contain all house numbers for all
streets.
i In this case, using the map for destination How the house number is entered depends
entry is based on the center seen in the address
input menu. on whether you have already entered just
the street or both the street and the town
앫 “POI”: entering a point of interest 1 Numbers entered by the user
or city (컄 page 186).
(컄 page 196) 2 Input characters
3 Currently selected number
i In this case, entering a point of interest is With only the street entered previously
based on the center seen in the address input 왘 Selecting numbers: Slide omp or
When COMAND can clearly allocate the
menu. rotate ymz.
street to a town or city, the house number
앫 “Save”: saving a destination in the des- appears without input characters. Select a 왘 Confirming number selection:
tination memory (컄 page 217) house number from the list (컄 page 188). Press n.
앫 “Start”: starting the route calculation When COMAND cannot clearly allocate the 왘 Deleting individual numbers:
(컄 page 190) street to a town or city, a house number Select ) in the bottom line and
screen appears. You can now enter a press n.
house number. 왘 Deleting an entire entry: Select ) in
tion entry: Select one of the menu
items mentioned above. the bottom line and press n until the
entire entry is deleted. 컄컄
185
Control systems
컄컄 왘 Canceling an entry: Select “Back” in In both cases, the address input menu 왘 Continuing or completing destina-
the bottom line and press n. shows the house number, street, tion entry: Select one of the menu
or town/city and state (USA) or province items mentioned above.
(CDN).
왘 Press back button L in the center With the street and town/city previously
Which of the following menu items are now
console (컄 page 86). entered
왘 Confirming entry: Select ? in the of the digital map. The menu items which 왘 In the address input menu, select
second line from the bottom and are not available cannot be selected. “House No.”.
press n.
앫 “Map”: using the map to enter a desti- The list of house numbers appears ei-
If COMAND cannot clearly attribute the nation (컄 page 193) ther with or without the input charac-
house number to a town or city, the ters (컄 page 188). Whether or not the
town/city input menu appears. i In this case, using the map for destination input characters appear depends on
entry is based on the town or city seen in the ad-
왘 Entering town: Proceed as de- dress input menu. how many house numbers are available
scribed in the “Entering a town or in the selected street.
city” section (컄 page 178).
(컄 page 196)
After the town or city has been en-
tered, the address input menu ap- i In this case, entering a POI is based on the
town or city seen in the address input menu.
pears again.
앫 “Save”: saving a destination in the des-
If COMAND can clearly attribute the
house number to a town or city, the ad-
dress input menu also appears. 앫 “Start”: starting the route calculation
(컄 page 190)
186
Control systems
List of house numbers with input i In the list of input characters 4, you can 왘 Canceling an entry: Select “Back” in
characters only select currently selectable characters. the bottom line and press n.
When this list appears, the input charac- sequence in which you have entered your desti- or
ters 4 are automatically activated. nation and the data version of the digital map. 왘 Press back button L in the center
While the numbers are being selected as console (컄 page 86).
ways shows the house number which best the numbers entered to a house number,
corresponds to the input data as it has the input characters 4 disappear. You see
been entered up to that point. the list of house numbers without the input
At the same time, COMAND automatically characters. Here you can confirm the cur-
supplements numbers 1 entered by the rent entry or make another selection.
user with appropriate numbers 2.
During number entry, you can also manual-
왘 Selecting numbers: Slide omp or ly switch to the list of house numbers with-
1 Numbers entered by the user rotate ymz. out input characters at any time.
2 Numbers automatically added by the 왘 Confirming number selection: 왘 Switching manually to the list of
system Press n. house numbers without input char-
3 Top list entry based on the input data
왘 Deleting individual numbers: acters: Slide qm.
up to that point
4 Input characters Select ) in the bottom line and or
5 Currently non-selectable numbers press n.
6 Currently selected number 왘 Deleting an entire entry: Select ) in bottom and press n.
7 Currently selectable numbers the bottom line and press n until the
8 List of house numbers entire entry is deleted.
187
Control systems
List of house numbers without input Which of the following menu items are now Entering an intersection
characters available may depend on the data version
of the digital map. The menu items which i The intersection can only be entered after
the street has been entered.
are not available cannot be selected. You can only enter those intersections which are
앫 “Map”: using the map to enter a desti- saved on the digital map.
nation (컄 page 193) 왘 In the address input menu, select “In-
tersection”.
i In this case, using the map for destination
entry is based on the town or city seen in the ad- The list of intersections appears either
dress input menu. with or without the input characters
앫 “POI”: entering a point of interest (컄 page 190). Whether or not the input
(컄 page 196) characters appear depends on how
왘 Selecting house numbers: many intersections are available for the
Slide qmr or rotate ymz. i In this case, entering a POI is based on the selected street.
town or city seen in the address input menu.
왘 Canceling selection: Select “Back”
and press n. 앫 “Save”: saving a destination in the des-
or
앫 “Start”: starting the route calculation
왘 Press back button L in the center (컄 page 190)
왘 Confirming selection: Press n. tion entry: Select one of the menu
After the confirmation, the address in- items mentioned above.
put menu appears again. It shows the
house number, street, town/city and
state (USA) or province (CDN).
188
Control systems
List of intersections with input i In the list of input characters 4, you can 왘 Canceling character entry:
characters only select currently selectable characters. Select “Back” in the bottom line and
When this list appears, the input charac-
Which characters are included depends on the press n.
sequence in which you have entered your desti-
ters 4 are automatically activated. nation and the data version of the digital map. or
While the characters are being selected as 왘 Press back button L in the center
described below, the top list entry 1 al- console (컄 page 86).
ways shows the intersection which best As soon as COMAND can clearly attribute
corresponds to the input data as it has the characters entered to an intersection,
been entered up to that point. the input characters 4 disappear. You see
At the same time, COMAND automatically the list of intersections without the input
supplements characters 2 entered by the characters. Here you can confirm the cur-
user with appropriate characters 3. rent entry or make another selection.
왘 Selecting characters: Slide omp or During character entry, you can also man-
1 Top list entry based on the input data rotate ymz. ually switch to the list of intersections
up to that point 왘 Confirming character selection: without input characters at any time.
2 Characters entered by the user Press n. 왘 Switching manually to the list of in-
3 Characters automatically added by the
왘 Deleting individual characters: tersections without input charac-
system
Select ) in the bottom line and ters: Slide qm.
4 Input characters
5 Currently non-selectable characters press n. or
6 Currently selectable character 왘 Deleting an entire entry: Select ) in 왘 Select ? in the second line from the
7 List of intersections the bottom line and press n until the bottom and press n.
8 Currently selected character entire entry is deleted.
189
Control systems
List of intersections without input 왘 Press back button L in the center 앫 “Save”: saving a destination in the des-
characters console (컄 page 86). tination memory (컄 page 217)
왘 If the town/city input menu ap- 앫 “Start”: starting the route calculation
pears: Enter a town or city.
i A detailed description of how to enter a town tion entry: Select one of the menu
or city can be found in the “Entering a town or items mentioned above.
city” section (컄 page 178).
After the town or city has been entered, Starting the route calculation
the address input menu appears again. i You cannot start the route calculation until
Which of the following menu items are now all the necessary address data has been en-
tered.
왘 Selecting an intersection: Slide qmr
of the digital map. The menu items which 왘 After entering the destination, select
or rotate ymz.
are not available cannot be selected. “Start”.
앫 “Map”: using the map to enter a desti- The route calculation will start if route
Either the address input menu appears nation (컄 page 193) guidance has not already been activat-
again, or the town/city input menu. ed.
i In this case, using the map for destination
i The town/city input menu appears if the in- entry is based on the town or city seen in the ad- If route guidance has already been ac-
tersection entered cannot be clearly attributed dress input menu. tivated, a prompt will appear asking
to a town or city. whether you want to end the current
왘 Canceling selection: Select “Back” (컄 page 196) route guidance.
and press n.
i In this case, entering a POI is based on the
or town or city seen in the address input menu.
190
Control systems
왘 Select “Yes” or “No”. Entering a destination from the

If you select “Yes”, COMAND will stop destination memory
the route guidance and start the route
왘 Select “Navi” 씮 “Destination” 씮
calculation for the new destination.
“From Memory”.
If you select “No”, COMAND will con-
The destination memory list appears ei-
tinue with the active route guidance.
ther with or without the input charac-
The new destination is discarded. ters (컄 page 192). Whether the input
During the route calculation, an arrow characters appear depends on the
will indicate the linear direction to the number of entries in the destination
memory. 1 Top list entry based on the input data
destination. Below this, you will see the up to that point
message “Calculating Route”. i The destination memory always contains an 2 Characters entered by the user
Once the route has been calculated, entry called “My Address”. You can save your 3 Characters automatically added by the
route guidance begins (컄 page 207). home address, for example, under this entry system
(컄 page 217).
i Route calculation requires a certain amount 4 Input characters
of time. The time depends on the distance from 5 Currently non-selectable characters
Destination memory list with input
the destination, for example. 6 Destination memory list
characters
COMAND calculates the route using the digital 7 Currently selected character
map data. The calculated route may differ from When this list appears, the input charac- 8 Currently selectable characters
the actual road situation, e.g. due to road con- ters 4 are automatically activated.
struction or incomplete map data. Please make i In the list of input characters 4, you can
sure that you observe the notes about the digital only select currently selectable characters.
map (컄 page 159). Which characters are included depends on the
nation and the content of the destination
memory.
191
Control systems
While the characters are being selected as 왘 Deleting individual characters: 왘 Switching manually to the destina-
described below, the top list entry 1 al- Select ) in the bottom line and tion memory list without input char-
ways shows the destination which best press n. acters: Slide qm.
corresponds to the input data as it has 왘 Deleting an entire entry: Select ) in or
been entered up to that point. the bottom line and press n until the
At the same time, COMAND automatically entire entry is deleted.
bottom and press n.
supplements characters 2 entered by the
왘 Canceling an entry: Select “Back” in
user with appropriate characters 3.
the bottom line and press n. Destination memory list without input
왘 Changing language for the input or
characters
characters: Select !.
왘 Select desired language. console (컄 page 86).
왘 Changing character set for the input
As soon as COMAND can clearly attribute
the characters entered to a destination,
Depending on the previous setting, you the input characters 4 disappear.
will change to letters with special char- You see the destination memory list with-
acters or to numbers with special char- out input characters. Here you can confirm
acters. the current entry or make another selec-
tion.
왘 Selecting characters: Slide omp or 왘 Selecting a destination: Slide qmr or
rotate ymz. You can also manually switch to the desti- rotate ymz.
왘 Confirming character selection: nation memory list without input charac-
ters at any time. 왘 Canceling selection: Press back but-
Press n. ton L in the center console
(컄 page 86).
192
Control systems
or Entering a destination from the map

왘 Select “Back” and press n.
i Depending on the factory settings of the ve-
i The “Back” menu item is only present if this hicle, it may not be possible to enter a destina-
list was called up from the list with input charac- tion while the vehicle exceeds a preset speed. As
ters. soon as the vehicles speed drops to below the
preset speed, the function is available again.
왘 Confirming selection: Press n. You can enter a destination via the map if the dig-
왘 Starting route calculation: ital map does not contain the address of the des-
tination, but the destination must be within the
Select “Start”, see also (컄 page 190).
area of the digital map.
1 Crosshair
Entering a destination from the list of 2 Details of the crosshair position
Calling up the map
last destinations 3 Map scale
왘 In the address input menu, select
왘 Select “Navi” 씮 “Destination” 씮 “Map” (컄 page 172). i Display 2 may be the name of a road, for
“From Last Destinations”. example, provided the digital map contains the
You will see the map with a crosshair. necessary data.
The list of last destinations appears. The map is set to the address set in the
If no data is available, display 2 shows:
The most recent destination is at the address input menu.
top of the list. 앫 the coordinates if the geo-coordinate display
or is switched on (컄 page 170)
왘 Select desired destination.
왘 Select “Navi” 씮 “Destination” 씮 앫 no display if the geo-coordinate display is
왘 Starting route calculation: “Via Map”. switched off (컄 page 170)
Select “Start”, see also (컄 page 190). You will see the map with a crosshair.
193
Control systems
Moving the map and selecting the des- If the destination can be attributed, you Entering predefined destinations
tination will see the address of the destination.
왘 Select “Navi” 씮 “Destination” 씮
If not, you will see the display “Destina-
왘 Moving map: Slide qmr, omp or “Stopover”.
tion from map”.
wmx.
If a stopover has already been entered,
왘 Starting route calculation:
왘 Adjusting map scale: Rotate ymz. you can change it.
Rotating clockwise enlarges the map, 왘 Changing: Select “Change Stop-
rotating counterclockwise reduces it. Entering a stopover over”.
왘 Selecting a destination: Press n. You can now select a category.
i When route guidance is active, you can en-
If the crosshair is located off the edge ter a stopover. Stopovers can be predefined des- 왘 Selecting a category:
of the digital map, a route cannot be tinations from the following predefined Select category, e.g. “Gas station”.
calculated to this destination and you categories:
COMAND first looks for destinations
will see the message “The destination is 앫 “Mercedes-Benz Center” within the immediate vicinity of the ve-
located off the map.”. 앫 “Hospital” hicle and near the vehicle’s route. If
왘 Select “OK”. 앫 “Gas station” there are no destinations available
왘 Move the map and select a destination 앫 “Parking lot”
there, COMAND searches for destina-
again. tions in an area around the vehicle po-
앫 “Restaurant”
sition.
If the destination is within the limits of However, you can also enter destinations other If COMAND does not find any destina-
the digital map, COMAND attempts to than the predefined ones. tions, you will see a message to this ef-
attribute the destination to the map, fect.
which can take approximately
i You can use the stopover function to influ-
ence the route guidance calculation to the main 왘 Select “OK”.
2 seconds. destination. When you have reached your stop-
over, COMAND automatically calculates the You can now select a different
route to the main destination. category.
194
Control systems
If COMAND finds destinations, you will You can select between the following 왘 Enter a special destination
see a list of the destinations and details menu items: (컄 page 196).
of how far away they are in the
앫 “Address Entry” 왘 Starting route calculation: After
right-hand side of the display. The in-
entering a destination, select “Start”
formation about how far away the des- 앫 “From Memory”
(컄 page 190).
tinations are can take a few seconds to 앫 “From Last Destinations”
be displayed.
앫 “From POIs” Changing a stopover
The left-hand part of the display shows
왘 Select a menu item. If a stopover has already been entered, you
the destinations on the map. The desti-
can change it.
nation marked in the list is highlighted Subsequent destination entries may differ,
in the map. depending on your selection: 왘 Select “Navi” 씮 “Destination” 씮
“Stopover” 씮 “Change Stopover”.
왘 Selecting a destination: Select the 앫 “Address Entry” selection:
desired destination from list. 왘 Enter another destination as a stop-
왘 Enter a destination by address over.
The address of the destination ap- (컄 page 172).
pears.
앫 “From Memory” selection: Deleting the stopover
왘 Enter a destination from the desti- If a stopover has already been entered, you
nation memory (컄 page 191). can delete it.
Entering another destination as a stop- 앫 “From Last Destinations” selection: 왘 Select “Navi” 씮 “Destination” 씮
over “Stopover” 씮 “Delete Stopover”.
왘 Enter a destination from the list of
왘 Select “Navi” 씮 “Destination” 씮 last destinations (컄 page 193). COMAND deletes the stopover and cal-
“Stopover”. culates the route to the main destina-
앫 “From POIs” selection:
tion.
왘 Entering: Select “Other”.
195
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (Point of interest entry)
Entering a POI in the surrounding area 왘 Entering town: Select “Town”. Entering a POI in a different region
The town/city input menu appears.
왘 In the map view while the menu system i This function gives you quick access to POIs
is displayed, select “Destination” 씮 왘 Then proceed as described in the “En- which are of national interest in the state (USA)
“From POIs” 씮 “Current Position” tering a town or city” section or province (CDN) you have selected. The follow-
(컄 page 166). (컄 page 178). ing categories may be available:
앫 “AIRPORT”
왘 Continue with designating the POI cat- 왘 After entering the town or city, contin-
egory (컄 page 197). ue with designating the POI category 앫 “BORDER CROSSING”
(컄 page 197). 앫 “HIGHWAY ACCESS”
Entering a POI in the surroundings of a Not all categories are available in all states (USA)
given town Option 2 or provinces (CDN).
왘 Enter an address in the address input 왘 In the map view while the menu system
Option 1 menu (컄 page 172). is displayed, select “Destination” 씮
왘 In the map view while the menu system 왘 Select “POI”. “From POIs” 씮 “Global POI”
is displayed, select “Destination” 씮 (컄 page 166).
왘 Continue with designating the POI cat-
“From POIs” 씮 “Other Town” egory (컄 page 197). The category list appears. The state
(컄 page 166). (USA) or province (CDN) currently se-
왘 If necessary, enter state (USA) lected is shown in the first list entry.
(컄 page 173) or province (CDN)
(컄 page 173).
196
Control systems
왘 Selecting another state (USA) or Designating a POI category If you have entered more than the state
province (CDN): Select the first list (USA) or province (CDN) and the town
entry. The categories and POIs available depend or city, alphabetically sorted categories
on the distance from the vehicle position and POIs sorted by distance within a
A list of states/provinces appears.
you have set for the POI. radius of about 12 mi around the ad-
왘 Select desired state (USA) or province dress entered are available.
앫 POI in the surrounding area:
(CDN). You can extend the search radius and
categories sorted alphabetically and
If there are no POIs for the selected POIs sorted by distance within a radius the category selection using the list op-
state (USA) or province (CDN), you will of about 12 mi around the vehicle positions (컄 page 202).
see a corresponding message. tion are available. You can extend the 앫 POIs in a different region:
왘 Closing message: Select “OK”. search radius using the list options Alphabetically sorted categories and
(컄 page 202). alphabetically sorted POIs are avail-
You can again select a state (prov- able.
ince). 앫 POI within a given town:
If you have only entered the state (USA)
If there are POIs, you will see the cate- or province (CDN) and the town or city, Entering a category
gory list again. alphabetically sorted categories and al- Depending on the number of available cat-
왘 Proceed as described in the “Selecting phabetically sorted POIs within the egories, the main category list appears for
a category” paragraph in the “Main cat- town/city are available. category entry either with or without input
egory list without input characters” characters (컄 page 199).
section (컄 page 199).
197
Control systems
Main category list with input characters i In the list of input characters 5, you can 왘 Canceling an entry: Select “Back” in
When this list appears, the input charac- only select currently selectable characters. the bottom line and press n.
ters 5 are automatically activated. sequence in which you have entered your desti- or
While the characters are being selected as console (컄 page 86).
ways shows the category which best corre- the characters entered to a category, the
sponds to the input data as it has been input characters 5 disappear.
entered up to that point. You see the list of main categories without
At the same time, COMAND automatically the input characters. Here you can confirm
supplements characters 2 entered by the the current entry or make another selec-
user with appropriate characters 3. tion.
1 Top list entry based on the input data 왘 Selecting characters: Slide omp or You can also manually switch to the main
up to that point rotate ymz. category list without input characters at
2 Characters entered by the user any time.
3 Characters automatically added by the 왘 Confirming character selection:
Press n. 왘 Switching manually to the main cat-
system
egory list without input characters:
4 Symbol for available POIs or other 왘 Deleting individual characters: Slide qm.
available subcategories Select ) in the bottom line and
5 Input characters press n. or
6 Currently non-selectable characters 왘 Select ? in the second line from the
7 Currently selectable character 왘 Deleting an entire entry: Select ) in
the bottom line and press n until the bottom and press n.
9 Main category list entire entry is deleted.
198
Control systems
Main category list without input 왘 Confirming selection: Press n.

characters Main categories with symbol 2 con-
tain either POIs or subcategories. Fur-
ther operation depends on whether the
selected main category contains sub-
categories or only POIs.
Selected main category contains subcate-
gories:
Selecting such a main category opens a list
of subcategories. The illustration below 1 Main category
shows by way of example the “RESTAU- 2 To show all POIs for all subcategories
Example illustration: main category list for RANT” main category with available sub- under category 1
POIs in the surrounding area 3 Symbol for available POIs
categories 4.
1 Category 4 Subcategory
2 Symbol for available POIs or other 왘 Selecting a subcategory: Slide qmr
available subcategories or rotate ymz.
왘 Selecting a main category: Slide 왘 Canceling selection: Select “Back”
qmr or rotate ymz. and press n.
왘 Canceling selection: Select “Back” or
and press n.
or console (컄 page 86). 컄컄
199
Control systems
컄컄 왘 Confirming selection: Press n. POI list i Displays 1 and 2 are not visible if you
have already entered a POI within a particular
After selecting a subcategory, a list of Depending on the situation, COMAND first
town or city. Displays 1 and 2 are static; they
POIs appears. It contains the POIs shows the following list or the POI list with do not change while you are driving.
available within the search radius of input characters.
the subcategory. In the POI list, you can either select a POI
The illustration below shows by way of ex- or enter the name of the POI.
i If you have selected list item 2, the POI list ample the POI list for the “RESTAURANT”
contains all POIs for all subcategories within the main category, “FRENCH CUISINE” subcat- Selecting a POI
search radius of main category 1. egory within the surrounding area.
왘 Select desired POI.
Selected main category contains no sub-
categories, but only POIs: The POI list disappears and the address
of the POI appears.
Selecting such a main category immedi-
ately opens a list of POIs. The POI list con- 왘 Back to POI list: Select “Back” and
tains the available POIs within the search press n.
radius of the main category. or
1 Compass heading to the destination 왘 Starting route calculation:

2 Linear distance to the destination Select “Start”, see also (컄 page 190).
3 Special destination
200
Control systems
Entering name of POI While the characters are being selected as

described below, the top list entry 1 al-
왘 Select “Options” 씮 “Spell”.
ways shows the POI that best corresponds
The POI list appears with input charac- to the input data as it has been entered up
ters; the input characters are automat- to that point.
ically activated. At the same time, COMAND automatically
supplements characters 2 entered by the
POI list with input characters user with appropriate characters 3.
i For POIs in other regions, this list also shows 왘 Selecting characters: Slide omp or
the compass heading to the destination as well rotate ymz.
as the linear distance to the destination, as in the 1 Top list entry based on the input data
previous illustration. up to that point 왘 Confirming character selection:
2 Characters entered by the user Press n.
3 Characters automatically added by the 왘 Deleting individual characters:
system Select ) in the bottom line and
4 Input characters press n.
5 Currently selectable character
6 Currently non-selectable characters 왘 Deleting an entire entry: Select ) in
7 POI list the bottom line and press n until the
8 Currently selected character entire entry is deleted.
왘 Canceling an entry: Select “Back” in
i In the list of input characters 4, you can
only select currently selectable characters. the bottom line and press n.
Which characters are included depends on the or
console (컄 page 86). 컄컄
201
Control systems
컄컄 Assoon as COMAND can clearly attribute POI list without input characters List options
the characters entered to a POI, the input
characters 4 disappear. Options in category and POI lists
You see the POI list without input charac- If you enter a POI in the surrounding area,
ters. Here you can confirm the current en- initially, only categories and POIs within a
try or make another selection. radius of approximately 12 mi around the
vehicle position are available.
You can also manually switch to the POI
The same applies if you enter a POI within
list without input characters at any time.
a given town or city and have previously
왘 Switching manually to the POI list entered more than the state (USA) or prov-
without input characters: Slide qm. ince (CDN) and the city or town.
왘 Selecting a destination: Slide qmr or
or rotate ymz. If you expand the list, the search radius in-
왘 Select ? in the second line from the creases to around 90 mi. This gives you ac-
왘 Canceling selection: Select “Back” cess to all categories and POIs within a
bottom and press n. and press n. radius of about 90 mi.
or 왘 Expanding list: In one of the lists se-
왘 Press back button L in the center lect “Options” 씮 “Expand Search”.
console (컄 page 86). The list is expanded.
202
Control systems
Options only in POI lists The POI closest to the center of the 왘 Selecting a POI: Select “Next” or “Pre-
왘 Displaying details of the selected screen is automatically marked. vious”.
entry: Select “Options” 씮 “Details”. If there are no POIs available, the The next or the previous POI is marked.
“Back” menu item is automatically
The detailed view appears. 왘 Displaying details of the selection:
highlighted and you cannot select oth-
왘 Closing detailed view: Select “OK”. Select “Details”.
er menu items.
Entering a POI from the map Select “Start”, see also (컄 page 190).
A prompt appears asking whether the
i If the crosshair is shown on the map, you POI should be used as the destination.
can enter POIs in the vicinity of the crosshair.
If the crosshair is not shown on the map, you can 왘 Select “Yes” or “No”.
enter POIs in the vicinity of the vehicle’s current
position. If you select “Yes”, the route calcula-
tion begins. If you select “No”, you can
왘 Select “Guide” in the map view with the select a new POI.
menu system displayed (컄 page 166).
You will see POI symbols on the map, 1 Highlighted POI
depending on whether POIs are avail- 2 Information about the highlighted POI
able and which map scale is set.
The scale at which the symbols are dis-
played on the map varies according to
the symbol.
You can set which symbols COMAND
should display (컄 page 169).
203
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (real-time traffic) (USA only)
Depending on your vehicle’s production Real-time traffic notifications in the

date the real-time traffic function may not map
be available.
COMAND can display certain traffic events
A RDS-TMC (Radio Data System-Traffic
in the map. The notifications are shown at
Message Channel) radio transmitter
the map scales from 0.05 mi (50 m) to
broadcasts traffic reports COMAND can
500 mi (500 km).
receive and incorporate into the navigation
system. Traffic report messages and map 왘 Set the map scale: Turn ymz until the
symbols can then be viewed in the desired map scale is set.
COMAND display. Events displayed are Turning clockwise enlarges the map, Display example for a traffic jam on the
those within receivable range of the vehi- turning counterclockwise reduces it. route
cle's location.
1 Symbol for event on the route
i Actual road and traffic conditions may be 2 Marker symbols for the affected route
different from the received messages. section
3 Current vehicle position and direction
of travel
4 Map scale
i COMAND marks the entire route section af-
fected with the appropriate symbols 2, inde-
pendently of its actual length on the route
section. The symbols 2 are shown in the direc-
tion of travel on the left or right of the route.Thus,
they also indicate which side of the roadway is
affected by the event.
204
Control systems
The following shows the possible symbol Displaying real-time traffic reports List for inactive route guidance
displays. When route guidance is inactive, the list
Displaying the message list displays all streets for which messages are
present.
왘 Select “Navi” 씮 “Traffic”.
COMAND searches for real-time traffic
transmitters. When no traffic reports
are present, you will see a display to
this effect.
1 Traffic jam on the route (symbol with

red border)
2 Traffic jam away from the route (sym- 1 Affected street list
bol with gray border)
3 Stop and go traffic on the route (sym- i Instead of a street, an area or a region can
bol with red border) also be affected by a message, for example,
4 Stop and go traffic away from the route when visibility is limited due to fog.
(symbol with gray border) 왘 Read a message: Select a street.
5 Blocked section on the route
You can find an example message on
6 Traffic jam
(컄 page 206).
7 Stop and go traffic
왘 Close the list: Slide omp.
205
Control systems
List for active route guidance 왘 Read a message: Select a street. The symbols for the possible message
When route guidance is active, the list dis- events are shown in the following.
You can find an example message on
plays only the streets which are part of the (컄 page 206).
route and for which messages are present.
왘 Close the list: Slide omp once or re-
peatedly.
Example message
1 Traffic jam symbol

2 Stop and go traffic symbol
3 Warning message symbol
4 Blocked section symbol
왘 Scroll through the contents or to the
next message: Turn ymz or slide
1 Show all messages (including those
qmr.
which do not affect the route)
2 Affected streets (only shown when
messages which affect the route are
present) 1 Selection display (“Messages On
Route” or “All messages”)
왘 Display all messages: Select “Display
2 Symbol for message event (e.g. traffic
All Messages”.
jam)
All streets are shown for which mes- 3 Street affected by the message
sages are present, as well as for those 4 Message 1 of 5 for the affected street
which are not on the route. 5 Message text
206
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (route guidance)
왔 COMAND navigation system (route guidance)
Route guidance Roads that have time restrictions (e.g.
For this reason, you must always observe
closed on Sundays and public holidays) are
applicable road and traffic rules and regula-
not considered for route guidance, if the
tions during your journey. Road and traffic
Warning! G rules and regulations always have priority
digital map contains the relevant informa-
tion.
over the navigation commands generated by
COMAND calculates the route to the desti-
the system.
nation without taking account of the follow- Examples of displays and announce-
ing, for example: ments for a driving maneuver
COMAND guides you to the destination us-
앫 Traffic lights
ing navigation commands in the form of Driving maneuvers have three phases:
앫 Stop and right-of-way signs audible navigation announcements and
앫 Parking or stopping prohibited areas route guidance displays. 앫 Preparation phase
앫 Lane merges 앫 Announcement phase
i The route guidance displays can only be
앫 Other road and traffic rules and regula- seen if the display is switched to navigation 앫 Maneuver phase
tions mode.
앫 Narrow bridges If, for any reason, you do not follow the
COMAND may give incorrect navigation navigation commands or if you leave the
commands if the data in the digital map calculated route, COMAND automatically
does not correspond with the actual calculates a new route to the destination.
road/traffic situation. For example, if the If the map data contains the relevant infor-
traffic routing has been changed or the di- mation, COMAND tries to avoid roads that
rection of a one-way road has been re- only have limited access, e.g. roads closed
versed. to through-traffic and non-residents.
207
Control systems
Preparation phase Announcement phase 1 Next road

2 Driving maneuver (turn left)
COMAND prepares you for the upcoming COMAND announces the next driving ma-
3 Graphical representation of the dis-
driving maneuver. Based on the example neuver. Based on the example display be-
tance to the driving maneuver
display below, the driving maneuver is an- low, the driving maneuver is announced
4 Point at which the driving maneuver
nounced with the “Prepare to turn left” 700 feet in advance with the “Turn left in
takes place (light blue dot, shown in
message. The display is not split and 700 feet to your destination” message.
both the left and right displays)
shows the map over the full screen.
The display is divided in two. In the left 5 Information about distance to the next
half, you see the normal map view. In the driving maneuver
right half, there is either an enlarged view 6 Route (highlighted in blue; shown in
of the area surrounding the intersection both the left and right displays)
(intersection zoom) or simply a symbol for 7 Current vehicle position; the triangle in-
the next driving maneuver. dicates the vehicle’s direction of travel
The following example illustration shows (shown in both the left and right dis-
the intersection zoom in the right half. plays)
8 Street on which you are currently driv-
ing, if included on the digital map
9 Destination
1 Point at which the driving maneuver
takes place (light blue dot) i The filled-in section of distance graphic 3
2 Route (highlighted blue) gets shorter the nearer you get to the announced
3 Current vehicle position; the triangle driving maneuver.
points in the vehicle’s direction of trav-
el
208
Control systems
Maneuver phase Example of a display without driving Destination or destination area

COMAND announces the next driving ma- maneuvers reached
neuver. Based on the example display be-
Once you have reached your destination,
low, the driving maneuver is announced
you will hear the announcement “You have
150 feet in advance with the “Now turn
reached the destination”. For certain POIs
left” message. The display is also split into
(airports or highway junctions), you will
two halves, as for the announcement
hear the announcement “You have reached
phase.
the destination area”. In addition, you will
i Once the maneuver is completed, COMAND see a corresponding display and route
automatically switches back to the non-split guidance is automatically ended.
screen.
1 Main destination <

2 Stopover = (only visible if a stopover
has been entered)
3 Route (highlighted blue)
4 Current vehicle position; the triangle in-
dicates the vehicle’s direction of travel
5 Set map orientation – for an explana-
tion and settings, see (컄 page 169)
6 Set scale – for an explanation and set- 1 Destination on the map
tings, see (컄 page 167) 2 Destination flag
1 Graphical representation of the dis-
tance to the next driving maneuver
2 Information about distance to the next
driving maneuver
209
Control systems
Partially digitized areas If the destination is within a partially i When you call up the route info to this type
digitized area of destination, (컄 page 215) the following data
i The digital map may contain areas that are COMAND guides you through fully digitized
shown there may differ from the actual situation:
only partially digitized although they are within a 앫 Distance to the destination
digitized region. areas for as long as possible. Route guid-
ance is conducted in the usual manner, i.e. 앫 Estimated driving time to the destination
with navigation announcements and route 앫 Estimated arrival time
Warning! G guidance displays.
Before the vehicle reaches a partially digi- Route guidance within a partially digi-
Due to incomplete digitization, the route
tized area, COMAND notifies you of this tized area
shown on the map may differ from the actual
road/traffic situation. with the following announcements: If you start route guidance in this type of
앫 “Be prepared to enter an area where area, you will hear the following announce-
If you follow the route shown on the map, for
turn by turn guidance cannot be provid- ment: “You are currently in an area where
example, it is possible that you could drive
ed.” turn by turn guidance cannot be provided.”
the wrong way down a one-way street or
that a street cannot be driven on. 앫 “In 700 feet you will enter an area Route guidance is provided by means of a
where turn by turn guidance cannot be direction arrow showing the compass
When using route guidance in a partially dig-
provided.” heading to the destination. COMAND will
itized area, you must therefore be sure to
not generate automatic navigation an-
observe all relevant traffic regulations and
i The indicated distance can be seen here by nouncements.
the course of the road. way of example. In reality, it may be different. If you try to call up an announcement man-
All relevant traffic regulations and the 앫 “You are about to enter an area where ually, (컄 page 213) you will hear the an-
course of the road always take priority over turn by turn guidance cannot be provid- nouncement “You are currently in an area
the route shown on the map. ed.” where turn by turn guidance cannot be pro-
vided.”.
210
Control systems
During route guidance, the display is divid- Off-road and off-map These destinations are shown as off-road
ed. On the right-hand side you will see the destinations, which you can enter using
direction arrow showing the compass the map, for example.
Route guidance to an off-road
heading to the destination. In these cases, COMAND guides you for as
destination
On the left-hand side of the display you will long as possible with navigation announce-
see the map with the suggested route. The ments and displays on roads known to the
suggested route is highlighted blue. How- Warning! G system.
ever, it may not be possible to follow the Shortly before you reach the last known
suggested route because, for example, the The COMAND navigation system may direct
the point to leave the digitized road net-
road is closed or not open for car traffic. you to off-road routes that your vehicle may
work, you will hear the announcement “The
not be capable of traversing through without
If, during route guidance, COMAND leads destination is nearby. Follow the arrow on
damaging your tires, wheels or vehicle. It is
you back into a fully digitalized area, route the display”.
the driver’s sole responsibility to determine
guidance will simply continue in the usual You will then see an arrow that indicates
the suitability of the route. Off-road routes
manner. the direction to the off-road destination.
may be of varying conditions and their ap-
When the off-road destination is close to
propriateness for use may be affected by
the road, “Area of dest. reached” appears
various factors such as time of day, time of
in addition below the arrow.
year and immediate weather conditions that
cannot be judged or taken into consider- The section of the route from the last
ation by the COMAND system. known point on the map to the off-road
destination is indicated with a dashed line
COMAND can guide you to destinations after a certain length. It simply shows the
within the area covered by the digital map, direction to the off-road destination with-
even if a destination is not located at a out taking account of any type of obstacles
road known to the system. in the way.
211
Control systems
Route guidance from an off-road At the start of the route guidance, you will
location to a destination see the “Off Map” message and a direction
arrow. The direction arrow shows the com-
If there is no road available on map at cur-
pass heading to the actual destination.
rent position of the car, vehicle is off road.
COMAND is also able to guide you to a des- The route is highlighted blue from the near-
tination from such a location. est road known to the system.
At the start of the route guidance, you will As soon as the vehicle is back on a road
see the “Off Road” message and a direc- known to the system, route guidance con-
tion arrow. The direction arrow shows the tinues in the usual way.
1 Current vehicle position; the triangle in- compass heading to the actual destina-
dicates the vehicle’s direction of travel tion. Off-road during route guidance
2 Off-road section of the route The route is highlighted blue from the near- The road layout may differ from the data on
3 Off-road destination est road known to the system. the digital map, due to road construction
4 Direction arrow, shows compass head- measures, for example.
As soon as the vehicle is back on a road
ing to destination
known to the system, route guidance con- In such cases, the system cannot allocate
On the off-road section of the route, direc- tinues in the usual way. the vehicle’s position to the digital map
tion arrows showing the compass heading and the vehicle is therefore in an off-road
to the destination guide you. You will also Route guidance from an off-map position.
see the “Direction to destination” display. location to a destination
The “Off Road” message and an arrow
If the vehicle position is outside the area showing the compass heading to the desti-
covered by the digital map, then the vehi- nation appear on the display.
cle is in an off-map location. As soon as the system can allocate the ve-
COMAND is also able to guide you to a des- hicle position’s to the map again, route
tination from such a location. guidance continues in the usual way.
212
Control systems
Navigation announcements 왘 Calling up a current announcement: i The announcements remain switched off
Select “Navi” 씮 6. even if you start a new route guidance or if
COMAND is switched off/on with the o but-
or
Warning! G ton.
왘 Press P favorite button if the button If you switch COMAND off by removing the
Navigation announcements are intended to has been programmed with this func- SmartKey from the starter switch and then
switch the ignition back on after more than
direct you while driving without diverting tion (컄 page 238).
3 minutes, the announcements are automatical-
your attention from the road and driving. ly switched back on.
i You will find the button programming on
Please always use this feature instead of (컄 page 238). 왘 Switching navigation announce-
consulting the map display for directions.
왘 Canceling navigation message: ments back on manually:
Consulting the symbols or map display for
Briefly press F shortcut button dur- Select “Navi” 씮 6.
directions may cause you to divert your at-
ing an announcement. 왘 Adjusting volume of the messages:
tention from driving and increase your risk
of an accident. 왘 Switching off navigation messages: Adjust the volume during an automatic
Press and hold F during an an- announcement (컄 page 96).
nouncement until the announcement is or
i If Russian or Chinese is set as the system switched off.
language, the navigation announcements are in 왘 Call up an announcement manually us-
English. You will find how to set the system lan- You will see the message “The driving
guage on (컄 page 238).
ing “Navi” 씮 6 and adjust the vol-
instructions have been muted.” for a ume (컄 page 96).
Navigation announcements are muted during short while.
telephone calls. You can, however, call up a cur-
rent announcement at any time. You can also
call up a current announcement at any time if
you have missed an announcement.
Route guidance is already active.
213
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (during route guidance)
Cancel route guidance Route browser i The information 3 about the marked route
section shows the street name and the length of
왘 Select “Destination” 씮 “Cancel Route i The route browser shows an overview of the the route section. Marked route section 1 is al-
Guidance” in map view with the menu route. You can use the route browser to move ways highlighted in white and outlined in red.
system displayed (컄 page 166). along the route section by section and view infor-
왘 Displaying next or previous route
mation about and details of each section of the
route. section: Select “Next” or “Previous”.
Continuing cancelled route guidance
왘 Select “Route” 씮 “Route Browser” in 왘 Increasing or reducing size of the
왘 Select “Destination” 씮 “Continue map view with the menu system dis- map: Select ; or :.
Route Guidance” in map view with the played (컄 page 166). 왘 Closing route browser:
menu system displayed (컄 page 166). Select “Back”.
The route browser appears.
COMAND calculates the route.
1 Highlighted route section

3 Information about the highlighted route
section
214
Control systems
Displaying route information i COMAND uses the time set in COMAND as

the basis for calculating the estimated arrival
왘 Select “Route” 씮 “Route Info” in map time. The clock must be set correctly in
view with the menu system displayed COMAND (컄 page 235). The calculation of the
(컄 page 166). estimated arrival time does not additionally take
into account whether Daylight Saving Time or
The route information appears. standard time is applicable at the destination. If
the destination is in a different time zone, arrival
time display 8 is in local time. This is indicated
by “LT” in the display.
The following data cannot be seen until the route
Example display with main destination and calculation has been completed:
stopover
앫 Distance to destination 1
1 Distance to the destination
앫 Estimated arrival time 8
2 Symbol = for stopover
3 Abbreviation for province (CDN) or 앫 Estimated remaining travel time 7
state (USA) If the destination is located within a partially dig-
4 Town/city itized area, the following data may differ from the
5 Street facts:
6 Symbol < for main destination 앫 Distance to destination 1
7 Estimated driving time to the destina- 앫 Estimated arrival time 8
tion 앫 Estimated remaining travel time 7
8 Estimated arrival time
왘 Closing route info: Slide omp or
press back button L in the center
215
Control systems
Detour function 왘 Starting route calculation:

i The detour function blocks a section of the 왘 Deleting blockage: Select “Navi” 씮
route ahead of you. You can set the length of the
blockage. If possible, COMAND calculates a de- “Route” 씮 “Detour” 씮 “Delete”.
tour route. 왘 Select “Back”.
i The detour function may direct you to
off-road routes. See Off-road and Off-map for ad-
ditional routes and cautions (컄 page 211).
왘 Select “Route” 씮 “Detour” in map view
1 Blocked route section
with the menu system displayed
(컄 page 166).
The detour function display appears. 3 Information about the blocked route
왘 Setting length of the blockage: section
Select “More” or “Less” until the de- i Blocked route section 1 is always highlight-
sired length is set. ed in red/white. The information about blocked
route section 3 shows which section of the
route is blocked and the length of the blocked
section.
216
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (destination memory)
왔 COMAND navigation system (destination memory)
Saving a destination in the destination Saving a destination from the list of last 왘 Select desired category, e.g. “Home”.
memory destinations
COMAND saves the destination in the
왘 Select “Navi” 씮 “Destination” 씮 destination memory as your own ad-
i This function also saves the destination in “From Last Destinations”. dress.
the address book. There COMAND creates an
address book entry containing complete, naviga- The list of last destinations appears.
ble address data. You can then select this entry Saving a destination with a name
in the address book and start navigation to the 왘 Select desired destination.
왘 Select “Save new entry”.
address. The address of the destination is dis-
played. 왘 Select desired category, e.g. “Home”.
Saving after the address has been en- The input menu appears with the data
tered 왘 Select “Save”.
fields and the input characters.
왘 Select “Save” after entering the ad- You can now select save options.
dress (컄 page 172).
Selecting save options
You can now select save options.
Saving a destination without a name
Saving during route guidance
왘 Select “Save Without Name”.
왘 Select “Destination” 씮 “Save Destina-
tion” during route guidance. COMAND saves the destination in the
destination memory and uses the ad-
You can now select save options. dress as the destination name.
or 1 Selected data field with input mark
왘 Select “Save as ‘My Address’ ”. (cursor)
2 Input characters 컄컄
217
Control systems
컄컄 왘 Entering data: Proceed as described 왘 Select desired address book entry. Pro- Deleting a destination from the destina-
in the “Changing the data field” operat- ceed as described in the “Searching for tion memory
ing step in the “Creating a new address an address book entry” section
book entry” section (컄 page 225). (컄 page 226). 왘 Select “Navi” 씮 “Destination” 씮
“From Memory”.
If the selected address book entry does
Assigning a destination to an address Depending on the number of entries in
not yet contain any navigable address
book entry the destination memory, you will see
data, COMAND saves the data.
i This function assigns the complete, naviga- the destination memory list with or
If the selected address book entry al-
ble address data to an already existing address without input characters.
ready contains navigable address data,
book entry. You can then select this entry in the
address book and start navigation to the address you will see a question asking you if the
from there. previous data should be overwritten.
왘 Select “Assign Address Book Entry”. 왘 Select “Yes” or “No”.
왘 Select desired category, e.g. “Home”. If you select “Yes”, COMAND saves the
data.
The menu appears for searching for an
address book entry.
Example illustration: destination memory

list without input characters
218
Control systems
i If the navigable address data of the destina-

tion to be deleted has also been assigned to an
address book entry, COMAND deletes the data
there as well. If the corresponding address book
entry does not contain any further data, such as
telephone numbers, COMAND deletes the entire
address book entry.
Own address
i The destination memory always contains an

Example illustration: destination memory entry called “My Address”. You can save your Example illustration: destination memory
list with input characters list without input characters
home address, for example, under this entry.
1 Input characters In the destination memory list without in-
Assigning your address for the first put characters, the “My Address” entry is
왘 Select desired destination. Proceed as
time or changing your own address automatically highlighted. 컄컄
described for destination entry in the
“Entering a destination from the desti-
nation memory” section (컄 page 191). Assigning and/or changing your own ad-
dress
왘 Select “Delete” after selecting the des-
tination to be deleted. 왘 Select “Navi” 씮 “Destination” 씮
“From Memory”.
A prompt appears asking whether you
want to delete the destination. Depending on the number of entries in
the destination memory, you will see
왘 Select “Yes” or “No”. the destination memory list with or
If you select “Yes”, COMAND deletes without input characters.
the destination.
219
Control systems
컄컄 왘 Destination memory list with input Entering an address manually

characters: Slide qm repeatedly until 왘 If you want to assign your own ad-
the input characters disappear.
dress for the first time: Select “Save
The list entry “My Address” is automat- new entry”.
ically highlighted as long as you have
or
not entered any characters using the
input characters. 왘 If you want to change your own ad-
dress: Select “Change” 씮 “Save new
왘 If you have entered characters
entry”.
from the list of input characters:
Example illustration: destination memory Rotate ymz or slide qm repeatedly In both cases, the address input menu ap-
list with input characters until the list entry “My Address” is pears.
1 Input characters highlighted. 왘 Enter the address. Proceed as de-
In the destination memory list with input 왘 Press n. scribed for destination entry in the “En-
characters 1, the input characters are au- tering a destination by address”
Further operation depends on whether you
tomatically activated. section (컄 page 172).
want to enter the address manually or use
왘 Destination memory list without in- an address book entry as your own ad- 왘 Select “Save” after entering the ad-
put characters: Press n immediately. dress. dress.
or Your address is saved.
220
Control systems
Using the address book entry as your 왘 Closing message: Select “OK”. 왘 Selecting a state (USA) or province
own address (CDN): Select desired state (USA) or
i In the address book entry, the town/city province (CDN) from the list.
왘 If you want to assign your own ad- and street must be spelled in the same way as
dress for the first time: the destination entry so that the data matches 왘 Entering a town: Proceed as de-
Select “Assign Address Book Entry”. the digital map data. scribed for destination entry in the “En-
In order for the state (USA) or province (CDN) to tering a town or city” section
or match the map data, you may either enter the
entire name or the abbreviation in the address
(컄 page 178).
왘 If you want to change your own ad-
book. 왘 Entering a street: Proceed as de-
dress: Select “Change” 씮 “Assign Ad-
dress Book Entry”. Examples: scribed for destination entry in the “En-
앫 Florida or FL tering a street” section (컄 page 180).
In both cases, the menu appears for
searching for an address book entry. 앫 Colorado or CO 왘 Entering a house number: Proceed
앫 Alberta or AB as described for destination entry in
왘 Select desired address book entry. Pro- the “Entering a house number” section
ceed as described in the “Searching for 앫 Ontario or ON
(컄 page 185).
an address book entry” section Depending on which data is missing or
If all data is available and matches the
(컄 page 226). cannot be found on the digital map, you
digital map data, you can save the ad-
Once the address data is complete and if it must now either:
dress.
matches the digital map data, COMAND 앫 select a state (USA) or province (CDN)
saves the entry as your own address in the 왘 Saving: Select “Save”.
앫 or enter a town/city
destination memory.
앫 or enter a street
If address data is still missing or if it cannot
be found on the digital map, a message ap- 앫 or enter a house number
pears indicating that the address is incom-
plete.
221
Control systems
Displaying your own address 왘 Press n. 왘 Slide qm repeatedly until the input
Select “Navi” 씮 “Destination” 씮 characters disappear.
왘 If your own address has already been
“From Memory”. assigned, you will see the menu for The list entry “My Address” is automat-
starting route guidance with your own ically highlighted as long as you have
The destination memory list appears ei-
address data. not entered any characters using the
ther with or without the input charac-
input characters.
ters. Whether the input characters 왘 Exiting menu: Select “Back”.
appear depends on the number of en- 왘 If you have entered characters
tries in the destination memory. Destination memory list with input from the list of input characters:
왘 Press n. characters Rotate ymz or slide qm repeatedly
until the list entry “My Address” is
highlighted.
Destination memory list without input
characters 왘 Press n.
If your own address has already been
assigned, you will see the menu for
starting route guidance with your own
address data.
왘 Exiting menu: Select “Back”.
1 Input characters
In the destination memory list with input
characters 1, the input characters are au-
In the destination memory list without in- tomatically activated.
put characters, the “My Address” entry is
automatically highlighted.
222
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (last destinations)
왔 COMAND navigation system (last destinations)
i COMAND automatically saves the last desti- Saving the vehicle position in the list of 왘 Showing menu system, if neces-
nations for which the route calculation was last destinations sary: Press n.
launched. It is stored in the “last destinations”
memory. If this memory is full, COMAND deletes 왘 Select “Position” 씮 “Save Position”.
왘 Centering map on the vehicle’s posi-
the oldest destination. You can also save one tion: Select “Navi” 씮 “Position” 씮 COMAND saves the crosshair position
destination from the list of last destinations in “Vehicle Position Map”. as a destination in the list of last desti-
the destination memory. It will be saved there
nations.
permanently. 왘 Saving: Select “Navi” 씮 “Position” 씮
“Save Position”.
Deleting one of the last destinations
Saving a destination permanently in
COMAND saves the current vehicle po-
the destination memory
sition as a destination in the list of last 왘 Select “Navi” 씮 “Destination” 씮
destinations. “From Last Destinations”.
왘 Proceed as described in the “Saving a
destination from the list of last destina- The list of last destinations appears.
Saving the crosshair position in the list
tions” section (컄 page 217). 왘 Select desired destination.
of last destinations
The address of the destination ap-
i If you have manually moved the map, you pears.
will see a crosshair on the map (컄 page 167).
You can save the crosshair position as a destina- 왘 Select “Delete”.
tion in the list of last destinations.
223
Control systems
COMAND address book
on how many entries the phone book and The main address book display ap-
Warning! G the address book contain. After the read-in pears. If the address book already con-
process, the COMAND compares the tains entries, you will see the data of an
Please devote your attention first and fore- phone book entries with the address book entry.
most to the traffic situation you are in. entries. If all of the telephone numbers of a
Before your journey, please familiarize your- phone book entry in the mobile phone are
self with the address book functions. present in an address book entry, the ad-
dress book shows only the address book
entry. If not, the address book also shows
conditions permit you to do so. Otherwise
the phone book entry in the mobile phone.
you could be involved in an accident in
which you or others could be injured.
Address book menu overview
General notes i The components and operating principles of

COMAND can be found on (컄 page 85). Illustration: address book entry
The address book contains the entries that
are saved in the COMAND address book Search New Entry i For phone book entries in the mobile phone
memory. The entries are permanently that contain a name and a telephone number,
Search for an ad- Create new address you will see the name and the number. If a phone
available even if the phone is not inserted
dress book entry book entry book entry in the mobile phone contains several
in the cradle*. When you insert the mobile telephone numbers, you will see the message
phone into the cradle*, COMAND reads-in “Multiple Numbers” instead of a telephone num-
the phone book entries saved in the mobile Calling up the address book ber.
phone and stores the entries as a separate
list from the COMAND address book. This 왘 Select “Telephone” 씮 “Telephone” 씮
list is a copy of the phone’s phone book. “Address Book”.
This can take several minutes, depending
224
Control systems
COMAND address book
Selecting an entry in the main address 왘 Select “Telephone” 씮 “Telephone” 씮 왘 Switching between private and
book display “Address Book” 씮 “New Entry”. business data: Select symbol 1.
The input menu appears with the data The display switches to private or busi-
왘 Slide omp or rotate ymz until the
fields and the input characters. ness data, depending on the previous
status.
Creating a new address book entry 왘 Changing data field: Slide rmq re-
peatedly until desired entry is highlight-
i Please observe the following when creating ed.
a new address book entry:
or
You can define your own address in the destina-
tion memory in navigation mode. When defining 왘 Select [ or ] repeatedly until de-
the address, you can transfer data already en- sired entry is highlighted.
tered as an address book entry.
In the address book entry, the town/city and 왘 Entering data into a field:
street must be spelled in the same way as the
Illustration: input menu for private data
Select desired characters one by one
destination entry so that the data matches the from the input characters.
digital map data. 1 To switch between work and home
In order for the state (province) to match the data ( or symbol) 왘 Toggling upper and lower case for
map data, its complete name or abbreviation 2 Selected data field with input mark the input characters: Select & or
may be entered. (cursor) (.
Examples: 3 Display of set data type – in example 왘 Changing language for the input
앫 Florida or FL display, home data is set ( symbol characters: Select !.
앫 Colorado or CO and “Home” display)
왘 Select desired language. 컄컄
4 Input characters
앫 Alberta or AB
앫 Ontario or ON
225
Control systems
COMAND address book
컄컄 왘 Changing character set for the input 왘 Canceling an entry: Select “Back”. Searching for an address book entry
If one of the data fields contains new
왘 Select “Telephone” 씮 “Telephone” 씮
Depending on the previous setting, you data, a prompt will appear asking
“Address Book” 씮 “Search”.
will change to letters with special char- whether you want to save the entry.
acters or to numbers with special char- The search menu appears with the
acters. smart speller.
왘 Moving cursor in the data field:
not, depending on your selection.
Select Y or Z.
왘 Deleting individual characters: Deleting an entry
Select ) and briefly press n.
The character to the left of the cursor is i You cannot delete phone book entries from
the mobile phone.
deleted.
왘 Search for desired entry (컄 page 226).
왘 Deleting an entire entry: Select )
and press and hold n until the entry is 왘 Select “Options” 씮 “Delete”.
deleted. A deletion prompt appears. 1 Symbol for complete address data
왘 Saving an entry: Select ?. from the navigation system
2 Symbol for summarized entries
The entry will either be deleted or not, from the mobile phone with the same
depending on your selection. name but different telephone numbers
3 Category symbol
4 Smart speller
5 Symbol for voice entry
6 Back to the main address book display
226
Control systems
COMAND address book
Entries with category symbol 3 come Entries with the symbol contain com- 왘 Changing smart speller language:
from the mobile phone. The following cate- plete, navigable address data from the nav- Select !.
gory symbols are possible: igation system that correspond to digital 왘 Select desired language.
앫 = symbol for “Mobile” category map data. It is possible to quickly start
route guidance to these types of entry 왘 Changing smart speller character
앫 = symbol for “Home” category (컄 page 231). set: Select #.
앫 = symbol for “Work” category Depending on the previous setting, you
Switching from the smart speller to the will change to letters with special char-
앫 = symbol for “Fax” category list acters or to numbers with special char-
앫 = symbol for “Pager” category 왘 Slide mq repeatedly or press n until acters.
앫 = symbol for “Main” category or for the smart speller is hidden. 왘 Entering characters: Select the char-
unknown category or for phone entries or acters one by one of the entry you are
that are saved on the SIM card of a searching for.
GSM mobile phone 왘 Select ?.
왘 Deleting individual characters:
Entries without a category symbol or with Switching from the list to the smart Select ) and briefly press n.
the or symbols come from the speller
COMAND address book. All other entries Each time you enter or delete a charac-
come from the mobile phone and are only 왘 Select “Back” from the list. ter, the closest match will be displayed
visible when the mobile phone is in the cra- at the top of the list.
dle*. Searching 왘 Deleting an entire entry: Select )
and press and hold n until the entry is
Entries with the symbol contain a voice Searching via the smart speller deleted. 컄컄
entry (컄 page 232). It is possible to add
voice entries in vehicles with Voice Con- 왘 Switch from the list to the smart speller
trol*. if necessary.
227
Control systems
COMAND address book
컄컄 왘 Canceling search: Switch from the 왘 Select an address book entry in the i The options available under “Options” menu
smart speller to the list (컄 page 227). main address book menu item 4 depend on which data field 3 is select-
(컄 page 225). ed. The following options may be available:
The entry at the top of the list is auto-
matically highlighted. 왘 Press n. 앫 Displaying abbreviated content in full
(컄 page 229)
왘 Going back to main address book The detailed view appears. 앫 Changing an address book entry
display: If necessary, switch from the ((컄 page 229)
list to the smart speller (컄 page 227)
앫 Changing the description of a telephone
and select “Back” in the smart speller. number data field (컄 page 230)
앫 Adding a telephone number data field
Searching via the list (컄 page 230)
왘 If necessary, switch from the smart 앫 Calling a number saved in an entry
speller to the list (컄 page 227). (컄 page 231)
왘 Rotate ymz or slide qmr until desired 앫 Starting route guidance to an entry
entry is highlighted on the list. (컄 page 231)
Illustration: detailed view for private data 앫 Options for voice entries (컄 page 232)
Displaying a complete address book
1 To go back to the previous menu
entry Switching between private or business
2 To switch between work and home
data
data ( symbol or )
Searching for the desired entry 3 Selected data field 왘 Select symbol 2.
왘 Search for an address book entry 4 Display of set data type – in example The display switches to private or busi-
(컄 page 226). display, home data is set ( symbol ness data, depending on the previous
and “Home” display) status.
or 5 To call up options
228
Control systems
COMAND address book
Selecting a different data field 왘 Select a phone book entry from the i The options available under “Options” menu
왘 Rotate ymz or slide qmr. mobile phone using the COMAND item 4 depend on which data field 3 is select-
address book menu (컄 page 225). ed. The following options may be available:
Displaying abbreviated content in full 왘 Press n. 앫 Changing a phone book entry in the mobile
phone (컄 page 229)
왘 Select “Options” 씮 “Details”. The detailed view appears. 앫 Calling a number saved in an entry
The display is shown in full. ((컄 page 231)
앫 Saving a phone book entry from mobile
왘 Closing entire display: Slide qmr or
phone in the address book (컄 page 233)
omp or press n.
Closing the detailed view
Closing the detailed view
왘 Select “Back”.
왘 Select “Back”.
Changing an entry
Displaying of a complete phone book
entry in the mobile phone
1 To go back to the previous menu i You cannot change address book entries
that come from the phone book in the mobile
i The mobile phone must be inserted in the 2 Category symbol
phone.
cradle*. 3 Display for phone book entry in mobile
phone
Changing an address book entry
Searching for the desired entry 4 To call up options
왘 Search for an address book entry
왘 Search for phone book entry in mobile i If a phone book entry in the mobile phone (컄 page 226) then, select “Options” 씮
phone (컄 page 226). has more than one telephone number, you will
“Change”.
see all telephone numbers with the respective
or category symbol 2 in the detailed view. or 컄컄
229
Control systems
COMAND address book
컄컄 왘 Display the details of an address book 왘 Select “Save”. 왘 Display the details of an entry and high-
entry (컄 page 228) then, select “Op- light the telephone number data field
COMAND saves the data if there are
tions” 씮 “Change Content”. (컄 page 228).
fewer than four numbers assigned to
The input menu appears with the data the entry you are searching for in the 왘 Select “Options” 씮 “Add Number”.
fields. selected number category.
왘 Select a number category, e.g. “Home”.
왘 Proceed as described in the “Switching Otherwise, you will see a prompt ask-
왘 Select a telephone category, e.g. “Land
between private and business data” ing whether one of the existing num-
Line”.
paragraph in the “Creating a new ad- bers should be overwritten.
dress book entry” section 왘 Select “Save”.
(컄 page 225). COMAND adds the data field to the entry if
If you select “Yes”, a selection list will
there are fewer than four numbers as-
Changing the description of a tele- appear containing the four existing
signed to the entry in the selected number
phone number data field numbers.
category. You can now enter a number into
i This function is not possible for phone book 왘 Select number to be overwritten. the data field.
entries in the mobile phone. COMAND overwrites the selected num- 왘 Proceed as described from the “Enter-
왘 Display the details of an entry and high- ber with the new data. ing data into a field” operating step in
light the telephone number data field the “Creating a new address book en-
(컄 page 228). Adding to a telephone number data try” section (컄 page 225).
field
왘 Select “Options” 씮 “Change Entry If four numbers are already saved for the
Name”. i One address book entry may contain up to entry in the selected number category, a
four data fields for private telephone numbers prompt will appear asking whether one of
왘 Select a number category, e.g. “Home”. and four data fields for business telephone num- the data fields should be overwritten.
왘 Select a telephone category, e.g. “Land bers.
This function is not possible for phone book en-
Line”.
tries in the mobile phone.
230
Control systems
COMAND address book
왘 Select “Yes” or “No”. 왘 Select “Options” 씮 “Call”. Address data is complete and matches
If you select “Yes”, a selection list will In both cases, the telephone* connects digital map
appear containing the four data fields. the call. The COMAND display is show- If “Navigate” is selected, the navigation
ing the telephone mode screen. system starts the route calculation.
왘 Select field to be overwritten.
COMAND deletes the number of the se- Starting route guidance to an entry Address data is incomplete or does not
lected field. You can now enter a new match digital map
number into the data field. 왘 Search for an address book entry
(컄 page 226). i For the route calculation, the navigation sys-
왘 Proceed as described from the “Enter- tem requires the correct spellings of the state
ing data into a field” operating step in 왘 Display the details of an entry and high- (province), the town/city or zip code, the street
the “Creating a new address book en- light the address data field and under some circumstances, the house num-
try” section (컄 page 225). (컄 page 228). ber. The town/city and street must be spelled in
the same manner as the destination entry.
왘 Select “Options” 씮 “Navigate”. The state (province) can be spelled as an entire
Calling a number saved in an entry
name or as an abbreviation.
or
Examples:
i To do this, COMAND must be equipped with 왘 Press n.
a telephone*. The mobile phone must be insert- 앫 Florida or FL
ed in the cradle*. i Pressing n only functions if one of the ad- 앫 Colorado or CO
dress data fields contains data.
왘 Display the details of an entry and high- 앫 Alberta or AB
light the telephone number data field Further operation depends on whether the 앫 Ontario or ON
(컄 page 228). address data is complete and matches the
digital map data of the navigation system. If “Navigate” is selected, a message ap-
왘 Press n. pears indicating that the address is incom-
It does not match, for example, if it is not
or spelled in the same way as the destination plete.
entry.
231
Control systems
COMAND address book
왘 Closing message: Select “OK”. 왘 Entering a house number: Proceed Voice entries
Depending on which data is missing or as described for destination entry in
cannot be found on the digital map, you the “Entering a house number” section i For voice entries, your vehicle must be
(컄 page 185). equipped with Voice Control*. You can not add
must now either: voice entries for address book entry that come
앫 select a state (province) i If you have added data, COMAND saves your from the phone book in the mobile phone.
additions. This means that you do not need to
앫 select a county re-enter this additional data later on. Adding or changing a voice entry
The COMAND memory saves the additional data
앫 or enter a town/city in a special field, which cannot be displayed. The i You can add one voice entry per address
앫 or enter a street data, which you have entered in the address book entry.
book initially in the display, remains unchanged.
앫 or enter a house number 왘 Search for the address book entry with
If all data is available and matches the dig- or without a voice entry (컄 page 226).
왘 Selecting a state (province): ital map data, the navigation system starts
Select desired state (province) from the route calculation. 왘 Select “Options” 씮 “Voice Name” 씮
the list. “Add” or “Change”.
왘 Selecting a county: Select desired Subsequent operation is controlled by
county from the list. voice. Voice Control* guides you
왘 Entering a town: Proceed as de- through the dialogs.
scribed for destination entry in the “En-
tering a town or city” section
(컄 page 178).
왘 Entering a street: Proceed as de-
scribed for destination entry in the “En-
tering a street” section (컄 page 180).
232
Control systems
COMAND address book
Deleting a voice entry Saving a phone book entry from mobile 왘 Select “Save”.
왘 Search for the address book entry with phone in the COMAND address book The input menu appears with the data
a voice entry (컄 page 226). fields. The name and the telephone
Saving a phone book entry from mobile number are entered automatically.
왘 Select “Options” 씮 “Voice Name” 씮
“Delete”. phone as new address book entry
A deletion prompt appears. i The mobile phone must be inserted in the

cradle* and the COMAND have read out the mo-
왘 Select “Yes” or “No”. bile phone book data. This can take several min-
utes, depending on how many entries each
COMAND deletes the voice entry de-
phone book contains.
pending on your selection.
왘 Search for phone book entry in mobile
Listening to a voice entry phone (컄 page 226).
왘 Search for the address book entry with or
a voice entry (컄 page 226). 왘 Display details of a phone book entry in 1 Data field
왘 Select “Options” 씮 “Voice Name” 씮 the mobile phone (컄 page 228). 2 Input mark (cursor)
“Read Aloud”. 3 Input characters
You will hear the voice entry. try”. 왘 Proceed as described in the “Changing
a data field” paragraph in the “Creating
왘 Select a number category, e.g. “Work”. a new address book entry” section
왘 Select a telephone category, e.g. “Mo- (컄 page 225).
bile”.
233
Control systems
COMAND address book
Saving a phone book entry from the 왘 After selecting an entry, press n. 앫 The external device must be able to
mobile phone in an existing address send vCards by Bluetooth®.
COMAND saves the data if there are
book entry
fewer than four numbers assigned to 앫 The external device is inside the vehi-
i The mobile phone must be inserted in the the selected entry in the selected num- cle, switched on and authorized
cradle*. ber category. Otherwise, you will see a (컄 page 239).
prompt asking whether one of the ex-
왘 Search for a phone book entry in the 왘 Importing: Start data transfer on the
isting numbers should be overwritten.
mobile phone (컄 page 226). external device (see operating instruc-
왘 Select “Yes” or “No”. tions of the device concerned).
or
If you select “Yes”, a selection list will If there is no address book entry with
왘 Display details of a phone book entry in
appear containing the four existing the same first name and last name,
the mobile phone (컄 page 228).
numbers. COMAND imports the data.
왘 Select “Options” 씮 “Save” 씮 “Add”.
왘 Select the number to be overwritten. If there is already an address book en-
왘 Select a number category, e.g. “Home”. try with the same first name and last
COMAND overwrites the selected num-
왘 Select a telephone category, e.g. “Land name, a prompt will appear asking
ber with the new data.
Line”. whether the existing data should be
overwritten.
왘 Select “Save”. Importing data from external
Bluetooth® devices 왘 Select “Yes” or “No”.
The search menu for address book en-
tries appears. The existing address book entry will be
You can import vCards from external
overwritten or not, depending on your
왘 Search for desired entry. Bluetooth® devices into the address book.
selection.
Please keep the following in mind:
i There is a detailed description of how to
search for an address book entry in the “Search- 앫 Bluetooth® is activated in COMAND
ing for an address book entry” section (컄 page 239) and in the device con-
(컄 page 226). cerned.
234
Control systems
왔 COMAND system settings
System settings menu overview

Display Time Voice Control* Language Favorite Services Reset

(컄 page 235) (컄 page 235) (컄 page 237) (컄 page 238) (컄 page 238) (컄 page 239) (컄 page 235)
Display settings Time settings Voice Control* Language Assign favorite Bluetooth® Reset COMAND to
settings settings button settings factory settings
Display settings i In the “Automatic” setting, COMAND ana- 왘 Select “Vehicle” 씮 “System Settings”
lyzes the automatic vehicle light sensor and 씮 “Time” 씮 “Time”.
switches between the display design automati-
Switching the display on or off cally. 왘 Selecting hour or minute(s):
Slide omp.
왘 Switching off: Select “Vehicle” 씮
“Display OFF”. Time settings 왘 Setting value: Rotate ymz or
slide qmr.
왘 Switching back on: Rotate ymz or
slide qmr. Setting the time 왘 Saving setting: Press n.
Setting the display design

i The correct time must be set for the follow- i The increment value for setting the minutes
ing navigation system functions to operate cor- depends on the situation. If GPS reception is
왘 Select “Vehicle” 씮 “System Settings” rectly: available, it is 30 minutes. If GPS reception is not
씮 “Display”. 앫 Route guidance on routes with time-depen- available, it is one minute.
dent traffic guidance
왘 Select “Day Mode”, “Night Mode” or
“Automatic”. 앫 Calculation of estimated arrival time
235
Control systems
Setting the time zone and switching be- Subsequent operation depends on: 왘 Switching automatic changeover on
tween Daylight Saving Time and stan- or off: Select “Automatic Daylight Sav-
앫 whether your navigation system has
dard time ings Time”.
GPS reception
i The correct time zone and Daylight Saving You have switched the function on or
앫 which country you have previously set
Time/standard time must be set for the follow- off. A checkmark appears when the
ing navigation system functions to operate cor- You may either: function is switched on.
rectly:
앫 manually switch between “Daylight 왘 Saving setting and exit the menu:
앫 Route guidance on routes with time-depen- Savings Time (Summer)” and “Standard Slide omp.
dent traffic guidance
time (Winter)” in a list
앫 Calculation of estimated arrival time i If you have switched off the automatic
or changeover function, you must change Daylight
왘 Setting time zone: Select “Vehicle” 씮 Saving Time to standard time and vice versa
“System Settings” 씮 “Time” 씮 “Time 앫 switch automatic Daylight Saving Time
yourself.
Zone”. to standard time changeover (and vice
versa) on or off
The country list appears. The dot R in Setting the date
front of a list entry indicates the cur- 왘 Switching manually: Select “Daylight
왘 Select “Vehicle” 씮 “System Settings”
rent setting. Savings Time (Summer)” or “Standard
씮 “Time” 씮 “Date”.
time (Winter)”.
왘 Select the country in which you are cur- 왘 Selecting month, day or year:
rently driving. The dot R in front of a list entry indi-
Slide omp.
cates the current setting.
A time zone list may also be displayed, 왘 Setting value: Rotate ymz or
depending on the country selected. slide qmr.
왘 Select desired time zone. 왘 Saving setting: Press n.
236
Control systems
Setting the time/date format Individualization 왘 Select “Yes” or “No”.

왘 Select “Vehicle” 씮 “System Settings” Using individualization, you can fine-tune If you select “No”, the first part of indi-
씮 “Time” 씮 “Format”. Voice Control* to your own voice and thus vidualization begins.
improve voice recognition. The ability of
The format list appears. The dots R in If you select “Yes”, an information dis-
the system to recognize the commands of
front of the list entries indicate the cur- play will be shown with audio instruc-
other users does not deteriorate as a re-
rent setting. tion.
sult.
왘 Changing format setting: 왘 Closing display: Select “OK”.
Individualization consists of two parts. You
Select desired format.
train the system to recognize digits in the The first part of individualization be-
왘 Saving setting and exit the menu: first part and specific commands in the gins.
Slide omp. second part. At the end of the first part, you will see
a prompt asking whether you want to
Voice Control* settings Starting new individualization begin the second part.
i It is only possible to start individualization 왘 Select “Yes” or “No”.
Switching help window on or off with the vehicle stationary. After starting the
session, the system will guide you through the in- If you select “No”, individualization will
왘 Select “Vehicle”씮 “System Settings” be canceled. The data from the first
dividualization by means of acoustic instruc-
씮 “Voice Control”. tions. part is saved automatically.
왘 Select “Help Window”. 왘 Select “Vehicle” 씮 “System Settings” If you select “Yes”, the second part be-
You can switch the help window on or 씮 “Voice Control” 씮 “Start new indi- gins.
off. A checkmark appears when the vidualization”.
Individualization is completed at the end of
help window is switched on. A prompt appears asking whether you the second part. You will see a message to
would like further information. this effect. The data from the second part
is saved automatically.
237
Control systems
Canceling during the first or second part Setting the system language You can assign the following predefined
of individualization functions to the favorite button P:
왘 Select “Vehicle” 씮 “System Settings”
왘 Select “Cancel”. 앫 “Rear Window Sunshade” (컄 page 503)
씮 “Language”.
You can use the favorite button to ex-
A prompt appears asking whether you
The language list appears. A dot R intend or retract the rear window sun-
really do want to cancel.
dicates the current setting. shade. This is the default setting.
왘 Changing setting: Select desired lan- 앫 “Display OFF” (컄 page 235)
If you select “Yes”, individualization will guage. You can use the favorite button to
be canceled. The data from the part at switch the COMAND display on or off.
The language is set.
which you exited is not saved.
앫 “Repeat Navigation Command”
If you select “No”, the part at which you Assigning the favorite button (컄 page 213)
stopped begins again. You can use the favorite button to re-
call the last announcement issued by
Deleting existing individualization data the navigation system.
왘 Select “Vehicle” 씮 “System Settings” 왘 Select “Vehicle” 씮 “System Settings”
씮 “Voice Control” 씮 “Delete individu- 씮 “Favorite”.
alization”.
The list of predefined functions appears.
A prompt appears asking whether you The dot R in front of the list entry indi-
really do want to delete. cates the current setting.
왘 Select “Yes” or “No”. 왘 Changing setting: Rotate ymz and
The individualization data will either be 1 Favorite button select desired function.
deleted or not, depending on your se- 왘 Saving setting and exit the menu:
lection. Press n.
238
Control systems
Bluetooth® settings Activate or deactivate Bluetooth® You can connect up to twelve devices to
왘 Select “Vehicle” 씮 “System Settings” COMAND but only one device can be ac-
tive at a time.
General information about Bluetooth® 씮 “Services” 씮 “Deactivate Blue-
tooth”. The connection process includes search-
Bluetooth® technology is the standard for
ing for the device and its subsequent au-
short-range wireless technologies, suitable You have activated or deactivated
thorization.
for transmitting voice and data. It is possi- Bluetooth®. A checkmark appears
ble to connect Bluetooth® devices wire- when Bluetooth® is deactivated.
Calling up the Bluetooth® device list
lessly. Bluetooth® can be used to
and searching for devices
exchange vCards or make calls using a Connecting Bluetooth® devices
headset. 왘 Calling up the list: Select “Vehicle” 씮
i To connect a Bluetooth® device, the “System Settings” 씮 “Services” 씮
®
Bluetooth® technology uses the freely Bluetooth function must be activated in
COMAND and in the device concerned. The “Search for Bluetooth devices”.
available ISM (Industrial Scientific Medi-
cal) wireless network that works at Bluetooth® device must also be set to “visible” When you call up the list for the first
or “findable” in order for COMAND to find and time after switching on COMAND, the
2.45 GHz. Ranges of up to ten meters are
display it. For the setting procedures, please see
possible with Bluetooth®. the operating instructions for the Bluetooth®
search for devices in the reception
device. range starts automatically. You will see
a display to this effect.
It is possible to establish a Bluetooth® con-
nection between COMAND and the follow- The device list appears after a short
ing types of device: while.
앫 Mobile phone (only for transferring 왘 Canceling search:

business cards) Select “Cancel”. 컄컄
앫 Headset
앫 Laptop/PDA
239
Control systems
컄컄 Thesecond time you call up the list, and Displaying details of a Bluetooth® de-
each time thereafter, the device list ap- vice
pears immediately if COMAND has not
왘 Call up Bluetooth® device list
been switched off and on again in the
(컄 page 239).
meantime.
왘 Select desired device.
왘 Starting search manually:
Select “Update”. 1 Authorized and detected device – de- 왘 Select “Details”.
vice and padlock symbol are the same The detailed display for this device ap-
The device list can contain the following
color pears.
devices:
2 Device which was not detected, but
앫 All detected devices, whether autho- which has been authorized in the past 왘 Closing detailed display: Slide qmr
rized or not. – device and padlock symbol are differ- or press n.
앫 All authorized devices, whether detect- ent colors (the device may be switched
off or not in the vehicle, for example) Authorizing a Bluetooth® device
ed or not.
3 Newly detected device - not yet autho- 왘 Call up Bluetooth® device list
rized (no symbol) (컄 page 239).
i If the device list already contains twelve au- 왘 Select unauthorized device.
thorized devices, you must revoke authorization
for one of the authorized devices. Then you must
왘 Select “Authorize”.
switch this device off and then restart the The input menu for the passkey ap-
search. Any new devices for which you would like pears.
to search will otherwise not appear in the list.
i The passkey is any one to sixteen-digit num-
ber which you can set yourself. You must enter
the same number in COMAND and also in the de-
vice to be authorized.
240
Control systems
i On devices which do not have an input key- De-authorizing a Bluetooth® device Reset
pad (e.g. headsets), the passkey is predeter-
왘 Call up Bluetooth® device list
mined. In this case, it is not necessary to enter
(컄 page 239). i You can reset COMAND back to its factory
the number on the device itself. You will usually settings.
find the passkey in the operating instructions for 왘 Select authorized device. In this case, all personal data (e.g. address book
the device. entries, entries in the destination memory and
왘 Select “De-authorize”. the list of last destinations of the navigation sys-
왘 Entering passkey into COMAND:
A prompt appears asking whether you tem), among other things, is deleted.
Select the digits one by one.
really want to de-authorize this device. 왘 Select “Vehicle” 씮 “System Settings”
왘 Deleting digits: Select ) and briefly
왘 Select “Yes” or “No”. 씮 “Reset”.
press n.
If you select “Yes”, the device will be A prompt appears asking whether you
왘 Canceling entry into COMAND:
de-authorized. really want to reset.
Select “Back”.
왘 Confirming entry into COMAND: i If you de-authorize a device which has been
Select ?. authorized in the past and which is not detected If you select “Yes” another prompt will
in the search, this device will no longer be disappear asking whether you really want
왘 If necessary, enter the same passkey played in the device list.
to reset.
into the Bluetooth® device (see the op- Devices which have been authorized in the past
erating instructions for the device). but which are not detected in the search are ei- 왘 Select “Yes” or “No”.
ther not switched on or not in the vehicle.
The device is authorized. If you select “Yes”, COMAND will be re-
set and restarted.
241
Control systems
COMAND vehicle menu
In this menu, you can program the follow- Setting night security illumination 왘 Selecting “Exterior Lighting Delayed
ing vehicle functions: Switch-off” menu: Slide omp or
(Exterior Lighting Delayed Switch-off) rotate ymz.
Function Page
Exterior Lighting Delayed 242 i The components and operating principles of 왘 Confirming selection: Press n.
Switch-off
Use this function to set whether and how
Locator Lighting 243
long you would like the exterior lighting to
Exterior Mirror Convenience Set- 244 illuminate during darkness after exiting the
tings vehicle and all doors closed.
Automatic Locking 245 The exterior lighting automatically goes
Easy Entry/Exit Feature 246 out after the delayed switch-off time has
Interior Ambient Light 247 expired.
Interior Lighting Delayed 248 You can select:

왘 Selecting length of time: Slide qmr
Switch-off 앫 “0 sec.”, the delayed switch-off feature
or rotate ymz.
Rear-window Sunshade 249 is deactivated
Trunk Opening-height Restriction* 249 앫 “15 sec.”, “30 sec.”, “45 sec.”, or
“60 sec.”, the delayed switch-off fea- or
ture is activated 왘 Select “Vehicle” 씮 “Vehicle” 씮 “Exte-
i You can reactivate this function within rior Lighting Delayed Switch-off”.
10 minutes by opening a door. A selection list appears.
왘 Select “Vehicle”. The current setting is indicated by a
The main area is active. dot R.
242
Control systems
COMAND vehicle menu
Locator lighting on/off If you do not open a door after unlocking

the vehicle with the SmartKey, the lamps
i The components and operating principles of will switch off automatically after approxi-
COMAND can be found on (컄 page 85). mately 40 seconds.
With the locator lighting feature activated 왘 Select “Vehicle”.
and the exterior lamp switch in position
The main area is active.
*(컄 page 371), the following lamps will
switch on during darkness when the vehi- 왘 Selecting “Locator Lighting” func-
cle is unlocked from the outside: tion: Slide omp or rotate ymz.
왘 Selecting length of time: Slide qmr 앫 Parking lamps 왘 Confirming selection: Press n.
or rotate ymz. 앫 Tail lamps
왘 Confirming selection: Press n. 앫 License plate lamps
To activate night security illumination: 앫 Front fog lamps
왘 Select delayed switch-off period (see 앫 Door entry lamps in the mirror
above).
앫 Side marker lamps
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to
The locator lighting switches off when the
position * before turning off the en-
driver’s door is opened.
gine.
왘 Switching locator lighting on or off:
Press n.
or 컄컄
243
Control systems
COMAND vehicle menu
컄컄 왘 Select “Vehicle” 씮 “Vehicle” 씮 “Loca- Exterior mirror convenience settings 왘 Confirming selection: Press n.
tor Lighting”.
A checkmark appears when the locator i The components and operating principles of
lighting is switched on.
In the “Exterior Mirror Convenience Set-
tings” menu, you can switch the following
exterior mirror functions on or off:
앫 Exterior mirrors automatically fold in
when the vehicle is locked
앫 Exterior mirror on front passenger’s
왘 Confirming selection: Press n. side automatically tilts downward 왘 Selecting “Fold in automatically
To activate locator lighting: when the vehicle is reversing when locking” or “Lower mirror
when reversing”: Rotate ymz.
왘 Make sure the function “Locator Light- 왘 Select “Vehicle”.
ing” is set. 왘 Confirming selection: Press n.
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to 왘 Slide omp to exit.
왘 Selecting “Exterior Mirror Conve-
position * when exiting the vehicle. nience Settings” menu: Slide omp or or
rotate ymz.
244
Control systems
COMAND vehicle menu
왘 Select “Vehicle” 씮 “Vehicle” 씮 “Exte- Automatic locking on/off 왘 Switching automatic locking on or
rior mirror Convenience Settings”. off: Press n.
A selection list appears. i The components and operating principles of or
왘 Select “Vehicle” 씮 “Vehicle” 씮 “Auto-
Use this function to activate or deactivate
matic Locking”.
the automatic central locking
(컄 page 342). With the automatic central A checkmark appears when automatic
locking system activated, the vehicle is locking is switched on.
centrally locked at vehicle speeds of ap-
proximately 9 mph (15 km/h).
왘 Selecting a function: Slide qmr or
rotate ymz. 왘 Select “Vehicle”.
A checkmark appears in the corre- The main area is active.
sponding box when the option has 왘 Selecting “Automatic Locking” func-
been selected. tion: Slide omp or rotate ymz. 왘 Confirming selection: Press n.
왘 Slide omp to exit.
왘 Slide omp to exit.
245
Control systems
COMAND vehicle menu
Activating easy-entry/exit feature

To stop seat/steering wheel movement, do
one of the following:
COMAND can be found on (컄 page 85). 앫 Press seat adjustment switch
(컄 page 348).
Use this function to activate and deacti-
앫 Move steering wheel adjustment stalk
vate the easy-entry/exit feature
(컄 page 359).
(컄 page 357).
앫 Press one of the memory position but-
The following settings are available for the tons or the memory button M
easy-entry/exit feature: (컄 page 366).
OFF The easy-entry/exit Do not leave children unattended in the ve- 왘 Confirming selection: Press n.
feature is deactivated. hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. or
Children could open the driver’s door and
Steering Column Both the steering col- 왘 Select “Vehicle” 씮 “Vehicle” 씮 “Easy
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
& Seat umn and the driver’s Entry/Exit Feature”.
feature, which could result in an accident
seat are moved.
and/or serious personal injury. 왘 Confirming selection: Press n.
A selection list appears.
Warning! G 왘 Select “Vehicle”.
The current setting is indicated by a
The main area is active. dot R.
You must make sure no one can become
왘 Selecting “Easy Entry/Exit Feature”
trapped or injured by the moving steering
menu: Slide omp or rotate ymz.
wheel and driver’s seat when the easy-en-
try/exit feature is activated.
246
Control systems
COMAND vehicle menu
왘 Selecting a setting: Slide qmr or

rotate ymz.
왘 Adjusting brightness: Slide omp or 왘 Adjusting brightness: Slide qmr or
Setting interior ambient lighting rotate ymz. rotate ymz.
왘 Confirming selection: Press n. 왘 Confirming selection: Press n.
COMAND can be found on (컄 page 85). or
You can adjust the brightness of the interi- 왘 Select “Vehicle” 씮 “Vehicle” 씮 “Interi-
or lighting on a scale of “0” (off) to “5” or Ambient Light”.
(bright).
왘 Select “Vehicle”.
왘 Selecting “Interior Ambient Light”
menu: Slide omp or rotate ymz.
247
Control systems
COMAND vehicle menu
Setting interior lighting delayed 왘 Confirming selection: Press n. 왘 Select “Vehicle” 씮 “Vehicle” 씮 “Interi-
switch-off A selection list appears. or Lighting Delayed Switch-off”.
i The components and operating principles of The current setting is indicated by a
COMAND can be found on (컄 page 85). dot R. The current setting is indicated by a
dot R.
Use this function to set whether and how
long you would like the interior lighting to
remain lit during darkness after you have
removed the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
You can select:
앫 “0 sec.”, the delayed switch-off feature
is deactivated
앫 “15 sec.”, “30 sec.”, “45 sec.”, or 왘 Selecting length of time: Slide qmr
“60 sec.”, the delayed switch-off fea- or rotate ymz. 왘 Selecting length of time: Slide qmr
ture is activated or rotate ymz.
왘 Select “Vehicle”. 왘 Confirming selection: Press n.
or
왘 Selecting “Interior Lighting Delayed
Switch-off” menu: Slide omp or
rotate ymz.
248
Control systems
COMAND vehicle menu
Extending or retracting rear window Trunk opening-height restriction*

sunshade on/off
i The components and operating principles of i The components and operating principles of
COMAND can be found on (컄 page 85). COMAND can be found on (컄 page 85).
This function is used to extend or retract Vehicles with trunk opening/closing sys-
the rear sunshade. tem*:
i If you operate the rear-window sunshade via You can select whether the trunk lid should
COMAND or by using the favorite button open fully or only to the height of the roof.
(컄 page 238), this takes precedence over the 왘 Extending or retracting rear window
buttons for the rear window sunshade in the rear 왘 Select “Vehicle”.
doors (컄 page 503).
sunshade: Press n.
or
i You can program this function using the fa- 왘 Selecting “Trunk Opening-height Re-
vorite button (컄 page 238). 왘 Select “Vehicle” 씮 “Vehicle” 씮 striction” function: Slide omp or
“Rear-window Sunshade”. rotate ymz.
i At temperatures below -4°F (-20°C), the
rear window sunshade is switched off. 왘 Confirming selection: Press n. 컄컄
왘 Select “Vehicle”.
왘 Selecting “Rear-window Sunshade”
function: Slide omp or rotate ymz.
249
Control systems
COMAND vehicle menu
컄컄
or
왘 Select “Vehicle” 씮 “Vehicle” 씮 “Trunk
Opening-height Restriction”.
A checkmark appears when the trunk
opening-height restriction is switched
on.
250
Control systems
왔 COMAND automatic climate control
i The components and operating principles of The following automatic climate control
COMAND can be found on (컄 page 85). Warning! G functions can be operated via COMAND:
Follow the recommended settings for heat- Function Page

Warning! G ing and cooling given on the following pages Temperature 252
and pages in the “Controls in detail” part
When operating the automatic climate con- Air distribution 253
(컄 page 469) Otherwise the windows could
trol, the air that enters the passenger com- Air volume 253
fog up, impairing visibility and endangering
partment through the air vents can be very
you and others. Switching off cooling (“AC OFF”) 254
hot or very cold (depending on the set tem-
perature). This may cause burns or frostbite Central climate control (“Mono”) 255
to unprotected skin in the immediate area of You can operate the automatic climate
Footwell temperature 255
the air vents. control via COMAND or via the buttons on
the front and rear* automatic climate con- Air flow from air vents 256
Always keep sufficient distance between un- trol panel (컄 page 469). Rear climate control* 257
protected parts of the body and the air
vents. If necessary, use the air distribution Some of the special climate control func-
adjustment (컄 page 253) to direct the air to tions can only be set via COMAND.
air vents in the vehicle interior that are not
in the immediate area of unprotected skin.
251
Control systems
The automatic climate control menu is Setting temperature 왘 Changing temperature: Slide qmr or
called up via the climate control settings. rotate ymz.
Use the temperature controls %$
왘 Exiting menu: Press n, back
(컄 page 469) in the center console or
button L in the center console
COMAND climate control settings to sepa-
(컄 page 86) or slide omp.
rately adjust the air temperature on each
side of the passenger compartment. The setting is saved.
왘 Select climate control settings 씮 Tem-
perature, left or right and then
press n.
Climate control settings with functions

(submenus)
1 Temperature, left
2 Air distribution, left
3 Air volume, left
4 Central menu, climate control
5 Air volume, right
6 Air distribution, right
7 Temperature, right
252
Control systems
Adjusting air distribution 왘 Changing air distribution:

Rotate ymz.
You can adjust the air distribution sepa-
The symbol for air distribution changes.
rately for the driver’s and front passenger’s
The direction and size of the arrows
side.
represent the air distribution.
i When you change the air distribution, the au- 왘 Exiting menu: Press n, back
tomatic function of the climate control system is
switched off. button L in the center console
왘 Select climate control settings 씮 Air
distribution, left or right. The setting is saved.
왘 Changing air volume: Slide qmr or
Adjusting air volume rotate ymz.
왘 Exiting menu: Press n, back
Use buttons Q (컄 page 469) in the cen- button L in the center console
ter console or COMAND climate control (컄 page 86) or slide omp.
settings to separately adjust the air vol-
ume on each side of the passenger com- The setting is saved.
partment.
i When you change the air volume, the auto-
matic function of the climate control system is
switched off.
왘 Select climate control settings 씮 Air
volume, left or right.
253
Control systems
Central climate control menu via i Condensation may drip out from underneath
COMAND the vehicle. This is normal and not an indication
of a malfunction.
The central climate control menu is in the
The “AC OFF” function is used to permanent-
center of the climate control settings.
ly switch off the cooling function of the au-
When the automatic climate control is
tomatic climate control system.
switched on, you will see “on” in the cen-
tral menu. The following functions can only
be operated in the central climate control Warning! G
menu via COMAND:
If you turn off the cooling function, the
Function Page Switching cooling on or off vehicle will not be cooled when weather
Switching off cooling (“AC OFF”) 254 The cooling function, only operational conditions are warm. The windows can fog
when the engine is running, cools the vehi- up more quickly. Window fogging may
Central climate control (“Mono”) 255
cle interior down to the selected tempera- impair visibility and endanger you and
Footwell temperature 255 others.
ture. The cooling function also
Air flow from air vents 256 dehumidifies the air in the vehicle interior,
Rear climate control* 257 thus preventing the windows from fogging 왘 Select climate control settings 씮 Cen-
up. tral climate control menu.
왘 Select climate control settings 씮 Cen-
tral menu.
254
Control systems
왘 Selecting “AC OFF”: Slide qmr or Selecting “Mono” mode The “Mono” function is automatically
rotate ymz. “Mono” is used to adjust the climate zones switched off when you:
왘 Confirming selection: Press n. for the entire vehicle at the same time. 앫 change an automatic climate control
When the “Mono” function is switched on setting for the front passenger’s side
A checkmark appears when the cooling
and you change the climate on the driver’s using COMAND
is switched off.
side, these changes will be carried out in
앫 operate a button from the automatic
the same manner for all climate zones.
climate control for the front passen-
왘 Select climate control settings 씮 Cen- ger’s side
tral climate control menu. 앫 operate one of the buttons for the rear
왘 Selecting “Mono”: Slide qmr or climate control system
rotate ymz.
“AC OFF” appears in the central menu of 왘 Confirming selection: Press n. Adjusting footwell temperature
the climate control settings.
A checkmark appears when the func- i In automatic mode, this setting optimizes
! If the air conditioning cannot be turned on tion has been selected. the footwell temperature when outside tempera-
again, this indicates that the air conditioning is tures are low.
losing refrigerant. The compressor has turned it- The “Footwell Temperature” function is
self off.
used to adjust the temperature difference
Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest between the footwell and the rest of the
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
passenger compartment.
The higher the selected value, the higher
왘 Exiting menu: Press back button L the temperature in the footwell will be.
in the center console (컄 page 86) or 왘 Select climate control settings 씮 Cen-
slide omp. tral climate control menu. 컄컄
255
Control systems
컄컄 왘 Selecting “Footwell Temperature”: Adjusting air flow from air vents

Slide qmr or rotate ymz and then
press n. i In automatic mode, this setting optimizes
the air flow when outside temperatures are high.
The “Airflow” setting defines air distribu-
tion and air volume in automatic mode:
앫 “Focused” (default setting, increased
air flow)
앫 “Medium” (reduced air flow)
앫 “Diffuse” (minimal air flow) 왘 Changing air flow: Slide qmr or
rotate ymz.
i When the interior ambient temperature of
the vehicle is very hot and the automatic climate 왘 Confirming selection: Press n.
왘 Changing temperature difference: control is cooling the interior, the setting for air
Slide qmr or rotate ymz. flow is temporarily overridden.
왘 Exiting menu: Press n, back 왘 Select climate control settings 씮 Cen-
button L in the center console tral climate control menu 씮 “Airflow”.
The setting is saved.
dot R.
256
Control systems
Operating rear climate control* from In the climate control settings, “)” Central menu for rear climate control
the front appears in the central menu. The rear
In the central menu for the rear climate
climate control can be operated from
control, you can:
The “Rear)” function is used to oper- the front.
ate the rear climate control via COMAND 앫 switch back to operating the front cli-
and the buttons on the center console con- mate control system
trol unit (컄 page 477). 앫 switch off the rear climate control
Switching on rear climate control oper- 앫 switch the automatic function of the
ation from the front rear climate control from automatic to
manual
왘 Select climate control settings 씮 Cen-
tral climate control menu. 왘 Select climate control settings 씮 Cen-
tral climate control menu.
왘 Selecting “Rear)”: Slide qmr or
rotate ymz. Climate control settings, rear climate
control
1 Rear temperature, left
2 Rear air distribution, left
3 Rear air volume
4 Central menu for rear climate control
5 Rear air distribution, right
왘 Confirming selection: Press n. 6 Rear temperature, right
The rear climate control is operated in the
same manner as the climate control sys-
tem for the driver’s and front passenger’s
side (컄 page 251).
257
Control systems
Switching off rear climate control oper- Switching off rear climate control Switching on the automatic function of
ation from the front 왘 Select climate control settings 씮 Cen-
the rear climate control
왘 Select climate control settings 씮 Cen- tral climate control menu. 왘 Select climate control settings 씮 Cen-
tral climate control menu. tral climate control menu.
The current setting is indicated by a dot R. The current setting is indicated by a
dot R. dot R.
왘 Selecting “Rear Climate Control
왘 Selecting “Front Climate Control”: OFF”: Slide qmr or rotate ymz. 왘 Selecting “Rear Automatic”:
Slide qmr or rotate ymz. Slide qmr or rotate ymz.

The rear climate control is switched off.
The climate control settings shows the The automatic function of the rear cli-
climate control settings for the driver mate control is switched on.
and front passenger.
258
Control systems
COMAND seats
왔 COMAND seats
When adjusting the seats, observe the Selecting a seat
safety notes in the section “Seats” You must first select the seat for which you
(컄 page 347). would like to make adjustments.
Operating seats via COMAND

The following seat adjustments can be
made via COMAND:
Example illustration (vehicles with Drive-dy-
Settings Page namic multicontour seat*)
Lumbar support 260 왘 Selecting seat: Slide omp or

rotate ymz.
Multicontour seats*, front 260 1 Seat menu button
Drive-dynamic multicontour 262 왘 Press O.
seats*, front Exiting menu
왘 Switching to the bottom menu line: There are several ways to exit the multi-
Slide qmr. contour seat menu.
왘 Press O again.
or
왘 Press any shortcut button.
or 컄컄
259
Control systems
COMAND seats
컄컄 왘 Select another main function from the 왘 Adjusting lumbar support: i When you adjust the multicontour seat,
main menu line. Slide omp or rotate ymz until desired noises may result from pumping air into or re-
setting is reached. leasing air out of the air chambers.
Lumbar support 왘 Confirming selection: Press n. You can adjust the following air chambers:
To support the spine, you can adjust the 왘 Switching to the bottom menu line: 앫 sides of seat cushion
curvature of the front seat backrests. Slide omp. 앫 sides of backrest
왘 Press O. 왘 Confirming selection: Press n. 앫 backrest curvature in lumbar area
The main area of the COMAND display i After you have pressed O, the seat last 앫 backrest curvature in shoulder area
is active. A scale appears. adjusted is active.
Multicontour seats*, front
i If PRE-SAFE® has been activated, the air

pressure in the air chambers (on the sides of the
seat cushion and backrest) of the front multicon-
tour seats is increased.
To support the spine, you can individually
adjust the backrest contour of the front
seats by regulating the air pressure in the
1 Scale air chambers of the multicontour seat.
2 Cursor The settings are made on the COMAND
3 Current seat display.
4 Current setting
왘 Select seat (컄 page 259).
260
Control systems
COMAND seats
Adjusting sides of seat cushion 왘 Saving setting: Press n. Adjusting backrest curvature in lumbar
This function is used to adjust the air area
chambers in the sides of the seat cushion. Adjusting backrest sides This function is used to adjust the air
This function is used to adjust the air chambers in the lumbar area of the back-
chambers in the backrest sides. rest.
왘 Selecting “Seat sides”: Slide omp or
rotate ymz. 왘 Select seat (컄 page 259). 왘 Select seat (컄 page 259).
왘 Confirming selection: Press n. 왘 Selecting “Seatback Sides”: 왘 Selecting “Lumbar”: Slide omp or
Slide qmr or rotate ymz. rotate ymz.
A scale appears.
A scale appears. Cross-hairs appear. You can use them
to make two settings:
앫 vertical: shift the point of greatest
curvature upward or downward
앫 horizontal: adjust the degree of
curvature 컄컄
1 Scale
2 Cursor
3 Current setting 왘 Slide qmr or rotate ymz until desired
setting is reached.
왘 Slide qmr or rotate ymz until desired
setting is reached. 왘 Saving setting: Press n.
261
Control systems
COMAND seats
컄컄 Drive-dynamic multicontour seats*,

front
For information on manual multicontour

seat settings, see “Multicontour seats*,
front” (컄 page 260).
i If PRE-SAFE® has been activated, the air
pressure in the air chambers (sides of seat cush-
ion and backrest) of the drive-dynamic multicon-
tour seats is increased.
왘 Slide qmr or omp until desired setting 왘 Slide qmr or rotate ymz until desired
The Drive-dynamic multicontour seat auto-
is reached. setting is reached.
matically adjusts the lateral support pro-
왘 Saving setting: Press n. 왘 Saving setting: Press n. vided by the backrest to your driving style.
The Drive-dynamic multicontour seat elec-
Adjusting backrest curvature in
tronically controls the air pressure in the
shoulder area
air chambers of the backrest side bolsters.
This function is used to adjust the air This function improves driving comfort and
chambers in the shoulder area of the back- pleasure.
rest.
왘 Selecting “Driv. dyn. seat”:
왘 Selecting “Shoulders”: Slide omp or Slide omp or rotate ymz.
rotate ymz.
A scale appears.
262
Control systems
COMAND seats
A scale appears. You can choose be- Pulse mode i Depending on the setting, the massage
tween: 왘 Select seat (컄 page 259). function runs for about 7 to 10 minutes.
앫 “0”: off
왘 Selecting “Pulse Mode”: Slide omp
앫 “1”: level 1 or rotate ymz.
앫 “2”: level 2 왘 Confirming selection: Press n.
A list appears. You can choose be-
tween different types of massage:

setting is reached.
왘 Saving setting: Press n. The current setting is indicated by a
solid circle.
setting is reached.
왘 Saving setting: Press n.
263
Control systems
The control system is activated as soon as Multifunction display

the SmartKey in the starter switch is Warning! G
turned to position 2 or as soon as the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
(컄 page 346) is in position 2. The control conditions must always be his/her primary
system enables you to: focus when driving.
앫 call up information about your vehicle For your safety and the safety of others, se-
lecting features through the multifunction
앫 change vehicle settings steering wheel should only be done by the
For example, you can use the control sys- driver when traffic and road conditions per-
tem to find out when your vehicle is next mit it to be done safely.
due for service, to call up statistical data Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph 1 Line for main menus
on your vehicle, and much more. (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is 2 Text field in multifunction display
Settings, functions, submenus as well as
any malfunctions are shown to you in the
text field.
The control system relays information to
the multifunction display.
264
Control systems
Multifunction steering wheel 1 Multifunction display menus. For example, in the “Settings”
menu, you will find functions for making
The displays in the multifunction display 2 s to take a call settings to your vehicle. There are func-
and the settings in the control system are to dial tions for calling up information and for
controlled using the buttons on the multi- to redial making settings to your vehicle.
function steering wheel. t to end a call It is helpful to think of the menus as being
to reject an incoming call arranged in a circular pattern:
æ to increase volume
왘 Press & or ( repeatedly to
ç to decrease volume switch menus.
F to mute The number of menus available in the sys-
3 ! to accept a call tem depends on which optional equipment
to activate Voice Control* is installed in your vehicle.
4 L back/to cancel Voice 왘 Press button L to return to the next
Control* highest menu level.
5 $ to scroll up From a menu’s highest level, you will al-
% to scroll down ways see the screen from the “Trip” menu
that was last active. When you press L
& to scroll to the right
again, you switch to the standard display
( to scroll to the left (컄 page 268).
# to confirm selection For information about warning and mal-
function messages appearing in the multi-
The information available in the multifunc- function display (컄 page 612).
tion display is arranged in menus, each
containing a number of functions or sub-
265
Control systems
Menus
Trip (컄 page 268) Navi (컄 page 269) Audio (컄 page 271) AMG1 (컄 page 273)
Standard display Showing route guidance in- Selecting radio station Gear currently engaged
structions, current direction Engine oil temperature
Commands/submenus
traveled Vehicle supply voltage

Fuel consumption statistics since start Selecting satellite radio RACETIMER
channel* (USA only)
Fuel consumption statistics since last Operating DVD changer/ Overall analysis
reset audio CD/ audio DVD/MP3
Resetting fuel consumption statistics Operating Video DVD Lap analysis
Distance to empty
Digital speedometer
1 S 63 AMG and S 65 AMG only.
266
Control systems
Telephone* (컄 page 276) Assistance* (컄 page 279) Service (컄 page 280) Settings (컄 page 281)
Dialing a number from the Displaying the distance graph- Calling up vehicle malfunction, Setting daytime running lamp
phone book ic*, DISTRONIC Plus* warning and system status mode (USA only)
Commands/submenus
(USA only) messages stored in memory

Redialing Activating/deactivating Checking tire inflation pres- Switching additional speedome-
PRE-SAFE® Brake* (USA only) sure ter on or off
Answering a call Switching on the Dynamic Calling up maintenance ser- Switching radar sensors* on or
Rear View Monitor* vice display off (USA only)
automatically
Ending a call or rejecting an in- Checking engine oil level*
coming call
267
Control systems
Trip menu Fuel consumption statistics since start Fuel consumption statistics since last
왘 Press ( or & to select the “Trip” reset
i The menu overview can be found on menu. 왘 Press ( or & to select the “Trip”
(컄 page 266).
menu.
왘 Press % to select “After start”.
In the “Trip” menu, you can show an addi-
왘 Press % or $ to select “After re-
tional display for the speedometer and call
set”.
up or reset your vehicle’s statistical data.
Standard display
In the standard display, the trip odometer
and main odometer are shown in the mul-
tifunction display.
1 Distance driven since start
왘 Press ( or & to select the “Trip” 2 Time elapsed since start
menu. 3 Average speed since start 1 Distance driven since last reset
4 Average fuel consumption since start 2 Time elapsed since last reset
3 Average fuel consumption since last re-
i All values that are based on the last start are set
reset when you turn off the vehicle’s engine for
more than four hours (컄 page 397). 4 Average speed since last reset
i If you turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 i After 9999 hours or 99999 miles (kilome-
again during this time, the values will not be re- ters), the fuel consumption statistics since last
set. After 999 hours or 9999 miles (kilometers), reset are automatically reset.
1 Main odometer the fuel consumption statistics since start are
2 Trip odometer automatically reset.
268
Control systems
Resetting fuel consumption statistics Distance to empty Navi menu

왘 Press ( or & to select the “Trip” 왘 Press ( or & to select the “Trip”
menu. menu. i The menu overview can be found on
(컄 page 266).
왘 Press % or $ to select the func- 왘 Press % or $ to select “Range”.
The display in the “Navi” menu depends on
tion you wish to reset.
The calculated remaining driving range whether route guidance is active or not.
왘 Press #. based on the current fuel tank level ap-
왘 Press ( or & to select the “Navi”
pears in the multifunction display.
menu.
i If only very little fuel is left in the tank, a fuel
pump is shown instead of the range. Route guidance not active
The multifunction display shows the direc-
Digital speedometer
tion of travel and the name of the street
왘 Press ( or & to select the “Trip” you are currently driving on, if known by
menu. the navigation system.
Illustration: Reset trip odometer
왘 Press % or $ to select the digital
왘 Press % to select “Yes” and confirm speedometer.
with #.
i You can reset the trip odometer by pressing
and holding the L button. The trip odometer
is then reset without confirmation.
1 Direction of travel
2 Street you are currently driving on
1 Digital speedometer
269
Control systems
Route guidance active Notification of driving maneuver with- Navigation status displays in the instru-
The image on the multifunction display de- out lane recommendation ment cluster
pends on whether you are being notified of While route guidance is active, the follow-
a driving maneuver. ing messages may be shown on the multi-
function display:
No notification of driving maneuver
앫 <
You have reached your destination.
앫 “Area of dest. reached”
Example illustration
You have arrived in the area of your
1 Street into which the driving maneuver destination. The message appears, for
leads example, for relatively large POIs.
2 Symbol for “driving maneuver”
앫 “New Route…”
Example illustration 3 Distance to driving maneuver and visu-
al distance display COMAND calculates a new route, e.g.
1 Distance to destination
because you have deviated from the
2 Symbol for “follow the course of the When you are being notified of a driving
calculated route or due to a detour re-
road” maneuver, you will see a visual distance
port. Afterward, COMAND continues
3 Distance to next driving maneuver display 3 next to the driving maneuver
route guidance.
4 Street you are currently driving on symbol. The visual distance display is re-
duced from bottom to top the closer you
come to the announced driving maneuver.
270
Control systems
앫 “Calculating Route” Audio menu

COMAND is calculating a route. After-
ward, COMAND starts route guidance. i The menu overview can be found on
(컄 page 266).
앫 “Off Map”
The functions in the “Audio” menu operate
The vehicle’s location is outside of the the audio equipment which you currently
digital map’s range. The vehicle is in an have turned on.
off-map position (컄 page 212). 1 Station frequency
If no audio equipment is currently turned
앫 “Off Road” on, the message: “Audio off” is shown in 2 Waveband
The vehicle is either on a road that has the multifunction display. 왘 Press æ or ç to adjust the vol-
not been digitized (컄 page 212) or on ume.
the side of a road, e.g. in a parking Selecting radio station
space.
i You can only change the frequency band
왘 Turn on COMAND and select “Radio” and save new stations using COMAND
앫 “No Route” (컄 page 100). (컄 page 100).
COMAND cannot calculate a route to 왘 Press ( or & to select the “Au-

dio” menu. Selecting satellite radio* channel
the selected destination.
(USA only)
앫 “Direction of Dest.” 왘 Press % or $ to select a station.
The satellite radio is treated as a radio ap-
The vehicle has gone off the map dur- plication.
ing route guidance (컄 page 212).
왘 Turn on COMAND and select “Sat Ra-
dio” (컄 page 105). 컄컄
271
Control systems
컄컄 왘 Press ( or & to select the “Au- Operating DVD changer/audio CD/ Operating video DVD (USA only)
dio” menu. audio DVD/MP3
왘 Turn on COMAND and select “Video”
왘 Press % or $ to select a station. 왘 Turn on COMAND and select “CD”, 씮 “Video” 씮 “Video DVD”
“DVD-Audio” or “MP3” (컄 page 112). (컄 page 126).
왘 Press ( or & to select the “Au- 왘 Press ( or & to select the “Au-
dio” menu. dio” menu.
왘 Press % or $ to select a track.
1 Channel number and/or name

2 SAT mode
왘 Press æ or ç to adjust the vol-
ume. 1 Current scene
Example: audio CD 2 Disc number
i A subscription to SIRIUS satellite radio ser-
vice provider is required for the satellite radio op- 1 Current track 왘 Press % or $ to select a scene.
eration. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for details and availability for your 왘 Press æ or ç to adjust the vol-
vehicle. ume.
For more information on satellite radio
(컄 page 105).
i When you play a CD or DVD with text, the
multifunction display shows the name and num-
ber of the track. For MP3s, only the track is
shown.
272
Control systems
AMG menu If the engine reaches the overspeed range RACETIMER

in the manual shift program, you will see
i This function is only available in S 63 AMG “up” 2 next to gear indicator 1 as a re-
Warning! G
and S 65 AMG. minder to upshift.
The main screen of the AMG menu shows i The engine oil temperature symbol will be The RACETIMER feature is for use only on
you shown in blue if the engine oil temperature has roads and in conditions where high speed
not yet reached 176°F (80°C). During this time, driving is permitted. Racing on public roads
앫 the gear currently engaged
avoid driving at full engine speed. is prohibited under all circumstances and
앫 the engine oil temperature the driver is and must always remain re-
Use buttons % or $ to select the fol-
앫 the vehicle supply voltage lowing functions in the AMG menu: sponsible for following posted speed limits.
왘 Press ( or & to select the

Function Page The RACETIMER allows you to time and
“AMG” menu.
RACETIMER 273 save driving stretches in hours, minutes
and seconds.
Overall analysis 275
Lap analysis 275
“AMG” menu.
왘 Press % to select the RACETIMER. 컄컄
1 Gear indicator
2 Upshift indicator
3 Engine oil temperature
4 Vehicle supply voltage
273
Control systems
컄컄 왘 To select a different display, press Saving lap time and starting a new lap
$, ( or &.
i You can save up to 16 laps.
i When you stop the vehicle and turn the 왘 Press button ç while the timer is
Smartkey to position 1 (컄 page 344) or, in vehi-
cles with KEYLESS-GO*, turn off the engine and running.
do not open the driver’s door, the RACETIMER The intermediate time will be shown for
stops timing. Timing is resumed when you switch 5 seconds.
the ignition back on or restart the engine and
1 Gear indicator then press æ button. 왘 Press button ç within 5 seconds.
2 RACETIMER
3 Seconds display i When you switch on the Night View Assist* The intermediate time shown will be
4 Lap (컄 page 461) while the RACETIMER is operating, saved as a lap time.
the RACETIMER will continue to run in the back-
The RACETIMER begins timing the new
i You can start the RACETIMER when the en- ground but cannot be operated with the multi-
lap. The new lap begins to be timed as
gine is running or the starter switch is in function steering wheel buttons.
position 2 (컄 page 344). soon as the intermediate time is called
To stop the RACETIMER, switch off the Night
View Assist* first. up.
i While the RACETIMER is being displayed,
you cannot adjust the audio volume using but-
tons æ or ç.
왘 Starting RACETIMER: Press æ.
왘 Displaying intermediate time:
Press ç.
The intermediate time is shown for
5 seconds. 1 Gear indicator
2 RACETIMER
왘 Stopping RACETIMER: Press æ.
3 Best lap time
274
Control systems
Resetting current lap Overall analysis Lap analysis

왘 Press button æ while the timer is i These functions are only available if you i These functions are only available if you
running. have saved at least one lap and have stopped the have saved at least two laps and have stopped
RACETIMER. RACETIMER.
The timer stops.
왘 Press ( or & to select the 왘 Press ( or & to select the
왘 Press button ç.
“AMG” menu. “AMG” menu.
The lap time is reset to “0”.
왘 Press $ repeatedly until the overall 왘 Press $ repeatedly until the lap
analysis appears in the multifunction analysis appears in the multifunction
Deleting all laps
display. display.
i It is not possible to delete a single saved lap.
왘 Press button æ while the timer is
running.
The timer stops.
왘 Press ç for at least 3 seconds.
왘 Press button æ.
The timer starts. The saved laps are de- 1 Overall analysis of RACETIMER 1 Lap number
leted. 2 Overall driving time 2 Lap time
3 Maximum speed 3 Maximum speed
4 Overall distance driven 4 Lap length
5 Average speed 5 Average speed during lap
왘 To select a different display, press 왘 Press $ or % to see other lap
$, ( or &. analyses. 컄컄
275
Control systems
컄컄 왘 To select a different display, press Telephone* menu

Otherwise, you may not be able to observe
( or &.
traffic conditions and could endanger your-
i The menu overview can be found on
i Each lap is shown in its own submenu. The (컄 page 266).
self and others.
fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol 1. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
You can use the functions in the “Tele-
phone” menu to operate your telephone,
covering a distance of 44 feet (approxima-
provided it is inserted in the cradle and
tely 14 m) every second.
switched on.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from Never operate radio transmitters equipped
using a cellular telephone while driving. with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
Whether or not prohibited by law, for safety out being connected to an external antenna)
reasons, the driver should not use the cellu- from inside the vehicle while the engine is
lar telephone while the vehicle is in motion. running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
Stop the vehicle in a safe location before tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos-
placing or answering a call. sibly resulting in an accident and/or
If you nonetheless choose to use the mobile personal injury.
phone while driving, please use the hands-
free feature and be sure to pay attention to
the traffic situation at all times. Use the mo-
bile phone only when road, weather and traf-
fic conditions permit.
276
Control systems
i Various mobile phone cradles can be in- 앫 If the telephone is not inserted in the Entering the PIN or unlock code
stalled in the front center armrest, see separate cradle, the message in the multifunc-
왘 Enter the PIN or unlock code using the
installation instructions for the mobile phone tion display is: “No telephone inserted”.
cradle. These mobile phone cradles can be ob- telephone keypad*, Voice Control* or
tained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- 앫 If the PIN or unlock code is not yet en- telephone*.
ter. For more information about telephone tered, the message in the multifunction
The telephone will then search for a
(컄 page 507). display is “Please enter PIN” or “Enter
network.
unlock code”.
i The roof cargo container* may impair mo- You may carry out the following functions:
bile phone reception. In an emergency, remove 앫 If the telephone is switched on, the
the mobile phone from the mobile phone cradle telephone will then search for a net- Function Page
(컄 page 507) to make a call. work. During this time, the multifunc-
tion display is blank. If no network Dialing a number from the phone 277
Logging-on to a network available, the multifunction display book
왘 Switch on the telephone and COMAND reads “No Service”. Redialing 278
(컄 page 85). 앫 If the telephone is on, as soon as the Answering a call 279
왘 Press ( or & to select the “Tele- telephone has found a network, Ending a call or rejecting an in- 279
phone” menu. “Ready” or “Ready (Roaming)” appears coming call
in the multifunction display.
Which messages appear in the multifunc-
tion display depends on whether your tele- Dialing a number from the mobile
phone is switched on or off. phone book
앫 If the telephone is off, the message in If your telephone is ready to receive calls,
the multifunction display is: “Telephone you may select and dial a number from the
OFF”. phone book at any time.
왘 Log on to the network (컄 page 277). 컄컄
277
Control systems
컄컄 i When you insert a Mercedes-Benz approved i If you press and hold % or $ for been stored in the phone book, other-
mobile phone into the cradle*, the control sys- more than 1 second, the system scrolls wise the dialed telephone number ap-
tem reads in the phone book that is saved on the rapidly through the list of names. pears.
SIM card or in the phone book of the mobile If you press and hold % or $ for more than
phone. This can take several minutes, depending 4 seconds, the control system shows the first Redialing
on how many entries each phone book contains. four entries of the letter next used. Release the
When you press %, $, (, & or button to stop the quick search. The search The control system stores the most recent-
# during the download of the phone book the stops automatically at the end of the list. ly dialed phone numbers. This eliminates
message “Reading telephone data, please the need to search through your entire
wait...” appears in the multifunction display. 왘 Press s or # to start dialing. phone book.
When the message: “Reading telephone data,
please wait...” disappears, the phone book has If several entries are present for the 왘 Log on to the network (컄 page 277).
been loaded. same name, they are all shown.
왘 Press s to switch to the number
왘 Press % or $ or # to switch 왘 Select the desired entry. and/or name last dialed in the redial
to the phone book. 왘 Press s or # to start dialing. memory.
왘 Press % or $ to select the de- The message “Connecting call…” ap- 왘 Press % or $ to select the de-
sired name. pears on the multifunction display, as sired number and/or name.
The stored names are displayed in as- well as the dialed telephone number or 왘 Press s or # to start dialing.
cending alphabetical order. name as long as it is stored in the
phone book. Once a connection has been estab-
i If you do not want to dial from the phone lished, the name appears in the multi-
book, press t or L. In the multifunction The dialed number is saved in the “Di- function display, provided that it has
display appears again “Ready” or “Ready (Roam- aled numbers” list. been stored in the phone book, other-
ing)”.
Once a connection has been estab- wise the dialed telephone number ap-
lished, the name appears on the multi- pears.
function display, provided that it has
278
Control systems
Answering a call Assistance* menu

When your telephone is ready to receive
calls, you can answer a call at any time i The menu overview can be found on
(컄 page 266).
with the ignition on. When you are in the
“Telephone” menu, you will see the follow- In the “Assistance” menu, you can change
ing message on the multifunction display: the settings of your driving systems.
Displaying distance graphic*, 1 PRE-SAFE® Brake* indicator :

DISTRONIC Plus* (USA only)
왘 Press # again if you would like to
For information about displaying distance change the current status.
graphic (컄 page 428).
After the function has been activated,
Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® indicator : appears on the
Brake* (USA only) left-hand side of the multifunction dis-
왘 Press s.
play.
i The caller’s number appears only if it is “Assistance” menu. For more information (컄 page 76).
transmitted.
The caller’s name appears only if the number and 왘 Press % or $ to select the Switching on the Dynamic Rear View
the name are stored in the phone book. “PRE-SAFE Brake” function. Monitor* automatically
왘 Press #.
Ending a call or rejecting an incoming i The image from the Dynamic Rear View
call Monitor is shown on the COMAND display.
왘 Press t. 왘 Press ( or & to select the

“Assistance” menu. 컄컄
279
Control systems
컄컄 왘 Press % or $ to select the Service menu function display and are based on
“Rearview camera” function. conditions or system status the vehicle’s
왘 Press #. i The menu overview can be found on system has recorded.
(컄 page 266).
The vehicle status message memory menu
The “Service” menu is used for only appears if there are any messages
앫 calling up messages stored.
앫 checking tire inflation pressure elec-

tronically with the Advanced TPMS* Warning! G
(standard on U.S. vehicles)
Malfunction and warning messages are only
앫 activating Run Flat Indicator indicated for certain systems and are inten-
왘 Press # again if you would like to
(Canada only) tionally not very detailed. The malfunction
change the current status.
앫 calling up the maintenance service in- and warning messages are simply a remind-
The following settings are available: er with respect to the operation of certain
dicator display
systems and do not replace the owner’s
“On when in The Dynamic Rear View 앫 check engine oil level* and/or driver’s responsibility to maintain
Reverse” Monitor automatically the vehicle’s operating safety by having all
switches on when reverse Calling up vehicle malfunction, warning required maintenance and safety checks
gear is engaged. and system status messages stored in performed on the vehicle and by bringing
“OFF” The Dynamic Rear View memory the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Monitor is not switched on. Use the vehicle status message memory Center to address the malfunction and
menu to scan malfunction and warning warning messages (컄 page 612).
messages that may be stored in the sys-
tem. Such messages appear in the multi- 왘 Press ( or & to select the
“Service” menu.
280
Control systems
If conditions have occurred causing Calling up the maintenance service in- Setting daytime running lamp mode
status messages to be recorded, the dicator display (USA only)
number of messages appears in the
For information about calling up the main- i This function is not available in countries
multifunction display: “2 Messages”.
tenance service indicator display where the daytime running lamp mode is manda-
왘 Press % or $ to select the mes- (컄 page 582). tory and therefore in a constant mode.
sage. 왘 Press ( or & to select the “Set-
Checking engine oil level (S 600 and tings” menu.
왘 Press # to confirm.
S 65 AMG)
i See the “Practical hints” section for mal- 왘 Press % or $ to select the “Day-
For information about checking engine oil time driving lamps” function.
function and warning messages (컄 page 612).
level (컄 page 543).
i If you turn the SmartKey in the starter 왘 Press #.
switch to position 0 and then back to position 2, Settings menu 왘 Press # again if you would like to
all messages will be deleted from the message
memory.
i The menu overview can be found on Depending on the previous status, the
(컄 page 266).
Checking tire inflation pressure daytime running lamps will be switched
In the “Settings” menu, you can: on or off.
For information about checking tire infla-
tion pressure (컄 page 561). 앫 switch the daytime running lamps on or
off (USA only)
Activating Run Flat Indicator 앫 switch the additional speedometer on
(Canada only) or off
For information about activating Run Flat 앫 switch the radar sensors* on or off
Indicator (컄 page 565). (USA only)
281
Control systems
With “Daytime driving lamps” mode select- Showing or hiding additional Switching radar sensors* on/off
ed and the exterior lamp switch at position speedometer
If your vehicle is equipped with DISTRONIC
M or *, the low beam headlamps
You can have an additional digital speed- Plus*, BAS Plus*, or Park Assist* it is
are switched on when the engine is run-
ometer shown on the multifunction dis- equipped with a radar sensor system
ning.
play. The speed is shown in the unit of which you can switch on and off.
In low ambient light conditions the follow- kilometers/hour (USA) or miles/hour
When travelling in Canada in a vehicle not
ing lamps will switch on additionally: (Canada).
registered in Canada, you must switch off
앫 Parking lamps 왘 Press ( or & to select the “Set- the radar sensor system. Canadian law
앫 Tail lamps tings” menu. does not permit the use of the radar sensor
system for vehicles from outside of Cana-
앫 License plate lamps 왘 Press % or $ to select the “Add.
da. When you switch off the radar sensor
speedometer” function.
앫 Side marker lamps system, the following functions are deacti-
왘 Press #. vated:
For more information on the daytime run-
ning lamp mode (컄 page 373). 왘 Press # again if you would like to 앫 BAS Plus* (컄 page 69)
앫 DISTRONIC Plus* (컄 page 424)
i If you turn the exterior lamp switch to anoth- Depending on the previous status, the
er position, the corresponding lamp(s) will 앫 Park Assist* (컄 page 448)
switch on. additional speedometer will be
switched on or off. 앫 PRE-SAFE® Brake* (컄 page 76)
i Make sure that the light switch is set
to B or * when you switch off the day-
time running lamps while driving at night.
282
Control systems
i USA only: 왘 Press ( or & to select the “Set- i The following message appears in the multi-
This device has been approved by the FCC as a tings” menu. function display if the radar sensors are
“Vehicular Radar System”. The radar sensor is switched off and you attempt to activate DIS-
intended for use in an automotive radar system 왘 Press % or $ to select the “Ra- TRONIC Plus*, Park Assist* or PRE-SAFE®
only. Removal, tampering, or altering of the de- dar sensor” function. Brake*:
vice will void any warranties, and is not permitted 왘 Press #. “Radar sensor
by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in deactivated
any non-approved way. 왘 Press # again if you would like to See Oper. Manual”
Any unauthorized modification to this device change the current status.
could void the user’s authority to operate the Depending on the previous status, the
equipment.
radar sensors will be switched on or
i Canada only: off.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following i The selected status of the radar sensors re-
two conditions: mains stored in memory even if the engine is
turned off and restarted.
ceived, including interference that may
Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will
void any warranties, and is not permitted. Do not
way.
equipment.
283
Control systems
Voice Control*
Operating safety
The navigation system does not supply any
information on stop signs, yield signs, traffic
Warning! G
regulations or traffic safety rules. Their ob-
Warning! G servance always remains in the driver’s per-
Navigation announcements are intended to
direct you while driving without diverting
sonal responsibility. DVD maps do not cover your attention from the road and driving.
Please devote your attention first and fore-
all areas nor all routes within an area.
most to the traffic situation you are in. While Please always use this feature instead of
the system permits hands-free phone oper- Traffic regulations always have priority over consulting the map display for directions.
ation, attention to traffic may be diverted any route recommendations given. Consulting the symbols or map display for
not only by physical operation of a phone, Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph directions may cause you to divert your at-
but also by the distraction of a phone con- (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is tention from driving and increase your risk
versation while driving. As such, for safety covering a distance of 44 feet of an accident.
reasons, we encourage the driver to stop the (approximately 13.5 m) every second.
vehicle in a safe place before answering or
placing a phone call.
Warning! G
For safety reasons, you should only select a
destination when the vehicle is stationary. Please do not use the Voice Control System
While the navigation system provides direc- in an emergency, as the tone of your voice
tional assistance, the driver must remain fo- may change in a stressful situation. This
cused on safe driving behavior, especially could cause a delay in completing your
attention to traffic and street signs, and phone call in a timely manner. This could
should utilize the system’s audio cues while distract you in an emergency situation and
driving. cause you to be involved in an accident.
284
Control systems
Voice Control* introduction
왔 Voice Control* introduction
The Voice Control System gives you the ca- You control these systems using spoken The commands and digit sequences can be
pability to control the following systems on commands. Moreover, controls such as spoken without pausing between the indi-
your vehicle using spoken commands: the buttons on the multifunction steering vidual words. If an unavailable or incorrect
wheel (컄 page 287) allow you to keep your command is used, the Voice Control Sys-
앫 Telephone* (컄 page 289)
hands on the steering wheel. tem will prompt you for a new command by
앫 Navigation (컄 page 296) asking “Please repeat” or “Please repeat
The command vocabulary consists of
앫 Address book (컄 page 306) approximately 300 ready to use phrases. your entry”.
앫 Audio (컄 page 309) (AM/FM radio, The Voice Control System recognizes com- In order to provide for a safe and comfort-
CD/DVD changer, MP3 player) mands and number sequences, irrespec- able dialog, the Voice Control System ac-
tive of the speaker. To optimize speech knowledges important commands.
recognition for your voice follow the indi-
vidualization process (컄 page 330).
You can use the Voice Control System to
call up all of COMAND’s main menu items,
with the exception of the main menus for
“Vehicle” and “Navi”.
285
Control systems
Spelling Command types Active System
You may not need to spell the entire name The Voice Control System commands can The active system is the system currently
(street, intersection, city or point of inter- be categorized as: shown in the COMAND display.
est) especially if the name is lengthy. Spell-
앫 General Commands If, for example, you listen to the radio while
ing the first three to five characters of the the telephone system is active on the
name should be sufficient for the system These are commands always available
COMAND display, you have to switch to
to recognize the name provided it is avail- to you as soon as the Voice Control
the radio using the command “Radio” be-
able on the navigation DVD. System is activated (for example
fore you can operate the radio.
“Help” commands).
The selection appearing on the COMAND
display is sorted based on your recognized 앫 Local Commands
voice input and a matching algorithm. These are commands specific to the
You can use the commands “Next page” or currently active system shown in the
“Previous page” to scroll up or down in the COMAND display (for example com-
list. mands to control the CD/DVD chang-
er).
Use the command “Correction” to start
over by again spelling the name. For a complete list of commands
(컄 page 315).
Speak each character as clearly as you
can, especially when they sound very simi- i During Voice Control System operation visu-
lar (d or e). al help windows also appear in the COMAND dis-
play (컄 page 288).
286
Control systems
Controls Item Activating Voice Control
1 ! to activate Voice Control 왘 Switch on COMAND (컄 page 85).

Operation via the multifunction to accept a call 왘 Press !.
steering wheel
2 L to cancel Voice Control An audible tone (beep) confirms the ac-
3 æ to increase volume tivation of the system.
ç to decrease volume 왘 Speak a command.
s to take a call
to dial Canceling Voice Control
to redial 왘 Press L.
t to end a call or
to reject an incoming call
왘 Speak the command “Cancel”
i Voice Control can be cancelled at any time, (except for speaking voice entries, en-
even during a dialog. Please note that if the Voice tering a town or city or carrying out in-
Control System is cancelled during a dialog, then dividualization).
the complete procedure is stopped and Voice
Control is cancelled.
or
왘 Press any COMAND button.
287
Control systems
Setting volume level When the Voice Control System requires

왘 Activate Voice Control. additional information from the user, a se-
lection list is shown on the COMAND dis-
왘 Speak a command, for example “Help”. play in the address book and navigation
왘 Press æ or ç. The volume is in- system.
creased or decreased during voice out-
put.
or
왘 Set volume for voice output using the
COMAND volume thumbwheel on the 1 Multifunction display
lower part of the front center console
(컄 page 96). Symbols
Displays The following symbols are found in follow-

1 COMAND display ing Voice Control System pages:
COMAND Display s This symbol stands for commands
In addition to the acoustic help function, Multifunction display and voice entries you are speaking.
a visual help function (컄 page 237) is avail- For example: telephone numbers are t This symbol stands for voice output
able on the COMAND display. shown on the multifunction display while by the system.
Upon activating the Voice Control, the dialing when the main “Telephone” menu
is selected in the instrument cluster con- u This symbol indicates that informa-
most important available commands for tion is available on the COMAND
the currently active system appear on the trol system.
display.
COMAND display.
288
Control systems
Voice Control* telephone
왔 Voice Control* telephone
Telephone operation
The Voice Control System gives you the
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from Never operate radio transmitters equipped following capabilities:
using a cellular telephone while driving. with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
앫 Enter a telephone unlock code
Whether or not prohibited by law, for safety out being connected to an external antenna)
reasons, the driver should not use the cellu- from inside the vehicle while the engine is 앫 Dial a phone number by speaking the
lar telephone while the vehicle is in motion. running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc- telephone number
Stop the vehicle in a safe location before tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos- 앫 Store names and numbers in the
placing or answering a call. sibly resulting in an accident and/or COMAND address book
If you nonetheless choose to use the mobile personal injury.
앫 Dial a phone number by speaking the
phone while driving, please use the hands-
name of an COMAND address book en-
free feature and be sure to pay attention to i Various mobile phone cradles can be in- try
the traffic situation at all times. Use the mo- stalled in the front center armrest, see separate
bile phone only when road, weather and traf- installation instructions for the mobile phone 앫 Delete an address book entry from the
fic conditions permit. Otherwise, you may cradle. These mobile phone cradles can be ob- address book
not be able to observe traffic conditions and 앫 Have the system read out the phone
ter. For more information about telephone
could endanger yourself and others. (컄 page 507). book of the address book entry by en-
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph try
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is i The roof cargo container* may impair mo-
bile phone reception. In an emergency, remove 앫 Manage and access an automated an-
covering a distance of 44 feet (approxima- the mobile phone from the mobile phone cradle swering system/voice mail box
tely 14 m) every second. (컄 page 507) to make a call.
앫 Redial names and numbers
289
Control systems
The Voice Control System detects whether Use the command “Telephone” to activate 앫 as a continuously spoken string of dig-
the telephone main menu. Use this com- its, or
앫 your telephone is switched on
mand if you want the digits you are enter-
앫 in digit blocks of three to five digits.
앫 the corresponding mobile network is ing to appear on the COMAND display.
logged in Digits from “Zero” to “Nine” may be used.
앫 it is possible to dial “Help telephone” After each digit block (separate the digit
blocks by using an approximately
If dialing is not possible, the Voice Control The Voice Control System features a com-
0.5 second pause), the Voice Control Sys-
System will advise you accordingly. prehensive help function.
tem repeats the recognized digits and
Use the command “Help telephone” and waits until you continue speaking.
i You can continue operating your mobile
phone using the telephone keypad or keypad on the Voice Control System will read out an
your phone. option list of available functions and com- Sample dialog:
mands that can be used in conjunction
Before you can operate the telephone us- s Enter PIN
with the telephone (컄 page 237).
ing the Voice Control System, you have to t Please say the PIN
activate the Voice Control (컄 page 287).
“Enter PIN” s Zero zero one one
Telephone commands i The PIN (only GSM mobile phones) prompt t Zero zero one one
starts automatically whenever the phone is
For a complete list of commands locked and you wish to use it. s OK
(컄 page 315). Use the command “Enter PIN” to input the
code to unlock your telephone. After
“Telephone” speaking the command, you are prompted
to enter the code.
Speak the code
290
Control systems
“Dial number” Sample dialog: “Confirm”

You can dial a phone number using the s Dial number Using the command “Confirm” will repeat
command “Dial number”. all digits spoken up to that point. Upon re-
t Please say the number
peating the digits, the system will prompt
Digits from “Zero” to “Nine” may be used.
s One two three you to continue your input.
The phone number must be spoken
t One two three
앫 as a continuously spoken string of Sample dialog:
s Four five six seven
digits, or s Dial number
t Four five six seven
앫 in digit blocks (three to five digits in t Please say the number
each block). s OK
s One two three
After each digit block (separate the digit t Dialing
blocks by using an approximately 0.5 sec- t One two three
i You can also dial the telephone number spo-
ond pause), the Voice Control System re- ken by pressing button s on the multifunc- s Confirm
peats the recognized digits and waits until tion steering wheel (instead of using the t One two three, please continue
you continue speaking. command “OK”):
You can dial the telephone number before all
s Four five six seven
When dialing 1800 numbers, you may pro-
nounce the first four digits as “One eight numbers are recited in full. t Four five six seven
hundred” and the system will recognize the s OK
spoken entries as “One eight zero zero”.
All other numeric entries must be spoken t Dialing
as individual numbers.
291
Control systems
“Correction” “Delete” t Dialing

Using the command “Correction” will cor- Using the command “Delete” will erase all
rect the last entered digit block. After digits entered. The system then prompts “Redial”
speaking the command, the last digit block you to start your input again. Use the command “Redial” to dial the last
is deleted and all previously entered digits dialed number.
are repeated. The system then prompts Sample dialog:
you to continue your input. “Save name” (COMAND address book)
s Dial number
Use the command “Save name” to create a
Sample dialog: t Please say the number
new entry in your COMAND address book.
s Dial number s One two three After using the command, the system will
t One two three prompt you to enter a phone number.
t Please say the number
s Four five six seven Digits from “Zero” to “Nine” can be en-
s One two three
tered (컄 page 291).
t One two three t Four five six seven
Speak the telephone number
s Four five six seven s Delete
앫 as a continuous string
t Five five six seven t Number deleted. Please enter the
number again or, with longer phone numbers,
s Correction
s Four two seven three 앫 in form of digit blocks (three to five dig-
t One two three, please continue its).
t Four two seven three
s Four five six seven After each digit block (separate the digit
s Three nine one blocks by using an approximately
t Four five six seven
t Three nine one 0.5 second pause), the Voice Control Sys-
s OK tem repeats the recognized digits and
s OK
t Dialing waits until you continue speaking.
292
Control systems
After the command “OK”, you will be Sample dialog: “Dial name” (COMAND address book)
prompted up to two times to input the
s Save name Use the command “Dial name” to place a
name. When repeating the name, make
phone call by selecting a name previously
sure that you pronounce it in the same t Please say the number first
saved in your personal address book.
manner as during the first input. Otherwise s One two three
the name cannot be saved and the Voice
t One two three Sample dialog:
Control System cancels the save proce-
dure. s Four five six seven s Dial name
i The Voice Control System may recognize t Four five six seven t Please say the name
names even if not saved in your voice. For opti-
s OK s John Smith
mum call-up performance, however, you should
speak and save the names you intend to use t Please say the name If several telephone numbers exist
yourself. for the same entry, the Voice Con-
s John Smith trol System will ask for clarification.
i You can also add a name to an entry by call- t Please repeat the name
ing up the corresponding menu on COMAND and t Do you want to place a work call or
saying the name twice (컄 page 224). s John Smith a home call?
t Do you want to save the number in s Work
a category? t John Smith work
s No Dialing
t Name and number saved
293
Control systems
“Call <voice entry>” (address book) 앫 “Call John Smith work car” “Delete name” (COMAND address book)
Use the command “Call <voice entry>” to 앫 “Call John Smith work land line” Use the command “Delete name” to delete
place a phone call by directly selecting a a name from the COMAND address book.
The system confirms your input and the
name previously stored in your address
number is dialed.
book. Sample dialog:
One address book entry can have up to Sample dialog: s Delete name
three different telephone numbers (mobile
s Call John Smith t The name, please
phone/car/land line) for both the home
and work fields. If several telephone numbers exist s Smith office
for the same entry, the Voice Con-
If only one telephone number is stored for t Smith office: Would you like to de-
trol System will ask for clarification.
a given name, you can recall the entry us- lete the voice name?
ing the command “Call John Smith”. t Do you want to place a work call or s Yes
a home call?
If several telephone numbers are associat- t The voice name is deleted
ed with one entry, you can recall the de- s Work
sired telephone number by using the t John Smith work
following commands:
Dialing
앫 “Call John Smith home”
앫 “Call John Smith work”
앫 “Call John Smith home cell phone”
앫 “Call John Smith home car”
앫 “Call John Smith home land line”
앫 “Call John Smith work cell phone”
294
Control systems
“List phone book” and dialing a phone Selecting an entry and dialing that Managing automated answering sys-
number number tem/voice mail box
Use the command “List phone book” to lis- 왘 For the desired entry, press ! dur- Activate the Voice Control System to ac-
ten to all voice entries in the phone book ing or immediately after voice output. cess and manage your answering ma-
with a phone number stored, and select an chine/voice mail box.
If more than one phone number exists
entry and dial that number.
for a given entry, the Voice Control Sys- 왘 Activate the Voice Control System dur-
tem prompts: ing a phone call (컄 page 287).
Sample dialog:
t Do you want to place a work call or An audible tone (beep) confirms the ac-
s List phone book a home call? tivation of the system.
The system reads out the complete
s Home 왘 Speak the required digits (“Zero” to
phone book entry by entry.
“Nine”).
The system reads out the name of
the selected entry and dials the cor- or
responding number.
왘 Speak the required words “Star” and
“Pound”.
Canceling the dialog
왘 Speak the final command “OK”.
왘 Press L.
The system dials the number entered.
The system confirms “Cancel”.
The dialog is concluded.
295
Control systems
Voice Control* navigation
Important notes
During route guidance, you will not receive
information on:
Warning! G
Warning! G 앫 traffic lights Navigation announcements are intended to
앫 stop and yield signs direct you while driving without diverting
For safety reasons, you should only select a your attention from the road and driving.
앫 parking or stopping zones
destination when the vehicle is stationary. Please always use this feature instead of
While the navigation system provides direc- 앫 one-way streets
consulting the map display for directions.
tional assistance, the driver must remain fo- 앫 narrow bridges, or Consulting the symbols or map display for
cused on safe driving behavior, especially 앫 other traffic regulation data. directions may cause you to divert your at-
attention to traffic and street signs, and tention from driving and increase your risk
You should therefore always strictly observe
should utilize the system’s audio cues while of an accident.
traffic regulations while driving. Drive care-
driving.
fully and always obey traffic laws and road
The navigation system does not supply any signs, even if they contradict navigation sys-
information on stop signs, yield signs, traffic tem instructions.
regulations or traffic safety rules. Their ob-
servance always remains in the driver’ per-
sonal responsibility. DVD maps do not cover Warning! G
all areas nor all routes within an area.
Traffic regulations always have priority over Please do not use the Voice Control System
any route recommendations given. in an emergency, as the tone of your voice
may change in a stressful situation. This
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph could cause a delay in completing your
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is phone call in a timely manner. This could
covering a distance of 44 feet distract you in an emergency situation and
(approximately 13.5 m) every second. cause you to be involved in an accident.
296
Control systems
Navigation operation 앫 start route guidance Navigation commands

앫 display the map
The Voice Control System allows you to i You cannot start the route guidance until all
앫 zoom in or zoom out of the map necessary address data has been entered.
앫 enter a state or province
앫 listen to the destination memory For a complete list of commands
앫 enter a city
앫 cancel route guidance (컄 page 315).
앫 spell the name of a city
앫 turn guide instructions on or off “Help navigation”/“Help”
앫 spell the name of district or center
Before you can operate navigation using Use the command “Help navigation” or
앫 spell the name of a street
the Voice Control System, you have to ac- “Help” to read out an option list of avail-
앫 spell the name of an intersection tivate the Voice Control System able functions and commands that can be
앫 enter a house number (컄 page 287). used in conjunction with the navigation
system.
앫 enter a complete address Selecting navigation mode
앫 select one of your last destinations 왘 Press !.
앫 enter a POI (point of interest) 왘 Speak the command “Navigation”.
앫 select one of your last destinations 왘 Press !.
앫 save a destination 왘 Speak one of the navigation com-
앫 navigate to a destination stored in the mands.
destination memory of the address
book
297
Control systems
“Enter state”,“Enter province” “Last states” u The system displays a numbered

Use the command “Enter state” or “Enter Use the command “Last states” to select a list of matching street names on
province” to select a different state or state or province from among a number of the COMAND display
province on the navigation DVD. last selected states or provinces. t Please select a line number
s Number two
Sample dialog: Dialog for entering a complete address
t Number two accepted
s Enter state
“Enter destination” t Do you want to enter a house num-
t Please say the name of the state ber?
s New York Use the command “Enter destination” to
enter a complete destination address. s No
u The system shows a numbered list t Do you want to enter an intersec-
of states recognized by the system The system guides you through the dialog.
As soon as a valid address has been en- tion?
t Please select a line number tered, you can start route guidance or save s No
s Number two the destination. For information on spelling
(컄 page 303). t Do you want to spell the town’s
or to accept, say name?
s Yes Sample dialog: s Yes
t State accepted s Enter destination t Please spell the town name
The selected entry is adopted from the list. t Please spell a New York street s N-E-W-Y-O-R-K
name
u The system displays a numbered
s B-R-O-A-D-W list of matching city names on the
COMAND display
t Please select a line number
298
Control systems
s Number one “Points of interest” u The system displays a numbered

t Number one accepted Use the command “Points of interest” to list search categories: Find menu
t Do you want to start route guid- select a point of interest (POI) such as air- t Please select a line number
ports, railroad stations, gas stations etc.
ance? s Number one
s Yes Sample dialog: u The system displays a numbered
t Starting route guidance list of airports sorted by distance
s Points of interest
The system calculates the route and, upon u The system shows the following list
completing route calculation, starts route on the COMAND display: s Number one
guidance.
앫 current position t Point of interest accepted
i You may not need to spell the entire name 앫 other town/city t Do you want to start route guid-
(street, intersection, city or point of interest) es-
ance?
pecially if the name is lengthy. Spelling the first 앫 Global POI
three to five characters of the name should be s Yes
sufficient for the system to recognize the name t Please select a line number
provided it is available on the navigation DVD. t Starting route guidance
s Number one
i The selection appearing on the COMAND u The system displays a numbered i Depending on the number of categories and
display is sorted based on your recognized voice POI’s available for a given area, the system may
list of available POI categories: display several lists on each of which you may
input and a matching algorithm.
Select POI category menu have to make a selection by speaking the desired
You can use the commands “Continue” or line number or you have to spell the name of a
“Back” to scroll up or down in the list. t Please select a line number
POI.
Use the command “Correction” to start over by s Number one
again spelling the name.
Speak each character as clearly as you can, es-
pecially when they sound very similar (d or e).
299
Control systems
“Next POI” The system calculates the route and, upon Sample dialog:
completing route calculation, starts route
With the commands s Save destination
guidance.
앫 “Next gas station” t Please say the name
앫 “Next parking lot” “Last destinations” s John Smith
앫 “Next Mercedes-Benz service” Use the command “Last destinations” to t Please repeat the name
select a destination from among a number
앫 “Next restaurant” of destinations last navigated to. s John Smith
앫 “Next hospital” t Where do you want to save: home
“Save destination” or work?
you can select POIs in your vicinity.
Use the command “Save destination” to s Work
Sample dialog: save the current destination in the address
book.
t The destination has been saved
s Next gas station
u The system shows a numbered list i The Voice Control System may recognize
names even if not saved in your voice. For best
of gas stations on the COMAND dis- possible call-up performance, however, you
play should speak and save the names you intend to
t Please select a line number use yourself.
If an entry is already available in the address
s Number one book, the system will ask you if you would like to
t Number one accepted add the address to the available entry.
t Do you want to start route guid-

ance?
s Yes
300
Control systems
“Navigate to <voice entry>” (address to directly select between home or work “Start route guidance”
book) address for that name. The system con-
Use the command “Start route guidance”
Use the command “Navigate to <voice en- firms your selection, calculates the route,
to start route guidance after entering a val-
try>” to start route guidance by selecting and begins route guidance.
id destination.
voice entry with a saved destination ad-
Sample dialog:
dress from the COMAND address book. Sample dialog:
A voice entry may have two different desti-
s Navigate to John Smith s Start route guidance
nation addresses associated with it (home If more than one address exists for
t Starting route guidance
or work). this voice entry, the Voice Control
System will prompt you: Route guidance begins.
The system confirms your command, cal-
culates the route, and begins route guid- t Navigate to home or work? “Guidance instructions on”
ance.
s Work Use the command “Guidance instructions
If only one address is stored, you can use
t John Smith work on” to have the Voice Control System re-
the command “Navigate <voice name>” to
Starting route guidance peat the last guidance instruction. If guid-
select the stored destination address for
ance voice output was previously muted,
that name.
using this command will deactivate the
If two addresses are stored, you can use muting of the voice output.
the commands
앫 “Navigate <voice name> home” “Guidance instructions off”
or Use the command “Guidance instructions

off” to mute the systems’ guidance voice
앫 “Navigate <voice name> work” output.
301
Control systems
“Cancel route guidance” “Map” Sample dialog:

Use the command “Cancel route guid- Use the command “Map” to activate or s List destination memory
ance” to cancel route guidance. switch to map display.
The system reads out the address
book destination memory.
Sample dialog: “Zoom in”, “Zoom out”
To select a voice entry and adopt address
s Cancel route guidance Use these commands to zoom in on map or
for route guidance:
to zoom out of map to the desired level of
t Are you sure you want to cancel 왘 When the system reads the desired en-
map detail.
route guidance?
try, press !.
s Yes “Zoom in completely”, “Zoom out com- If more than one address is available,
Route guidance is canceled. pletely” the system will prompt you:
or These commands are used to adapt the t Navigate to home or work?
map display directly to the smallest or larg-
s No est map scale. s Home
t Cancel The system reads the selected
“List destination memory” voice entry and starts route guid-
The dialog with the Voice Control System
is canceled. Route guidance remains ac- Use the command “List destination memo- ance.
tive. ry” to have the system read out all destina- To cancel the dialog:
tion memory entries and select and entry
왘 Press L.
for route guidance.
You have canceled the dialog. The sys-
tem confirms cancellation by saying
“Cancel”.
302
Control systems
Commands for entering parts of an t Please select a line number s N-E-W-Y-O-R

address s Number one u The system displays a numbered
list of available city names
t Number one, town accepted
“Enter town” t Please select a line number
The city selected is adopted for route guid-
The “Enter town” command is used to en- ance. s Number one
ter any larger town or city in the USA or
Canada. t Number one, town accepted
“Spell town”
The city selected is adopted for route guid-
i If the desired town/city does not appear on Use the command “Spell town” to enter a
the list of towns/cities, the town or city can be ance.
city name by spelling mode and see if it
entered by using the “Spell town” command.
matches an entry available on the naviga- i You can use the commands “Continue” or
i You can scroll through the list by using the tion DVD. “Back” to scroll up or down in the list. Use the
“Continue” or “Back” command. Say “Correc- command “Correction” to start over again by
Speak the characters as a continuous spelling the name of the town.
tion” to enter the town or city again.
string (five to seven characters). The sys-
tem then displays a list of cities on the i You must also spell foreign towns or cities in
Sample dialog: English. Please note that the list on the COMAND
COMAND display from which you can se-
s Enter town display is sorted according to the probability of
lect the desired city. the voice recognition.
t Please spell the name of the town Speak each character as clearly as you can, es-
Sample dialog:
s E-A-S-T-O-N pecially when they sound very similar (d or e).
s Spell town
list of available city names t Please spell the town name
303
Control systems
“District” or “Center” Sample dialog: “Street”

Use the command “District” or “Center” to s District Use the command “Street” to spell and se-
to spell a city location in the city previously lect a street for the adopted city. Only
t Please spell the center
selected. street names available on the navigation
s S-T-A-T-E-N-I-S DVD can be selected.
Speak the characters as a continuous
string (five to seven characters). The sys- u The system displays a list of avail- Speak the characters as a continuous
tem then displays a list of available city disable districts if more than one name string (five to seven characters). The sys-
tricts or centers on the COMAND display. matches the name of a district for tem then displays a list of available street
Select the desired city center from that the given city names on the COMAND display. Select the
list. t Please select a line number desired street name from that list.
s Number one Sample dialog:

t Number one, center accepted s Street
The district selected is adopted for route t Please spell the name of the street
guidance.
s F-O-R-E-S-T
list of available street names
s Number one
t Number one, street accepted
The street name selected is adopted for
route guidance.
304
Control systems
“Intersection”, “Cross street” The intersection is adopted for route guid-

Use the command “Intersection” or “Cross ance. If an address at the intersection is
street” to spell and select an intersection. recognized, the system asks if it is correct.
Say “Yes” or “No”.
Speak the characters as a continuous
string (five to seven characters). The sys- “House number”
tem then displays a list of available inter-
Use the command “House number” to se-
sections on the COMAND display. Select
lect a house number for the street previ-
the desired intersection from that list.
ously selected. Speak the house number in
single digits.
Sample dialog:
s Intersection Sample dialog:
t Please spell the first street name s House number
s F-O-R-E-S-T t Please say the house number in sin-
t Please spell the name of the cross- gle digits
ing street s Three two
s D-U-D-L-E-Y t Is three two correct?
u The system displays a numbered s OK
list of available intersections on the
COMAND display
t House number accepted
t Please select a line number The house number is adopted for route
guidance.
s Number one
t Intersection accepted
305
Control systems
Voice Control* address book
in the address book. Available commands 앫 Open the address book

Warning! G are dependent on the status of the address
book. The address book can be in one of Opening address book
Please devote your attention first and fore- the following status:
most to the traffic situation you are in. 왘 Press !.
앫 Address book not open
Before your journey, please familiarize your- 왘 Speak the command “Address book”.
self with the address book functions. 앫 Address book open 왘 Press !.
Only use the Voice Control System when 왘 Speak one of the address book com-
Operation with address book not open
road and traffic conditions permit you to do mands described below.
(global)
so. Otherwise you could be involved in an
accident in which you or others could be in- The Voice Control System gives you the Operation with address book open
jured. following capabilities: (local)
앫 Store a name (컄 page 292)
COMAND address book overview In addition to the capabilities listed when
앫 Dial a name (컄 page 293) the address book is not open, the address
The Voice Control System address book 앫 Delete a name (컄 page 294) book opened allows you to:
function gives you the capability to store 앫 open an entry using the corresponding
names and associated phone numbers and 앫 Navigate to an entry (컄 page 301)
voice entry
address information. 앫 List address book (컄 page 307)
앫 open any entry by spelling the name
You can store up to 80 speaker-dependent 앫 List phone book of the address
voice entries in the Voice Control System (컄 page 295) 왘 Opening entry: Speak the command
address book. “Open entry”.
앫 List address book destination memory
Using these voice entries, you can dial a (컄 page 302)
phone number stored in address book or
앫 Delete the address book (컄 page 308)
start route guidance to an address stored
306
Control systems
Operating and using address book “Delete name” (address book) Sample dialog:
왘 Press !.
Use the command “Delete name” to delete s List address book
a voice name from your address book.
The system reads out all available address
왘 Speak one of the following commands
book entries.
depending on the address book status Sample dialog:
(open or not open). 왘 Selecting address book entry: When
s Delete name the system reads the desired entry,
Available commands with the address t Please say the name press !.
book not open s John Smith The entry is selected and shown on the
COMAND display.
For a complete list of commands t Do you want to delete John Smith?
(컄 page 315). s Yes 왘 Canceling the dialog: Press L.
t The voice name is deleted You have canceled the dialog. The sys-
“Help address book” tem reads out “Cancel”.
Use the command “Help address book” to “Navigate to <voice entry>” (address
“List phone book” and dialing a phone
have the Voice Control System read out an book) (컄 page 301)
number (컄 page 295)
option list of all available commands for
the address book. “List address book” “List destination memory” (컄 page 302)
“Save name” (컄 page 292) Use the command “List address book” to
have the system read out all available ad-
“Dial name” (컄 page 293) dress book entries and, if desired, select
“Call <voice name>” (컄 page 294) an entry when it is being read.
307
Control systems
“Delete address book” Sample dialog: The system will display a list of possible
matches on the COMAND display from
Use the command “Delete address book” s Open John Smith
to delete all or individual voice names of which you can select the desired entry.
u The entry “John Smith” appears on
the address book entries. Only the voice
the COMAND display Sample dialog:
name is deleted; the remaining data in the
entry are retained.
“Select entry”
s Spell entry
Use the command “Select entry” to open t Please spell the name
“Address book”
an entry in your address book. s S-M-I-T-H
Use this command to open the address
book. u The system displays a numbered
Sample dialog:
list of matching entries on the
Available commands with the address s Select entry COMAND display
book open t Please say the name t Please select a line number
s John Smith s Number two
“Help address book”
u The entry “John Smith” appears on u The system opens the entry associ-
Use the command “Help address book” to the COMAND display. ated with line number two on the
have the Voice Control System read out an list
option list of all available commands for “Spell entry”
the address book. i You can use the commands “Continue” or
Use the command “Spell entry” to open an “Back” to scroll up or down the next page. Use
address book entry by spelling the name. the command “Correction” to exit the current
“Open <voice name>” selection list and spell the name again.
Use the command “Open <voice name>” Speak the name as a continuous string
to open an entry in your address book that (five to seven characters).
has a voice name already assigned to it.
308
Control systems
Voice Control* radio
왔 Voice Control* radio
Radio operation Selecting radio mode
Warning! G 왘 Press !.
The Voice Control System gives you the ca-
Please devote your attention first and fore- pability to: 왘 Speak the command “Radio”.
most to the traffic situation you are in.
앫 Select a station 왘 Press !.
앫 Seek a station 왘 Speak one of the radio commands.
Only use the Voice Control System when 앫 Select a specific frequency The system switches to the last tuned
road and traffic conditions permit you to do station in the selected band.
앫 Save up to 20 stations in your station
so. Otherwise you could be involved in an list
accident in which you or others could be in- Radio commands
앫 Select frequency band (FM or AM)
jured.
For a complete list of commands
앫 Select weatherband
(컄 page 315).
앫 Switch to satellite radio* (USA only)
앫 Delete station (from station list) “Help Radio”
앫 List the station list Use the commands
앫 Delete the station list 앫 “FM”
To operate the radio using the Voice Con- 앫 “AM”

trol System, the Voice Control System 앫 “Weatherband”
must be activated (컄 page 287).
to select the desired frequency band or
switch the radio to the weatherband.
309
Control systems
“Sat Radio*” (USA only) Sample dialog: Sample dialog:

Use this command for switching on the s Ninety-five point five s Save station
satellite radio*.
The Voice Control System tunes the radio t Please say the station name
to frequency FM 95.5.
“Next station” or “Previous station” s Smooth Jazz
The following commands are used to start “Save station” (List saved stations) t Please say the station name again
the station search and to tune in the next s Smooth Jazz
Use this command to save the set station
station:
(AM and FM only) by name in your personal t The station Smooth Jazz has been
앫 “Next station” station list. After using this command, the saved
앫 “Previous station” Voice Control System will prompt you to
repeat the name two to four times before it “Select station” (List saved stations)
Selecting frequency (FM, AM only) is saved in the station list. When repeating
the station name, make sure that you pro- Use the command “Select station” (AM
You may, for example, select a frequency nounce it in the same manner as during the and FM only) to select a saved station
in the FM band (87.9 to 107.9 Megahertz) first input. Otherwise the name cannot be name from your station list.
directly using a verbal command such as saved and the Voice Control System can-
“Ninety-five five”. The Voice Control Sys- cels the save procedure. Sample dialog:
tem also recognizes the words “frequen- s Select station
cy”, “point” and “megahertz”. You may for i The Voice Control System may recognize
example use the command “Frequency names even if not saved in your voice. For opti- t Please say the station name
mum performance, however, call up only names
ninety-five point five”. you have saved yourself. s Smooth Jazz
The Voice Control System tunes to the cor-
i You can freely select the station name, for
example “Favorite station”. responding frequency.
310
Control systems
“Station Smooth Jazz” (List saved sta- “List station list” and select station “Delete station” (List saved stations)
tions) from list
Use the command “Delete station” (AM
Use this command (AM and FM only) to di- Use this command to list the entire station and FM only) to delete a station from your
rectly select a saved station name from list, or to select an entry from the station personal station list.
your station list. list.
Sample dialog:
Sample dialog: Sample dialog:
s Delete station
s Station Smooth Jazz s List station list t Which station do you want to de-
The Voice Control System tunes to the cor- The Voice Control System reads out the lete?
responding station. entire list.
s Smooth Jazz
i If the Voice Control System does not recog- To select a station:
t Do you want to delete Smooth Jazz?
nize the station name you requested, please re-
When the system reads the desired sta-
fer to the section “List station list” (컄 page 311). s Yes
By following the dialog, you can check and deter- tion:
mine if the name is saved in the station list.
t Station deleted
왘 Press !.
왘 Canceling the dialog: Press L.
The dialog is concluded. The system
confirms “Cancel”.
311
Control systems
“Delete station list” The system deletes the complete station The station is erased and the remaining
Use this command to delete the complete list. The deletion of the station list cannot station entries are read out.
station list or one or more stations from be undone.
or
the station list. or
t No
t No The system continues reading the station
Sample dialog:
The system starts reading the station list. list entry by entry.
s Delete station list
When the system reads the station to be
t Do you want to delete all voice deleted:
names from the station list?
왘 Press !.
s Yes
The station to be deleted is selected.
t Are you sure? The name of the selected station is
s Yes read out once more.
t All voice names have been deleted t Do you want to delete Smooth Jazz?
from the station list
s Yes
t Station deleted
312
Control systems
Voice Control* CD/DVD changer/MP3
왔 Voice Control* CD/DVD changer/MP3
i The following commands “Next/Previous Commands
Warning! G CD/DVD” and “CD/DVD 1” to “CD/DVD 6”,
cause the DVD changer to switch from one slot For a complete list of commands
Please devote your attention first and fore- to another, regardless of the type of medium (컄 page 315).
most to the traffic situation you are in. found in the selected slot. In your command, you
can therefore replace the term “CD/DVD” with “Help CD” or “Help DVD” “Help MP3”
Before your journey, please familiarize your- “Medium”.
self with the audio functions. Use the commands
To operate the DVD changer using the
Only use the Voice Control System when 앫 “Help CD”
Voice Control System, the Voice Control
road and traffic conditions permit you to do
System must be activated (컄 page 287). 앫 “Help DVD”
so. Otherwise you could be involved in an
accident in which you or others could be in- 앫 “Help MP3”
Selecting CD mode
jured.
왘 Press !. and the Voice Control System will read out
a complete list of available commands for
Operation 왘 Speak one of the following commands: the CD, DVD or MP3.
앫 “CD”
The Voice Control System gives you the “CD/DVD/Medium 1” to
ability to: 앫 “DVD”
“CD/DVD/Medium 6”
앫 Select a CD/DVD/medium 앫 “MP3”
Use commands “CD/DVD/Medium 1” to
앫 Select a track 왘 Press !. “CD/DVD/Medium 6” to select one of up
왘 Speak one of the following commands. to 6 mediums in your DVD changer.
앫 Select a folder in MP3 mode
앫 Select a group in audio-DVD mode
313
Control systems
Voice Control* CD/DVD changer/MP3
“Next CD/DVD/Medium” “Previous track” or “Repeat track” “Memory card”

Use the command “Next CD/DVD/Medi- Use the command “Previous track” or “Re- The “Memory card” command is used to
um” to select the next available medium in peat track” to play again the track you are switch from the DVD drive to the PCMCIA
the DVD changer. listening to. card.
“Track 1” to “Track 39” “Group 1” to “Group 9” “Drive”

Use the commands “Track 1” to The “Group 1” to “Group 9” commands are The “Drive” command is used to switch
“Track 39” to select one of up to 39 title used to select a group on the inserted au- from the PCMCIA card to the DVD drive.
numbers of a loaded medium. dio-DVD.
“Next track” “Next group”/“Previous group”

Use the command “Next track” to select The “Next group”/“Previous group” com-
the next track. mands are used to select a group on the in-
serted audio-DVD.
314
Control systems
Voice Control* command list
왔 Voice Control* command list
Command list General commands 앫 sat radio*
Chapter “Command list” gives you on over- 앫 yes 앫 satellite radio*
view of all commands available for use to 앫 right 앫 telephone
control the Voice Control System.
앫 ok 앫 messages
Which commands are available for use is
dependent on the equipment level in your 앫 cancel 앫 SMS
vehicle. 앫 stop 앫 vehicle
i Some functions can be operated using sev- 앫 quit 앫 correction
eral different commands. In the following list, 앫 wrong
these commands are grouped in one cell. 앫 abort
Choose your preferred command from those 앫 terminate 앫 incorrect
available.
앫 no 앫 help
앫 no thank you 앫 help please
앫 address book 앫 please help
앫 MP3 앫 help functions
앫 CD 앫 help devices
앫 navigation 앫 help voice control
앫 route guidance 앫 linguatronic help
앫 audio DVD 앫 general help
앫 radio 앫 help permanent commands
315
Control systems
앫 help global commands 앫 help CD Telephone* commands
앫 letters of the English alphabet 앫 help disc 앫 telephone (on)

앫 digits 0 - 9 앫 help CD player 앫 phone (on)
앫 continue 앫 help CD changer 앫 telephone off
앫 go forward 앫 help audio DVD 앫 save
앫 next page 앫 help DVDA 앫 save PIN
앫 back 앫 help DVD audio 앫 save PIN code
앫 go back 앫 help DVD audio player 앫 save number
앫 previous page 앫 help DVD audio changer 앫 save PIN number
앫 help radio 앫 help navigation 앫 save telephone number
앫 help tuner 앫 help nav 앫 save name
앫 radio help 앫 help navi 앫 save password
앫 tuner help 앫 help route guidance 앫 store PIN
앫 help telephone 앫 help routing 앫 store PIN code
앫 help phone 앫 help destination guidance 앫 store number
앫 help address book 앫 store PIN number
316
Control systems
앫 store telephone number 앫 confirm telephone number 앫 play phone book

앫 store name 앫 confirm password 앫 get phone book
앫 store password 앫 confirm unlock code 앫 recall phone book
앫 dial 앫 repeat PIN 앫 redial
앫 dial PIN 앫 repeat number 앫 redial last number
앫 dial number 앫 repeat PIN number 앫 redial last phone number
앫 dial PIN number 앫 repeat PIN code 앫 correction
앫 dial PIN code 앫 repeat phone number 앫 wrong PIN
앫 dial phone number 앫 repeat telephone number 앫 wrong number
앫 dial telephone number 앫 repeat password 앫 wrong PIN number
앫 dial password 앫 repeat unlock code 앫 wrong PIN code
앫 dial unlock code 앫 enter PIN 앫 wrong phone number
앫 confirm 앫 enter PIN code 앫 wrong telephone number
앫 confirm PIN 앫 enter PIN number 앫 wrong unlock code
앫 confirm number 앫 enter code 앫 incorrect PIN
앫 confirm PIN number 앫 enter unlock code 앫 incorrect number
앫 confirm PIN code 앫 list phone book 앫 incorrect PIN number
앫 confirm phone number 앫 read out phone book 앫 incorrect PIN code
317
Control systems
앫 incorrect phone number 앫 destination guidance 앫 enter house number

앫 incorrect telephone number 앫 guidance instructions on 앫 map (on)
앫 incorrect unlock code 앫 switch guidance instruction on 앫 show map
앫 delete 앫 switch guidance instructions on 앫 switch on map
앫 delete PIN 앫 switch route guidance instruction on 앫 zoom in
앫 delete number 앫 switch route guidance instructions on 앫 zoom in on map
앫 delete PIN number 앫 switch on guidance instruction 앫 zoom out
앫 delete PIN code 앫 switch on guidance instructions 앫 zoom out on map
앫 delete phone number 앫 switch on route guidance instruction 앫 zoom in completely
앫 delete telephone number 앫 switch on route guidance instructions 앫 zoom out completely
앫 delete unlock code 앫 guidance instructions off 앫 enter country
앫 switch guidance instructions off 앫 enter another country
Navigation commands
앫 switch route guidance instructions off 앫 spell country
앫 navigation 앫 switch off guidance instructions 앫 spell another country
앫 nav 앫 switch off route guidance instructions 앫 change country
앫 navi 앫 mute guidance instructions 앫 change another country
앫 route guidance 앫 mute route guidance instructions 앫 intersection
앫 routing 앫 house number 앫 spell intersection
318
Control systems
앫 spell cross street 앫 enter district 앫 save address

앫 enter intersection 앫 enter center 앫 store destination
앫 enter cross street 앫 points of interest 앫 store address
앫 last destinations 앫 enter points of interest 앫 start route guidance
앫 last states 앫 enter point of interest 앫 start navigation
앫 last provinces 앫 enter POI 앫 start nav
앫 spell town 앫 enter POIs 앫 start routing
앫 spell city 앫 street 앫 begin route guidance
앫 spell name of town 앫 spell street 앫 begin navigation
앫 spell name of city 앫 spell name of street 앫 begin route guidance
앫 enter town 앫 enter street 앫 begin routing
앫 enter city 앫 enter name of street 앫 continue route guidance
앫 enter name of town 앫 enter destination 앫 continue navigation
앫 enter name of city 앫 destination entry 앫 continue nav
앫 district 앫 destination input 앫 continue routing
앫 center 앫 address entry 앫 destination guidance on
앫 spell district 앫 address input 앫 cancel route guidance
앫 spell center 앫 save destination 앫 cancel navigation
319
Control systems
앫 cancel nav 앫 next MB service center 앫 get address book

앫 cancel routing 앫 next Mercedes service 앫 recall address book
앫 cancel destination guidance 앫 next Mercedes service point 앫 delete address book
앫 exit route guidance 앫 next Mercedes service center 앫 spell entry
앫 exit navigation 앫 next Mercedes-Benz service point 앫 spell name
앫 exit nav 앫 next Mercedes-Benz service center 앫 spell heading
앫 exit routing 앫 next service point 앫 search entry
앫 exit destination guidance 앫 next service center 앫 search name
앫 terminate route guidance 앫 next hospital 앫 search heading
앫 terminate navigation 앫 next parking lot 앫 open entry
앫 terminate nav 앫 next restaurant 앫 show entry
앫 terminate routing 앫 list entry
Address book commands
앫 terminate destination guidance 앫 select entry
앫 next gas station 앫 address book (on) 앫 get entry
앫 next Mercedes-Benz service 앫 address list (on) 앫 open entry
앫 next workshop 앫 addresses (on) 앫 open page
앫 next MB service 앫 list address book 앫 open item
앫 next MB service point 앫 read out address book 앫 open name
320
Control systems
앫 open <voice name> 앫 call <voice name> work 앫 work car (phone)
앫 delete name 앫 call <voice name> office 앫 office car (phone)
앫 delete <voice name> 앫 call <voice name> business 앫 business car (phone)
앫 list destination memory 앫 call <voice name> company 앫 company car (phone)
앫 read out destination memory 앫 <voice name> home 앫 car (phone) work
앫 play destination memory 앫 call <voice name> home 앫 car (phone) office
앫 get destination memory 앫 work 앫 car (phone) business
앫 recall destination memory 앫 office 앫 car (phone) company
앫 <voice name> 앫 business 앫 work land line
앫 <voice name> car 앫 company 앫 office phone
앫 <voice name> car phone 앫 car 앫 land line phone business
앫 <voice name> land line 앫 car phone 앫 land line telephone company
앫 <voice name> phone 앫 land line 앫 work cell phone
앫 <voice name> telephone 앫 land line phone 앫 office mobile phone
앫 <voice name> cell phone 앫 land line telephone 앫 business cellular phone
앫 <voice name> mobile phone 앫 cell phone 앫 cell phone company
앫 <voice name> cellular phone 앫 mobile phone 앫 home
앫 call <voice name> 앫 cellular phone 앫 home car
321
Control systems
앫 home car phone 앫 call <voice name> home car 앫 accept PIN code
앫 car home 앫 call <voice name> land line phone 앫 accept lock code
앫 car phone home 앫 call <voice name> cell phone home 앫 accept PIN number
앫 home land line 앫 navigate to <voice name> 앫 accept number
앫 home land line phone 앫 drive to <voice name> 앫 accept telephone number
앫 land line home 앫 navigate to <voice name> work 앫 accept name
앫 land line phone home 앫 navigate to <voice name> home 앫 accept password
앫 home cell phone 앫 dial name 앫 OK
앫 home mobile 앫 dial voice name 앫 finished
앫 cell home 앫 save name 앫 <1> - <8>
앫 cell phone home 앫 save voice name 앫 use <1> - <8>
앫 mobile home 앫 save number 앫 number <1> - <8>
앫 mobile phone home 앫 save telephone number 앫 line <1> - <8>
앫 cellular home 앫 store voice name
Audio commands
앫 cellular phone home 앫 store number
앫 call <voice name> work car 앫 store telephone number 앫 audio
앫 call <voice name> work land line 앫 accept 앫 audio off
앫 call <voice name> work cell phone 앫 accept PIN
322
Control systems
Radio 앫 select channel 앫 frequency ninety-five point five

앫 radio (on) 앫 list station list 앫 frequency ninety-five five megahertz
앫 AM 앫 list saved stations 앫 frequency ninety-five point five mega-
앫 read out station list hertz
앫 MW
앫 FM 앫 play station list
Example: 540 AM
앫 weatherband 앫 get station list
앫 recall station list 앫 five-hundred-forty
앫 next station
앫 delete station list 앫 five-hundred-forty kilohertz
앫 station search
앫 previous station 앫 frequency five-hundred-forty
앫 going up
앫 last station 앫 frequency five-hundred-forty kilohertz
앫 other station
앫 radio seek 앫 coming down
Satellite radio* (USA only)
앫 station <voice entry> 앫 station search coming down
앫 sat radio*
앫 go to <voice entry>
Example: 95.5 FM 앫 satellite radio*
앫 <voice entry>
앫 delete station 앫 ninety-five five
앫 save station 앫 ninety-five five megahertz
앫 store station 앫 ninety-five point five
앫 select station 앫 ninety-five point five megahertz
앫 frequency ninety-five five
323
Control systems
CD 앫 previous track MP3
앫 CD (on) 앫 last track 앫 MP3 (on)

앫 CD player (on) 앫 repeat track 앫 MP3 player (on)
앫 CD changer (on) 앫 replay track 앫 MP3 changer (on)
앫 next CD 앫 track 1-39 앫 next MP3
앫 other CD 앫 load track 1-39 앫 other MP3
앫 next medium 앫 load track number 1-39 앫 next medium
앫 other medium 앫 select track 1-39 앫 other medium
앫 previous CD 앫 select track number 1-39 앫 previous MP3
앫 last CD 앫 CD 1-6 앫 last MP3
앫 preceding CD 앫 CD number 1-6 앫 preceding MP3
앫 replay CD 앫 medium 1-6 앫 replay MP3
앫 replay medium 앫 medium number 1-6 앫 replay medium
앫 repeat medium 앫 repeat medium
앫 last medium 앫 last medium
앫 previous medium 앫 previous medium
앫 next track 앫 next directory
앫 other track 앫 other directory
324
Control systems
앫 next folder 앫 select track number 1-39 앫 next DVD audio

앫 other folder 앫 MP3 1-6 앫 other DVD audio
앫 previous directory 앫 MP3 number 1-6 앫 next audio DVD
앫 previous folder 앫 medium 1-6 앫 other audio DVD
앫 last directory 앫 medium number 1-6 앫 next medium
앫 last folder 앫 drive 앫 other medium
앫 repeat directory 앫 memory card 앫 previous DVDA
앫 repeat folder 앫 last DVDA
DVD
앫 next track 앫 preceding DVDA
앫 other track 앫 audio DVD 앫 replay DVDA
앫 previous track 앫 DVDA player (on) 앫 previous DVD audio
앫 last track 앫 audio DVD player (on) 앫 last DVD audio
앫 repeat track 앫 DVD audio player (on) 앫 preceding DVD audio
앫 replay track 앫 DVDA changer (on) 앫 replay DVD audio
앫 track 1-39 앫 audio DVD changer (on) 앫 previous audio DVD
앫 load track 1-39 앫 DVD audio changer (on) 앫 last audio DVD
앫 load track number 1-39 앫 next DVDA 앫 preceding audio DVD
앫 select track 1-39 앫 other DVDA 앫 replay audio DVD
325
Control systems
앫 replay medium 앫 previous group 앫 track 1-39

앫 repeat medium 앫 previous repeat group 앫 load track 1-39
앫 last medium 앫 previous replay group 앫 load track number 1-39
앫 previous medium 앫 last group 앫 select track 1-39
앫 next directory 앫 last repeat group 앫 select track number 1-39
앫 other directory 앫 last replay group 앫 DVDA 1-6
앫 next folder 앫 group 1-9 앫 DVDA number 1-6
앫 other folder 앫 select group 1-9 앫 DVD audio 1-6
앫 previous directory 앫 group number 1-9 앫 DVD audio number 1-6
앫 previous folder 앫 select group number 1-9 앫 audio DVD 1-6
앫 last directory 앫 next track 앫 audio DVD number 1-6
앫 last folder 앫 other track 앫 medium 1-6
앫 repeat directory 앫 previous track 앫 medium number 1-6
앫 repeat folder 앫 last track
앫 next group 앫 repeat track
앫 other group 앫 replay track
326
Control systems
Voice Control* troubleshooting
왔 Voice Control* troubleshooting
Help function In a submenu, help can also be accessed at Entering digits and spelling
any time by saying the command “Help”.
To support the user, the Voice Control Sys- The Voice Control System will then read
Entering digits
tem contains an extensive help function. out an option list of all available functions
The help function gives you: and commands available in the particular 앫 Digits from “Zero” to “Nine” may be
submenu. used.
앫 General hints on how to best use the
Voice Control System You can also use the help function to ac- 앫 Speaking phone numbers in digit
cess help for a specific system. To access blocks of 3 to 5 digits has proven a
앫 A listing of all available commands help for the phone operation, you would very reliable method for the input of
speak the command “Help Telephone”. phone numbers.
Help commands
If you wish to execute the last command
Spelling
read out:
“Help voice control” 앫 The letters of the English alphabet and
왘 Press !.
Using the command “Help voice control” the digits 0 - 9 may be used.
will give you information on how to best Help window 앫 Speak the letters in blocks of 5 - 7 let-
use the Voice Control System. ters at a time.
You can use the help window to view a se-
앫 Speak each individual letter clearly.
“Help” lection of valid commands on the
In a main menu, help can be accessed at COMAND display.
any time by saying the command “Help”. The help functions can be switched on or
The Voice Control System will then read off via COMAND in the “System settings”
out the available functions and commands menu (컄 page 237).
of all systems.
327
Control systems
What to do if ...
Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution

Voice Control System does not recognize a The voice entries for the station names 왘 When you create your address book en-
station list entry. sound too similar. tries, select names with the greatest
possible acoustic differences.
왘 Speak the command “List station list”.
The system reads out the station list en-
try by entry.
왘 Press ! when the desired station
name is being read out.
The station is selected (컄 page 311).
Should interference occur during the pro- Both voice entries differ. 왘 Pronounce the voice entries both times
cess of storing a name, the Voice Control in the same manner.
System prompts you to repeat your voice
entry a third and fourth time. If the interfer-
ence continues, the dialog is stopped.
328
Control systems

Voice Control System does not recognize You have not operated the system from the 왘 Operate the Voice Control System only
commands. driver’s seat. by the driver as the microphone is
geared to the driver side.
You have spoken unclearly, too loudly or 왘 Speak the commands in a continuous
too quietly. manner using a normal tone.
A blower is set to the highest setting, vents 왘 Avoid loud disturbances.
are pointed at microphones or wind noise is
being created through open windows.
Voice Control System does not recognize a The voice entries in the address book sound 왘 When you create your address book en-
address book entry. too similar. tries, select names with the greatest
possible acoustic differences: If for ex-
ample you have the names Smith and
Schmidt, choose for example “Smith
work” or “Schmidt John”.
왘 Speak the command “List phone book”.
The system reads out the address book
entry by entry.
왘 Press ! when the desired entry is
being read out.
The entry is selected and the corre-
sponding number is dialed
(컄 page 295).
329
Control systems
Voice Control* individualization
i The individualization can only be performed i You may wish to complete only a portion of
when the vehicle is stationary. the individualization process.
If you drive off, the individualization will be can- Completing the digits portion alone may result in
celed. an improved recognition rate.
After starting the session, the system will guide Individualization can be exited at any time. The
you through the individualization by means of data trained, however, will only be retained if a
acoustic instructions. given individualization portion is completed and
the data is stored when prompted to do so by the
The individualization is used to adapt the system.
Voice Control System to your own voice
and to therefore improve speech recogni-
tion. This does not affect the speech rec-
ognition of other users.
Individualization consists of two stages:
앫 Digits
앫 Commands
You can activate individualization in the
COMAND system settings (컄 page 237).
A dialog and screen displays will guide you
through the individualization process.
The system can be reset to the factory set-
tings at any time.
330
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking Automatic transmission
Starter switch positions Instrument cluster
Seats Driving systems
Steering wheel Air vents
Mirrors Automatic climate control
Memory function Trunk
Fastening the seat belts Power tilt/sliding sunroof
Lighting Panorama roof with power
Windshield wipers tilt/sliding panel*
Power windows Loading and storing
Driving and parking Useful features
331
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
SmartKey
Warning! G
Your vehicle comes supplied with two
SmartKeys, each with remote control and When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
a removable mechanical key. SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
The SmartKey provides an extended oper-
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
ating range. To prevent theft, however, it is
access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s un-
advisable to only unlock the vehicle when
supervised access to a vehicle could result
you are in close proximity to it.
in an accident and/or serious personal inju-
The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks, SmartKey with remote control ry.
when set to factory settings (컄 page 333):
1 ‹ Lock button
앫 the doors 2 Š Opening button for trunk
(컄 page 479) Warning! G
앫 the trunk
3 Mechanical key locking tab
앫 the fuel filler flap 4 Œ Unlock button To prevent possible personal injury, always
5 Battery check lamp keep hands and fingers away from the door
6 Â Panic button (컄 page 65) or trunk lid opening when closing a door or
the trunk. Be especially careful when small
! To prevent possible malfunction, avoid ex- children are around.
posing the SmartKey to high levels of electro-
magnetic radiation. Before closing doors, make sure there is no
possibility of someone getting caught in a
door during closing.
332
Controls in detail
i USA only: ! If you cannot lock or unlock the vehicle with To determine whether or not your vehicle is
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC the SmartKey, then either the batteries in the equipped with this feature, contact an autho-
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two SmartKey are discharged, the SmartKey is mal- rized Mercedes-Benz Center. If equipped and
conditions: functioning or the vehicle batteries are drained. you wish to activate or deactivate the feature, or
adjust its signal volume, also contact an autho-
(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer- 앫 Check the batteries in the SmartKey and re- rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
ence, and place them if necessary (컄 page 676).
왘 Global unlocking: Press button Œ.
(2) this device must accept any interference re- 앫 Use the mechanical key to unlock the driv-
ceived, including interference that may er’s door (컄 page 671) and the trunk 앫 All turn signal lamps flash once.
cause undesired operation. (컄 page 672).
앫 An acoustic signal sounds once
Any unauthorized modification to this device 앫 Use the mechanical key to lock the driver’s
(if equipped and feature activated).
could void the user’s authority to operate the door (컄 page 672) and the trunk
equipment. (컄 page 484). 앫 The locking knobs in the doors
앫 Have the vehicle batteries and their connec- move up.
i Canada only: tions checked (컄 page 692).
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry 앫 The anti-theft alarm system is dis-
Canada. Operation is subject to the following If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, contact Road- armed.
two conditions: side Assistance or an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. The vehicle will lock again automatically
and rearm the anti-theft alarm system
(2) this device must accept any interference re- within approximately 40 seconds of un-
Factory setting
locking if:
cause undesired operation of the device. i Your vehicle may be equipped with an
Any unauthorized modification to this device acoustic lock and unlock confirmation signal fea- 앫 neither a door nor the trunk is opened
could void the user’s authority to operate the ture. If your vehicle is equipped with this feature 앫 the SmartKey is not inserted in the
equipment. and the feature is activated, an acoustic signal
will sound when the vehicle is locked or unlocked
starter switch
i You can also open and close the door win- using the SmartKey. 앫 the central locking/unlocking switch is
dows and tilt/sliding sunroof, or the tilt/ sliding not activated
panel* using the SmartKey (컄 page 385).
333
Controls in detail
왘 Global locking: Press button ‹. The SmartKey will then function as fol- 왘 Global locking: Press button ‹.
With the trunk and both doors closed: lows:
With the trunk and both doors closed:
왘 Unlocking driver’s door and fuel fill-
앫 All turn signal lamps flash three 앫 All turn signal lamps flash three
er flap: Press button Œ once.
times. times.
An acoustic signal sounds three 앫 All turn signal lamps flash once.
앫 앫 An acoustic signal sounds three
times (if equipped and feature acti- 앫 An acoustic signal sounds once times (if equipped and feature acti-
vated). (if equipped and feature activated). vated).
The locking knobs in the doors For more information, see “Factory
앫 앫 The locking knobs in the doors
move down. setting” (컄 page 333).
move down.
앫 The locking knob in the driver’s
앫 The anti-theft alarm system is 앫 The anti-theft alarm system is
door moves up.
armed. armed.
앫 The anti-theft alarm system is dis-
왘 Restoring to factory setting: Press
Selective setting armed.
and hold buttons Œ and ‹ si-
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish 왘 Global unlocking: Press button Œ multaneously for about 5 seconds until
to reprogram the SmartKey so that press- twice. battery check lamp 5 (컄 page 332)
ing button Œ only unlocks the driver’s flashes twice.
앫 All turn signal lamps flash once.
door and the fuel filler flap.
왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
(if equipped and feature activated).
simultaneously for about 5 seconds un-
til battery check lamp 5 (컄 page 332) 앫 The locking knobs in the doors
flashes twice. move up.
armed.
334
Controls in detail
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO centrally i When any outside door handle other than
locks and unlocks, when set to factory set- the driver’s outside door handle is grasped, the
Vehicles equipped with KEYLESS-GO come tings (컄 page 338): vehicle is centrally unlocked.
with two SmartKeys with KEYLESS-GO,
each with remote control and a removable
앫 the doors ! To prevent possible malfunction, avoid ex-
posing the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO to high
mechanical key. 앫 the trunk levels of electromagnetic radiation.
The locking tabs for the mechanical key 앫 the fuel filler flap
portion of the two SmartKeys with Warning! G
KEYLESS-GO are of different color to help
distinguish each SmartKey with When leaving the vehicle, always take the
KEYLESS-GO unit. SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and
The KEYLESS-GO function is integrated lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
into the SmartKey. On these vehicles, the tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
validity of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised ac-
is checked every time you grasp an outside cess to a vehicle could result in an accident
door handle. and/or serious personal injury.
With the KEYLESS-GO function, you can Children could start the vehicle with a valid
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
lock and unlock the vehicle without using SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO left in the vehi-
1 ‹ Lock button cle or with the KEYLESS-GO button on the
the remote control buttons on the
2 Š Opening button for trunk starter switch, or could release the electron-
SmartKey and start the engine without in-
(컄 page 479) ic parking brake, thereby putting them-
serting the SmartKey in the starter switch.
3 Locking tab for mechanical key selves and others in danger. Switch off the
4 Œ Unlock button engine and take the SmartKey with
5 Battery check lamp KEYLESS-GO with you even if you are only
6 Â Panic button (컄 page 65) leaving the vehicle for a short while.
335
Controls in detail
i Canada only: 앫 Use the mechanical key to unlock the driv-

Warning! G This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry er’s door (컄 page 671) and trunk
Canada. Operation is subject to the following (컄 page 672).
To prevent possible personal injury, always two conditions: 앫 Use the mechanical key to lock the driver’s
keep hands and fingers away from the door (1) This device may not cause interference, and door (컄 page 672) and the trunk
or trunk lid opening when closing a door or (컄 page 484).
the trunk. Be especially careful when small ceived, including interference that may 앫 Have the vehicle batteries and their connec-
children are around. cause undesired operation of the device. tions checked (컄 page 692).
Before closing doors, make sure there is no Any unauthorized modification to this device If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is malfunc-
possibility of someone getting caught in a could void the user’s authority to operate the tioning, contact Roadside Assistance or an au-
equipment. thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
door during closing.
i You can also open and close the door win- Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO
i USA only: dows and tilt/sliding sunroof, or the tilt/ sliding
panel* using the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO 앫 You can also use the SmartKey with
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two (컄 page 385). KEYLESS-GO like a normal SmartKey
conditions: (컄 page 332).
! If you cannot lock or unlock the vehicle with
(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer- the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO, then either the The starter switch is located under the
ence, and batteries in the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO are KEYLESS-GO button. Pull the
(2) this device must accept any interference re- discharged, the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is KEYLESS-GO button out in order to ac-
ceived, including interference that may malfunctioning or the vehicle batteries are cess the starter switch.
cause undesired operation. drained.
앫 You can combine KEYLESS-GO func-
Any unauthorized modification to this device 앫 Check the batteries in the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO and replace them if necessary tions with normal SmartKey functions
equipment. (컄 page 676). (e.g. unlocking with KEYLESS-GO and
locking with button ‹).
336
Controls in detail
앫 Always carry the SmartKey with 앫 The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO handle the message “Key not recog-
KEYLESS-GO with you. must be located in the vehicle. nized” appears in the multifunction
앫 Never store the SmartKey with 앫 The KEYLESS-GO start/stop button display
KEYLESS-GO together with: must be inserted in the starter 앫 with the engine running, the mes-
switch (컄 page 346). sage “Key not recognized” appears
앫 Electronic items such as a mobile
in the multifunction display while
phone or another SmartKey with 앫 The brake pedal must be firmly de-
driving off
KEYLESS-GO pressed. Do not depress the accel-
앫 Metallic objects such as coins or erator. Find the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO or
change its present location immediate-
metal foil 앫 If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is
ly (e.g. place it on the front passenger
Doing so could impair the function of positioned farther away from the vehi-
seat or insert it in shirt pocket).
the KEYLESS-GO system. cle, the system may no longer recog-
nize the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO. 앫 If you have started the engine with the
앫 To lock or unlock the vehicle, the The vehicle then cannot be locked or KEYLESS-GO start/stop button, you
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be the engine started via the KEYLESS-GO can turn it off again with:
located outside the vehicle within ap- system. 앫 the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
proximately 3 ft (1 m) of a door or the
앫 If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is re-
trunk lid. 앫 the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO in-
moved from the vehicle (e.g. if passen-
serted in the starter switch, when
앫 If the vehicle has been parked for more ger exits the vehicle with the SmartKey
the automatic transmission is in
than 72 hours, you must pull an outside with KEYLESS-GO)
park position P
door handle in order to activate the
KEYLESS-GO function. 앫 when pressing the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button or trying to lock
앫 In order to start the engine with the the vehicle with the outside door
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO:
337
Controls in detail
앫 Remember that the engine can be Factory setting 왘 Global unlocking: Grasp an outside
started by anyone with a SmartKey door handle 1.
with KEYLESS-GO that is left inside the i Your vehicle may be equipped with an
acoustic lock and unlock confirmation signal fea- 앫 All turn signal lamps flash once.
vehicle. ture. If your vehicle is equipped with this feature
Possibility 1: (One SmartKey with and the feature is activated, an acoustic signal 앫 An acoustic signal sounds once
KEYLESS-GO in the vehicle, one will sound when the vehicle is locked or unlocked (if equipped and feature activated).
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO outside using the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO. 앫 The locking knobs in the doors
the vehicle): To determine whether or not your vehicle is move up.
If you leave the SmartKey with equipped with this feature, contact an autho-
KEYLESS-GO behind when exiting and rized Mercedes-Benz Center. If equipped and 앫 The anti-theft alarm system is dis-
locking the vehicle, no message you wish to activate or deactivate the feature, or armed.
appears in the multifunction display. adjust its signal volume, also contact an autho-
The vehicle will lock again automatically
rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Possibility 2: (One SmartKey with and rearm the anti-theft alarm system
KEYLESS-GO in the vehicle, no within approximately 40 seconds of un-
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO outside locking if:
the vehicle):
앫 neither a door nor the trunk is opened
When exiting and trying to lock the ve-
hicle, the message “Key still in vehicle” 앫 the central locking/unlocking switch is
appears in the multifunction display. not activated
The vehicle will not be locked.
i The vehicle could inadvertently be unlocked
if the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is within 3 ft
(1 m) of the vehicle and:
앫 an outside door handle is splashed with wa-
1 Outside door handle ter, or
앫 you attempt to clean an outside door handle.
338
Controls in detail
왘 Global locking: Close all doors and Selective setting 왘 Unlocking driver’s door and fuel fill-
touch outside of door handle 1. Do er flap: Grasp the driver’s outside door
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish
not keep your hand in the door handle handle.
to reprogram the SmartKey with
recess.
KEYLESS-GO so when you, grasp the driv- 앫 All turn signal lamps flash once.
With the trunk and both doors closed: er’s outside door handle only the driver’s
door and the fuel filler flap unlocks.
앫 All turn signal lamps flash three (if equipped and feature activated).
times. 왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹ For more information, see “Factory
앫 An acoustic signal sounds three simultaneously for about 5 seconds un- setting” (컄 page 338).
times (if equipped and feature acti- til battery check lamp 5 (컄 page 335)
앫 The locking knob in the driver’s
vated). flashes twice.
door moves up.
The locking knobs in the doors The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO will
앫 앫 The anti-theft alarm system is dis-
move down. then function as follows:
armed.
앫 The anti-theft alarm system is 왘 Global unlocking: Grasp any outside
armed. door handle other than the driver’s out-
side door handle.
i Vehicles with trunk opening/closing
system*: 앫 All turn signal lamps flash once.
You can also lock the vehicle using the
KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch 앫 An acoustic signal sounds once
(컄 page 482). (if equipped and feature activated).
앫 The locking knobs in the doors
move up.
armed. 컄컄
339
Controls in detail
컄컄 왘 Global locking: Close all doors and Checking batteries in the SmartKey or Loss of the SmartKey or SmartKey with
touch outside of door handle 1 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* KEYLESS-GO*
(컄 page 338). Do not keep your hand in
the door handle recess. 왘 Press button ‹ or Œ. If you lose your SmartKey, SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO or mechanical key, you
With the trunk and both doors closed: The battery check lamp (컄 page 332)
should do the following:
or (컄 page 335) comes on briefly to in-
앫 All turn signal lamps flash three
dicate that the SmartKey or SmartKey 왘 Have the SmartKey or SmartKey with
times.
with KEYLESS-GO batteries are in or- KEYLESS-GO deactivated by an autho-
앫 An acoustic signal sounds three der. rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
times (if equipped and feature acti-
vated). ! If the battery check lamp does not come on 왘 Report the loss of the SmartKey,
briefly during check, the SmartKey or SmartKey SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO or the me-
앫 The locking knobs in the doors with KEYLESS-GO batteries are discharged. chanical key immediately to your car
move down. Replace the batteries (컄 page 676). insurance company.
앫 The anti-theft alarm system is You can obtain the required batteries at any au- 왘 Have the mechanical lock replaced if
armed. thorized Mercedes-Benz Center. necessary.
i Vehicles with trunk opening/closing i If the batteries are checked within signal Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
system*: range of the vehicle, pressing button ‹ or be glad to supply you with a replacement.
You can also lock the vehicle using the Œ will lock or unlock the vehicle accordingly.
KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch
(컄 page 482).
왘 Restoring to factory setting: Press
and hold buttons Œ and ‹ si-
multaneously for about 5 seconds until
battery check lamp 5 (컄 page 335)
flashes twice.
340
Controls in detail
Opening doors from the inside i If the vehicle has previously been locked ! Failure to switch off the headlamps when
with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*, opening a leaving the vehicle may result in a discharged
You can open a locked door from the indoor from the inside will trigger the anti-theft battery.
side. Open door only when conditions are alarm system.
safe to do so. To cancel the alarm, do one of the following: Front doors
앫 Insert the SmartKey or SmartKey with 왘 Pull on door handle 2 on the respec-
KEYLESS-GO* in the starter switch. tive front door to open door.
앫 Press button Œ or ‹ on the SmartKey
or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*.
If door was locked, locking knob 1 will
move up.
In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
앫 Grasp an outside door handle. Rear doors
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* must be
왘 Pull up locking knob 1 on the respec-
within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle.
tive rear door to unlock door.
앫 Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button
(컄 page 346). 왘 Pull on door handle 2 on the respec-
1 Locking knob
tive rear door to open door.
2 Inside door handle The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* must be
inside the vehicle.
i If you hear a warning signal you have forgot-

ten to switch off the headlamps before opening
the driver’s door.
In addition the message “Please switch off
lights” appears in the multifunction display.
Switch off the headlamps.
341
Controls in detail
Power closing assist for doors and 왘 Power closing assist for doors: Press For more information on closing the trunk
trunk lid the doors gently past the initial engage lid, see “Closing trunk” (컄 page 480).
position into the lock.
It is not necessary to slam the door or Automatic central locking
The doors close automatically.
trunk lid closed. An electrical power-assist-
ed mechanism draws doors and trunk lid The doors and the trunk automatically lock
closed quietly and automatically once door Warning! G when the ignition is switched on and the
and trunk lid has been latched. When the wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of ap-
electrical power-assisted mechanism has Only drive with the doors closed. Otherwise, proximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more. The
stopped, doors and/or trunk can be one or more of the doors could open while locking knobs in the doors move down.
re-opened. the vehicle is in motion, putting you and/or
You can open a locked door from the in-
others at risk.
side. Open door only when conditions are
Warning! G safe to do so.
왘 Power closing assist for trunk lid:
To prevent possible personal injury, always Press the trunk lid gently into its lock. i The doors are designed to unlock automati-
cally after an accident if the force of the impact
keep hands and fingers away from the door The trunk closes automatically. exceeds a preset threshold.
or trunk lid opening when closing a door or
The vehicle locks automatically when the ignition
the trunk. Be especially careful when small
children are around. Warning! G is switched on and the wheels are turning at ve-
hicle speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h)
In case of danger, pull the inside or outside or more. You could therefore lock yourself out
Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
door handle, or pull the trunk lid handle. when the vehicle
other dangers such as blocked visibility, ex-
To prevent personal injury, never actuate haust fumes may enter the vehicle interior. 앫 is pushed or towed
the closing assist mechanism by tampering These fumes may be damaging to your 앫 is on a test stand
with the door or trunk lid latch. health. You can deactivate the automatic locking
using the COMAND system (컄 page 245).
342
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking from the inside i You can open a locked door from inside at
any time. Open door only when conditions are
safe to do so.
Warning! G If the vehicle was previously centrally locked
with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO*, it will
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the not unlock using the central unlocking switch.
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* If the vehicle was previously locked with the cen-
from the starter switch, take it with you, and tral locking switch:
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat- 앫 and the SmartKey or SmartKey with
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an KEYLESS-GO* is set to factory settings, the
unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised ac- 1 Central unlocking switch complete vehicle is unlocked when a door is
cess to a vehicle could result in an accident 2 Central locking switch opened from the inside
and/or serious personal injury. 앫 and the SmartKey or SmartKey with
왘 Locking: Press switch ‹. KEYLESS-GO* is set to selective settings,
If the front passenger door is closed, only the door opened from the inside is un-
You can lock or unlock the doors and the
the vehicle locks. locked
trunk from the inside using the central
locking or unlocking switch. This can be 왘 Unlocking: Press switch Œ.
useful, for example, if you want to lock the
vehicle before starting to drive. The vehicle unlocks.
The fuel filler flap will not be locked or un-

locked with the central locking or unlock-
ing switch, respectively.
343
Controls in detail
Starter switch positions
0 For removing SmartKey i When the SmartKey is removed from the

Warning! G 1 Power supply for some electrical con- starter switch and the automatic transmission is
sumers, such as seat adjustment in a position other than P, the automatic trans-
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the 2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical mission automatically shifts to P.
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* consumers) and driving position.
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
! If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the
All lamps (except high beam headlamp starter switch, the battery may not be sufficient-
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat- indicator lamp and turn signal indicator ly charged.
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an lamps unless activated) in the instru- 앫 Check the battery and charge it if necessary
unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised ac- ment cluster come on. If a lamp in the (컄 page 692).
cess to a vehicle could result in an accident instrument cluster fails to come on 앫 Get a jump start (컄 page 697).
and/or serious personal injury. when the ignition is switched on, have
To prevent accelerated battery discharge or a
it checked and replaced if necessary.
completely discharged battery, always remove
SmartKey If a lamp in the instrument cluster re- the SmartKey from the starter switch when the
mains on after starting the engine or engine is not in operation.
comes on while driving, refer to “Lamps
in instrument cluster” (컄 page 598). For information on starting the engine us-
3 Starting position ing the SmartKey, see “Starting with the
SmartKey” (컄 page 390).
i When you switch on the ignition, the indica-
tor and warning lamps (except high beam head-
lamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator
lamps unless activated) in the instrument cluster
come on. The indicator and warning lamps (ex-
cept high beam headlamp indicator lamp and
turn signal indicator lamps if activated) should go
Starter switch out when the engine is running. This indicates
that the respective systems are operational.
344
Controls in detail
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* If you wish or should there be a need to in-

sert the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO in the
Vehicles equipped with the KEYLESS-GO starter switch, the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
feature are supplied with a SmartKey with button can be easily removed by pulling it
integrated KEYLESS-GO function and a re- out of the starter switch.
movable KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
i The function of the SmartKey overrules the
With the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button KEYLESS-GO function.
inserted and the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO present in the vehicle, press- i The KEYLESS-GO start/stop button does
not need to be removed from the starter switch
ing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
when you leave the vehicle. However, always 1 KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
앫 without the brake pedal depressed take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you
when you leave the vehicle. As long as the
2 Starter switch
corresponds to the various starter
switch positions (컄 page 346) SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is in the vehicle, the 왘 Insert KEYLESS-GO start/stop
vehicle’s electrical systems can be switched on button 1 into starter switch 2 (if not
앫 with the brake pedal firmly depressed or the engine can be started using the
inserted already).
will start the engine (컄 page 390) KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
i When you switch from SmartKey mode back
to KEYLESS-GO mode, the system requires
2 seconds of detection time before you can use
the KEYLESS-GO button as usual. 컄컄
345
Controls in detail
컄컄 TheSmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be Position 1 If a lamp in the instrument cluster re-
located in the vehicle. mains on after starting the engine or
왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop but-
comes on while driving, refer to “Lamps
왘 Make sure the automatic transmission ton once.
in instrument cluster” (컄 page 598).
is set to P.
This supplies power for some electrical
왘 Do not depress the brake pedal. consumers, such as seat adjustment. i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button once, the power supply is
i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO again switched off.
start/stop button
i When you switch on the ignition, the indica-
앫 once again, the ignition (position 2) is tor and warning lamps (except high beam head-
switched on lamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator
앫 twice, the power supply is again switched off lamps unless activated) in the instrument cluster
come on. The indicator and warning lamps (ex-
Ignition (or position 2) cept high beam headlamp indicator lamp and
turn signal indicator lamps if activated) should go
왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop but- out when the engine is running. This indicates
ton twice. that the respective systems are operational.
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
This supplies power for all electrical For information on starting the engine us-
1 USA only consumers. ing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button,
2 Canada only see “Starting with KEYLESS-GO*”
All lamps (except high beam headlamp
(컄 page 390).
Position 0 indicator lamp and turn signal indicator
lamps unless activated) in the instru-
Before you press the KEYLESS-GO ment cluster come on. If a lamp in the
start/stop button, the vehicle’s on-board instrument cluster fails to come on
electronics have status 0 (as with when the ignition is switched on, have
SmartKey removed). it checked and replaced if necessary.
346
Controls in detail
Seats
왔 Seats

All seat, head restraint adjustments, as well Your seat must be adjusted so that you can When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
as fastening of seat belts, must be done be- correctly fasten your seat belt SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
fore the vehicle is put into motion. (컄 page 368). from the starter switch, take it with you, and
Observe the following points: lock the vehicle.
Seat adjustment 앫 Adjust the backrest until your arms are Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with
slightly angled when holding the steer- KEYLESS-GO* removed from the starter
ing wheel. switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
Warning! G 앫 Adjust the seat to a comfortable seating
removed from the vehicle, the power seats
position that still allows you to reach the can be operated when the respective door is
Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving. open. Therefore, do not leave children unat-
accelerator/brake pedal safely. The po-
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause sition should be as far back as possible tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. with the driver still able to operate the unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised ac-
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat controls properly. cess to a vehicle could result in an accident
back in an excessively reclined position as 앫 Adjust the head restraint so that it is as and/or serious personal injury.
this can be dangerous. You could slide un- close to the head as possible and the
der the seat belt in a collision. If you slide center of the head restraint supports
under it, the seat belt would apply force at the back of the head at eye level.
the abdomen or neck. That could cause se- 앫 Never place hands under the seat or
rious or fatal injuries. The seat backrest and near any moving parts while a seat is be-
seat belts provide the best restraint when ing adjusted.
the wearer is in a nearly upright position and Failure to do so could result in injury to per-
seat belts are properly positioned on the sons.
body.
347
Controls in detail
Seats
Front power seat adjustment i If PRE-SAFE® has been activated, the front
Warning! G passenger’s seat and/or electrically adjustable
rear seats* will be moved to a more favorable
According to accident statistics, children seat position.
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seat- i The memory function (컄 page 365) lets you
store the settings for the seat positions together
ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend with the settings for the steering wheel and the
that children be placed in the rear seats exterior rear view mirrors.
whenever possible. Regardless of seating
position, children 12 years old and under ! When moving the seats, make sure there are
must be seated and properly secured in an no items in the footwell or behind the seats; oth-
erwise, you could damage the seats.
appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler Example driver’s door
restraint, or booster seat recommended for 왘 Seat height: Press the switch up or
the size and weight of the child. For addi-
1 Head restraint height (컄 page 353) down in the direction of arrow 2.
tional information, see “Children in the vehi-
2 Seat height
3 Seat cushion tilt 왘 Seat cushion tilt: Press the switch up
cle” (컄 page 57).
4 Seat cushion depth or down in the direction of
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is 5 Seat fore and aft arrow 3 until your upper legs are
significantly increased if the child restraints 6 Seat backrest tilt lightly supported.
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 344). 왘 Seat cushion depth: Press the switch
the child is not properly secured in the child
forward or backward in the direction of
restraint. or arrow 4 until your legs are supported
왘 Open the respective door. comfortably.
You can adjust the lumbar support, multi-
contour seats* for driver and front passen-
ger, as well as drive-dynamic multicontour
seats* using COMAND (컄 page 259).
348
Controls in detail
Seats
왘 Seat fore and aft: Press the switch for- Rear power seat* adjustment Adjusting front passenger seat from
ward or backward in the direction of (rear outer seats) driver’s seat/rear*
arrow 5.
i Depending on the set height of the head re- Warning! G
straint, the seat fore and aft position is automat-
ically pre-set. When adjusting the front passenger seat,
make sure the seat, if occupied, is as far
왘 Seat backrest tilt: Press the switch
from the passenger front air bag as possi-
forward or backward in the direction of
ble.
arrow 6.
Otherwise, the passenger could be seriously
or even fatally injured in the event of an ac-
Example rear right door cident or braking maneuver.
1 Seat cushion tilt Make sure no one is caught or injured while

2 Seat backrest tilt the seat is being adjusted.
3 Folding down and placing upright head Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with
restraint (컄 page 355) KEYLESS-GO* removed from the starter
4 Head restraint tilt (컄 page 355) switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
5 Seat fore and aft removed from the vehicle, the power seats
can be operated when the respective door is
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 344).
open. Therefore, do not leave children unat-
or tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
왘 Open the respective door. unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised ac-
cess to a vehicle could result in an accident
왘 Adjust desired seat using seat and/or serious personal injury.
switches 1, 2 and 5.
349
Controls in detail
Seats
! Do not move the front passenger seat com- When the indicator lamp on button 1 is Setting front passenger seat position
pletely forward if objects are stored in the parcel on, you can operate the following features from rear*
net in the front passenger-side footwell. Items in of the front passenger seat:
the net may be damaged. The switch is located on the right rear pas-
앫 seat adjustment senger door.
Adjusting front passenger seat from 앫 seat heating/ventilation*
driver’s seat*
앫 memory function
You can adjust the front passenger seat
using the seat switches on the driver’s
side.
1 To select front or rear passenger seat

2 Seat height
3 Head restraint height (컄 page 353)
4 Backrest tilt
5 Seat fore and aft
1 Adjusting front passenger seat

왘 Press button 1.
350
Controls in detail
Seats
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 344). Seat heating*

or
The buttons for seat heating are located on
왘 Open the right rear passenger door. the respective door. The red indicator
왘 Press button 1 to adjust the front lamps on the button come on to show the
passenger seat. heating level selected.
The indicator lamp in button 1 comes Level

on.
3 Three indicator lamps on
왘 Adjust front passenger seat using seat (highest level)
switches 2, 3, 4 and 5. Example illustration driver’s door
The seat heating automatically
왘 To adjust right rear passenger seat switches to level 2 after approxi- 1 Seat heating button
(컄 page 349), press button 1 again. mately 5 minutes. 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 344).
The indicator lamp in button 1 goes 2 Two indicator lamps on 왘 Switching on: Press button 1 repeat-
out. The seat heating automatically edly until the desired heating level is
i Adjusting the passenger seat position from switches to level 1 after approxi- set.
the rear is not possible if you deactivate the over- mately 10 minutes. One or more red indicator lamps on the
ride switch (컄 page 63).
1 One indicator lamp on button show the selected heating level.
(lowest level) 왘 Switching off: Press button 1 repeat-
The seat heating automatically edly until all indicator lamps go out. 컄컄
switches off after approximately
20 minutes.
off No indicator lamp on
351
Controls in detail
Seats
컄컄 i If one or more of the lamps on the seat heat- i The seat ventilation for the driver’s seat can 왘 Switching off: Press button 1 repeat-
ing button are flashing, there is insufficient volt- be activated using summer opening feature edly until all indicator lamps go out.
age available since too many electrical (컄 page 385).
consumers are turned on. The seat heating i If one or more of the lamps on the seat ven-
switches off automatically. tilation button are flashing, there is insufficient
voltage available since too many electrical con-
The seat heating will switch back on again auto- sumers are turned on. The seat ventilation
matically as soon as sufficient voltage is avail- switches off automatically.
able.
The seat ventilation will switch back on again au-
tomatically as soon as sufficient voltage is avail-
Seat ventilation* able.
The buttons for seat ventilation are located
on the respective door. The blue indicator
lamps on the button come on to show the
ventilation level selected. Example illustration driver’s door
1 Seat ventilation button
Level
3 Three indicator lamps on
(highest level) 왘 Switching on: Press button 1 repeat-
edly until the desired ventilation level is
2 Two indicator lamps on
set.
1 One indicator lamp on
One or more blue indicator lamps on
(lowest level)
the button show the selected ventila-
off No indicator lamp on tion level.
352
Controls in detail
Seats
Head restraints For removal contact an authorized i The head restraint on the front passenger’s
Mercedes-Benz Center. side is automatically lowered all the way down
while the vehicle is in motion if no one is sitting
For information on active head restraints,
Warning! G see “Active head restraints” (컄 page 55).
on the seat. This helps you to acquire a better
all-round view.
For your protection, drive only with properly
Head restraint height Head restraint adjusting
positioned head restraints.
Adjust the head restraint so that it is as
close to the head as possible and the center
of the head restraint supports the back of
the head at eye level. This will reduce the po-
tential for injury to the head and neck in the
event of an accident or similar situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intend-
ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-
dent. 1 Head restraint height Manually adjust the head restraint.
왘 Press the switch up or down in the di- 왘 Push or pull on the upper edge of the
i Adjust the head restraint in such a way that rection of arrow 1. head restraint cushion to the desired
it is as close to the head as possible. position.
i Depending on the seat’s set fore and aft po-
sition, the head restraint height is automatically
Front seat active head restraints
pre-set.
You cannot remove the active head re-
straint on the driver’s and front passen-
ger’s seats.
353
Controls in detail
Seats
Luxury head restraint* adjusting 왘 Adjusting side cushions: Pull or push Folding head restraints back
side cushions 1 into desired position. The rear seat head restraints and the rear
Warning! G 왘 Adjusting forward or backward: Pull seat power head restraints* can be folded
or push head restraint in direction of backward for increased visibility.
When folding back the side cushions, never arrow 2.
reach between the side cushion and the
mounting post. You could otherwise be Rear head restraints
trapped.
Warning! G
For safety reasons, always drive with the
rear head restraints in the upright position
when the rear seats are occupied.
Otherwise, the back of the head will not be
1 Switch in the front center console
supported in the event of a collision. As a re-
sult, rear seat occupants could be injured. 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 344).
왘 Press switch 1 in the front center con-
sole briefly.
1 Head restraint side cushions
Warning! G The rear head restraints will fold back-
2 Adjusting head restraint forward and Keep the area around head restraints clear
ward.
backward of articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the
You can individually adjust side folding operation of the head restraints.
cushions 1 of the luxury head restraints.
354
Controls in detail
Seats
Placing head restraints upright Placing power head restraints* upright Rear power head restraints*
(rear outer seats) (rear outer seats)
i When you fasten your seat belt in the rear,
the respective rear outer seat head restraint
places upright automatically.
왘 Press and hold switch 1 in the front
center console (컄 page 354).
The rear outer seats head restraints
will place upright.
왘 Pull the rear head restraint upright until
it locks into position. 왘 Pull the rear center seat head restraint 1 Placing upright head restraint
upright manually until it locks into posi- 2 Head restraint tilt
! Make sure the head restraints engage when tion. 3 Folding down head restraint
placing them upright manually. Otherwise their
protective function cannot be ensured. 4 Head restraint tilt
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 344) or
open the respective door.
왘 Press switch up in the direction of
arrow 1.
The rear outer seats power head re-
straint will place upright. 컄컄
355
Controls in detail
Seats
컄컄 왘 Press switch down in the direction of Adjustment Multicontour seats*, rear

arrow 3.
You can adjust the rear outer multicontour
The rear power head restraint will fold
seats using the buttons on the center con-
down.
sole.
왘 Press the switch forward or backward
in the direction of arrow 2 or 4.
The power head restraint will be tilted.
Luxury head restraints*

(rear outer seats)
1 Head restraint side cushions
2 Head restraint height
Warning! G
You can individually adjust side
When folding back the side cushions, never cushions 1 of the luxury head restraints:
1 To select right rear passenger seat
reach between the side cushion and the 왘 Adjusting side cushions: Pull or push 2 Massage setting, gentle
mounting post. You could otherwise be side cushions 1 into desired position. 3 Massage setting, vigorous
trapped.
왘 Adjusting head restraint angle: Push 4 To adjust position of backrest curva-
or pull on the lower edge of the head re- ture (lordosis)
straint cushion in the direction of 5 Lumbar region support
arrow 2. 6 Side bolster adjustment
7 To select left rear passenger seat
356
Controls in detail
Seats
왘 Selecting a seat: Press rocker Lumbar region support

switch 1 or 7 forward or backward.
왘 Selecting greater curvature: Press
Warning! G
The indicator lamp on the selected but- rocker switch 5 forward. You must make sure no one can become
ton lights up for a short while. trapped or injured by the moving steering
왘 Selecting less curvature: Pull rocker
switch 5 backward. wheel and driver’s seat when the easy-en-
Gentle massage try/exit feature is activated.
왘 Switching on: Press rocker switch 2 Side bolster adjustment To stop seat/steering wheel movement, do
forward. one of the following:
왘 Reducing width: Press rocker
왘 Switching off: Pull rocker switch 2 switch 6 forward. 앫 Press seat adjustment switch
backward. (컄 page 348).
왘 Increasing width: Pull rocker
switch 6 backward. 앫 Move steering wheel adjustment stalk
Vigorous massage (컄 page 359).
왘 Switching on: Press rocker switch 3 Easy-entry/exit feature 앫 Press one of the memory position but-
forward. tons or the memory button M
This feature allows for easier entry into and (컄 page 366).
왘 Switching off: Pull rocker switch 3
exit from the vehicle. When entering and Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
backward.
exiting the vehicle, the driver’s seat is in its hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
maximum rearward position and the steer- Children could open the driver’s door and
Position of backrest curvature
ing wheel is in its uppermost position. unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
왘 Moving upward: Press rocker feature, which could result in an accident
The easy-entry/exit feature can be activat-
switch 4 forward. and/or serious personal injury.
ed or deactivated in the “Vehicle” menu of
왘 Moving downward: Pull rocker the COMAND system (컄 page 246).
switch 4 backward.
357
Controls in detail
Seats
! Do not activate the easy-entry/exit feature your last set position or to memory position, ad- i If the current position for the steering wheel
if the seat backrest is in an excessively reclined just the seat to the desired position or press and is in the uppermost tilt position, the steering
position. Doing so could cause damage to front hold the respective memory position button wheel will no longer be able to move upward
or rear seats. (컄 page 366). when the easy-entry/exit feature is activated.
First move the seat backrest to an upright posi- i The last set driver’s seat and steering wheel If the current seat position falls into a factory-set
tion. positions are stored when position range and the system recognizes the
앫 the ignition is switched off (컄 page 344) current seat position to be rearward enough for
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated, easy entry and exit, the driver’s seat will not
the steering wheel and driver’s seat will re- 앫 the position is stored in memory move to the rear when the easy-entry/ exit fea-
turn to their last set memory position or a (컄 page 365) ture is activated.
factory-set maximum forward position With the easy-entry/exit feature activated The adjustment procedure is briefly interrupted
when you: the steering wheel tilts upwards and the when the engine is started.
앫 close the driver’s door with the ignition driver’s seat moves a few inches to the
switched on rear when you: Warning! G
앫 insert the SmartKey into the starter 앫 remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch or press the KEYLESS-GO* switch, Let the system complete the adjustment
start/stop button (컄 page 346) once procedure before setting the vehicle in mo-
or tion. All driver’s seat and steering wheel ad-
with the driver’s door closed
앫 open the driver’s door with the justments must be completed before setting
i For safety reasons, the driver’s seat will not SmartKey in starter switch position 0 the vehicle in motion. Driving off with the
return to its last set position with the easy-en- or 1 or the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop driver’s seat/steering wheel still adjusting
try/exit feature activated if the system recogniz-
button (컄 page 346) in position 1 could cause the driver to lose control of the
es the last set position as an extreme forward
position. Instead, the driver’s seat will remain at vehicle.
or move to a factory-set maximum forward posi-
tion. To again fully return the driver’s seat to
358
Controls in detail
Steering wheel
왔 Steering wheel
i The memory function (컄 page 365) lets you Steering wheel adjustment
Warning! G store settings for the steering wheel together
with the settings for the seat position and the ex-
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driv- terior rear view mirrors.
ing. Adjusting the steering wheel while driv-
Make sure that
ing could cause the driver to lose control of
the vehicle. 앫 you can reach the steering wheel with
your arms slightly bent at the elbows
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 앫 you can move your legs freely
from the starter switch, take it with you, and 앫 all displays (including malfunction and
lock the vehicle. indicator lamps) on the instrument
Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with cluster are clearly visible 1 Adjusting steering wheel, in or out
KEYLESS-GO* removed from the starter 2 Adjusting steering column, up or down
switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
removed from the vehicle, the steering
wheel adjustment feature can be operated or
when the driver’s door is open. Therefore,
왘 Open the driver’s door.
do not leave children unattended in the ve-
hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. 왘 Adjusting steering wheel in or out:
A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle Move stalk forward or back in the direc-
could result in an accident and/or serious tion of arrow 1 until a comfortable
personal injury. steering wheel position is reached with
your arms slightly bent at the elbow. 컄컄
359
Controls in detail
Steering wheel
컄컄 왘 Adjusting steering wheel up or 왘 Switching on: Turn switch at the tip of i The steering wheel heating switches off au-
down: Move stalk up or down in the di- stalk in the direction of arrow 1. tomatically:
rection of arrow 2. 앫 when you remove the SmartKey from the
The steering wheel is heated. Indicator
lamp 3 comes on. starter switch
Heated steering wheel* 앫 on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*, when you
i The steering wheel heating will not switch switch off the ignition (컄 page 344) and
The steering wheel heating warms up the on, when the temperature of the vehicle interior open the driver’s door
leather area of the steering wheel. is above 86°F (30°C).
앫 when the temperature of the vehicle interior
왘 Switching off: Turn switch at the tip of is above 86°F (30°C)
stalk in the direction of arrow 2. 앫 after approximately 24 minutes
The steering wheel heating is turned
off. Indicator lamp 3 goes out.
i Indicator lamp 3 flashes or goes out
앫 in case of power surge or undervoltage
앫 in case of a steering wheel heating malfunc-
tion
1 Switching on
2 Switching off
3 Indicator lamp
360
Controls in detail
Mirrors
왔 Mirrors
Adjust the interior and exterior rear view i When you press button 1 for the first time,
mirrors before driving so that you have a the exterior mirror on the driver’s side is always
good view of the road and traffic condi- selected.
tions. If you do not make adjustments to the selected
exterior rear view mirror within 15 seconds, the
Interior rear view mirror indicator lamp goes out. You will then have to se-
lect the desired exterior rear view mirror again
왘 Manually adjust the interior rear view before any adjustments can be made. Adjust-
ments can only be made with the indicator lamp
mirror.
for the respective exterior rear view mirror but-
For more information, see “Auto-dimming ton illuminated.
rear view mirrors” (컄 page 363). 1 Selector switch for right or left exterior
mirror i At low ambient temperatures, the exterior
rear view mirrors will be heated automatically.
Exterior rear view mirrors 2 Adjustment button
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 344). i The memory function (컄 page 365) lets you
store the setting for the exterior rear view mir-
Warning! G 왘 Press button 1 repeatedly until de- rors together with the setting for the steering
sired exterior mirror is selected. wheel and the seat positions.
Exercise care when using the passenger The left or right indicator lamp in
side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror button 1 comes on.
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror 왘 Push adjustment button 2 up, down,
are closer than they appear. Check your in- left, or right according to the desired
terior rear view mirror or glance over your setting.
shoulder before changing lanes.
361
Controls in detail
Mirrors
Power folding exterior rear view Folding exterior rear view mirrors in ! If an exterior rear view mirror housing is
mirrors and out manually forcibly pushed forward (hit from the rear), repo-
sition it manually by applying firm pressure until
The exterior rear view mirrors can vibrate if it snaps back into place.
! Before driving the vehicle through an auto- they are not folded out completely.
matic car wash, fold the exterior mirrors in. Oth- If an exterior rear view mirror housing is forcibly
erwise they may get damaged. pushed rearward (hit from the front), press
button 1 to fold mirrors in, then press
Folding exterior rear view mirrors in button 1 again to fold mirrors out. Do not force
and out automatically mirrors by hand as this may damage the adjust-
ment mechanism.
When the corresponding function in the The mirror housing is then properly positioned
COMAND system is activated and you can adjust the mirror in the usual man-
(컄 page 244): ner.
앫 The exterior rear view mirrors automat-
ically fold in as soon as the vehicle is
locked from the outside. 1 Folds the exterior mirrors in and out
앫 The exterior rear view mirrors automat- 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 344).
ically fold out as soon as the vehicle is 왘 Folding in: Press button 1.
unlocked and the driver’s or front pas-
senger door are subsequently opened. 왘 Folding out: Press button 1 again.
i The mirrors do not fold out if they were pre-

viously folded in manually.
i If you are driving at more than approximately

9 mph (15 km/h), you will not be able to fold the
exterior mirrors in.
362
Controls in detail
Mirrors
Auto-dimming rear view mirrors

The reflection brightness of the exterior
rear view mirror on the driver’s side and The auto-dimming function does not react if Exercise care when using the passen-
the interior rear view mirror will respond incoming light is not aimed directly at the ger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
automatically to glare when sensors in the interior rear view mirror. surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
The interior rear view mirror and the exterior for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
앫 the ignition is switched on
rear view mirror on the driver’s side do not are closer than they appear. Check your in-
(컄 page 344)
react, for example, if the rear window sun- side rear view mirror or glance over your
and shade is in raised position. shoulder before changing lanes.
앫 incoming light from headlamps falls on Light hitting the mirror(s) at certain angles
the sensor in the interior rear view (incident light) could blind you. As a result,
mirror you may not be able to observe traffic con-
The interior rear view mirror will not react if ditions and could cause an accident.
앫 reverse gear R is engaged

앫 the interior lighting is turned on
363
Controls in detail
Mirrors
Activating exterior rear view mirror 왘 Shift the automatic transmission in re-
parking position verse gear R.
The passenger-side exterior rear view
Follow these steps to activate the mirror
mirror will be turned downward to the
parking position so that the passen-
stored position.
ger-side exterior rear view mirror will be
turned downward to the stored position. The exterior rear view mirror returns to its
previously stored driving position:
왘 Make sure you have stored a parking
position for the passenger-side exterior 앫 when you switch off the ignition
rear view mirror (컄 page 367). 앫 10 seconds after you have put the au-
1 Selector switch for right or left exterior
왘 Make sure the “Lower mirror when re- mirror tomatic transmission out of reverse
versing” function in the “Exterior Mirror gear R
Convenience Settings” submenu of the 왘 Press switch 1 repeatedly until the
exterior mirror on the front passenger 앫 immediately once your vehicle exceeds
COMAND system is selected a speed of approximately 6 mph
(컄 page 244). side is selected.
(10 km/h)
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 344). i With the automatic transmission in reverse
gear R, the previously selected exterior rear 앫 immediately when you press button 1
view mirror is activated. for driver’s side exterior rear view mir-
ror.
i If you adjust the exterior mirrors while they
are in the parking position, the new mirror posi-
tion is stored as a new parking position.
364
Controls in detail
Memory function
왔 Memory function
Prior to operating the vehicle, the driver With the memory function you can store up Each stored position on the passenger side
should check and adjust the seat height, to 3 different configurations. includes the following settings:
seat position fore and aft, and seat back-
Each stored position on the driver’s side 앫 Seat position and lumbar support
rest angle if necessary, to ensure adequate
includes the following settings:
control, reach, and comfort. The head re- 앫 Multicontour seat*: previously saved
straint should also be adjusted for proper 앫 Driver’s seat, head restraint height and setting
height. See also the section on air bags backrest position
앫 Drive-dynamic multicontour seat*: ac-
(컄 page 42) for proper seat positioning. 앫 Multicontour seat*: previously saved tivation/deactivation
In addition, adjust the steering wheel to setting
Each stored position in the rear passenger
ensure adequate control, reach, operation 앫 Drive-dynamic multicontour seat*: ac- compartment includes the following set-
and comfort. Both the interior and exterior tivation/deactivation tings (Canada only):
rear view mirrors should be adjusted for
adequate rear vision. 앫 Steering wheel position 앫 Seat position
Fasten seat belts. Infants and small chil- 앫 Exterior rear view mirrors position 앫 Multicontour seat*: previously saved
dren should be seated in a properly se- setting
cured restraint system that complies with Warning! G
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian Do not activate the memory function while
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and driving. Activating the memory function
210.2. while driving could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle.
365
Controls in detail
Memory function
Storing positions into memory Recalling positions from memory
왘 Adjust the seat (컄 page 347) to the de- ! Do not operate the power seats using the
sired position. memory button if the seat backrest is in an ex-
cessively reclined position. Doing so could cause
왘 On the driver’s side: Adjust the steering damage to front or rear seats.
wheel (컄 page 359) and the exterior
First move seat backrest to an upright position.
rear view mirrors (컄 page 361) to the
desired position. 왘 Press and hold one of the position
buttons until the seat, steering wheel
왘 Press memory button M.
and exterior rear view mirrors have fully
M Memory button 왘 Release memory button M and press moved to the stored positions.
1 2 3 Memory position buttons one of the memory position buttons
within 3 seconds. i Releasing the button immediately stops
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 344). movement to the stored positions.
All the settings are stored with the se- The multicontour seat* and/or lumbar support
or lected position. will continue to be adjusted.
왘 Open the respective door.
366
Controls in detail
Memory function
Storing exterior rear view mirror park- 왘 Stop the vehicle.

ing position
왘 Make sure the ignition is switched on
(컄 page 344).
For easier parking, you can adjust the pas-
senger-side exterior rear view mirror so 왘 Press switch 3 until the exterior mir-
that you can see the right rear wheel as ror on the front passenger side is se-
soon as you engage reverse gear R. lected.
For information on activating the parking 왘 Adjust the passenger-side exterior rear
position, see “Activating exterior rear view view mirror with button 2 so that you
mirror parking position” (컄 page 364). see the rear wheel and the road curb.
왘 Press memory button M.
왘 Within 3 seconds, press one of the
adjustment buttons 2.
1 Memory button M The parking position is stored if the
2 Adjustment button mirror does not move.
3 Selector switch for right or left exterior
i If the mirror does move, repeat the above
mirror steps. After the setting is stored, you can move
the mirror again.
367
Controls in detail
Fastening the seat belts

Always fasten your seat belt before driving According to accident statistics, children Never let more people ride in the vehicle
off. Always make sure all of your passengers are safer when properly restrained in the than there are seat belts available. Be sure
are properly restrained. rear seating positions than in the front seat- everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly re-
Failure to wear and properly fasten and ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend strained with a separate seat belt. Never use
position your seat belt greatly increases that children be placed in the rear seats a seat belt for more than one person at a
your risk of injuries and their likely severity whenever possible. Regardless of seating time.
in an accident. You and your passengers position, children 12 years old and under
should always wear seat belts. must be seated and properly secured in an
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries

appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler Warning! G
restraint, or booster seat recommended for
can be considerably more severe without the size and weight of the child. For addi- Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
your seat belt properly buckled. Without tional information, see “Children in the vehi- backrest in an excessively reclined position
your seat belt buckled, you are much more cle” (컄 page 57). as this can be dangerous. You could slide
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
significantly increased if the child restraints under it, the seat belt would apply force at
or killed.
are not properly secured in the vehicle and the abdomen or neck. That could cause se-
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or the child is not properly secured in the child rious or even fatal injuries. The seat back-
death is lessened if you are wearing your restraint. rest and seat belt provide the best restraint
seat belt. The air bags can only provide the when the wearer is in a nearly upright posi-
protection they were designed to afford if tion and the seat belt is properly positioned
the occupants are using their seat belts on the body.
(컄 page 42).
368
Controls in detail
왘 Pull the seat belt smoothly from the

Warning! G seat belt outlet 1.
Read and observe the additional warning no- 왘 Place the shoulder portion of the seat
tices printed in the “Safety and Security” belt across the top of your shoulder
section (컄 page 40). and the lap portion across your hips.
왘 Push latch plate 2 into buckle 3 until
it clicks.
왘 If necessary, tighten the lap portion to
a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion
up.
왘 To release the seat belt, press release
button 4 and guide latch plate back to
seat belt outlet.
1 Seat belt outlet

2 Latch plate
3 Buckle
4 Release button
369
Controls in detail
Proper use of seat belts 앫 Check your seat belt during travel to For more information, see “Seat belts”
make sure that it is properly posi- (컄 page 52).
앫 Do not twist the seat belt when fasten- tioned.
ing. Seat belt height adjustment
앫 Make sure the seat belt is always fitted
앫 Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder snugly. Take special care of this when
The vehicle automatically adjusts the seat
portion is located as close as possible wearing loose clothing.
belt height for the driver’s and front pas-
to the middle of the shoulder (it should
senger’s seats as well as for the rear outer
not touch the neck). Never pass the
shoulder portion of the seat belt under
Warning! G seats. Comply with the instructions on how
to properly fasten a seat belt
your arm.
Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges. (컄 page 368).
앫 Position the lap belt as low as possible They could tear.
on your hips (over hip joint) and not Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in
across the abdomen. the door or in the seat adjustment mecha-
앫 Place the seat backrest in a nearly up- nism. This could damage the seat belt.
right position. Never attempt to make modifications to
앫 Never use a seat belt for more than one seat belts. This could impair the effective-
person at a time. ness of the seat belts.
앫 Do not fasten a seat belt around a per- Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
son and another object at the same severely weaken them. In a crash, they may
time. When using a seat belt to secure not be able to provide adequate protection.
infant restraints or toddler restraints or Damaged seat belts or seat belts that were
children in booster seats, always follow highly stressed in an accident must be re-
the child seat manufacturer’s instruc- placed. Contact an authorized
tions. Mercedes-Benz Center.
370
Controls in detail
Lighting
왔 Lighting
i If you drive in countries where vehicles drive Exterior lamp switch 1 ‚ Standing lamps, left (turn left two
on the other side of the road than the country in stops)
which the vehicle is registered, you must have The exterior lamp switch is located on the
the headlamps modified for symmetrical low dashboard to the left of the steering wheel. 2 ˆ Standing lamps, right (turn left
beams. Relevant information can be obtained at one stop)
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
3 M Off
i The active Bi-Xenon headlamps monitor Daytime running lamp mode
your steering angle and driving speed, then auto-
(컄 page 373)
matically shift their beams to either side to bet-
ter follow the curvature of the road ahead, 4 * Automatic headlamp mode
increasing usable illumination over conventional
headlamps. Daytime running lamp mode
(컄 page 373)
5 C Parking lamps (also side marker
lamps, tail lamps, license plate
lamps, instrument panel lamps)
6 B Low beam headlamps or high
beam headlamps when the com-
bination switch is pushed for-
ward. The tail lamps, license
plate lamps, side marker lamps,
parking lamps and instrument
panel lamps also come on.
7 ‡ Front fog lamps
8 † Rear fog lamp
371
Controls in detail
Lighting
i If you hear a warning signal you have forgot- Automatic headlamp mode
ten to switch off the headlamps before opening
The following lamps switch on and off au-
Warning! G
tomatically depending on the brightness of If the exterior lamp switch is set to *,
In addition the message “Please switch off the ambient light:
lights” appears in the multifunction display. 앫 the headlamps may switch off unexpect-
Switch off the headlamps. 앫 Low beam headlamps edly when the system senses bright am-
앫 Tail and parking lamps bient light, for example light from
! Failure to switch off the headlamps when oncoming traffic.
leaving the vehicle may result in a discharged 앫 License plate lamps
앫 the headlamps will not be automatically
battery.
앫 Side marker lamps switched on under foggy conditions.
Manual headlamp mode To minimize risk to you and to others, acti-

vate headlamps by turning exterior lamp
The low beam headlamps and parking switch to B when driving or when traffic
lamps can be switched on and off with the and/or ambient lighting conditions require
exterior lamp switch. you to do so.
Switching on low beam headlamps In low ambient lighting conditions, only

switch from position * to B with the
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to B. vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
The green indicator lamp C in the Switching from * to B will briefly
exterior lamp switch comes on. switch off the headlamps. Doing so while
driving in low ambient lighting conditions
may result in an accident.
372
Controls in detail
Lighting
Daytime running lamp mode i With the exterior lamp switch in position
The automatic headlamp feature is only an
M or *, you cannot switch on the high
aid to the driver. The driver is responsible for 왘 Turn exterior lamp switch to
beam headlamps.
the operation of the vehicle’s lights at all position M or *.
times. The high beam flasher is available at all times.
When the engine is running, the low
For nighttime driving you should turn the exterior
beam headlamps are switched on. lamp switch to position B to permit activa-
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to *.
In low ambient light conditions, the fol- tion of the high beam headlamps.
With the SmartKey in starter switch lowing lamps will switch on additional- When the engine is running, and you shift
position 1 or the KEYLESS-GO* ly: from a driving position to position N or P,
start/stop button pressed once, only
앫 Tail and parking lamps the low beam headlamps will switch off
the parking lamps and the side marker
with a 3-minute delay.
lamps will switch on and off automati- 앫 License plate lamps
cally. When the engine is running, and you
앫 Side marker lamps
When the engine is running, the low 앫 turn the exterior lamp switch to
beam headlamps, the tail and parking i With the daytime running lamp mode activat- position C, the parking lamps and
ed and the engine running, the low beam head-
lamps, the license plate lamps, and the the side marker lamps switch on addi-
lamps cannot be switched off manually.
side marker lamps will switch on and tionally.
off automatically. turn the exterior lamp switch to
Canada only 앫
i USA only: position B, the manual headlamp
The daytime running lamp mode is manda-
With the automatic headlamp mode activated mode has priority over the daytime run-
tory and therefore in a constant mode.
you can switch on the high beam headlamps in ning lamp mode.
low ambient lighting conditions.
The corresponding exterior lamps
switch on (컄 page 371).
373
Controls in detail
Lighting
USA only Locator lighting and night security illu- i Fog lamps cannot be switched on manually
By default, the daytime running lamp mode mination with exterior lamp switch in position *. To
activate the fog lamps, turn exterior lamp switch
is deactivated. Activate the daytime run- The locator lighting and night security illu- to position B first.
ning lamp mode using the control system, mination are described in the COMAND ve-
see “Setting daytime running lamp mode hicle section under “Setting locator Front fog lamps
(USA only)” (컄 page 281). lighting” (컄 page 243) and “Setting night
security illumination” (컄 page 242). 왘 Switch on the low beam
i With the daytime running lamp mode headlamps B (컄 page 372).
activated and the exterior lamp switch in
position M, you cannot switch on the high Fog lamps 왘 Pull out exterior lamp switch to first
beam headlamps. stop.
The high beam flasher is available at all times. Warning! G The front fog lamps are switched on.
For nighttime driving you should turn the exterior
In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions, The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
lamp switch to position B or * to permit
activation of the high beam headlamps. only switch from position * to B with exterior lamp switch comes on
the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location. (컄 page 371).
When the engine is running, and you turn
Switching from * to B will briefly 왘 Push in the exterior lamp switch.
the exterior lamp switch to position C
switch off the headlamps. Doing so while
or B, the manual headlamp mode has The front fog lamps are switched off.
driving in low ambient lighting conditions
priority over the daytime running lamp
may result in an accident. The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
mode.
exterior lamp switch goes out.
The corresponding exterior lamps switch
on (컄 page 371). i Fog lamps will operate with the parking
lamps and/or the low beam headlamps on. Fog
lamps should only be used in conjunction with
low beam headlamps. Consult your State or
Province Motor Vehicle Regulations regarding
permissible lamp operation.
374
Controls in detail
Lighting
Rear fog lamp (driver’s side only) Switching on high beams Headlamp cleaning system
왘 Switch on the low beam
headlamps B (컄 page 372).
왘 Pull out exterior lamp switch to second
stop.
The front fog lamps and the rear fog
lamp switch on.
The yellow indicator lamp † in the
exterior lamp switch comes on
(컄 page 371).
Combination switch 1 Headlamp cleaning button
왘 Push in the exterior lamp switch to first
stop. 1 High beam 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 344).
2 High beam flasher
The rear fog lamp switches off. 왘 Press button 1 up or down.
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to
The green indicator lamp ‡ in the The headlamps are cleaned with a
position B (컄 page 371).
exterior lamp switch goes out. high-pressure water jet.
왘 Push the combination switch in the di-
The front fog lamps remain lit. rection of arrow 1. i The headlamps are automatically cleaned
when, at the same time,
The high beam indicator A in the in- 앫 the engine is running
strument cluster comes on
앫 the headlamps are switched on
(컄 page 28).
앫 the windshield wipers have wiped the wind-
왘 High beam flasher: Pull the combina- shield with washer fluid fifteen times 컄컄
tion switch briefly in the direction of
arrow 2.
375
Controls in detail
Lighting
컄컄 When you switch off the ignition or press i With the automatic headlamp mode activat- i If you have switched on the turn signal for
button 1, the automatic function is reset and ed: The corner-illuminating lamps will only come one side but turn the steering wheel in the other
will start counting the next time from the begin- on in low ambient lighting conditions. direction, the corner-illuminating lamp lights up
ning. on the side of the turn signal.
For information on filling up the washer i If you are driving faster than 43 mph
reservoir, see “Windshield washer system
(70 km/h), the corner-illuminating function is i The corner-illuminating lamps temporarily
not available. come on on both sides of the vehicle if you turn
and headlamp cleaning system” the steering wheel in one direction and then in
(컄 page 548). Switching on corner-illuminating lamps the other direction shortly thereafter.
Corner-illuminating lamps 왘 Switch on the left or right turn signal i The corner-illuminating lamps will come on
(컄 page 371), depending on whether automatically depending on the steering angle,
you are turning left or right. even if you did not switch on either turn signal. If
The corner-illuminating lamps improve illu-
the corner-illuminating lamps came on automat-
mination of the area in the direction into or ically, they will also go out automatically depend-
which you are turning. ing on the steering angle.
왘 Turn steering wheel in desired direc-
The corner-illuminating lamps will operate tion. i When you shift the automatic transmission
with the engine running and with: in reverse gear R, the corner-illuminating lamp
The corner-illuminating lamp on the opposite to your steering direction comes on.
앫 the exterior lamp switch in side of your steering direction comes
position B or * (컄 page 371) on.
The turn signal has no influence on the corner-il-
luminating lamp on the outside of the curve.
or
앫 the daytime running lamp mode acti-
vated (컄 page 373).
376
Controls in detail
Lighting
Switching off the corner-illuminating Hazard warning flasher 왘 Switching on: Press hazard warning
lamps flasher switch.
The hazard warning flasher can be
The combination switch for the turn signal All turn signals will flash.
switched on at all times, even with the
resets automatically after major steering
wheel movements. This will switch off the
SmartKey removed from the starter switch i With the hazard warning flasher activated
or with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* and the combination switch set for either left or
corner-illuminating lamps if they were acti- right turn, only the respective left or right turn
removed from the vehicle.
vated by switching on the left or right turn signals will operate when the SmartKey in the
signal. The hazard warning flasher is automatical- starter switch is in position 1 or 2 or the
ly switched on if KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button (컄 page 346) is
If the turn signal should stay on after mak- pressed once or twice.
ing the turn, the turn signal and corner-illu- 앫 an air bag has been triggered
minating lamp can be switched off by 왘 Switching off: Press hazard warning
앫 S 600/S 65 AMG and USA only: you
returning the combination switch to its flasher switch again.
brake the vehicle strongly at a speed of
original position. more than 50 mph (70 km/h) and i If the hazard warning flasher was activated
i If you are driving faster than 25 mph bring it to a complete stop automatically, also press hazard warning flasher
(40 km/h) when activating the turn signal indica- switch 1 to switch off the hazard warning flash-
tor, the corner-illuminating lamp function is er.
switched off.
i The corner-illuminating lamp may remain lit

for a short time. The corner-illuminating lamp
lights up for no more than 20 seconds with the
vehicle standing still. It is then switched off even
if the turn signal is still switched on or you have
turned the steering wheel to full lock.
1 Hazard warning flasher switch
377
Controls in detail
Lighting
Interior lighting Interior lighting in the front Automatic control

The controls are located in the overhead i The interior lighting is factory-set to auto-
i Even with the SmartKey being removed from control panel. matic mode.
the starter switch you can still use the lighting for
the storage compartment, glove box and vanity 왘 Deactivating: Press button 4.
mirrors, when you open a door or press one of
the interior lighting buttons. If a lamp is switched The OFF indicator lamp next to the but-
on and you do not lock the vehicle, it will be ton comes on.
switched off automatically after 30 minutes.
The interior lighting remains switched
When you lock the vehicle from the outside, the off in darkness, even when you:
interior lighting is switched off.
앫 unlock the vehicle
앫 remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch
1 Left reading lamp on/off
앫 open a door
2 Rear interior lamps on/off
3 Front interior lighting on/off 왘 Activating: Press button 4.
4 Interior lighting control The interior lighting switches on in
5 Right reading lamp on/off darkness, when you:
앫 unlock the vehicle
앫 remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch
앫 open a door
378
Controls in detail
Lighting
The interior lighting switches off auto- Interior lighting in the rear Door entry lamps
matically following an adjustable time
delay (컄 page 248). For better orientation in the dark, the cor-
responding door entry lamps will switch on
i If the door remains open, the interior lighting in darkness when you open a door and the
switches off automatically after approximately
automatic control is activated.
5 minutes.
The door entry lamps switch off when the
Manual control corresponding door is closed.
왘 Switching on/off front interior light- i If you turn the SmartKey in the starter
ing: Press button 3. switch to position 0 and switch off the exterior
headlamps, the door entry lamps will remain lit
왘 Switching on/off rear interior light- 1 Rear interior lamp for approximately 5 minutes.
ing: Press button 2. 2 Button
3 Reading lamp
The front reading lamps reading lamps are
located in the lower edge of the interior 왘 Press button 2.
rear view mirror. You can switch the lamps on/off in
왘 Switching on/off front reading succession as follows:
lamps: Press button 1 or 5. 앫 reading lamp 3 and rear interior
왘 Ambient lighting: The brightness of lamp 1 on
the ambient lighting is adjusted via 앫 only reading lamp 3 on
COMAND (컄 page 247).
앫 reading lamp 3 off
379
Controls in detail
Lighting
Courtesy lighting Trunk lamp
For better orientation the inside door han- The trunk lamp switches on if the trunk is
dles (depending on vehicle production opened.
date), the driver and passenger footwells If the trunk remains open, the trunk light-
and the center console are illuminated in ing switches off automatically after ap-
the dark. proximately 10 minutes.
380
Controls in detail
Windshield wipers
왔 Windshield wipers
! Do not operate the windshield wipers when If the windshield wipers fail to function at all in
the windshield is dry. Dust that accumulates on the combination switch position U or V,
a windshield might scratch the glass and/or 앫 set the combination switch to the next
damage the wiper blades when wiping occurs on higher wiper speed
a dry windshield. If it is necessary to operate the
앫 have the windshield wipers checked at the
windshield wipers in dry weather conditions, al-
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
ways operate the windshield wipers with wind-
shield washer fluid (컄 page 382). 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 344).
! If anything blocks the windshield wipers Switching on/off windshield wipers
(leaves, snow, etc.), switch them off immediate-
Combination switch ly.
왘 Turn the combination switch to the
앫 For safety reasons, stop the vehicle in a safe
1 Switching on windshield wipers desired position depending on the
location and,
2 Single wipe intensity of the rain.
Wiping with windshield washer fluid 앫 remove SmartKey from starter switch
M Windshield wipers off
or
! If the windshield wipers leave smears on the 앫 turn off the engine by pressing the U Slow intermittent wiping
windshield after the car has been driven through (rain sensor operation with low
an automatic car wash, then wax or other resi- KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button
(컄 page 346) and open the driver’s door sensitivity)
due is on the windshield. Shortly after washing
the car in an automatic car wash, clean the wind- (with the driver’s door open, starter
switch is in position 0, same as with
V Fast intermittent wiping
shield with windshield washer fluid (rain sensor operation with high
(컄 page 382). SmartKey removed from starter switch)
sensitivity)
before attempting to remove any blockage.
앫 Remove blockage. u Slow continuous wiping
앫 Turn the windshield wipers on again. t Fast continuous wiping
381
Controls in detail
Windshield wipers
i When the windshield wipers are switched on 왘 Turn the combination switch to posi- Single wipe
and you brake the vehicle to a stop, the wipers tion U or V.
operate more slowly. 왘 Press the combination switch briefly in
The wipers move across the wind-
the direction of arrow 2 (컄 page 381)
shield. Afterward, the wiping intervals
Intermittent wiping to the resistance point.
are determined by the wetness of the
windshield. The windshield wipers wipe one time
Only switch on intermittent wiping under
without washer fluid.
wet weather conditions or in the presence After the initial wipe, pauses between
of precipitation. wipes are automatically controlled by the
Wiping with windshield washer fluid
rain sensor.
! Do not leave windshield wipers on an inter-
mittent setting when the vehicle is taken to an i Intermittent wiping is interrupted when the 왘 Press the combination switch in the di-
automatic car wash or during windshield clean- vehicle is at a standstill and a front door is rection of arrow 2 (컄 page 381) past
ing. Wipers will operate in the presence of water opened. This protects persons getting into or out the resistance point.
sprayed on the windshield, and windshield wip- of the vehicle from being sprayed.
ers may be damaged as a result. The windshield wiper operates with
Intermittent wiping will be continued when
washer fluid.
! If you have set intermittent wiping, dirt on 앫 all doors are closed
the surface of the rain sensor or optical effects
and
i To prevent smears on the windshield or
may cause the windshield wipers to wipe in an noisy/chattering wiper blades, wipe with wind-
undesired fashion. This could then damage the 앫 the automatic transmission is set to shield washer fluid every now and then even
windshield wiper blades or scratch the windows. position D or R when it is raining.
You should therefore switch off the windshield or
wipers when weather conditions are dry. For information on filling up the washer
앫 the wiper setting is changed using the com- reservoir, see “Windshield washer system
bination switch and headlamp cleaning system”
(컄 page 548).
382
Controls in detail
Power windows
왔 Power windows
Opening and closing power windows
The door windows are opened and closed
electrically. The switches Do not keep any part of your body up against When closing the windows, make sure that
the side window pane when opening a win- there is no danger of anyone being harmed
앫 for all door windows are on the driver’s
dow. The downward motion of the pane may by the closing procedure.
door
pull that part of your body down between Activate the override switch (컄 page 63)
앫 for the front passenger side window the window pane and the door frame and when children are riding in the back seats of
are on the front passenger door trap it there. If there is a risk of entrapment, the vehicle. The children may otherwise in-
앫 for each rear side window are on the release the switch and press it again to jure themselves, e.g. by becoming trapped
rear doors close the window. in the window opening.
The closing of the door windows can be im-
mediately halted by releasing the switch or,
if the switch was pressed past the resis-
tance point and released, by pressing the
lower part of the respective switch again.
The door windows are equipped with the ex-
press-close and automatic reversal func-
tion. If the window encounters an
obstruction that blocks its path in a circum-
stance where you pressed the switch past
1 Left front door window
the resistance point and released it to close
2 Right front door window
the window, the automatic reversal function
3 Left rear door window
will stop the window and open it slightly. 컄컄
4 Right rear door window
383
Controls in detail
Power windows
컄컄 i You can also open or close the windows us- 왘 Opening: Press the lower part of
If the window encounters an obstruction
ing the SmartKey, see “Summer opening fea- switch 1 to 4 (컄 page 383) to the re-
that blocks its path in a circumstance where
ture” (컄 page 385) and “Convenience closing sistance point.
you are closing the window by pressing and feature” (컄 page 386).
holding the switch, by pressing and holding The corresponding window will move
Depending on current position, the windows may
button ‹ on the SmartKey or SmartKey downwards until you release the
also open or close when the air recirculation
with KEYLESS-GO*, by pressing and holding button , (컄 page 469) is pressed and held switch.
the sensor surface (vehicles with for 2 seconds. 왘 Closing: Press the upper part of
KEYLESS-GO*) on an outside door handle,
i Operating the windows from the rear is not switch 1 to 4 (컄 page 383) to the re-
or by pressing and holding button , on
possible if you activate the override switch sistance point.
the climate control panel, the automatic re-
(컄 page 63). The corresponding window will move
versal function will not operate.
i If PRE-SAFE® has been activated, the door upwards until you release the switch.
windows close automatically until only a small
gap remains.
from the starter switch, take it with you, and Warning! G
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat- i With the SmartKey in starter switch
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an position 0 or removed from the starter switch, If you press and hold the switch up when
unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised ac- the power windows can be operated: closing the window, and upward movement
cess to a vehicle could result in an accident 앫 until you open the driver’s or front passenger of the window is blocked by some obstruc-
and/or serious personal injury. door tion including but not limited to arms, hands,
앫 for at least 5 minutes if no door was opened fingers, etc., the automatic reversal will not
operate.
384
Controls in detail
Power windows
왘 Express-opening: Press the lower part ! If the upward movement of the window is 왘 Opening: Press the lower part of
of switch 1 to 4 (컄 page 383) past blocked during the closing procedure, the win- switch 3 or 4 (컄 page 383).
the resistance point and release. dow will stop and open slightly. Remove the ob-
struction, press the respective power window The rear side window sunshade will be
The corresponding window opens com- switch at the upper part again past the resis- fully opened.
pletely. tance point and release. If the window still does
not close when there is no obstruction, press i The switches on the rear doors can also be
왘 Express-closing: Press the upper part used to close the rear side window sunshades on
and hold the respective power window switch at
of switch 1 to 4 (컄 page 383) past the upper part. The side window will then close
the other side of the vehicle.
the resistance point and release. without the obstruction sensor function. i The switches on the driver’s door take pre-
The corresponding window closes com- 왘 Stopping during Express-operation: cedence over the rocker switches on the other
pletely. doors.
Briefly press the respective power win-
dow switch again.
Summer opening feature
Warning! G
Rear side window sunshades*
If the weather is warm, you can ventilate
Driver’s door only: the vehicle before driving off by simulta-
If within 5 seconds you again press the 왘 Closing: With the side window fully
closed, press the upper part of neously:
switch past the resistance point and re-
lease, the automatic reversal will not oper- switch 3 or 4 (컄 page 383). 앫 opening the door windows and rear
ate. The rear side window sunshade will be side window sunshades*
fully closed. 앫 opening the tilt/sliding sunroof or
tilt/sliding panel* and extending the
i The rear side window sunshade cannot be roller sunblinds*
partially closed.
앫 turning on the seat ventilation* for the
driver’s seat
385
Controls in detail
Power windows
i The “Summer opening” function can only be Vehicles with tilt/sliding sunroof If roller sunblinds and/or rear side window
activated via the remote control of the SmartKey
왘 Press and hold button Œ until the sunshades* are open/extended:
or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*.
door windows and tilt/sliding sunroof 왘 Press and hold button Œ. The win-
i The seat ventilation* for the driver’s seat is have reached the desired position. dows move down and the tilt/sliding
automatically set to the highest level if activated panel tilts and opens after approxi-
via summer opening feature.
왘 Release button Œ to interrupt pro-
mately 1 second.
cedure.
왘 Release button Œ to interrupt proce-
Vehicles with panorama roof* and/or dure.
rear side window sunshades*
Convenience closing feature
If roller sunblinds are retracted and/or
rear side window sunshades* are closed:
When you lock the vehicle, you can close
왘 Press and hold button Œ. The win- the door windows and tilt/sliding sunroof
dows and sunblinds and/or rear side or tilt/sliding panel* simultaneously.
window sunshades* begin to open/ex-
Afterward, you can close the roller sun-
tend after approximately 1 second.
blinds* of the panorama tilt/sliding sun-
왘 Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey or With the windows and roller blinds
왘 roof* and the rear side window
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* at the and/or rear side window sunshades* sunshades*.
driver’s outside door handle. The fully opened/extended, press and hold
SmartKey or SmartKey with button Œ again. The tilt/sliding pan- i The function of the SmartKey overrules the
KEYLESS-GO* must be in close proxim- KEYLESS-GO function.
el tilts and opens.
ity to the driver’s door handle.
386
Controls in detail
Power windows
Vehicles with SmartKey Vehicles with panorama roof* and/or

Warning! G rear side window sunshades*
When closing the windows and the tilt/slid- 왘 Press and hold button ‹ until the
ing sunroof or tilt/sliding panel*, make sure door windows and the tilt/sliding panel
that there is no danger of anyone being are completely closed.
harmed by the closing procedure. 왘 Press and hold button ‹ again.
If potential danger exists, proceed as fol- The roller sunblinds and/or rear side
lows: window sunshades* close.
앫 Release button ‹ to stop the closing 왘 Release button ‹ to interrupt pro-
procedure. To open, press and hold but- cedure.
ton Œ. To continue the closing after 왘 Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey
making sure that there is no danger of towards the sensor in the driver’s door i If you press ‹ while one of the front door
anyone being harmed by the closing pro- handle. The SmartKey must be in close windows is open and one of the rear door win-
cedure, press and hold button ‹. proximity to the driver’s door handle. dows is closed, for example, then the front side
window and the rear side window sunshade will
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
Vehicles with tilt/sliding sunroof be closed. To prevent this from happening, first
앫 Release the sensor surface on the out- open all door windows slightly by briefly
side door handle (컄 page 388) to stop 왘 Press and hold button ‹ until the pressing Œ and then close all door windows
the closing procedure. door windows and the tilt/sliding sun- by pressing ‹.
앫 Immediately pull on the same outside roof are completely closed.
door handle and hold firmly. The door 왘 Release button ‹ to interrupt pro-
windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof or cedure.
tilt/sliding panel* will open for as long
as the outside door handle is held but
the door is not opened.
387
Controls in detail
Power windows
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO* Vehicles with tilt/sliding sunroof Vehicles with panorama roof* and/or
왘 Touch and hold sensor surface 1 until rear side window sunshades*
the windows and the tilt/sliding sun- 왘 Touch and hold sensor surface 1 until
roof are completely closed. the windows and the tilt/sliding panel
are completely closed.
i Make sure that you are only touching the
sensor surface. i Make sure that you are only touching the
sensor surface.
왘 Release sensor surface 1 to interrupt
procedure. 왘 Touch and hold sensor surface 1
again.
1 Sensor surface on door handle The roller sunblinds and/or rear side
window sunshades* close.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
located outside the vehicle within approxi- 왘 Release sensor surface 1 to interrupt
mately 3 ft (1 m) of a door. procedure.
왘 Close all doors. i If you touch the sensor surface while one of
the front door windows is open and one of the
rear door windows is closed, for example, the
front side window will be closed as well as the
rear side window sunshade*.
388
Controls in detail
Driving and parking
왔 Driving and parking
Starting the engine
(such as a garage) which are not properly
Warning! G ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
Make sure that absolutely no objects are ob- Warning! G have the cause determined and corrected
structing the pedals’ range of movement.
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obsta- immediately. If you must drive under these
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
cles. If there are any floormats or carpets in conditions, drive with at least one window
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
the footwell, make sure that the pedals still fully open.
monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause un-
have sufficient clearance. consciousness and possible death.
Automatic transmission
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers Do not run the engine in confined areas
the objects could get caught between the
pedals. You could then no longer brake or
accelerate. This could lead to accidents and
injury.
Gearshift pattern for automatic

transmission
P Park position
R Reverse gear
N Neutral
D Drive position
389
Controls in detail
Driving and parking
For more information on how to operate Starting with KEYLESS-GO*

the gear selector lever, see “Automatic
transmission” (컄 page 399).
Warning! G
Starting with the SmartKey As long as the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
왘 Make sure the automatic transmission is in your vehicle, the vehicle can be started.
is set to P. Therefore, never leave children unattended
in the vehicle, as they could otherwise acci-
The gear position indicator in the multi-
dentally start the engine.
function display should be on P.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
왘 Do not depress accelerator.
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you and
왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat- 1 USA only
to position 3 and hold until the engine tended in the vehicle, or with access to an 2 Canada only
starts (컄 page 344). unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised ac- 왘 Make sure KEYLESS-GO start/stop
cess to a vehicle could result in an accident button is inserted in the starter switch
i You can also use the “touch-start” function. and/or serious personal injury. (컄 page 345).
Turn the SmartKey to position 3 and release it
again immediately. The engine then starts auto- 왘 Make sure the automatic transmission
matically. You can start your vehicle without the is set to P.
SmartKey in the starter switch using the
i You can also start the engine with the auto- The gear position indicator in the multi-
matic transmission set to N. KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the
starter switch. function display should be on P.
For information on turning off the engine 왘 Depress the brake pedal during the
with the SmartKey, see “Turning off the en- The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
located in the vehicle. starting procedure.
gine” (컄 page 397).
왘 Do not depress accelerator.
390
Controls in detail
Driving and parking
왘 Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop button Starting difficulties 왘 Start the engine with the SmartKey as
once. radio signals from another source may
! Remember that extended starting attempts be interfering with the SmartKey with
The engine starts if the SmartKey with can drain the battery.
KEYLESS-GO is in the vehicle. KEYLESS-GO*.
The engine does not start. You can hear 왘 Repeat the starting procedure
i You can also start the engine with the auto- the starter. (컄 page 389).
matic transmission set to N.
There could be a malfunction If the engine does not start after several
i If you wish to start the vehicle with the starting attempts:
SmartKey instead of the KEYLESS-GO feature, 앫 in the engine electronics, or
remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button from 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
the starter switch and proceed as described in 앫 in the fuel supply system
Center or call Roadside Assistance.
“Starting with the SmartKey” (컄 page 390). Carry out the following steps:
For information on turning off the engine 왘 If you are starting the engine with the The engine does not start. You cannot
with KEYLESS-GO, see “Turning off the en- SmartKey: Turn SmartKey in starter hear the starter.
gine” (컄 page 397). switch to position 0 and repeat starting The battery may not be sufficiently
procedure (컄 page 389). charged.
왘 If you are starting the engine with 왘 Get a jump start (컄 page 697).
KEYLESS-GO*: Close any doors that
If the engine will not start despite a jump
may be open to allow for better detec-
start:
tion of the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*. 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or call Roadside Assistance.
or
왘 Remove the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button from starter switch.
391
Controls in detail
Driving and parking
Driving off ! If you hear a warning signal, the red indica-

tor lamp 0 (USA only) or ! (Canada only) Warning! G
왘 Depress the brake pedal. in the instrument cluster flashes and the mes-
sage “Please release parking brake” appears in On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
The gear selector lever can now be the multifunction display when driving off, you in order to obtain braking action. This could
used. are driving with the electronic parking brake en- result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi-
왘 Shift automatic transmission to D or R. gaged, or you are carrying out an emergency
cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not pre-
brake application with the electronic parking
vent this type of loss of control.
i Wait for the gear selection process to com- brake.
plete before setting the vehicle in motion. Release the electronic parking brake
(컄 page 395).
i Shifting from gear position P to position R, Warning! G
N, or D is only possible with the brake pedal de- i Once the vehicle is in motion, the automatic
pressed. Without the brake pedal depressed, the central locking system engages and the locking It is dangerous to shift the gear selector le-
gear selector lever can be moved, but the park- knobs in the doors move down. ver out of P or N if the engine speed is high-
ing pawl remains engaged, not allowing shifting
to occur. The automatic door lock feature can be deacti- er than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
vated (컄 page 245). on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
왘 Release the brake pedal. You can open a locked door from the inside. erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
왘 Carefully depress the accelerator Open door only when conditions are safe to do could lose control of the vehicle and hit
pedal. so. someone or something. Only shift into gear
After a cold start, the automatic transmis- when the engine is idling normally and when
The electronic parking brake is auto-
sion shifts at a higher engine revolution. your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
matically released (컄 page 395).
This allows the catalytic converter to reach
The red brake warning lamp 0 its operating temperature earlier.
(USA only) or ! (Canada only) in the
! Shift the automatic transmission to P or R
only when the vehicle is stopped in order to avoid
instrument cluster goes out. damaging the transmission.
392
Controls in detail
Driving and parking
! Do not run cold engine at high engine Turn signals i To signal minor directional changes such as
speeds. Running a cold engine at high engine changing lanes, press combination switch only
speeds may shorten the service life of the en- to point of resistance and release. The corre-
gine. This is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz sponding turn signals will flash three times.
Limited Warranty.
S 63 AMG and S 65 AMG only: Problems while driving
At engine temperatures below 68°F (20° C), the
maximum speed is restricted in order to protect
the engine. Avoid driving the vehicle at full speed The engine runs erratically and misfires
while the engine is cold in order to prevent pre- 앫 An ignition cable may be damaged.
mature engine wear as well as diminished com-
fort. 앫 The engine electronics may not be op-
erating properly.
! Simultaneously depressing the accelerator Combination switch
pedal and applying the brakes reduces engine 1 Turn signals, right 앫 Unburned gasoline may have entered
performance and causes premature brake and the catalytic converter and damaged it.
2 Turn signals, left
drivetrain wear which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. 왘 Press the combination switch in the 왘 Give very little gas.
For more information, see “Driving instruc- direction of arrow 1 or 2. 왘 Have the problem repaired by an au-
tions” (컄 page 527). The corresponding turn signal indicator thorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
lamp L or K in the instrument soon as possible.
cluster flashes (컄 page 28).
The combination switch resets automati-
cally after major steering wheel move-
ments.
393
Controls in detail
Driving and parking
The coolant temperature is above In case of accident Parking

248°F (120°C)
If the vehicle is leaking gasoline:
The coolant is too hot and is no longer
cooling the engine.
왘 Do not start the engine under any cir- Warning! G
cumstances.
왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location as With the engine not running, there is no
왘 Move away from vehicle.
soon as possible and turn off the en- power assistance for the brake and the
gine. Allow engine and coolant to cool 왘 Notify local fire and/or police authori- steering systems. In this case, it is impor-
off. ties. tant to keep in mind that a considerably
If the extent of the damage cannot be de- higher degree of effort is necessary to brake
왘 Check the coolant level and add cool-
termined: and steer the vehicle.
ant if necessary (컄 page 547).
i Excessive coolant temperatures trigger a 왘 Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
warning message in the multifunction display
(컄 page 646).
Warning! G
If no damage can be determined on the
Do not park this vehicle in areas where com-
앫 major assemblies
bustible materials such as grass, hay, or
앫 fuel system leaves can come into contact with the hot
앫 engine mount: exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
왘 Start the engine in the usual manner.
To reduce the risk of personal injury as a re-
sult of vehicle movement, before turning off
the engine and leaving the vehicle always:
앫 Keep right foot on brake pedal.
앫 Engage electronic parking brake.
394
Controls in detail
Driving and parking
앫 Shift the automatic transmission to P. park position P, either of which could result
앫 Slowly release brake pedal. in an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
앫 When parked on an incline, turn front
wheels towards the road curb.
앫 Turn the SmartKey to starter switch
position 0 and remove, or press
Warning! G
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button
Getting out of your vehicle with the automat-
(컄 page 346).
ic transmission not fully engaged in park
앫 Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with position P is dangerous. Also, when parked
KEYLESS-GO* with you and lock vehicle on an incline, park position P alone may not 1 Handle for electronic parking brake
when leaving.
prevent your vehicle from moving, possibly
hitting people or objects. Manually releasing electronic parking
Electronic parking brake brake
Always engage the electronic parking brake
in addition to shifting to park position P 왘 Pull handle 1.
Warning! G (컄 page 389). The red indicator lamp 0 (USA only)
When parked on an incline, turn front wheels or ! (Canada only) in the instru-
towards the road curb. ment cluster goes out.
from the starter switch, take it with you and You cannot release the electronic parking
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat- brake until the ignition is switched on.
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Children could release the
electronic parking brake and/or shift the
automatic transmission out of
395
Controls in detail
Driving and parking
Automatically releasing electronic park- Manually engaging electronic parking Automatically engaging electronic park-
ing brake brake ing brake* (USA only)
Your vehicle’s electronic parking brake is 왘 Press handle 1. Your vehicle’s electronic parking brake is
automatically released when: automatically engaged when DISTRONIC
The red indicator lamp 0 (USA only)
Plus* (컄 page 424) brings your vehicle to a
앫 The engine is running. or ! (Canada only) in the instru-
standstill and at least one of the following
앫 Transmission is in position D or R. ment cluster comes on.
conditions is met:
앫 The hood is closed. i You can also engage the electronic parking 앫 The engine is switched off.
brake when the SmartKey is removed from the
앫 You have fastened your seat belt. starter switch. 앫 The driver’s door is opened and the
앫 You step on the accelerator pedal. seat belt is not inserted in the seat belt
buckle.
If reverse gear R is engaged, the trunk
must be closed. 앫 The hood is released.
앫 The trunk lid is open while reverse
i If you have not fastened your seat belt, the
following conditions must be met in order for the gear R is engaged.
electronic parking brake to be automatically re- 앫 The vehicle is parked for an extended
leased:
period of time.
앫 The driver’s door is closed.
The red indicator lamp 0 (USA only) or
앫 You must move the gear selector out of P po-
! (Canada only) in the instrument clus-
sition or drive faster than 2 mph (3 km/h).
ter comes on.
i In addition to the electronic parking brake,
park position P can be automatically engaged.
396
Controls in detail
Driving and parking
Emergency braking with electronic Turning off the engine Turning off with SmartKey
parking brake 왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
In an emergency situation, you can also i If the engine cannot be turned off as de- to position 0 (컄 page 344) and remove
scribed, see “Emergency engine shut-down”
brake your vehicle while driving by using (컄 page 707). it.
the electronic parking brake. The immobilizer is activated.
왘 Shift the automatic transmission to P
왘 While driving, press handle for elec- (컄 page 403). ! If you turn off the engine using the
tronic parking brake (컄 page 395). SmartKey and
앫 remove the SmartKey from the starter
i Your vehicle will be braked for as long as you Warning! G switch
press and hold the switch for the electronic park-
ing brake. The longer you keep the electronic or
Do not turn off the engine before the vehicle
parking brake pressed, the more strongly your 앫 open a front door
vehicle will be braked. This method occurs on all has come to a complete stop. With the en-
4 wheels, not just the rear wheels. gine not running, there is no power assis- the transmission will shift to park position P
tance for the brake and steering systems. In automatically.
During the braking procedure, the red indi- this case, it is important to keep in mind that Keep in mind that turning off the engine with the
cator lamp 0 (USA only) or ! a considerably higher degree of effort is nec- SmartKey alone only will automatically shift the
(Canada only) flashes in the instrument essary to brake and steer the vehicle. transmission to neutral position N.
cluster, the message “Please release park-
ing brake” appears on the multifunction
display and you will hear a warning tone. ! Observe instructions
앫 when taking the vehicle through an
Once the vehicle comes to a complete stop
automatic conveyor type car wash
the electronic parking brake will engage. (컄 page 588)
앫 when towing the vehicle (컄 page 702)
397
Controls in detail
Driving and parking
Turning off with KEYLESS-GO* Releasing seat belts

왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
왘 Press the seat belt release button
button (컄 page 346) to turn off the en-
(컄 page 369).
gine.
Allow the retractor to completely re-
With the driver’s door closed, the start-
wind the seat belt by guiding the latch
er switch is now in position 1. With the
plate.
driver’s door opened, the starter switch
is set to position 0, same as SmartKey ! Make sure the seat belt retracts fully so that
removed from starter switch the seat belt and/or latch plate cannot get
(컄 page 344). caught or pinched in the door or in the seat
mechanism. This can damage the seat belt and
i In an emergency you can turn off the engine impair the effectiveness of the seat belt, and/or
while driving by pressing and holding the cause damage to the door and/or door trim pan-
KEYLESS-GO start/ stop button for approxi- el. Such damage is not covered by the
mately 3 seconds. Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Damaged seat belts must be replaced. Contact
! KEYLESS-GO*: an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If you turn off the engine using the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button and open a front door, the
transmission will shift to park position P
automatically.
Keep in mind that turning off the engine using
the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button alone only
will automatically shift the transmission to
neutral position N.
398
Controls in detail
왔 Automatic transmission
For more information on driving with an Gear selector lever
automatic transmission, see “Driving and Warning! G
parking” (컄 page 389). The gear selector lever is located on the
Make sure that absolutely no objects are right of the steering column.
Your vehicle’s transmission adapts its gear obstructing the pedals’ range of movement.
shifting process to your individual driving Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obsta-
style by continually adjusting the shift cles. If there are any floormats or carpets in
points up or down. These shift point adjust- the footwell, make sure that the pedals still
ments are performed based on current have sufficient clearance.
operating and driving conditions.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers
If the operating conditions change, the the objects could get caught between the
automatic transmission reacts by pedals. You could then no longer brake or
adjusting its shift program. accelerate. This could lead to accidents and
i During the brief warm-up, transmission injury.
upshifting is delayed. This allows the catalytic Gearshift pattern for automatic
transmission
converter to heat up more quickly to operating
temperature. P Park position
R Reverse gear
N Neutral
D Drive position
399
Controls in detail
i The current transmission position P, R, N Shifting from P to N Shifting from N to R or from N to D

or D appears in the multifunction display
Moving the gear selector lever up or down 왘 With the vehicle at a standstill, depress
(컄 page 403).
shifts the automatic transmission out of the brake pedal and keep it pressed.
park position P:
왘 Move gear selector lever up past the
Warning! G 왘 With the vehicle at a standstill, depress resistance point to select reverse
the brake pedal and keep it pressed. gear R.
It is dangerous to shift the automatic trans-
mission out of park position P or neutral 왘 Move gear selector lever up or down to or
position N if the engine speed is higher than resistance point to select neutral
왘 Move gear selector down past the
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the position N.
resistance point to select drive
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
i The gear selector lever returns to its original position D.
quickly forward or reverse. You could lose
position.
control of the vehicle and hit someone or i The gear selector lever returns to its original
something. Only shift into gear when the position.
engine is idling normally and when your right 왘 Release the brake pedal.
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
왘 Carefully depress the accelerator pedal
to drive off when it is safe to do so.
i When driving off, the electronic parking
brake is released automatically (컄 page 395).
400
Controls in detail
Shifting from P to R Shifting from P to D Shifting from D, R, or N to P

왘 With the vehicle at a standstill, depress 왘 With the vehicle at a standstill, depress If you want to select park position P with
the brake pedal and keep it pressed. the brake pedal and keep it pressed. the transmission being in drive position D,
reverse gear R or neutral position N:
왘 Move gear selector lever up past the 왘 Move gear selector lever down past the
resistance point to select reverse resistance point to select drive 왘 With the vehicle at a standstill, depress
gear R. position D. the brake pedal and keep it pressed.
i The gear selector lever returns to its original i The gear selector lever returns to its original 왘 Press the handle for electronic parking
position. position. brake (컄 page 395).
왘 Release the brake pedal. 왘 Release the brake pedal. 왘 Press button on gear selector lever in
direction of arrow (컄 page 399) to se-
왘 Carefully depress the accelerator pedal 왘 Carefully depress the accelerator pedal
lect park position P.
to drive off when it is safe to do so. to drive off when it is safe to do so.
왘 Release the brake pedal.
i When driving off, the electronic parking i When driving off, the electronic parking
brake is released automatically (컄 page 395). brake is released automatically (컄 page 395). ! Shift the automatic transmission directly
from drive position D to reverse gear R, from
reverse gear R to drive position D or directly to
park position P only when the vehicle is stopped.
Otherwise the automatic transmission could be
damaged.
When trying to free a vehicle stuck in mud or
snow, see “Rocking the vehicle” (컄 page 407).
401
Controls in detail
Shifting from D or R to N Shifting procedure ! Allow engine to warm up under low load use.
Do not place full load on the engine until the op-
If you want to select neutral position N
The automatic transmission selects indi- erating temperature has been reached.
with the transmission being in drive
vidual gears automatically, depending on: Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only
position D or reverse gear R:
앫 drive position D (컄 page 403) with when the vehicle is stopped.
왘 With the vehicle at a standstill, depress Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended
gear ranges (컄 page 408)
the brake pedal and keep it pressed. period when driving off on slippery road
앫 the selected program mode: surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the
왘 Press the handle for electronic parking
(C/S) (컄 page 409) drivetrain which is not covered by the
brake (컄 page 395).
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
i When the vehicle needs to be moved with or
With drive position D selected, you can use
the engine switched off and the transmission set (M/C/S) (S 63 AMG and S 65 AMG the steering wheel gearshift control
to neutral position N (컄 page 403), do not press
only) (컄 page 413) buttons (컄 page 411) or gearshift control
the handle for electronic parking brake.
앫 the position of the accelerator pedal paddles (컄 page 411) to influence trans-
왘 Move gear selector lever up to resis- mission shifting by:
(컄 page 406)
tance point when in drive position D or
down to resistance point when in 앫 the vehicle speed 앫 limiting the gear range
reverse gear R to select neutral 앫 changing gears manually
position N.
왘 Release the brake pedal.
402
Controls in detail
Transmission positions Effect ! SmartKey:

ì Park position If you turn off the engine using the SmartKey and
The current transmission position appears
in the multifunction display. 앫 remove the SmartKey from the starter
Shift into park position P only switch
when vehicle is stopped. The
or
park position is not intended to
serve as a brake when the vehi- 앫 open a front door
cle is parked. Rather, the driver the transmission will shift to park position P
should always engage the elec- automatically.
tronic parking brake in addition Keep in mind that turning off the engine with the
to shifting into park position P to SmartKey alone only will automatically shift the
secure the vehicle. transmission to neutral position N.
If the vehicle’s electrical system ! KEYLESS-GO*:

is malfunctioning, the automatic If you turn off the engine using the KEYLESS-GO
1 Current transmission position
transmission could remain start/stop button and open a front door, the
! If the current transmission position does not locked in park position P. transmission will shift to park position P
appear in the multifunction display due to a automatically.
malfunction, for example, make sure that the
왘 Have the vehicle checked as
Keep in mind that turning off the engine using
automatic transmission is in the desired position soon as possible by an autho-
the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button alone only
by carefully driving off with the transmission in rized Mercedes-Benz Center. will automatically shift the transmission to
drive position D and program mode S neutral position N.
(컄 page 409) selected. Do not limit the gear
range.
403
Controls in detail
! DISTRONIC Plus*: i Make it a practice to always shift into park Effect

The transmission will shift to park position P position P before turning off the engine and
ë Neutral
automatically, only when DISTRONIC Plus brings 앫 remove the SmartKey from the starter
your vehicle to a standstill, and when it meets at switch No power is transmitted from the
least one of the following conditions at the same or engine to the drive axle. When
time: the brakes are released, the
앫 open a front door
앫 the engine is turned off vehicle can be moved freely
or when using KEYLESS-GO*, before turning off (pushed or towed).
앫 the driver’s or passenger door opens and the the engine with the start/stop button and open-
seat belt is not engaged in the buckle ing a front door. To avoid damage to the trans-
앫 The hood is released. mission, never shift into neutral
앫 The trunk lid is open while reverse gear R is Effect position N while driving.
engaged. í Reverse gear If the ESP® is deactivated or
앫 The vehicle is parked for an extended period malfunctioning:
of time. Shift into reverse gear R only
when the vehicle is stopped. Shift into neutral position N only
In addition to shifting to park position P, the if the vehicle is in danger of
electronic parking brake will be engaged auto- skidding, e.g. on icy roads.
matically.
404
Controls in detail
! If you turn off the engine using the Vehicles with SmartKey: 왘 With the ignition switched on shift the
SmartKey or the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
왘 With the vehicle at a standstill and the automatic transmission to neutral
button, the transmission will shift to neutral position N.
position N automatically. ignition switched on shift the
automatic transmission to neutral 왘 If engaged, manually release the
If you want the gear position to remain in position N. electronic parking brake (컄 page 395).
neutral position N, e.g. when taking the
vehicle through an automatic conveyor 왘 If engaged, manually release the 왘 Switch off the ignition and leave the
type car wash or when towing the vehicle, electronic parking brake (컄 page 395). SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO in the
observe the following instructions. 왘 Switch off the ignition and leave the starter switch.
SmartKey in the starter switch. ! Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any other
Warning! G Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: reason in neutral position N can result in trans-
mission damage that is not covered by the
왘 With the vehicle at a standstill, depress Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
When leaving the SmartKey or SmartKey
the brake pedal and keep it pressed.
with KEYLESS-GO* in the starter switch, do ! Observe instructions
not leave children unattended in the vehicle. 왘 Shift the automatic transmission to 앫 when taking the vehicle through an
It is possible for children to switch on the park position P. automatic conveyor type car wash
ignition which could result in unsupervised 왘 Release the brake pedal. (컄 page 588)
use of vehicle equipment. Unsupervised use 앫 when towing the vehicle (컄 page 702)
of vehicle equipment could result in an 왘 Remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
accident and/or serious personal injury. button from the starter switch
(컄 page 345).
왘 Insert the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
into the starter switch.
405
Controls in detail
Effect Driving tips

Warning! G
ê Drive
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Accelerator position
The transmission shifts
automatically. All forward gears SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* Your driving style influences the
are available. from the starter switch, take it with you, and transmission’s shifting behavior:
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
Less throttle Earlier upshifting
More throttle Later upshifting
Warning! G unlocked vehicle. Children could shift the
automatic transmission out of park
Getting out of your vehicle without shifting position P, which could result in an accident Kickdown
into park position P is dangerous. Also, park and/or serious personal injury. Use kickdown when you want maximum
position P alone is not intended to or capa- acceleration.
ble of preventing your vehicle from moving,
왘 Press the accelerator past the point of
possibly hitting people or objects.
resistance.
Always engage the electronic parking brake
(컄 page 395) in addition to shifting to park
Depending on the engine speed the
position P.
transmission shifts into a lower gear.
When parked on an incline, turn the front 왘 Ease on the accelerator when you have
wheels towards the road curb. reached the desired speed.
Do not park this vehicle in areas where com- The transmission shifts up again.
bustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
406
Controls in detail
Stopping Rocking the vehicle Hill start assist system

When you stop briefly, e.g. at traffic lights: Rocking the vehicle by shifting between
왘 Leave the transmission in gear.
drive position D and reverse gear R can Warning! G
help free a vehicle stuck in mud or snow.
왘 Hold the vehicle with the brake. The engine control system of this vehicle The hill start assist system is not designed
When you stop for a longer period of time electronically limits shifting between drive to function as an electronic parking brake
with the engine idling and/or on a hill: position D and reverse gear R to very low and does not prevent the vehicle from mov-
speeds, i.e. approximately 5 mph ing when parked on an incline.
왘 Engage the electronic parking brake. (9 km/h). To shift between drive Always engage the electronic parking brake
왘 Shift into park position P. position D and reverse gear R, move the in addition to shifting to park position P.
gear selector lever past the resistance
Maneuvering point up or down.
On uphill grades with a gradient angle of
When you maneuver in tight areas, more than 5°, the hill start assist system
Working on the vehicle
e.g. when pulling into a parking space: maintains the pressure in the brake sys-
왘 Control the vehicle speed by gradually tem for approximately 1 second after you
releasing the brakes.
Warning! G have released the brake pedal. Therefore,
you can start off smoothly without the
왘 Accelerate gently. When working on the vehicle, engage the vehicle moving immediately after releasing
electronic parking brake and shift to park the brake pedal.
왘 Never abruptly step on the accelerator.
position P. Otherwise the vehicle could roll
away.
407
Controls in detail
The hill start assist system is inactive Gear ranges The selected gear range appears in the
앫 when starting off on a level road or multifunction display.
With the automatic transmission in drive
downhill grades
position D and driving in program mode C
앫 with the transmission in neutral or S (컄 page 409), you can select a gear
position N range for the automatic transmission to
앫 with the electronic parking brake set operate within.
앫 if the ESP® has switched off due to a You can limit the gear range by pressing
malfunction the left gearshift button or pulling the left
gearshift paddle on the steering wheel
gearshift control, and reverse the gear
range limit by pressing the right gearshift
button or pulling the right gearshift paddle 1 Current gear range
on the steering wheel gearshift control
(컄 page 411). Effect
ï The transmission shifts through
sixth gear only (applies to
vehicles with 7-speed automatic
transmission only).
î The transmission shifts through
fifth gear only (applies to
vehicles with 7-speed automatic
transmission only).
é The transmission shifts through
fourth gear only.
408
Controls in detail
Effect Automatic shift program
è The transmission shifts through The program mode selector switch is used
third gear only. to adjust
With this selection you can use 앫 shift program
the braking effect of the engine.
앫 suspension tuning of Airmatic
ç The transmission shifts through (컄 page 440) or ABC* (컄 page 442)
second gear only.
앫 engine control
Allows the use of engine’s
braking power when driving: Program mode selector switch (S 63 AMG
and S 65 AMG only)
앫 on steep downgrades
M Manual For manual gear shifting
앫 in mountainous regions (컄 page 413)
앫 under extreme operating C Comfort For standard driving
conditions
S Sport For sporty driving
æ The transmission operates in
first gear only.
For maximum use of engine’s Program mode selector switch
braking effect on very steep or
lengthy downgrades. C Comfort For comfort driving
S Sport For standard driving
409
Controls in detail
The selected program mode appears in the 왘 Press the program mode selector Select S for standard driving
multifunction display. switch repeatedly until the letter of the (S 63 AMG and S 65 AMG: sporty driv-
desired program mode appears in the ing):
multifunction display.
앫 The vehicle starts out in first gear.
Select C for comfort driving (S 63 AMG
앫 Upshifts occur later.
and S 65 AMG: standard driving):
앫 The vehicle starts out in second
gear (both forward and reverse) for
gentler starts. This does not apply if
full throttle is applied or gear
range 1 is selected.
1 Current program mode 앫 Traction and driving stability are
improved on icy roads.
! Never change the program mode when the
automatic transmission is out of park position P. 앫 Upshifts occur earlier even when
This could result in a change of driving character- you give more gas. The engine then
istics for which you may not be prepared. operates at lower rpms and the
i The last selected program mode (C or S) is wheels are less likely to spin.
switched on when the engine is restarted.
410
Controls in detail
Steering wheel gearshift control
With drive position D selected and driving

in program mode C or S, you can limit or
extend the gear range.
If your vehicle is equipped with manual
shift program M, you can use the steering
wheel gearshift control to manually shift
the gears.
i S 63 AMG and S 65 AMG only: Gearshift control buttons Gearshift control paddles (S 63 AMG and
For information on using the steering wheel gear- S 65 AMG only)
1 Left shift button: limiting gear range
shift control in program mode M, see “Manual 1 Left shift paddle: limiting gear range or
shift program (S 63 AMG and S 65 AMG only)” 2 Right shift button: extending gear
range downshift (in program mode M)
(컄 page 413).
2 Right shift paddle: extending gear
! Allow engine to warm up under low load use. range or upshift (in program mode M)
Do not place full load on the engine until the op-
erating temperature has been reached. i You cannot shift with the steering wheel
gearshift control buttons or paddles when the
Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only transmission in position P, N or R.
when the vehicle is stopped.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended The following instructions describe opera-
period when driving off on slippery road tion of the steering wheel gearshift control
surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the when driving in program mode C or S.
drivetrain which is not covered by the
411
Controls in detail
Limiting gear range Extending gear range Canceling gear range limit
왘 Briefly press right shift button 2 or 왘 Press and hold right shift button 2 or
Warning! G pull right shift paddle 2. pull and hold right shift paddle 2 until
the indicator for the current gear range
The transmission will shift to the next
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift disappears from the multifunction dis-
higher gear as permitted by the shift
in order to obtain braking action. This could play (컄 page 408).
program. This action simultaneously
result in drive wheel slip and reduced
extends the gear range of the transmis- The transmission will shift from the
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
sion. current gear range directly to gear
prevent this type of loss of control.
range D.
i If you press on the accelerator when the en-
gine has reached its rpm limit, the transmission
왘 Briefly press left shift button 1 or pull
will upshift beyond any gear range limit selected.
left shift paddle 1.
The transmission will shift to the next
lower gear as permitted by the shift
program. This action simultaneously
limits the gear range of the transmis-
sion (컄 page 408).
i To avoid overrevving the engine when down-
shifting, the transmission will not shift to a lower
gear if the engine’s max. speed would be ex-
ceeded.
412
Controls in detail
Shifting into optimal gear range Manual shift program (S 63 AMG and ! Allow engine to warm up under low load use.
왘 Press and hold left shift button 1 or S 65 AMG only) Do not place full load on the engine until the op-
erating temperature has been reached.
pull and hold left shift paddle 1.
In addition to the automatic shift Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only
The transmission will automatically program C or S, your vehicle is equipped when the vehicle is stopped.
select the gear range suited for optimal with the manual shift program M. Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended
acceleration and deceleration. This will period when driving off on slippery road
Manual shift program M differs with regard
involve shifting down one or more surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the
to spontaneity, response time, and shifting
gears. drivetrain which is not covered by the
smoothness from automatic shift Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
program S.
In the manual program mode M,
system-controlled automatic gearshifting
is switched off and you need to change the
gears by manually upshifting or downshift-
ing using the steering wheel gearshift con-
trol paddles to the left and right of the
steering wheel (컄 page 411).
Program mode selector switch

M Manual For manual gear shifting
C Comfort For standard driving
S Sport For sporty driving
413
Controls in detail
The selected program mode appears in the Activating manual shift program Upshifting
multifunction display (컄 page 410). 왘 Press the program mode selector ! In the manual program mode M, the trans-
i For information on automatic program switch repeatedly until the “M” for mission will not upshift, even if the engine has
modes C or S, see “Automatic shift program” manual program mode M appears in reached its overrevving range. Shift up to the
(컄 page 409) and “Steering wheel gearshift con- the multifunction display. next gear before the engine has reached its over-
trol” (컄 page 411). revving range. Make absolutely certain that the
The transmission switches to the engine speed does not reach the red marking on
manual program mode M. Automatic the tachometer (컄 page 28). Otherwise the en-
shifting is switched off. The gear range gine could be damaged which is not covered by
is not limited. the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
You can change the gears manually with 왘 Briefly pull right shift paddle 2
drive position D selected. You can upshift (컄 page 411).
or downshift through the gears in succes- The transmission shifts to the next
sion. higher gear.
i The manual program mode M will not be
stored. When the engine is turned off with the
manual program mode M selected, the transmis-
sion will go to the automatic program mode
(C or S) when the engine is restarted.
414
Controls in detail
If you have selected the AMG menu in the Downshifting Kickdown

control system and you are driving in the
Using the kickdown when driving in the
manual program mode M, upshift
indicator 2 in the multifunction display
Warning! G manual program mode M is not possible.
advises you to upshift before the engine On slippery road surfaces, never downshift Deactivating manual shift program
reaches the overspeed range. Thus you in order to obtain braking action. This could
can drive at the maximum engine speed for 왘 Press the program mode selector
result in drive wheel slip and reduced
each gear without overrevving the engine. switch (컄 page 413) repeatedly until
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
“C” or “S” appears in the multifunction
prevent this type of loss of control.
display.
왘 Briefly pull left shift paddle 1 or

(컄 page 411). 왘 Restart the engine.
The transmission shifts to the next The transmission will go to the
lower gear. automatic program mode (C or S).
1 Gear indicator i When you brake or stop, the transmission The manual program mode M is not
2 Upshift indicator shifts down to a gear from which you can easily stored.
3 Engine oil temperature accelerate or drive off.
4 Vehicle supply voltage
왘 Shift to the next higher gear.
The fuel supply will otherwise be inter-
rupted to prevent the engine from over-
revving.
415
Controls in detail
Emergency operation
(Limp-Home Mode)
If vehicle acceleration becomes less re-

sponsive or sluggish or the transmission
no longer shifts, the transmission is most
likely operating in limp-home (emergency
operation) mode. In this mode only second
gear and reverse gear can be selected.
왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location.
왘 Shift to park position P.
왘 Turn off the engine.
왘 Wait at least 10 seconds before
restarting.
왘 Restart the engine.
왘 Shift to drive position D (for second
gear) or reverse gear R.
왘 Have the transmission checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
416
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
왔 Instrument cluster
A full view illustration of the instrument 왘 Brightening illumination: Turn
If you must continue to drive, please do so
cluster can be found in the “At a glance” knob 1 clockwise.
with added caution. Contact an authorized
section of this manual (컄 page 28).
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. 왘 Dimming illumination: Turn knob 1
The instrument cluster is activated when counterclockwise.
you: Adjusting instrument cluster display
illumination Coolant temperature gauge
앫 open a door
앫 switch on the ignition (컄 page 344) The coolant temperature gauge is on the
앫 switch on the exterior lamps left side in the instrument cluster
(컄 page 28).
The language setting for the multifunction
display can be changed via COMAND
(컄 page 238). Warning! G
앫 Driving when your engine is overheated
Warning! G can cause some fluids which may have
leaked into the engine compartment to
No messages will be displayed if either the catch fire. You could be seriously
instrument cluster or the multifunction dis- 1 Knob burned.
play is inoperative. i The instrument cluster illumination is 앫 Steam from an overheated engine can
As a result, you will not be able to see infor- dimmed or brightened automatically to suit am- cause serious burns and can occur just
mation about your driving conditions, such bient light conditions. by opening the hood. Stay away from
The instrument cluster illumination will also be the engine if you see or hear steam com-
as speed or outside temperature, warning/
adjusted automatically when you switch on the ing from it.
indicator lamps, malfunction/warning mes-
sages or the failure of any systems. Driving vehicle’s exterior lamps. Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from
characteristics may be impaired. other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out 컄컄
417
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
컄컄 To help protect the engine, the fuel supply ature can only be verified by comparison to
of the vehicle and do not stand near the ve-
is interrupted if the engine is operated a thermometer placed next to the sensor,
hicle until the engine has cooled down.
within the red marking. not by comparison to external displays
(e.g. bank signs, etc.).
! Excessive coolant temperature triggers a Outside temperature indicator
warning in the multifunction display When moving the vehicle into colder ambi-
(컄 page 646). ent temperatures (e.g. when leaving your
The outside temperature indicator is on
The engine should not be operated with the cool- garage), you will notice a delay before the
the bottom left-hand side of the instru-
ant temperature above 248°F (120°C), i.e. in lower temperature is displayed.
ment cluster (컄 page 28).
the red zone of the coolant temperature gauge.
A delay also occurs when ambient temper-
Doing so may cause serious engine damage
atures rise. This prevents inaccurate tem-
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lim- Warning! G perature indications caused by heat
ited Warranty.
radiated from the engine during idling or
The outside temperature indicator is not de-
i During severe operating conditions, slow driving.
e.g. stop-and-go traffic, the coolant temperature signed to serve as an ice-warning device and
may rise close to 248°F (120°C), i.e. close to is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Fuel gauge
the red zone of the temperature gauge. Indicated temperatures just above the freez-
ing point do not guarantee that the road sur- The fuel gauge is on the left-hand side of
Tachometer face is free of ice. The road may still be icy, the instrument cluster (컄 page 28). Once
especially in wooded areas or on bridges. the fuel level has fallen below the reserve
The red marking on the tachometer de-
mark, the yellow segment indicator for the
notes excessive engine speed.
The temperature sensor is located in the fuel reserve comes on (컄 page 605).
! Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds, as front bumper area. Due to its location, the
it may result in serious engine damage that is not sensor can be affected by road or engine
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
heat during idling or slow driving. There-
Warranty.
fore, the accuracy of the displayed temper-
418
Controls in detail
Driving systems
왔 Driving systems
The driving systems of your vehicle are de- Cruise control
scribed on the following pages: Warning! G
The cruise control automatically maintains
앫 Cruise control (컄 page 419) and The cruise control is a convenience system
the speed you set for your vehicle.
DISTRONIC Plus*(컄 page 424), with designed to assist the driver during vehicle
which the vehicle can maintain a preset The use of the cruise control is recom-
operation. The driver is and must always re-
speed. mended for driving at a constant speed for
main responsible for the vehicle’s speed and
extended periods of time.
앫 Airmatic (컄 page 440) (S 550 only) and for safe brake operation.
ABC* (컄 page 442) adjust the vehicle You can set or resume the cruise control at Only use the cruise control if the road,
suspension characteristics automati- any speed over 20 mph (30 km/h). traffic, and weather conditions make it ad-
cally and control the vehicle level. The cruise control function is operated by visable to travel at a steady speed.
앫 Parktronic* (컄 page 444) and Park As- means of the cruise control lever. 앫 The use of the cruise control can be dan-
sist* (컄 page 448), which serve as a gerous on winding roads or in heavy traf-
parking assistant. fic because conditions do not allow safe
driving at a steady speed.
앫 Dynamic Rear View Monitor*
(컄 page 453) is an electronic and visu- 앫 The use of the cruise control can be dan-
al parking aid. gerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes
in tire traction can result in wheel spin
앫 Night View Assist* (컄 page 461) illumi- and loss of control.
nates the road with infrared light in ad- 앫 Deactivate the cruise control when driv-
dition to the normal headlamps. ing in fog.
For information on the ABS, Adaptive The “Resume” function should only be oper-
Brake, BAS, BAS Plus*, EBP, ESP® and ated if the driver is fully aware of the previ-
PRE-SAFE® Brake*, see “Driving safety ously set speed and wishes to resume this
systems” (컄 page 66). particular preset speed.
419
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Activating cruise control

Warning! G You can activate the cruise control if the
The cruise control brakes automatically so vehicle speed is above 20 mph (30 km/h).
that the set speed is not exceeded. The In the following cases you cannot activate
brake pedal depresses when the cruise con- the cruise control:
trol engages the brakes.
앫 when you brake
Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times, in-
앫 the vehicle is secured with the elec-
cluding the area under the brake pedal. Ob-
tronic parking brake
jects stored in this area may impair pedal
movement which could interfere with the 1 Setting current or higher speed 앫 when the automatic transmission is set
braking ability of the cruise control system. Adjustment in 1 mph increments (to re- to position P, R, or N
sistance point) or 5 mph increments
Do not place your foot under the brake pedal 앫 when ESP® is switched off
(past resistance point)
(Canada: 1 km/h or 10 km/h) i The vehicle speed displayed in the speedom-
Keep in mind that the cruise control is a con- 2 Setting current or lower speed eter can briefly vary from the speed setting for
venience system designed to assist the driv- Adjustment in 1 mph increments (to re- the cruise control system.
er during vehicle operation. The driver is and sistance point) or 5 mph increments
must always remain responsible for the ve- (past resistance point) Setting current speed
hicle’s speed and for safe brake operation. (Canada: 1 km/h or 10 km/h) 왘 Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
3 Cancel cruise control speed.
4 Resume to last set speed
왘 Briefly lift the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 1 or depress in
direction of arrow 2.
The current speed is set.
420
Controls in detail
Driving systems
왘 Remove your foot from the accelerator Canceling cruise control i The cruise control switches off automatical-
pedal. ly when
There are several ways to cancel the cruise
The cruise control is activated. control: 앫 you step on the brake pedal
앫 the vehicle is secured with the electronic
앫 The last set speed appears in the 왘 Step on the brake pedal.
parking brake
multifunction display for approxi-
The cruise control is canceled. The last In this case the segments in the multifunc-
mately 5 seconds.
speed set is stored for later use. tion display go out and no warning sounds.
앫 The corresponding speedometer the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
or 앫
segments from the selected speed (30 km/h)
to the vehicle maximum speed in 왘 Briefly push the cruise control lever in
앫 the ESP® is in operation or switched off with
the multifunction display are illumi- direction of arrow 3.
the ESP® switch (컄 page 73)
nated. The cruise control is canceled. The last 앫 you set the automatic transmission to N
앫 The set speed is shown by a triangle speed set is stored for later use. while driving
in the speedometer. The segments in the multifunction display go out,
i The last stored set speed is deleted when
the engine is turned off. An acoustic warning sounds and the message
i On uphill grades, the cruise control may not “Cruise control off” appears in the multifunction
be able to maintain the set speed. Once the
display for approximately 5 seconds.
grade eases, the set speed will be resumed.
On downhill grades, the cruise control maintains ! Setting the automatic transmission to N
the set speed by braking with the vehicle’s brake while driving cancels the cruise control. Howev-
system. In addition, on longer downhill grades er, the automatic transmission should not be set
the automatic transmission will downshift auto- to N while driving except to coast when the vehi-
matically. cle is in danger of skidding (e.g. on icy roads).
421
Controls in detail
Driving systems
i Depressing the accelerator pedal does not Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) Adjustment in 5 mph
deactivate the cruise control. After brief acceler- increments (Canada: 10 km/h) increments
ation (e.g. for passing), the cruise control will re-
sume the last speed set. i The set speed value is increased in 1 mph i The set speed value is increased in 5 mph
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments each time you lift (Canada: 10 km/h) increments each time you lift
the cruise control lever up to the resistance the cruise control lever up past the resistance
Setting a higher speed point. point.
왘 Briefly lift the cruise control lever to the 왘 Briefly lift the cruise control lever past
Warning! G resistance point in direction of the resistance point in direction of
arrow 1 (컄 page 420). arrow 1 (컄 page 420).
If you increase the set speed, keep in mind
that it may take a brief moment until the ve- 왘 Release the cruise control lever.
hicle has made the necessary adjustments. The vehicle set speed increases in in-
Increase the set speed to a value that the crements 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h).
prevailing road conditions and legal speed
limits permit. Otherwise, sudden and unex-
pected acceleration of the vehicle could
cause an accident and/or serious injury to
you and others.
You can increase the set speed in two

ways.
422
Controls in detail
Driving systems
왘 Release the cruise control lever. i When you use the cruise control lever to de- 왘 Briefly press the cruise control lever
The vehicle set speed increases in in- celerate, the brake system will automatically down past the resistance point in
crements 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).
brake the vehicle if the engine’s braking power direction of arrow 2 (컄 page 420).
does not brake the vehicle sufficiently.
왘 Release the cruise control lever.
i The new speed is set and the vehicle will ac-
celerate. Keep in mind that it may take a brief Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) The vehicle set speed decreases in in-
moment until the vehicle has reached the set increments crements 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).
speed.
i The set speed value is decreased in 1 mph i The new speed is set and the vehicle will de-
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments each time you celerate. Keep in mind that it may take a brief
Setting a lower speed
press the cruise control lever down to the resis- moment until the vehicle has reached the set
tance point. speed.
Warning! G 왘 Briefly press the cruise control lever
down to the resistance point in direc- Setting to last stored speed
If you increase the set speed, keep in mind
tion of arrow 2 (컄 page 420). (“Resume” function)
that it may take a brief moment until the ve-
hicle has made the necessary adjustments. 왘 Release the cruise control lever.
Warning! G
Increase the set speed to a value that the The vehicle set speed decreases in in-
prevailing road conditions and legal speed crements 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h). The set speed stored in memory should only
limits permit. Otherwise, sudden and unex- be set again if prevailing road conditions
pected acceleration of the vehicle could Adjustment in 5 mph permit. Possible acceleration or decelera-
cause an accident and/or serious injury to (Canada: 10 km/h) increments tion differences arising from returning to the
you and others. preset speed could cause an accident
i The set speed value is decreased in 5 mph
(Canada: 10 km/h) increments each time you and/or serious injury to you and others.
You can reduce the set speed in two ways. press the cruise control lever down past the re-
sistance point.
423
Controls in detail
Driving systems
왘 Briefly pull the cruise control lever in DISTRONIC Plus* When travelling in Canada in a vehicle not
the direction of arrow 4 (컄 page 420). registered in Canada, you must switch off
When activated, the DISTRONIC Plus adap- the radar sensor system* (컄 page 282).
The cruise control resumes to the last
tive cruise control system increases driv- Canadian law does not permit the use of
set speed or if no speed is stored, it will
ing convenience afforded by the cruise the radar sensor system* (컄 page 282) for
set and store the current speed.
control during travel on expressways and vehicles from outside of Canada. When you
왘 Remove your foot from the accelerator other major roadways. switch off the radar sensor system*, the
pedal. following functions are deactivated:
앫 If the DISTRONIC Plus distance sensor
The last set speed appears in the multi- detects a slower moving vehicle direct- 앫 BAS Plus* (컄 page 69)
function display for approximately ly ahead, your vehicle speed will be re-
5 seconds, and the corresponding 앫 DISTRONIC Plus
duced so that you follow that vehicle at
speedometer segments from the se- a preset distance. 앫 Park Assist* (컄 page 448)
lected speed to the vehicle maximum
앫 If there is no vehicle directly ahead of 앫 PRE-SAFE® Brake* (컄 page 76)
speed are illuminated.
you, DISTRONIC Plus will function in
i The last stored set speed is deleted when the same way as the cruise control
the engine is turned off. (컄 page 419).
DISTRONIC Plus functions within a speed
range of 0 to 120 mph.
424
Controls in detail
Driving systems

DISTRONIC Plus is a convenience system. DISTRONIC Plus adaptive cruise control is DISTRONIC Plus requires familiarity with its
Its speed adjustment reduction capability is no substitute for active driving involvement. operational characteristics. We strongly rec-
intended to make the cruise control more ef- It does not react to pedestrians or stationary ommend that you review the following infor-
fective and usable when traffic speeds vary. objects, nor does it recognize or predict the mation carefully before operating the
It is not however, intended to, nor does it, re- curvature and lane layout or the movement system.
place the need for extreme care. The re- of vehicles ahead. DISTRONIC Plus can only
sponsibility for the vehicle speed and the apply a maximum of 40% of the vehicle’s
distance to the vehicle ahead, including braking power. Warning! G
most importantly brake operation to assure DISTRONIC Plus may not detect narrow ve-
safe stopping distance, always remains with hicles possibly driving in front of you, such DISTRONIC Plus cannot take street and traf-
the driver. as motorcycles and vehicles driving in an fic conditions into account. Only use
DISTRONIC Plus cannot take street and traf- offset formation. DISTRONIC Plus if the road, weather and
fic conditions into account. traffic conditions make it advisable to travel
It is the driver’s responsibility at all times to
at a steady speed.
Complex driving situations are not always be attentive to road, weather and traffic con-
fully recognized by DISTRONIC Plus. This ditions and to provide the steering, braking
could result in wrong or missing distance and other driving inputs necessary to retain
warnings. control of the vehicle.
Warning! G
High-frequency sources such as toll sta- Use of DISTRONIC Plus can be dangerous
tions, speed measuring systems etc. can on slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire trac-
cause the DISTRONIC Plus system to tem- tion can result in wheel spin and loss of con-
porarily cease functioning. trol. 컄컄
425
Controls in detail
Driving systems
컄컄
DISTRONIC Plus does not act upon adverse Switch off DISTRONIC Plus:
sight distance conditions. Do not use
Warning! G
앫 when changing from the left to the right
DISTRONIC Plus during conditions of fog The “Resume” function should only be oper- lane if vehicles are moving more slowly
and heavy rain, snow or sleet. ated if the driver is fully aware of the previ- in the left lane
ously set speed and wishes to resume this 앫 when entering a turn lane or highway off
particular preset speed. ramp
Warning! G 앫 in complex driving situations, such as in
highway construction zones
DISTRONIC Plus cannot take weather condi-
tions into account. Switch off
Warning! G In these situations, DISTRONIC Plus will
DISTRONIC Plus or do not turn it on if: continue to maintain the set speed unless
Close attention to road and traffic condi- deactivated.
앫 roads are slippery or covered with snow tions is imperative at all times, regardless of
or ice. The wheels could lose traction whether or not DISTRONIC Plus is activated. DISTRONIC Plus is designed and intended
while braking or accelerating, and the only to maintain a set speed and keep a set
vehicle could skid. Use of DISTRONIC Plus can be dangerous distance from moving objects in front of it.
on winding roads as conditions do not allow
앫 the sensor is dirty or visibility is
safe driving at a steady speed.
diminished due to snow, rain or fog. The i Do not use DISTRONIC Plus if you are driv-
distance control could be impaired. DISTRONIC Plus may not react to stationary ing on a road with steep uphill or downhill slopes.
Always pay attention to traffic conditions objects in the roadway (e.g. a stopped vehi-
even while DISTRONIC Plus is switched on. cle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). i Due to its radar-emitting nature DISTRONIC
Plus may have an appearance similar to a radar
Otherwise, you may not be able to recognize DISTRONIC Plus will also not respond to on-
detector to law enforcement officials. You may
dangerous situations until it is too late and coming vehicles. want to refer to this section of your Operator’s
could cause an accident resulting in person- Manual when asked.
al or fatal injury to you or others.
426
Controls in detail
Driving systems
i USA only: DISTRONIC Plus displays in multifunc- If DISTRONIC Plus calculates that there is
This device has been approved by the FCC as a tion display a danger of collision:
“Vehicular Radar System”. The radar sensor is
intended for use in an automotive radar system 앫 The distance warning lamp l in the
only. Removal, tampering, or altering of the de- instrument cluster comes on.
vice will void any warranties, and is not permitted 앫 An intermittent warning sounds.
any non-approved way. 왘 Immediately brake the vehicle to avoid
Any unauthorized modification to this device a collision.
could void the user’s authority to operate the Under no circumstances should the
equipment.
driver await the intermittent warning
i Canada only: sound before braking. See the follow-
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry ing warning note.
1 Speed of the vehicle ahead
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: 2 Set speed The intermittent warning sound ceases
3 Distance warning lamp and the distance warning lamp l
goes out when the necessary distance
(2) this device must accept any interference re- If DISTRONIC Plus is activated, the
to the vehicle ahead is again
ceived, including interference that may marker 2 indicates the set speed.
established.
i The vehicle speed displayed on the speed-
Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will ometer can briefly vary from the speed setting
void any warranties, and is not permitted. Do not on the DISTRONIC Plus system. Warning! G
way. When DISTRONIC Plus detects a vehicle An intermittent warning sounds and the dis-
Any unauthorized modification to this device driving ahead of you, the ring on the speed- tance warning lamp l in the instrument
could void the user’s authority to operate the ometer dial lights up between the speed of cluster is illuminated if the DISTRONIC Plus
equipment. the vehicle ahead of you and set speed 2. system calculates that the distance to the 컄컄
427
Controls in detail
Driving systems
컄컄
vehicle ahead and your vehicle’s current You must also apply the brakes yourself to
speed indicate that DISTRONIC Plus will not avoid a collision. DISTRONIC Plus brakes
Warning! G
be capable of slowing the vehicle sufficiently the vehicle in an effort to restore the preset If you do not receive visual or acoustic warn-
to maintain the preset following distance, distance or to maintain the speed. The brake ing signals during a critical traffic situation,
which creates a danger of a collision. pedal is automatically applied as this hap- DISTRONIC Plus has either not recognized
Immediately brake your vehicle to increase pens which results in the brake pedal mov- the collision risk, has been deactivated or is
the distance between your vehicle and the ing. malfunctioning.
vehicle in front of you. The warning sound is Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times, in- Remember, whether or not DISTRONIC Plus
intended as a final caution that you have not cluding the area under the brake pedal. Ob- is operating, it is ultimately always the driv-
interceded with your own braking inputs to jects stored in this area may impair pedal ers responsibility to apply the brakes in or-
avoid a potentially dangerous situation. Do movement which could interfere with the der to control the vehicle and avoid a
not wait for the operation of the warning sig- braking ability of the DISTRONIC Plus sys- collision.
nal to intercede with your own braking, as tem.
that will result in potentially dangerous Do not place your foot under the brake pedal
emergency braking which will not always re- Displaying the distance graphic
sult in an impact being avoided. In the “Assistance” menu under “Distance
Tailgating increases the risk of an accident. display” you see the current settings for
DISTRONIC Plus. The information shown in
the multifunction display depends on
Warning! G whether DISTRONIC Plus is activated or
deactivated.
DISTRONIC Plus brakes your vehicle with a
i For activating or deactivating the
maximum of 13 ft/s2. This corresponds to DISTRONIC Plus system, see “Activating
about 40% of the maximum deceleration DISTRONIC Plus” (컄 page 430) or “Deactivating
ability of your vehicle. DISTRONIC Plus” (컄 page 435).
428
Controls in detail
Driving systems
i The menu overview can be found on DISTRONIC Plus activated DISTRONIC Plus deactivated
(컄 page 266).
When you turn DISTRONIC Plus on, you will If DISTRONIC Plus is deactivated, the stan-
왘 Press ( or & to select the see the set speed in the multifunction dis- dard display of DISTRONIC Plus appears in
“Assistance” menu. play for about 5 seconds. You then see the the multifunction display.
following display in the multifunction dis-
왘 Press % or $ to select the
play.
“Distance display” function.
왘 Press #.
The DISTRONIC Plus distance graphic
appears and you will see one of the fol-
lowing displays on the multifunction
display.
1 Vehicle ahead, if detected

2 Actual distance to vehicle ahead
1 DISTRONIC Plus activated 3 Preset distance threshold to vehicle
2 Your vehicle ahead
3 Preset distance threshold to vehicle 4 Your vehicle
ahead
4 Vehicle ahead, if detected
429
Controls in detail
Driving systems
DISTRONIC Plus lever Activating DISTRONIC Plus You can activate DISTRONIC Plus when:
The DISTRONIC Plus system is operated by 앫 you are driving slower than 20 mph and
means of the DISTRONIC Plus lever. Warning! G DISTRONIC Plus has detected a vehicle
ahead of you
When DISTRONIC Plus is braking, the brake
앫 you are driving above 20 mph
pedal is retracted (i.e. depressed automati-
cally). The pedals’ range of motion must not i The maximum speed you can set is
be impeded by any obstacles: 120 mph.
앫 Do not place any objects in the footwell. If DISTRONIC Plus has not been activated
앫 Make sure that the floor mats and car- after pressing the DISTRONIC Plus lever,
pets are securely in place. you will see the message: “DISTRONIC
앫 Do not rest your foot underneath the
PLUS - - - mph” in the multifunction display.
brake pedal, as it could otherwise be In the following cases you cannot activate
1 Setting current or higher speed trapped.
Adjustment in 1 mph or 5 mph DISTRONIC Plus:
increments You could otherwise cause an accident and 앫 up to 2 minutes after starting the en-
2 Setting current or lower speed injure yourself and others. gine
Adjustment in 1 mph or 5 mph
앫 if the engine is switched off
increments
3 Canceling DISTRONIC Plus Warning! G 앫 if you step on the brake pedal while
4 Activating DISTRONIC Plus or resum- driving
ing to last set speed When DISTRONIC Plus is switched on, the
앫 the vehicle is secured with the elec-
5 Setting target distance vehicle can be braked. You should therefore
tronic parking brake
switch off DISTRONIC Plus if the vehicle
must be towed. 앫 if the gear selector lever is in
position P, R, or N
430
Controls in detail
Driving systems
앫 if ESP® is switched off 왘 Take your foot off the accelerator ped- Switching on when approaching a sta-
al. tionary vehicle
앫 if the hood is open
Your vehicle adapts its speed to the ve- If the vehicle in front of you is stationary,
앫 if the driver’s door is open and the driv-
hicle ahead, observing the set speed as you can only switch on DISTRONIC Plus if
er has not fastened his or her seat belt
a maximum value. your vehicle is also at a standstill.
앫 if the radar sensors are switched off
(컄 page 282). i Under 20 mph, you can only switch on 왘 Tap DISTRONIC Plus lever up 1 or
DISTRONIC Plus if the vehicle ahead of you has down 2 until desired speed is set.
been detected and is shown on the multifunction
Switching on while driving display. If you no longer see the vehicle in front DISTRONIC Plus is switched on.
왘 Tap DISTRONIC Plus lever up 1 or of you on the multifunction display and if it is no or
down 2 until desired speed is set. longer detected because it has changed lanes,
for example, DISTRONIC Plus switches off and 왘 Pull DISTRONIC Plus lever briefly in di-
DISTRONIC Plus is switched on. you will hear a signal. rection of arrow 4 to call up speed
or last set (컄 page 435).
i If you do not completely lift your foot off the
왘 Pull DISTRONIC Plus lever briefly in di- accelerator pedal, the message“DISTRONIC DISTRONIC Plus is switched on.
PLUS override” appears on the multifunction dis-
rection of arrow 4 to call up speed play. The distance to a slower-driving vehicle will i It is helpful to switch on the DISTRONIC Plus
last set (컄 page 435). not be set. You will drive at the speed you dictate display in the instrument cluster (컄 page 428)
by pressing the accelerator pedal. since you can only switch on DISTRONIC Plus un-
DISTRONIC Plus is switched on. der a speed of 20 mph when a vehicle has been
detected in front of you.
i You can adjust the set speed using the

DISTRONIC Plus lever and the target distance
using the distance setting switch on the
DISTRONIC Plus lever (컄 page 436). 컄컄
431
Controls in detail
Driving systems
컄컄 i If DISTRONIC Plus is switched off, Driving Stopping

®
PRE-SAFE Brake* (컄 page 76) will warn of an
If no vehicle is driving ahead of you,
impending collision if this function has been ac-
tivated with the instrument cluster control sys- DISTRONIC Plus functions like the cruise Warning! G
tem (컄 page 279). control (컄 page 419).
DISTRONIC Plus’s braking effect is canceled
When DISTRONIC Plus detects that the ve-
Starting off and the vehicle can start to roll if
hicle in front of you is driving more slowly,
it brakes the vehicle in order to keep the 앫 DISTRONIC Plus is switched off using
When the vehicle in front of you starts off:
distance specified by you. the DISTRONIC Plus lever
왘 Remove your foot from the brake 앫 you accelerate
pedal. When DISTRONIC Plus detects that the ve-
hicle in front of you is driving faster, the ve- 앫 the system or the power supply is mal-
왘 Pull DISTRONIC Plus lever briefly in di- hicle accelerates up to the set speed. functioning, e.g. due to battery failure
rection of arrow 4. 앫 the electrical components in the engine
or compartment or the fuses have been
Warning! G manipulated
왘 Briefly step on the accelerator pedal.
When you step on the brake pedal, you 앫 the battery is disconnected
Your vehicle starts off and adapts its speed
switch off DISTRONIC Plus except when the
to the vehicle in front of you.
vehicle is at a standstill. DISTRONIC Plus will
no longer brake your vehicle. You are always
responsible for maintaining a distance from
other vehicles, observing road speeds and
braking well in advance.
432
Controls in detail
Driving systems
i After a short while, your vehicle is secured in i If you do not take your foot off of the accel-
Warning! G place by the electronic parking brake so that the erator completely, the following message
operating brake can be relieved of load. “DISTRONIC PLUS override” will appear in the
Never get out of the vehicle while multifunction display.
DISTRONIC Plus is switched on! i Depending on the following distance set us- The distance to a slower moving vehicle in front
ing the distance setting switch on the
DISTRONIC Plus must never be operated or DISTRONIC Plus lever, your vehicle will stop ap- of you will not be set. Your vehicle speed will
proximately 13.1 ft away from the vehicle in then be determined only by the accelerator ped-
switched off by passengers or from outside
front of you. al position.
the vehicle.
DISTRONIC Plus is not a substitute for the Setting a higher speed
Setting the current speed
electronic parking brake and may not be
used for parking. 왘 Accelerate or decelerate to the desired You can increase the set speed in two stag-
speed. es.
When you get out of the vehicle or switch off
the engine, deactivate DISTRONIC Plus and 왘 Briefly lift the DISTRONIC Plus lever in Adjustment in 1 mph increments
secure the vehicle from rolling away by en- the direction of arrow 1 or depress in
gaging the electronic parking brake. the direction of arrow 2. i The set speed value is increased in 1 mph in-
crements each time you lift the DISTRONIC Plus
DISTRONIC Plus is activated and the lever to the resistance point.
When DISTRONIC Plus detects that the ve- current speed is set.
hicle in front of you is stopping, the vehicle 왘 Briefly lift the DISTRONIC Plus lever to
왘 Remove your foot from the accelerator the resistance point in direction of
brakes until it also stops.
pedal. arrow 1 (컄 page 430).
Once DISTRONIC Plus has stopped your
vehicle and it is at a standstill, it remains 왘 Release the DISTRONIC Plus lever.
stationary; the brake pedal does not need The vehicle speed increases in incre-
to be depressed. ments of 1 mph.
433
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Adjustment in 5 mph increments i The new speed is set and the vehicle will ac- Adjustment in 5 mph increments
celerate. Keep in mind that it may take a brief
moment until the vehicle has reached the set
Warning! G speed. Warning! G
You can increase the vehicle speed in 5 mph You can decrease the vehicle speed in
Setting a lower speed
increments. When using this feature, keep in 5 mph increments. When using this feature,
mind that it may take a brief moment until You can reduce the speed in two stages. keep in mind that it may take a brief mo-
the vehicle has reached the set speed. ment until the vehicle has reached the set
i When you use the DISTRONIC Plus lever to
Increase the vehicle speed to a value that decelerate, the brake system will automatically speed.
the prevailing road conditions permit. Other- brake the vehicle if the engine’s braking power Decelerate the vehicle speed to a value that
wise, sudden and unexpected acceleration does not brake the vehicle sufficiently. the prevailing road conditions permit. Other-
of the vehicle could cause an accident wise, sudden and unexpected deceleration
and/or serious injury to you and others. Adjustment in 1 mph increments of the vehicle could cause an accident
i The set value is decreased in 1 mph incre- and/or serious injury to you and others.
i The set value is increased in 5 mph increments each time you press the DISTRONIC Plus
ments each time you lift the DISTRONIC Plus le- lever down to the resistance point.
ver past the resistance point. 왘 Briefly press the DISTRONIC Plus lever
왘 Briefly lift the DISTRONIC Plus lever down to the resistance point in direc-
past the resistance point in direction of tion of arrow 2 (컄 page 430).
arrow 1 (컄 page 430). 왘 Release the DISTRONIC Plus lever.
왘 Release the DISTRONIC Plus lever. The vehicle speed decreases in incre-
The vehicle speed increases in increments of 1 mph.
ments of 5 mph.
434
Controls in detail
Driving systems
i The set value is decreased in 5 mph incre- Setting to last stored speed (“Resume” Deactivating DISTRONIC Plus
ments each time you press the DISTRONIC Plus function)
There are several ways to deactivate the
lever down past the resistance point.
DISTRONIC Plus system:
왘 Briefly press the DISTRONIC Plus lever Warning! G 왘 Briefly tip the DISTRONIC Plus lever in
down past the resistance point in
the direction of arrow 3 (컄 page 430).
direction of arrow 2 (컄 page 430). The speed stored in memory should only be
set again if prevailing road conditions per- or
왘 Release the DISTRONIC Plus lever.
mit. Possible acceleration or deceleration 왘 Step on the brake pedal.
The vehicle speed decreases in incre- differences arising from returning to preset
ments of 5 mph. speed could cause an accident and/or seri- DISTRONIC Plus will be deactivated.
ous injury you and others. The last speed set will be stored into
i The new speed is set and the vehicle will de- memory.
celerate. Keep in mind that it may take a brief
moment until the vehicle has reached the set 왘 Briefly pull the DISTRONIC Plus lever in i The last stored speed is deleted when you
speed. the direction of arrow 4 (컄 page 430). turn off the engine.
DISTRONIC Plus is set to the last DISTRONIC Plus deactivates automatically

stored speed. when:
DISTRONIC Plus resumes the last set 앫 the vehicle is secured with the elec-
speed or if no speed is stored, it will set tronic parking brake
and store the current speed. 앫 the vehicle speed is below 20 mph and
왘 Remove your foot from the accelerator no preceding vehicle is detected
pedal. 앫 the ESP® is in operation or switched off
i Upon switching off the engine, the last with the ESP® switch (컄 page 73)
stored speed is deleted. 앫 you set the automatic transmission
to P, R, or N while driving
435
Controls in detail
Driving systems
앫 the radar sensors are switched off Setting the following distance in
(컄 page 282) Warning! G DISTRONIC Plus
앫 the vehicle rolls backward DISTRONIC Plus switches off and releases You can set the specified following dis-
the brakes when the vehicle decelerates be- tance for DISTRONIC Plus by varying the
The segments in the multifunction display
low the minimum speed of 20 mph by oper- time setting between 1.0 and 2.0 seconds.
go out, an acoustic signal sounds, and the
ation of the system unless DISTRONIC Plus Using this time setting and the current set
message “DISTRONIC PLUS Off” appears in
detects a vehicle directly ahead of you. At speed of your vehicle, DISTRONIC Plus cal-
the multifunction display for approximately
that time the driver must apply the brakes in culates and sets the required following dis-
5 seconds.
order to reduce vehicle speed further or tance to the vehicle ahead. The set
If the vehicle has been stopped by distance will be shown in the multifunction
bring it to a stop.
DISTRONIC Plus and a malfunction occurs display.
in the system, the message “Brake immedi-
ately” will appear on the multifunction dis- ! Setting the automatic transmission to N
play. Step on the brake immediately to while driving cancels the DISTRONIC Plus. How- Warning! G
prevent the vehicle from rolling. ever, the automatic transmission should not be
set to N while driving except to coast when the It is up to the driver to exercise discretion to
DISTRONIC Plus is then switched off and
vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g. on icy select the appropriate setting given road
the message disappears. roads). conditions, traffic, driver’s preferred driving
style and applicable laws and driving recom-
i Depressing the accelerator pedal does not
deactivate DISTRONIC Plus. After brief accelera- mendations for safe following distance.
tion (e.g. for passing), DISTRONIC Plus will re-
sume the last speed set.
436
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The distance setting switch for the target Decreasing distance

This means that:
distance is located on the DISTRONIC Plus
Decreasing the distance setting causes 앫 Your vehicle can pass another vehicle
lever.
DISTRONIC Plus to maintain a shorter fol- after you change lanes.
lowing distance to the vehicle ahead.
앫 While in a sharp turn or if the vehicle in
왘 Move distance setting switch 1 in di- front is in a sharp turn, DISTRONIC Plus
rection 3. could lose sight of a vehicle traveling in
front of it, then your vehicle could accel-
Driving with DISTRONIC Plus erate to the previously selected speed.
DISTRONIC Plus regulates only the distance
This section describes a number of driving
between your vehicle and those directly
situations where special precaution is re-
ahead of it. It may not register stationary ob-
quired on the part of the driver. Be pre-
jects in the road, e.g.:
pared to brake in such situations which will
1 Distance setting switch for target dis- deactivate the DISTRONIC Plus system. 앫 a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam
tance 앫 a disabled vehicle
2 To increase target distance
3 To decrease target distance Warning! G 앫 an oncoming vehicle
The driver must always be on the alert, ob-
DISTRONIC Plus works to maintain the serve all traffic and intercede as required by
Increasing distance
speed selected by the driver unless a mov- steering or braking the vehicle.
Increasing the distance setting causes ing obstacle proceeding directly ahead of it
DISTRONIC Plus to maintain a greater fol- in the same travel direction is detected (e.g.
lowing distance to the vehicle ahead. following another vehicle ahead of you at a Warning! G
왘 Move distance setting switch 1 in di- distance set by DISTRONIC Plus).
rection 2. DISTRONIC Plus should not be used in
snowy or icy road conditions.
437
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The most likely cause for a malfunctioning i If the message: Turns and bends
system is a dirty sensor (located behind “DISTRONIC PLUS
the hood grille), especially at times of snow currently unavailable
and ice or heavy rain. In such a case, See Oper. Manual”
DISTRONIC Plus will switch off, and the disappears during driving and the last speed
message: stored flashes for approximately 5 seconds, the
“DISTRONIC PLUS dirt (e.g. slush) has dissolved; DISTRONIC Plus is
again available.
currently unavailable
See Oper. Manual” Another cause might be that the radar sen-
sors have been manually switched off in
appears in the multifunction display.
the instrument cluster control system.
For cleaning and care of the Please verify that the radar sensors are In turns or bends, DISTRONIC Plus may not
DISTRONIC Plus sensor, see “Cleaning the switched on (컄 page 282). detect a moving vehicle in front, or it may
DISTRONIC Plus*/ PRE-SAFE® Brake* detect one too soon. This may cause your
system sensors (USA only)” (컄 page 589). vehicle to brake late or unexpectedly.
438
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Offset driving Lane changing Narrow vehicles
A vehicle traveling in your lane but offset DISTRONIC Plus has not yet detected the Because of their narrow profile, the vehi-
from your direct line of travel may not be vehicle changing lanes. There will be insuf- cles traveling near the outer edge of the
detected by DISTRONIC Plus. There will be ficient distance to the lane-changing vehi- lane have not yet been detected by
insufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. cle. DISTRONIC Plus. There will be insufficient
distance to the vehicles ahead.
439
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Obstacles and stationary vehicles Cross-traffic Airmatic (S 550 only)
Airmatic automatically selects the opti-

mum suspension tuning and ride height for
your vehicle.
Airmatic consists of two components:
앫 Level control system
앫 Adaptive Damping System (ADS)
The ADS automatically selects the opti-
mum damping for the respective driv-
DISTRONIC Plus does not brake for obsta- DISTRONIC Plus may inadvertently detect
ing conditions. At the same time the
cles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, crossing vehicles. If you switch on DIS-
suspension is set to either sporty or
the vehicle detected in front of you chang- TRONIC Plus, for example, at a traffic light
comfort.
es lanes to bypass an obstacle or station- with cross-traffic, the vehicle may sudden-
ary vehicle in front of it, DISTRONIC Plus ly start to drive off.
will not brake for the obstacle or stationary
vehicle.
440
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Vehicle level control with Airmatic i These height adjustments are so small that
you may not notice any change.
Warning! G The following vehicle level settings can be
selected when the vehicle is stationary:
To help avoid personal injury, keep hands
and feet away from wheel housing area, and Level
stay away from under the vehicle when low- Normal For driving on normal roads.
ering the vehicle chassis. The indicator lamp is off.
Raised For driving on rough roads or
Your vehicle automatically adjusts its ride with snow chains. The indica- 1 Vehicle level control switch
height to: tor lamp is on. 2 Indicator lamp
앫 increase vehicle safety 왘 Start the engine.
Select the “Raised” level setting only when
앫 reduce fuel consumption required by current driving conditions. 왘 Briefly press switch 1 to change from
The vehicle chassis ride height is raised or Otherwise: one level setting to the other.
lowered according to the selected level 앫 Fuel consumption may increase. The message:
setting and to the vehicle speed:
앫 Handling may be impaired. “Vehicle rising”
앫 With increasing speed, ride height is re-
duced by up to approximately 0.8 in appears in the multifunction display
(20 mm). when changing from normal level to
raised level.
앫 With decreasing speed, the ride height
is again raised to the selected vehicle The indicator lamp 2 is then lit. The
level. display switches off when the vehicle is
raised. 컄컄
441
Controls in detail
Driving systems
컄컄 왘 Press switch 1 again to lower the ve- Suspension tuning Active Body Control (ABC)*
hicle. The indicator lamp 2 is off. The Adaptive Damping System (ADS) auto-
The ABC system is an active, comput-
i The selected vehicle level setting remains matically tunes shock absorbers and
er-controlled system that hydraulically ad-
stored in memory even if the engine is turned off springs.
justs the suspension at all four wheels in
and restarted except when you
The suspension tuning is set according to: response to various driving situations. It
앫 exceed a speed of 75 mph (120 km/h) automatically selects the optimum suspen-
앫 your driving style
or sion tuning and ride height for your vehicle.
앫 maintain a speed of between 50 mph 앫 road surface conditions
(80 km/h) and 75 mph (120 km/h) for more
than 3 minutes
앫 the vehicle loading Warning! G
The vehicle then lowers to regular level.
앫 your choice of suspension style
S 63 AMG and S 65 AMG only:
The program mode selector switch (C/S) When you switch off the engine, the entire
(컄 page 409) is used to adjust the suspen- vehicle is lowered. You should therefore
sion tuning: make sure that no one is near the wheel
Driving program Suspension tuning housing or under the vehicle when you
switch off the engine. Otherwise, parts of
C Comfort comfortable
the individuals body could be trapped.
(default setting)
S Sport sporty
for dynamic driving
! S 63 AMG and S 65 AMG only:
When you switch off the engine, the entire vehi-
cle is lowered. When parking, position your vehi-
왘 Start the engine. cle in such a way that it will not scrape against a
curb, for example, when it is lowered. Your vehi-
왘 Select the desired driving program. cle could otherwise be damaged.
442
Controls in detail
Driving systems
i S 63 AMG and S 65 AMG only: 앫 With decreasing speed, the ride height
When you switch off the engine, the entire vehi- is again raised to the selected vehicle
cle is lowered by 0.2 in (5 mm). level.
Vehicle level control with ABC i These height adjustments are so small that
you may not notice any change.
The following vehicle level settings can be
Warning! G selected when the vehicle is stationary:
To help avoid personal injury, keep hands
Level
and feet away from wheel housing area, and
stay away from under the vehicle when low- Normal For driving on normal roads. 1 Vehicle level control switch
ering the vehicle chassis. The indicator lamp is off. 2 Indicator lamp
Raised For driving on rough roads or
with snow chains. The indica- Selecting a higher level
Your vehicle automatically adjusts its ride
height to: tor lamp is on. 왘 Start the engine.
앫 increase vehicle safety If indicator lamp 2 is off:
Select the “Raised” level setting only when
앫 reduce fuel consumption required by current driving conditions. 왘 Press switch 1.
The vehicle chassis ride height is raised or Otherwise: Indicator lamp 2 comes on. The vehi-
lowered according to the selected level 앫 Fuel consumption may increase. cle is raised to a higher level.
setting and to the vehicle speed:
앫 Handling may be impaired.
앫 With increasing speed, ride height is re-
duced by up to approximately 0.6 in i The selected vehicle level setting remains
(15 mm). stored in memory even if the engine is turned off
and restarted.
443
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Selecting a normal level The program mode selector switch (C/S) Parktronic system*
왘 Start the engine. (컄 page 409) or (S/C/M) (컄 page 413) is
used to adjust the suspension tuning:
If indicator lamp 2 is on: Warning! G
Driving program Suspension tuning
왘 Press switch 1.
C Comfort comfortable Parktronic is a supplemental system. It is
Indicator lamp 2 goes out. The vehicle (default setting) not intended to, nor does it replace, the
is adjusted to a normal level. need for extreme care. The responsibility
S Sport sporty
during parking and other critical maneuvers
Suspension tuning M Manual for dynamic driving
always remains with the driver.
The suspension tuning is set according to:
왘 Start the engine.
앫 your driving style
왘 Select the desired driving program. Warning! G
앫 road surface conditions
Make sure no persons or animals are in the
앫 the vehicle loading
area in which you are maneuvering. You
앫 your choice of suspension style could otherwise injure them.
! Special attention must be paid to objects

with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes (e.g.
trailer couplings, painted posts, elevated cross-
bars or road curbs). Such objects may not be de-
tected by the system and can damage the
vehicle.
444
Controls in detail
Driving systems
! The operational function of the Parktronic The Parktronic system deactivates at i To function properly, the sensors must be
system can be affected by dirty sensors, espe- speeds over approximately 11 mph free of dirt, ice, snow and slush. Clean the sen-
cially at times of snow and ice. (18 km/h). At lower speeds the Parktronic sors regularly, being careful not to scratch or
Make sure that the area on the bumpers around system turns on again. damage the sensors, see “Cleaning the Park-
the sensors is free of dirt, ice and/or slush, tronic* system sensors” (컄 page 589).
The Parktronic system also deactivates
otherwise Parktronic may not function properly,
see “Cleaning the Parktronic* system sensors” when you set the automatic transmission Range of the sensors
(컄 page 589). to P or secure the vehicle in place with the
electronic parking brake and switch off the
i Interference caused by other ultrasonic sig- engine.
nals (e.g. working jackhammers, car wash, or the
air brakes of trucks) can cause the system to The Parktronic system monitors the sur-
send erratic indications, and should be taken roundings of your vehicle with six sensors
into consideration. in the front bumper and four sensors in the
The Parktronic system is an electronic rear bumper.
parking aid with ultrasonic sensors that
helps you while parking.
It visually and audibly indicates the relative
distance between the vehicle and an ob-
stacle.
The Parktronic system is automatically ac-
tivated when you switch on the ignition, re-
lease the electronic parking brake or start
the engine and engage gear D, R or N.
1 Sensors in the front bumper (Only visi-
ble without DISTRONIC Plus*)
445
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Front sensors Minimum distance Warning indicators

Visual signals indicate to the driver the rel-
Center approx. 40 in (100 cm) Center approx. 8 in (20 cm)
ative distance between the sensors and an
Corners approx. 24 in (60 cm) Corners approx. 6 in (15 cm) obstacle.
The warning indicator for the front area is
Rear sensors If the system detects an obstacle in this
in the instrument cluster. The warning indi-
range, all the distance warning segments
cator for the rear area is on the roof liner in
Center approx. 48 in (120 cm) illuminate and you hear a warning signal. If
the rear.
Corners approx. 32 in (80 cm) the obstacle is closer than the minimum
distance, the actual distance may no long-
er be indicated by the system.
! During parking maneuvers, pay special at-
tention to objects located above or below the
height of the sensors (e.g. street curbs, painted
posts, or trailer hitches etc.). The Parktronic sys-
tem will not detect such objects at close range
and damage to your vehicle or the object may re-
sult. 1 Left side of the vehicle
Ultrasonic signals from outside sources (e.g. 2 Right side of the vehicle
truck air brakes, car wash, or jackhammers) may 3 Indicator
impair the operation of the Parktronic system.
Each warning indicator is divided into five
yellow and two red distance segments for
either side of the vehicle.
If yellow indicators 3 under the segments
are lit, Parktronic is ready to measure.
446
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The position of the gear selector lever de- 앫 Front area: Switching Parktronic system on/off
termines which warning indicators will be An intermittent acoustic warning will
The Parktronic system can be switched off
activated. sound as the first red distance segment
manually.
illuminates and a constant acoustic
Gear selector Warning indicator
warning lasting a maximum of
lever position
2 seconds will sound for the second
D Front area activated red distance segment. The signal is
R or N Front and rear area canceled when the gear selector lever
activated is placed in park position P.
P Neither activated 앫 Rear area:
An intermittent acoustic warning will
As your vehicle approaches an object, one sound as the first red distance segment
or more distance segments will illuminate, illuminates and a constant acoustic
depending on the distance. When the sev- warning lasting a maximum of 1 Parktronic button
enth distance segment illuminates, you 2 seconds will sound for the second 2 Indicator lamp
have reached the minimum distance. red distance segment. The signal is
canceled when the gear selector lever
is placed in position D or P.
447
Controls in detail
Driving systems
왘 Switching off the Parktronic sys- 왘 Have the Parktronic system checked Park Assist*
tem: Press button 1. by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
Indicator lamp 2 comes on. ter as soon as possible.
If only the red distance segments illumi-
Warning! G
왘 Switching on the Parktronic system:
nate and no acoustic warning sounds, the
Press button 1 again. Park Assist is a supplemental system. It is
Parktronic system sensors are dirty or
not intended to, nor does it replace, the
Indicator lamp 2 goes out. there is an interference from other radio or
need for extreme care. The responsibility
ultrasonic signals. The Parktronic system
i The Parktronic system is automatically during parking and other critical maneuvers
switched on when the ignition is switched on will automatically switch off after 20 sec-
always remains with the driver.
(컄 page 344). onds and the indicator lamp in the Park-
tronic switch comes on.
Parktronic system malfunction 왘 Switch off the ignition (컄 page 344). Warning! G
If only the red distance segments illumi- 왘 Clean the Parktronic system sensors
nate and an acoustic warning sounds, (컄 page 589). Make sure no persons or animals are in the
there is a malfunction in the Parktronic area in which you are maneuvering. You
system. The Parktronic system will auto- 왘 Switch on the ignition. could otherwise injure them.
matically switch off after 20 seconds and or
the indicator lamp in the Parktronic switch
왘 Check the Parktronic system operation ! Special attention must be paid to objects
comes on. with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes (e.g.
at another location to rule out interfer-
trailer couplings, painted posts, elevated cross-
ence from outside radio or ultrasonic
bars or road curbs). Such objects may not be de-
signals. tected by the system and can damage the
vehicle.
448
Controls in detail
Driving systems
i USA only: ! The operational function of the Park Assist When travelling in Canada in a vehicle not
This device has been approved by the FCC as a system can be affected by dirty sensors, espe- registered in Canada, you must switch off
“Vehicular Radar System”. The radar sensor is cially at times of snow and ice. the radar sensor system* (컄 page 282).
intended for use in an automotive radar system Make sure that the area on the bumpers around Canadian law does not permit the use of
only. Removal, tampering, or altering of the de- the sensors is free of dirt, ice and/or slush, the radar sensor system* (컄 page 282) for
vice will void any warranties, and is not permitted otherwise Park Assist may not function properly,
vehicles from outside of Canada. When you
see “Cleaning the Park Assist* system sensors switch off the radar sensor system*, the
any non-approved way. (USA only)” (컄 page 590).
following functions are deactivated:
could void the user’s authority to operate the ! High-frequency sources such as toll sta- 앫 BAS Plus* (컄 page 69)
equipment. tions, speed measuring systems, etc. can cause
the Park Assist system to malfunction. You can 앫 DISTRONIC Plus* (컄 page 424)
i Canada only: switch off the Park Assist using the Park Assist
앫 Park Assist
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry button (컄 page 452) or switch off the radar sen-
Canada. Operation is subject to the following sors (컄 page 282) to prevent possible malfunc- 앫 PRE-SAFE® Brake* (컄 page 76)
two conditions: tion.
It visually and audibly indicates the relative
(1) This device may not cause interference, and Park Assist is an electronic parking aid distance between the vehicle and an ob-
(2) this device must accept any interference re- with radar sensors that helps you while stacle.
ceived, including interference that may parking.
cause undesired operation of the device. Park Assist is automatically activated
Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will when the engine is running and the trans-
void any warranties, and is not permitted. Do not mission is in position D, R or N.
tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved The Park Assist system deactivates at
way.
speeds over approximately 11 mph. At
Any unauthorized modification to this device lower speeds the Parktronic system turns
on again.
equipment.
449
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Park Assist is also switched off when you Range of the sensors
set the automatic transmission to P or The sensors of the Park Assist system are
switch off the engine. integrated in the front and rear bumpers.
While the transmission is in neutral Make sure that the bumpers are clear of
position N, Park Assist is switched off if dirt, ice and slush in the area of the sen-
you secure the vehicle in place with the sors, as otherwise, Park Assist may not
electronic parking brake. function properly, see “Cleaning the Park
Assist* system sensors (USA only)”
The Park Assist system monitors the sur-
(컄 page 590).
roundings of your vehicle with four sensors
in the front bumper and two sensors in the
rear bumper.
450
Controls in detail
Driving systems
i Due to the sensors’ broad detection range, Warning indicators The position of the gear selector lever de-
it is possible that Park Assist also detects the fol- termines which warning indicators will be
Visual signals indicate to the driver the rel-
lowing obstacles and issues a warning: activated.
ative distance between the sensors and an
앫 obstacles in the ground, e.g. sewer canal obstacle.
covers, rails, bumps in the road or gutters
Gear selector Warning indicator
The warning indicator for the front area is lever position
앫 obstacles moving upward quickly, e.g. rolling
garage doors in the instrument cluster. The warning indi- D Front area activated
cator for the rear area is on the roof liner in R Front and rear area
Front sensors the rear. activated
Center approx. 40 in (100 cm) N With the electronic

parking brake engaged:
Corners approx. 24 in (60 cm) neither activated.
With the electronic
Rear sensors
parking brake released:
Center approx. 50 in (125 cm) front and rear area acti-
vated.
Corners approx. 24 in (60 cm) 1 Left side of the vehicle
2 Right side of the vehicle P Neither activated
3 Indicator
! While parking, pay particular attention to ob- As your vehicle approaches an object, one
jects over or underneath the sensors, e.g. flower Each warning indicator is divided into five
boxes, an elevated crossbar or a trailer tow or more distance segments will illuminate,
yellow and two red distance segments for
hitch. Park Assist does not detect such nearby depending on the distance. When the sev-
either side of the vehicle.
objects. You could otherwise damage the vehicle enth distance segment illuminates, you
or the objects. If yellow indicators 3 under the segments have reached the minimum distance.
are lit, Park Assist is ready to measure.
451
Controls in detail
Driving systems
앫 Front area: Collision warning Switching Park Assist system on/off

As soon as the first red segment lights
Park Assist can detect obstacles from a The Park Assist system can be switched off
up, you will hear an intermittent warn-
considerable distance. If you drive in re- manually.
ing tone for approximately two sec-
verse towards an obstacle, you will hear a
onds. Once the second red segment The Park Assist button with the indicator
warning tone. You must then brake in or-
lights up, you will hear a continuous lamp is located on the control panel on the
der to avoid a collision. The warning tone
warning tone. You have reached the right-hand side of the instrument cluster.
for a collision will not sound when the vehi-
minimum distance.
cle is at a standstill very close to the obsta- i When the indicator lamp is on, the Park
앫 Rear area: cle. In this case, you will hear a Assist system is switched off.
As soon as the first red segment lights corresponding tone for the warning indica-
up, you will hear an intermittent warn- tor in the rear area.
ing tone for approximately two sec-
onds. Once the second red segment i During strong rainfall, the collision warning
may be triggered, for example, by water splash-
lights up, you will hear a continuous ing into the area of the sensors.
warning tone. You have reached the
minimum distance.
i During strong rainfall, the warning indicators
and warning tones may be triggered, for exam-
ple, by water splashing into the area of the sen-
sors. 1 Park Assist button
2 Indicator lamp
452
Controls in detail
Driving systems
왘 Switching off Park Assist system: Dynamic Rear View Monitor* The Dynamic Rear View Monitor is in the
Press button 1. handle strip of the trunk lid.
The Dynamic Rear View Monitor is an elec-
Indicator lamp 2 comes on.
tronic and visual parking aid. It shows you
왘 Switching on Park Assist system: the area behind the vehicle on the
Press button 1 again. COMAND display.
Indicator lamp 2 goes out. In addition, the Dynamic Rear View Moni-
tor contains guide lines to help you with re-
i The Park Assist system is automatically verse parking (back-in parking) and
switched on when the ignition (컄 page 344) and
radar sensors are switched on (컄 page 282). parallel parking.
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as
a reverse-mirror image similar to the view 1 Dynamic Rear View Monitor
in a rear-view mirror.
i The Dynamic Rear View Monitor is also
called “Park Assist” in COMAND display.
453
Controls in detail
Driving systems
View through the camera

Special attention must be paid to objects
Warning! G
i The image from the Dynamic Rear View outside of the camera’s field of view such as
Monitor is shown on the COMAND display Please note that objects which do not touch those located very close to or below the rear
(컄 page 31). bumper, or above the recessed grip of the
the ground, such as the bumper of a vehicle
parked behind you, a trailer hitch, or the luggage compartment lid. Such objects may
back of a truck, may appear to be further not be detected by the system and can dam-
away than they actually are. In this case, you age the vehicle.
should not use the guide lines to judge dis- The Dynamic Rear View Monitor does not
tance. The use of the guide lines to judge warn you about impending collisions with
distance increases the risk of impacting the objects. The driver is always responsible for
objects. safety and must continue to pay attention to
the immediate surroundings while parking
or maneuvering the vehicle. This applies not
Warning! G only to the area behind the vehicle, but also
to the area in front of and to the sides of the
The Dynamic Rear View Monitor is a supple- vehicle. Failure to do so could result in injury
ment system. It is not intended to, nor does to persons and/or damage to the vehicle or
it replace, the need for extreme care. The re- other property. We also recommend that the
sponsibility during parking and other driving driver use the Parktronic system* or Park
maneuvers always remains with the driver. Assist* when parking or maneuvering the
vehicle.
The Dynamic Rear View Monitor may show
obstacles with a distorted perspective, in-
correctly or not at all.
454
Controls in detail
Driving systems
앫 the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In

Warning! G Warning! G this case, have the position and setting
of the camera checked by a qualified
Make sure no persons or animals are in the The Dynamic Rear View Monitor may not
technician. Contact an authorized
area in which you are maneuvering. You function if: Mercedes-Benz Center.
could otherwise injure them. 앫 the trunk lid is not completely closed Do not use the Dynamic Rear View Monitor
앫 it is raining or snowing heavily, or if if the roads are icy, slippery or covered with
there is thick fog snow. The vehicle could slip causing the ac-
앫 in a very dark area tual vehicle position to deviate from the one
shown on the COMAND display.
앫 the camera is exposed to very strong
white light (white stripes may appear on This may cause injury to you or others, or
the COMAND display) damage the vehicle or objects.
앫 the surrounding area is lit with fluores- Mounting tires/rims of other specification
cent light (the COMAND display can than the original equipment tires/rims may
flicker) impair the function of the Dynamic Rear
앫 there is a sudden change in tempera- View Monitor. Contact an authorized
ture, for example when you drive out of Mercedes-Benz Center.
the cold into a heated garage in winter
(lens condensation)
앫 outside temperatures are very high (lens
condensation)
앫 the camera lens is dirty or covered, see
“Cleaning the Dynamic Rear View
Monitor lens*” (컄 page 590)
455
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Switching on Dynamic Rear View Reverse parking (back-in parking)

Warning! G Monitor
Use of Dynamic Rear View Monitor can be i The Dynamic Rear View Monitor must be ac-
dangerous if you are color-blind or have im- tivated in the instrument cluster control system
in order for it to be switched on (컄 page 279).
paired color vision.
Only use Dynamic Rear View Monitor if you 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 344).
can see and distinguish all colored guide 왘 Switch on COMAND (컄 page 85). This function helps you when you are re-
lines shown by Dynamic Rear View Monitor
왘 Move gear selector lever to position R versing in a straight line or backing in at
on the COMAND display.
(reverse gear). any angle.
The COMAND display will show the The space required by the vehicle for re-
area behind the vehicle with guide lines versing is shown by guide lines.
to help you reverse into a parking When you turn the steering wheel to a
place. straight-ahead position, you will see the
i If you activate a different function on the guide lines on the COMAND display in the
driver’s COMAND controls while reverse parking following order:
or parallel parking, the image from the back-up
camera is interrupted.
To reactivate the camera, take the vehicle out of
reverse gear and then re-engage reverse gear
again.
456
Controls in detail
Driving systems
parked behind you, a trailer hitch, or the

Warning! G back of a truck are in the path, do not ap-
Please note that objects which do not touch proach the object on the ground any closer
the ground, such as the bumper of a vehicle than red guide line 4.
parked behind you, a trailer hitch, or the
back of a truck, may appear to be further
away than they actually are. In this case, you
should not use the guide lines to judge dis-
tance as the use of the guide lines to judge
1 Yellow and blue guide lines for vehicle distance increases the risk of impacting the
width objects.
2 Yellow 13 ft (4 m) guide line Even when the object you approach is di-
3 Yellow 39 in (1 m) guide line rectly on the ground (and nothing on the ob-
4 Red 10 in (0.25 m) guide line ject extends above the ground beyond the
object’s contours directly touching the
The red 10 in (0.25 m) guide line 4, the 5 Blue guide lines for straight driving
ground) and no objects that do not touch
yellow 39 in (1 m) guide line 3 and the 6 Symbol for “reverse parking”
the ground, such as the bumper of a vehicle
yellow 13 ft (4 m) guide line 2 correspond 7 Yellow and red guide lines for cornering
to the relevant distance from the rear of
When you turn the steering wheel out of
the vehicle. The yellow and blue guide lines
the straight-ahead position, the positions
for vehicle width 1 show the required
of the yellow and red guide lines 7
width for the vehicle.
change depending on the steering wheel’s
position. The space required by the vehicle
for reverse cornering is indicated by yellow
and red guide lines 7.
457
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Backing in straight Backing in at any angle ! While parking, do not approach any obsta-
cles closer than indicated by red guide line 4.
i The Dynamic Rear View Monitor must be ac- i The Dynamic Rear View Monitor must be ac-
tivated in the instrument cluster control system tivated in the instrument cluster control system 왘 Back in carefully.
in order for it to be switched on (컄 page 279). in order for it to be switched on (컄 page 279).
왘 When the blue guide lines 5 for
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 344). 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 344). straight driving lie parallel inside the
왘 Switch on COMAND (컄 page 85). 왘 Switch on COMAND (컄 page 85). desired parking space, straighten the
steering wheel for straight driving.
왘 Move gear selector lever to position R 왘 Move gear selector lever to position R
(reverse gear). (reverse gear). 왘 Back in enough to leave sufficient free
space around the vehicle.
왘 Use the COMAND controller 왘 Use the COMAND controller
(컄 page 88) to select “reverse parking” (컄 page 88) to select “reverse parking” Parallel parking
function 6. function 6.
You will see the guide lines for reverse You will see the guide lines for reverse
parking on the COMAND display. parking on the COMAND display.
The desired parking space is wide 왘 Turn steering wheel so that the yellow
enough if nothing is inside the yellow and red guide lines for cornering 7 are
and blue guide lines 1 of your intend- pointing towards the desired parking
ed driving path or protrudes into this space. This function assists you when you wish to
area. park in a row, e.g. in a parking place paral-
The desired parking space is wide
lel to the road.
! While parking, do not approach any obsta- enough if nothing is inside yellow and
cles closer than indicated by red guide line 4. red guide lines 7 of your intended i The Dynamic Rear View Monitor must be ac-
driving path or protrudes into this area. tivated in the instrument cluster control system
왘 Back in straight carefully. in order for it to be switched on (컄 page 279).
458
Controls in detail
Driving systems
왘 Stop the vehicle 왘 Use the COMAND controller

앫 at a distance of approximately (컄 page 88) to select “parallel parking”
three feet (one meter) parallel to function 2.
the vehicle that is in front of the de- You will see the guide lines for parallel
sired parking space. parking on the COMAND display.
앫 in such a way that the front of the 왘 Back up carefully parallel to parked car
parked vehicle is parallel to your until the respective vertical blue guide
rear wheel. line 1 is at the end of the parked vehi-
cle next to you.
왘 Switch on COMAND (컄 page 85).
왘 Stop the vehicle. 1 Vertical blue guide line
왘 Move gear selector lever to position R
3 Extended blue guide line
(reverse gear).
4 Blue guide lines for vehicle contour
Warning! G
왘 With the vehicle at a standstill, turn
If the respective vertical blue guide line 1 steering wheel in parking direction until
is not yet located at the end of the parked blue guide lines 3 and 1 appear and
vehicle and you are already turning into the the rectangle formed by guide lines 4
parking space, you could collide with the shows the desired parking position. If
parked vehicle. Stop the parking procedure another vehicle is located next to you,
immediately. Pull out of the parking space the extended blue guide line 3 must
and start the parking procedure over again. just touch the corresponding vertical
blue guide line 1. 컄컄
1 Vertical blue guide line
2 Symbol for “parallel parking”
459
Controls in detail
Driving systems
컄컄 i If an obstacle is inside of or protrudes into 왘 Back up until bent guide line 5 inter-
the area marked by blue guide lines 4 for the sects the edge of the parking space,
vehicle, the parking space is too small for the ve- e.g. the curb.
hicle.
왘 Stop the vehicle.
i If you turn the steering wheel too far, the
message “Steering wheel turned too far. Please
adjust steering wheel” appears on the COMAND
display. Turn the steering wheel back until the
message disappears and the extended blue
guide line 3 intersects with vertical blue guide
line 1. 5 Bent blue guide line
If you back up using the wrong wheel angle, the
following appears in the COMAND display: 왘 Back up with the set wheel angle.
“Steering wheel turned too far. Park Assist dis- The guide lines in the COMAND display
abled.”. Pull out of the parking space and start disappear. After a short distance, the
the parking procedure over again. 6 Yellow and red guide lines for cornering
bent blue guide line 5 appears.
7 Blue guide line for straight driving
i If you turn the steering wheel while backing
up, the following appears in the COMAND dis-
play: “The steering wheel position has been
changed. Park Assist disabled.”. Pull out of the
parking space and start the parking procedure
over again.
460
Controls in detail
Driving systems
왘 With the vehicle at a standstill, turn Night View Assist* The image on the multifunction display cor-
steering wheel as far as it will go in the responds to a road lit up by high-beam
opposite direction. headlamps.
The guide lines for straight driving 7
Warning! G
and cornering 6 appear in the
Night View Assist is only an aid to support Warning! G
COMAND display.
you while driving and cannot substitute your
Night View Assist cannot record objects im-
왘 Back up using the set wheel angle until careful attention. Do not rely on the display
mediately in front of or next to the vehicle.
blue guide line 7 for straight driving is of the Night View Assist; instead, continue
When maneuvering, continue to look
parallel to the edge of the parking to look through the windshield. You are al-
through the windshield. Make sure no per-
space, e.g. the curb. ways responsible for safety and must drive
sons or animals are in the area in which you
in accordance with traffic conditions. Other-
왘 Now straighten out steering wheel and are maneuvering. You could otherwise in-
wise, you could endanger yourself and oth-
back up until you still have just enough jure them.
ers.
room behind the vehicle.
If it is foggy, raining or snowing, the clarity of
While doing so, observe
the Night View Assist image on the multi-
Parktronic* (컄 page 444) or Park As-
function display may be diminished.
sist* (컄 page 448) warning indicators.
Night View Assist illuminates the road with

infrared light in addition to the normal
headlamps.
A camera at the top of the windshield mea-
sures the infrared light and shows a
black-and-white image on the multifunc-
tion display.
461
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The Night View Assist image on the multi- Switching on or off 왘 Press button 1 up or down.
function display is not impaired
You can only switch on the Night View As- The Night View Assist image appears
앫 by the headlamps of approaching vehi- sist if on the multifunction display.
cles
앫 the SmartKey in the starter switch is i The infrared headlamps only come on above
앫 if you cannot switch on the high beams set to position 2 a speed of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h).
due to oncoming traffic Therefore, when you are at a standstill, you do
앫 it is dark not have a complete view and cannot check the
As a result, you can better follow the function of the Night View Assist.
앫 the light switch is set to * or B
course of the road and detect obstacles
or if the daytime driving lamps are
earlier on. Image on multifunction display
switched on
i Infrared light is invisible to the human eye 앫 the automatic transmission is not in When you switch on Night View Assist, the
and can therefore remain permanently switched image for the speed gauge changes on the
position R
on without blinding oncoming traffic. multifunction display. The speed gauge is
The camera is at the top of the windshield. shown as a bar on the lower edge of the
multifunction display. The line for main
menus is no longer available. If you would
like to change a setting using the steering
wheel buttons, you must first switch off
Night View Assist.
1 Night View Assist on or off
1 Night View Assist camera
462
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Adjusting instrument cluster Dirty or fogged-up windshield

illumination
If the windshield in front of the camera is
fogged up on the inside or outside or if it is
dirty, the Night View Assist image is dimin-
ished.
Warning! G
Please do not forget that your primary re-
1 Night View Assist image sponsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s
2 Speedometer display attention to the road must always be
1 Knob his/her primary focus when driving. For
i If you change the brightness of the instru- your safety and the safety of others, stop be-
ment cluster while Night View Assist is switched 왘 Make sure the Night View Assist is fore trying to remove window fogging or
on, only the brightness of the multifunction dis- switched on. cleaning the window in front of the Night
play is changed.
왘 Brightening illumination: Turn View Assist camera.
knob 1 clockwise. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
왘 Dimming illumination: Turn knob 1 (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
counterclockwise. covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate-
463
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Removing condensation
왘 Check settings of automatic climate
control and change them, if necessary
(컄 page 469).
왘 Swing the camera cover downward
(컄 page 591).
Cleaning inside of windshield

왘 Clean inside of windshield in front of
camera with a soft, non-scratching
cloth (컄 page 591).
464
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Night View Assist* malfunction
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution

The quality of the Night View Assist image The windshield wipers are leaving streaks 왘 Replace windshield wiper blades
has diminished. on the windshield. (컄 page 684).
The area of the windshield within the cam- 왘 Clean windshield (컄 page 591).
era’s field of view is dirty.
The area of the windshield within the cam- 왘 Replace windshield.
era’s field of view has been damaged.
The area of the windshield within the cam- 왘 Remove condensation (컄 page 464).
era’s field of view is fogged over.
The area of the windshield within the cam- 왘 Defrost windshield (컄 page 472).
era’s field of view is iced over.
465
Controls in detail
Air vents
466
Controls in detail
Air vents
Item Please comply with the following instruc-

Warning! G tions in order for the automatic climate
1 Left side defroster vent, fixed control to function optimally:
2 Left side air vent, adjustable When operating the automatic climate con-
trol, the air that enters the passenger com- 앫 Keep the air intake grille in front of the
3 Left center air vent, adjustable windshield free of snow, leaves, sticks,
partment through the air vents can be very
4 Thumbwheel for air volume control hot or very cold (depending on the set tem- and any other debris.
for left center air vent perature). This may cause burns or frostbite 앫 Always keep all air vents and grilles in
5 Thumbwheel for air volume control to unprotected skin in the immediate area of the passenger compartment free from
for right center air vent the air vents. obstruction.
6 Right center air vent, adjustable Always keep sufficient distance between un-
protected parts of the body and the air
7 Right side defroster vent, fixed
vents. If necessary, use the air distribution
8 Right side air vent, adjustable adjustment (컄 page 253) to direct the air to
9 Front climate control panel air vents in the vehicle interior that are not
in the immediate area of unprotected skin.
a Thumbwheel for left rear center air
vents
b Left rear center air vent, adjustable
c Right rear center air vent, adjustable
d Thumbwheel for right rear center air
vents
e Rear climate control panel*
467
Controls in detail
Air vents
Opening and closing air vents i Vehicles without rear passenger compart-
ment climate control*:
i For draft-free ventilation, move the sliders The temperature at the air vents b and c
for the center air vents 3 and 6 (컄 page 466) (컄 page 466) for rear passenger compartment
to the middle position. will be approximately the same as at the dash-
board center air vents.
Center air vents
Ventilated storage compartment
왘 Opening: Turn thumbwheels 4
and 5 upward (컄 page 466). In vehicles without rear passenger com-
왘 Closing: Turn thumbwheels 4 and 5 partment climate control*: the storage
compartment under the front armrest can 1 Switching ventilation off
downward.
be ventilated when the automatic climate 2 Switching ventilation on
Side air vents control is switched on. The air volume is dependent on the setting
of:
왘 Opening: Turn thumbwheels next to ! Extreme temperatures can occur in the stor-
side air vents 2 and 8 upward age compartment. Switch off the air vents in the 앫 air distribution control
(컄 page 466). storage compartment while the heating is
switched on if you are transporting heat-sensi- 앫 air volume control
왘 Closing: Turn thumbwheels down- tive items in the compartment. 앫 air vents in the dashboard
ward. Keep the air vents free of obstruction.
The air temperature is about the same as
Rear center console air vents that of the dashboard air vents. It cannot
be regulated separately.
왘 Increasing/decreasing air volume:
Turn thumbwheels a or d to the left
or right (컄 page 466).
468
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
왔 Automatic climate control
Automatic climate control panel, front
Item Item Item

1 AUTO mode for air distribution and 5 Air recirculation 9 Manual fan speed adjustment, right
volume, left 6 Automatic climate control on/off a Temperature control, right
2 Temperature control, left 7 Residual engine heat and ventilation b AUTO mode for air distribution and
3 Manual fan speed adjustment, left (REST) volume, right
4 Front defroster 8 Rear window defroster
469
Controls in detail
i If you have the air distribution and air vol- Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and Do not obstruct air volume by placing objects on
ume automatically controlled, you can adjust the odors are filtered out before outside air en- the air volume-through exhaust slots below the
temperature, footwell temperature and air flow. ters the passenger compartment through rear window.
The following basic settings are recommended: the air distribution system. The following automatic climate control
앫 Automatic air distribution control functions can be operated via COMAND:
(컄 page 469)
Warning! G Function Page
앫 Temperature: 72°F (22°C) (컄 page 472)
앫 Footwell temperature: 0 (컄 page 255)
Temperature 252
Follow the recommended settings for heat-
앫 Air flow: focused (컄 page 256) ing and cooling given on the following pages Air distribution 253
and in the “COMAND automatic climate Air volume 253
The automatic climate control is operation-
control” section (컄 page 251). Otherwise
al whenever the engine is running. You can Switching off cooling (“AC ”) OFF
254
the windows could fog up, impairing visibili-
operate the climate control system in ei- Central climate control (“Mono”) 255
ty and endangering you and others.
ther the automatic or manual mode. The
system cools or heats the interior depend- Footwell temperature 255
ing on the selected interior temperature i Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution) Air flow from air vents 256
and the current outside temperature. may require replacement of the filter before its
scheduled interval. A clogged filter will reduce Rear climate control* 257
It can only function optimally when you are the air volume to the interior.
driving with the windows and the tilt/slid- If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the interior
ing sunroof/panorama sunroof* closed. before driving off, see “Summer opening fea-
It is possible to completely deactivate the ture” (컄 page 385). The automatic climate con-
trol will then adjust the interior temperature to
climate control system (컄 page 471). the set value much faster.
Keep the air intake grille in front of the wind-
shield free of snow, leaves, sticks, and any other
debris.
470
Controls in detail
Deactivating climate control system Operating climate control system in Deactivating

automatic mode
왘 Press button U (컄 page 469) up or
왘 Deactivating: Press button ´
down.
(컄 page 469) up or down. Air distribution and air volume is adjusted
automatically by the automatic climate or
The indicator lamp on the button
control system. You can also adjust the Adjust air distribution (컄 page 253).
comes on. You will see “Climate Con- 왘
settings for air distribution and air volume
trol OFF” in the COMAND display. or
manually.
왘 Adjust air volume (컄 page 472).
Warning! G i In automatic mode, cooling with dehumidify
is switched on. This function can be switched off The indicator lamp on button U
if necessary (컄 page 254). goes out. The automatic function is
When the automatic climate control is
switched off, the outside air supply and cir- switched off.
Activating
culation are also switched off. Only choose You can adjust the air distribution
this setting for a short time. Otherwise the 왘 Press button U (컄 page 469) up or (컄 page 253) or air volume
windows could fog up, impairing visibility down. (컄 page 472) manually.
and endangering you and others.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
왘 Reactivating: Press button ´
(컄 page 469) up or down.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. You will see the previous settings
in the COMAND display.
471
Controls in detail
Setting temperature Adjusting air volume Activating

왘 Press button ; (컄 page 469) up or
Use temperature controls %$ Use buttons Q (컄 page 469) in the cen-
down.
2 and a (컄 page 469) in the center con- ter console or COMAND to separately ad-
sole or COMAND (컄 page 252) to sepa- just the air volume on each side of the The indicator lamp on the button
rately adjust the air temperature on each passenger compartment. comes on.
side of the passenger compartment. You
왘 Press button Q up to increase or The air conditioning switches to the follow-
should raise or lower the temperature set- ing functions automatically:
down to decrease air volume.
ting in small increments, preferably start-
ing at 72°F (22°C). The automatic climate The indicator lamps on buttons U 앫 most efficient blower speed and heat-
control will adjust to the set temperature (컄 page 469) goes out. ing power, depending on outside tem-
as fast as possible. perature
The automatic function is switched off.
왘 Press temperature control %$ The air volume is adjusted correspond- 앫 air flows onto the windshield and the
2 and/or a (컄 page 469) upward or ing to the set blower speed. front door windows
downward. 앫 the air conditioning compressor
Front defroster switches on at outside temperatures
The climate control system will corre-
spondingly adjust the interior air tem- above approximately 41°F (5°C) for
You can use this setting to defrost the
perature. air-drying
windshield, for example if it is iced up. You
can also defog the windshield and the door 앫 the air recirculation mode is switched
windows. off
i Keep this setting selected only until the

windshield is clear again.
472
Controls in detail
Adjustments The indicator lamp on button ; goes Rear window defroster

Depending on vehicle production date, you out.
can adjust the air volume and the temper- i The air conditioning compressor remains on Activating
ature when the front defroster is switched even with the indicator lamp on button ;
on. The air flow will remain on the wind- goes out. This helps to prevent windshield from
shield and door windows. fogging. 왘 Press button < (컄 page 469) up or
down.
왘 Press button Q up or down to in- Deactivating
crease or decrease air volume to the The indicator lamp on the button
desired level. 왘 Press button ; (컄 page 469) up or comes on.
down.
The air volume increases/decreases to ! The rear window defroster uses a large
the next higher/lower blower speed The indicator lamp on the button goes amount of power. To keep battery drain to a min-
and heating switches to the tempera- out. imum, switch off the defroster as soon as the
ture that was set before the front de- rear window is clear.
The previous settings are once again in
froster was switched on. effect, except air recirculation mode
Deactivating
The indicator lamp on button ; stays off.
goes out. 왘 Press button < (컄 page 469) up or
Windshield fogged on the outside down.
or
왘 Switch the windshield wipers on The indicator lamp on the button goes
왘 Press temperature control %$ (컄 page 381). out.
2 and/or a (컄 page 469) upward or
downward. 왘 Press button U (컄 page 469) up or i The defroster is automatically deactivated
down. after some time of operation depending on the
Heating switches to the temperature outside temperature.
that was set before the front defroster The indicator lamp on the button
was switched on. comes on.
473
Controls in detail
i Maximum cooling MAXCOOL is only avail- 왘 Activating: Press button ,

Warning! G able when the engine is running. (컄 page 469) up or down.
Any accumulation of snow and ice should be The indicator lamp on the button
Air recirculation mode comes on.
removed from the rear window before driv-
ing. Visibility could otherwise be impaired, Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent i The air recirculation mode is activated auto-
endangering you and others. unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle matically at high outside temperatures.
from the outside (e.g. before driving in a The indicator lamp on button , is not lit when
i If the rear window defroster switches off too tunnel). This setting cuts off the intake of the air recirculation mode is automatically acti-
soon and the indicator lamp goes out, this indi- outside air and recirculates the air in the vated.
cates that too many electrical consumers are op- passenger compartment. A quantity of outside air is added when the cool-
erating simultaneously and the load on the ing demand is not at maximum.
battery is reducing available voltage. The system
responds automatically by deactivating the rear Warning! G If the air conditioning has been turned off
(컄 page 254) or the outside temperature is be-
window defroster. low 41°F (5°C), the air recirculation mode will
Fogged windows impair visibility, endanger-
not switch on automatically.
Maximum cooling MAXCOOL (USA only) ing you and others. If the windows begin to
fog on the inside, switching off the air 왘 Deactivating: Press button ,
If U is selected on both the left and recirculation mode immediately should clear (컄 page 469) up or down.
right side and there is a high demand for interior window fogging. If interior window The indicator lamp on the button goes
cooling, the display “MAXCOOL” appears fogging persists, make sure the air out.
in the COMAND display. conditioning (컄 page 254) is activated, or
press button ;.
This provides the fastest possible cooling
of the vehicle interior (when windows and
tilt/sliding sunroof or tilt/sliding panel*
are closed).
474
Controls in detail
i The manually selected air recirculation Air recirculation mode with conve-
Vehicles with panorama roof*:
mode is deactivated automatically: nience closing or opening feature
When using the air recirculation mode with
앫 after 5 minutes if the outside temperature is convenience closing feature, should the up-
below approximately 41°F (5°C) Warning! G ward movement of a window be blocked by
컄컄
앫 after 5 minutes if the air conditioning is some obstruction including, but not limited
turned off Never operate the door windows and the to arms, hands, fingers, etc., the automatic
앫 after 30 minutes if the outside temperature tilt/sliding sunroof or tilt/sliding panel* if reversal feature will not operate.
is above approximately 41°F (5°C) there is the possibility of anyone being In the event that the procedure causes po-
harmed by the closing procedure. tential danger, the closing of the door win-
Vehicles with tilt/sliding sunroof: dows or the tilt/sliding panel can be
In the event that the procedure causes po- immediately halted by releasing
tential danger, the closing of the door win- button ,.
dows can be immediately halted by pressing The closing of the door windows and the
the respective window switch. The closing of tilt/sliding sunroof or tilt/sliding panel* can
the tilt/sliding sunroof can be immediately be reversed by again pressing and holding
halted by moving the tilt/sliding sunroof button ,.
switch in the overhead control panel in any
direction. Vehicles with tilt/sliding sunroof
왘 Convenience closing: Press
button , for approximately
2 seconds.
The door windows and/or tilt/sliding
sunroof will close. You can release
button , once the closing proce-
475
Controls in detail
컄컄 dure has begun. The windows and i A window or tilt/sliding sunroof will only re- Vehicles with panorama roof*
tilt/sliding sunroof continue closing turn to its previous position if it has not been
왘 Convenience closing: Press and hold
until they are fully closed. The indicator moved to another position using the respective
window switch or tilt/sliding sunroof switch af- button , until the door windows and
lamp on the button comes on. The air
ter it was closed with button ,. the tilt/sliding panel are closed or have
recirculation mode is activated.
reached the desired position. The indi-
A window or tilt/sliding sunroof that has been
왘 Convenience opening: Press moved will remain in its current position if cator lamp on the button comes on.
button , for approximately button , is used to reopen the remaining The air recirculation mode is activated.
2 seconds. windows or tilt/sliding sunroof. 왘 Convenience opening: Press and hold
The door windows and/or tilt/sliding button , until the door windows and
sunroof will return to their previous po- the tilt/sliding panel are opened or
sition. You can release button , have reached the desired position.
once the opening procedure has be-
The indicator lamp on the button goes
gun. The windows and tilt/sliding sun-
out. The air recirculation mode is deac-
roof continue opening until they have
tivated.
reached their previous positions. The
indicator lamp on the button goes out. Residual engine heat and ventilation
The air recirculation mode is deactivat-
ed. With the engine switched off, it is possible
to continue to heat or ventilate the interior.
This feature makes use of the residual heat
produced by the engine.
i If you switch on the residual heat function
when outside temperatures are high, only the
ventilation will be switched on.
476
Controls in detail
i Regardless of the selected air volume, the i The residual heat is automatically turned off:
blower operates at low speed when heating. In 앫 when the ignition is switched on
case of ventilation the blower operates at higher
speed. 앫 after approximately 30 minutes
앫 if the battery voltage drops
i How long the system will provide heating de-
pends on 앫 if the coolant temperature is too low
앫 the coolant temperature
Rear passenger compartment climate
앫 the temperature set by the operator control*
Activating Automatic climate control panel, rear

왘 Switch off the ignition (컄 page 344). Warning! G
Item
왘 Press button T (컄 page 469) up or Follow the recommended settings for heat- 1 Temperature control, left
down. ing and cooling as given in the instructions
2 Air distribution, left
The indicator lamp on the button for the front climate control (컄 page 469).
(automatic, manual)
comes on. Otherwise the windows could fog up, impair-
ing visibility for the driver and endangering 3 Air volume (automatic, manual)
Deactivating you and others. 4 Mode selector
왘 Press button T (컄 page 469) up or 5 Air distribution, right
down. (automatic, manual)
The indicator lamp on the button goes 6 Temperature control, right
out.
477
Controls in detail
i At low outside temperatures or if you have 왘 Setting temperature: Use tempera- 왘 Adjusting air distribution: Press but-
switched off the cooling function, you cannot ture controls 1 and 6 (컄 page 477) ton 2 or 5 (컄 page 477) up or down
cool the rear passenger compartment. to separately adjust the air tempera- repeatedly until desired air distribution
ture on each side of the rear passenger is set.
i If the climate control system in the rear pas- compartment.
senger compartment is adjusted using COMAND The direction of the arrows represent
(컄 page 257), the ) symbol appears in the 왘 Increasing/decreasing: Press the air distribution. “MAN” appears in
display of the rear control unit. The rear climate temperature control 1 or 6 up or the display over the button for the func-
control system can no longer be adjusted using
down. tion mode.
the rear control unit.
The climate control system will cor- 왘 Adjusting air volume: Press air vol-
왘 Switching on automatic mode: Press
respondingly adjust the interior air ume control 3 (컄 page 477) up or
button 4 (컄 page 477) up or down re-
temperature. down.
peatedly until “AUTO” mode is selected
in display. The air volume is increased or de-
creased. “MAN” appears in the display
왘 Switching off rear climate control:
over the button for the function mode.
Press button 4 (컄 page 477) up or
down repeatedly until “OFF” mode is
selected in display.
왘 Switching off automatic mode: Press
button 4 (컄 page 477) up or down re-
peatedly until “MAN” mode is selected
in display.
478
Controls in detail
Trunk
왔 Trunk
Opening trunk from outside Opening trunk from inside
Warning! G
Vehicles without trunk opening/closing
Make sure the trunk is closed when the en- system*
gine is running and while driving. Among
other dangers exhaust fumes may enter the
vehicle interior. These fumes are damaging
to your health.
Opening trunk
You can open the trunk if the vehicle is sta- 1 Trunk lid handle
tionary.
왘 Press and hold button Š on the
A minimum height clearance of 6.0 ft SmartKey or SmartKey with
(1.8 m) is required to open the trunk lid. 1 Remote trunk opening switch
KEYLESS-GO* until trunk unlocks and
begins to open. 왘 Press switch 1 until the trunk begins
! The trunk lid swings open upwards automat-
ically. Always make sure that there is sufficient or to open.
overhead clearance. The trunk opens. The indicator lamp in
왘 Pull on handle 1.
i If the trunk does not open, it is still locked switch 1 comes on and remains lit un-
separately (컄 page 484). In vehicles without KEYLESS-GO*: The til the trunk closed.
vehicle must be unlocked.
! Vehicles with trunk opening/closing sys-
tem*: To stop the opening procedure, press
button Š on the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*.
479
Controls in detail
Trunk
Vehicles with trunk opening/closing Trunk opening-height restriction* The vehicle is only locked when the turn signals
system* flash three times. If you are carrying a second
Vehicles with trunk opening/closing sys- SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, you can
tem*: still lock the vehicle.
The trunk lid opening height can be limited
Closing trunk from outside manually
when transporting goods on a roof rack
(e.g. presence of an optional MB sport lug-
gage container). When activated, the trunk
opens to approximately the height of the
roof edge.
왘 Activate the limiting opening height of
trunk lid using the COMAND system
1 Remote trunk opening/closing* switch (컄 page 249).
왘 Press and hold switch 1 until the
trunk is opened. Closing trunk
1 Handles
The indicator lamp in switch 1 comes i Do not place the SmartKey in the open
on and remains lit until the trunk is trunk. You may lock yourself out. 왘 Lower trunk lid by pulling firmly on
closed. handles 1.
i If the vehicle was previously centrally
To interrupt the opening procedure: locked, the trunk will lock automatically after 왘 Close the trunk with hands placed flat
closing it. All turn signal lamps flash three times on the trunk lid.
왘 Release switch 1.
to confirm locking.
The power closing assist automatically en-
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: To prevent a possi- sures that the trunk lid is pulled closed
ble inadvertent lockout, the trunk will open auto- completely (컄 page 342).
matically if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is
recognized inside the vehicle or in the trunk.
480
Controls in detail
Trunk
Closing trunk from outside

앫 press the trunk closing switch
Warning! G automatically*
앫 press the KEYLESS-GO* locking/clos-
To prevent possible personal injury, always ing switch
keep hands and fingers away from the trunk Warning! G 앫 pull the trunk lid handle
lid opening when closing the trunk. Be espe- Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
cially careful when small children are KEYLESS-GO* removed from the starter
make sure no one is in danger of being in-
around. switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
jured. To prevent possible personal injury,
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the always keep hands and fingers away from removed from the vehicle, the remote trunk
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* the trunk lid opening when closing the trunk. opening/closing* switch can be operated.
from the starter switch, take it with you, and Be especially careful when small children Therefore, do not leave children unattended
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat- are around. To stop the closing procedure, in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an do one of the following: vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a
unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised ac- vehicle could result in an accident and/or
앫 press button Š on the SmartKey or
cess to a vehicle could result in an accident serious personal injury.
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
앫 press the trunk opening/closing*
In vehicles with trunk opening/closing sys-
switch (on the driver’s door)
tem* you can close the trunk separately
from the outside using the trunk closing
switch.
481
Controls in detail
Trunk
왘 Press trunk closing switch 1 briefly.

The trunk closes.
i If the trunk lid comes into contact with an
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has been
piled too high) in the upper motion sequence, the
closing procedure is stopped and the trunk re-
opens slightly.
Closing trunk and locking vehicle from

outside (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*)
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO* 1 KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch
In vehicles with trunk opening/closing sys-
1 Trunk closing switch 왘 Make sure you have the SmartKey with
tem* and KEYLESS-GO*, you can close the
KEYLESS-GO with you.
trunk and lock the vehicle simultaneously
from the outside using the KEYLESS-GO 왘 Press switch 1 briefly.
locking/closing switch. With all doors closed:
앫 The locking knobs in the doors
move down.
앫 The trunk starts to close automati-
cally.
앫 All turn signal lamps flash three
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO* times to confirm locking once the
1 Trunk closing switch trunk has closed completely.
482
Controls in detail
Trunk
앫 An acoustic signal sounds three Closing trunk from inside i If the trunk lid comes into contact with an
times (if equipped and feature acti- automatically* object while closing (e.g. luggage that has been
vated). piled too high) in the upper motion sequence, the
앫 The anti-theft alarm system is Warning! G opens slightly.
armed.
Maintain sight of trunk area while operating In vehicles with trunk opening/closing sys-
i If the trunk lid comes into contact with an door mounted switch. Monitor the closing tem* you can close the trunk from the in-
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has been side using the remote trunk opening/
piled too high) in the upper motion sequence, the procedure carefully to make sure no one is
in danger of being injured. closing* switch.
opens slightly. To interrupt the closing procedure, release
the door mounted remote trunk open-
ing/closing* switch.
Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* removed from the starter
switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
removed from the vehicle, the remote trunk
opening/closing* switch can be operated.
Therefore, do not leave children unattended
in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked 1 Remote trunk opening/closing* switch
vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a (vehicles with trunk opening/closing
vehicle could result in an accident and/or system*) 컄컄
serious personal injury.
483
Controls in detail
Trunk
컄컄 왘 Press and hold switch 1 until the The trunk opens. Valet locking
trunk is closed.
i The emergency release button unlocks and i To deny any unauthorized person access to
The indicator lamp in the switch goes opens the trunk while the vehicle is standing still
the trunk, e.g. when you valet park the vehicle,
out when the trunk is closed. or in motion.
lock it separately with the mechanical key. Leave
To interrupt the closing procedure: Illumination of the emergency release but- only the SmartKey or SmartKey with
ton: KEYLESS-GO* less its mechanical key with the
왘 Release switch 1. vehicle.
앫 The button will flash for 30 minutes af-
Trunk emergency release ter opening the trunk.
앫 The button will flash for 60 minutes af-
With the emergency release button, the
ter closing the trunk.
trunk can be opened from inside the trunk.
i The emergency release button does not
open the trunk if the vehicle battery is dis-
charged or disconnected.
1 Neutral position
2 Locked
왘 Close the trunk (컄 page 480).
왘 Remove the mechanical key from the
1 Emergency release button
SmartKey (컄 page 671).
왘 Briefly press emergency release
왘 Insert the mechanical key in the trunk
button 1.
lid lock.
484
Controls in detail
Trunk
왘 Turn the mechanical key clockwise to

position 2 to lock the trunk.
The trunk remains locked even when the
vehicle is centrally unlocked.
i You can only cancel the separate trunk lock-
ing mode by means of the mechanical key.
왘 Insert the mechanical key in the trunk
lid lock.
왘 Turn the mechanical key counterclock-
wise to neutral position 1 to unlock the
trunk.
You can now open the trunk
(컄 page 479).
485
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
Opening and closing power tilt/sliding Do not open the tilt/sliding sunroof if there is
The tilt/sliding sunroof is made out of glass.
sunroof snow or ice on the roof, as this could result in
In the event of an accident, the glass may malfunctions.
shatter. This may result in an opening in the
Depending on vehicle production date your vehi-
roof.
Warning! G cle may be equipped with a crank to open or
In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing close the tilt/sliding sunroof manually should an
When closing the tilt/sliding sunroof, make their seat belts or not wearing them properly electrical malfunction occur (컄 page 674).
sure that there is no danger of anyone being may be thrown out of the opening. Such an ! Please keep in mind that weather conditions
harmed by the closing procedure. opening also presents a potential for injury can sometimes change rapidly. Make sure to
for occupants wearing their seat belts close the tilt/sliding sunroof when leaving the
If the tilt/sliding sunroof encounters an ob-
properly as entire body parts or portions of vehicle. If water enters the vehicle interior, vehi-
struction that blocks its path in a circum- cle electronics could be damaged which is not
them may protrude from the passenger
stance where you are closing the tilt/sliding covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
compartment.
sunroof by moving the tilt/sliding sunroof Warranty.
switch past the resistance point, or by When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
pressing and holding button ‹ on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* i When the tilt/sliding sunroof is open, reso-
nance noises may result in addition to the usual
SmartKey, by pressing and holding the sen- from the starter switch, take it with you, and
wind noises. They are caused by minimal pres-
sor surface (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*) on lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat- sure changes in the passenger compartment. To
the outside door handle, the automatic re- tended in the vehicle, or with access to an reduce or eliminate these noises, change the po-
versal function will not operate. unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised ac- sition of the tilt/sliding sunroof or open a side
cess to a vehicle could result in an accident window slightly.
The opening/closing procedure of the
tilt/sliding sunroof can be immediately halt-
ed by releasing the switch or, if the switch
was moved past the resistance point and re- ! To avoid damaging the seals, do not trans-
leased, by moving the switch in any direc- port any objects with sharp edges which can
tion. stick out of the tilt/sliding sunroof.
486
Controls in detail
i You can also open or close the tilt/sliding 왘 Express-operation: To open, close,
sunroof using the SmartKey, see “Summer open- raise or lower, move the switch past
ing feature” (컄 page 385) and “Convenience the resistance point in the required
closing feature” (컄 page 386). Depending on direction 1 to 4 and release.
current position, the tilt/sliding sunroof may
also open or close when the air recirculation The tilt/sliding sunroof opens or closes
button , (컄 page 469) is pressed and held completely.
for 2 seconds.
왘 Stopping during Express-opening/
i If PRE-SAFE® has been activated, the closing: Move the switch in any direc-
tilt/sliding sunroof closes automatically until tion.
only a small gap remains. 1 Push back to slide sunroof open
2 Push forward to slide sunroof closed
i If the movement of the tilt/sliding sunroof is
i With the SmartKey in starter switch blocked during the closing procedure, the sun-
position 0 or removed from the starter switch, 3 Push up to raise sunroof at rear roof will stop and reopen slightly.
the tilt/sliding sunroof can be operated 4 Pull down to lower sunroof at rear
앫 until you open the driver’s or passenger door With the sunroof closed or tilted open, a
앫 for up to approximately 5 minutes screen can be slid into the roof opening to
help provide shade. When sliding the sun-
roof open, the screen will also retract.
왘 To open, close, raise or lower, move the
switch to resistance point in the re-
quired direction 1 to 4 until the
tilt/sliding sunroof has reached the de-
sired position.
487
Controls in detail
Synchronizing ! Do not open the tilt/sliding sunroof com-

pletely if it is not aligned. Otherwise you could
The tilt/sliding sunroof must be synchro- damage the tilt/sliding sunroof.
nized
앫 after the tilt/sliding sunroof has been
왘 Press and hold the sunroof switch in
closed manually (컄 page 674)
the direction of arrow 3 until the
앫 if the tilt/sliding sunroof can only be tilt/sliding sunroof is fully raised at the
opened with a jerking motion rear.
앫 after a malfunction 왘 Keep holding the sunroof switch in the
direction of arrow 3 for approximately
1 second.
왘 Check the Express-operation feature
(컄 page 487).
If the tilt/sliding sunroof opens com-
pletely, the sunroof is synchronized.
Otherwise repeat the above steps.
488
Controls in detail
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel*
왔 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel*
Roller sunblinds Operating front roller sunblind 왘 Stopping during Express-extending:
Move the roof panel switch in any di-
The roller sunblinds are designed to pro- rection.
tect you from excessive sunlight streaming
in through the panorama roof with power Operating rear roller sunblind from
tilt/sliding panel. front
The front roller sunblind only operates with
the tilt/sliding panel closed. The front and
rear roller sunblind cannot be operated in-
dividually.
Roof panel switch

Warning! G
1 Extend front roller sunblind
When extending/retracting the roller sun- 2 Retract front roller sunblind
blinds, make sure that no one is in danger of 왘 Extending or retracting: Move the
being injured by the closing procedure. The roof panel switch to the resistance 1 Extending and retracting
extending/retracting of the roller sunblinds point in the required direction of
can be immediately halted by releasing the arrow 1 or 2 until the front roller 왘 Extending or retracting: Press
switch or, if the switch was pressed past the sunblind has reached the desired posi- button 1 until the rear roller sunblind
resistance point and released, by pressing tion. has reached the desired position.
the switch in any direction.
왘 Express-extending: Move the roof i To change directions, you must first extend
panel switch past the resistance point or retract the rear roller sunblind completely.
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 344). in direction of arrow 1 and release.
The front roller sunblind extends com-
pletely.
489
Controls in detail
Operating rear roller sunblind from rear Opening and closing panorama roof
Such an opening also presents a potential
with power tilt/sliding panel
for injury for occupants wearing their seat
belts properly as entire body parts or por-
tions of them may protrude from the pas-
Warning! G senger compartment.
When opening or closing the tilt/sliding pan- When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
el, make sure that there is no danger of any- SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
one being harmed by the opening or closing from the starter switch, take it with you, and
procedure. lock the vehicle. Do not leave children
unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
The opening procedure of the tilt/sliding
Rear door control panel an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised
panel can be immediately halted by releas-
access to a vehicle could result in an acci-
1 Retracting ing the switch or, if the switch was moved
dent and/or serious personal injury.
2 Extending past the resistance point and released, by
moving the switch in any direction.
왘 Extending: Press button 2 on the ! To avoid damaging the seals, do not trans-
rocker switch until the rear roller sun- The closing procedure of the tilt/sliding
port any objects with sharp edges which can
blind has reached the desired position. panel can be immediately halted by releas- stick out of the tilt/sliding panel.
ing the switch.
왘 Retracting: Press button 1 on the Do not open the tilt/sliding panel if there is snow
rocker switch until the rear roller sun- The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding or ice on the roof, as this could result in malfunc-
panel is made out of glass. In the event of an tions.
blind has reached the desired position.
accident, the glass may shatter. This may re- Depending on vehicle production date your vehi-
sult in an opening in the roof. cle may be equipped with a crank to open or
close the tilt/sliding sunroof manually should an
In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing
electrical malfunction occur (컄 page 674).
their seat belts or not wearing them properly
may be thrown out of the opening.
490
Controls in detail
! Please keep in mind that weather conditions i If the front roller sunblind is retracted while
can sometimes change rapidly. Make sure to being raised, it will extend first.
close the tilt/sliding panel when leaving the ve-
hicle. If water enters the vehicle interior, vehicle 왘 Express-opening: Move the roof panel
electronics could be damaged which is not cov- switch past the resistance point in di-
ered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. rection of arrow 1 and release.
i When the panorama roof with power The tilt/sliding panel opens
tilt/sliding panel is open, resonance noises may completely.
result in addition to the usual wind noises. They
왘 Express-raising: Move the roof panel
are caused by minimal pressure changes in the
passenger compartment. To reduce or eliminate switch past the resistance point in di-
Roof panel switch rection of arrow 3 and release.
these noises, change the position of the panora-
ma roof with power tilt/sliding panel or open a 1 Push back to slide roof panel open The tilt/sliding panel raises
side window slightly. 2 Push forward to slide roof panel closed completely.
3 Push up to raise roof panel
i You can also open or close the tilt/sliding 왘 Stopping during Express-operation:
panel using the SmartKey, see “Summer open- 4 Pull down to lower roof panel
Move the roof panel switch in any di-
ing feature” (컄 page 385) and “Convenience 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 344).
closing feature” (컄 page 386). rection.
왘 To open, close, raise, or lower the
Depending on current position, the tilt/sliding
tilt/sliding panel, move the roof panel
i You cannot automatically close and lower
panel may also open or close when the air recir- the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel.
culation button , in the control panel of the switch to resistance point in the re-
climate control (컄 page 469), is pressed and quired direction of arrows 1 to 4.
held for 2 seconds.
Release the roof panel switch when the
The tilt/sliding panel only operates with tilt/sliding panel has reached the de-
the roller sunblinds extended. sired position.
491
Controls in detail
Synchronizing 왘 Move and hold the roof panel switch in Rear roller sunblind
direction of arrow 2 until the front
The tilt/sliding panel and front roller sun- roller sunblind is fully retracted.
blinds must be synchronized
왘 Keep holding the roof panel switch in
앫 after the tilt/sliding panel has been direction of arrow 2 for approximately
closed manually (컄 page 674) 1 second.
앫 after a malfunction 왘 Move and hold the roof panel switch in
앫 if the panorama roof with power direction of arrow 1 until the front
tilt/sliding panel can only be opened roller sunblind is fully extended.
with a jerking motion 왘 Move and hold the roof panel switch in
direction of arrow 1 until the tilt/slid-
Tilt/sliding panel and front roller ing panel is slightly opened. 왘 Press button 1 until the rear roller
sunblind sunblind is fully retracted.
왘 Move and hold the roof panel switch in
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 344). direction of arrow 2 until the tilt/slid- 왘 Keep holding button 1 for approxi-
ing panel is fully closed. mately 1 second.
왘 Keep holding the roof panel switch in
direction of arrow 2 for approximately
1 second.
왘 Check the Express-open feature of the
tilt/sliding panel (컄 page 491).
If the tilt/sliding panel opens com-
pletely, the roof is synchronized. Other-
wise repeat the above steps.
492
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
왔 Loading and storing
Roof rack* ! Load the roof rack in such a way that the ve- Loading instructions
hicle cannot be damaged while driving.
Make sure The total load weight including vehicle oc-
Warning! G 앫 you can fully raise tilt/sliding sunroof or the
cupants and luggage/cargo should not
exceed the load limit as indicated on the
panorama roof with tilt/sliding panel*
Only use roof racks approved by corresponding placard located on the driv-
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model to 앫 you can fully open the trunk er’s door B-pillar (컄 page 553).
avoid damage to the vehicle.
Follow the manufacturer’s installation Warning! G
instructions. Otherwise, an improperly
attached roof rack system or its load could Always fasten items being carried as secure-
become detached from the vehicle. ly as possible using cargo tie-down hooks
Do not exceed the maximum roof load of and fastening materials appropriate for the
220 lb (100 kg). weight and size of the load.
Take into consideration that when the roof In an accident, during hard braking or sud-
rack is loaded, the handling characteristics den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
are different from those when operating the around inside the vehicle and can cause in-
왘 Flip the covers upward.
vehicles without the roof rack loaded. jury to vehicle occupants unless the items
왘 Only attach the roof-rack system to the are securely fastened in the vehicle. 컄컄
anchorage points under the covers.
Observe manufacturer’s instructions
for installation.
493
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
컄컄 Storage compartments Storage compartments in the front pas-

To help avoid personal injury during a colli-
senger compartment
sion or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when transporting cargo. Put luggage or car-
go in the trunk if possible.
Warning! G Glove box
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the To help avoid personal injury during a colli-
seat backs. Do not place anything on the sion or sudden maneuver, exercise care
rear-window shelf. when storing objects in the vehicle. Put lug-
Never drive vehicle with trunk open. Deadly gage or cargo in the trunk if possible. Do not
carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter ve- pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat
hicle interior resulting in unconsciousness backs.
and death. Parcel nets cannot secure hard or heavy ob-
jects.
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help
to prevent stored objects from being thrown 1 Glove box lid release
about and injuring vehicle occupants during 2 Unlocking glove box
앫 braking 3 Locking glove box
앫 vehicle maneuvers or
앫 an accident. The glove box can be unlocked and locked
with the mechanical key (컄 page 671).
i An overview of the storage compartments 왘 Opening: Press glove box lid
can be found on (컄 page 36). release 1.
왘 Closing: Push the lid up.
494
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
왘 Locking: Insert the mechanical key 왘 Opening storage tray/telephone* Eyeglasses compartment
into the glove box lock and turn it compartment: Press button 1 and
clockwise to position 3. swing armrest to left or right side.
왘 Unlocking: Insert the mechanical key 왘 Opening storage compartment:
into the glove box lock and turn it coun- Press button 2 and swing center arm-
terclockwise to position 2. rest upward.
Storage compartments in the front Storage compartments below the front

armrest seats
왘 Opening: Press mark 1.

왘 Closing: Swing eyeglasses compart-
ment upward until it engages.
1 Storage tray/telephone* compartment 왘 Opening: Pull tab 1 upward and fold

2 Storage compartment (not with rear cover 2 forward.
climate control system*)
495
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
Parcel net in front passenger footwell A small convenience parcel net is located Storage compartments in rear passen-
in the front passenger footwell. It is for ger compartment
small and light items, such as road maps,
Warning! G mail, etc. Armrest with integrated storage
The parcel net is intended for storing compartment
light-weight items only. ! Before storing the armrest in the backrest,
Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or close the storage compartment cover.
fragile objects may not be transported in the ! Do not sit on or lean your body weight
parcel net. In an accident, during hard brak- against the armrest when it is folded down, as
ing, or sudden maneuvers, they could be in- you could otherwise damage it.
jury to vehicle occupants.
The parcel net cannot protect transported
goods in the event of an accident.
Vehicles without control panel* in rear arm-

rest
왘 Opening: Pull release catch 1 and
swing the cover upward.
496
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
Storage compartment between rear Rear storage box

seats
! Do not sit on or lean your body weight
against the armrest when it is folded down, as
you could otherwise damage it.
i When the rear seats are in their basic posi-

tion, you can open the cover more easily.
Vehicles with control panel* in rear armrest

왘 Opening: Press button 1 and swing
the cover upward. Vehicles without rear center seat*
왘 Opening: Pull handle 1 backward in
the direction of arrow.
왘 Fold down rear center armrest.

왘 Pull handle 1 upward in the direction
of arrow.
왘 Swing down cover 2.
497
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
Ruffled storage pockets Cup holders

Warning! G
Do not place objects with a combined Warning! G
weight of more than 4.4 lbs (2 kg) into the
ruffled storage pocket. Otherwise, the Occu- In order to help prevent spilling liquids on
pant Classification System OCS (컄 page 47) vehicle occupants and/or vehicle equip-
may not be able to properly approximate the ment, only use containers that fit into the
occupant weight category. cup holder. Use lids on open containers and
The ruffled storage pocket is intended for do not fill containers to a height where the
storing light-weight items only. contents, especially hot liquids, could spill
Ruffled storage pockets 1 are located on during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an
Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or
the back of the front seats. accident. Liquids spilled on vehicle occu-
fragile objects may not be transported in the
pants may cause serious personal injury.
ruffled storage pocket. In an accident, dur-
Liquids spilled on vehicle equipment may
ing hard braking, or sudden maneuvers, they
cause damage not covered by the
could be thrown around inside the vehicle
and cause injury to vehicle occupants.
When not in use, keep the cup holders
The ruffled storage pocket cannot protect
closed. An open cup holder may cause injury
transported goods in the event of an acci-
to you or others when contacted during
dent.
braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an acci-
dent.
498
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup i You can remove the cup holder to clean it.
Only clean it using clear, lukewarm water.
holder may come loose during braking, vehi-
cle maneuvers, or in an accident and be 왘 Removing: Pull cup holder out by pull-
thrown around in the vehicle interior. ing silver handle 2 upward in direction
Objects thrown around in the vehicle interi- of arrow.
or may cause an accident and/or serious
왘 Inserting: Press downward until it en-
personal injury.
gages. While doing so, make sure that
the word “Front” is in the proper instal-
Cup holder in front center console lation position.
Vehicles with control panel* in rear armrest
Cup holder in rear
1 Compartment for cup holder
왘 Opening: Press front of cup holder 1.
1 Mark
2 Handle
왘 Opening: Press mark 1 on the front. Vehicles without control panel* in rear arm-
rest
왘 Closing: Fold cover in until it engages.
1 Compartment for cup holder
왘 Opening: Press mark 1 on the front.
499
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
Trunk Cargo tie-down hooks
Storage spaces under trunk floor

You can place a suitcase in the hollow un-
der the front part of the trunk floor.
! Fold down the suitcase handle before clos-
ing the trunk to avoid damaging the trunk lid.
1 Storage space
2 Trunk floor 4 hooks are located in the trunk.
왘 Carefully secure cargo by applying
even load on all hooks with rope of suf-
ficient strength to hold down the cargo.
1 Trunk floor
2 Storage spaces
500
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
Retaining hooks Parcel net in trunk Retainer for Operator’s Manual pouch
A hook is located on the upper edge of the There is a pocket net on each side of the
trunk and can be used to attach cargo right and left trunk side walls to secure
items such as bags. loads.
1 Hook-and-loop fastener
2 Operator’s Manual pouch
Use hook-and-loop fasteners 1 to fasten
1 Tab Operator’s Manual pouch 2 in place.
2 Retaining hook
왘 Pull tab 1 of retaining hook 2 down.
! Do not use the retaining hooks to tie down
cargo.
501
Controls in detail
Useful features
Sun visors Glare from front Vanity mirror in rear

왘 Swing sun visor 1 down.
Warning! G Glare from front and sides
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving. ! Close vanity mirror cover 2 (if open) before
Keep the vanity mirrors in the sun visors you disengage sun visor 1 from the mounting
and pivot it to the side.
closed while vehicle is in motion. Reflected
glare can endanger you and others. 왘 Disengage sun visor 1 from the
mounting.
왘 Pivot sun visor 1 to the side.
왘 Opening: Press mark 1.
Vanity mirror in sun visor The vanity mirror swings down in the di-
왘 To use vanity mirror, lift up cover 2. rection of the arrow.
Vanity mirror lamp 3 comes on. 왘 Closing: Swing vanity mirror up until it
engages.
i If you disengage sun visor 1 from the
mounting, vanity mirror lamp 2 will switch off.
Document holder
1 Sun visor
2 Vanity mirror cover You can use the plastic tab of document
3 Vanity mirror lamp holder 4 to hold admission tickets, park-
4 Document holder ing passes, or similar items in place.
502
Controls in detail
Useful features
Rear window sunshade 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 344). Ashtrays

왘 Press upper part 1 of the rocker
The switches are on the rear doors.
switch briefly to extend the sunshade. Center console ashtray
왘 Press lower part 2 of the rocker
switch briefly to retract the sunshade. Warning! G
i Operating the rear window sunshade from Remove ashtray only with vehicle standing
the rear is not possible if you activate the over-
ride switch (컄 page 63). still. Engage the electronic parking brake to
secure vehicle from movement. Set auto-
i If you operate the rear window sunshade via matic transmission to P. With the automatic
COMAND or via the favorite button, this takes transmission set to P, turn off the engine.
precedence over the rear window sunshade but-
tons on the rear doors.
1 Opening
2 Closing i The rear window sunshade is switched off at
temperatures below -4°F (-20°C).
You can also operate the rear window sun-
shade via COMAND (컄 page 249) or via
the favorite button (컄 page 238).
1 Button for disengaging ashtray

2 Cover plate
503
Controls in detail
Useful features
Opening ashtray Removing ashtray insert Cigarette lighters

왘 Press mark on cover plate 2 forward.
Removing ashtray insert

Warning! G
왘 Push sliding button 1 to the left. Never touch the heating element or sides of
the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the
The ashtray is disengaged and slides
knob only.
out a short way.
Make sure that any children traveling with
왘 Remove the insert from the ashtray
you do not injure themselves or start a fire
frame.
with the hot cigarette lighter.
1 Insert When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
Reinstalling ashtray insert
왘 Press the open cover outwards beyond SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
왘 Install the insert by pushing it back into
the stop. from the starter switch, take it with you, and
the frame until it engages. lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
Ashtray insert 1 pops out of the hold-
Closing ashtray er.
unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised ac-
왘 Briefly press mark on cover plate 2 왘 Remove insert by pulling it upward. cess to a vehicle could result in an accident
forward. and/or serious personal injury.
Reinstalling ashtray insert
To avoid possible injury to children sitting in
Rear door ashtray 왘 Install the insert by pushing it back into the rear seat, activate the override switch
the frame until it engages. (컄 page 63). Activation of the override
Opening ashtray switch deactivates the rear center console
왘 Lift up the cover. lighter.
504
Controls in detail
Useful features
! The lighter socket can be used to accommo-

date 12V DC electrical accessories (up to a max-
imum of 85 W) designed for use with the
standard “cigarette lighter” plug type. Keep in
mind, however, that connecting accessories to
the lighter socket (for example extensive con-
necting and disconnecting, or using plugs that do
not fit properly) can damage the lighter socket.
With the socket damaged, the lighter may no
longer be able to be placed in the heating
(pushed-in) position, or the lighter may pop out
1 Center console cigarette lighter 1 Rear center console lighter too early with the lighter not hot enough.
To help avoid damaging the cigarette lighter
왘 Open the cover plate (컄 page 503). 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 344).
socket, we recommend connecting 12V DC elec-
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 344). 왘 Push in cigarette lighter 1. trical accessories designed for use with a stan-
dard “cigarette lighter” plug type to the 12V
왘 Push in cigarette lighter 1. The lighter will pop out automatically power outlets (컄 page 506) in your vehicle
when hot. whenever possible.
The lighter will pop out automatically
when hot. i Operation of the rear door lighters is only
possible, if the override switch (컄 page 63) is de-
activated.
i If the engine is off and the cigarette lighter is

being used extensively, the vehicle battery may
become discharged.
505
Controls in detail
Useful features
Power outlet Floormats*
The power outlet is located in the rear cen-

ter console. Warning! G
Whenever you are using floormats, make
sure there is enough clearance and that the
floormats are securely fastened.
Floormats should always be securely fas-
tened using the eyelets and the retainer
pins. 1 Retainer pin
Before driving off, check that the floormats
2 Eyelet
are securely in place and adjust them if nec-
essary. A loose floormat could slip and
Removing
hinder proper functioning of the pedals. 왘 Pull floormat off of retainer pins 1.
왘 Flip up cover 1 and insert electrical
Do not place several floormats on top of 왘 Remove the floormat.
plug (cigarette lighter type).
each other as this may impair pedal move-
i The power outlet can be used to ment. Installing
accommodate 12V DC electrical accessories
(e.g. air pump, auxiliary lamps) up to a maximum 왘 Lay down the floormat in the respective
of 180 W. i To install or remove the floormat more easi- footwell.
ly, move the driver’s seat or front passenger seat
If the engine is off and the outlet is being used as far to the rear as possible (컄 page 347). 왘 Press the floormat eyelets 2 onto re-
extensively, the vehicle battery may become dis- tainer pins 1.
charged.
506
Controls in detail
Useful features
Telephone*
Warning! G (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
Warning! G Please do not forget that your primary re-
sponsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s
Never operate radio transmitters equipped attention to the road must always be
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with- his/her primary focus when driving. For i Various mobile phone cradles can be in-
out being connected to an external antenna) your safety and the safety of others, we rec- stalled in the front center armrest, see separate
from inside the vehicle while the engine is ommend that you pull over to a safe location installation instructions for the mobile phone
cradle. These mobile phone cradles can be ob-
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc- and stop before placing or taking a tele-
tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos- phone call. ter.
sibly resulting in an accident and/or serious If you choose to use the mobile phone1 The functions and services available to you while
personal injury. while driving, please use the hands-free de- using the mobile phone depend on your service
vice and only use the mobile phone when provider and the type of mobile phone you are
Radio transmitters, such as a portable tele- road, weather and traffic conditions permit. using. See also separate operating manual for in-
phone or a citizens band unit, should only Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from structions on how to use your mobile phone.
be used inside the vehicle if they are con- using a mobile telephone while driving a ve- i The roof cargo container* may impair mo-
nected to an antenna that is installed on hicle. bile phone reception. In an emergency, remove
the outside of the vehicle. Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Man- the mobile phone from the mobile phone cradle
to make a call.
The external antenna must be approved by agement and Data System)1 if road, weather
Mercedes-Benz. Please contact an autho- and traffic conditions permit.
rized Mercedes-Benz Center for informa- 1
Observe all legal requirements.
tion on the installation of an approved
external antenna. Refer to the radio trans-
mitter operation instructions regarding use
of an external antenna.
507
Controls in detail
Useful features
When the mobile phone is inserted in the Inserting mobile phone in mobile phone
cradle, you can operate the telephone us- cradle
ing the following devices:
Once the mobile phone has been inserted
앫 mobile phone keypad in the mobile phone cradle, you have to
use the hands-free device or Bluetooth
앫 COMAND telephone keypad
headset to respond during phone calls.
(컄 page 134)
앫 buttons s and t on the multi- ! Do not try to remove the mobile phone along
with the cradle. You could otherwise damage the
function steering wheel (컄 page 265)
mobile phone cradle.
앫 Voice Control* (컄 page 289) Example illustration
왘 If applicable, remove the cover for the
®
앫 Bluetooth headset (컄 page 146) external antenna connection from the 1 Insert the mobile phone
Please note that these functions are only back of the mobile phone and store it in 2 Connector contact
available with Mercedes-Benz approved a safe place. Be sure to comply with the 3 Mobile phone cradle
mobile phones. Please contact an autho- mobile phone’s operating instructions,
왘 Slide the lower end of the mobile phone
rized Mercedes-Benz Center for informa- as well.
into connector contact 2 on
tion on features available for your mobile cradle 3.
phone of choice.
왘 Push the top of the mobile phone in di-
왘 Open telephone compartment rection of arrow 1, until the lug on the
(컄 page 495). mobile phone release button engages.
The mobile phone is connected to the
network via the external antenna.
508
Controls in detail
Useful features
The mobile phone is linked to the Removing mobile phone from mobile Changing mobile phone cradle
hands-free device and the multifunc- phone cradle If you require a different cradle for your
tion steering wheel.
mobile phone, remove the present cradle
The battery is charged depending on its before installing a new one.
charge status and the position of the
SmartKey in the starter switch. The Removing an existing mobile phone
charge procedure will be indicated in cradle
the mobile phone’s display.
You can place or receive phone calls. You
can control other functions of the mobile
phone via the COMAND (컄 page 132),
instrument cluster control system Example illustration
(컄 page 276) or Voice Control*
1 Release catch for mobile phone
(컄 page 289).
2 Mobile phone cradle
i When you take the SmartKey or SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO* out of the starter switch, the i When using a flip-style mobile phone, open
mobile phone remains switched on for approxi- flip top before removing from the cradle while a
call is connected. Otherwise, the call will be dis- Example illustration
mately 10 minutes. If you place or receive a call
during this time, the mobile phone switches off connected. 1 To release the mobile phone cradle
10 minutes after the call has been completed. 왘 Press release catch in direction of 2 To remove the mobile phone cradle
arrow 1 and take mobile phone out of 3 Mobile phone cradle 컄컄
mobile phone cradle 2.
509
Controls in detail
Useful features
컄컄 왘 Press release button in direction of Tele Aid The Tele Aid system is operational provid-
arrow 1 and take mobile phone ing that the vehicle’s battery is charged,
cradle 3 out in direction of arrow 2. ! The initial activation of the Tele Aid system properly connected, not damaged and mo-
may only be performed by completing the sub- bile phone and GPS coverage are available.
Installing a different mobile phone scriber agreement and placing an acquaintance
cradle call using the Information button ¡. Failure i The Tele Aid system utilizes the mobile
to complete either of these steps will result in a phone network for communication and the GPS
system that is not activated. (Global Positioning System) satellites for vehicle
location. If either of these signals are unavail-
If you have any questions regarding activation,
able, the Tele Aid system may not function and if
please call the Response Center at
this occurs, assistance must be summoned by
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
other means.
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can
The Tele Aid system be adjusted when using the volume control
on the multifunction steering wheel. To
(Telematic Alarm Identification on De-
raise, press button æ and to lower,
mand)
press button ç or use the COMAND
Example illustration The Tele Aid system consists of three volume thumbwheel , on the lower
1 Contact plate types of response: part of the front center console
2 Recesses 앫 automatic and manual emergency (컄 page 96).
3 Mobile phone cradle 왘 To activate, press the SOS button, the
앫 Roadside Assistance, and
왘 Insert mobile phone cradle 3 into Roadside Assistance button • or
앫 information the Information button ¡, depend-
recesses 2 of contact plate 1.
ing on the type of response required.
왘 Push mobile phone cradle 3 forward
until it engages.
510
Controls in detail
Useful features
i The SOS button is located above the interior An emergency call can also be initiated
rear view mirror (컄 page 513). Warning! G manually by opening the cover next to the
The Roadside Assistance button • and the interior rear view mirror labeled SOS, then
Information button ¡ are located below the If the indicator lamps in the SOS button, in briefly pressing the button located under
center armrest cover (컄 page 513). the Roadside Assistance button • the cover. For instructions on initiating an
and/or in the Information button ¡ do emergency call manually (컄 page 513).
Shortly after the completion of your not come on during the system self-check,
Tele Aid acquaintance call, you will receive or if any of these indicators remain illuminat- Once the emergency call is in progress, the
a user ID and password. By visiting ed continuously in red and/or the message indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin
www.mbusa.com and selecting “Tele Aid” “Tele Aid not activated” or “Tele Aid inopera- to flash. The message:
(USA only), you will have access to account tive” is displayed in the multifunction display 앫 “Connecting call” appears in the multi-
information, remote door unlock and after the system self-check, a malfunction in function display
more. the system has been detected.
앫 “Emergency Call Activated” appears in
System self-check If a malfunction is indicated as outlined the COMAND display
above, the system may not operate as ex-
Initially, after switching on the ignition, and the audio system is muted. When the
pected. Have the system checked at the
malfunctions are detected and indicated. connection is established, the message:
nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
If a malfunction is detected, the indicator possible. 앫 “Call connected” appears in the multi-
lamps in the SOS button, the Roadside As- function display
sistance button • and the Information
Emergency calls 앫 “Emergency Call Activated” appears in
button ¡ stay on longer than
10 seconds or do not come on. The mes- An emergency call is initiated the COMAND display
sage “Tele Aid not activated” or “Tele Aid automatically following an accident in
inoperative” appears in the multifunction which the emergency tensioning devices
display. (ETDs) or air bags deploy.
511
Controls in detail
Useful features
All information relevant to the emergency, The Tele Aid system is available if
The message:
such as the location of the vehicle (deter-
앫 it has been activated and is operation- 앫 “Call failed” appears in the multifunction
mined by the GPS satellite location sys-
al. Activation requires a subscription display for approximately 10 seconds.
tem), vehicle model, identification number
for monitoring services, connection,
and color are generated. 앫 A pop-up window with the message:
and cellular air time
“Call could not be connected! Please dial
i During the emergency call message “Emer- 앫 the relevant monitoring service and 911 directly using the mobile telephone
gency Call Activated” is displayed, operation keypad.” appears in the COMAND dis-
GPS coverage are available and pass
from COMAND is not possible. The automatic cli- play. Confirm the message pressing n
mate control can be still adjusted using the the information on to the Response
Center (컄 page 88).
switches on the climate control panel.
Should this occur, assistance must be sum-
A voice connection between the Response 앫 there is sufficient voltage in the vehicle
moned by other means.
Center and the occupants of the vehicle batteries
will be established automatically soon af- i Location of the vehicle on a map is only pos- i During the emergency call the mobile phone
ter the emergency call has been initiated. sible if the vehicle is able to receive signals from is switched off automatically and must be
The Response Center will attempt to deter- the GPS satellite network and pass the informa- switched back on to make a call.
mine more precisely the nature of the acci- tion on to the Response Center.
dent provided they can speak to an i The roof cargo container* may impair mo-
occupant of the vehicle. bile phone reception. In an emergency, remove
Warning! G the mobile phone from the mobile phone cradle
i If no vehicle occupant responds, an ambu- (컄 page 507) to make a call.
lance will be sent to the vehicle immediately. If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is
flashing continuously and there was no i The “911” emergency call system is a public
voice connection to the Response Center service. Using it without due cause is a criminal
offense.
established, then the Tele Aid system could
not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the rele-
vant mobile phone network is not available).
512
Controls in detail
Useful features
Initiating an emergency call manually 왘 Close cover 2 after the emergency Roadside Assistance button • and
call is concluded. Information button ¡
The Roadside Assistance button • and
Warning! G the Information button ¡ are located in
the storage compartment below the front
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the armrest (컄 page 495).
vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, ve-
hicle in a dangerous road location), please
do not wait for voice contact after you have
pressed the emergency button. Carefully
leave the vehicle and move to a safe loca-
1 SOS button tion. The Response Center will automatically
2 Cover contact local emergency officials with the
왘 Briefly press button on cover 2 to vehicle’s approximate location if they
open. receive an automatic SOS signal and cannot
make voice contact with the vehicle occu-
Cover 2 will open. pants. 1 Information button ¡
왘 Press SOS button 1 (for longer than 2 Roadside Assistance button •
2 seconds).
The indicator lamp in SOS button 1
will flash until the emergency call is
concluded.
왘 Wait for a voice connection to the
Response Center.
513
Controls in detail
Useful features
Roadside Assistance button • The Tele Aid system will transmit data gen- i The indicator lamp in the Roadside Assis-
왘 Press and hold Roadside Assistance erating the vehicle identification number, tance button • remains illuminated in red for
model, color and location (subject to avail- approximately 10 seconds during the system
button • (for longer than self-check after switching on the ignition (togeth-
2 seconds). ability of cellular and GPS signals).
er with the SOS button and the Information
A voice connection between the Roadside button ¡).
A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside As-
Assistance dispatcher and the occupants See system self-check (컄 page 511) if the indi-
sistance dispatcher will be initiated.
of the vehicle will be established. cator lamp does not come on in red or stays on
The button will flash while the call is in
progress. The message: 왘 Describe the nature of the need for as- longer than approximately 10 seconds.
sistance. If the indicator lamp in the Roadside Assistance
앫 “Connecting call” appears in the button • is flashing continuously and no
multifunction display The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance voice connection to the Response Center was
앫 “Roadside Assistance Activated” dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified established, the Tele Aid system could not ini-
Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to tiate a Roadside Assistance call (e.g. the relevant
appears in the COMAND display mobile phone network is not available). The mes-
tow your vehicle to the nearest authorized
and the audio system is muted. Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such sage:
When the connection is established, the as labor and/or towing, charges may ap- 앫 “Call failed” appears in the multifunction dis-
ply. Refer to the Roadside Assistance Man- play for approximately 10 seconds
message:
ual for more information. 앫 “Call could not be connected!” appears in
앫 “Call connected” appears in the multi- the COMAND display. Confirm the message
function display These programs are only available in the pressing n (컄 page 88).
USA:
앫 “Roadside Assistance Activated” Roadside Assistance calls can be terminated us-
appears in the COMAND display 앫 Sign and Drive services: Services such ing button t on the multifunction steering
as jump start, a few gallons of fuel or wheel or COMAND (컄 page 132).
the replacement of a flat tire with the
vehicle spare tire are obtainable.
514
Controls in detail
Useful features
Information button ¡ A voice connection between the Customer mobile phone network is not available). The mes-
Assistance Center representative and the sage:
왘 Press and hold Information button
¡ (for longer than 2 seconds). occupants of the vehicle will be estab- 앫 “Call failed” appears in the multifunction dis-
lished. Information regarding the operation play for approximately 10 seconds
A call to the Customer Assistance Cen- of your vehicle, the nearest authorized 앫 “Call could not be connected!” appears in
ter will be initiated. The button will Mercedes-Benz Center or Mercedes-Benz the COMAND display. Confirm the message
flash while the call is in progress. The USA products and services is available to pressing n (컄 page 88).
message: you. Information calls can be terminated using button
앫 “Connecting call” appears in the t on the multifunction steering wheel or
For more details concerning the Tele Aid COMAND (컄 page 132).
multifunction display system, please visit www.mbusa.com and
앫 “Information Call Activated” ap- use your ID and password (sent to you sep- ! If the indicator lamps do not start flashing
arately) to learn more (USA only). after pressing one of the buttons or remain illu-
pears in the COMAND display minated (in red) at any time, the Tele Aid system
and the audio system is muted. i The indicator lamp on the Information has detected a fault or the service is not current-
button ¡ remains illuminated in red for ap- ly activated, and may not initiate a call. Contact
When the connection is established, the proximately 10 seconds during the system an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center and have
message: self-check after switching on the ignition (togeth- the system checked or contact the Response
er with the SOS button and the Roadside Assis- Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
앫 “Call connected” appears in the multi- 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as soon as possi-
tance button •).
function display ble.
See system self-check (컄 page 511) if the indi-
앫 “Information Call Activated” appears in cator lamp does not come on in red or stays on
the COMAND display longer than approximately 10 seconds.
The Tele Aid system will transmit data gen- If the indicator lamp in the Information
erating the vehicle identification number, button ¡ is flashing continuously and no
voice connection to the Response Center was
model, color and location (subject to avail- established, then the Tele Aid system could not
ability of cellular and GPS signals). initiate an Information call (e.g. the relevant
515
Controls in detail
Useful features
Destination Download to the COMAND Route guidance i The indicator lamp in the respective button
System A prompt appears for confirmation if route flashes until the call is concluded. Calls can only
be terminated by a Response Center or Custom-
i The components and operating principles of guidance to the address is to be started. er Assistance Center representative except
COMAND can be found on (컄 page 85). Roadside Assistance and Information calls,
왘 Slide rmq or rotate ymz to select
Destination Download allows you access “Yes” menu item and confirm by which can also be terminated by pressing
button t on the multifunction steering wheel
to a database of over 10,000,000 points of pressing n.
or COMAND (컄 page 132).
interest (POIs) that can be downloaded to The system starts the route calculation
your vehicle’s navigation system. If you and subsequently the route guidance ! If the indicator lamp continues to flash or
know the destination the address can be the system does not terminate the call at all,
to the defined address (컄 page 159). contact the Response Center at
downloaded. Or if you are unsure of your
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
destination you can be provided with i If you select “No”, you can save the address 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or Mercedes-Benz
points of interests near your location. in your address book (컄 page 224).
Customer Assistance at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
The Response Center can transmit desti- i The destination download feature is avail- (1-800-367-6372) in the USA or Customer Ser-
nation data to the COMAND during the able if the relevant mobile phone network is vice at 1-800-387-0100 in Canada.
connection with the Roadside Assistance available and data connection is possible.
i When a Tele Aid call has been initiated, the
or Customer Assistance Center. audio system is muted. The optional mobile
Call priority phone (if installed) switches off. If you must use
The transmitted data can contain address
If other service calls such as a Roadside this phone, the vehicle must be parked. Unplug
details for a Mercedes-Benz Center or POIs the telephone, switch it on and place the call.
(points of interest). Assistance call or Information call are ac-
The COMAND navigation system (if engaged) will
tive, an emergency call is still possible. In continue to run. The multifunction display in the
this case, the emergency call will take pri- instrument cluster is available for use, but spo-
ority and override all other active calls. ken commands are not available.
516
Controls in detail
Useful features
i You can exit Roadside Assistance and/ or 왘 Then return to your vehicle and pull the Remote door lock
the information display during an active connec- trunk lid handle for a minimum of If you have forgotten to lock your vehicle
tion and call up the COMAND application last se- 20 seconds until the SOS button be-
lected. To do so, select “Back”. Meanwhile, and are no longer near it, you can have it
gins to flash. locked remotely through the Response
mute remains active (컄 page 85).
The message: “Call connecting” ap- Center.
Remote door unlock pears in the multifunction display and
The vehicle can be remotely locked within
the SOS button is flashing.
In case you have locked your vehicle unin- 4 days after the ignition has been switched
tentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle), The Response Center will then unlock off.
and the reserve SmartKey is not handy: your vehicle with the remote door un-
왘 Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response
locking feature.
왘 Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA)
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) i The remote door unlock feature is available or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada). if the relevant mobile phone network is available
You will be asked to provide your pass-
and data connection is possible.
You will be asked to provide your password which you provided when you
The SOS button will flash and the message: “Call completed the subscriber agreement.
word which you provided when you connecting” appears in the multifunction display
completed the subscriber agreement. to indicate receipt of the door unlock command. When you are inside your vehicle the next
or Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Response Center time and switch on the ignition, the mes-
specialist might attempt to establish voice con- sage “Tele Aid Doors locked by remote con-
왘 Contact the Tele Aid web page via In- tact with the vehicle occupants. trol” will appear on the multifunction
ternet using the ID and password sent display.
If the trunk lid handle was pulled for more than
to you shortly after the completion of 20 seconds before door unlock authorization
your acquaintance call. was received by the Response Center, you must i The remote door lock feature is available if
the relevant mobile phone network is available
wait 15 minutes before pulling the trunk lid han-
and data connection is possible.
dle again.
517
Controls in detail
Useful features
Automatic Maintenance Call Stolen Vehicle Recovery services Garage door opener
The 2007 S-Class is equipped with a fea- In the event your vehicle was stolen:
The integrated remote control is capable of
ture which considerably enhances the care
왘 Report the incident to the police. operating up to three separately controlled
of your vehicle. Just prior to your vehicle
The police will issue a numbered devices. It provides a convenient way to re-
reaching a maintenance milestone Tele Aid
incident report. place up to three hand-held remote con-
will initiate a message informing the ser-
trols used to operate devices such as
vice center, important vehicle mainte- 왘 Pass this number on to the garage door openers, gate openers, or oth-
nance information and the vehicle is due Mercedes-Benz Response Center along er devices compatible with HomeLink® or
for a service appointment. The message is with your password issued to you when some other systems.
transmitted in the background with no you subscribed to the service.
driver interaction necessary. This feature Before the integrated remote control can
allows your preferred Mercedes-Benz Cen- The Response Center will then attempt be used, it must be programmed to the ga-
ter to significantly improve the process of to covertly contact the vehicle’s rage door opener, gate operator or other
arranging your service appointment and Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is device you wish to operate. See the follow-
ensures that your vehicle receives the best located, the Response Center will ing instructions for programming informa-
possible care. contact the local law enforcement and tion.
you. The vehicle’s location will only be
i The Automatic Maintenance Call feature is provided to law enforcement.
available if the relevant mobile phone network is
available and data connection is possible. i When the anti-theft alarm stays on for more
than 30 seconds, a call is initiated automatically
to the Response Center. See anti-theft alarm
system (컄 page 81).
518
Controls in detail
Useful features
Do not run the engine while programming

Warning! G the integrated remote control. Inhalation of
Before programming the integrated remote exhaust gas is hazardous to your health.
control to a garage door opener or gate All exhaust gas contains carbon
operator, make sure people and objects are monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause
out of the way of the device to prevent po- unconsciousness and possible death.
tential harm or damage. When programming
a garage door opener, the door moves up or
down. When programming a gate operator,
Interior rear view mirror with integrated the gate opens or closes.
remote control
Do not use the integrated remote control
1 Indicator lamp with any garage door opener that lacks
2 3 4 Signal transmitter button safety stop and reverse features as required
by U.S. federal safety standards (this
Needed for programming (not part of vehi- includes any garage door opener model
cle equipment): manufactured before April 1, 1982).
5 Hand-held remote control of ga- A garage door that cannot detect an object
rage door opener, gate operator – signaling the door to stop and reverse –
or other device does not meet current U.S. federal safety
standards.
6 Hand-held remote control
button When programming a garage door opener,
park the vehicle outside the garage.
519
Controls in detail
Useful features
Programming integrated remote If you later wish to program a second i Indicator lamp 1 flashes immediately the
control and/or third hand-held transmitter to first time the signal transmitter button is pro-
the remaining two signal transmitter grammed. If this button has already been pro-
Step 1: grammed, the indicator lamp will only start
buttons, do not repeat this step and be-
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 344). gin directly with step 3. flashing after 20 seconds.
Step 2: Step 3: Step 5:

왘 If you have previously programmed a 왘 Hold the end of hand-held remote 왘 After indicator lamp 1 changes from a
signal transmitter button and wish to control 5 of the device you wish to slow to a rapidly flashing light, release
retain its programming, proceed to train approximately 2 to 5 in the hand-held remote control button
step 3. (5 to12 cm) away from the signal trans- and the signal transmitter button.
If you are programming the integrated mitter button (2, 3 or 4) to be pro- Step 6:
remote control for the first time, press grammed, while keeping indicator
왘 Press and hold the just-trained signal
and hold the two outer signal transmit- lamp 1 in view.
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) and
ter buttons 2 and 4 and release Step 4: observe indicator lamp 1.
them only when indicator lamp 1 be-
왘 Using both hands, simultaneously If indicator lamp 1 stays on
gins to flash after approximately
press hand-held remote control constantly, programming is complete
20 seconds (do not hold the button for
button 6 and the desired signal trans- and your device should activate when
longer than 30 seconds). This proce-
mitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not the respective signal transmitter
dure erases any previous settings for
release the buttons until step 5 is com- button (2, 3 or 4) is pressed and re-
all three channels and initializes the
pleted. leased.
memory.
Indicator lamp 1 will flash, first slowly
and then rapidly.
520
Controls in detail
Useful features
i If indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly for about “training” button may also be referred i Some garage door openers (or other rolling
2 seconds and then turns to a constant light, to as “learn”or “smart” button. If there code equipped devices) may require you to
continue with programming steps 8 through 12 is difficulty locating the transmitting press, hold for 2 seconds and release the same
as your garage door opener may be equipped button, refer to the garage door opener signal transmitter button a third time to com-
with the “rolling code” feature. operator’s manual. plete the training process.
Step 7: Step 9: Step 12:
왘 To program the remaining two signal 왘 Press the “training” button on the ga- 왘 Confirm the garage door operation by
transmitter buttons, repeat the steps rage door opener motor head unit. pressing the programmed signal trans-
above starting with step 3. mitter button (2, 3 or 4).
The “training light” is activated.
Step 13:
Rolling code programming You have 30 seconds to initiate the follow-
ing two steps. 왘 To program the remaining two signal
To train a garage door opener (or other
transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
rolling code devices) with the rolling code Step 10: above starting with step 3.
feature, follow these instructions after
completing the “Programming” portion 왘 Return to the vehicle and firmly press,
hold for 2 seconds and release the pro- Gate operator/Canadian programming
(steps 1 through 6) of this text. (A second
person may make the following training grammed signal transmitter button Canadian radio-frequency laws require
procedures quicker and easier.) (2, 3 or 4). transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
Step 11: after several seconds of transmission
Step 8:
which may not be long enough for the
왘 Locate “training” button on the garage 왘 Press, hold for 2 seconds and release integrated signal transmitter to pick up the
door opener motor head unit. same signal transmitter button a sec- signal during programming. Similar to this
ond time to complete the training pro- Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
Exact location and color of the button cess. are designed to “time-out” in the same
may vary by garage door opener brand.
manner.
Depending on manufacturer, the
521
Controls in detail
Useful features
If you live in Canada or if you are having i Upon completion of programming the inte- Operation of integrated remote control
difficulties programming a gate operator grated remote control, make sure you retain the
(regardless of where you live) by using the hand-held remote control that came with the ga-
programming procedures, replace step 4 rage door opener, gate operator or other device. 왘 Select and press the appropriate inte-
with the following: You may need it for use in other vehicles, for fu- grated signal transmitter button (2,
ture programming of an integrated remote con- 3 or 4) to activate the remote con-
Step 4: trol, or simply for continued use as a hand-held
trolled device.
remote control to operate the respective device
왘 Press and hold the signal transmitter in other situations. The integrated remote control trans-
button (2, 3 or 4). Do not release
mitter continues to send the signal as
this button until it has been successful- Reprogramming a single signal trans- long as the button is pressed – up to
ly trained. mitter button 20 seconds.
왘 While still holding down the signal To program a device using a signal trans-
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4), mitter button previously trained, follow Erasing integrated remote control
“cycle” your hand-held remote control these steps: memory
button 6 as follows: Press and hold
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 344). 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 344).
button 6 for 2 seconds, then release
it for 2 seconds, and again press and 왘 Press and hold the desired signal 왘 Simultaneously press and hold outer
hold it for 2 seconds. Repeat this se- transmitter button (2, 3 or 4). signal transmitter buttons 2 and 4,
quence on the hand-held remote con- Do not release the button. for approximately 20 seconds, until
trol until the frequency signal has been indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly. Do
왘 Indicator lamp 1 will begin to flash af- not hold for longer than 30 seconds.
learned. Upon successful training, indi-
ter 20 seconds. Without releasing the
cator lamp 1 will flash slowly and then The codes of all three channels are
signal transmitter button, proceed with
rapidly after several seconds. erased.
programming starting with step 3.
왘 Proceed with programming step 5 and
i If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes of all
step 6 to complete. three channels.
522
Controls in detail
Useful features
Programming tips 앫 If another hand-held remote control is i USA only:

If you are having difficulty programming available for the same device, try the This device complies with Part 15 of the
programming steps again using that FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
the integrated remote control, here are two conditions:
some helpful tips: other hand-held remote control. Make
sure new batteries are in the hand-held (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
앫 Check the frequency of hand-held re- remote control before beginning the ence, and
mote control 5 (typically located on procedure. (2) this device must accept any interference re-
the reverse side of the remote). The in- ceived, including interference that may
앫 Straighten the antenna wire from the
tegrated remote control is compatible cause undesired operation.
garage door opener assembly. This
with radio-frequency devices operating Any unauthorized modification to this device
may help improve transmitting and/or
between 280-390 MHz. could void the user’s authority to operate the
receiving signals. equipment.
앫 Put a new battery in hand-held remote
control 5. This will increase the likeli- i Certain types of garage door openers are in- i Canada only:
compatible with the integrated remote control. If
hood of the hand-held remote control This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
you should experience further difficulties with Canada. Operation is subject to the following
sending a faster and more accurate sig- programming the integrated remote control,
nal to the integrated remote control. two conditions:
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or
call Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen- (1) This device may not cause interference, and
앫 While performing step 3, hold
ter (in the USA only) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or (2) this device must accept any interference re-
hand-held remote control 5 at differ-
Customer Service (in Canada) at ceived, including interference that may
ent lengths and angles from the signal 1-800-387-0100. cause undesired operation of the device.
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) you
are programming. Attempt varying an- Any unauthorized modification to this device
gles at the distance of 2 to 5 in
equipment.
(5 to 12 cm) away or the same angle at
varying distances.
523
Controls in detail
Useful features
Infrared reflecting windshield
Your vehicle is equipped with infrared re-

flecting glass, which reduces the amount
of radiated heat entering the vehicle interi-
or through the windows.
The infrared reflecting glass also prevents
the transmission of signals through the
glass by in-vehicle electronic devices
(e.g. electronic toll collection devices).
Vehicles without Night View Assist* Vehicles with Night View Assist*
To allow the use of these devices in the ve-
1 Transparent area (located left and right 1 Transparent area (located left to the
hicle, transparent areas 1 and 3 are
to the cover of the rain light sensor) cover of the rain light sensor)
placed in the windshield.
2 Cover of the rain light sensor 2 Cover of the rain light sensor
You can see them from certain angles 3 Transparent area 3 Transparent area
when ambient light condition permit.
524
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
Driving instructions
At the gas station
Engine compartment
Tires and wheels
Winter driving
Maintenance
Vehicle care
525
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
In the “Operation” section you will find de- The more cautiously you treat your vehicle After 1000 miles (1500 km) you may grad-
tailed information on operating, maintain- during the break-in period, the more satis- ually increase vehicle and engine speeds
ing and caring for your vehicle. fied you will be with its performance later to the permissible maximum.
on.
! Additional instructions for S 63 AMG and
앫 Drive your vehicle during the first S 65 AMG:
1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but 앫 During the first 1000 miles (1500 km), do
moderate vehicle and engine speeds. not exceed a speed of 85 mph (140 km/h).
앫 During this period, avoid heavy loads 앫 During this period, avoid engine speeds
(full throttle driving) and excessive en- above 4500 rpm in each gear.
gine speeds (no more than 2/3 of maxi- 앫 Shift gears at the correct time.
mum rpm in each gear). All of the above instructions, as may apply
앫 Avoid accelerating by kick-down. to your vehicle type, also apply when driv-
ing the first 1000 miles (1500 km) after
앫 Do not attempt to slow the vehicle
the engine or the rear differential has been
down by shifting to a lower gear using
replaced.
the gear selector lever.
앫 Select gear ranges 3, 2 or 1 only when i Always obey applicable speed limits.
driving at moderate speeds (for hill
driving).
앫 Select C as the preferred shift program
(컄 page 409) for the first 1000 miles
(1500 km).
526
Operation
왔 Driving instructions
Drive sensibly – save fuel Drinking and driving Pedals
Fuel consumption, to a great extent,

depends on driving habits and operating Warning! G Warning! G
conditions.
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs Make sure that absolutely no objects are ob-
To save fuel you should:
and driving are very dangerous combina- structing the pedals’ range of movement.
앫 Keep tires at the recommended tire tions. Even a small amount of alcohol or Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obsta-
inflation pressures. drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions cles. If there are any floormats or carpets in
앫 Remove unnecessary loads. and judgment. the footwell, make sure the pedals still have
The possibility of a serious or even fatal ac- sufficient clearance. Otherwise this could
앫 Remove roof rack when not in use.
cident are greatly increased when you drink lead to accidents or injury.
앫 Allow engine to warm up under low or take drugs and drive.
load use.
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow Power assistance
앫 Avoid frequent acceleration and decel- anyone to drive who has been drinking or
eration. taking drugs.
앫 Have all maintenance work performed Warning! G
at the intervals specified in the Mainte-
With the engine not running, there is no
nance Booklet and as required by the
power assistance for the brake and steering
Maintenance System. Contact an au-
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
Fuel consumption is also increased by driv- effort is necessary to brake and steer the ve-
ing in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic, hicle.
on short trips, and in hilly area.
527
Operation
Brakes ! Because the ESP® operates automatically,

the engine and ignition must be shut off Warning! G
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 or
Warning! G KEYLESS-GO start/stop button* in position 0 Make sure not to endanger any other road
or 1) when users when carrying out these braking ma-
After driving in heavy rain for some time 앫 the electronic parking brake is being tested neuvers.
without applying the brakes or through wa- on a brake test dynamometer
ter deep enough to wet brake components, 앫 the vehicle is being towed with the Refer to the description of the Brake Assist
the first braking action may be somewhat front/rear axle raised System (BAS or BAS Plus*) (컄 page 68).
reduced and increased pedal pressure may Active braking action through the ESP® may oth-
be necessary to obtain expected braking erwise seriously damage the brake system.
Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may
effect. Maintain a safe distance from be the reason for low brake fluid level in
To help prevent brake disk corrosion after the reservoir.
vehicles in front.
driving on wet road surfaces (particularly
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will salted roads), it is advisable to brake the The brake fluid level in the reservoir may
cause excessive and premature wear of the vehicle with considerable force prior to be too low if the red brake warning lamp in
brake pads. parking. The heat generated serves to dry the instrument cluster comes on while the
the brakes. engine is running and an acoustic warning
It can also result in the brakes overheating,
sounds (컄 page 601). Observe additional
thereby significantly reducing their effec- If your brake system is normally only sub- messages in the multifunction display that
tiveness. It may not be possible to stop the jected to moderate loads, you should occa- may appear (컄 page 612).
vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an sionally test the effectiveness of the
accident. brakes by applying above-normal braking Have the brake system inspected
pressure at higher speeds. This will also immediately. Contact an authorized
enhance the grip of the brake pads. Mercedes-Benz Center.
528
Operation
All checks and service work on the brake This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which you operate the vehicle. Thus, a driv-
system should be carried out by qualified which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lim- ing style calling for high demand braking
technicians only. Contact an authorized ited Warranty. will cause your vehicle’s brakes to wear
Mercedes-Benz Center. After hard braking, it is advisable to drive more quickly.
on for some time, rather than immediately
Only install brake pads and brake fluid
park, so that the air stream can cool down
recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
the brakes faster.
Warning! G
New vehicle brake pads and discs, and
Warning! G High-performance brake system replacement brake pads and discs may take
(S 63 AMG and S 65 AMG only) several hundred miles of driving until they
If other than recommended brake pads are
installed, or other than recommended brake
The high-performance brake system is de- provide optimum braking efficiency. Until
fluid is used, the braking properties of the
signed to operate under the extremely high that time, you may need to use increased
vehicle can be degraded to an extent that
operating demands required to accommo- brake pedal pressure while braking. Please
safe braking is substantially impaired. This
date the performance capabilities of the be aware of this and adjust your driving and
could result in an accident.
vehicle. The brakes may produce a squeak- braking accordingly during this break-in
ing-type noise depending on the period.
앫 vehicle speed Excessive high demand braking will cause
! When driving down long and steep grades, correspondingly high brake wear. Please be
relieve the load on the brakes by shifting into a 앫 brake force applied
lower gear to use the engine’s braking power. attentive to the brake warning lamp in the
This helps prevent overheating of the brakes and 앫 ambient conditions, e.g. temperature instrument cluster and brake condition mes-
reduces brake pad wear. and humidity sages in the multifunction display. Especial-
When using the engine’s braking power, a drive As with any brake system, the wear of indi- ly for high performance driving, it is
wheel may not spin for an extended period of vidual brake system components such as important to maintain and have the brake
time, e.g. on slippery road surfaces. brake pads or disks strongly depends on system checked regularly.
your driving style and the conditions under
529
Operation
Driving off Parking

앫 Turn the SmartKey or the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO* to starter switch
Apply the brakes to test them briefly after position 0 and remove, or press the
driving off. Perform this procedure only Warning! G KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button.
when the road is clear of other traffic.
앫 Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
Do not park this vehicle in areas where com-
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not KEYLESS-GO* with you and lock the
bustible materials such as grass, hay or
place full load on the engine until the oper- vehicle when leaving.
leaves can come into contact with the hot
ating temperature has been reached.
exhaust system, as these materials could be
! When driving off on a slippery surface, do ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
not allow a drive wheel to spin for an extended
To reduce the risk of personal injury, or
period with the ESP® switched off. Doing so may
cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is damage to the vehicle drivetrain, as a result
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited War- of inadvertent vehicle movement, before
ranty. turning off the engine and leaving the vehi-
cle always:
! Simultaneously depressing the accelerator
pedal and applying the brakes reduces engine 앫 Keep right foot on brake pedal.
performance and causes premature brake and 앫 Engage electronic parking brake.
drivetrain wear.
앫 Shift the automatic transmission to P.
앫 Slowly release brake pedal.
앫 When parked on an incline, turn front
wheels towards the road curb.
530
Operation
Tires The treadwear indicator appears as a solid

band across the tread. Warning! G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or may lose control of the vehicle. Continued
Although the applicable federal motor vehi-
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possi- driving with a flat tire or driving at high
cle safety laws consider a tire to be worn
ble damage to your vehicle has occurred, speed with a flat tire will cause excessive
when the treadwear indicators (TWI) be-
you should turn on the hazard warning flash- heat build-up and possibly a fire.
come visible at approximately 1/16 in
ers, carefully slow down, and drive with cau-
(1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not al-
tion to an area which is a safe distance from For more information, see “Tires and
low your tires to wear down to that level. As
the road. wheels” (컄 page 550).
tread depth approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the
Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody adhesion properties on a wet road are
for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires sharply reduced. Hydroplaning
appear unsafe, have the vehicle towed to
Depending upon the weather and/or road Depending on the depth of the water layer
the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center or tire
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies on the road, hydroplaning may occur, even
dealer for repairs.
widely. at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce
vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
Specified tire inflation pressures must be road and apply brakes cautiously in the
law. These indicators are located in six
maintained. This applies particularly if the rain.
places on the tread circumference and be-
tires are subject to extreme operating con-
come visible at a tread depth of approxi-
ditions (e.g. high speeds, heavy loads, high
mately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which point the
ambient temperatures).
tire is considered worn and should be re-
placed.
531
Operation
Tire traction Mercedes-Benz recommends winter tires Tire speed rating

(컄 page 580) with a minimum tread depth
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or of approximately 1/6 in (4 mm) on all four Regardless of the tire speed rating, local
icy road is always lower than on a dry road. wheels for the winter season to ensure speed limits should be obeyed. Use pru-
You should pay particular attention to the normal balanced handling characteristics. dent driving speeds appropriate to prevail-
condition of the road whenever the outside On packed snow, they can reduce your ing conditions.
temperatures are close to the freezing stopping distance compared to summer
point. tires. Warning! G
Stopping distance, however, is still consid-
erably greater than when the road is not Even when permitted by law, never operate
Warning! G a vehicle at speeds greater than the maxi-
covered with snow or ice. Exercise appro-
priate caution. mum speed rating of the tires.
If ice has formed on the road, tire traction
will be substantially reduced. Under such Exceeding the maximum speed for which
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may
weather conditions, drive, steer and brake cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is tires are rated can lead to sudden tire fail-
with extreme caution. not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited War- ure, causing loss of vehicle control and pos-
ranty. sibly resulting in an accident and/or serious
personal injury and possible death, for you
and for others.
532
Operation
An electronic speed limiter prevents your If you are uncertain about the correct read-
vehicle from exceeding a speed of ing of the information given on a tire’s side- Warning! G
앫 All models except S 63 AMG and wall, any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center will be glad to assist you. On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
S 65 AMG: in order to obtain braking action. This could
130 mph (210 km/h) i For information on speed ratings for winter result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi-
tires, see (컄 page 571) and (컄 page 580). cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not pre-
앫 S 63 AMG:
S 65 AMG: vent this type of control loss.
155 mph (250 km/h) Winter driving instructions
앫 S 63 AMG with increased top speed*: The most important rule for slippery or icy Road salts and chemicals can adversely af-
S 65 AMG with increased top speed*: roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid fect braking efficiency. Increased pedal
186 mph (300 km/h) abrupt acceleration, braking and steering force may become necessary to produce
maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control the normal braking effect.
The factory equipped tires on your vehicle
may have a tire speed rating above the or DISTRONIC Plus* system under such Depressing the brake pedal periodically
maximum speed permitted by the elec- conditions. when traveling at length on salt-strewn
tronic speed limiter. When the vehicle is in danger of skidding, roads can bring road-salt impaired braking
move gear selector lever to neutral efficiency back to normal.
Make sure your tires have the required tire
speed rating as specified for your vehicle in position N. Try to keep the vehicle under If the vehicle is parked after being driven
the “Technical data” section (컄 page 718), control by corrective steering action. on salt-treated roads, the braking efficien-
for example when purchasing new tires. cy should be tested as soon as possible af-
i For information on driving with snow chains,
see “Snow chains” (컄 page 581). ter driving is resumed.
For information on how to identify the tire
speed rating on a tire’s sidewall, see “Tire
size designation, load and speed rating”
(컄 page 568).
533
Operation
Standing water
! Do not drive through flooded areas or water
Make sure not to endanger any other road The outside temperature indicator is not de- of unknown depth. Before driving through water,
users when carrying out these braking ma- signed to serve as an ice-warning device and determine its depth. Never accelerate before
neuvers. is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. In- driving into water. The bow wave could force wa-
dicated temperatures just above the freez- ter into the engine and auxiliary equipment, thus
ing point do not guarantee that the road damaging them.
Warning! G surface is free of ice. If you must drive through standing water, drive
slowly to prevent water from entering the pas-
senger compartment or the engine compart-
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make For more information on winter driving, see ment. Water in these areas could cause damage
sure that snow is kept clear of the exhaust “Winter driving” (컄 page 580). to electrical components or wiring of the engine
pipe and from around the vehicle with the or transmission, or could result in water being in-
engine running. Otherwise, deadly carbon gested by the engine through the air intake caus-
monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle in- ing severe internal engine damage. Any such
terior resulting in unconsciousness and damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
death. Limited Warranty.
To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation,

open a window slightly on the side of the ve-
hicle not facing the wind.
534
Operation
Passenger compartment Control and operation of radio Telephones and two-way radios
transmitters
COMAND, radio, and telephone*
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
Always fasten items being carried as secure-
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
ly as possible. Warning! G out being connected to an external antenna)
In an accident, during hard braking or sud- from inside the vehicle while the engine is
den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown Please do not forget that your primary re-
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury sponsibility is to drive the vehicle safely.
tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos-
to vehicle occupants unless the items are Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Man-
sibly resulting in an accident and/or
securely fastened in the vehicle. agement and Data System), radio, or tele-
personal injury.
phone1 if road, weather and traffic
The trunk is the preferred place to carry ob- conditions permit. Otherwise, you may not
jects. be able to observe traffic conditions and Radio transmitters, such as a portable tele-
could endanger yourself and others. phone or a citizens band unit should only
Driving abroad be used inside the vehicle if they are con-
nected to an antenna that is installed on
Abroad, there is an extensive the outside of the vehicle.
Mercedes-Benz service network at your Refer to the radio transmitter operation in-
disposal. If you plan to drive into areas structions regarding use of an external an-
1
which are not listed in the index of your Observe all legal requirements.
tenna.
Mercedes-Benz Center directory, you
should request pertinent information from
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
535
Operation
Catalytic converter Emission control

Warning! G
Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with Certain systems of the engine and the
monolithic-type catalytic converters, an As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or op- emission control system serve to keep the
important element in conjunction with the erate this vehicle in areas where combusti- toxic components of the exhaust gases
oxygen sensors to achieve substantial con- ble materials such as grass, hay or leaves within permissible limits required by law.
trol of the pollutants in the exhaust emis- can come into contact with the hot exhaust
These systems will function properly only
sions. Keep your vehicle in proper system, as these materials could be ignited
when maintained strictly according to fac-
operating condition by following our rec- and cause a vehicle fire.
tory specifications. Any adjustments on
ommended maintenance instructions as the engine should, therefore, be carried
outlined in your Maintenance Booklet. out only by qualified Mercedes-Benz Cen-
! To prevent damage to the catalytic convert- ter authorized technicians.
ers, only use premium unleaded gasoline in this
Engine adjustments should not be altered
vehicle.
in any way. The specified service proce-
Any noticeable irregularities in engine operation dures must be carried out regularly accord-
should be repaired promptly. Otherwise, exces-
ing to Mercedes-Benz servicing
sive unburned fuel may reach the catalytic con-
verter, causing it to overheat and potentially requirements. For details please refer to
start a fire. the Maintenance Booklet.
536
Operation
Coolant temperature
During severe operating conditions,
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to e.g. stop-and-go traffic, the coolant tem- 앫 Driving when your engine is badly over-
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon perature may rise close to approximately heated can cause some fluids, which
monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause un- 248°F (120°C). may have leaked into the engine com-
consciousness and possible death. partment, to catch fire. You could be se-
The engine should not be operated with riously burned.
Do not run the engine in confined areas the coolant temperature over 248°F 앫 Steam from an overheated engine can
(such as a garage) which are not properly (120°C). Doing so may cause serious en- cause serious burns and can occur just
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas gine damage which is not covered by the by opening the hood. Stay away from
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. the engine if you see or hear steam com-
have the cause determined and corrected ing from it.
immediately. If you must drive under these
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from
conditions, drive only with at least one win-
other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of
dow fully open at all times.
the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle
until the engine has cooled down.
537
Operation
At the gas station
Refueling The fuel filler flap is located on the 왘 Shift the automatic transmission to
right-hand side of the vehicle towards the park position P.
rear. Locking and unlocking the vehicle
왘 Engage the electronic parking brake.
Warning! G with the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* automatically locks and un- 왘 Turn off the engine.
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. locks the fuel filler flap. 왘 Vehicles with SmartKey: Remove the
It burns violently and can cause serious per-
i In case that the central locking system does SmartKey from the starter switch.
sonal injury.
not release the fuel filler flap, or the opening Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: Open the
Never allow sparks, flame or smoking mate- mechanism is clamping, notify Roadside Assis- driver’s door (this puts the starter
rials near gasoline! tance or an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
switch in position 0, same as with the
Turn off the engine before refueling. SmartKey removed from the starter
Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid in- switch). The driver’s door then can be
haling fumes and skin or clothing contact, closed again.
extinguish all smoking materials. 왘 Open the fuel filler flap by pushing at
Direct skin contact with fuels and the inha- the point indicated by arrow 1.
lation of fuel vapors are damaging to your The fuel filler flap springs open.
health.
왘 Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise and
hold on to it until possible pressure is
released.
1 To open fuel filler flap
2 To insert fuel filler cap
3 Holder
538
Operation
At the gas station
왘 Take off the fuel filler cap and set it in i Only use premium unleaded gasoline with a
the direction of arrow 2 and place it Warning! G minimum Posted Octane Rating of 91 (average of
into holder 3 located on the inside of 96 RON/86 MON). Please contact gas station
the fuel filler flap. Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pres- personnel in case labels on the pump cannot be
sure in the system which could cause a gas found.
To prevent fuel vapors from escaping discharge. This could cause the gas to spray For more information on gasoline see “Premium
into open air, fully insert filler nozzle back out when removing the fuel pump noz- unleaded gasoline” (컄 page 729), see “Fuel re-
unit. zle, which could cause personal injury. quirements” (컄 page 729) and the Factory Ap-
왘 Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle proved Service Products pamphlet.
unit cuts out – do not top off or over- 왘 Replace the fuel cap by turning it clock- i Leaving the engine running and the fuel cap
fill. wise until it audibly engages. open can cause the yellow engine malfunction
indicator lamp ± to illuminate.
i Make sure to close the fuel filler flap before For more information, see the “Practical hints”
locking your vehicle as the flap locking pin pre- section (컄 page 602).
vents closing after you have locked the vehicle.
왘 Close the fuel filler flap.
You should hear the latch close shut.
539
Operation
At the gas station
Check regularly and before a long trip Windshield washer system and head- Engine oil level
lamp cleaning system
For more information on engine oil, see
For more information on refilling the wash- “Engine oil” (컄 page 543).
er reservoir, see “Windshield washer sys-
tem and headlamp cleaning system” Vehicle lighting
(컄 page 548).
Check function and cleanliness. For more
information on replacing light bulbs, see
Coolant
“Replacing bulbs” (컄 page 678).
For more information on coolant, see
For more information, see “Lighting”
“Coolant level” (컄 page 547) and see “Fu-
(컄 page 371).
els, coolants, lubricants, etc.”
Example illustration from S 550 (컄 page 724).
Tire inflation pressure
1 Coolant level
2 Brake fluid Brake fluid For information on tire inflation pressure,
3 Windshield washer and headlamp see “Checking tire inflation pressure”
cleaning system ! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake (컄 page 560).
fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or
i Opening the hood (컄 page 541). below, have the brake system checked for brake
pad thickness and leaks immediately. Notify an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
Do not add brake fluid as this will not solve the
problem. For more information, see “Practical
hints” (컄 page 601) and (컄 page 630).
For information on brake fluid, see “Brake
fluid” (컄 page 728).
540
Operation
Engine compartment
왔 Engine compartment
Hood 왘 Lift the hood slightly.
Handle 2 will extend out of the radia-
tor grille.
Warning! G
! To avoid damage to the windshield wipers or
Do not pull the release lever while the vehi- hood, never open the hood if the wiper arms are
cle is in motion. Otherwise the hood could folded forward away from the windshield.
be forced open by passing air flow.
! To avoid damage to handle 2 never pull up
This could cause the hood to come loose the hood on handle 2.
and injure you and/or others.
왘 Pull handle 2 to its stop out of radiator
1 Release lever
grille.
Opening 왘 Pull release lever 1.
왘 Lift bottom of hood at edge of radiator
The hood is unlocked. grille.
Warning! G The hood will be automatically held
You could be injured when the hood is open
open at shoulder height by gas-filled
– even when the engine is turned off.
struts. 컄컄
Parts of the engine can become very hot. To

prevent burns, let the engine cool off com-
pletely before touching any components on
the vehicle. Comply with all relevant safety
precautions.
2 Handle for opening the hood
541
Operation
Engine compartment
컄컄 Closing
To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of The engine is equipped with a transistorized Warning! G
moving parts when the hood is open and the ignition system. Because of the high voltage
When closing the hood, use extreme caution
engine is running. it is dangerous to touch any components (ig-
not to catch hands or fingers. Be careful that
The radiator fan may continue to run for ap- nition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic
you do not close the hood on anyone.
proximately 30 seconds or even restart af- socket) of the ignition system
Make sure that the hood is securely en-
ter the engine has been turned off. Stay 앫 with the engine running
gaged before driving off. Do not continue
clear of fan blades. 앫 while starting the engine driving if the hood can no longer engage af-
앫 if ignition is “on” and the engine is ter an accident, for example. The hood could
cranked manually otherwise come loose while the vehicle is in
Warning! G motion and endanger you and/or others.
If you see flames or smoke coming from the

engine compartment, or if the coolant tem- 왘 Let the hood drop from a height of ap-
perature gauge indicates that the engine is proximately 1 ft (30 cm).
overheated, do not open the hood. Move The hood will lock audibly.
away from vehicle and do not open the hood
until the engine has cooled down. If neces- 왘 Check to make sure the hood is fully
sary, call the fire department. closed.
If you can raise the hood at a point
above the headlamps, then it is not
properly closed. Open it again and let it
drop with somewhat greater force.
542
Operation
Engine compartment
Engine oil Notes about checking engine oil level Checking engine oil level with the con-
When checking the oil level trol system (S 600 and S 65 AMG)
The amount of oil your engine needs will
To check the engine oil level via the multi-
depend on a number of factors, including 앫 the vehicle must be parked on level
function display, do the following:
driving style. Higher oil consumption can ground
occur when 앫 with the engine at operating tempera- i The menu overview can be found on
(컄 page 266).
앫 the vehicle is new ture, the vehicle must have been
stationary for at least 5 minutes with 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 344).
앫 the vehicle is driven frequently at
the engine turned off
higher engine speeds 왘 Press ( or & to select the menu
앫 with the engine not at operating tem- “Service”.
Engine oil consumption checks should only
perature yet, the vehicle must have
be made after the vehicle break-in period. 왘 Press $ or % to select “Engine
been stationary for at least 30 minutes
oil level”.
! Do not use any special lubricant additives, with the engine turned off
as these may damage the drive assemblies. Us- 왘 Press #.
ing special additives not approved by
Mercedes-Benz may cause damage not covered The following message is seen in the multi-
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. function display:
More information on this subject is available at “Engine oil level
any Mercedes-Benz Center. Measuring now
Correct measurement
only if vehicle is level” 컄컄
543
Operation
Engine compartment
컄컄 One of the following messages will Other display messages 왘 If the engine is at operating tempera-
subsequently appear in the multifunction ture, wait 5 minutes before checking
If the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO* start/
display: oil.
stop button is not in position 2, the follow-
앫 “Engine oil level ing message will appear: 왘 If the engine is not at operating temper-
OK” ature yet, you must wait 30 minutes
“For engine oil level,
before checking oil.
앫 “Add 1.0 qts. engine oil turn on ignition”
at next refueling” If there is excess engine oil with the engine
(Canada: “1.0 l”) at operating temperature, the following
If you see the message message will appear:
앫 “Add 1.5 qts. engine oil
“Waiting period for, “Engine oil level
at next refueling”
engine oil level Reduce oil level”
(Canada: “1.5 l”) not complete”
왘 Have excess oil siphoned or drained
앫 “Add 2.0 qts. engine oil 왘 If engine is at operating temperature, off. Contact an authorized
at next refueling” wait 5 minutes before repeating check Mercedes-Benz Center.
(Canada: “2.0 l”) procedure.
! Excess oil must be siphoned or drained off.
왘 If engine is not at operating tempera- It could cause damage to the engine and catalyt-
i If you want to interrupt the checking proce- ture yet, wait 30 minutes before ic converter not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
dure, press button L on the multifunction
repeating check procedure. Limited Warranty.
steering wheel.
왘 If necessary, add engine oil If you see the message For more information on messages in the
(컄 page 546). multifunction display concerning engine
“Engine oil level
oil, see the “Practical hints” section
For more information on engine oil, see the Not when engine on”
(컄 page 659).
“Technical data” section (컄 page 724) and 왘 Turn off the engine.
(컄 page 728).
544
Operation
Engine compartment
Checking engine oil level with the oil i S 550 only:

dipstick (S 550 and S 63 AMG) The filling quantity between the upper and lower
To check the engine oil level with the oil marks on the oil dipstick is approximately
dipstick, do the following: 2.1 US qt. (2.0 l).
왘 Open the hood (컄 page 541). i S 63 AMG only:

The filling quantity between the upper and lower
marks on the oil dipstick is approximately
1.6 US qt. (1.5 l).
왘 If necessary, add engine oil.
Example illustration from S 550 4matic
For adding engine oil (컄 page 546).
1 Oil dipstick
For more information on engine oil, see the
2 Upper mark
“Technical data” section (컄 page 724) and
3 Lower mark
(컄 page 728).
왘 Pull out oil dipstick 1.
For more information on messages in the
Example illustration from S 550 왘 Wipe oil dipstick 1 clean. multifunction display concerning engine
1 Oil dipstick oil, see the “Practical hints” section
왘 Fully insert oil dipstick 1 into the dip-
2 Upper mark (컄 page 612).
stick guide tube.
3 Lower mark
왘 Pull out oil dipstick 1 again after ap-
proximately 3 seconds to obtain accu-
rate reading.
The oil level is correct when it is between
lower mark 3 (min.) and upper mark 2
(max.) of the oil dipstick.
545
Operation
Engine compartment
Adding engine oil 왘 Add engine oil as required. Be careful

not to overfill with oil.
! Only use approved engine oils and oil filters
required for vehicles with Maintenance System. Be careful not to spill any oil when adding.
For a listing of approved engine oils and oil fil- Avoid environmental damage caused by oil
ters, refer to the Factory Approved Service Prod- entering the ground or water.
ucts pamphlet (USA only) in your vehicle
literature portfolio, or contact an authorized ! Excess oil must be siphoned or drained off.
Mercedes-Benz Center. It will cause damage to the engine and emission
Using engine oils and oil filters of specification control system not covered by the
other than those expressly required for the Main- Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
tenance System, or changing of oil and oil filter Example illustration from S 550 왘 Screw filler cap 1 back on filler neck.
at change intervals longer than those called for
by the Maintenance System will result in engine For more information on engine oil, see the
or emission control system damage not covered “Technical data” section (컄 page 724) and
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. (컄 page 728).
Transmission fluid level
The transmission fluid level does not need

to be checked. If you notice transmission
fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions,
have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
S 63 AMG
check the automatic transmission.
1 Filler cap
왘 Unscrew filler cap 1 from filler neck.
546
Operation
Engine compartment
Active Body Control* (ABC*) fluid level Coolant level

앫 Using a rag, slowly open the cap approx-
imately 1/2 turn to relieve excess pres-
Regular fluid level check is not required. If The engine coolant is a mixture of water sure. If opened immediately, scalding
you notice fluid leaks or malfunction mes- and anticorrosion/antifreeze. hot fluid and steam will be blown out un-
sages in the multifunction display, have an When checking the coolant level, der pressure.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center check
앫 the vehicle must be parked on level 앫 Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine
the ABC-system. parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene gly-
ground
col which may burn if it comes into con-
앫 the coolant temperature must be be- tact with hot engine parts.
low 158°F (70°C)
The coolant expansion tank is located on
Warning! G the passenger side of the engine compart-
ment.
In order to avoid potentially serious burns:
앫 Use extreme caution when opening the
hood if there are any signs of steam or
coolant leaking from the cooling system,
or if the coolant temperature gauge indi-
cates that the coolant is overheated.
앫 Do not remove pressure cap on coolant
reservoir if coolant temperature is
above 158°F (70°C). Allow engine to
cool down before removing cap. The
coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and Example illustration from S 550
is under pressure. 1 Cap
2 Coolant expansion tank
547
Operation
Engine compartment
왘 Using a rag, turn cap 1 slowly approx- Windshield washer system and
imately one half turn counterclockwise headlamp cleaning system
to release any excess pressure.
The washer fluid reservoir is located on the
왘 Continue turning the cap counterclock-
left-hand side of the engine compartment
wise and remove it.
when looking in the direction of travel. It
The coolant level is correct if the level supplies the windshield washer system
앫 for cold coolant: reaches the white and headlamp cleaning system with wash-
marking (plastic bridge) inside the cool- er fluid.
ant expansion tank
Vehicles with ABC*
앫 for warm coolant: is approximately
0.6 in (1.5 cm) higher 1 Cap
왘 Add coolant as required. Fluid for the windshield washer system and
the headlamp cleaning system is supplied
왘 Replace and tighten cap 1. from the windshield washer reservoir. It
For more information on coolant, see the has a capacity of approximately 6.87 US qt
“Technical data” section (컄 page 730). (6.5 l).
During all seasons, add MB Windshield
Example illustration S 550 with Airmatic Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” to
1 Cap water. Premix the windshield washer fluid
in a suitable container.
548
Operation
Engine compartment
왘 To close washer fluid reservoir:

Warning! G Press cap 1 onto filler hole until it en-
gages.
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flamma-
ble. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze ! Only use washer fluid which is suitable for
on hot engine parts, because it may ignite plastic lenses. Improper washer fluid can dam-
age the plastic lenses of the headlamps.
and burn. You could be seriously burned.
For more information, see “Windshield
왘 To open washer fluid reservoir: Pull washer system and headlamp cleaning
tab of cap 1 upward. system” (컄 page 733).
왘 Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield

Washer Concentrate and water (or
commercially available premixed wind-
shield washer solvent/antifreeze, de-
pending on ambient temperatures).
! Always use washer solvent/antifreeze
where temperatures may fall below freezing
point. Failure to do so could result in damage to
the washer system/reservoir.
549
Operation
Tires and wheels
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Important guidelines

Center for information on tested and Warning! G
recommended rims and tires for summer 앫 Only use sets of tires and rims of the
and winter operation. They can also offer Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the same type and make.
advice concerning tire service and tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
앫 Tires must be of the correct size for the
purchase. sustained damage, replace them.
rim.
When replacing rims, only use genuine
앫 Break in new tires for approximately
Warning! G Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the
60 miles (100 km) at moderate
particular rim type. Failure to do so can
result in the bolts loosening and possibly an
speeds.
Replace rims or tires with the same designa-
tion, manufacturer and type as shown on the accident. 앫 Regularly check the tires and rims for
original part. Contact an authorized Retreaded tires are not tested or recom- damage. Dented or bent rims can
Mercedes-Benz Center for further informa- mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous cause tire inflation pressure loss and
tion. If incorrectly sized rims and tires are damage cannot always be recognized on re- damage to the tire beads.
mounted: treads. The operating safety of the vehicle 앫 If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire
앫 The wheel brakes or suspension cannot be assured when such tires are used. inflation pressure and correct as
components can be damaged. required.
앫 The operating clearance of the wheels 앫 Do not allow your tires to wear down
and the tires may no longer be correct. too far. Adhesion properties on wet
roads are sharply reduced at tread
depths of less than 1/8 in (3 mm).
앫 When replacing individual tires, you
should mount new tires on the front
wheels first (on vehicles with
same-sized wheels all around).
550
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire care and maintenance Tire inspection Life of tire

Every time you check the tire inflation The service life of a tire is dependent upon
pressure, you should also inspect your varying factors including but not limited to:
Warning! G tires for the following:
앫 Driving style
Regularly check the tires for damage. Dam- 앫 excessive treadwear (컄 page 552)
앫 Tire inflation pressure
aged tires can cause tire inflation pressure
앫 cord or fabric showing through the
loss. As a result, you could lose control of 앫 Distance driven
tire’s rubber
your vehicle.
앫 bumps, bulges, cuts, cracks or splits in
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
the tread or side of the tire
Warning! G
tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
sustained damage, replace them. Replace the tire if you find any of the above Tires and spare tire should be replaced after
conditions. 6 years, regardless of the remaining tread.
Regularly check the tire inflation pressure Make sure you also inspect the spare tire
at least once a month. For more informa- periodically for condition and inflation.
tion on checking tire inflation pressure, Spare tires will age and degrade over time
see “Recommended tire inflation pres- even if never used, and thus should be in-
sure” (컄 page 558). spected and replaced when necessary.
551
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tread depth Storing tires

to wear down to that level. As tread depth
Do not allow your tires to wear down too approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the adhesion ! Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place
far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are properties on a wet road are sharply re- with as little exposure to light as possible. Pro-
sharply reduced at tread depths of less duced. tect tires from contact with oil, grease and gaso-
than 1/8 in (3 mm). line.
Depending upon the weather and/or road
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
Cleaning tires
law. These indicators are located in six widely.
places on the tread circumference and ! Never use a round nozzle to power wash
become visible at a tread depth of approx- tires. The intense jet of water can result in dam-
imately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which point the age to the tire.
tire is considered worn and should be re- Always replace a damaged tire.
placed.
Recommended minimum tire tread depth:
앫 Summer tires 1/8 in (3 mm)
앫 Winter tires 1/6 in (4 mm)
Warning! G 1 TWI (TreadWear Indicator)

Although the applicable federal motor safety The treadwear indicator appears as a solid
laws consider a tire to be worn when the band across the tread.
treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible at
approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), we recom-
mend that you do not allow your tires
552
Operation
Tires and wheels
Direction of rotation Loading the vehicle carried by a single axle (front or rear).
Never exceed the GVWR or GAWR for
Unidirectional tires offer added advan- Two labels on your vehicle show how much either the front axle or rear axle.
tages, such as better hydroplaning perfor- weight it may properly carry.
mance. To benefit, however, you must 1) The Tire and Loading Information
make sure the tires rotate in the direction placard can be found on the driver’s
specified. door B-pillar. This placard tells you im-
An arrow on the sidewall indicates the portant information about the number
intended direction of rotation (spinning) of of people that can be in the vehicle and
the tire. the total weight that can be carried in
the vehicle. It also contains information
i Spare wheels may be mounted against the on the proper size and recommended
direction of rotation (spinning) even with a unidi-
rectional tire for temporary use only until the reg- tire inflation pressures for the original
ular drive wheel has been repaired or replaced. equipment tires on your vehicle. 1 Driver’s door B-pillar
Always observe and follow applicable temporary 2) The certification label, also found on Following is a discussion on how to work
use restrictions and speed limitations indicated with the information contained on the Tire
on the spare wheel.
the driver’s door B-pillar tells you about
the gross weight capacity of your vehi- and Loading Information placard with re-
cle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight gards to loading your vehicle.
Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the
weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
fuel and cargo. The certification label
also tells you about the front and rear
axle weight capacity, called the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The GAWR
is the total allowable weight that can be
553
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire and Loading Information Tire and Loading Information placard Seating capacity
The seating capacity gives you important
Warning! G information on the number of occupants
that can be in the vehicle. Observe front
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the and rear seating capacity. The Tire and
specified load limit or total load limit as indi- Loading Information placard showing the
cated on the Tire and Loading Information seating capacity is located on the driver’s
placard on the driver’s door B-pillar. Over- door B-pillar (컄 page 553).
loading the tires can overheat them, possi-
bly causing a blowout. Overloading the tires i Data shown on Tire and Loading Information
placard example are for illustration purposes
can also result in handling or steering prob- only. Seating capacity data are specific to each
lems, or brake failure. 1 Load limit information on the Tire and
vehicle and may vary from data shown in the il-
Loading Information placard lustration below. Refer to Tire and Loading Infor-
The Tire and Loading Information placard mation placard on vehicle for actual data specific
i Data shown on Tire and Loading Information to your vehicle.
placard example are for illustration purposes showing the load limit information is locat-
only. Load limit data are specific to each vehicle ed on the driver’s door B-pillar.
and may vary from data shown in the illustration
below. Refer to Tire and Loading Information 왘 Locate the statement “The combined
placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your weight of occupants and cargo should
vehicle. never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX
lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion placard.
The combined weight of all occupants,
cargo/luggage and trailer tongue load
(if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced in that statement.
554
Operation
Tires and wheels
Step 2 Step 6 (if applicable)

왘 Determine the combined weight of the 왘 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
driver and passengers that will be load from your trailer will be trans-
riding in your vehicle. ferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces
Step 3
the available cargo and luggage load
왘 Subtract the combined weight of the capacity of your vehicle (컄 page 557).
driver and passengers from XXX kilo-
grams or XXX lbs. The following table shows examples on
how to calculate total and cargo load
1 Seating capacity information on the Step 4 capacities with varying seating configura-
Tire and Loading Information placard 왘 The resulting figure equals the avail- tions and number and size of occupants.
able amount of cargo and luggage load The following examples use a load limit
Steps for determining correct load limit capacity. For example, if the “XXX” of 1500 lbs. This is for illustration
amount equals 1400 lbs and there will purposes only. Make sure you are using
The following steps have been developed
be five 150 lbs passengers in your the actual load limit for your vehicle stated
as required of all manufacturers under
vehicle, the amount of available cargo on the vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations,
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs Information placard (컄 page 554).
Part 575 pursuant to the “National Traffic
and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”. (1400 – 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
Step 1 Step 5
왘 Locate the statement “The combined 왘 Determine the combined weight of

weight of occupants and cargo should luggage and cargo being loaded on the
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on vehicle. That weight may not safely
your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Infor- exceed the available cargo and luggage
mation placard. load capacity calculated in step 4.
555
Operation
Tires and wheels
Example Combined Number of Seating Occupants weight Combined Available cargo/luggage and trailer
weight limit occupants configura- weight of all tongue weight (total load limit from
of occu- (driver and tion occupants Tire and Loading Information
pants and passengers) placard minus combined weight of
cargo from all occupants)
Tire and
Loading
Information
placard
1 1500 lbs 5 front: 2 Occupant 1: 150 lbs 750 lbs 1500 lbs – 750 lbs = 750 lbs
Occupant 2: 180 lbs
rear: 3 Occupant 3: 160 lbs
Occupant 4: 140 lbs
Occupant 5: 120 lbs
rear: 2 Occupant 2: 190 lbs
Occupant 3: 150 lbs
The higher the weight of all occupants, the

less cargo and luggage load capacity is
available.
For more information, see “Trailer tongue
load” (컄 page 557).
556
Operation
Tires and wheels
Certification label Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The Trailer tongue load
Even after careful determination of the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
The tongue load of any trailer is an impor-
combined weight of all occupants, cargo all cargo, and the trailer tongue load
tant weight to measure because it affects
and the trailer tongue load (if applicable) (컄 page 557) must never exceed the
the load you can carry in your vehicle. If a
(컄 page 557) as to not exceed the permis- GVWR. trailer is towed, the tongue load must be
sible load limit, you must make sure that Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The to- added to the weight of all occupants riding
your vehicle never exceeds the Gross Vehi- tal allowable weight that can be carried by and any cargo you are carrying in the
cle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross a single axle (front or rear). vehicle. The tongue load typically is 10% of
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the the trailer weight and everything loaded in
To assure that your vehicle does not ex-
front or rear axle. You can obtain the it.
ceed the maximum permissible weight
GVWR and GAWR from the certification la-
limits (GVWR and GAWR for front and rear Your Mercedes-Benz has been designed
bel. The certification label can be found on
axle), have the loaded vehicle (including primarily to carry passengers and their
the driver’s door B-pillar, see “Technical
driver, passengers and all cargo and, if ap- cargo. Mercedes-Benz does not recom-
data” (컄 page 712).
plicable, trailer fully loaded) weighed on a mend trailer towing with your vehicle.
suitable commercial scale.
557
Operation
Tires and wheels
Recommended tire inflation pressure In addition to the tire Tire and Loading In-
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
formation placard on the driver’s door
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire
B-pillar, also consult the tire inflation pres-
and Loading Information placard on the driv-
Warning! G er’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires can
sure label (if available) for any additional
information pertaining to special driving
overheat them, possibly causing a blowout.
Follow recommended tire inflation situations. For more information, see “Im-
Overloading the tires can also result in han-
pressures. portant notes on tire inflation pressure”
dling or steering problems, or brake failure.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires (컄 page 559).
wear excessively and/or unevenly,
Your vehicle is equipped with the Tire and
adversely affect handling and fuel economy,
Loading Information placard located on
and are more likely to fail from being over-
the driver’s door B-pillar (컄 page 553).
heated.
The tire inflation pressure should be
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
checked regularly and should only be ad-
can adversely affect handling and ride
justed on cold tires. The tires can be con-
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
sidered cold if the vehicle has been parked
distance, and result in sudden deflation
for at least 3 hours or driven less than
(blowout) because they are more likely to
1 mile (1.6 km).
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc. Follow recommended cold tire inflation
pressures listed on Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard on the driver’s door B-pil-
lar.
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best handling, tread life and
riding comfort.
558
Operation
Tires and wheels
i Data shown on Tire and Loading Information Important notes on tire inflation If your vehicle is not equipped with the tire
placard example are for illustration purposes pressure inflation pressure label on the inside of
only. Load limit data are specific to each vehicle the fuel filler flap, contact an authorized
and may vary from data shown in the illustration Mercedes-Benz Center for proper tire
below. Refer to Tire and Loading Information Warning! G inflation pressure.
placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your
vehicle. If the tire inflation pressure drops i Driving comfort may be reduced when the
repeatedly: tire inflation pressure is adjusted to the value for
speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h) as specified
앫 Check the tires for punctures from
on the Tire and Loading Information placard lo-
foreign objects.
cated on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
앫 Check to see whether air is leaking from
the valves or from around the rim. Be sure to readjust the tire inflation
pressure for normal driving speeds. You
should wait until the tires are cold before
Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure adjusting the tire inflation pressure.
are also increased while driving, depending
on the driving speed and the tire load. Some vehicles may have supplemental tire
inflation pressure information for vehicle
If you will be driving your vehicle at high
1 Tire and Loading Information placard loads less than the maximum loaded vehi-
speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher, cle condition (컄 page 568). If such infor-
with recommended cold tire inflation
where it is legal and conditions allow, mation is provided, it can be found on the
pressures
consult the tire inflation pressure label on tire inflation pressure label located on the
The Tire and Loading Information placard the inside of the fuel filler flap (if available) inside of the fuel filler flap (컄 page 538).
lists the recommended cold tire inflation on how to adjust the cold tire inflation
pressures for maximum loaded vehicle pressure. If you do not adjust the tire infla-
weight. The tire inflation pressures listed tion pressure, excessive heat can build up
apply to the tires installed as original and result in sudden tire failure.
equipment.
559
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire inflation pressure changes by approxi- Checking tire inflation pressure

mately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18°F (10°C) of Warning! G manually
air temperature change. Keep this in mind Follow the steps below to achieve correct
when checking tire inflation pressure Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures. tire inflation pressure:
where the temperature is different from
the outside temperature. Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires 왘 Remove the cap from the valve on one
wear excessively and/or unevenly, tire.
Checking tire inflation pressure adversely affect handling and fuel economy, 왘 Firmly press a tire gauge onto the
and are more likely to fail from being over- valve.
Regularly check the tire inflation pressure heated.
at least once a month. 왘 Read tire inflation pressure on tire
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires gauge and check against the recom-
Check and adjust the tire inflation can adversely affect handling and ride mended tire inflation pressure on the
pressure when the tires are cold. The tires comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping Tire and Loading Information placard
can be considered cold if the vehicle has distance, and result in sudden deflation on the driver’s door B-pillar
been parked for at least 3 hours or driven (blowout) because they are more likely to (컄 page 553) or, if available, the tire in-
less than 1 mile (1.6 km). become punctured or damaged by road flation pressure label on the inside of
If you check the tire inflation pressure debris, potholes etc. the fuel filler flap. If necessary, add air
when the tires are warm (the vehicle has Do not overload the tires by exceeding the to achieve the recommended tire infla-
been driven for several miles or sitting less specified load limit or total load limit as indi- tion pressure.
than 3 hours), the reading will be cated on the Tire and Loading Information
approximately 4 psi (0.3 bar) higher than placard located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
the cold reading. This is normal. Do not let Overloading the tires can overheat them,
air out to match the specified cold tire in- possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the
flation pressure. Otherwise, the tire will be tires can also result in handling or steering
underinflated. problems, or brake failure.
560
Operation
Tires and wheels
i If you have overfilled the tire, release tire in- i USA only: The TPMS only functions on wheels that
flation pressure by pushing the metal stem of the This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC are equipped with the proper electronic
valve with e.g. a tip of a pen. Then recheck the Rules. Operation is subject to the following two sensors. It monitors the tire inflation pres-
tire inflation pressure with the tire gauge. conditions: sure, as selected by the driver, in all four
왘 Install the valve cap. (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer- tires. A warning is issued to alert you to a
ence, and decrease in pressure in one or more of the
왘 Repeat this procedure for each tire. tires.
Checking tire inflation pressure elec- cause undesired operation.
Tire inflation pressure inquiries are made
tronically with the Advanced Tire Pres- using the multifunction display. The
sure Monitoring System (Advanced present inflation pressures are displayed
TPMS)*, (standard on U.S. vehicles) equipment. only after a few minutes of travel time.
i The Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring i Canada only: i Possible differences between the readings
System (Advanced TPMS) is equipped with a This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry of a tire inflation pressure gauge of an air hose,
combination low tire pressure/TPMS malfunc- Canada. Operation is subject to the following e.g. gas station equipment, and the vehicle’s
tion telltale in the instrument cluster two conditions: control system can occur. Usually the readings
(컄 page 608). Depending on how the telltale illu- issued by the control system are more precise.
minates, it indicates a low tire inflation pressure (1) This device may not cause interference, and
condition or a malfunction in the TPMS system it- (2) this device must accept any interference re- i The menu overview can be found on
self: ceived, including interference that may (컄 page 266).
앫 If the telltale illuminates continuously, one cause undesired operation of the device. 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 344).
or more of your tires is significantly under-in- Any unauthorized modification to this device
왘 Press ( or & to select the menu
flated. There is no malfunction in the TPMS. could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment. “Service”.
앫 USA only:
If the telltale flashes for 60 seconds and 왘 Press $ or % to select “Tire
then stays illuminated, the TPMS system it- pressure”.
self is not operating properly.
왘 Press #. 컄컄
561
Operation
Tires and wheels
컄컄 i When the message “Tire pressures dis- i With a spare wheel without wheel sensor
played after driving a few minutes” appears in mounted, the system may still indicate the tire Warning! G
the display, the individual inflation pressure val- inflation pressure of the removed wheel for some
ues are matched with the tires. The individual minutes. If this happens, keep in mind that the Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
values are displayed after a few minutes driving. indicated value where the spare wheel is mount- should be checked monthly when cold and
ed does not reflect the actual spare tire inflation inflated to the inflation pressure recom-
pressure.
Warning! G mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle Tire and Loading Information placard
It is the driver’s responsibility to calibrate Warning! G or the tire inflation pressure label. If your ve-
the TPMS on the recommended cold infla- hicle has tires of a different size than the
tion pressure. Underinflated tires affect the The TPMS does not indicate a warning for size indicated on the vehicle Tire and Load-
ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You wrongly selected inflation pressures. Always ing Information placard or the tire inflation
might lose control over the vehicle. adjust tire inflation pressure according to pressure label, you should determine the
the Tire and Loading Information placard on proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
the driver’s door B-pillar or, if available, the As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
supplemental tire pressure information on been equipped with a tire pressure monitor-
the inside of the fuel filler flap. ing system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
The TPMS is not able to issue a warning due pressure telltale when one or more of your
to a sudden dramatic loss of pressure (e.g. tires is significantly underinflated. Accord-
tire blowout caused by a foreign object). In ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illu-
this case bring the vehicle to a halt by care- minates, you should stop and check your
fully applying the brakes and avoiding tires as soon as possible, and inflate then to
abrupt steering maneuvers. the proper pressure. Driving on a significant-
ly underinflated tire causes the tire to over-
heat and can lead to tire failure.
562
Operation
Tires and wheels
Reactivating Advanced TPMS

Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
and tire tread life, and may effect the vehi- of reasons, including the installation of The TPMS must be reactivated when you
cle’s handling and stopping ability. Please replacement or alternate tires or wheels on have adjusted the tire inflation pressure to
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from a new level (e.g. because of different load
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv- functioning properly. Always check the or driving conditions). The TPMS is then
er’s responsibility to maintain correct tire TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing recalibrated to the current tire inflation
pressure, even if under-inflation has not one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle pressures.
reached the level to trigger illumination of to ensure that the replacement or alternate
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue
to function properly.
Warning! G
USA only:
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a It is the driver’s responsibility to calibrate
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate i If a condition causing the TPMS to malfunc- the TPMS on the recommended cold infla-
when the system is not operating properly. tion develops, it may take up to 10 minutes for tion pressure. Underinflated tires affect the
The TPMS malfunction indicator is com- the system to signal a malfunction using the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
TPMS telltale flashing and illumination se-
bined with the low tire pressure telltale. might lose control over the vehicle.
quence.
When the system detects a malfunction, the
telltale will flash for approximately The telltale extinguishes after a few minutes driv-
ing if the malfunction has been corrected. 왘 Using the tire Tire and Loading Informa-
one minute and then remain continuously il- tion placard on the driver’s door B-pillar
luminated. This sequence will continue upon i Operating radio transmission equipment (컄 page 553) or, if available, the sup-
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the (e.g. wireless headsets, two-way radios) in or plemental tire inflation pressure
malfunction exists. When the malfunction near the vehicle could cause the TPMS to mal-
information on the inside of the fuel fill-
indicator is illuminated, the system may not function.
er flap (컄 page 538), make sure the tire
be able to detect or signal low tire pressure inflation pressure of all four tires is cor-
as intended. rect. 컄컄
563
Operation
Tires and wheels
컄컄 i Reactivate the TPMS after adjusting the tire 왘 Press #. 왘 Press #.

inflation pressure to the inflation pressure rec-
You will see The message
ommended for the vehicle operating condition.
Tire inflation pressure should only be adjusted 앫 the current inflation pressures for “Tire pressure monitor
on cold tires. Observe the recommended tire in- each tire restarted”
flation pressure on the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion placard on the driver’s door B-pillar or appears in the multifunction display.
(컄 page 553). Some vehicles may have supple-
앫 the message After a few minutes driving, the current
mental tire inflation pressure information for
driving at high speeds (컄 page 559) or for vehi- tire inflation pressure values are ac-
“Tire pressures
cle loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle cepted as reference values and then
displayed after driving
condition. If such information is provided, it can monitored.
a few minutes”
be found on the inside of the fuel filler flap
If you wish to cancel activation:
(컄 page 538). appear in the multifunction display.
Press %. 왘 Press L.
i After wheel rotation or sensor replacement, 왘
the vehicle must be parked for 20 minutes be- or
The message
fore attempting to reactivate the TPMS.
“Use current pressure 왘 Press $ to exit menu screen.
i The menu overview can be found on values as new i When the wheel positions are changed on
(컄 page 266).
reference values the vehicle, it is possible that the air pressure is
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 344). To confirm press "OK"” temporarily displayed for the wrong position.
This will be corrected after driving for several
왘 Press ( or & to select the menu appears in the multifunction display. minutes, and the air pressure will be shown for
“Service”. the correct position.
왘 Press $ or % to select “Tire
pressure”.
564
Operation
Tires and wheels
Run Flat Indicator (Canada only)

While the vehicle is being driven, the Run
Flat Indicator monitors the set tire inflation When the multifunction display shows the The Run Flat Indicator does not provide a
pressures by evaluating each wheel’s rota- message “Tire pressure Check tires”, one or warning for wrongly selected tire inflation
tional speed. This allows the system to de- more of your tires is significantly under-in- pressures. Always adjust tire inflation pres-
tect a significant loss of pressure in a tire. flated. You should stop and check your tires sure according to the placard on the driver’s
If a wheel’s rotational speed changes due as soon as possible, and inflate them to the door B-pillar or fuel filler flap.
to falling tire inflation pressure, you will proper tire inflation pressure as indicated on
see a corresponding warning message in The Run Flat Indicator does not replace reg-
the vehicle’s tire information placard. Driv- ular checks of the tire inflation pressures
the multifunction display. ing on a significantly underinflated tire caus- since a gradual pressure loss in more than
The Run Flat Indicator may function in a re- es the tire to overheat and can lead to tire one tire cannot be detected by the Run Flat
stricted manner or with a delay if: failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel effi- Indicator.
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the
앫 snow chains are mounted to the The Run Flat Indicator is not able to issue a
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Each
vehicle warning due to a sudden dramatic loss of
tire, including the spare, should be checked
앫 in presence of ice and snow monthly when cold and set to the tire infla- tire inflation pressure (e.g. tire blowout
tion pressure recommended by the vehicle caused by a foreign object). In this case
앫 you are driving on a loose surface (e.g. bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully apply-
sand or gravel) manufacturer on the vehicle placard or the
tire inflation pressure label. ing the brakes and avoiding abrupt steering
앫 you are driving in a very sporty manner maneuvers.
(involving rapid acceleration or high
speeds in curves)
565
Operation
Tires and wheels
Reactivating the Run Flat Indicator i The menu overview can be found on If you wish to confirm activation:
(컄 page 266).
The tire inflation pressure monitor must be 왘 Press $ or % to select “Yes”.
reactivated in the following situations: 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 344). 왘 Press #.
앫 If you have changed the tire inflation 왘 Press ( or & to select the menu The message
pressure “Service”.
“Run Flat Indicator
앫 If you have replaced the wheels or tires 왘 Press $ or % to select “Tire restarted”
앫 If you have installed new wheels or pressure”.
tires 왘 Press #.
After a certain “learning phase”, the Run
왘 Using the tire placard on the driver’s The message Flat Indicator checks the set pressure val-
door B-pillar (컄 page 553) or, if avail-
“Run Flat Indicator ues for all four tires.
able, the inside of the fuel filler flap
active If you wish to cancel activation:
(컄 page 538), make sure the tire infla-
Restart possible with OK”
tion pressure of all four tires is correct. 왘 Press L.
or
Warning! G 왘 Press #.
When the message
The message
The Run Flat Indicator can only warn you in “Tire pressure
a reliable manner if you have set the correct “Tire pressure now OK?”
tire inflation pressures for each tire. now OK?”
appears in the multifunction display:
If an incorrect tire inflation pressure was appears in the multifunction display.
set, the system will monitor the pressure ac- 왘 Press $ or % to select “Cancel”.
cording to the incorrect value. 왘 Press #.
566
Operation
Tires and wheels
Potential problems associated with Overinflated tires Tire labeling

underinflated and overinflated tires
Overinflated tires can:
Besides tire name (sales designation) and
Underinflated tires 앫 adversely affect handling manufacturer name, a number of markings
characteristics can be found on a tire.
Underinflated tires can:
앫 cause uneven tire wear Following are some explanations for the
앫 cause excessive and uneven tire wear
앫 be more prone to damage from road markings on your vehicle’s tires:
앫 adversely affect fuel economy hazards
앫 lead to tire failure from being
앫 adversely affect ride comfort
overheated
앫 increase stopping distance
앫 adversely affect handling
characteristics
Warning! G
Warning! G Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures. Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
wear excessively and/or unevenly,
distance, and result in sudden deflation
adversely affect handling and fuel economy,
(blowout) because they are more likely to
and are more likely to fail from being
become punctured or damaged by road
overheated.
debris, potholes etc.
567
Operation
Tires and wheels
1 Uniform Quality Grading Standards Tire size designation, load and speed General:
(컄 page 574) rating Depending on the design standards used,
2 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) the tire size molded into the sidewall may
(컄 page 572) have no letter or a letter preceding the tire
3 Maximum tire load (컄 page 573) size designation.
4 Maximum tire inflation pressure
(컄 page 573) No letter preceding the size designation
5 Manufacturer (as illustrated above): Passenger car tire
6 Tire ply material (컄 page 575) based on European design standards.
7 Tire size designation, load and speed Letter “P” preceding the size designation:
rating (컄 page 568) Passenger car tire based on U.S. design
8 Load identification (컄 page 571) standards.
9 Tire name 1 Tire width
Letter “LT” preceding the size designation:
2 Aspect ratio in %
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data 3 Radial tire code
Light Truck tire based on U.S. design
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary standards.
from data shown in above illustration. 4 Rim diameter
For more information, see “Rims and tires”
5 Tire load rating Letter “T” preceding the size designation:
(컄 page 718). 6 Tire speed rating Temporary spare tires which are high
pressure compact spares designed for
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data temporary emergency use only.
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
568
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire width Rim diameter

The tire width 1 (컄 page 568) indicates The rim diameter 4 (컄 page 568) is the
Warning! G
the nominal tire width in mm. diameter of the bead seat, not the The tire load rating must always be at least
diameter of the rim edge. Rim diameter is half of the GAWR (컄 page 576) of your vehi-
Aspect ratio indicated in inches (in). cle. Otherwise, tire failure may be the result
The aspect ratio 2 (컄 page 568) is the which may cause an accident and/or seri-
Tire load rating ous personal injury to you or others.
dimensional relationship between tire
section height and section width and is The tire load rating 5 (컄 page 568) is a Always replace rims and tires with the same
expressed in percentage. The aspect ratio numerical code associated with the designation, manufacturer and type as
is arrived at by dividing section height by maximum load a tire can support. shown on the original part.
section width.
For example, a load rating of 91 corre-
sponds to a maximum load of 1356 lbs
Tire code
(615 kg) the tire is designed to support. Warning! G
The tire code 3 (컄 page 568) indicates See also “Maximum tire load”
the tire construction type. The “R” stands (컄 page 573) where the maximum load as- Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
for radial tire type. Letter “D” means diag- sociated with the load index is indicated in specified load limit or total load limit as indi-
onal or bias ply construction; letter “B” kilograms and lbs. cated on the Tire and Loading Information
means belted-bias ply construction. placard located on the driver’s door B-pillar
(컄 page 553). Overloading the tires can
At the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire
overheat them, possibly causing a blowout.
with a speed capability above 149 mph
(240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size
designation (for example: 245/40 ZR 18).
For additional information, see “Tire speed
rating” (컄 page 570).
569
Operation
Tires and wheels
For additional information on tire load i Tire load rating 5 (컄 page 568) and tire the service description for the tire must
rating, see “Load identification” speed rating 6 (컄 page 568) are also referred be referred to. The service description
(컄 page 571). to as “service description”. is comprised of the tire load rating 5
Summer tires (컄 page 568) and the tire speed
i Tire load rating 5 (컄 page 568) and tire rating 6 (컄 page 568).
speed rating 6 (컄 page 568) are also referred
to as “service description”.
Index Speed rating
If your tire includes “ZR” in the size
Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h) designation and no service
Tire speed rating R up to 106 mph (170 km/h) description 5 and 6 (컄 page 568) is
The tire speed rating 6 (컄 page 568) given, the tire manufacturer must be
S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
indicates the approved maximum speed consulted for the maximum speed ca-
T up to 118 mph (190 km/h) pability.
for the tire.
H up to 130 mph (210 km/h) If a service description 5 and 6
Warning! G V up to 149 mph (240 km/h) (컄 page 568) is given, the speed capa-
W up to 168 mph (270 km/h) bility is limited by the speed symbol in
Even when permitted by law, never operate the service description.
Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) Example: 245/40 ZR18 97Y.
a vehicle at speeds greater than the
maximum speed rating of the tires. (Y) above 186 mph (300 km/h) In this example, “97Y” is the service
ZR above 149 mph (240 km/h) description. The letter “Y” designates
Exceeding the maximum speed for which
the speed rating and the speed capabil-
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire
ity of the tire is limited to 186 mph
failure, causing loss of vehicle control and 앫 At the tire manufacturer’s option, any
(300 km/h).
possibly resulting in an accident and/or tire with a speed capability above
personal injury and possible death, for you 149 mph (240 km/h) can include a
and for others. “ZR” in the size designation (for exam-
ple: 245/40 ZR18). To determine the
maximum speed capability of the tire,
570
Operation
Tires and wheels
앫 Any tire with a speed capability above i Not all M+S rated tires provide special win- Load identification
186 mph (300 km/h) must include a ter performance. Make sure the tires you use
“ZR” in the size designation AND the show M+S and the mountain/snow-
service description must be placed in flake.marking on the tire sidewall. These
parenthesis. tires meet specific snow traction performance
requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers As-
Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99Y). sociation (RMA) and the Rubber Association of
The “(Y)” speed rating in parenthesis Canada (RAC) and have been designed specifi-
designates the maximum speed capa- cally for use in snow conditions.
bility of the tire as being above
186 mph (300 km/h). Consult the tire
manufacturer for the actual maximum
permissible speed of the tire.
1 Load identification
All-season and winter tires
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
Index Speed rating on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
Q M+S1 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
T M+S1 up to 118 mph (190 km/h) In addition to tire load rating, special load
identification 1 may be molded into the
H M+S1 up to 130 mph (210 km/h) tire sidewall following the letter designat-
V M+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h) ing the tire speed rating 6 (컄 page 568).
1
or M+S.for winter tires No specification given: absence of any text
(like in above example) indicates a
standard load (SL) tire.
XL (Extra Load): designates an extra load
(or reinforced) tire.
571
Operation
Tires and wheels
Light Load: designates a light load tire. Manufacturer’s identification mark

C, D, E: designates load range associated The manufacturer’s identification mark 2
with the maximum load a tire can carry at (컄 page 572) denotes the tire
a specified pressure. manufacturer.
New tires have a mark with two symbols.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Retreaded tires have a mark with four sym-
U.S. tire regulations require each new tire bols. For more information on retreaded
manufacturer or tire retreader to mold a tires (컄 page 550).
TIN into or onto a sidewall of each tire
produced. 1 DOT Tire size
2 Manufacturer’s identification mark
The TIN is a unique identifier which facili- The code 3 (컄 page 572) indicates the
3 Tire size
tates efforts by tire manufactures to notify tire size.
4 Tire type code (at the option of the tire
purchasers in recall situations or other manufacturer)
safety matters concerning tires and gives Tire type code
5 Date of manufacture
purchasers the means to easily identify The code 4 (컄 page 572) may, at the
such tires. i For illustration purposes only. Actual data option of the manufacturer, be used as a
The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s from data shown in above illustration. descriptive code for identifying significant
identification mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type characteristics of the tire.
code” and “Date of manufacture”. DOT (Department of Transportation)
Date of manufacture
A tire branding symbol 1 (컄 page 572)
which denotes the tire meets require- The date of manufacture 5 (컄 page 572)
ments of the U.S. Department of Transpor- identifies the week and year of manufac-
tation. ture.
572
Operation
Tires and wheels
The first two figures identify the week, Maximum tire inflation pressure
starting with “01” to represent the first full Warning! G
week of the calendar year. The second two
figures represent the year. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit or total load limit as indi-
For example, “3202” represents the 32nd cated on the Tire and Loading Information
week of 2002. placard located on the driver’s door B-pillar
(컄 page 553). Overloading the tires can
Maximum tire load overheat them, possibly causing a blowout.
1 Maximum permissible tire inflation

For more information on tire load rating
pressure
(컄 page 569).
For information on calculating total and i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
cargo load capacities (컄 page 555). from data shown in above illustration.
This is the maximum permissible tire
inflation pressure for the tire.
1 Maximum tire load rating
Always follow the recommended tire
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data inflation pressure (컄 page 558) for proper
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary tire inflation.
The maximum tire load is the maximum
weight the tires are designed to support.
573
Operation
Tires and wheels
All passenger car tires must conform to

Warning! G federal safety requirements in addition to
these grades.
Never exceed the max. tire inflation
pressure. Follow recommended tire inflation Treadwear
pressures.
The treadwear grade is a comparative rat-
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires ing based on the wear rate of the tire when
wear excessively and/or unevenly, adverse- tested under controlled conditions on a
ly affect handling and fuel economy, and are specified government test course. For ex-
more likely to fail from being overheated. ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires 1 Treadwear and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
can adversely affect handling and ride com- 2 Traction government course as a tire graded 100.
fort, wear unevenly, increase stopping dis- 3 Temperature resistance The relative performance of tires depends
tance, and result in sudden deflation i For illustration purposes only. Actual data upon the actual conditions of their use,
(blowout) because they are more likely to on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary however, and may depart significantly
become punctured or damaged by road de- from data shown in above illustration. from the norm due to variations in driving
bris, potholes etc. habits, service practices and differences in
Quality grades can be found, where appli-
road characteristics and climate.
cable, on the tire sidewall between tread
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards shoulder and maximum section width. For
(U.S. vehicles) Traction
example:
The traction grades, from highest to low-
Tire manufacturers are required to grade Treadwear Traction Temperature est, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades rep-
tires based on three performance resent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
200 AA A
factors: treadwear, traction and pavement as measured under controlled
temperature resistance. conditions on specified government test
574
Operation
Tires and wheels
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Tire ply material
marked C may have poor traction perfor- No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher
mance. levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required by
law.
Warning! G
The traction grade assigned to this tire is Warning! G
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
characteristics. not overloaded. Excessive speed, underin-
flation, or excessive loading, either sepa- 1 Plies in sidewall
Temperature rately or in combination, can cause 2 Plies under tread
excessive heat build-up and possible tire
The temperature grades are A (the high- failure. i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
est), B, and C, representing the tire’s resis- on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
tance to the generation of heat and its from data shown in above illustration.
ability to dissipate heat when tested under This marking tells you about the type of
controlled conditions on a specified indoor cord and number of plies in the sidewall
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem- and under the tread.
perature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and ex-
cessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C corresponds to the
minimum level of performance which all
passenger car tires must meet under the
575
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire and loading terminology Bar DOT (Department of Transportation)

Another metric unit for air pressure. There A tire branding symbol which denotes the
Accessory weight are 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) tire meets requirements of the
to 1 bar; there are 100 kilopascals (kPa) U.S. Department of Transportation.
The combined weight (in excess of those
to 1 bar.
standard items which may be replaced) of
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
automatic transmission, power steering,
Bead
power brakes, power windows, power The GAWR is the maximum permissible
seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped axle weight. The gross vehicle weight on
these items are available as by steel cords that hold the tire onto the each axle must never exceed the GAWR for
factory-installed equipment (whether rim. the front and rear axle indicated on the
installed or not). certification label located on the driver’s
Cold tire inflation pressure door B-pillar.
Air pressure Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle
has been sitting for at least 3 hours or driv- GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. en no more than 1 mile (1.6 km). The GVW comprises the weight of the
Air pressure is expressed in pounds per vehicle including fuel, tools, spare wheel,
square inch (psi), or kilopascal (kPa) or Curb weight installed accessories, passengers and
bars. The weight of a motor vehicle with stan- cargo and, if applicable, trailer tongue
dard equipment including the maximum load. The GVW must never exceed the
Aspect ratio capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so GVWR indicated on the certification label
equipped, air conditioning and additional located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
Dimensional relationship between tire
section height and section width optional equipment, but without passen-
expressed in percentage. gers and cargo.
576
Operation
Tires and wheels
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) Maximum tire inflation pressure PSI (Pounds per square inch)
This is the maximum permissible vehicle This number is the greatest amount of air A standard unit of measure for air pressure
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (weight of pressure that should ever be put in the tire -> bar, kilopascal (kPa).
the vehicle including all options, passen- under normal driving conditions.
gers, fuel, and cargo and, if applicable, Recommended tire inflation pressure
trailer tongue load). It is indicated on certi- Normal occupant weight
The recommended tire inflation pressure
fication label located on the driver’s door
The number of occupants the vehicle is for normal driving conditions is listed on
B-pillar.
designed to seat, multiplied by the Tire and Loading Information placard
68 kilograms (150 lbs). located on the driver’s door B-pillar and
Kilopascal (kPa)
provides best handling, tread life and
The metric unit for air pressure. There are Occupant distribution riding comfort. If so equipped, supplemen-
6.9 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 psi; another The distribution of occupants in a vehicle
tal information pertaining to special driving
metric unit for air pressure is bars. There at their designated seating positions.
situations can be found on the tire inflation
are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 bar. pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler
flap.
Production options weight
Maximum load rating
The combined weight of those installed Rim
The maximum load in kilograms and
regular production options weighing over
pounds that can be carried by the tire. A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
5 lbs (2.3 kilograms) in excess of those
assembly upon which the tire beads are
standard items which they replace, not
Maximum loaded vehicle weight seated.
previously considered in curb weight or
The sum of curb weight, accessory weight, accessory weight, including heavy duty
total load limit, and production options Sidewall
brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
weight. battery, and special trim. The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
577
Operation
Tires and wheels
TIN (Tire Identification Number) Tire speed rating Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
Unique identifier which facilitates efforts Part of tire designation; indicates the A tire information system that provides
by tire manufacturers to notify purchasers speed range for which a tire is approved. consumers with ratings for a tire’s traction,
in recall situations or other safety matters temperature and treadwear. Ratings are
concerning tires and gives purchases the Total load limit determined by tire manufacturers using
means to easily identify such tires. The TIN government testing procedures. The
Rated cargo and luggage load plus
is comprised of “Manufacturer’s identifica- ratings are molded into the sidewall of the
68 kilograms (150 lbs) times the vehicle’s
tion mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code” tire.
designated seating capacity.
and “Date of manufacture”.
Vehicle maximum load on the tire
Traction
Tire load rating
Force exerted by the vehicle on the road Load on an individual tire that is
Numerical code associated with the via the tires. The amount of grip provided. determined by distributing to each axle its
maximum load a tire can support. share of the maximum loaded vehicle
Tread weight and dividing it by two.
Tire ply composition and material used
The portion of a tire that comes into Rotating tires
This indicates the number of plies or the contact with the road.
number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufac-
turers also must indicate the ply materials
Treadwear indicators Warning! G
in the tire and sidewall, which include Narrow bands, sometimes called
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tires
steel, nylon, polyester, and others. “wear bars” that show across the tread of
are of the same dimension.
a tire when only 1/16 in (1.6 mm) of tread
remains. If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size
tires (different tire dimensions front vs.
rear), tire rotation is not possible.
578
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles Rotate tires before the characteristic tire
with tires of the same dimension all wear pattern becomes visible (shoulder
around. If your vehicle is equipped with wear on front tires and tread center wear
tires of the same dimension all around, on rear tires).
tires can be rotated, observing a
Thoroughly clean the mounting face of
front-to-rear rotation pattern that will
wheels and brake disks, i.e. the inner side
maintain the intended rotation (spinning)
of the wheels/tires, during each rotation.
direction of the tire (컄 page 553).
Check for and ensure proper tire inflation
In some cases, such as when your vehicle pressure.
is equipped with mixed-size tires (different
tire dimension front vs. rear), tire rotation
is not possible.
Warning! G
If applicable to your vehicle’s tire configu- Have the tightening torque checked after
ration, tires can be rotated according to changing a wheel. Wheels could become
the tire manufacturer’s recommended in- loose if not tightened with a torque of
tervals in the tire manufacturer’s warranty 110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
pamphlet located in your vehicle literature Only use Genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel
portfolio. If none is available, tires should bolts specified for your vehicle’s rims.
be rotated every 3000 to 6000 miles
(5000 to 10000 km), or sooner if neces-
For information on wheel change, see the
sary, according to the degree of tire wear.
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 686).
The same rotation (spinning) direction
must be maintained (컄 page 553).
579
Operation
Winter driving
Before the onset of winter, have your Winter tires

vehicle winterized at an authorized Warning! G
Mercedes-Benz Center. This service Always use winter tires at temperatures
includes: below 45°F (7°C) and whenever wintry Winter tires with a tread depth of less than
1
road conditions prevail. Not all M+S rated /6 in (4 mm) must be replaced. They are no
앫 Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze longer suitable for winter operation.
tires provide special winter performance.
concentration.
Make sure the tires you use show the
앫 Addition of cleaning concentrate to the mountain/snowflake.marking on the Always observe the speed rating of the
water of the windshield and headlamp tire sidewall. These tires meet specific winter tires installed on your vehicle. If the
cleaning system. Add MB Windshield snow traction performance requirements maximum speed for which your tires are
Washer Concentrate “MB Summerfit” of the Rubber Manufacturers Association rated is below the speed rating of your
to a premixed windshield washer sol- (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Can- vehicle, you must place a notice to this
vent/antifreeze which is formulated for ada (RAC) and have been designed specif- effect where it will be seen by the driver.
below freezing temperatures ically for use in snow conditions. Use of Such notices are available from your tire
(컄 page 731). winter tires is the only way to achieve the dealer or from any authorized
앫 Battery test. Battery capacity drops maximum effectiveness of the ABS, EBP, Mercedes-Benz Center.
with decreasing ambient temperature. ESP® and 4MATIC in winter operation.
A well charged battery helps to make For safe handling, make sure that all
sure that the engine can be started, mounted winter tires are of the same make
even at low ambient temperatures. and have the same tread design.
앫 Tire change.
580
Operation
Winter driving
! Even on vehicles with all-wheel-drive, use ! If snow chains are mounted to the front
Warning! G snow chains on rear tires only. wheels, they may scrape against the body or axle
Some tire sizes do not leave adequate clearance components. The tires or the vehicle could be
If you use your spare tire when winter tires for snow chains. To help avoid serious damage to damaged as a result.
are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that your vehicle or tires, make sure that the use of 앫 Only use snow chains that are
the difference in tire characteristics may snow chains is permissible as specified in the approved by Mercedes-Benz. Any
very well impair turning stability and that “Technical data” section of this Operator’s
Manual, see “Rims and tires” (컄 page 718).
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
overall driving stability may be reduced.
be glad to advise you on this subject.
Adapt your driving style accordingly. Snow chains should only be driven on
snow-covered roads at speeds not to 앫 Use of snow chains may be prohibited
Have the spare tire replaced with a winter
exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains depending on location. Always check
tire at the nearest authorized
as soon as possible when driving on roads local and state laws before installing
without snow. snow chains.
Snow chains 앫 Do not use snow chains on the spare

Please observe the following guidelines
wheel (컄 page 718).
when using snow chains:
! When driving with snow chains, always se- 앫 Use of snow chains is not permissible i All models except S 63 AMG:
lect the raised level of the level control system When driving with snow chains, you may wish to
Airmatic (컄 page 440) or ABC* (컄 page 443). with all wheel/tire combinations
switch off the ESP® (컄 page 73) before setting
Other settings may result in damage to your (컄 page 718). the vehicle in motion. This will improve the
vehicle. 앫 Use snow chains in pairs and on rear vehicle’s traction.
wheels only. Follow the manufacturer’s
i S 63 AMG:
mounting instructions. Do not switch off the ESP® when driving in snow
or with snow chains mounted.
581
Operation
Maintenance
We strongly recommend that you have Maintenance service indicator The maintenance services will be indicated
your vehicle serviced by an authorized message by showing a service type A through type H
Mercedes-Benz Center, in accordance with in the multifunction display. Types A
the Maintenance Booklet at the times The maintenance service indicator mes- through H are classified based on estimat-
called for by the maintenance service indi- sage will notify you when the next mainte- ed time needed to perform the mainte-
cator. nance service is due. nance service, ranging
! Failure to have the vehicle maintained in ac- Starting approximately 1 month before the from “Service A”
cordance with the Maintenance Booklet and next maintenance service is due, one of
(approximately 1 hour)
maintenance service indicator at the designated the following messages will appear in the
times/mileage will result in vehicle damage not multifunction display while you are driving to “Service H”
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited or when you switch on the ignition (exam-
Warranty. (approximately 8 hours)
ple service A):
“Next Service A due in XXX miles (km)
Next Service A due in XX days
Service A due”
Refer to Maintenance Booklet for a listing

of maintenance services and intervals they
need to be performed at.
i The Maintenance System in your vehicle
tracks distance driven and the time elapsed
since the last maintenance service and calcu-
lates other maintenance service work required.
582
Operation
Maintenance
i The maintenance service indicator message Maintenance service term exceeded Calling up the maintenance service
is automatically cleared indicator display
If you have exceeded the suggested main-
앫 after approximately 10 seconds when you tenance service term, you will see the fol-
switch on the ignition or when reaching the lowing message in the multifunction i The menu overview can be found on
service threshold while driving (컄 page 266).
display:
앫 after approximately 30 seconds, once the You can call up the maintenance service in-
suggested maintenance service term has “Service A exceeded by XXX miles (km)
dicator display at any time to check when
passed Service A exceeded by XX days”
the next maintenance service is due.
You can also clear it yourself. In addition, a signal sounds when the mes-
왘 To clear the maintenance service sage appears.
indicator message: Press L The standard display of the control sys-
Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
(컄 page 265). tem appears (컄 page 268).
reset the maintenance service indicator
The maintenance service indicator following a completed maintenance 왘 Press ( or & on multifunction
message is cleared and the standard service. steering wheel to select “Service”
display appears in the multifunction menu.
display (컄 page 268). 왘 Press % or $ to select the main-
tenance service indicator display.
왘 Press #.
The service deadline appears in the
583
Operation
Maintenance
i If the battery is disconnected, the days of Resetting the maintenance service i If the maintenance service indicator was in-
disconnection will not be included in the count indicator advertently reset, have an authorized
shown by the maintenance service indicator. Mercedes-Benz Center correct it.
To arrive at the true maintenance service dead- In the event that the maintenance service Only reset if the proper maintenance service has
line, you will need to subtract these days from on your vehicle is not carried out by an au- been performed. Resetting the system without
the days shown in the maintenance service indi- thorized Mercedes-Benz Center, you can performing the proper service as called for by
cator message or maintenance service indicator the maintenance service indicator will result in
display.
have the maintenance service indicator re-
set. The automotive maintenance facility engine damage and/or other vehicle damage not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
carrying out the maintenance service will
Warranty.
find the information for resetting the main-
tenance service indicator in the mainte-
nance-relevant information for your
vehicle. Such information is available from
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
directly from Mercedes-Benz.
584
Operation
Vehicle care
왔 Vehicle care
Cleaning and care of vehicle Such damage is caused not only by More frequent washings are necessary to
extreme and varying climatic conditions, deal with unfavorable conditions:
Regular and proper care will help to main- but also by:
앫 near the ocean
tain the value of your vehicle. The best way
앫 Air pollution
to protect your vehicle from harmful envi- 앫 in industrial areas (smoke, exhaust
ronmental influences is to wash it and use 앫 Road salt emissions)
protective treatments regularly. 앫 Tar 앫 during winter operation
앫 Gravel and stone chipping You should check your vehicle from time to
Warning! G time for stone chipping or other damage.
To avoid paint damage, you should imme-
Any damage should be repaired as soon as
Many cleaning products can be hazardous. diately remove:
possible to prevent corrosion.
Some are poisonous, others are flammable. 앫 Grease and oil
Always follow the instructions on the partic- In doing so, do not neglect the underbody
ular container. Always open your vehicle’s 앫 Fuel of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a
doors or windows when cleaning the inside. 앫 Coolant thorough check is a washing of the
underbody followed by a thorough
Never use fluids or solvents that are not de- 앫 Brake fluid inspection. Damaged areas need to be
signed for cleaning your vehicle.
앫 Bird droppings re-undercoated.
Always lock away cleaning products and
keep them out of reach of children. 앫 Insects Your vehicle has been treated at the facto-
ry with a wax-base rustproofing in the body
앫 Tree resins, etc.
cavities which will last for the lifetime of
While in operation, even while parked, your Frequent washing reduces and/or elimi- the vehicle. Post-production treatment is
vehicle is subjected to varying external in- nates the aggressiveness and potency of neither necessary nor recommended by
fluences which, if gone unchecked, can the above adverse influences. Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility
attack the paintwork as well as the vehicle
underbody and cause lasting damage.
585
Operation
Vehicle care
of incompatibility between materials used Power washer Paintwork, painted body components
in the production process and others ap-
plied later. ! Follow the instructions provided by the pow- ! Affixing stickers, magnets, adhesive tape or
er washer manufacturer on maintaining a dis- similar materials to painted body components
We have selected car-care products and tance between the vehicle and the nozzle of the may damage the paintwork.
compiled recommendations which are power washer.
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care
specially matched to our vehicles and Never use a round nozzle to power-wash tires. should be applied when water drops on the
which always reflect the latest technology. The intense jet of water can result in damage to
the tire.
paint surface do not “bead up”. This should
You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved normally be done every 3 to 5 months, de-
car-care products at an authorized Always replace a damaged tire.
pending on the climate and washing deter-
Mercedes-Benz Center. Always keep the jet of water moving across the gent used.
surface. Do not aim directly at electrical parts,
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner
electrical connectors, seals, or other rubber
damage due to negligent or incorrect care parts. should be applied if the paint surface
cannot always be removed or repaired with shows signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of
the car-care products recommended here. i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: gloss).
In such cases it is best to seek aid at an au- If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of water, and
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center. a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is in close prox- Do not apply any of these products or wax
imity, i.e. within approximately 3 ft (approxi- if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the
The following topics deal with the cleaning mately 1 m), the vehicle could be inadvertently hood is still hot.
and care of your vehicle and give important locked or unlocked.
“how-to” information as well as references 왘 Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up
to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care Tar stains Stick for quick and provisional repairs
products. of minor paint damage (i.e. chips from
Quickly remove tar stains before they dry
stones, vehicle doors, etc.).
and become more difficult to remove. A tar
remover is recommended.
586
Operation
Vehicle care
Engine cleaning Hand-wash Automatic car wash

Prior to cleaning the engine compartment, Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle You can have your car washed in an auto-
make sure to protect electrical compo- in direct sunlight. matic car wash from the start. Automatic
nents and connectors from contact with car washes without brushes are prefera-
왘 Only use a mild car wash detergent,
water and cleaning agents. ble.
such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car
Corrosion protection, such as Shampoo. 왘 To protect the filter system, switch the
MB Anticorrosion Wax, should be applied automatic climate control to air recir-
왘 Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a dif-
to the engine compartment after every culation mode (컄 page 474).
fused jet of water.
engine cleaning. Before applying, all
control linkage bushings and joints should Direct only a very weak spray towards ! Do not clean your vehicle in an automatic
touchless car wash which uses caustic spray.
be lubricated. The poly-V-belt and all pul- the ventilation intake.
Otherwise the caustic spray will damage the
leys should be protected from any wax. 왘 Use plenty of water and rinse the paint or ornamental moldings.
sponge and chamois frequently. If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it be-
Vehicle washing
왘 Rinse with clean water and thoroughly fore running it through the automatic car
In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces dry with a chamois. wash.
of road salt as soon as possible.
Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on ! Make sure that the windshield wiper switch
When washing the vehicle underbody, do the finish. is set to 0 (컄 page 381). Otherwise, e.g. the rain
not forget to clean the inner sides of the sensor could activate and cause the wipers to
wheels. ! Do not use scouring agents on these parts. move unintentionally. This may lead to vehicle
Never apply strong force and only use a soft, damage.
i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: non-scratching cloth when cleaning the vehicle. Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in exterior
If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of water, and Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry rear view mirrors prior to running the vehicle
a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is in close prox- cloth or sponge. through an automatic car wash to prevent dam-
imity, i.e. within approximately 3 ft (approxi-
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the paint. age to the mirrors.
mately 1 m), the vehicle could be inadvertently
locked or unlocked.
587
Operation
Vehicle care
When taking the vehicle through an auto- Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: i After running the vehicle through an auto-
matic conveyor type car wash, observe the matic car wash, wipe any wax off of the wind-
왘 With the vehicle at a standstill, depress
following instructions. shield (컄 page 592). This will prevent smears
the brake pedal and keep it pressed. and reduce wiping noise which can be caused by
왘 Shift the automatic transmission to residual wax on the windshield.
Warning! G park position P. When leaving the car wash, make sure that the
mirrors are folded out. Otherwise they may
When leaving the SmartKey or SmartKey 왘 Release the brake pedal. vibrate.
with KEYLESS-GO* in the starter switch, do 왘 Remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
not leave children unattended in the vehicle. button from the starter switch Ornamental moldings
It is possible for children to switch on the (컄 page 345).
ignition which could result in unsupervised For regular cleaning and care of ornamen-
use of vehicle equipment. Unsupervised use 왘 Insert the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO tal moldings, use a damp cloth.
of vehicle equipment could result in an into the starter switch.
! Do not use chrome cleaner on ornamental
accident and/or serious personal injury. 왘 With the ignition switched on shift the moldings. Although ornamental moldings may
automatic transmission to neutral have chrome appearance, they could be made of
position N. anodized aluminum that will be damaged when
Vehicles with SmartKey:
cleaned with chrome cleaner. Instead, use a
왘 With the vehicle at a standstill and the 왘 If engaged, manually release the damp cloth to clean those ornamental moldings.
ignition switched on shift the electronic parking brake (컄 page 395). For very dirty ornamental moldings of which you
automatic transmission to neutral 왘 Switch off the ignition and leave the are sure are chrome-plated, use a chrome clean-
position N. er. If in doubt whether an ornamental molding is
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO in the
chrome-plated, contact an authorized
왘 If engaged, manually release the starter switch. Mercedes-Benz Center.
electronic parking brake (컄 page 395).
왘 Switch off the ignition and leave the
SmartKey in the starter switch.
588
Operation
Vehicle care
Headlamps, tail lamps, side markers, Cleaning the DISTRONIC Plus*/ 왘 Clean a wide area of the bumpers sur-
turn signal lenses PRE-SAFE® Brake* system sensors rounding the sensor 2.
(USA only)
왘 Use a mild car wash detergent, such as ! To prevent scratches or damage, never
Mercedes-Benz approved Car The sensors are integrated in the front apply strong force and only use a soft,
Shampoo, with plenty of water. bumpers and cannot be seen from the out- non-scratching cloth when cleaning the sensor
side. cover and/or bumper area near sensors. Do not
! Only use window cleaning solutions that are attempt to wipe dirty sensors and/or bumper
suitable for plastic lamp lenses. Window clean- with a dry cloth or sponge.
ing solutions which are not suitable may damage
the plastic lamp lenses of the headlamps. There- Cleaning the Parktronic* system
fore, do not use abrasives, solvents or cleaners
that contain solvents.
sensors
Never apply strong force and only use a soft,
non-scratching cloth when cleaning the lenses.
Do not attempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry
cloth or sponge.
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the lens
surface. 1 Sensor cover
2 Bumper area near sensors
왘 Switch off the ignition (컄 page 344).
왘 Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car 1 Parktronic system* sensors in front
Shampoo, with plenty of water and a bumper 컄컄
non-scratching cloth to clean sensor
cover 1.
589
Operation
Vehicle care
컄컄 왘 Use a mild car wash detergent, such as Cleaning the Park Assist* system 왘 Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Sham- sensors (USA only) Mercedes-Benz approved Car Sham-
poo, with plenty of water and a soft, The sensors are integrated in the front and poo, with plenty of water and a soft,
non-scratching cloth to clean rear bumpers and cannot be seen from the non-scratching cloth to clean the
sensors 1 on the bumpers. outside. bumper area near sensors.
! Do not apply strong pressure to the sensor ! To prevent scratches or damage to the sur-
covers. Applying strong pressure may damage face, never apply strong force and only use a
the sensor covers. soft, non-scratching cloth when cleaning the
Follow the instructions provided by the power bumper area near sensors. Do not attempt to
washer manufacturer on maintaining a distance wipe a dirty bumper with a dry cloth or sponge.
between the vehicle and the nozzle of the power
washer. Cleaning the Dynamic Rear View
Monitor lens*
! To prevent scratches, never apply strong
force and only use a soft, non-scratching cloth
when cleaning the sensors. Do not attempt to
wipe dirty sensors with a dry cloth or sponge.
1 Bumper area near sensors

왘 Switch off the ignition (컄 page 344).
1 Camera lens
590
Operation
Vehicle care
왘 Only use clean water and a soft, Cleaning the windshield in front of the
non-scratching cloth to clean the cam- Night View Assist camera*
era lens 1.
Be careful not to apply wax to the camera Warning! G
lens 1 when waxing the vehicle. If neces-
sary, remove the wax using the Please do not forget that your primary re-
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo sponsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s
with plenty of water. attention to the road must always be
his/her primary focus when driving. For
! Do not clean the camera and the area your safety and the safety of others, stop be-
around the camera: 1 Recessed handles of camera cover
fore trying to remove window fogging or
앫 with a high-pressure cleaner cleaning the window in front of the Night 왘 Use recessed handles 1 to swing
앫 with a dry cloth and high pressure View Assist camera. camera cover downward.
앫 with aggressive cleaning agents Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
You could otherwise damage the camera. (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
! Do not clean the lens of the Night View

Assist camera. If the camera lens is dirty, please
contact a qualified specialist workshop such as a
2 Camera 컄컄
591
Operation
Vehicle care
컄컄 왘 Clean inside of windshield in front of 왘 Turn combination switch to wiper Cleaning

camera 2 with a soft, non-scratching setting u (컄 page 381).
cloth.
왘 With wiper arm in vertical position, turn Warning! G
! If you use a windshield cleaning product, the SmartKey in starter switch to
make sure that none of the cleaning product position 0. For safety reasons, switch off wipers and re-
comes into contact with the lens of the Night move SmartKey from starter switch (vehi-
View Assist camera. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
cles with KEYLESS-GO*: Make sure the
왘 Use recessed handles 1 to swing 왘 Make sure the vehicle’s on-board elec- vehicle’s on-board electronics have
camera cover up. tronics have status 1 (컄 page 346). status 0) before cleaning the windshield
왘 Turn combination switch to wiper and/or the wiper blades. Otherwise, the
Cleaning the windows and the wiper setting u (컄 page 381). wiper motor could suddenly turn on and
blades cause injury.
왘 Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
! The windshield wipers must be in a vertical repeatedly until windshield wipers
왘 Fold the wiper arms forward until they
position before folding them away from the wind- start.
shield. They could otherwise damage the hood. snap into place.
Never open the hood when the wiper arms are when the wiper arms are in a vertical ! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts. They
folded forward. could tear.
position.
왘 Make sure the hood is fully closed. 왘 Clean the wiper blade inserts with a
clean cloth and detergent solution.
Placing wiper arms in vertical position
왘 Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild win-
Vehicles with SmartKey: dow cleaning solution on all outside
왘 Turn SmartKey in starter switch and inside glass surfaces.
position 1. An automotive glass cleaner is recom-
mended.
592
Operation
Vehicle care
! Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto ! Do not use a dry cloth, abrasives, solvents Therefore, the vehicle’s brake system should al-
the windshield before turning the SmartKey in or cleaners containing solvents. Do not touch ways be warmed-up before it is parked after
the starter switch or pressing the KEYLESS-GO* the protective layer with hard objects such as an cleaning. To do so, please drive your vehicle for
start/stop button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*). ice scraper or ring. Never apply strong force and several minutes to allow the brakes to dry. When
only use a soft, non-scratching cloth when clean- applying Mercedes-Benz approved Tire Care and
Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care products,
back. If released, the force of the impact from ing the rear part of the tilt/sliding panel.
take care not to spray them on the brake disks.
the tensioning spring could crack the windshield. Otherwise you may scratch or damage the pro-
tective layer.
! To clean the window interior, do not use a Plastic and rubber parts
dry cloth, abrasives, solvents or cleaners con- 왘 Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
Light alloy wheels
taining solvents. Do not touch the inside of the
mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a
front, rear or door windows with hard objects If possible, clean wheels once a week.
such as an ice scraper or ring. Doing so may washing solution.
damage the windows. 왘 Use Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel
왘 Wipe with a cloth moistened in a luke-
Care, a soft bristle brush and a strong
warm solution.
Cleaning the panorama roof with spray of water for cleaning the light al-
tilt/sliding panel* loy wheels. The surface may temporarily change
color. If this is the case, wait for it to
The rear part of the tilt/sliding panel has a ! Only use acid-free cleaning materials. Acid dry.
protective layer on the inside. may cause corrosion or damage the clear coat.
왘 Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild ! The vehicle should not be parked for an Warning! G
window cleaning solution. extended period of time immediately after it has
been cleaned, especially not after the wheel rims
An automotive glass cleaner is recom- Do not use cleaners or cockpit care sprays
have been cleaned with wheel rim cleaner.
mended. Wheel rim cleaners can lead to increased containing solvents to clean the cockpit or
corrosion of the brake disks and brake pads. the steering wheel. Cleaners containing sol-
Non-approved wheel cleaners may also damage vents will make the surface porous and vehi-
the wheel paint if the car is not driven after cle occupants could suffer serious injuries 컄컄
cleaning.
593
Operation
Vehicle care
컄컄 Steering wheel Headliner and shelf below rear window

from plastic parts coming loose in the event
of air bag deployment. 왘 Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thor- 왘 Use a soft bristle brush or a dry-sham-
oughly or clean with Mercedes-Benz poo cleaner in case of excessive dirt.
! Do not use oil, wax or scouring agents on approved Leather Care.
these parts. Seat belts
Carpets
Never apply strong force and only use a soft, 왘 Only use clear, lukewarm water and
non-scratching cloth when cleaning the surface. 왘 Use Mercedes-Benz approved Carpet soap.
Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry and Fabric Care for cleaning the car-
cloth or sponge.
pets. ! The webbing must not be treated with
chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the web-
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the sur-
bing at temperatures above 176°F (80°C) or in
face.
direct sunlight.
Hard plastic trim items

왘 Use Mercedes-Benz approved Interior
Warning! G
Care, a soft, lint-free cloth and apply
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
with light pressure.
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
! Never apply strong force and only use a soft, not be able to provide adequate protection.
non-scratching cloth when cleaning the surface.
Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry
cloth or sponge.
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the sur-
face.
594
Operation
Vehicle care
Upholstery
Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing ter for availability.
clothing that have the tendency to give off
coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause Leather upholstery
the upholstery to become permanently dis-
colored. By lining the seats with a proper 왘 Wipe leather upholstery with a damp
intermediate cover, contact-discoloration cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with
will be prevented. Mercedes-Benz approved Leather
Care.
Exercise particular care when cleaning per-
Warning! G forated leather as its underside should not
Only use seat or head restraint covers which become wet.
have been tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model. Wood trims
Using other seat or head restraint covers 왘 Dampen cloth using water and use
may interfere with or prevent the activation damp cloth to clean wood trims in your
of the active head restraints. vehicle.
! Do not use solvents like tar remover or
wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as these
may be abrasive.
595
596
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Where will I find ...?
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Opening/closing in an emergency
Resetting activated head restraints
Replacing SmartKey batteries
Replacing bulbs
Replacing wiper blades
Flat tire
Batteries
Jump starting
Towing the vehicle
Fuses
597
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Lamps in instrument cluster
General information:
If any of the following lamps in the instru-
ment cluster fails to come on during the
bulb self-check when switching on the igni-
tion, have the respective bulb checked and
replaced if necessary.

- The yellow Antilock The ABS has detected a malfunction and 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
Brake System (ABS) has switched off. The BAS, ESP®, EBP and Wheels may lock during hard braking,
indicator lamp comes on PRE-SAFE® are also switched off (see mes- reducing steering capability.
while the engine is run- sages in multifunction display). 왘 Read and observe messages in the mul-
ning.
The brake system is still functioning nor- tifunction display (컄 page 612).
mally but without the ABS available. 왘 Have the system checked at an autho-
If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning, rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
other systems such as Parktronic*, possible.
DISTRONIC Plus*, navigation system, Park
Failure to follow these instructions increas-
Assist* and the automatic transmission
es the risk of an accident.
may also be malfunctioning.
598
Practical hints
What to do if …?

- The yellow Antilock The charging voltage has fallen below When the voltage is above this value again,
Brake System (ABS) 10 volts. The ABS has switched off. the ABS is operational again and the ABS in-
indicator lamp comes on dicator lamp should go out.
The battery may not be charged sufficiently.
while the engine is run-
If the ABS indicator lamp does not go out:
ning.
왘 Have the generator (alternator) and the
battery checked.
When the voltage is above this value again,
the ABS is operational again.
; The red brake warning A malfunction in the Electronic Brake Pro- 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
(USA only) lamp comes on while the portioning (EBP) was detected. The ABS, Wheels may lock during hard braking,
3 engine is running. In addi- BAS, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are also reducing steering capability.
(Canada only) tion, the yellow ABS mal- switched off (see messages in multifunction 왘 Read and observe messages in the mul-
function indicator lamp, display). tifunction display (컄 page 612).
- and the yellow ESP®
The brake system continues to function
warning lamp come on 왘 Have the system checked at an autho-
v normally, but without electronic support.
and an acoustic warning rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
sounds. possible.
599
Practical hints
What to do if …?

- The yellow ABS malfunc- ABS and ESP® are switched off due to a 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
tion indicator lamp and malfunction. Wheels may lock during hard braking,
v
the yellow ESP® warning reducing steering capability.
The BAS, EBP and PRE-SAFE® are also
lamp come on while the
switched off. 왘 Read and observe messages in the mul-
engine is running and an
tifunction display (컄 page 612).
acoustic warning sounds. The brake system is still functioning nor-
mally but without the ABS available. 왘 Have the system checked at an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
0 The red indicator lamp The electronic parking brake is malfunction- 왘 Read and observe messages in the mul-
(USA only) for the electronic parking ing or defective. tifunction display (컄 page 612).
! brake flashes and/or the 왘 Have the system checked at an autho-
(Canada only) yellow warning lamp for rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
the electronic parking possible.
brake is on.
600
Practical hints
What to do if …?

; The red brake warning There is insufficient brake fluid in the reser- Risk of accident!
(USA only) lamp comes on while the voir.
왘 Carefully stop the vehicle in a safe loca-
engine is running and an
3 tion or as soon as it is safe to do so.
acoustic warning sounds.
(Canada only)
왘 Engage the electronic parking brake
(컄 page 395).
왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
왘 Do not add brake fluid! This will not
solve the problem.
! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake

Warning! G fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or
below, have the brake system checked for brake
Driving with the brake warning lamp illumi- pad thickness and leaks.
nated can result in an accident. Have your
brake system checked immediately if the
brake warning lamp stays on. Do not add
brake fluid before checking the brake
system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir
can result in spilling brake fluid on hot en-
gine parts and the brake fluid catching fire.
You can be seriously burned.
601
Practical hints
What to do if …?

± The yellow engine malfunc- There is a malfunction in: 왘 Have the vehicle checked as soon as
tion indicator lamp comes possible by an authorized
앫 The fuel management system
on while driving. Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫 The ignition system An on-board diagnostic connector is
앫 The emission control system used by the service station to link the
vehicle to the shop diagnostics system.
앫 Systems which affect emissions It allows the accurate identification of
Such malfunctions may result in excessive system malfunctions through the read-
emissions values and may switch the en- out of diagnostic trouble codes. It is lo-
gine to its limp-home (emergency opera- cated in the front left area of the
tion) mode. footwell.
i Some states may by law require you to visit

a workshop as soon as the engine malfunction
indicator lamp comes on. Check local require-
ments.
602
Practical hints
What to do if …?

± The yellow engine malfunc- A loss of pressure has been detected in the 왘 Check the fuel cap.
tion indicator lamp comes fuel system. The fuel cap may not be closed
If it is not closed properly:
on while driving. properly or the fuel system may be leaky.
왘 Close the fuel cap.
If it is closed properly:
왘 Have the fuel system checked by an au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Your fuel tank is empty. 왘 After refueling, start, turn off, and re-
start the engine three or four times in
succession.
The limp-home mode is canceled. You do
not need to have your vehicle checked.
603
Practical hints
What to do if …?

l PRE-SAFE® Brake*: The red dis- You are too close to the vehicle in front of 왘 Apply the brakes immediately to in-
tance warning lamp comes on you to maintain selected speed. crease the following distance.
while driving.
l DISTRONIC Plus* or PRE-SAFE® You are gaining too rapidly on the vehicle 왘 Apply the brakes immediately.
Brake*: The red distance warn- ahead of you.
ing lamp comes on while driving DISTRONIC Plus* or PRE-SAFE® Brake* has 왘 Apply the brakes immediately.
and an acoustic warning recognized a stationary obstacle on your
sounds. 왘 Carefully observe the traffic situation.
probable line of travel.
You may need to brake or maneuver to
avoid hitting an obstacle.
v The yellow ESP® warning lamp The ESP® or electronic traction system has 왘 When driving off, apply as little throttle
flashes while driving. come into operation because of detected as possible.
traction loss in at least one tire.
왘 While driving, ease up on the accelera-
Cruise control and DISTRONIC Plus* are de- tor.
activated.
왘 Adapt your speed and driving to the pre-
vailing road and weather conditions.
왘 Do not deactivate the ESP®. Exceptions:
(컄 page 73).
604
Practical hints
What to do if …?

v The yellow ESP® warning lamp The ESP® is deactivated. 왘 Switch the ESP® back on (컄 page 75).
comes on while the engine is Exceptions: (컄 page 73).
Risk of accident!
running. ®
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail- If the ESP cannot be switched back on:
ing road, weather, and traffic conditions. 왘 Have the system checked at an autho-
possible.
ESP® is switched off due to a malfunction. 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
Risk of accident! 왘 Read and observe messages in the mul-
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail- tifunction display (컄 page 612).
ing road, weather, and traffic conditions. 왘 Have the system checked at an autho-
possible.
The yellow fuel tank reserve warning lamp The fuel level has gone below the reserve 왘 Refuel at the next gas station
in the fuel gauge comes on while driving. mark. (컄 page 538).
< The red seat belt telltale comes The seat belt telltale reminds you and your 왘 Fasten your seat belts.
on for a maximum of 6 seconds passengers to fasten your seat belts before Regardless of whether the seat belts are
after starting the engine. driving off. fastened or not, the seat belt telltale al-
ways comes on and remains lit for
6 seconds after starting the engine.
605
Practical hints
What to do if …?

< You hear a warning chime for a You have forgotten to fasten your seat belt. 왘 Fasten your seat belt.
maximum of 6 seconds after
The warning chime stops sounding.
starting the engine.
< The red seat belt telltale comes You and/or your front passenger have for- 왘 Fasten your seat belts.
on while the vehicle is standing gotten to fasten your seat belts. The seat belt telltale goes out.
still and the engine is running or
during driving. There are items placed on the front passen- 왘 Remove the items from the front pas-
ger seat and therefore the system senses senger seat and put them in a safe
the front passenger seat as being occupied. place.
The seat belt telltale goes out.
< During driving the red seat belt The vehicle’s speed once exceeded 15 mph 왘 Fasten your seat belts.
telltale flashes and you addition- (25 km/h) and you and/or your front pas- The seat belt telltale goes out and the
ally hear an intermittent warning senger have forgotten to fasten your seat warning chime stops sounding.
chime with increasing intensity. belts.
There are items placed on the front passen- 왘 Remove the items from the front pas-
ger seat and therefore the system senses senger seat and put them in a safe
the front passenger seat as being occupied. place.
The seat belt telltale goes out and the
warning chime stops sounding.
i After 60 seconds with an unfastened seat The seat belt telltale will only go out if both, the fastened, or the vehicle is standing still and a
belt the warning chime stops sounding and the driver and front passenger’s seat belt are front door is opened.
seat belt telltale illuminates continuously.
606
Practical hints
What to do if …?

= The red SRS indicator lamp There is a malfunction in the supplemental 왘 Drive with added caution to the nearest
comes on while the engine is restraint systems. The air bags or emergen- authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
running. cy tensioning devices (ETDs) could deploy
unexpectedly or fail to activate in an acci-
dent.
Warning! G
In the event that a malfunction of the SRS is
indicated as outlined above, the SRS may
not be operational. For your safety, we
strongly recommend that you contact an au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediate-
ly to have the system checked; otherwise
the SRS may not be deployed when needed
in an accident, which could result in serious
or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpect-
edly and unnecessarily which could result in
an accident and/or injury to you or to oth-
ers.
607
Practical hints
What to do if …?

H USA only: The Advanced TPMS* detects a loss of 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
Combination low tire pres- pressure in at least one tire. avoiding abrupt steering and braking
sure/TPMS malfunction telltale maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation
for the Advanced TPMS* illumi- around you.
nates continuously.
왘 Read and observe messages in the mul-
Canada only: tifunction display (컄 page 612).
Low tire pressure telltale for the
If the tire inflation pressure in the respec-
Advanced TPMS* illuminates
tive tire(s) has (have) been corrected, the
continuously.
combination low tire pressure/TPMS mal-
function telltale goes out after few minutes
driving.
H USA only: There is a malfunction in the Advanced 왘 Read and observe messages in the mul-
Combination low tire pres- TPMS*. tifunction display (컄 page 612).
sure/TPMS malfunction telltale
왘 Have the Advanced TPMS* checked by
for the Advanced TPMS* flashes
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
for 60 seconds and then stays il-
luminated. After the malfunction has been remedied
the combination low tire pressure/TPMS
malfunction telltale goes out after few
minutes driving.
608
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
Warning! G and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi- of reasons, including the installation of
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), cle’s handling and stopping ability. Please replacement or alternate tires or wheels on
should be checked monthly when cold and note that the TPMS is not a substitute for the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
inflated to the inflation pressure recom- proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv- functioning properly. Always check the
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the er’s responsibility to maintain correct tire TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing
vehicle placard or the tire inflation pressure pressure, even if under-inflation has not one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle
label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different reached the level to trigger illumination of to ensure that the replacement or alternate
size than the size indicated on the vehicle the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue
placard or the tire inflation pressure label, USA only: to function properly.
you should determine the proper tire infla- Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
tion pressure for those tires). TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has when the system is not operating properly.
been equipped with a tire pressure monitor- The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-
ing system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire bined with the low tire pressure telltale.
pressure telltale when one or more of your When the system detects a malfunction, the
tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord- telltale will flash for approximately
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illu- one minute and then remain continuously
minates, you should stop and check your illuminated. This sequence will continue
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long
the proper pressure. Driving on a significant- as the malfunction exists. When the mal-
ly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over- function indicator is illuminated, the system
heat and can lead to tire failure. may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended.
609
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Air bag off indicator lamp

75 The system is malfunctioning. 왘 Have the system checked as soon as possible by an authorized
The front passenger front
air bag off indicator lamp 왘 Also read and observe any messages in the multifunction display
illuminates and remains il- and follow corrective steps (컄 page 612).
luminated with the weight
of a typical adult or some-
one larger than a small in-
dividual on the front
passenger seat.
Warning! G
If the 59 indicator lamp
illuminates and remains illuminated with the
weight of a typical adult or someone larger
than a small individual on the front passen-
ger seat, do not have any passenger use the
front passenger seat until the system has
been repaired.
610
Practical hints
What to do if …?

75 The system is malfunctioning. 왘 Make sure there is nothing between seat cushion and child seat and
check installation of the child seat.
The front passenger front
air bag off indicator lamp 왘 Make sure no objects applying supplemental weight onto the seat
does not illuminate and/or are present.
does not remain illuminat-
왘 Make sure no objects which apply forces to the seat are present
ed with the weight of a typ-
(e.g. objects such as books, briefcases etc. lodged behind or around
ical 12-month-old child in a
the seat, head restraints pushing against roof etc.). The system may
standard child restraint or
recognize such forces as supplemental weight.
less on the front passen-
ger seat. 왘 If the front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp remains out,
have the system checked as soon as possible by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not transport a child on the front pas-
senger seat until the system has been repaired.
왘 Also read and observe any messages in the multifunction display
and follow corrective steps (컄 page 612).
passenger seat, do not transport a child on

Warning! G the front passenger seat until the system
If the 59 indicator lamp does has been repaired.
not illuminate or remains out with the
weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a
standard child restraint or less on the front
611
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Vehicle status messages in the multi- Certain messages of high priority cannot
function display be cleared from the multifunction display Warning! G
using # or L on the multifunction
Warning and malfunction messages ap- steering wheel (컄 page 265). No messages will be displayed if either the
pear in the multifunction display located in instrument cluster or the multifunction dis-
Other messages of high priority and mes- play is inoperative.
the instrument cluster.
sages of less immediate priority can be
Certain warning and malfunction messag- cleared from the multifunction display As a result, you will not be able to see infor-
es are accompanied by an audible signal. using # or L. They are then stored mation about your driving conditions, such
in the vehicle status message memory as speed or outside temperature, warn-
High-priority messages are shown in red ing/indicator lamps, malfunction/warning
on the multifunction display. Messages of (컄 page 280). Remember that clearing a
message will only make the message dis- messages or the failure of any systems.
lower priority are also shown in yellow or Driving characteristics may be impaired.
white. appear. Clearing a message will not cor-
rect the condition that caused the If you must continue to drive, please do so
Address these messages accordingly and message to appear. with added caution. Contact an authorized
follow the additional instructions given in Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
this Operator’s Manual.
612
Practical hints
What to do if …?
On the pages that follow, you will find a

Warning! G compilation of the most important warning
and malfunction messages that may ap-
All categories of messages contain impor- pear in the malfunction display.
tant information which should be taken note
of and, where a malfunction is indicated, ad- For your convenience the messages are di-
dressed as soon as possible at an autho- vided into two sections:
rized Mercedes-Benz Center. 앫 Text messages (컄 page 614)
Failure to repair condition noted may cause 앫 Symbol messages (컄 page 626)
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty, or result in property dam-
age or personal injury.
i Switching on the ignition causes all instru-

ment cluster lamps (except high beam headlamp
indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps
unless activated) as well as the multifunction dis-
play to come on. Make sure the lamps and multi-
function display are in working order before
starting your journey.
613
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Text messages
Display Possible cause/consequence Possible solution

Apply brake You have tried to shift the auto- 왘 Step on brake.
to shift matic transmission to D, R or N
from 'P' without stepping on the brake.
Child seat The child seat is not positioned 왘 Fasten the seat in the correct position.
in wrong position correctly.
See Oper. Manual The sensor for the child seat is 왘 Have the sensor for child seat detection checked at an authorized
(Canada only) malfunctioning. Mercedes-Benz Center.
Cruise control You have tried to switch on 왘 Drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and save the speed.
- - - mph cruise control below a speed of
(USA only) 20 mph (30 km/h).
Cruise control ESP® is switched off. 왘 Switch on ESP® (컄 page 75).
- - - km/h The automatic transmission is in 왘 Shift the automatic transmission to D (컄 page 399).
(Canada only) position P, R or N.
The system is overheated. 왘 Wait until the system cools down.
The vehicle is secured in place 왘 Release electronic parking brake (컄 page 395).
by the electronic parking brake.
Cruise control Cruise control is malfunction- 왘 Have cruise control checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
inoperative ing.
614
Practical hints
What to do if …?

DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC Plus* is switched off and is 왘 Clean the DISTRONIC Plus* cover in the radiator grille
currently unavailable temporarily unavailable. (컄 page 589).
See Oper. Manual DISTRONIC Plus* is deactivated if: 왘 Restart the vehicle.
앫 the DISTRONIC Plus* cover in the radia- 왘 Try activating DISTRONIC Plus* again later.
tor grille is dirty
왘 Wait until the system cools down or the battery recovers.
앫 the radar sensors* do not sense any DISTRONIC Plus* will be operational again without you needing to
other vehicles or objects, i.e. road sign restart the engine if:
or similar to this, for a long time
앫 the dirt (e.g. slush) loosens while you are driving
앫 the system is overheated
앫 the system detects that the radar sensors* are fully available
앫 its function is impaired as a result of
again
heavy precipitation or fog
앫 the message in the multifunction display disappears
앫 the battery voltage is insufficient
DISTRONIC Plus* is switched off because 왘 Wait until the message in the multifunction display disappears.
the radar sensor system* is temporarily in-
operative due to electromagnetic interfer-
ence near television and radio transmitter
stations, toll stations, speed measuring sys-
tems, etc.
DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC Plus* is malfunctioning. 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as pos-
inoperative BAS Plus* and PRE-SAFE® Brake* are also sible.
not available.
615
Practical hints
What to do if …?

DISTRONIC PLUS You have depressed the accelerator pedal, 왘 Release the accelerator pedal.
override DISTRONIC Plus* is no longer controlling
the speed of the vehicle.
DISTRONIC PLUS You have attempted to activate DISTRONIC 왘 Drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and activate DISTRONIC
- - - mph Plus* at a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h) Plus* again.
(USA only) without the vehicle in front being displayed
in the multifunction display (컄 page 427).
Canada only:
DISTRONIC PLUS
- - - km/h
(Canada only)
ESP® is switched off. 왘 Switch on ESP® (컄 page 75).
The automatic transmission is in position P, 왘 Shift the automatic transmission to D (컄 page 399).
R or N.
The system is overheated. 왘 Wait until the system cools down.
The vehicle is secured in place by the elec- 왘 Release electronic parking brake (컄 page 395).
tronic parking brake.
The driver’s door is open and the drivers 왘 Close the driver’s door and fasten your seat belt.
seat belt is unbuckled.
The hood is open. 왘 Close the hood (컄 page 542).
616
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Door Open You have opened the driver’s 왘 Before you leave the vehicle, make sure that the automatic transmission
Vehicle not in Park door and the automatic trans- is shift to park position P (컄 page 399) and that the electronic parking
mission is still in position D, R brake is engaged (컄 page 395).
or N.
617
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Front pass. airbag Front passenger front air bag is Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible and check the front
disabled deactivated while driving even passenger seat for the following:
See Oper. Manual though an adult or someone
왘 Engage the electronic parking brake (컄 page 395).
larger than a small individual is
occupying the front passenger 왘 Switch off the ignition (컄 page 344).
seat. Forces acting on the seat 왘 Have the front passenger vacate the seat and exit the vehicle.
may make the system sense a
decrease in weight. 왘 Adjust the seat in a height position (컄 page 347).
왘 Make sure that no objects which apply forces to the seat are present (e.g.
objects such as books, briefcases etc. lodged underneath, behind or
around the seat). Such forces may cause the system to sense that an oc-
cupant of a lesser weight than actually present is on the front passenger
seat.
왘 Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door and switch on
the ignition (컄 page 344).
Monitor the 59 indicator lamp right of the instrument cluster
(컄 page 50) and the multifunction display in the instrument cluster
(컄 page 264) for the following:
(Continued on next page)
618
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Front pass. airbag With the seat unoccupied and the ignition switched on (컄 page 344),
disabled
앫 the 59 indicator lamp right of the instrument cluster should
See Oper. Manual
illuminate and remain illuminated, indicating that the OCS (컄 page 47)
has deactivated the air bag.
앫 the message “Front passenger airbag enabled See Oper. Manual” or the
message “Front passenger airbag disabled See Oper. Manual” should not
appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is unoccupied.
Wait at least 60 seconds for the system to complete the necessary check
cycles and to make sure neither message appears in the multifunction dis-
play.
If above conditions are met, you can occupy the front passenger seat again.
Depending on the front passenger classification sensed by the OCS
(컄 page 47), the 59 indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go
out.
If above conditions are not met, the system is not working properly. Have the
system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
performing the above corrective steps, do

Warning! G not have any passenger use the front pas-
If the 59 indicator lamp re- senger seat until the system has been re-
mains illuminated with an adult occupant on paired.
the front passenger seat even after
619
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Front pass. airbag Front passenger front air bag is Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible and check the front
enabled activated while driving even passenger seat for the following:
See Oper. Manual though a child, small individual,
or object below the system’s
weight threshold is on the front 왘 Switch off the ignition (컄 page 344).
passenger seat, or the front pas- 왘 Remove child and child restraint from front passenger seat and properly
senger seat is empty. Objects secure the child in rear seat employing the child restraint if necessary.
on the seat or forces acting on
the seat may make the system 왘 Remove any other items from on and around the front passenger seat and
sense supplemental weight. make sure the storage bag on the back of the front passenger seat is emp-
ty.
왘 Make sure that no objects which apply forces to the seat are present (e.g.
objects such as books, briefcases etc. lodged behind or around the seat,
head restraints pushing against roof etc.). The system may recognize such
forces as supplemental weight and sense that an occupant on the front
passenger seat is of a greater weight than actually present.
왘 Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door and switch on
the ignition (컄 page 344).
Monitor the 59 indicator lamp right of the instrument cluster
(컄 page 50) and the multifunction display in the instrument cluster
(컄 page 264) for the following:
620
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Front pass. airbag With the seat unoccupied and the ignition switched on (컄 page 344),
enabled
앫 the 59 indicator lamp right of the instrument cluster should
See Oper. Manual
illuminate and remain illuminated, indicating that the OCS (컄 page 47)
has deactivated the air bag.
앫 the message “Front passenger airbag enabled See Oper. Manual” or the
message “Front passenger airbag disabled See Oper. Manual” should not
appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is unoccupied.
Wait at last 60 seconds for the system to complete the necessary check
cycles and to make sure neither message appears in the multifunction dis-
play.
If above conditions are met, you can occupy the front passenger seat again.
Depending on the front passenger classification sensed by the OCS
(컄 page 47), the 59 indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go
out.
If above conditions are not met, the system is not working properly. Have the
system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
performing the above corrective steps, do

Warning! G not have any passenger use the front pas-
If the 59 indicator lamp re- senger seat until the system has been re-
mains illuminated with an adult occupant on paired.
the front passenger seat even after
621
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Next Service X Service X must be carried out in ... days or 왘 Have the maintenance service carried out by an authorized
due in ... days after ... miles (kilometers) (컄 page 582). Mercedes-Benz Center.
due in ... mls (km)
Only shift to You have tried to shift the automatic trans- 왘 Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
position 'P' when mission to P using the gear selector lever al- 왘 Shift the automatic transmission to park position P.
vehicle is stationary though the vehicle is still in motion.
Park Assist Park Assist* is deactivated because the 왘 Clean the front and rear bumper (컄 page 590).
currently unavailable area around the sensors* in the front or the
See Oper. Manual rear bumper (컄 page 590) is dirty.
Park Assist* is deactivated because the 왘 Have the battery checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
battery voltage is insufficient. Center.
Park Assist* is switched off because the ra- 왘 Wait until the message in the multifunction display disappears.
dar sensor system* is temporarily inopera-
tive due to electromagnetic interference
near television and radio transmitter sta-
tions, toll stations, speed measuring sys-
tems, etc.
Park Assist Park Assist* is unavailable due to a mal- 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as pos-
inoperative function. sible.
622
Practical hints
What to do if …?

®
PRE-SAFE PRE-SAFE itself has failed. All other occu- 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as pos-
inoperative pant safety systems, such as the air bags, sible.
See Oper. Manual are still available.
Radar sensor You attempt to activate DISTRONIC Plus*, 왘 Check if the radar sensors* may be switched on (컄 page 282).
deactivated Park Assist* or PRE-SAFE® Brake* even
왘 Switch on the radar sensors* using the instrument cluster
See Oper. Manual though you have switched off the radar sen-
control system.
sors* on the vehicle.
Check tire pressures There was a warning message about a loss 왘 Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as required
and then restart in tire inflation pressure and the Run Flat In- (컄 page 560).
Run Flat Indicator dicator has not been reactivated yet. 왘 Then reactivate the Run Flat Indicator (컄 page 566).
(Canada only)
Run Flat Indicator The Run Flat Indicator is malfunctioning. 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealer as soon as pos-
inoperative sible.
(Canada only)
Service X Service X must be carried out (컄 page 582). 왘 Have the maintenance service carried out by an authorized
due Mercedes-Benz Center.
Service X exceeded Service X must be carried within the next ... 왘 Have the maintenance service carried out by an authorized
by X days or before you have driven ... miles (kilome- Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
by XXX mls (km) ters) (컄 page 582).
623
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Shift to P or N You have attempted to start the engine 왘 Shift the automatic transmission to P or N (컄 page 399).
to start engine while the automatic transmission was set to
position R or D.
Tire pressure The pressure has fallen significantly in one 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering
Check tires or more tires. and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around
you.
왘 Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as required
(컄 page 560).
왘 If necessary, change the wheel (컄 page 686).
왘 Reactivate the Run Flat Indicator after adjusting the tire infla-
tion pressure values (컄 page 566).
Tire pressure monitor The Advanced TPMS* or a wheel sensor is 왘 Have the Advanced TPMS* checked by an authorized
inoperative malfunctioning. Mercedes-Benz Center.
may lose control of the vehicle. Continued

Warning! G driving with a flat tire will cause excessive
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects heat build-up and possibly a fire.
624
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Tire pressure monitor The Advanced TPMS* is deactivated be- 왘 Have the wheel sensors installed by an authorized
inoperative cause wheels without proper sensors were Mercedes-Benz Center.
No wheel sensors installed.
As soon as all wheels with sensors have been mounted, the
Advanced TPMS* is switched back on after driving for sever-
al minutes.
Tire pressure monitor The Advanced TPMS* is unable to monitor As soon as the causes for the malfunction are no longer present,
currently unavailable the tire inflation pressure due to: the Advanced TPMS* automatically becomes active again after
a few minutes driving.
앫 a nearby radio interference source
앫 the on-board voltage is too low

앫 excessive wheel sensor temperatures
Tire pressures Vehicles with Advanced TPMS*: 왘 Drive the vehicle for a few minutes.
displayed after driving The tire inflation pressure is being checked.
a few minutes
Visit workshop The automatic transmission cannot be shift- If the automatic transmission is shift to drive position D
without shifting gears ed out of the set position because of a mal- (컄 page 399):
function.
왘 Without changing the automatic transmission from drive
position D, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If the automatic transmission is shift to position N, R or P:
왘 Do not drive.
왘 Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
625
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Symbol messages

Malfunction You have started driving although the vehi- 왘 Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
Stop Vehicle! cle level is still too low. so.
The vehicle is raised. The ABC* message 왘 Engage the electronic parking brake
goes out after a few seconds. (컄 page 395).
왘 Wait until the message disappears from the
You may then drive off.
The vehicle is losing oil. 왘 Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
The ABC* message is continuously shown. so.
(컄 page 395).
왘 Call Roadside Assistance.
Or
Center.
626
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Malfunction ABC* is malfunctioning. 왘 Do not turn steering wheel too far to avoid
Stop Vehicle! damaging the front fenders.
The ABC* message is continuously shown.
왘 Listen for scraping noises.
왘 Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ter as soon as possible.
627
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Malfunction The capability of the ABC* system is re- 왘 Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
stricted. This can impair the handling.
Vehicle rising The vehicle’s level is too low while at a 왘 Do not drive off.
Please wait a moment standstill. The vehicle will be raised.
® ®
ABS and ESP ABS, ESP as well as PRE-SAFE are 왘 Continue driving with added caution. Wheels
inoperative switched off due to a malfunction. BAS is may lock during hard braking, reducing steer-
See Oper. Manual also switched off. ing capability.
The brake system is still functioning nor- 왘 Have the system checked at an authorized
mally but without the ABS available. Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
BAS Plus* and PRE-SAFE® Brake* are also Failure to follow these instructions increases the
not available. risk of an accident.
628
Practical hints
What to do if …?

® ®
ABS and ESP ABS, ESP as well as PRE-SAFE are not 왘 Drive a short distance with gentle turns
currently unavailable available due to a malfunction. BAS is also above a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).
See Oper. Manual switched off. It is possible that the self-diag- The message disappears when ABS and ESP®
nostics have not yet been completed.
are again available.
The brake system still functions normally.
BAS Plus* and PRE-SAFE® Brake* are also
not available.
The ABS, ESP® as well as PRE-SAFE® were When the voltage is above this value again, the
deactivated because of insufficient power ABS, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are operational again
supply. The charging voltage has fallen be- and the message in the multifunction display
low 10 volts. should disappear.
The brake system still functions normally If the message in the multifunction display does
but without the ABS, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® not disappear:
available.
왘 Have the generator (alternator) and the bat-
BAS Plus* and PRE-SAFE® Brake* are also tery checked.
not available.
629
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Check brake There is insufficient brake fluid in the reser- Risk of accident!
fluid level voir.
왘 Carefully stop the vehicle in a safe location or
as soon as it is safe to do so.
(USA only) 왘 Engage the electronic parking brake
(컄 page 395).
ter.
왘 Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the
(Canada only) problem.
! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake

Warning! G fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or
below, have the brake system checked for brake
Driving with the message “Check brake fluid pad thickness and leaks.
level ” displayed can result in an accident.
Have your brake system checked immedi-
ately. Do not add brake fluid before check-
ing the brake system. Overfilling the brake
fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake flu-
id on hot engine parts and the brake fluid
catching fire. You can be seriously burned.
630
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Brake immediately A malfunction has occurred while 왘 While observing surrounding traffic condi-
DISTRONIC Plus* was switched on. tions and when it is safe, immediately de-
press the brake pedal firmly until the warning
message disappears.
(USA only)
(컄 page 395).
(Canada only)
EBV, ABS, ESP ESP®, EBP and ABS are switched off due to 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
inoperative a malfunction. BAS is also switched off. As
왘 Have the system checked at an authorized
See Oper. Manual a result, PRE-SAFE® is also inoperative.
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
BAS Plus* and PRE-SAFE® Brake* are also Failure to follow these instructions increases the
(USA only)
not available. risk of an accident.
(Canada only)
631
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Service S 600 and S 65 AMG only: 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
See Oper. Manual
The brake system sensors are malfunction- 왘 Have the system checked at an authorized
ing. The brake system continues to function Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
normally with full brake force boost.
(USA only)
(Canada only)
Brake wear The brake pads have reached their wear 왘 Have the brake pads replaced as soon as
limit. possible.
! Brake pad thickness must be visually

checked by a qualified technician at the intervals
specified in the Maintenance Booklet.
632
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Parking brake The red indicator lamp for the electronic To release:
See Oper. Manual parking brake is either on or off and the yel-
왘 Pull handle of electronic parking brake
low warning lamp for the electronic parking
(컄 page 395).
brake comes on.
(USA only) or
The electronic parking brake is malfunction-
ing. 왘 Drive off carefully (컄 page 395).

(Canada only) or
왘 Release electronic parking brake mechani-
cally (컄 page 673).
To engage:
왘 Switch off ignition and press handle for elec-
tronic parking brake until the warning mes-
sage on the multifunction display disappears.
633
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Parking brake The red indicator lamp for the electronic 왘 Pull handle for electronic parking brake
See Oper. Manual parking brake flashes. (컄 page 395).
The power supply for the electronic parking or
brake was malfunctioning or the electronic
(USA only) 왘 Carefully drive off (컄 page 395).
parking brake was previously mechanically
released. or
왘 Press handle for electronic parking brake un-
til the warning message disappears from the
(Canada only)
634
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Parking brake The red indicator lamp for the electronic 왘 Switch ignition off and back on again, and en-
See Oper. Manual parking brake flashes and the yellow warn- gage or release electronic parking brake
ing lamp for the electronic parking brake (컄 page 395).
lights up.
or
(USA only)
왘 Carefully drive off (컄 page 395).
ing.
or
(Canada only)
635
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Parking brake When you engage or release the electronic 왘 Carefully drive off (컄 page 395).
See Oper. Manual parking brake, the red indicator lamp for
the electronic parking brake flashes for
approx.10 seconds. Afterward, it goes out
(USA only) or lights up continuously. The yellow warn- In the event of overvoltage or undervoltage:
ing lamp for the electronic parking brake 왘 Remove the cause of the overvoltage or und-
lights up. ervoltage, e.g. charge the battery or restart
The electronic parking brake is malfunction- the engine.
ing or overheated for example due to over- 왘 Switch ignition off and back on again, and en-
(Canada only) or undervoltage. gage or release electronic parking brake
(컄 page 395).
If the electronic parking brake still cannot be re-
leased:
636
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Parking brake If overheated:
See Oper. Manual
왘 Let vehicle cool down, and do not engage
electronic parking brake during this time.
(USA only) or
왘 Switch ignition off and back on again, and en-
gage or release electronic parking brake.
(Canada only) Parking brake When you engage or release the electronic 왘 Switch ignition off and back on again, and en-
inoperative parking brake, the red indicator lamp for gage electronic parking brake (컄 page 395).
the electronic parking brake flashes and
If the electronic parking brake cannot be en-
goes out after approx. 10 seconds. The yel-
gaged:
low warning lamp for the electronic parking
brake lights up. 왘 Shift the automatic transmission to P
(컄 page 399).
ing. 왘 Protect vehicle from rolling away while
parked by using a chock from the vehicle tool
kit (컄 page 670).
637
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Please release The red indicator lamp for the electronic 왘 Release electronic parking brake.
parking brake parking brake flashes and you also hear a
or
warning signal.
왘 Carefully drive off (컄 page 395).
You are driving with the electronic parking
(USA only)
brake activated, or you are carrying out an or
emergency brake application with the elec- 왘 Release the handle for electronic parking
tronic parking brake (컄 page 395). brake.
(Canada only) Please release The red indicator lamp for the electronic While driving:
parking brake parking brake flashes and the yellow warn-
왘 Release the handle for electronic parking
ing lamp for the electronic parking brake
brake.
comes on. You also hear a warning tone.
While at a standstill:
ing; braking action is restricted. 왘 Switch off ignition and press handle for elec-
tronic parking brake until the warning mes-
sage disappears from the multifunction
display.
638
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Turn on the ignition The yellow indicator lamp for the electronic 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 344).
to release the parking brake comes on.
parking brake
You have tried to release the electronic
parking brake, but the ignition was not
(USA only)
switched on.
(Canada only)
Inoperative ESP® as well as PRE-SAFE® are switched off 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
See Oper. Manual due to a malfunction. In addition, the v
왘 Have the system checked at an authorized
warning lamp in the instrument cluster
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
comes on.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the
The ABS may not be operational and the fol- risk of an accident.
lowing systems are not available:
앫 BAS and BAS Plus*
앫 PRE-SAFE® Brake*
앫 Distronic Plus*
앫 Cruise control
앫 Hill start assist system
639
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Inoperative S 600 and S 65 AMG only: 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
See Oper. Manual
ESP® as well as PRE-SAFE® are switched off 왘 Have the system checked at an authorized
due to a malfunction. In addition, the v Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
and ; (USA only) or 3(Canada only)
warning lamps come on in the instrument
risk of an accident.
cluster.
Brake force assistance is impaired and is
sustained through an electric substitute
function as long as the engine is running.
The brake system continues to function
normally. You will feel a pulsating effect at
the brake pedal while braking.
not available.
640
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Currently unavailable ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are temporarily un- Synchronize the ESP®:
See Oper. Manual available. It is possible that the self-diag-
왘 Drive a short distance with gentle turns at a
nostics have not yet completed.
speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
In addition, the yellow ESP® warning
The message disappears when ESP® is again
lamp v comes on.
available.
The brake system functions normally.
not available.
Currently unavailable ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are switched off due 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
See Oper. Manual to undervoltage. It is possible that the bat- 왘 Have the system checked at an authorized
tery is not charged. Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
The brake system functions normally.
BAS Plus* and PRE-SAFE® Brake* are also risk of an accident.
not available.
Currently unavailable If the yellow ESP® warning lamp v flash- As soon as the brakes have cooled off, the elec-
See Oper. Manual es while driving and this message appears, tronic traction system switches on again.
the electronic traction system has switched
The message in the multifunction display disap-
off to prevent overheating of the drive
pears and the ESP® warning lamp v goes
wheel brakes.
out.
not available.
641
Practical hints
What to do if …?

STOP, You have started driving although the vehi- 왘 Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
car too low cle level was too low. so.
The vehicle will be raised. The Airmatic 왘 Engage the electronic parking brake
warning lamp goes out after several sec- (컄 page 395).
onds.
STOP, The Airmatic is malfunctioning. 왘 Stop and press the vehicle level control but-
car too low ton to select a higher vehicle level
The Airmatic warning lamp lights up contin-
(컄 page 440).
uously.
왘 Do not turn steering wheel too far to avoid
damaging the front fenders.
왘 Listen for scraping noises.
왘 Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
Center as soon as possible.
There is otherwise danger of an accident.
642
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Malfunction The capability of the Airmatic system is re- 왘 Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
stricted. This can impair the handling.
Vehicle rising Vehicles with Airmatic: 왘 Do not drive off.
Please wait a moment The vehicle level is too low while at a stand-
still. The vehicle will be raised. multifunction display.
643
Practical hints
What to do if …?

The battery is no longer charging. 왘 Stop the vehicle immediately in a safe loca-
Possible causes: tion.
앫 alternator malfunctioning 왘 Engage the electronic parking brake
앫 broken poly-V-belt (컄 page 395).
왘 Check the poly-V-belt.
If it is broken:
왘 Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the en-
gine will overheat due to an inoperative water
pump which may result in damage to the en-
gine.
왘 Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If it is intact:
왘 Drive immediately to the nearest authorized
There is a malfunction in the electronic 왘 Have the system checked by an authorized
system. Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
644
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Coolant, The coolant level is too low. 왘 Add coolant (컄 page 547).
please refill
왘 If you have to add coolant frequently, have
See Oper. Manual
the cooling system checked by an authorized
! Do not ignore the low engine coolant level

Warning! G warning. Extended driving with the message and
symbol displayed may cause serious engine
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lim-
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which ited Warranty.
may burn if it comes into contact with hot Do not drive without a sufficient amount of cool-
engine parts. You could be seriously burned. ant in the cooling system. The engine will over-
heat, causing major engine damage.
645
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Coolant level The coolant is too hot. 왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon
Stop vehicle! as it is safe to do so and immediately turn off
Switch engine off the engine.
(컄 page 395).
왘 Only start the engine again after the message
disappears. You could otherwise damage the
engine.
왘 Observe the coolant temperature gauge in
the instrument cluster (컄 page 28).
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from ! The engine should not be operated with the
Warning! G other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of
coolant temperature above 248°F (120°C). Do-
ing so may cause serious engine damage which
앫 Driving when your engine is overheated the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
can cause some fluids which may have until the engine has cooled down. Warranty.
leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire. You could be seriously During severe operating conditions,
burned. e.g. stop-and-go traffic, the coolant tem-
앫 Steam from an overheated engine can perature may rise close to 248°F (120°C).
cause serious burns which can occur
just by opening the engine hood. Stay
away from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it.
646
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Coolant level The poly-V-belt could be broken. 왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon
Stop vehicle! as it is safe to do so and immediately turn off
Switch engine off the engine.
(컄 page 395).
왘 Check the poly-V-belt.
If it is broken:
왘 Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the en-
gine will overheat due to an inoperative water
pump which may result in damage to the en-
gine.
왘 Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If it is intact:
왘 Do not continue to drive the vehicle with this
message displayed. Doing so could result in
serious engine damage that is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
왘 Observe the coolant temperature gauge in
the instrument cluster (컄 page 28).
647
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Coolant level 왘 Restart the engine.
Stop vehicle!
If this message disappears from the multi-
Switch engine off
function display:
왘 Drive immediately to the nearest autho-
If this message does not disappear from the
multifunction display:
왘 Call Roadside Assistance.
The cooling fan for the coolant is malfunc- 왘 Observe the coolant temperature gauge in
tioning. the instrument cluster (컄 page 28).
왘 Have the fan replaced as soon as possible.
You are driving with one or more doors 왘 Close the doors.
open.
The display symbol shows you which doors
are open.
648
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Gas cap open A loss of pressure has been detected in the 왘 Check the fuel cap (컄 page 538).
fuel system. The fuel cap may not be closed
If it is not closed properly:
properly or the fuel system may be leaky.
왘 Close the fuel cap.
If it is closed properly:
왘 Have the fuel system checked by an autho-
You are driving with the hood open. 왘 Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
(컄 page 395).
왘 Close the hood (컄 page 542).
There is otherwise danger of an accident.
649
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Key The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is not 왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon
not recognized recognized while the engine is running be- as it is safe to do.
cause the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is
not in the vehicle.
(컄 page 395).
왘 Search for the SmartKey.
Otherwise the vehicle cannot be centrally
locked nor can the engine be started again
after the engine is stopped.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is not 왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon
recognized while the engine is running be- as it is safe to do.
cause there is strong radio-frequency inter-
ference.
(컄 page 395).
왘 Remove KEYLESS-GO* button from the
starter switch (컄 page 345).
왘 Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the
starter switch.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is mo- 왘 Change the position of the SmartKey in the
mentarily not recognized. vehicle.
왘 If necessary, operate vehicle using SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO* in starter switch under
KEYLESS-GO* button (컄 page 345).
650
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Close doors You wanted to lock the vehicle but not all 왘 Close doors and lock vehicle again.
to lock them doors were closed.
Do not This display appears (for a maximum of 왘 Take the SmartKey or SmartKey with
forget key 60 seconds) if the driver’s door is opened KEYLESS-GO* with you when leaving the ve-
with the engine turned off and no SmartKey hicle.
in the starter switch.
This message is only a reminder.
Please You have forgotten to remove the 왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter
remove key SmartKey. switch.
Change The batteries in the SmartKey with 왘 Replace the batteries (컄 page 676).
key batteries KEYLESS-GO* are discharged.
Key A SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* left in the 왘 Take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* out of
still in vehicle vehicle was recognized while locking the ve- the vehicle.
hicle from the outside.
651
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Key The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is mo- 왘 Change the position of the SmartKey in the
not recognized mentarily not recognized. vehicle.
왘 If necessary, operate vehicle using SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO* in starter switch under
KEYLESS-GO* button (컄 page 345).
Key being The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is being 왘 Wait until the message disappears from the
initialized… initialized in the vehicle. multifunction display.
Please wait
Remove starting The KEYLESS-GO* system is malfunction- 왘 Remove KEYLESS-GO* button from the
button, then ing. starter switch (컄 page 345).
insert key
왘 Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the
starter switch.
Replace key The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* must be 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
replaced. ter as soon as possible.
652
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Third brake lamp The high mounted brake lamp is malfunc- 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
tioning. This message will only appear if a ter as soon as possible.
critical number of light emitting diodes have
stopped working.
Corner. lamp, The left-hand corner-illuminating lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible
Left malfunctioning. (컄 page 678).
Corner. lamp, The right-hand corner-illuminating lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible
Right malfunctioning. (컄 page 678).
Low beam, The left low beam lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
Left ter as soon as possible.
Low beam, The right low beam lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
Right ter as soon as possible.
Active headlamps The active headlamps are malfunctioning. 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
inoperative ter as soon as possible.
653
Practical hints
What to do if …?

AUTO lamps The light sensor is malfunctioning. Daytime 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
inoperative driving lamps are switched on. ter as soon as possible.
To switch off the headlamps (U.S. vehicles only):
왘 Switch off daytime running lamps in the in-
strument cluster control system
(컄 page 281).
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to position 0.
Turn signal, The left rear turn signal lamp is malfunction- 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
Rear Left ing. A substitute bulb is being used. ter as soon as possible.
Turn signal, The right rear turn signal lamp is malfunc- 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
Rear Right tioning. A substitute bulb is being used. ter as soon as possible.
Turn signal, The turn signal in the left exterior rear view 왘 Have the LEDs replaced as soon as possible.
Left mirror mirror is malfunctioning. This message will
only appear if a critical number of light emit-
ting diodes have stopped working.
654
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Turn signal, The turn signal in the right exterior rear view 왘 Have the LEDs replaced as soon as possible.
Right mirror mirror is malfunctioning. This message will
only appear if a critical number of light emit-
ting diodes have stopped working.
Turn signal, The left front turn signal lamp is malfunc- 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
Front Left tioning. ter as soon as possible.
Turn signal, The right front turn signal lamp is malfunc- 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
Front Right tioning. ter as soon as possible.
High beam, Left The left high beam lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 678).
High beam, Right The right high beam lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 678).
License plate lamp, The left license plate lamp is malfunction- 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
Left ing. ter as soon as possible.
License plate lamp, The right license plate lamp is malfunction- 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
Right ing. ter as soon as possible.
Please You are getting out of the vehicle and the 왘 Switch off the headlamps (컄 page 371).
switch off lights lights are still switched on.
655
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Switch off lights The exterior lamp switch is set to * and 왘 Switch off the headlamps (컄 page 371).
or you have forgotten to take out the
or
remove key SmartKey. The parking lamps remain
switched on. 왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
Front foglamp, The left front fog lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
Front foglamp, The right front fog lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
Rear foglamp, The left rear fog lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
Left A substitute bulb is being used. ter as soon as possible.
Rear foglamp, The right rear fog lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
Right A substitute bulb is being used. ter as soon as possible.
Parking lamp, The left front parking lamp is malfunction- 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
Front Left ing. A substitute bulb is being used. ter as soon as possible.
Parking lamp, The right front parking lamp is malfunction- 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
Right front ing. A substitute bulb is being used. ter as soon as possible.
Reverse lamp, The left reverse lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
Reverse lamp, The right reverse lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
656
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Side marker lamp, The front left side marker lamp is malfunc- 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
Left Front tioning. ter as soon as possible.
Side marker lamp, The front right side marker lamp is malfunc- 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
Right Front tioning. ter as soon as possible.
Side marker lamp, The rear left side marker lamp is malfunc- 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
Rear Left tioning. ter as soon as possible.
Side marker lamp, The rear right side marker lamp is malfunc- 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
Rear Right tioning. ter as soon as possible.
Tail lamp/ The left tail lamp/brake lamp is malfunc- 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
brake lamp, Left tioning. ter as soon as possible.
This message will only appear if a critical
number of light emitting diodes have
stopped working. A substitute bulb is being
used.
Tail lamp/ The right tail lamp/brake lamp is malfunc- 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
brake lamp, Right tioning. ter as soon as possible.
This message will only appear if a critical
number of light emitting diodes have
stopped working. A substitute bulb is being
used.
657
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Night View Assist Night View Assist* is malfunctioning. 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
inoperative ter as soon as possible.
Night View Assist The temperature of the camera* is too high 왘 Wait until the message “Night View Assist
currently unavailable (컄 page 461). available again” appears.
In addition you can:
왘 Swing the camera* cover down
(컄 page 591).
왘 Adjust the air distribution of the automatic
climate control so that air flows upward
(컄 page 253).
Night View Assist You have tried to switch on Night View As- 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to * or
Lights must be set sist*, but the light switch is not set to * B (컄 page 371).
to AUTO or ON or B.
Night View Assist You have tried to switch on Night View As- 왘 Shift the automatic transmission to P, N or D
Not in Reverse gear sist* while the automatic transmission was (컄 page 399).
in position R.
658
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Night View Assist You have tried to switch on Night View As- 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to * or
Lights ON or AUTO, sist* but the light switch is not set to * B (컄 page 371).
not in R gear or B.
왘 Shift the automatic transmission to P, N or D
In addition, the automatic transmission is in (컄 page 399).
position R.
Night View Assist You have tried to switch on Night View As- You can only switch on Night View Assist* when
only when sist* by daylight. it is dark.
it is dark
Engine oil level S 600 and S 65 AMG only: 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt as soon
Stop vehicle! as it is safe to do so in a safe location.
There is no oil in the engine. There is a dan-
Switch engine off
ger of engine damage. 왘 Engage the electronic parking brake
(컄 page 395).
왘 Turn off the engine.
왘 Add engine oil (컄 page 546) and check the
engine oil level (컄 page 543).
659
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Add 1.0 qts. engine oil S 600 and S 65 AMG only: 왘 Check the engine oil level (컄 page 543) and
at next refueling add engine oil as required (컄 page 546).
The engine oil level is too low.
(USA only)
왘 If you must add engine oil frequently, have
Add 1.0 l engine oil the engine checked for possible leaks.
at next refueling
(Canada only)
Check engine oil level S 550 and S 63 AMG only: 왘 Check the engine oil level (컄 page 543) and
at next refueling add engine oil as required (컄 page 546).
The engine oil level has dropped to approx-
imately the minimum level. 왘 If you must add engine oil frequently, have
the engine checked for possible leaks.
When the message “Check engine oil level When this occurs, the warning will first For information on approved engine oils,
at next refueling” (S 550) or “Add 1.0 qts. come on intermittently and then stay on if refer to the Factory Approved Service
(Canada: 1.0 l) engine oil at next refueling” the oil level drops further. Products pamphlet (USA only) or contact
(S 600 and S 65 AMG) appears while the an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Visually check for oil leaks. If no obvious oil
engine is running and at operating temper-
ature, the engine oil level has dropped to
leaks are noted, continue to drive to the ! The engine oil level warnings should not be
nearest service station where the engine ignored. Extended driving with the symbol dis-
approximately the minimum level. played could result in serious engine damage
oil should be topped to the required level
with an approved oil specified in the Facto- that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limit-
ry Approved Service Products pamphlet. ed Warranty.
660
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Engine oil level S 600 and S 65 AMG only: 왘 Have the measuring system checked by an
cannot be authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The measuring system is malfunctioning.
measured
Engine oil level S 600 and S 65 AMG only: 왘 Have excess oil siphoned or drained off. Con-
Reduce oil level You have added too much engine oil. tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
There is a risk of damaging:

앫 the engine
앫 the catalytic converter
661
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Restraint system There is a malfunction in the supplemental 왘 Drive with added caution to the nearest au-
malfunction restraint systems. The air bags or emergen- thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Visit workshop cy tensioning devices (ETDs) could deploy
unexpectedly or fail to activate in an acci-
dent.
Malfunction Components of the driver’s supplemental 왘 Drive with added caution to the nearest au-
on front left side restraint system may not work properly. thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Visit workshop
Malfunction Components of the front passenger’s sup- 왘 Drive with added caution to the nearest au-
on Front Right side plemental restraint system may not work thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Visit workshop properly.
Malfunction Components of the left rear passenger’s 왘 Drive with added caution to the nearest au-
on Rear Left side supplemental restraint system may not thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Visit workshop work properly.
immediately to have the system checked;

Warning! G otherwise the SRS may not be deployed
In the event that a malfunction of the SRS is when needed in an accident, which could re-
indicated as outlined above, the SRS may sult in serious or fatal injury, or it might de-
not be operational. For your safety, we ploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which
strongly recommend that you contact an could result in an accident and/or injury to
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center you or to others.
662
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Malfunction Components of the center rear passenger’s 왘 Drive with added caution to the nearest au-
in Rear Center supplemental restraint system may not thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Malfunction Components of the right rear passenger’s 왘 Drive with added caution to the nearest au-
on Rear Right side supplemental restraint system may not thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Left window curtain The left side window curtain air bag may not 왘 Drive with added caution to the nearest au-
airbag malfunction work properly. thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Visit workshop
Right window curtain The right side window curtain air bag may 왘 Drive with added caution to the nearest au-
airbag malfunction not work properly. thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Visit workshop
immediately to have the system checked;

Warning! G otherwise the SRS may not be deployed
In the event that a malfunction of the SRS is when needed in an accident, which could re-
indicated as outlined above, the SRS may sult in serious or fatal injury, or it might de-
not be operational. For your safety, we ploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which
strongly recommend that you contact an could result in an accident and/or injury to
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center you or to others.
663
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Tele Aid One or more main functions of the Tele Aid 왘 Have the Tele Aid system checked by an au-
inoperative system are malfunctioning. thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Tire pressure Vehicles with Advanced TPMS*: 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
Caution, tire defect abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
One or more tires are deflating.
(컄 page 395).
Caution Vehicles with Advanced TPMS*: 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
Tire defect One or more tires are deflating. The respec- abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
tive tire is shown in the multifunction dis- 왘 Engage the electronic parking brake
play. (컄 page 395).

664
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Tire pressure Vehicles with Advanced TPMS*: 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
Check tires abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
The pressure is too low in one or more tires.
(컄 page 395).
왘 Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as
required (컄 page 561).
Check tires Vehicles with Advanced TPMS*: 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
The pressure is too low in one or more tires. abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
The respective tire is shown in the multi- 왘 Engage the electronic parking brake
function display. (컄 page 395).
왘 Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as
required (컄 page 561).

665
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Wheel sensor(s) One or more sensors malfunction (e.g. bat- 왘 Have the Advanced TPMS* checked by an
missing tery in one or more wheel sensor is empty). authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
One or more wheels without wheel sensors 왘 Have the wheel sensors installed by an
mounted (e.g. spare tire). authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
No pressure value is shown on the multi- The tire pressure for the respective tire is
function display for the tire in question. shown in the multifunction display after a few
minutes driving.
Tire pressure Vehicles with Advanced TPMS*: 왘 Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as
Please rectify The pressure is too low in one or more tires. required (컄 page 561).
Or the tire pressures of the individual
wheels differ too radically from one anoth-
er.
666
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Shift to 'P' You have attempted to turn off the engine 왘 Shift the automatic transmission to park
with the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button position P (컄 page 399).
and opened the driver’s door with the auto-
or
matic transmission not shift to park
position P. 왘 Close the driver’s door.
You are driving with the trunk open. 왘 Close the trunk (컄 page 480).
Washer fluid, The water level has dropped to approx. 왘 Add washer fluid (컄 page 548).
please refill 1.1 US qts (1.0 l).
667
Practical hints
First aid kit 왘 Fold the covering forward in the direc- The vehicle tool kit includes:
tion of arrow.
앫 Towing eye bolt
! Always keep the storage compartment un- 왘 Remove the first aid kit.
der the front passenger seat closed while the ve- 앫 Wheel wrench with socket wrench
hicle is in motion.
Vehicle jack, vehicle tool kit, luggage 앫 Alignment bolt
i Check expiration dates and contents for bowl, Minispare wheel 앫 Pair of gloves
completeness at least once a year and replace
missing/expired items. The vehicle jack, Minispare wheel, the ve- 앫 Fuse extractor1
The first aid kit is located in the storage hicle tools, and the luggage bowl are 앫 Fuse chart for the main fuse box
compartment under the front passenger stored in the compartment underneath the
trunk floor. 앫 Spare fuses1
seat.
왘 Lift up trunk floor cover and engage 앫 Collapsible wheel chock
trunk floor handle in upper edge of 앫 Release tool for mechanically releasing
trunk. the electronic parking brake
You can now remove the tools and ac- The spare wheel bolts are fixed at the
cessories. Minispare wheel.
! To prevent damage, always disengage trunk
floor handle from trunk lid and lower trunk floor
before closing the trunk.
1 Tab
2 Cover
왘 Pull tab 1 upward.
1
Depending on vehicle production date.
668
Practical hints
Vehicle jack
Warning! G
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
built into both sides of the vehicle. To help
avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift
the vehicle during a wheel change. Never
get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
Storage position Operational position
by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from
the area under the lifted vehicle. Always 왘 Remove vehicle jack from its 왘 Turn crank handle clockwise.
firmly engage the electronic parking brake compartment. Before storing the vehicle jack in its
and block wheels before raising vehicle with 왘 Turn crank handle in direction of arrow compartment:
jack. as far as it will go. 앫 It should be fully collapsed.
Do not disengage electronic parking brake
while the vehicle is raised. Be certain that 앫 The handle must be folded in (storage
the jack is always vertical (plumb line) when position).
in use, especially on hills. Always try to use
the jack on level surface. Make sure the jack
arm is fully seated in the jack take-up brack-
et. Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient
capacity jackstands before working under
the vehicle.
669
Practical hints
Minispare wheel Setting up the collapsible wheel chock 왘 Tilt both plates upward 1.
The Minispare wheel is stored in the com- The collapsible wheel chock serves to 왘 Fold the lower plate outward 2.
partment underneath the trunk floor. additionally secure the vehicle, e.g. while
왘 Guide the tabs of the lower plate all the
changing the wheel.
way into the openings of the base
plate 3.
For information on where to place wheel
chocks when changing a wheel, see “Lift-
ing the vehicle” (컄 page 687).
1 Minispare wheel with spare wheel bolts

in container on wheel rim
2 Luggage bowl
3 Vehicle tool kit, jack and collapsible
wheel chock
Removing the Minispare wheel 1 Tilt the plates upward

2 Fold the lower plate outward
왘 Turn luggage bowl 2 counterclock- 3 Insert the plate
wise.
왘 Remove Minispare wheel 1.
670
Practical hints
왔 Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Unlocking the vehicle Removing the mechanical key Unlocking the driver’s door
If you cannot unlock the vehicle with the

SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*, unlock the
driver’s door and the trunk using the me-
chanical key.
i Unlocking the vehicle with the mechanical
key and opening the driver’s door or the trunk
with the mechanical key will trigger the anti-theft
alarm system (컄 page 81).
To cancel the alarm, insert the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* in the starter 1 Mechanical key locking tab 1 Unlocking
switch. 2 Mechanical key
2 Mechanical key
왘 Move locking tab 1 in the direction of
arrow. 왘 Insert mechanical key 2 into the driv-
왘 Slide mechanical key 2 out of the er’s door lock until it stops.
housing. 왘 Turn mechanical key 2 counterclock-
wise to position 1 and hold it there.
왘 Pull the door handle until the locking
knob moves up.
The driver’s door is unlocked.
왘 Pull the door handle once more to open
671
Practical hints
Unlocking the trunk 왘 Turn the mechanical key 2 back and 왘 Press down the locking knobs of
A minimum height clearance of 6.0 ft remove it from the trunk lid lock. the front passenger door and the
(1.8 m) is required to open the trunk lid. rear doors manually.
Locking the vehicle
왘 Exit the vehicle.
If you cannot lock the vehicle with the 왘 Check whether the trunk is locked.
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*, do the follow- 왘 If necessary, lock the trunk with the
ing: mechanical key (컄 page 484).
왘 Close the front passenger door, the 왘 Close the driver’s door.
rear right door and the trunk.
왘 Enter the vehicle through the rear left
i If you cannot close the trunk with the re- door.
mote trunk opening/closing* switch, lower the
trunk lid manually and close it with hands placed 왘 Press down the locking knob of the
1 Unlocking in an emergency flat on the trunk lid until it is engaged in its lock. driver’s door.
2 Mechanical key 왘 Open the driver’s door and the rear left ! To prevent inadvertent lockout, make sure
door. to have the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* with you before proceeding with
왘 Insert the mechanical key 2 into the 왘 Press the central locking switch on the the next step. The next step will lock the vehicle.
trunk lid lock until it stops. driver’s door (컄 page 343).
왘 Exit the vehicle.
왘 Turn mechanical key 2 all the way The locking knobs of the front passen-
counterclockwise to position 1. ger door and the rear doors move 왘 Close the rear left door.
The trunk opens. down. The vehicle is locked.
If the vehicle battery is disconnected or i This procedure does not arm the anti-theft
! The trunk lid swings open upwards automat- drained:
ically. Always make sure that there is sufficient alarm system nor does it lock the fuel filler flap.
overhead clearance.
672
Practical hints
Mechanically releasing the electronic 왘 Pull release tool 2 in direction of

parking brake arrow 3.
The electronic parking brake is re-
Depending on vehicle production date your
leased. The red indicator lamp 0
vehicle may be equipped with a mechani-
(USA only) or ! (Canada only) flash-
cal release device for releasing the elec-
es. The message “Parking brake See
tronic parking brake. It is located behind
Oper. Manual” appears on the multi-
the fuel filler flap next to the fuel cap.
function display.
i If your vehicle is not equipped a mechanical
release device for releasing the electronic park- i If the electronic parking brake is not re-
ing brake contact Roadside Assistance or an au- 1 Protective cap leased, pull the release tool again with more
force.
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 2 Release tool
3 Pulling 왘 Unscrew release tool 2 from release
Warning! G 왘 Shift the automatic transmission to P cable.
(컄 page 399). 왘 Reattach protective cap 1.
If you mechanically release the electronic
왘 Prevent the vehicle from rolling away 왘 Store release tool 2 in vehicle tool kit.
parking brake, the vehicle may start to move
by blocking a rear wheel with the wheel
on its own. Make sure that no one is in front After it has been unlocked, you can engage
chock. A wheel chock is included with
of or behind the vehicle. Otherwise, an acci- the electronic parking brake again from
the vehicle tool kit (컄 page 668).
dent could occur resulting in injury or fatali- the driver’s seat.
ty. Before releasing the electronic parking 왘 Open fuel filler flap.
왘 Press the electronic parking brake han-
brake, shift the automatic transmission to P Remove protective cap 1.
왘 dle (컄 page 395).
(컄 page 399) and secure your vehicle in
place using the chock from the vehicle tool 왘 Screw release tool 2 from vehicle tool
kit. kit clockwise 2 to 3 rotations onto re-
lease cable.
673
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency
Power tilt/sliding sunroof or panorama The drive mechanism is behind the left sun 왘 Take crank 2 from the Operator’s
roof with power tilt/sliding panel* visor. Manual pouch.
왘 Switch on the ignition.
Depending on vehicle production date your
vehicle may be equipped with a crank to 왘 Insert crank 2 through the hole.
open or close the tilt/sliding sunroof or 왘 Turn crank 2 clockwise to:
tilt/sliding panel manually should an elec-
trical malfunction occur. 앫 slide roof panel/sunroof closed
앫 raise roof panel/sunroof at the rear
i If your vehicle is not equipped with a crank
and you cannot open or close the tilt/sliding 왘 Turn crank 2 counterclockwise to:
sunroof or tilt/sliding panel due to a malfunction
contact Roadside Assistance or an authorized 앫 slide roof panel/sunroof open
Mercedes-Benz Center. 1 Cover 앫 lower roof panel/sunroof at the
왘 Remove cover 1. rear
i Turn crank 2 slowly and smoothly.
The tilt/sliding sunroof (컄 page 488) or tilt/slid-
ing panel (컄 page 492) must be synchronized af-
ter being operated manually.
2 Crank
674
Practical hints
Resetting activated head restraints
왔 Resetting activated head restraints
If the active head restraints (front seats) ! Be careful not to damage upholstery.
have been triggered in an accident, the ac- Warning! G
왘 Press reset tool 1 forward in direction
tive head restraints must be reset. Other-
When pushing back the head restraint cush- of arrow.
wise, the active head restraints cannot
offer any additional protection in the event ion, take care that your fingers do not be- 왘 Press reset tool downward until you
of another rear-end collision. come caught between the head restraint hear the head restraint release
cushion and the cover. Failing to do so may mechanism audibly engage.
You can tell that the head restraints have lead to injury.
been triggered when they have been 왘 Pull out reset tool 1.
moved forward and cannot be adjusted. 왘 Firmly press head restraint cushion
i For your convenience, we recommend that backward towards the rear of the vehi-
you have this work carried out by an authorized cle until it engages.
왘 Repeat this procedure on the active
You will find the reset tool for manually operating head restraints for second head re-
the head restraints in the Mercedes-Benz vehicle
straint.
literature pouch.
For information on active head restraints,
see “Active head restraints” (컄 page 55).
Warning! G
For information on head restraint adjust-
For safety reasons, have the active head 왘 Take reset tool 1 out of the ment, see “Head restraints” (컄 page 353).
restraints checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz vehicle literature
Mercedes-Benz Center after a rear-end pouch.
collision.
왘 Guide reset tool 1 into center of head
restraint between head restraint cush-
ion and rear head restraint cover.
675
Practical hints
If the batteries in the SmartKey/SmartKey Batteries contain materials that can harm
with KEYLESS-GO* are discharged, the ve- the environment if disposed of improperly.
hicle can no longer be locked or unlocked. Recycling of batteries is the preferred
It is recommended to have the batteries re- method of disposal. Many states require
placed at an authorized Mercedes-Benz sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
Center. for recycling.
i When inserting the batteries, make sure
Warning! G they are clean and free of lint.
Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive i When changing batteries, always replace
both batteries. 1 Mechanical key
substances. Therefore keep the batteries
out of reach of children. The required replacement batteries are available 2 Battery compartment
at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help 왘 Insert mechanical key 1 into opening.
immediately. Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
왘 Press mechanical key 1 in direction of
CR 2025 or equivalent.
arrow.
왘 Remove the mechanical key out of the
The battery compartment is unlatched.
SmartKey/SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* (컄 page 671). 왘 Pull battery compartment 2 out of the
housing.
676
Practical hints
왘 Using a line-free cloth, insert new bat-

teries 3 under contact springs 4 with
the positive terminal (+) side facing up.
왘 Return battery compartment 2 into
housing until it locks into place.
왘 Slide the mechanical key back into the
SmartKey/SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*.
왘 Check the operation of the SmartKey/
3 Batteries SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*.
4 Contact springs
왘 Pull out batteries 3.
677
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Safe vehicle operation depends on proper i If the headlamps or front fog lamps are i Substitute bulbs will be brought into use
exterior lighting and signaling. It is there- fogged up on the inside as a result of high humid- when the following lamps malfunction:
fore essential that all bulbs and lamp as- ity, driving the vehicle a distance with the lights 앫 Brake lamps
semblies are in good working order at all on should clear up the fogging.
앫 Rear fog lamps
times.
앫 Front parking lamps
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely
앫 Tail lamps
important. Have headlamps checked and
readjusted at regular intervals and when a 앫 Turn signal lamps
bulb has been replaced. Contact an autho- Read and observe messages in the multifunction
rized Mercedes-Benz Center for headlamp display (컄 page 612).
adjustment.
678
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Bulbs Front lamps Rear lamps
Lamp Type Lamp Type

1 Bi-Xenon headlamp: D1S-35 W 9 High mounted brake LED
Low and high beam lamp
lamp1 a Turn signal lamp HiP 16 W
2 Additional turn signal LED b Brake lamp/tail lamp LED
lamp and standing lamp
3 Parking and standing W5W c License plate lamp W5W
lamp
d Backup lamp HiP 16 W
4 Side marker lamp W5W
e Side marker lamp LED
5 Bi-Xenon headlamp: H7-55 W
High beam flasher lamp f Rear fog lamp (driver’s HiP 19 W
side only)
IR emitter* (for Night H11-55 W
View Assist*)
6 Corner-illuminating H7-55 W
lamp
7 Fog lamp H11-55 W
8 Turn signal lamp PY 24 W
1
Bi-Xenon headlamps: Low beam and high beam
use the same D1S-35W lamp. Do not replace the
Bi-Xenon bulbs yourself. Contact an authorized
679
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Notes on bulb replacement 앫 Only use 12-volt-bulbs of the same 앫 the high mounted brake lamps
type and with the specified watt rating.
앫 the brake, tail and rear standing lamps
Warning! G 앫 Switch lights off before changing a bulb
앫 the rear side marker lamps
to prevent short circuits.
Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot. Al- 앫 the rear fog lamp
앫 Always use a clean lint-free cloth when
low the lamp to cool down before changing 앫 the rear turn signal lamps
handling bulbs.
a bulb.
앫 Your hands should be dry and free of oil 앫 the rear side marker lamps
Keep bulbs out of reach of children.
and grease. 앫 the license plate lamps
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A
앫 If the newly installed bulb does not
bulb can explode if you: ! Do not replace the LEDs yourself. You could
come on, contact an authorized otherwise damage the LEDs or parts of the vehi-
앫 touch or move it when hot Mercedes-Benz Center. cle. Only have the LEDs replaced by an autho-
앫 drop the bulb rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Have the LEDs and bulbs for the following
앫 scratch the bulb lamps replaced by an authorized i Have the headlamp adjustment checked
Wear eye and hand protection. Mercedes-Benz Center: regularly.
Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is 앫 the Bi-Xenon lamps
dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the Replacing bulbs for front lamps
앫 the front turn signal lamps
lamp and its components. We recommend
that you have such work done by a qualified 앫 the front fog lamps Before you start to replace a bulb for a
technician.
front lamp, do the following first:
앫 the additional turn signal lamps in the
exterior rear view mirrors 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to M
(컄 page 371).
앫 the parking and standing lamps
왘 Open the hood (컄 page 541).
앫 the front side marker lamps
680
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Installing
왘 Guide washer fluid reservoir into
mounting so that the bottom retaining
lug slides into the rubber sleeve on the
longitudinal member.
왘 Turn retaining screw 1 clockwise.
Bi-Xenon headlamps
1 Cover 1 Washer fluid reservoir (example illustration

from S 550)
Warning! G
2 Cover 2
3 Cover 3 1 Retaining screw Do not remove the cover for the Bi-Xenon
headlamp. Because of high voltage in Xenon
Removing and installing washer fluid Removing lamps, it is dangerous to replace the bulb or
reservoir on left-hand side repair the lamp and its components. We rec-
왘 Turn retaining screw 1 counterclock-
wise. ommend that you have such work done by a
Vehicles with Airmatic* qualified technician.
왘 Take washer fluid reservoir out of
You must remove the washer fluid reser-
mounting.
voir in order to change the bulbs of the
front headlamp on the left-hand side. The 왘 Place washer fluid reservoir to the side
washer fluid reservoir is on the front and do not disconnect any wires or ca-
left-hand side of the engine compartment. bles.
681
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
High beam flasher lamp 왘 Turn cover 2 (컄 page 681) counter- IR emitter*
In vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlamps, you clockwise and remove it.
can only change the halogen bulb for the 왘 Turn bulb holder 1 counterclockwise
high-beam flasher lamp. until it disengages.
왘 Take out bulb holder 1.
왘 Take bulb out of holder.
왘 Insert new bulb into holder and press it
all the way down.
The tab of the bulb holder must be po-
sitioned on the upper left-hand side 1 Bulb holder
and wire 2 must point upward and to 2 Wire position
the right for the left headlamp, down-
왘 Turn cover 2 (컄 page 681) counter-
ward and to the left for the right head-
1 Bulb holder clockwise and remove it.
lamp.
2 Wire position
왘 Turn bulb holder 1 counterclockwise
3 Grip 왘 Turn bulb holder clockwise until it en-
until it disengages.
gages and grip 3 is in a horizontal po-
sition. 왘 Take out bulb holder 1.
왘 Press both catches on left and right
sides of bulb holder 1 and take bulb
out of holder.
왘 Insert new bulb into holder until it en-
gages.
682
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
왘 Insert bulb holder 1 into guide in 왘 Turn cover 3 (컄 page 681) counter- Additional turn signal lamp bulbs
headlamp. Wire 2 must point down- clockwise and remove it.
The additional turn signal lamps in the ex-
ward and to the right.
왘 Turn bulb holder 1 counterclockwise terior rear view mirrors have LEDs.
왘 Turn bulb holder 1 clockwise until it until it disengages.
If a malfunction occurs or LEDs fail to func-
engages and wire 2 points downward
왘 Take out bulb holder 1. tion, the entire turn signal unit must be re-
and to the left.
왘 Take bulb out of holder. placed. Have the turn signal unit replaced
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Corner-illuminating lamp 왘 Insert new bulb into holder and press it
all the way down. Front side marker lamp bulbs
왘 Insert bulb holder 1 into guide in Since replacing the side marker lamp bulbs
headlamp. is a technically highly demanding process,
The tab of the bulb holder must be po- we recommend you have the side marker
sitioned on the upper left-hand side lamp bulbs replaced by an authorized
and wire 3 must point downward and Mercedes-Benz Center.
to the left for the left headlamp, up-
ward and to the right for the right head-
lamp.
1 Bulb holder 왘 Turn bulb holder 1 clockwise until it
2 Grip engages and grip 2 is in a horizontal
3 Wire position position.
683
Practical hints
! To avoid damage to the hood: Placing wiper arms in vertical position

Warning! G 앫 The wiper arms should only be folded for-
ward when in the vertical position.
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and re-
move SmartKey from starter switch (vehi- 앫 Never open the hood when the wiper arm is
folded forward.
cles with KEYLESS-GO*: Make sure the
vehicle’s on-board electronics have ! Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper
status 0) before replacing a wiper blade. arm back. If released, the force of the impact
Otherwise, the wiper motor could suddenly from the tensioning spring could crack the wind-
turn on and cause injury. shield.
Do not allow the wiper arms to contact the wind-
shield glass without a wiper blade inserted.
Wiper blades in vertical position
Warning! G For your convenience, we recommend that you
have this work carried out by an authorized 왘 Make sure the hood is fully closed.
Wiper blades are components that are sub- Mercedes-Benz Center.
ject to wear and tear. Replace the wiper Vehicles with SmartKey
blades twice a year, preferably in the spring 왘 Turn SmartKey in starter switch
and fall. Otherwise the front window will not position 1.
be properly wiped. As a result, you may not
be able to observe surrounding traffic condi- 왘 Turn combination switch to wiper
tions and could cause an accident. setting u (컄 page 381).
왘 With wiper arm in vertical position, turn
the SmartKey in starter switch to
position 0.
684
Practical hints
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO* Removing wiper blades Installing wiper blades

왘 Make sure the vehicle’s on-board elec-
tronics have status 1 (컄 page 346). ! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts. They 왘 Slide the wiper blade onto wiper arm
could tear. until it locks in place.
왘 Turn combination switch to wiper
왘 Fold the wiper arm forward until it 왘 Rotate the wiper blade into position
setting u (컄 page 381).
snaps into place. parallel to wiper arm.
왘 Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on
repeatedly until windshield wipers
the windshield. Make sure you hold
start.
onto the wiper when folding the wiper
왘 Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop button arm back.
when the wiper arms are in a vertical
position. ! Make certain that the wiper blades are prop-
erly installed. Improperly installed wiper blades
may cause windshield damage.
왘 Turn the wiper blade at a right angle to

wiper arm (arrow 1).
왘 Slide the wiper blade sideways out of
the retainer in the direction of
arrow 2.
685
Practical hints
Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle 왘 Vehicles with SmartKey: Remove the Mounting the spare wheel
SmartKey from the starter switch.
왘 Park the vehicle in a safe distance from
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: Open the
moving traffic on a hard, flat surface
driver’s door (this puts the starter
Warning! G
when possible.
switch in position 0, same as with the
The dimensions of the spare wheel are dif-
왘 Turn on the hazard warning flasher SmartKey removed from the starter
ferent from those of the road wheels. As a
(컄 page 377). switch). The driver’s door then can be
result, the vehicle handling characteristics
왘 Turn the steering wheel so that the closed again.
change when driving with a spare wheel
front wheels are in a straight ahead 왘 Remove the KEYLESS-GO* mounted. Adapt your driving style accord-
position. start/stop button from the starter ingly.
왘 Shift the automatic transmission to switch. The spare wheel is for temporary use only.
park position P. When driving with spare wheel mounted,
ensure proper tire inflation pressure and
왘 Engage the electronic parking brake.
do not exceed a vehicle speed
왘 Turn off the engine. of 50 mph (80 km/h).
왘 Have any passenger exit the vehicle at Contact the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center
a safe distance from the roadway. as soon as possible to have the spare wheel
replaced with a regular road wheel.
i Open the door only when conditions are safe
to do so. Never operate the vehicle with more than
one spare wheel mounted.
Do not switch off the ESP® when a spare
wheel is mounted.
686
Practical hints
Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack
Do not disengage electronic parking brake
왘 Prepare the vehicle as described on a level surface. However, should cir-
while the vehicle is raised. Be certain that
(컄 page 686). cumstances require you to do so on a hill,
the jack is always vertical (plumb line) when
place the wheel chock and another size-
in use, especially on hills. Always try to use
왘 Take vehicle tool kit tray and vehicle able object as follows:
the jack on level surface.
jack out of trunk (컄 page 668).
Make sure the jack arm is fully seated in the 왘 Place the wheel chock and another
왘 Take the spare wheel from the wheel sizeable object on the downhill side
jack take-up bracket. Always lower the vehi-
well under the trunk floor blocking both wheels on the side of the
cle onto sufficient capacity jackstands be-
(컄 page 670). vehicle not being worked on.
fore working under the vehicle.
Lifting the vehicle
왘 Prevent the vehicle from rolling away
by blocking wheels with wheel chocks
Warning! G or other sizeable objects.
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking One wheel chock is included with the
up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets vehicle tool kit (컄 page 670).
built into both sides of the vehicle. To help When changing wheel on a level surface:
avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift
왘 Place the wheel chock in front of and
the vehicle during a wheel change. Never
another sizeable object behind the 왘 Wheel wrench
get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
wheel that is diagonally opposite to the
by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from 왘 On wheel to be changed, loosen but
wheel being changed.
the area under the lifted vehicle. Always en- do not yet remove the wheel bolts
gage the electronic parking brake and block (approximately one full turn with
wheels before raising vehicle with jack. wrench 1). 컄컄
687
Practical hints
Flat tire
컄컄 The jack take-up brackets are located di-

rectly behind the front wheel housings and Warning! G
in front of the rear wheel housings.
Position the jack only on the jack take-up
brackets designed for this purpose.
If the jack is not properly positioned, the ve-
hicle may fall off the jack and cause serious
personal injury or damage to the vehicle.
왘 Turn crank 4 clockwise until jack 3 Warning! G

is fully seated in take-up bracket 2
and the jack base evenly meets the The jack is intended only for lifting the
2 Jack take-up bracket ground. vehicle briefly for wheel changes. It is not
3 Jack suited for performing maintenance work
왘 Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is a under the vehicle.
4 Crank maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the
왘 Place jack 2 on firm ground. ground. Never start engine while 앫 Never start the engine when the vehicle
vehicle is raised. is raised.
왘 Position jack 3 under take-up 앫 Never lie down under the raised vehicle.
bracket 2 so that it is always vertical
(plumb-line) as seen from the side,
even if the vehicle is parked on an
incline.
688
Practical hints
Flat tire
Removing the wheel Attaching the spare wheel

Warning! G
Warning! G Only use Genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel
bolts. Other wheel bolts may come loose.
Always replace wheel bolts that are dam-
aged or rusted. Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the ve-
hicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle could
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.
fall off the jack.
Damaged wheel hub threads should be re-
paired immediately. Do not continue to drive
under these circumstances! Contact an au-
1 Alignment bolt thorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
Roadside Assistance.
왘 Unscrew upper-most wheel bolt and
remove. Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tight-
ened wheel bolts can cause the wheel to
왘 Replace this wheel bolt with alignment come off. This could cause an accident.
bolt 1 supplied in the tool kit. Make sure you are using the correct wheel
왘 Remove the remaining bolts. bolts.
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt. This

could result in damage to the bolt and wheel hub 1 Wheel bolt for light alloy rims and
threads. Minispare wheel with light alloy rim
2 Wheel bolt for Minispare wheel with
왘 Remove the wheel.
steel rim (located in trunk with spare
wheel)
689
Practical hints
Flat tire
! Wheel bolts 2 must be used when mount- Lowering the vehicle

ing a Minispare wheel with steel rim. The use of
왘 Lower vehicle by turning crank coun-
any wheel bolts other than wheel bolts 2 for a
Minispare wheel with steel rim will physically terclockwise until vehicle is resting ful-
damage the vehicle’s brakes. ly on its own weight.
Wheel bolts 1 must be used when mounting a 왘 Remove the jack.
Minispare wheel with light alloy rim. The use of
any wheel bolts other than wheel bolts 1 for
a Minispare wheel with light alloy rim will physi-
cally damage the vehicle’s brakes.
왘 Guide the spare wheel onto the align-

Warning! G ment bolt and push it on.
Make sure to use the original length wheel ! To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat
bolts when remounting the original wheel against hub and hold it there while installing first
wheel bolt.
after it has been repaired.
왘 Insert wheel bolts and tighten them 1 - 5 Wheel bolts
왘 Clean contact surfaces of wheel and slightly.
wheel hub. 왘 Unscrew the alignment bolt, install the
last wheel bolt and tighten slightly.
690
Practical hints
Flat tire
Warning! G
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. The wheels could come
loose if they are not tightened to a torque of
110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
왘 Fully collapse the jack, with handle

folded in (storage position),
6 Wheel wrench (컄 page 669).
왘 Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly, fol- 왘 Store the jack and the other vehicle
lowing the diagonal sequence illustrat- tools in the designated storage space
ed (1 to 5), until all bolts are tight. underneath the trunk floor
Observe a tightening torque of (컄 page 668).
110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
i Vehicles with Advanced TPMS*:
Do not activate the tire inflation pressure moni-
tor until a full size wheel/tire with functioning
sensor has been placed back into service on the
vehicle.
691
Practical hints
Batteries
Your vehicle is equipped with two batter-

ies: Warning! G Wear eye protection.
앫 The starter battery, located in the en- Observe all safety instructions and precau- Rinse any acid spills immediate-
gine compartment tions when handling automotive batteries. ly with clear water. Contact a
앫 The battery for electrical consumers physician if necessary.
(consumer battery), located in the Risk of explosion.
trunk Keep children away.
! Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Fire, open flames and smoking
The batteries should always be sufficiently
are prohibited when handling Follow the instructions in this
charged in order to achieve its rated ser-
batteries. Avoid creating sparks. Operator’s Manual.
vice life. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for
battery maintenance intervals.
Battery acid is caustic. Do not Batteries contain materials that can harm
If you use your vehicle mostly for short-dis- the environment if disposed of improperly.
allow it to come into contact
tance trips, you will need to have the bat- Large 12-volt storage batteries contain
with skin, eyes or clothing.
tery charge checked more frequently. lead. Recycling of batteries is the preferred
Wear suitable protective cloth-
When replacing the batteries, always use method of disposal. Many states require
ing, especially gloves, apron and
batteries approved by Mercedes-Benz. sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
faceguard.
for recycling.
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle
for an extended period of time, consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center about
steps you need to observe.
692
Practical hints
Batteries
! The consumer battery located in the trunk is ! The factory-equipped VRLA battery is A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
a valve-regulated lead acid (VRLA) battery, also leak-proofed. Only use a battery as replacement
which is flammable and explosive. Keep
referred to as “fleece” battery. Such batteries do that has the same security features and is of
not require topping-up of the electrolyte level. identical size, voltage, and capacity as the facto- flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
VRLA batteries therefore do not have cell caps ry-equipped battery. improper connection of jumper cables,
and the battery cover is non-removable. Do not smoking, etc.
The battery, the battery ventilation and the later-
attempt to open the consumer battery as other- al plug must always be securely installed when
wise the battery will be damaged. the vehicle is in operation.
Even though VRLA batteries do not require top- Warning! G
ping-up of the electrolyte level and cannot be
opened to check the electrolyte level, the bat- Warning! G Do not place metal objects on the battery as
tery condition must be checked periodically by this could result in a short circuit.
performing a battery conductance test. Refer to Failure to follow these instructions can re-
Maintenance Booklet for battery condition test- sult in severe injury or death. Use leak-proof battery only to avoid the risk
ing intervals. of acid burns in the event of an accident.
Never lean over batteries while connecting,
As with any other battery, disconnect the con- you might get injured. Take care that you do not become statically
sumer battery if you do not intend to operate charged, e.g. by wearing synthetic clothing
your vehicle for an extended period of time to Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
or rubbing against textiles. For this reason,
prevent battery discharge or connect an acces- allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
you also should not pull or push the battery
sory battery charge unit expressly approved by skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model to main- over carpets or other synthetic materials.
flush affected area with water and seek
tain the battery charge. Contact an authorized Never touch the battery first. First touch the
medical help if necessary.
Mercedes-Benz Center for further information. outside body of the vehicle in order to re-
lease any possible electrostatic charges. 컄컄
693
Practical hints
Batteries
컄컄
Do not rub the battery with rags or cloths. i Remove SmartKey from starter switch (vehi- Disconnecting starter battery
cles with KEYLESS-GO*: Make sure the vehicle’s
The battery could explode if touched due to
electrostatic charge or due to spark forma-
on-board electronics have status 0) ! Always disconnect the starter battery in the
(컄 page 344) when you turn off the engine and order described below. You could otherwise
tion. no longer require any electrical consumers. The damage the vehicle’s electronics.
vehicle then uses very little power and the con-
! Switch off the engine and switch off the ve- sumer battery is spared. ! Switch off the vehicle’s internal electrical
hicle’s internal electrical functions (컄 page 695) functions before disconnecting the starter bat-
before you disconnect or remove the battery’s tery. If the vehicle is stationary for more than one
terminal clamps. You could otherwise destroy hour with the SmartKey removed, you do not
electronic assemblies such as the generator. need to switch off the vehicle’s internal electrical
functions.
Have the battery checked regularly by an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center. Refer to Mainte- 왘 Secure vehicle in place with electronic
nance Booklet for maintenance intervals or parking brake (컄 page 395).
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
further information. 왘 Shift the automatic transmission to P
(컄 page 399).
! Do not connect any consumers directly to
the starter battery. The starter battery will other-
wise be discharged. Starter battery (example illustration from
S 550)
i Only replace a discharged battery with a bat- 1 Negative terminal
tery recommended by Mercedes-Benz. The con- 2 Positive terminal
sumer battery is installed in the trunk in such a
way that it is safeguarded as much as possible i If the consumer battery is discharged, you
against mechanical destruction in the event of must use the mechanical key to unlock the vehi-
an accident. cle (컄 page 671). Since the vehicle has a sepa-
rate starter battery, however, you can still start
the vehicle.
694
Practical hints
Batteries
Switching off vehicle’s internal Disconnecting starter battery Charging battery

electrical functions
i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the 왘 Use a 10-mm open-end wrench to dis- Warning! G
KEYLESS-GO button (컄 page 345) and use the
connect the battery negative lead.
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO like a normal
Never charge a battery while still installed in
SmartKey. 왘 Remove cover 2 (컄 page 694) from
the vehicle unless the accessory battery
왘 Turn off all electrical consumers. the positive terminal.
charge unit approved by Mercedes-Benz is
왘 Turn SmartKey in starter switch to po- 왘 Disconnect the battery positive lead. being used. Gases may escape during charg-
sition 0. ing and cause explosions that may result in
Removing starter battery paint damage, corrosion or personal injury.
왘 Turn SmartKey in starter switch to po-
sition 1. An accessory battery charge unit specially
i For your convenience, have the starter bat- adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and
왘 Wait for 30 seconds. tery removed by a Mercedes-Benz Center.
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is
The vehicle’s internal electrical func- 왘 Pull out the battery ventilation hose available, permitting the charging of the bat-
tions are switched off. from the battery (depending on battery tery in its installed position. Contact an au-
arrangement in your vehicle model, the thorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
왘 Turn SmartKey in starter switch to po- ventilation hose is located either on the information and availability. Charge battery
sition 0. left or right side of the battery). in accordance with the separate instruc-
! Do not remove the SmartKey! 왘 Fold bar on starter battery up. tions for the accessory battery charger.
왘 Take out the starter battery.

i Have the batteries charged by a
Mercedes-Benz Center. If you charge the batter-
ies yourself, follow the operating instructions for
your charging device.
695
Practical hints
Batteries
! Only use charging devices with a maximum Reinstalling starter battery 왘 Make sure that the consumer battery in
charging voltage of 14.8 V. the trunk is correctly installed and con-
왘 Install starter battery in engine com- nected.
Starter battery partment.
왘 Turn SmartKey in starter switch to po-
왘 Swing retaining bar down. sition 0 and remove.
Warning! G ! The battery and the battery ventilation hose 왘 Connect the positive lead and fasten its
must always be securely installed when the vehi- cover 2 (컄 page 694).
During the charge procedure, there is a risk cle is in operation.
of acid burns due to gases escaping from 왘 Connect negative lead 1
the battery. Do not bend over the battery Reconnecting starter battery (컄 page 694).
during the charge procedure. 왘 Attach ventilation tube.
! Always connect the starter battery in the or-
왘 Connect the switched-off charging de- der described below. Otherwise, the vehicle’s ! Never invert the terminal connections.
electronics could be damaged.
vice to the terminals of the starter bat- ! Make sure that the battery has a plug where
tery. Observe the operating the ventilation tube is attached to it.
instructions in the manual for the Warning! G 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 344).
charging device while doing so.
Do not drive without a properly installed and 왘 Start the engine (컄 page 389).
connected consumer battery. 왘 Check vehicle functions.
Have any work on the consumer battery car-
ried out by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
696
Practical hints
Jump starting
왔 Jump starting
! Do not tow-start the vehicle. If the starter battery is discharged, the en-
Warning! G gine can be started with jumper cables and
! Jump starting should only be performed on the battery of another vehicle. Observe the
Failure to follow these directions will cause the starter battery installed in the engine com-
following:
damage to the electronic components, and partment.
can lead to a battery explosion and severe Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. 앫 Jump starting should only be performed
injury or death. when the engine and catalytic convert-
Do not attempt to start the engine using a bat-
tery quick charge unit. er are cold.
Never lean over batteries while connecting
or jump starting, you might get injured. If engine does not run after several unsuccessful 앫 Do not start the engine if the battery is
starting attempts, have it checked at the nearest frozen. Let the battery thaw out first.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, 앫 Only use 12-volt battery to jump start
Excessive unburned fuel generated by repeated your vehicle. Jump starting with a high-
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately failed starting attempts may damage the catalyt-
flush affected area with water, and seek er voltage battery could damage the ve-
ic converter and may present a fire risk.
medical help if necessary. hicle’s electrical system, which will not
Make sure the jumper cables do not have loose be covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lim-
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, or missing insulation.
ited Warranty.
which is flammable and very explosive. Keep Make sure the cable clamps do not touch any
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid other metal part while the other end is still at- 앫 Only use jumper cables with sufficient
improper connection of jumper cables, tached to a battery. cross-section and insulated terminal
smoking, etc. clamps.
Attempting to jump start a frozen battery 앫 Always make sure that the jumper ca-
can result in it exploding, causing personal bles are not on or near pulleys, fans or
injury. other parts that move when an engine
Read all instructions before proceeding. is started or running.
697
Practical hints
Jump starting
왘 Make sure the two vehicles do not

Warning! G touch.
Keep flames or sparks away from battery. 왘 Secure vehicle in place with electronic
Do not smoke. parking brake (컄 page 395).
Observe all safety instructions and precau- 왘 Shift the automatic transmission to P
tions when handling automotive batteries (컄 page 399).
(컄 page 692). 왘 Turn off all electrical consumers, ex-
cept hazard warning flashers or work
Jump starting should only be performed on lights.
1 Positive terminal of your vehicle’s
the starter battery. The starter battery is 왘 Open the hood (컄 page 541). battery
located in the engine compartment on the
왘 Start the engine of the vehicle with the 2 Positive terminal of other vehicle’s
passenger side (컄 page 694).
charged battery and run at idle speed. battery
i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: remove the 3 Negative terminal of other vehicle’s
KEYLESS-GO button (컄 page 345) and use the battery
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO like a normal 4 Negative clamp
SmartKey.
698
Practical hints
Jump starting
왘 Remove red cover from positive 왘 Get into vehicle and start engine within 왘 While the engine is running, switch off
terminal 1. 30 seconds. several electrical consumers such as
왘 Connect positive terminal 2 of the If the starting attempt does not suc- the blower.
charged battery with positive ceed: 왘 Disconnect jumper cables first from
terminal 1 of the discharged battery ground point 4 and negative
왘 Turn the SmartKey in starter switch
with the jumper cable. Clamp cable to terminal 3, then from positive
to position 0.
charged battery 2 first. terminals 1 and 2.
왘 Take out the SmartKey.
! Never invert the terminal connections. 왘 Have the battery checked at the near-
왘 Turn off engine of donor vehicle, re- est authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘 Connect negative terminal 3 of start it and let it run at idle speed
charged battery to jumper cables and for several minutes.
attach other end 4 to a suitable
ground point on the vehicle. 왘 Disconnect the jumper cable during
this time.
왘 Reconnect jumper cable as de-
scribed before.
왘 Restart engine.
699
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Mercedes-Benz recommends that the ! Vehicles with 4MATIC:

vehicle be transported with all wheels off Do not tow with one axle raised. Doing so could Warning! G
the ground using flatbed or appropriate damage the transfer case, which is not covered
wheel lift/dolly equipment. This method is by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. If circumstances require towing the vehicle
preferable to other types of towing. All wheels must be on or off the ground. Observe with all wheels on the ground, always tow
instructions for towing the vehicle with all with a tow bar if:
When circumstances do not permit the wheels on the ground.
recommended towing methods, the 앫 the engine will not run
vehicle may be towed with all wheels on ! Use flatbed or wheel lift/dolly equipment 앫 there is a malfunction in the brake
the ground or front wheels raised (except with SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* system
vehicles with 4MATIC) only so far as neces- in starter switch turned to position 0.
앫 there is a malfunction in the power
sary to have the vehicle moved to a safe Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Towing supply or in the vehicle’s electrical
location where the recommended towing with sling-type equipment over bumpy roads will system
damage radiator and supports.
methods can be employed. This is necessary to adequately control the
To prevent damage during transport, do not tie
towed vehicle.
! Do not tow-start the vehicle. down vehicle by its chassis or suspension parts.
Switch off the ESP® (컄 page 73) and the auto- Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on
matic central locking (컄 page 245). the ground, make sure the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is in starter
! Towing of the vehicle should only be done switch position 2.
using the properly installed towing eye bolt.
Never attach tow cable, tow rope or tow rod to
vehicle chassis, frame or suspension parts.
700
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
! Make sure that the electronic parking brake ! When towing the vehicle with all wheels on
Warning! G is released. If the electronic parking brake is the ground or the front axle raised, the vehicle
malfunctioning, release it mechanically may be towed only for distances up to 30 miles
With the engine not running, there is no (컄 page 673). (50 km) and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph
power assistance for the brake and steering (50 km/h).
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
! If the vehicle is towed with the front axle
raised (not permissible for vehicles with ! If the vehicle is towed, the transmission
in mind that a considerably higher degree of 4MATIC), the automatic transmission must be in must be in neutral position N.
effort is necessary to brake and steer the position N and the engine must be shut off If you turn off the engine using
vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly. (SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* in
starter switch position 0 or 1). Active braking 앫 the SmartKey and
action through the ESP® may otherwise seriously 앫 remove the SmartKey from the starter
! When towing the vehicle with all wheels on damage the brake system. switch
the ground or with the front axle raised, the start-
er battery must be connected and charged. Oth- When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the or
erwise: ground, the automatic transmission must be
앫 open a front door
shifted to neutral position N and the SmartKey
앫 you will not be able to switch on the ignition or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* must be in start- 앫 the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button and
앫 you will not be able to engage the automatic er switch position 2. open a front door
transmission in neutral position N the transmission will shift to park position P
(컄 page 402) automatically.
앫 you cannot release the electronic parking
brake
For information on charging the starter battery
see “Batteries” (컄 page 692) or see “Jump start-
ing” (컄 page 697).
701
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
If you want the gear position to remain in Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: i When towing the vehicle with all wheels on
neutral position N, observe the following the ground, please note the following:
왘 With the vehicle at a standstill, depress
instructions. With the automatic central locking activated and
the brake pedal and keep it pressed.
the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* in
왘 Shift the automatic transmission to starter switch position 2, the vehicle doors lock
Warning! G park position P. if the left front wheel as well as the right rear
wheel are turning at vehicle speeds of approxi-
When leaving the SmartKey or SmartKey 왘 Release the brake pedal. mately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more.
with KEYLESS-GO* in the starter switch, do 왘 Remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop To prevent the vehicle doors from locking,
not leave children unattended in the vehicle. button from the starter switch deactivate the automatic central locking
It is possible for children to switch on the (컄 page 345). (컄 page 245).
ignition which could result in unsupervised
use of vehicle equipment. Unsupervised use 왘 Insert the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO i To signal turns while being towed with the
of vehicle equipment could result in an into the starter switch. hazard warning flasher in use, turn SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* in starter switch to
accident and/or serious personal injury. 왘 With the ignition switched on shift the position 2 and activate the combination switch
automatic transmission to neutral for the left or right turn signal in the usual
Vehicles with SmartKey: position N. manner – only the selected turn signal will
operate.
왘 With the vehicle at a standstill and the 왘 If engaged, manually release the
electronic parking brake (컄 page 395). Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard
ignition switched on shift the warning flasher will operate again.
automatic transmission to neutral 왘 Switch off the ignition and leave the
position N. SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO in the
왘 If engaged, manually release the starter switch.
electronic parking brake (컄 page 395).
왘 Switch off the ignition and leave the
SmartKey in the starter switch.
702
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Installing towing eye bolt Removing cover Removing towing eye bolt
왘 Press mark on cover 1 in the direction 왘 Loosen towing eye bolt counterclock-
of arrow. wise with wheel wrench.
왘 Lift cover off to reveal the threaded 왘 Unscrew towing eye bolt.
hole for towing eye bolt.
왘 Store towing eye bolt and wheel
wrench in the vehicle tool kit in the
Installing towing eye bolt
trunk.
왘 Take towing eye bolt and wheel wrench
out of the vehicle tool kit in the trunk Installing cover
(컄 page 668).
왘 Fit cover 1 and snap into place.
1 Cover on right side of front bumper 왘 Screw towing eye bolt clockwise into
its stop and tighten with wheel wrench.
1 Cover on right side of rear bumper
703
Practical hints
Fuses
The electrical fuses in your vehicle serve to i A blown fuse must be replaced by an appro- i Should your vehicle not be equipped with a
switch off malfunctioning power circuits. priate spare fuse (recognizable by its color or the fuse extractor or spare fuses please contact a
fuse rating given on the fuse) of the amperage Mercedes-Benz Center or Roadside Assistance
If a fuse is blown, the component(s) and recommended in the fuse chart. in case of a blown fuse.
systems secured by that fuse will stop op- Any Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad to advise
erating. you on this subject. The electrical fuses are located in different
fuse boxes:
If a newly inserted fuse blows again, have
Warning! G the cause determined and rectified by an 앫 in the dashboard on the passenger side
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. (컄 page 706)
Only use fuses approved by Mercedes-Benz 앫 in the dashboard on the driver’s side
with the specified amperage for the system
A fuse chart explains the fuse allocation
and fuse amperages. It is located in the (컄 page 706)
in question and do not attempt to repair or
bridge a blown fuse. Using other than ap-
trunk with the vehicle tool kit 앫 behind the rear center armrest
proved fuses or using repaired or bridged
(컄 page 668). (컄 page 707)
fuses may cause an overload leading to a Depending on vehicle production date, the 앫 on the driver’s side of the engine com-
fire, and/or cause damage to electrical following aids are available to help you re- partment (컄 page 705)
components and/or systems. Have the place fuses. If so equipped, they are locat-
앫 on the passenger side of the engine
cause determined and remedied by an ed in the trunk with the vehicle tool kit
compartment (컄 page 706)
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. (컄 page 668):
앫 Spare fuses
! Switch off the vehicle’s internal electrical 앫 Fuse extractor
functions (컄 page 695) when you are working on
the fuses.
704
Practical hints
Fuses
Before replacing fuses: Fuse boxes in engine compartment Opening

왘 Engage the electronic parking brake 왘 Take the crank from the Operator’s
(컄 page 395). Manual pouch.
왘 Make sure the automatic transmission Box on the driver’s side 왘 Loosen screws 1 with crank.
is set to P (컄 page 399).
왘 Remove jumper 3.
The gear position indicator in the multi-
왘 Remove cover 2.
function display should be on P.
왘 Turn off all electrical consumers. Closing
왘 Turn off the engine (컄 page 397). 왘 Attach cover 2.
왘 Switch off the vehicle’s internal electri- 왘 Attach jumper 3.
cal functions (컄 page 695).
왘 Tighten screws 1 with crank.
Example illustration from S 550

! The cover must fit properly, as otherwise
moisture or dirt may impair the functionality of
1 4 screws the fuses.
2 Cover
3 Jumper
705
Practical hints
Fuses
Box on the front passenger side ! The cover must fit properly, as otherwise
moisture or dirt may impair the functionality of
the fuses.
Fuse boxes in passenger compartment
! Do not use sharp objects such as a screw

driver to open the fuse box cover in the dash-
board, as this could damage it.
Fuse boxes in dashboard 1 Cover

Example illustration from S 550
1 Retaining lugs Opening
2 Cover 왘 Open the respective door.
Opening 왘 Using your hands, pull cover 1 in the

direction of the arrow and remove.
왘 Press retaining lugs 1.
왘 Remove cover 2. Closing
왘 Hook cover 1 into the opening at the
Closing front.
1 Cover
왘 Attach cover 2. 왘 Press cover 1 back on until it engag-
왘 Press cover 2 down manually. es.
706
Practical hints
Fuses
Fuse box in the rear passenger Opening Emergency engine shut-down

compartment 왘 Swing down center armrest.
If the engine cannot be turned off as de-
왘 Open cover behind center armrest. scribed in the “Turning off the engine” sec-
왘 Pull cover 1 forward in direction of ar- tion (컄 page 397), you may use the
row. following emergency procedure.
왘 Take the fuse chart and the fuse extrac-
Closing tor (if equipped, depending on vehicle
왘 Press cover 1 backward and engage. production date) from the vehicle from
the vehicle tool kit (컄 page 668).
! Make sure that the seal in the cover is not 왘 Find row “Emergency engine
damaged during opening or closing.
1 Cover shut-down” in the fuse chart table to
identify the fuses that have to removed
as well as their locations.
왘 Remove the respective fuses.
707
708
Technical data
Parts service
Warranty coverage
Identification labels
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
Engine
Rims and tires
Electrical system
Main dimensions and weights
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
709
Technical data
Parts service
The “Technical data” section provides the All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers ! The use of non-genuine Mercedes-Benz
necessary technical data for your vehicle. maintain a stock of Genuine parts and accessories not authorized by
Mercedes-Benz Parts required for mainte- Mercedes-Benz could damage the vehicle, which
nance and repair work. In addition, strate- is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
gically located parts distribution centers Warranty, or could compromise the vehicle’s du-
rability or safety.
provide quick and reliable parts service.
More than 300000 different parts for
Mercedes-Benz models are available.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts are subject-
ed to stringent quality inspections. Each
part has been specifically developed, man-
ufactured or selected for and adapted to
Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Therefore, Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
should be installed.
710
Technical data
Warranty coverage
왔 Warranty coverage
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of Replacement parts and accessories are Loss of Service and Warranty
the warranties printed in the Service and covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Information Booklet
Warranty Information booklet. Your autho- Accessories warranties, copies of which
rized Mercedes-Benz Center will exchange are available at any authorized Should you lose your Service and Warranty
or repair any defective parts originally in- Mercedes-Benz Center. Information booklet, have an authorized
stalled on the vehicle in accordance with Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a re-
the terms of the following warranties: placement. It will be mailed to you.
앫 New Vehicle Limited Warranty
앫 Emission System Warranty
앫 Emission Performance Warranty
앫 California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont Emission Control Systems
Warranty
711
Technical data
1 Certification label (on driver’s B-pillar) Example certification label (U.S. vehicles) Example certification label
(Canada vehicles)
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 2 VIN
can be found in the following locations: 3 Paintwork code 2 VIN
3 Paintwork code
앫 on the certification label
i Data shown on certification label are for il-
앫 embossed underneath a cover in the lustration purposes only. These data are specific
rear center armrest to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in
the illustration. Refer to certification label on ve-
앫 on the lower edge of the windshield hicle for actual data specific to your vehicle.
712
Technical data
4 VIN Example illustration

(all models except S 63 AMG and
왘 Fold down rear center armrest. S 65 AMG)
VIN 4 is underneath a cover in the 5 Engine number (engraved on engine)
center armrest. 6 VIN (lower edge of windshield)
7 Emission control information label, S 63 AMG and S 65 AMG
includes both federal and California 5 Engine number (engraved on engine)
certification exhaust emission 6 VIN (lower edge of windshield)
standards 7 Emission control information label,
Vacuum line routing diagram label includes both federal and California
i When ordering parts, please specify vehicle certification exhaust emission
identification and engine numbers. standards
Vacuum line routing diagram label
713
Technical data
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
S 550 S 63 AMG S 600 and S 65 AMG
1 Idler pulley 1 Idler pulley 1 Automatic belt tensioner

2 Idler pulley 2 Idler pulley 2 ABC tandem pump (pump for
3 Automatic belt tensioner 3 Idler pulley power-steering assistance and ABC
4 ABC* tandem pump (pump for 4 Automatic belt tensioner chassis)
power-steering assistance and ABC* 5 Power steering pump 3 Air conditioning compressor
chassis) 6 Air conditioning compressor 4 Crankshaft
5 Air conditioning compressor 7 Crankshaft 5 Coolant pump
6 Crankshaft 8 Coolant pump 6 Generator (alternator)
7 Coolant pump 9 Generator (alternator) 7 Idler pulley
8 Generator (alternator) 8 Idler pulley
9 Idler pulley
714
Technical data
Engine
왔 Engine
Model S 550 (221.171) 1 S 550 4MATIC (221.186) 1
Engine 273 273
Mode of operation 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders 8 8
Bore 3.86 in (98.00 mm) 3.86 in (98.00 mm)
Stroke 3.56 in (90.50 mm) 3.56 in (90.50 mm)
Total piston displacement 333.3 cu in (5461 cm3) 333.3 cu in (5461 cm3)
Compression ratio 10.7:1 10.5:1
2
Output acc. to SAE J 1349 382 hp/6000 rpm 382 hp/6000 rpm
(285 kW/6000 rpm) (285 kW/6000 rpm)
Maximum torque 391 lb-ft/3000 rpm 391 lb-ft/2800 - 4800 rpm
acc. to SAE J 1349 (530 Nm/3000 rpm) (530 Nm/2800 - 4800 rpm)
Maximum engine speed 6500 rpm 6500 rpm
Firing order 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Poly-V-belt 2404 mm 2404 mm
1
The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special
bodies and special equipment.
2
Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
715
Technical data
Engine
Model S 600 (221.176) 1 S 63 AMG (221.077) 1

Engine 275 156
Mode of operation 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders 12 8
Bore 3.23 in (82.00 mm) 4.02 in (102.20 mm)
Stroke 3.43 in (87.00 mm) 3.72 in (94.60 mm)
Total piston displacement 336.4 cu in (5513 cm3) 378.8 cu in (6208 cm3)
Compression ratio 9:1 11.0:1
2
Output acc. to SAE J 1349 510 hp/5000 rpm 518 hp/6800 rpm
(380 kW/5000 rpm) (386 kW/6800 rpm)
Maximum torque 612 lb-ft/1800 - 3500 rpm 465 lb-ft/5200 rpm
acc. to SAE J 1349 (830 Nm/1800 - 3500 rpm) (630 Nm/5200 rpm)
Maximum engine speed 5950 rpm 7200 rpm
Firing order 1-12-5-8-3-10-6-7-2-11-4-9 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Poly-V-belt 2 370 mm 2 360 mm
1
The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special
bodies and special equipment.
2
716
Technical data
Engine
Model S 65 AMG (221.179) 1

Engine 275
Mode of operation 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders 12
Bore 3.25 in (82.60 mm)
Stroke 3.66 in (93.00 mm)
Total piston displacement 364.9 cu in (5980 cm3)
Compression ratio 9:1
2
Output acc. to SAE J 1349 603 hp/4750 - 5100 rpm
(450 kW/4750 - 5100 rpm)
Maximum torque 738 lb-ft/2000 - 4000 rpm
acc. to SAE J 1349 (1000 Nm/2000 - 4000 rpm)
Maximum engine speed 5950 rpm
Firing order 1-12-5-8-3-10-6-7-2-11-4-9
Poly-V-belt 2370 mm
1
The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment.
2
717
Technical data
Rims and tires
! Only use tires which have been tested and ! Using tires other than those approved by The tire inflation pressure should be checked
approved by Mercedes-Benz. Tires approved by Mercedes-Benz can have detrimental effects, regularly and should only be adjusted on cold
Mercedes-Benz are developed to provide best such as tires. Follow tire manufacturer’s maintenance
possible performance in conjunction with the recommendation included with vehicle.
앫 poor handling characteristics
driving safety systems on your vehicle such as
ABS or ESP®. Tires specially developed for your 앫 increased noise i The following pages also list the approved
wheel rim and tire sizes for equipping your vehi-
vehicle and tested and approved by 앫 increased fuel consumption cles with winter tires. Winter tires are not avail-
Mercedes-Benz can be identified by finding the able as standard or optional factory equipment,
Moreover, tires and rims not approved by
following on the tire’s sidewall: but can be purchased from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz may, under load, exhibit dimen-
앫 MO = Mercedes-Benz Original equipment sional variations and different tire deformation Mercedes-Benz Center.
tires characteristics that could cause them to come Depending on vehicle model and the standard or
S 63 AMG and S 65 AMG: into contact with the vehicle body or axle parts. optional factory-equipped wheel rim/tire config-
Does not apply to all approved tires on AMG Damage to the tires or the vehicle may be the uration on your vehicle (Appearance Package,
vehicles. For information on tested and result. Sport Package etc.), equipping your vehicle with
approved tires for AMG vehicles, contact an winter tires approved for your vehicle model may
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. i Further information on tires and rims is also require the purchase of two or four wheel
available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Using tires other than those approved by rims of the recommended size for use with these
Center. A placard with the recommended tire in-
Mercedes-Benz may result in damage that is not winter tires. Contact an authorized
flation pressures is located on the driver’s door
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Mercedes-Benz Center for more information.
B-pillar (컄 page 553). Some vehicles may have
Warranty. supplemental tire inflation pressure information
for driving at high speeds (컄 page 559) or for ve-
hicle loads less than the maximum loaded
vehicle condition (컄 page 568). If such informa-
tion is provided, it can be found on the placard lo-
cated on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
718
Technical data
Rims and tires
Same size tires
Model S 550 S 600 S 63 AMG

S 550 4MATIC S 550 (Sport Package*) S 65 AMG
S 600 (Sport Package*)
Rims (light alloy) 8.5 J x18 H2 8.5 J x18 H2 8.5 J x19 H2
Wheel offset 1.69 in (43 mm) 1.69 in (43 mm) 1.69 in (43 mm)
1
All-season tires 255/45 R18 99H M+S – –
Winter tires 1,2,3 255/45 R18 99H M+S. 255/45 R18 99H M+S. 255/40 R19 100V XL (Extra Load) M+S.
1
Radial-ply tires.
2 For use with snow chains contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
3
Not available as factory equipment.
719
Technical data
Rims and tires
Mixed size tires
Model S 600 S 550* S 550 (Sport Package*) S 63 AMG*

S 600* S 600 (Sport Package*) S 65 AMG*
Front axle:
Rims (light alloy) 8.5 J x 18 H2 8.5 J x 19 H2 – –
AMG rims (light alloy) – – 8.5 J x 19 H2 8.5 J x 20 H2
Wheel offset 1.69 in (43 mm) 1.69 in (43 mm) 1.69 in (43 mm) 1.69 in (43 mm)
1
Summer tires 255/45 R18 99V 255/40 R19 96Y 255/40 R19 96Y 255/35 ZR20 XL (Extra
Load)
Rear axle:
Rims (light alloy) 9.5 J x 18 H2 9.5 J x 19 H2 – –
AMG rims (light alloy) – – 9.5 J x 19 H2 9.5 J x 20 H2
Wheel offset 1.69 in (43 mm) 1.69 in (43 mm) 1.69 in (43 mm) 1.69 in (43 mm)
Summer tires1 275/45 R18 103V 275/40 R19 101Y 275/40 R19 101Y 275/35 ZR20 XL (Extra
Load)2
1
Radial-ply tires.
2 Must not be used with snow chains.
720
Technical data
Rims and tires
Spare wheel
! Please compare the recommended tire in- i Please note that the tire inflation pressure of
flation pressure for your vehicle with the tire in- the spare tire differs from the tire inflation pres-
flation pressure on the yellow label located on sure of the road tires.
the spare wheel rim.
If the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label
on the spare wheel rim differs from the values
given in this Operator’s Manual, inflate the spare
wheel tire to the recommended tire inflation
pressure given on the yellow label on the spare
wheel rim.
Model S 550 S 550 (Sport Package*) S 63 AMG

S 600 S 600 (Sport Package*) S 65 AMG
Rim (steel) 4.5 B x 19 4.5 B x 19 –
Rim (light alloy) – – 4.5 B x 19 H2
Wheel offset 1.38 in (35 mm) 1.38 in (35 mm) 1.38 in (35 mm)
1
Minispare tire T 155/70 R19 113M T 155/70 R19 113M T 155/70 R19 113M
Recommended tire inflation pressure 61 psi (4.2 bar) 61 psi (4.2 bar) 61 psi (4.2 bar)
1
Must not be used with snow chains.
721
Technical data
Electrical system
Model S 550 S 600 S 63 AMG S 65 AMG

S 550 4MATIC
Generator (alternator) 14 V/180 A 14 V/220 A 14 V/220 A 14 V/220 A
Starter motor 12 V/1.7 kW 12 V/1.7 kW 12 V/2.1 kW 12 V/1.7 kW
Starter battery 12 V/35 Ah 12 V/35 Ah 12 V/35 Ah 12 V/35 Ah
Electrical consumer 12 V/95 Ah 12 V/95 Ah 12 V/95 Ah 12 V/95 Ah
battery
Spark plugs NGK PLKR 6A NGK IFR 6Q-G –1 NGK IFR 6Q-G
Bosch Y 7 MPP 33
Electrode gap 0.031 in (0.8 mm) 0.028 in (0.7 mm) 0.039 in (1.0 mm) 0.028 in (0.7 mm)
Tightening torque 15 – 18 lb-ft (20 – 25 Nm) 18 – 22 lb-ft (25 – 30 Nm) 15 – 18 lb-ft (20 – 25 Nm) 15 – 22 lb-ft (20 – 30 Nm)
1
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
722
Technical data
Main dimensions and weights
왔 Main dimensions and weights
Main dimensions
Model S 550 (221.171)

S 550 4MATIC (221.186)
S 600 (221.176)
S 63 AMG (221.077)
S 65 AMG (221.179)
Overall vehicle length 205.0 in (5210 mm)
Overall vehicle width (exterior rear view mirrors folded out) 83.2 in (2113 mm)
Overall vehicle width (exterior rear view mirrors folded in) 73.7 in (1871 mm)
Overall vehicle height 58.0 in (1473 mm)
Wheelbase 124.6 in (3165 mm)
Track, front 63.2 in (1604 mm)
Track, rear 63.3 in (1606 mm)
Weights
Max. roof load 220 lb (100 kg)

Max. trunk load 220 lb (100 kg)
723
Technical data
Capacities
For health reasons, you should prevent ser-
Warning! G vice fluids from coming into direct contact
Vehicle components and their respective
Comply with all valid regulations with re- with your skin or clothing.
lubricants must match. Therefore use only
products tested and approved by spect to handling, storing and disposing of If a service fluid is swallowed, contact a phy-
Mercedes-Benz. service fluids. Otherwise you could endan- sician immediately.
ger persons or the environment.
Please refer to the Factory Approved
Service Products pamphlet (USA only), or Keep service fluids out of the reach of chil-
inquire at an authorized Mercedes-Benz dren.
Center.
Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Engine with oil filter S 550 8.98 US qt. (8.5 l) Approved engine oils
S 550 4MATIC
S 600 9.51 US qt. (9.0 l)
S 63 AMG 9.25 US qt. (8.75 l)
S 65 AMG 9.51 US qt. (9.0 l)
Automatic transmission S 550 10.36 US qt. (9.8 l) MB Automatic Transmission Fluid
S 550 4MATIC
S 600 8.14 US qt. (7.7 l)
S 63 AMG 9.25 US qt. (8.75 l)
S 65 AMG 9.2 US qt. (8.7 l)
724
Technical data

Rear axle S 550 1.27 US qt. (1.2 l) Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90
S 550 4MATIC
S 600 2.11 US qt. (2.0 l)
S 63 AMG 1.27 US qt. (1.2 l) Fuchs Titan EG 5010 D
S 65 AMG 1.69 US qt. (1.6 l)
Hydraulic system ABC* All models 4.2 US qt. (4.0 l) MB ABC Fluid
Power steering S 550 approx. 1.06 US qt. (1.0 l) MB Power Steering Fluid
S 550 4MATIC (Chevron Texaco PSF 9109)1
S 600 approx. 1.27 US qt. (1.2 l)
S 63 AMG approx. 1.06 US qt. (1.0 l)
S 65 AMG approx. 1.27 US qt. (1.2 l)
Front wheel hubs All models approx. 3.6 oz. (95 g) each High-temperature roller bearing
grease
Brake system All models approx. 0.53 US qt. (0.5 l) MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4+)
1
For detailed information, please refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet (USA only) or contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
725
Technical data

Cooling Vehicles without rear passen- S 550 12.15 US qt. (11.5 l) MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
system ger compartment climate con- S 550 4MATIC
trol*
Vehicles with rear passenger S 550 13.9 US qt. (13.15 l)
compartment climate control* S 550 4MATIC
S 600 14.69 US qt. (13.9 l)
S 63 AMG 11.83 US qt. (11.2 l)
S 65 AMG 14.69 US qt. (13.9 l)
Low temperature cooling system S 600 2.75 US qt. (2.6 l) MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
S 65 AMG 3.28 US qt. (3.1 l)
Fuel tank All models 23.78 US gal (90.0 l) Premium unleaded gasoline:
including a reserve of S 550 2.9 US gal (11.0 l) Minimum Posted Octane 91
S 550 4MATIC (Avg. of 96 RON/86 MON)
S 600 2.9 US gal (11.0 l)

S 63 AMG 3.7 US gal (14.0 l)
S 65 AMG 3.7 US gal (14.0 l)
726
Technical data

Air conditioning system All models R-134a refrigerant and special PAG
lubricant oil (never R-12)
Windshield washer All models approx. 6.87 US qt (6.5 l) MB Windshield Washer Concentrate1
1
Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” and water for temperatures above freezing or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” and
commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing point. Follow suggested mixing ratios (컄 page 733).
727
Technical data
Engine oils Engine oil additives Brake fluid
Engine oils are specifically tested for their ! Do not blend oil additives with engine oil.
suitability in our engines and durability for They may damage the engine. Damage or mal- Warning! G
our service intervals. Therefore, only use functions resulting from blending oil additives
approved engine oils and oil filters are not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited During vehicle operation, the boiling point of
required for vehicles with Maintenance Warranty. the brake fluid is continuously reduced
System. For a listing of approved engine through the absorption of moisture from the
oils and oil filters, refer to the Factory Air conditioning refrigerant atmosphere.
Approved Service Products pamphlet Under extremely strenuous operating condi-
R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG
(USA only), or contact an authorized tions, this moisture content can lead to the
lubricating oil are used in the air condition-
Mercedes-Benz Center. formation of bubbles in the system, thus re-
ing system.
! Using engine oils and oil filters of ducing the system’s efficiency.
specification other than those expressly ! Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based lu- Therefore, the brake fluid must be replaced
required for the Maintenance System, or chang- bricating oil. Otherwise damage to the system
will occur. regularly. Refer to your vehicle’s Mainte-
ing of oil and oil filter at change intervals longer
nance Booklet for replacement interval.
than those called for by the Maintenance System
will result in engine or emission control system
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lim- Only brake fluid approved by
ited Warranty. Mercedes-Benz is recommended. Any au-
Please follow Maintenance System recommen- thorized Mercedes-Benz Center will pro-
dations for scheduled oil changes. Failure to do vide you with additional information.
so will result in engine or emission control sys-
tem damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
728
Technical data
Premium unleaded gasoline ! To maintain the engine’s durability and per- Fuel requirements
formance, premium unleaded gasoline must be
used. If premium unleaded gasoline is not avail- Only use premium unleaded fuel:
Warning! G able and low octane fuel is used, follow these
앫 The octane number (posted at the
precautions:
pump) must be 91 min. It is an average
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. 앫 Have the fuel tank only partially filled with
of both the Research Octane Number
It burns violently and can cause serious per- unleaded regular gasoline and fill up with
premium unleaded gasoline as soon as (RON) and the Motor Octane Number
sonal injury.
possible. (MON): (RON+MON)/2. This is also
Never allow sparks, flame or smoking mate- known as the ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
앫 Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceler-
rials near gasoline!
ation. Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates
Turn off the engine before refueling. 앫 Do not exceed an engine speed of 3000 rpm such as ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be
Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid in- if the vehicle is loaded with a light load such used provided the ratio of any one of these
haling fumes and skin or clothing contact, as two persons and no luggage. oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed
extinguish all smoking materials. 앫 Do not exceed 2/3 of maximum accelerator 10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%.
pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or
Direct skin contact with fuels and the inha- operating in mountainous terrain. The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not
lation of fuel vapors are damaging to your exceed 3% plus additional co-solvents.
health.
Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is
not allowed. Gasohol, which contains
10% ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline,
can be used.
These blends must also meet all other fuel
requirements, such as resistance to spark
knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.
729
Technical data
Gasoline additives In areas where carbon deposits may be en- Coolants

countered due to lack of availability of gas-
A major concern among engine manufac- olines which contains these additives, The engine coolant is a mixture of water
turers is carbon build-up caused by gaso- Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of and anticorrosion/antifreeze, which pro-
line. Mercedes-Benz recommends only the additives approved by us for use on vides:
use of quality gasoline containing additives Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Refer to the Fac- 앫 Corrosion protection
that prevent the build-up of carbon depos- tory Approved Service Products pamphlet
its. (USA only) or contact an authorized 앫 Freeze protection
After an extended period of using fuels Mercedes-Benz Center for a listing of ap- 앫 Boiling protection (by increasing the
without such additives, carbon deposits proved product(s). Follow directions on boiling point)
can build up especially on the intake valves product label.
The cooling system was filled at the factory
and in the combustion area, leading to en- Do not blend other fuel additives with fuel. with a coolant providing freeze protection
gine performance problems such as: This only results in unnecessary cost and to approximately -22°F (-30°C) and corro-
앫 Warm-up hesitation may be harmful to the engine operation. sion protection.
앫 Unstable idle ! Damage or malfunction resulting from poor ! Add premixed coolant solution only. Adding
fuel quality or from blending additional fuel addi- water and MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
앫 Knocking/pinging tives other than those tested and approved by us separately from each other, could cause engine
앫 Misfire for use on Mercedes-Benz vehicles are not cov- damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lim-
ered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. ited Warranty.
앫 Power loss
If the antifreeze mixture is effective to
-22°F (-30°C), the boiling point of the cool-
ant in the pressurized cooling system is
reached at approximately 266°F (130°C).
730
Technical data
The coolant solution must be used year If you use a solution that is more than 55% Anticorrosion/antifreeze
round to provide the necessary corrosion anticorrosion/antifreeze (freeze protec- Your vehicle contains a number of alumi-
protection and increase boil-over protection to approximately –49°F [–45°C]), the num parts. The use of aluminum compo-
tion. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for re- engine temperature will increase due to nents in motor vehicle engines
placement interval. the lower heat transfer capability of the so- necessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze
lution. Therefore, do not use more than
Coolant system design and coolant used coolant used in such engines be specifical-
this amount of anticorrosion/ antifreeze.
determine the replacement interval. The ly formulated to protect the aluminum
replacement interval published in the If the coolant level is low, water and parts. Failure to use such anticorrosion/
Maintenance Booklet is only applicable if MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze antifreeze coolant will result in a signifi-
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze solu- should be used to bring it up to the proper cantly shortened service life.
tion or other Mercedes-Benz approved level (have cooling system checked for
Therefore, the following product is strongly
products of equal specification are used to signs of leakage).
recommended for use in your vehicle:
renew the coolant concentration or bring it
The water in the cooling system must meet Mercedes-Benz 325.0 Anticorrosion/
back up to the proper level.
minimum requirements, which are usually Antifreeze agent.
For information on other Mercedes-Benz satisfied by normal drinking water. If you Before the start of the winter season (or
approved products of equal specification, are not sure about the water quality, con- once a year in hot southern regions), you
refer to the Factory Approved Service sult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze
Products pamphlet (USA only) or contact concentration checked. The coolant is also
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. regularly checked each time you bring your
To provide important corrosion protection, vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
the solution must be at least 50% anticor- Center for service.
rosion/antifreeze (equivalent to freeze
protection to approximately –35°F
[–37°C]).
731
Technical data
Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity
Model Approximate freeze protection

– 35°F (– 37°C) – 49°F (– 45°C)
S 550 Vehicles without rear passenger 6.08 US qt. (5.75 l) 6.71 US qt. (6.35 l)
S 550 4MATIC compartment climate control*
Vehicles with rear passenger com- 6.97 US qt. (6.60 l) 7.66 US qt. (7.25 l)
partment climate control*
S 600 (main cooling system) 7.34 US qt. (6.95 l) 8.08 US qt. (7.65 l)
S 600 (low temperature cooling system) 1.37 US qt. (1.3 l) 1.51 US qt. (1.43 l)
S 63 AMG 6.0 US qt. (5.6 l) 7.0 US qt. (6.16 l)
S 65 AMG (main cooling system) 7.4 US qt. (7.0 l) 8.14 US qt. (7.7 l)
S 65 AMG (low temperature cooling system) 1.64 US qt. (1.55 l) 1.81 US qt. (1.71 l)
732
Technical data
Windshield washer system and Windshield and headlamp washer fluid

headlamp cleaning system mixing ratio
For temperatures above freezing point, use
Both the windshield washer system and
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate
headlamp cleaning systems are supplied
“MB SummerFit” and water:
from the windshield washer reservoir.
앫 1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts
The windshield washer reservoir has a ca-
water
pacity of approximately 6.87 US qt (6.5 l).
(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to
왘 Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield
1 gal [4.0 l] water).
Washer Concentrate and water (or con-
centrate and commercially available For temperatures below freezing point, use
premixed windshield washer solvent/ MB Windshield Washer Concentrate
antifreeze, depending on ambient tem- “MB SummerFit” and commercially avail-
peratures). able premixed windshield washer sol-
vent/antifreeze:
Warning! G 앫 1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts
solvent
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flamma-
(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to
ble. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze
1 gal [4.0 l] solvent).
on hot engine parts, because it may ignite
and burn. You could be seriously burned.
733
734
Index
A Importing data 234 Air volume

ABC* 442 Making a call 231 Adjusting 472, 478
Messages in display 626 Menu overview 224 Adjusting (COMAND) 253
Setting vehicle level 443 Searching for an entry 226 Airmatic 440
ABS 66 Starting route guidance 231 Messages in display 642
Indicator lamp 29, 66, 598 Voice entry 232 Setting vehicle level 441
Messages in display 628 Address book (Voice Control*) 306 Alarm
Accelerator position, automatic ADS (Airmatic) 440 Audible alarm and flashing exterior
transmission 406 Air bags 42 lamps (Panic alarm) 65
Accessory weight 576 Children 57 Alarm system see Anti-theft alarm system
Accident 394 Front 45 Alignment bolt (vehicle tool kit) 668, 689
Active headlamps 371 Front passenger front air bag Ambient lighting
Adaptive Brake Lights indicator lamp 50 COMAND menu 247
(S 600 and USA only) 68 OCS 47 AMG menu (Control system
Adaptive Damping System Safety guidelines 44 instrument cluster) 273
(Airmatic) 440 Side impact 46 AMG vehicles
Additional turn signals 679 Window curtain 46 Manual shift program mode 413
Address book (COMAND) 224 Air conditioning, Refrigerant 727, 728 Antiglare
Calling up 224 Air distribution Rear view mirrors 363
Changing an entry 229 Adjusting 478 Anti-theft systems 81
Creating an entry 225 Adjusting (COMAND) 253 Alarm, visual and audible 81
Deleting an entry 226 Air pressure 576 Anti-theft alarm system 81
Details about an entry 228 Air pressure see Tire inflation pressure Immobilizer 81
Displaying details about an entry in the Air recirculation mode 474 Aquaplaning see Hydroplaning
phone book on the mobile Air vents 468 Armrest 495, 496
phone 229
735
Index
Ashtrays 503 Central climate control menu Automatic transmission

Aspect ratio 576 (COMAND) 254 Accelerator position 406
Audio (COMAND) 112 Central menu for rear climate control* Automatic shift program 409
CD mode 120 (COMAND) 257 Emergency operation
DVD mode 120 Defrosting 472 (limp-home mode) 416
MP3 mode 120 Operating the rear climate control* Fluid 724
Audio (Control system from the front 257 Fluid level 546
instrument cluster) 271 Operating via COMAND 251 Gear ranges 408
CD changer 272 Rear window defroster 473 Gear selector lever 399
CD/DVD changer 272 Selecting Mono mode Gear shifting malfunctions 416
DVD changer 272 (COMAND) 255 Hill start assist system 407
Audio DVD Setting temperature (COMAND) 252 Kickdown 406
Fast forward/rewind (COMAND) 122 Setting the temperature 472 Kickdown, manual shift program
Menu overview (COMAND) 119 Setting the temperature in the rear (AMG vehicles) 415
Pause function (COMAND) 121 passenger compartment 478 Manual shift program mode
Stop function (COMAND) 121 Switching cooling on or off (AMG vehicles) 413
Auto-dimming, Rear view mirrors 363 (COMAND) 254 Program mode selector switch 409
Automatic climate control 469 Automatic headlamp mode 282, 372 Shifting procedure 402
Adjusting air distribution Automatic lighting control, Interior Starting the engine 389
(COMAND) 253 lighting 378 Steering wheel gearshift control 411
Adjusting air flow from air vents Automatic locking when driving 342 Transmission fluid 546
(COMAND) 256 Automatic shift program 409 Transmission positions 403
Adjusting air volume (COMAND) 253
Adjusting the footwell temperature
(COMAND) 255
Air recirculation mode 474
736
Index
B Brake assist system (BAS Plus) 69 C

Backup lamps Brake assist system (BAS) 68 California retail buyers and lessees,
Replacing bulbs 679 Brake fluid 540, 725, 728 important notice for 15
Bar 576 Brake lamp bulbs 679 Can holder see Cup holder
BAS 68 Brake lamp, high mounted 679 Capacities and recommended
Batteries, SmartKey Brake pads fuel/lubricants 724
Checking battery condition 340 Message in display 632 Cargo area see Trunk
Replacing 676 Brake warning lamp 29 Cargo tie-down hooks 500
Batteries, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* Brakes 528 Carpets, Cleaning and care of 594
Checking battery condition 340 High-performance brake system Catalytic converter 536
Replacing 676 (AMG vehicles only) 529 CD
Batteries, vehicle 692 Warning lamp 29, 599 Ejecting (COMAND) 117
Charging 695 Break-in period 526 Loading (COMAND) 115
Discharged, Jump starting 697 Bulbs, replacing 678 Menu overview (COMAND) 119
Disconnecting 694 Additional turn signals 679 Playback options (COMAND) 123
For electrical consumers 692 Brake lamps 679 Selecting a medium (COMAND) 121
For starter 692 Fog lamps 679 Selecting a track (COMAND) 122
Message in display 644 Front lamps 679 CD (COMAND) 112
Reconnecting 696 High beam 679 Central locking
Removing 695 High mounted brake lamp 679 Automatic 342
Bead 576 License plate lamps 679 Locking/unlocking from inside 343
Beverage holder see Cup holder Low beam 679 Central locking/unlocking switches 343
Bluetooth® Parking and standing lamps 679 Certification label 712
Settings (COMAND) 239 Rear fog lamp 679 Change of address or ownership 16
Turn signal lamps 679
737
Index
Children in the vehicle 57 Phone book* 147 Control system instrument cluster 264
Air bags 57 Radio, FM/AM 100 Multifunction display 264
Indicator lamp front passenger front Selecting sound settings 97 Multifunction steering wheel 265
air bag off 50, 610 SMS messages 155 Control system instrument cluster menus
Infant and child restraint systems 58 Surround sound 98 AMG 273
LATCH-type child seat anchors 62 Switching off/on the audio Assistance* 279
Override switch for rear passenger source 99 Audio 271
compartment 63 Switching on or off 85 Navi 269
Tether attachment points 61 Swiveling display 87 Service 280
Cigarette lighter 504 system settings 235 Settings 281
Cockpit 26 Telephone keypad* 88 Telephone* 276
COMAND Telephone menu* 132 Trip 268
Adjusting volume 96 Vehicle menu 242 Vehicle status message memory 280
Components 85 Voice Control* settings 237 Coolant 547
Controller 88 Combination switch 375 Adding 548
Display 86 Corner-illuminating lamps 376 Anticorrosion/antifreeze mixing ratio
Display illumination 87 High beam flasher 375 and quantity 730
Function buttons 86 Turn signals 393 Checking level 547
Main menus 96 Windshield wipers 381 Messages in display 645
Menu overview 90 Command list (Voice Control*) 315 Temperature 537
Navigation system 159 Address book commands 320 Temperature gauge 29, 417
Operating 90 Audio commands 322 Coolant level
Operating safety 84 General commands 315 Checking 547
Operating seats 259 Navigation commands 318 Corner-illuminating lamps 376
Telephone* commands 316 Courtesy lighting 380
738
Index
Cruise control 419 Department of Transportation see DOT DISTRONIC Plus* 424
Activating 420 Destination entry (COMAND) 172 Activated 429
Canceling 421 Destination memory (COMAND) 217 Activating 430
Driving downhill 421 Difficulties Calling up settings 428
Driving uphill 421 While driving 393 Cleaning system sensor 589
Message in display 614 While starting 391 Deactivated 429
Setting current speed 420 Digital speedometer 269 Deactivating 435
Setting to last stored speed Additional speedometer 282 Deceleration 428
(“Resume” function) 423 Dimensions, Vehicle 723 Decreasing distance 437
Cup holder Direction of rotation, Tires 553 Decreasing time interval 436
In front seat armrest 498 Displays Displays in the multifunction
In rear seat armrest 498 Additional speedometer 282 display 427
Curb weight 576 Digital speedometer 269 Distance warning lamp 29, 604
DISTRONIC Plus* 427 Driving hints 437
D
Maintenance service indicator 582 Increasing distance 437
Date
Multifunction display 264 Increasing time interval 436
Setting (COMAND) 236
Vehicle status message see Intermittent signal tone 427
Daytime running lamp mode 373
Multifunction display messages Lever 430
Setting 281
Distance Menu 428
Deceleration
Decreasing in DISTRONIC Plus* 437 Messages in display 615
With DISTRONIC Plus* 428
Increasing in DISTRONIC Plus* 437 Sensor cover 589
Deep water see Standing water
Setting in DISTRONIC Plus* 436 Setting a higher speed 433
Defrosting 472
Distance to Empty (Range) 269 Setting a slower speed 434
Delayed switch-off
Distance warning lamp* 29, 604 Setting following distance 436
Exterior lighting (COMAND) 242
Interior lighting (COMAND) 248
739
Index
Setting the current speed 433 Driving 389 Driving systems 419
Setting to last stored speed Abroad 535 ABC* 442
(“Resume” function) 435 Hydroplaning 531 Airmatic 440
Warning and indicator lamps 427 In winter 533 Cruise control 419
Document holder 502 Instructions 389, 527 DISTRONIC Plus* 424
Door Problems 393 Driving safety systems 66
Control panel 34, 35, 38 Safety systems 66 Dynamic Rear View Monitor* 453
Entry lamps 379 Through standing water 534 Park Assist* 448
Inside door handle 341 With DISTRONIC Plus* 437 Parktronic system* 444
Locking 334, 339 Driving maneuver (COMAND) 207 Vehicle level control (ABC*) 443
Locking with Tele Aid 517 Driving off 530 Vehicle level control (Airmatic) 441
Messages in display 617, 648 Driving safety systems Driving tips 406
Opening from inside vehicle 341 4MATIC 75 Kickdown 406
Opening from outside 333, 338 ABS 66 DVD 112
Power closing assist 342 Adaptive Brake Lights (S 600 and USA Audio (COMAND) 112
Unlocking 333, 338 only) 68 Changer (COMAND) 116
Unlocking with Tele Aid 517 BAS 68 Changer (Voice Control*) 313
DOT 576 BAS Plus 69 Ejecting (COMAND) 117
Downhill driving EBP 71 Loading (COMAND) 115
Cruise control 421 Electronic traction system 72 Playback options (COMAND) 123
Drink holder see Cup holder ESP® 71 Selecting a medium (COMAND) 121
Drinking and driving 527 Selecting a track (COMAND) 122
Drive-dynamic multicontour seats*, front Setting the audio format
Adjusting (COMAND) 262 (COMAND) 123
Video (COMAND) 124
740
Index
Dynamic Rear View Monitor* 453 Electronic traction system 72 Emergency, In case of
Camera lens 590 Emergency call system 510 Battery, Jump starting 697
Cleaning camera lens 590 Emergency calls, Tele Aid 511 First aid kit 668
Parallel parking 458 Emergency engine shut-down 707 Flat tire 686
Reverse parking Emergency operation Fuses 704
(back-in parking) 456 (limp-home mode) 416 Roadside Assistance 16
Switching on 456 Emergency operations Roadside Assistance (Tele Aid) 513
View through the camera 454 Locking the vehicle 671 Towing the vehicle 700
Mechanically releasing the electronic Emission control 536
E
parking brake 673 Emission control information label 713
Easy-entry/exit feature 357
Releasing from inside 484 Emission control system warranties 14
COMAND menu 246
Remote door lock 517 Engine
EBP 71
Remote door unlock 517 Belt layout 714
Electrical fuses see Fuses
Tilt/sliding sunroof or tilt/sliding Cleaning 587
Electrical outlet see Power outlet
panel* 674 Compartment 541
Electrical system, Technical Data 722
Unlocking the trunk 672 Coolant 547, 726, 730
Electronic Brake Proportioning see EBP
Unlocking the vehicle 671 Malfunction indicator lamp 29, 602
Electronic parking brake 395
Emergency tensioning device see ETD Number 712, 713
Indicator lamp 29, 600
Oil 546, 724, 728
Mechanically releasing 673
Oils 543
Messages in display 633
Residual heat and ventilation 476
Warning lamp 29, 600
Starting 389
Electronic Stability Program see ESP®
Technical data 715
Turning off 397
741
Index
Engine coolant see Coolant ETD 55 Fluids

Engine oil 543 Safety guidelines 44 Automatic transmission fluid 724
Adding 546 Exterior lighting Brake fluid 725, 728
Additives 728 Delayed switch-off (COMAND) 242 Capacities 724
Checking level 543 Locator lighting (COMAND) 243 Engine coolant 547, 726, 730
Checking level (Dipstick) 545 Exterior rear view mirrors Engine oil 546, 724, 728
Checking level (Instrument cluster con- Adjusting 361 Power steering fluid 725
trol system) 543 Auto-dimming on the driver’s Windshield washer and headlamp
Consumption 543 side 363 cleaning system 727, 733
Dipstick 545 Fold in automatically when locking Fog lamps
Filler neck 545, 546 (COMAND) 244 Messages in display 656
Messages in display 544, 659 Lower mirror when reversing Replacing bulbs 679
Recommended engine oils and oil (COMAND) 244 Four wheel electronic traction system with
filters 724 Power folding 362 ESP® see 4MATIC
ESP® 4MATIC 75
F
Four wheel electronic traction system Front air bags 45
Favorite button 238
with ESP® 75 Front lamps
First aid kit 668
ESP® 71 Replacing bulbs 679, 680
Flat tire 686
Messages in display 628, 639 Front lamps see headlamps
Jacking up the vehicle 687
Warning lamp 29, 599, 604 Front passenger front air bag 45
Lowering the vehicle 690
Mounting the spare wheel 686
Front passenger front air bag off indicator
Preparing the vehicle 686
lamp 50, 610
Floormats* 506
742
Index
Fuel 539, 726, 729 Fuses 704 Glove box 494

Additives 730 Fuse box in engine compartment 705 Gloves, Vehicle tool kit 668
Capacity, Fuel tank 726 Fuse box in passenger GPS
Filling the tank 538 compartment 706 Reception (COMAND) 163
Fuel filler flap and cap 538 Fuse boxes in dashboard 706 Tele Aid 510
Fuel reserve warning lamp 29, 605 Fuse chart (vehicle tool kit) 668 Gross Axle Weight Rating see GAWR
Gauge 29 Fuse extractor (vehicle tool kit) 668 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating see GVWR
Premium unleaded gasoline 539, Replacing 704 Gross Vehicle Weight see GVW
726, 729 Spare fuses (vehicle tool kit) 668 GVW 576
Requirements, Octane rating 729 GVWR 577
G
Fuel cap
Garage door opener 518 H
Message in display 649
Gasoline see Fuel Hands-free microphone 33
Fuel consumption statistics
GAWR 576 Hard plastic trim items, cleaning 594
Since last reset 268
Gear range Hazard warning flasher 377
Since start 268
Automatic transmission 408 Head restraints 353
Fuel filler flap 538
Limiting 408 Adjustment 353
Locking/Unlocking 538
Shifting into optimal 413 Folding back and placing upright rear
Fuel tank
Gear selector lever 399 head restraints 354
Capacity 726
Gearshift pattern 399 Front seat 353
Filler flap 538
Messages in display 617, 622, 624, Luxury active head restraints
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
625, 667 (S 600 only) 55
Capacities 724
Position 402 Rear seat 354
Shifting procedure 402 Resetting activated luxury active head
Transmission position 403 restraints (S 600 only) 675
743
Index
Headlamp cleaning system 375, 548 High mounted brake lamp 679 Instrument cluster 28, 417
Washer fluid 727, 733 High-performance brake system Coolant temperature gauge 29, 417
Headlamps (AMG vehicles only) 529 Fuel gauge 29
Automatic control 372 Hood 541 Illumination 417, 463
Automatic headlamp mode 282 Message in display 649 Lamps 598
Cleaning lenses 589 Opening 541 Multifunction display 264
Cleaning system 548 Horn 27 Outside temperature indicator 418
Manual headlamp mode 282 Hydroplaning 531 Selecting the language
Messages in display 653 (COMAND) 238
I
Refilling washer fluid 549 Interior lighting 378
Identification labels 712
Headliner and shelf below rear window, Activating automatic control 378
Identification Number, Vehicle (VIN) 713
Cleaning and care of 594 Ambient lighting (COMAND) 247
Ignition 344, 346
Heated steering wheel* 360 Deactivating automatic control 378
Switching on 344
Height adjustments Delayed switch-off (COMAND) 248
Switching on, KEYLESS-GO* 346
Vehicle level (ABC*) 443 In the rear 379
Immobilizer 81
High beam Reading lamps in the front 379
Indicator lamps see Lamps, indicator and
Replacing bulbs 679 Reading lamps in the rear 379
warning
High beam flasher 375 Interior rear view mirror
Individualization
High beam headlamp Adjusting 361
Voice Control* 330
Indicator lamp 29 Auto-dimming 363
Infant and child restraint systems see Chil-
Interior storage spaces see Storage com-
dren in the vehicle
partments
Inflation pressure see Tires
Infrared reflecting windshield 524
Inside door handle 341
744
Index
J Key, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 335 L

Jack 669, 687 Battery check lamp 335, 339 Labels 712
Jacking up the vehicle 687 Closing, Trunk 479 Certification 712
Jump starting 697 Factory setting 338 Emission control information 713
Global locking and unlocking 338 Tire and Loading Information 554
K
Important notes on using Vacuum line routing diagram 713
Key, Mechanical 671
KEYLESS-GO* 336 Lamp bulbs, exterior 678
Loss of 340
Lock button 335 Lamps, exterior
Key, SmartKey 332
Locking and unlocking 335 Front 679
Battery check lamp 332, 334
Loss of 340 Light sensor 654
Factory setting 333
Messages in display 650 Rear 679
Global locking and unlocking 333
Opening button for trunk 335 Lamps, indicator and warning
Lock button 332
Panic button 65 ABS 29, 66, 598
Locking and unlocking 332
Remote control 335 Air bag Off 46
Loss of 340
Restoring to factory setting 340 Battery check lamp (SmartKey with
Selective setting 339 KEYLESS-GO* 339
Opening button for trunk 332
Starting the engine 390 Battery check lamp (SmartKey) 334
Panic button 65
Switching on ignition with 346 Brake warning lamp 29
Remote control 332
Turning off engine 398 Brakes 599
Restoring to factory setting 334
Unlock button 335 Combination low tire pressure* mal-
Selective setting 334
Kickdown 406 function telltale 29, 608
Starting the engine 390
Kilopascal 577 Distance warning lamp* 29, 604
Switching on ignition with 344
DISTRONIC Plus* 29, 427, 604
Turning off engine 397
Electronic parking brake 29, 600
Unlock button 332
Engine diagnostics 29, 602
Engine malfunction 29, 602
745
Index
ESP® 29, 599, 604 Light sensor Locking 394

Front passenger front air bag off 50, Message in display 654 Automatic central locking
610 Lighter see Cigarette lighter (COMAND) 245
Fuel reserve 605 Lighting 371 Vehicle in an emergency 672
High beam headlamp 29 Automatic headlamp mode 372 Locking knob 341
Maintenance service indicator 582 COMAND display illumination 87 Loss of
Park Assist* 29 Corner-illuminating lamps 376 Key, Mechanical 340
Parktronic* 29 Courtesy lighting 380 Key, SmartKey 340
Seat belt telltale 29, 605 Daytime running lamp mode 373 Key, SmartKey with
SRS 29, 607 Door entry lamps 379 KEYLESS-GO* 340
TPMS* malfunction telltale 29, 608 High beam flasher 375 Service and Warranty Information
Turn signals 29 Instrument cluster illumination 417, Booklet 711
Language (COMAND) 238 463 Low beam headlamps
LATCH-type child seat anchors see Interior 378 Replacing bulbs 679
Children in the vehicle Manual headlamp mode 372 Lowering
Lever Trunk 380 Vehicle 690
For automatic transmission Limp-home mode 416 Lubricants 724
(gear selector lever) 399 Loading see Vehicle loading Lumbar support (COMAND) 260
For cruise control 420 Locator lighting (COMAND) 243
For DISTRONIC Plus* 430 Lock button
License plate lamps Door handle (KEYLESS-GO*) 338,
Messages in display 655 388
Replacing bulbs 679 Key, SmartKey 332
Light alloy wheels, Cleaning 593 Key, SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* 335
746
Index
M Microphone, Hands-free 33 Multifunction display messages

Maintenance 15, 582 Minispare wheel 670, 686, 721 ABC* 626
Automatic Call (Tele Aid) 518 Mirrors ABS 628
Calling up service indicator Activating exterior rear view mirror Airmatic 642
display 583 parking position 364 Batteries, vehicle 644
Clearing service indicator Adjusting 361 Brake fluid 630
message 582 Auto-dimming for rear view Brake pads 632
Maintenance System 582 mirrors 363 Coolant 646
Resetting service indicator 584 Exterior rear view mirrors 361 Coolant level 645
Service indicator message 582 Interior rear view mirror 361 Cruise control 614
Service term exceeded 583 Mobile phone see Telephone* DISTRONIC Plus* 615
Maintenance System 582 Modifications and alterations, Doors 648
Manual headlamp mode 372 Operating safety 19 EBP (Electronic Brake
Manual shift program (AMG vehicles only) MON 539, 726 Proportioning) 631
Deactivating 415 MP3 Electronic parking brake 633
MAXCOOL Menu overview (COMAND) 119 Engine oil 543, 659
Maximum cooling 474 Operation (COMAND) 120 ESP® 628, 639
Maximum load rating, Tires 577 Playback options (COMAND) 123 Fog lamps 656
Maximum loaded vehicle weight 559, Selecting a folder (COMAND) 122 Front passenger front air bag 618
577 Selecting a medium (COMAND) 121 Fuel cap 649
Maximum tire inflation pressure 573, Selecting a track (COMAND) 122 Gear selector lever 617, 622, 624,
577 MP3 (COMAND) 112 625, 667
Maximum tire load rating 573 Multicontour rear seats* 356 Headlamps 653
Memory function 365 Multicontour seats*, front Hood 649
Messages in display see Adjusting (COMAND) 260 Key, SmartKey 651
Multifunction display messages Multifunction display 264 Key, SmartKey with
747
Index
KEYLESS-GO* 650 N Night View Assist* 461

Lamps, exterior 653 Navigation system Cleaning the windshield in front of the
License plate lamps 655 Menu overview (COMAND) 165 camera 591
Light sensor 654 Navigation system (COMAND) 159 Dirty or fogged-up windshield 463
Night View Assist* 658 Basic settings 168 Image on multifunction display 462
Park Assist* 622 Destination entry 172 Malfunction 465
Parking lamps 656 Destination memory 217 Messages in display 658
PRE-SAFE® 623, 629 Detour function (COMAND) 216 Removing condensation 464
Restraint systems 662 Driving maneuver 207 Switching on or off 462
Side marker lamps 657 Hiding/showing the menu Normal occupant weight 577
SRS 662 system 166 Number, Vehicle Identification (VIN) 713
Tail lamps 657 Last destinations 223
O
Tele Aid 664 Map display 166
Occupant Classification System see OCS
Trunk 667 Operation 166
Occupant distribution 577
Windshield washer fluid 667 POI entry 196
Occupant safety 40
Multifunction steering wheel 265 Real-time traffic 204
Air bags 42
Route guidance 207
Children and air bags 57
Navigation system (Instrument cluster
Children in the vehicle 57
control system) 269
Fastening the seat belt 368
Driving maneuver 270
Front passenger front air bag off indica-
Navigation system (Voice Control*) 296
tor lamp 50
Neutral gear position, Automatic
Infant and child restraint systems 58
transmission 399, 403
LATCH-type child seat anchors 62
New vehicle break-in 526
Seat belts 44, 368
748
Index
OCS 47 P Parking lamps

Self-test 51 Paintwork, Cleaning 586 Messages in display 656
Odometer 268 Panic alarm Parking position
Oil Audible alarm and flashing exterior Exterior rear view mirrors 364
Filler neck 546 lamps 65 Parktronic system* 444
Oil level see Engine oil Panic button 65 Parktronic*
One-touch gearshifting 411 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding Cleaning system sensors 589
Operating safety 19 panel* 489 Malfunctioning 448
Voice Control* 284 Opening/closing 490 System sensors 589
Ornamental moldings, Cleaning 588 Opening/closing in an Warning indicators 29, 446
Outside temperature indicator 29, 418 emergency 674 Parts service 710
Overdue maintenance service 583 Synchronizing 492 PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp see
Overhead control panel 33 Panorama roof with tilt/sliding panel* Front passenger front air bag off indica-
Override switch 63 Cleaning 593 tor lamp
Parcel net in front passenger Passenger compartment 535
footwell 496 Passenger safety see Occupant safety
Park Assist* 448 PCMCIA card
Cleaning system sensors 590 Ejecting (COMAND) 118
Messages in display 622 Loading (COMAND) 117
System sensors 590 Pedals 527
Warning indicators 29, 451 Plastic parts, cleaning 593
Parking 394, 530 POIs 196
Parking and standing lamps Poly-V-belt drive 714
Replacing bulbs 679 Layout 714
Potential problems associated with under-
inflated and overinflated tires 567
749
Index
Power assistance 527 Practical hints 612, 668 R

Power closing assist for doors and trunk Premium unleaded gasoline 539, 726, RACETIMER see Control system instru-
lid 342 729 ment cluster menus, AMG
Power folding exterior rear view PRE-SAFE® 56 Radio
mirrors 362 Message in display 623 FM/AM operation (COMAND) 100
Power outlet 506 Messages in display 629 Saving stations, FM/AM
Power tilt/sliding sunroof 486 PRE-SAFE® Brake* (COMAND) 103
Emergency operations 674 Intermittent signal tone 79 Selecting satellite radio* channel
Opening/closing 486 Preventive occupant safety see PRE-SAFE® (Instrument cluster control
Opening/closing in an Problems system) 271
emergency 674 While driving 393 Selecting stations 271
Synchronizing 488 With vehicle 20 Submenu overview, FM/AM
Power washer 586 Product information 13 (COMAND) 100
Power windows 383 Production options weight 577 Switching wavebands, FM/AM
Blocking of rear window operation 63 Program mode see Automatic transmis- (COMAND) 101
Cleaning 592 sion, Automatic shift program Tuning in stations/channels 101
Opening/closing 383 Program mode selector switch Voice Control* 309
Automatic shift program 409 Radio transmitters, control and
Proper use of the vehicle 19 operation 535
PSI 577 Range (distance to empty) 269
Push-start see Tow-start Reading lamps in the front 379
Reading lamps in the rear 379
Real-time traffic (COMAND) 204
Rear door window
Blocking operation 63
750
Index
Rear fog lamp Remote Roadside Assistance 16

Replacing bulbs 679 Door lock with Tele Aid 517 Tele Aid 514
Rear lamps see Tail lamps Door unlock with Tele Aid 517 RON 539, 726
Rear seats Trunk opening/closing* switch 479 Roof rack* 493
Adjustment 347 Remote control, SmartKey 332 Route guidance (COMAND) 207
Folding back and placing upright rear Remote control, SmartKey with Route guidance (Instrument cluster control
head restraints 354 KEYLESS-GO* 335 system) 269
Head restraints 353 Replacing Rubber parts, cleaning 593
Heating* 351 Bulbs 678 Run Flat Indicator (Canada only) 565
Multicontour* 356 Front lamp bulbs 680
Setting front passenger seat position Rear lamp bulbs 679
from rear 350 Reporting safety defects 21
Ventilation* 352 Reset (COMAND) 241
Rear view mirrors see Mirrors Residual engine heat and ventilation 476
Rear window defroster 473 Rest tool
Activating 473 Depository 675
Deactivating 473 Restraint systems
Recommended inflation pressure 577 Messages in display 662
Recovery services, Stolen vehicle See Children in the vehicle
(Tele Aid) 518 See SRS
Refrigerant, Air conditioning 727, 728 Reverse gear position, Automatic
Refueling 538 transmission 399, 403
Regular checks 540 Rims 577
And Tires 718
Tires and wheels 550
751
Index
S Seat belts 52 Operating via COMAND 259

S 63 AMG Children in the vehicle 57 Setting front passenger seat position
Manual shift program mode 413 Cleaning 594 from rear 350
S 65 AMG Fastening 52, 368 Ventilation* 352
Manual shift program mode 413 Force limiter 55 Securing cargo
Safety Messages in display 662 Cargo tie-down hooks 500
Driving safety systems 66 Proper use of 53, 370 Selector lever
Occupant 40 Safety guidelines 44 Lock 389
Reporting defects 21 Telltale 29, 54, 605 Selector lever see Gear selector lever
Safety belts see Seat belts Seating capacity 554 Self-test
Satellite radio* Seats 347 OCS 51
Calling SIRIUS Service Center adjusting front passenger seat from Tele Aid 511
(COMAND) 111 driver’s seat 350 Service and warranty information 14
Channel update (COMAND) 111 Adjustment 347 Service intervals see Maintenance service
Operation (COMAND) 105 Drive-dynamic multicontour* in the indicator
Selecting channel (Instrument cluster front, Adjusting (COMAND) 262 Service life, Tires 551
control system) 271 Easy entry/exit feature 357 Service see Maintenance
Selecting program category Folding back and placing upright rear Service system see Maintenance System
(COMAND) 108 head restraints 354 Service, Parts 710
Showing program info Head restraints 353
(COMAND) 111 Heating* 351
Submenu overview (COMAND) 105 Lumbar support (COMAND) 260
Tuning in channels Memory function 365
(COMAND) 108, 110 Multicontour* in the front, Adjusting
Voice Control* 310 (COMAND) 260
752
Index
Setting Settings Speed

Cruise control 420 Calling up DISTRONIC Plus* 428 Setting current 420
DISTRONIC Plus* time interval 436 Control system instrument cluster Setting to last stored speed in
Following distance in DISTRONIC menus 281 DISTRONIC Plus*
Plus* 436 Daytime running lamp mode 281 (“Resume” function) 435
Higher speed in cruise control 422 Resetting trip odometer 269 Speed settings
Higher speed in DISTRONIC Shelf below rear window, Cruise control 422, 423
Plus* 433 Cleaning and care of 594 DISTRONIC Plus* 433, 434
Lower speed in cruise control 423 Shift program mode, To last stored speed (“Resume” func-
Lower speed in DISTRONIC Automatic transmission 409 tion) in Cruise control 423
Plus* 434 Shifting, Automatic transmission 399 SRS 53
Slower speed in cruise control 423 Side impact air bags 46 Indicator lamp 29, 607
Slower speed in DISTRONIC Side marker lamps Messages in display 662
Plus* 434 Cleaning lenses 589 Standing water, Driving through 534
Speed in DISTRONIC Plus* 433 Messages in display 657 Starter battery 694
Suspension tuning (ABC*) 442 Side windows see Power windows Starter switch 344
Temperature (interior) 472 Sidewall 577 Positions 344
Temperature (rear passenger SIRIUS satellite radio* see Satellite radio* Starting difficulties, Engine 391
compartment) 478 SmartKey see Key, SmartKey Starting, Engine 389
To last stored speed (“Resume” func- SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* see Key, Steering column 359
tion) in cruise control 423 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* Steering wheel
To last stored speed in DISTRONIC SMS messages 155 Adjustment 359
Plus* (“Resume” function) 435 Snow chains 581 Cleaning 594
Vehicle level control (ABC*) 443 Spare wheel 686, 721 Easy entry/exit feature 357
Setting current speed 420 Mounting 686 Heated steering wheel* 360
Power steering fluid 725
753
Index
Steering wheel gearshift control Suspension tuning T

Automatic transmission 411 Setting (ABC*) 442 Tachometer 418
Stolen Vehicle Recovery services 518 Setting (Airmatic) 440 Overspeed range 418
Storage compartments 494 Symbols used in this operator’s Tail lamps
Cup holder 498 manual 18 Cleaning lenses 589
Front armrest 495 System settings (COMAND) Messages in display 657
Parcel net 496 Bluetooth® settings 239 Tar stains 586
Rear armrest 496 Display 235 Tele Aid 510
Ruffled storage pockets 498 Favorite button 238 Automatic Maintenance Call 518
Storage compartment in front Menu overview 235 Call priority 516
armrest 495 Reset 241 Emergency calls 511
Storage tray/telephone* compartment Setting the system language 238 Hands-free microphone 33
in front armrest 495 Time settings 235 Information 515
Under the front seats 495 Voice Control* settings Information button 513
Storing tires 552 (COMAND) 237 Initiating an emergency call
Summer opening feature 385 manually 513
Sun visors 502 Messages in display 664
Sunroof see Power tilt/sliding sunroof Remote door lock 517
Sunshades Remote door unlock 517
Extending or retracting rear window Roadside Assistance 514
sunshade (COMAND) 249 Roadside Assistance button 513
Extending/retracting rear window SOS button 513
sunshade 503 Stolen Vehicle Recovery
Opening or closing rear side window services 518
sunshades 385 System self-check 511
754
Index
Telephone cradle PIN2 (COMAND) 137 Tire and Loading Information

Changing 509 PUK / PUK2 (COMAND) 137 Placard 554
Telephone* 507 Redialing (COMAND) 143 Tire Identification Number see TIN
“911” emergency call Redialing (Instrument cluster control Tires 550
(COMAND) 135 system) 278 Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring
Accepting/ending a call Removing from cradle 509 System (Advanced TPMS)* 561
(COMAND) 142 Single call connection And Rims 718
Answering/ending a call (Instrument (COMAND) 145 And Wheels 550
cluster control system) 279 Speed dialing (COMAND) 144 Care and maintenance 551
Call lists (COMAND) 140 Submenu overview (COMAND) 138 Chains 581
Changing mobile phone cradle 509 Switching on/off (COMAND) 134 Checking inflation pressure electroni-
Compartment 495 Transferring a call (COMAND) 146 cally with Advanced Tire Pressure
Dialing (Instrument cluster control Unlock code (COMAND) 137 Monitoring System
system) 277 Voice Control* 289 (Advanced TPMS)* 561
Entering the telephone number Temperature Checking inflation pressure electroni-
(COMAND) 143 Outside temperature indicator 29 cally with Run Flat Indicator
Hands-free microphone 33 Setting interior temperature (Canada only) 565
Inserting in cradle 508 (COMAND) 252 Cleaning 552
Installing a different mobile phone Tires 559 Cold tire inflation pressure 576
cradle 510 Tie-down hooks, Trunk 500 Combination low tire pressure* mal-
Operation 276 Tightening torque, Wheel bolts 691 function telltale 29, 608
Operation (COMAND) 132 Tilt/sliding sunroof see Power tilt/sliding Direction of rotation 553
Phone book (COMAND) 147 sunroof Driving instructions 531
Phone book (Instrument cluster control Time Important notes on tire inflation
system) 277 Setting (COMAND) 235 pressure 559
PIN (COMAND) 136 TIN 578 Inflation pressure 558
755
Index
Information placard 554 Wear pattern 579 Message in display 667

Inspection 551 Winter 580 Opening from inside 479
Load rating 569, 578 Tools 668 Opening from outside 479
Load rating, Maximum 573, 577 Top tether Opening-height restriction
Minispare wheel 670 Children in the vehicle 61 (COMAND) 249
Ply composition and material Towing eye bolt (vehicle tool kit) 668, Power closing assist for trunk lid 342
used 578 703 Tie-down hooks 500
Problems under-/overinflation 558 Towing the vehicle 700 Unlocking in an emergency 671
Retreads 550 Tow-start 697, 700 Valet locking 484
Rotating 578 Traction 532, 574, 578 Tumbler holder see Cup holder
Run Flat Indicator (Canada only) 565 Transmission see Automatic transmission Turn signal lamps
Service life 551 Traveling abroad 535 Cleaning lenses 589
Sizes 718 Tread 578 Replacing bulbs 679
Snow 580 Tread depth, Tires 552 Turn signals 393
Spare wheel 721 Tread depth, Winter tires 580 Additional in mirrors 679
Speed rating 532, 570, 578 Treadwear indicators 578 Front bulbs 679
Storing 552 Trip odometer 268 Indicator lamp 29
Temperature 559, 575 Resetting 269 Rear bulbs 679
Terminology 576 Troubleshooting
Total load limit 578 Voice Control* 327
TPMS* malfunction telltale 29, 608 Trunk
Traction 532, 578 Closing 479, 671
Tread depth 552 Closing trunk from inside 479
Tread depth, Winter 580 Closing trunk from outside 479
Treadwear indicators 578 Emergency release 484
Vehicle maximum load on 578 Lighting 380
756
Index
U Service battery 692 Video (COMAND) 124

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Towing 700 Video DVD
Standards 578 Washing 585, 587 Menu 129
Uphill driving Weights 723 Operating (COMAND) 124
Cruise control 421 Vehicle data recording 22 operating (Control system) 272
Upholstery Vehicle jack 669, 687 Pause/Play 128
Cleaning 595 Vehicle level Screen settings 128
Useful features 502 Changing (ABC*) 443 Selecting scene/chapter 128
Changing (Airmatic) 441 Setting language 131
V
Setting (ABC*) 443 Subemu overview 126
Valet locking 484
Setting (Airmatic) 441 Submenu overview 126
Vanity mirrors
Setting, Automatic (ABC*) 443 Switching to mode 126
In the sun visor 502
Setting, Automatic (Airmatic) 441 Video game 131
Vehicle
Setting, Manual (ABC*) 443 VIN 713
Batteries 692
Setting, Manual (Airmatic) 441 Voice Control*
Breaking-in period 526
Vehicle level control (Airmatic) 441 Address book 306
Care 585
Vehicle loading 493, 553 Command list 315
Dimensions 723
Cargo tie-down hooks 500 DVD changer 313
Individual settings, control system in
Instructions 493 Individualization 330
instrument cluster 281
Load limit 554 Individualization (COMAND) 237
Locking/unlocking 332, 335
Roof rack* 493 Introduction 285
Locking/unlocking in an
Terminology 576 Navigation 296
emergency 671
Vehicle maximum load on the tire 578 Operating safety 284
Lowering 690
Vehicle Recovery services, Stolen (Tele Operation via the multifunction steer-
Menu (COMAND) 242
Aid) 518 ing wheel 287
Vehicle tool kit 668 Radio 309
757
Index
Switching help window on or off Wheels Windshield wipers 381

(COMAND) 237 Change 686 Cleaning wiper blades 592
Telephone 289 Collapsible wheel chock 670 Replacing wiper blades 684
Troubleshooting 327 Minispare wheel 670 Single wipe 382
Removing 689 Winter driving 580
W
Rims and Tires 718 Snow chains 581
Warning indicators
Sizes 718 Tires 580
Park Assist* 451
Spare wheel 721 Winter driving instructions 533
Parktronic* 446
Tightening torque 691 Winter tires 580
Warning sounds
Tires and wheels 550 Wood trims, Cleaning 595
DISTRONIC Plus* 427
Window curtain air bags 46 Wrench, wheel (vehicle tool kit) 668
Drivers seat belts 54
Windows see Power windows
Electronic parking brake 397 X
Windshield
PRE-SAFE® Brake* 79 Xenon headlamp see Headlamps
Cleaning 592
Seat belt telltale 606
Cleaning wiper blades 592
Warranty coverage 711
Infrared reflecting 524
Washing the vehicle 585
Windshield washer fluid 727, 733
Wear pattern, Tires 579
Mixing ratio 733
Weights, Vehicle 723
Refilling 548
Wiping with 382
758
Service and Literature
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has trained technicians and Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts to service your vehicle properly.
For expert advice and quality service, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com or www.mercedes-benz.ca.
Warning! G
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use of
incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury.
If you have any questions about carrying out any type of service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
We reserve the right to make changes in design and equipment.

Therefore, information, illustrations and descriptions in this Operator’s Manual might differ from your vehicle.
Reprinting, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing.
Press time March 8, 2007
GSP/TID
Printed in U.S.A

w221 2008 s550 S5504matic s600 S63amg S65amg

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

w221 2008 s550 S5504matic s600 S63amg S65amg

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sommer\ Corporate\ Media\ AG

Bild in der Größe

Override switch for rear passenger

Channel update............................ 111 Notes about handling DVDs ......... 125

Steering wheel................................... 359 Door entry lamps ......................... 379

Reporting safety defects

Information regarding electronic

(Including notice pursuant to California Code § 9951)

Item Page Item Page Item Page

앫 Opening and closing 332

Item Page Item Page Item Page

Item Page Item Page Item Page

Item Page Item Page Item Page

Upper part Item Page Item Page

6 Front defroster 472 앫 Lighter 504

4 Front interior lighting on/off 378 a Rear view mirror 361

5 Power tilt/sliding sunroof 486 b Garage door opener 518

Item Page Item Page

3 Central locking switch 341 Mirror folding function 362

Item Page Item Page Item Page

If it is necessary to modify an air bag system

Safety guidelines for the seat belt,

Self-test Occupant Classification For more information, see the “Practical

Seat belts For more information, see “Fastening the

컄컄 앫 and if the vehicle speed once exceeds

Warning! G For information on head restraint adjust-

Infant and child restraint systems

Installation of infant and child restraint

Children too big for a toddler restraint must

i Canada only: 왘 Insert the SmartKey or the SmartKey

This section contains information about ABS

Adaptive Brake Lights BAS

BAS Plus* i USA only:

i DISTRONIC Plus* and cruise control are Electronic traction system

! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an ex-

i USA only: When travelling in Canada in a vehicle not

When the distance to the forward vehicle is

Warning! G Warning! G Warning! G

COMAND shortcut buttons Function Page COMAND display

Instrument cluster multifunction

1 Telephone keypad 1 COMAND controller

Operating COMAND controller

Symbol How to use the COMAND controller Function

Menu overview Each main function has a main menu. Each

Navi Page Audio Page Telephone* Page

CD 112 Telephone OFF* 134

Video DVD (USA only)1 Page Vehicle Page

Calling up the main menu Vertical menus Horizontal menus

왘 Confirming selection: Press n.

Entering characters Deleting individual characters Accepting first entry

Deleting entire words or numbers Selecting list item

Exiting character entry

왘 Selecting “Radio”: Slide mr or

Main menus of COMAND Switching off navigation announce- Adjusting volume

Volume of navigation announcements Selecting sound settings Adjusting treble or bass

Adjusting volume for telephone calls

Only use the COMAND when road and traffic

Before your journey, please familiarize your-

i The components and operating principles of

Radio Presets Channel FM or AM or WB Sound

Switching to radio mode Switching wavebands

Before your journey, please familiarize your-

i The components and operating principles of